TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS , OF THE © ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED), VOL. LIII. [With Eveven Piates, And SEVENTY-EIGHT FIGURES IN THE TExtT.] EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G:S. Assistep By ARTHUR M. LEA, F.E.S. [Each Author is responsible for the soundness of the opinions given, and for the accuracy of the statements made in his paper.} PRICE, TWENTY-THREE SHILLINGS. Adelaide: PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE, ; DECEMBER 24, 1929. - Printep py GILLINGHAM & Co. Lrmirep, 106 anp 108, Currie Street, ADELAIDE, SourH AUSTRALIA, Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from the United States of America can be.forwarded through the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED). VOL. LIII. [Wits Eveven Priates, AnD SEVENTY-EIGHT FiGuRES IN THE TEXxT.] EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G:S. Assistep By ARTHUR M. LEA, F.E.S. [Each Author is responsible for the soundness of the opinions given, and for the accuracy of the statements made in his paper.] PRICE, TWENTY-THREE SHILLINGS. Adelaide: PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE, DECEMBER. 24, 1929. Printep By GILLINGHAM & Co. Limitep, 106 ann 108, Currie STREET, ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from the United States of America can be forwarded through the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED). Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY BRIG.-GENERAL SIR A. G. A, HORE-RUTHVEN, V.C.,, K.C.M.G., C.B., D.S.O. OFFICERS FOR 1929-30. President: L. KEITH WARD, B.A., B.E., D.Sc. Vice-Presidents: PROFESSOR T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A.,, D.Sc. CHARLES A. E. FENNER, D.Sc., Representative Governor. Hon. Editor: PROF. WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G.S. Hon. Treasurer: Hon. Secretary: B. S. ROACH. R. H. PULLEINE, M.B., Ch.M. Members of Council: J. F. BAILEY. ARTHUR M. LEA, F.ES. SIR JOSEPH C. VERCO, M.D,, F.R.CS. T. D. CAMPBELL, D.D.Sc. J. M. BLACK. PROF. J. A. PRESCOTT, M.Sc, A.LC. Hon. Auditors: W. C. HACKETT. O. GLASTONBURY. oy nae ete ee CONTENTS. Davin, Pror. Sir T. W. E.: Further Notes on the Newly-Discovered Fossils in the Adelaide Series (Lipalian or Proterozoic), South Australia. Plate i. CuHapMan, F.: Some Fossil Remains from the Adelaide Series of South isso pe Plate it. Prescott, Pror. J. A.: The Técemiad — of South ceicatis ~~ Secnit, R. W.: Geological Notes from the Hundred of Adams, Flinders Supae iS Mortensen, T.: The Australian Species of Cidarids, particularly of the Genus Phylla- canthus, and their Distribution along the Coasts of Australia. ceeaiueh saemiets by Prof. Ce Harvey Johnston). Plate iti. .. Hirst, S.: On the Larval Trombidiid Mite (Epeasiosln hirsti rE Seabee that causes the “Serub Itch” of Northern Queensland and the Coorong, South Australia Howcuin, Pror. W.: On the Probable Occurrence of the Sturtian Tillite near Nairne aaa Mount Barker Hate, H. M.: Crustacea front ‘pitied’ Ciadinee Asif agi Queensland The Isopoda and Stomatopoda Rarusun, M. J.: A New Xanthid ‘Crab. ees. South pores, ( Coelesi ated = H. M. Hale.) Plate iv. : ms Ropertson, Pror. T. Brarisrorp: eee of PE deicen Dh en cow in the Neighbourhood of the Estuary of the River Murray Lucas. A. H. S.: A Census of the Marine aes of South ‘Avgeeeatia Ccotapnmaances by Prof. J. B. Cleland) = oe = Notes oN THE Fauna or Dirk Hae a oo BG tito — No. 1. Introduction, by E. Ashby No. 2. Aves, by E. Ashby ; No. 3. Polyplacophora, by E. Ashby .. No. 4. Crustacea, by H. M. Hale. Plate v. .. Jounston, Pror. T. Harvey: Remarks on the nebie g of certain Tristomatid Tretiiay tode Genera .. Fenner, Dr. C.: A Rnciheahica Tngnise into the Giowtty Distribation, its aeiekcedans of Population i in South Australia, 1836-1927 JounstTon, Pror. T. Harvey, and E. W. Decanp: Australian Aneel No. 1 Jounston, Pror. T. Harvey, and E. W. Derann: Australian Acanthocephala, No. 2. Howcuin, Pror. W.: Notes on the Geology of the Great Pyap Bend (Loxton), River Murray Basin and Remarks on the ar Suey. of the River eee Plates vi. to viii. Prescott, Pror. J. A., and C. S. ae The Voleanic Soil of Ment inktee Saath Australia. Plate ix. Lea, A. M.: Notes on some mesitaaiees Coleoptera, with Descriptions of ee Species ‘Part VIL. Mowuntrorp, C. P.: A Unigue Example of RIN Rack Carving at pee North. Plate x. ic ae ALDERMAN, A. R.: Magmatic Differentiation at visite! South usiean ie Guastonpury, J. O., and F. J. Semmens: The Crystal Forms of ee id Stolzite. (Communicated by C. T. Madigan) = : Buack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia. a: 27 Mourton, D.: An ee New ats from Australia. (Communicated by A. M. Lea.) Plate xi. Mitton, R. G.: The Gaeta: Giiton of stanes - Wistons Actas = Salts upon a Clean Mercury Surface. (Communicated by R. S. Burdon) Turner, Dr. A. J.: New Australian Lepidoptera .. Grrautt, A. A.: Notes on, and Descriptions of, Chaleid Wass in e South meget Museum. (Communicated by A. M. Lea) F ae : : Exrston, A H.: Australian Coleoptera. Part VI. = a = = a Corgunoun, T. T.: Polarity in Casuarina paludosa. (Communicated by J. G. Wood) .. Page 56 146 155 167 196 203 245 249 258 261 264 267 297 309 347 353 CONTENTS—Continued. Page Woop, J. G.: Floristics and Ecology of the Mallee ae a oe “a as ioe lo) ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS rer ~ rs ~~ ae fe = ES Ee .. 379 Sir JosepH VeERco MEDAL fs a ne = 2 Se a ce a =. oe ANNUAL REPORT oe + ae mS Ee +9 r a “: is .. 390 Osrruary Notice .. Ee ZB arbre: bye Be a af ws i. 2 391 BALANCE SHEETS e i- ah es 1G ae +k ee a ay eee 393 ENDOWMENT AND Screntiric ResearcH Funp .. ty if; He aa § w. 895 Donations To LIBRARY oe re ae ae ae ee mi = oe .. 896 List oF Fettows ey = A 5 #2 He ae #3 a m5 .. 402 SUGGESTIONS FOR THE GUIDANCE OF AUTHORS = Se oe ea ne = 405, 406 APPENDIX— Field Naturalists’ Section: Annual Report, ete. ee ee ee < .. 407 Shell Collectors’ Committee a he = 6 Fr if a .. 409 Microscope Committee .. ‘3: 7, fy x & fe bie .. 409 InpEx 8 a ae aA ies ea $3 ae nid _ “se .. 4ll Transactions of The Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated) VOL. LIII. FURTHER NOTES ON THE NEWLY-DISCOVERED FOSSILS IN THE ADELAIDE SERIES (LIPALIAN OR PROTEROZOIC), SOUTH AUSTRALIA. By Prorressor T. W. Epcewortu Davin, K.B.E., C.M.G., F.R.S., etc. [Read April 11, 1929.] Pirate I. In view of the fact that so much time was needed in order to develop out the remains of the Eurypterids “ from the hard siliceous limestones and quartzites of the Lipalian (or Pre-Cambrian) rocks of the Adelaide Series that the printing of the plates had to be proceeded with before some of the fossils had been fully traced out, the author is adding this note and Plate I., together with a brief description. The author estimates that in a thickness of five feet of the Blue Metal Limestone of the Adelaide Series, fragments of Arachnids (mostly small pieces) are present at the rate of over 100 per square foot. Some of these Arachnids in the Adelaide Series may have been over a foot in length. It is quite possible, in his opinion, that in Lipalian time .(Infra-Cambrian-pre-trilobite time— or late Proterozoic time) the seas probably of the whole world were dominated by the important group of the Arachnids, from which, in the opinion of some eminent zoologists, vertebrate life was eventually evolved. The climatological significance of this great Arachnid belt cannot be too strongly emphasised, At present the existing Merostomes range from the tropics to warm temperate lati- tudes. Professor Harvey Johnston and Miss Deland inform me that in the Pacific, the Limuloids, or King Crabs, are met with from the Moluccas up to China and Southern Japan, as well as India; and that in the Atlantic, where they are known as the Horse Crabs, they extend from Yucatan to the coast of Maine. Dr. R. Pulleine has stressed to me the enormous abundance of these animals on 2 thousands of years, certainly long enough for the forms found in the Beaumont Quarry Limestone above to have, apparently, become differentiated from the types in the quartzites which seem to underlie the Upper Torrens Limestone. So far no trace has been observed by the author (but there has not been time for careful, systematic search) of the Merostomcs in the 1,500 io 2,000 feet of strata which separate the top of the Blue Metal Limestone of Beaumont and the Devil’s Elbow, near Glen Osmond, from the base of Professor Howchin’s Sturtian Tillite. At the same time, it should be mentioned that Mr. C. T. Madigan has shown the author a remarkable cast of, possibly, a large limb occurring in the “Mitcham Quartzite” at the IXL Quarry, at Mitcham. It would seem, then, that as the climate changed. from sub-tropical or warm-temperate to the polar climate of Ilowchin’s Sturtian Tillite, these old arthropods were forced to migrate into warmer latitudes, not to reappear again in Australia, as far as we know, until Silurian time. In view of the fact that all the fossils hitherto collected come from more or less geologically disturbed areas around Adelaide, and that in the Flinders Ranges to the north the strata are much less disturbed and less altered, it may. reasonably be expected that in the near future, more or less complete specimens will be discovered with, one hopes, at least some of the original chitin preserved. The author, in conclusion, wishes to express his heartiest gratitude to the Council and Fellows of the Royal Society of South Australia, particularly for the ‘nitial confidence which they showed in his judgment when accepting and publish- ing his earlier paper. This was based on what several palaeontologists and zoologists considered to be extremely slender ‘and insufficient evidence, evidence nevertheless sufficient, when studied in detail over considerable areas, to convince the author that his deductions were justified. Subsequent explorations have confirmed the original views even beyond his most sanguine expectations. It is well known that the dream of the palaeonto- logists of today, who would seek to trace back the evolution of the higher forms of life upon the earth, in pre-Trilobite days, is to discover Arachnids of Pre- Cambrian age, and, through them, the common ancestor from which scorpions and possibly insects, together with the Merostomes, were descended—animals which modern zoologists like Versluys and Demoll consider to have been probably land animals. It may be many years before this dream is fully realized. For that con- summation will be needed the devoted and patient services of many workers. Surely the rocks of the Adelaide Series offer great possibilities! It is the author’s pious wish that no time will now be lost by the geological workers of South Aus- tralia in exploiting, in the interest of world science, the priceless treasures in the Adelaide hills and Flinders Ranges. They are hard to win, but to win the beautiful is ever hard! Description of Frcures oN PLATE I. The figures are all of natural size except 13A, which is X 3; 13B, which is X 12; 29, which is X $; and 26, which is considerably reduced. 1. Cephalothorax (?) showing sub-central eyes (?) and detached swim- ming (?) plate. Also trace of anteriorly situated pair of appendages. Quartzite underlying Upper Torrens Limestone, Tea-Tree Gully, near Adelaide. 2. Ventral view of cephalothorax (?), showing eyes, and dismembered por- tions of appendages. Blue Metal Limestone, Devil’s Elbow, near Glen Osmond, Adelaide. 3 Ventral view of small cephalothorax (?) belonging to Stylonurus type of Eurypterid, or to a nepionic stage of some other genus. Blue Metal Limestone, Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont, Adelaide. 3 4. Apparently two rows of teeth and part of chela of the antenna of a possible Pierygotus from above quarries. 5. An endognath, possibly also an antenna. The lower end shows the notch for the pivoting arrangement of the endognath. This belongs to Beaumontella eckersleyi, spec. nov., Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont. 6. A remarkably well preserved appendage, probably an endognath, is shown on the right. Faint traces of possible squamiform sculpture are visible. The knob-shaped object next on the left may represent the bud of a slender endognath, or possibly the concretionary residue from a dissolved endognath. The process next on the left appears to be part of a slender endognath. Part of Beaumontella eckersleyi, Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont. 7. Somewhat similar appendages from the quartzite below the Upper Torrens Limestone, Tea-Tree Gully. 8. Apparently an endognath from the Blue Metal Limestone, at the Devil’s Elbow. 9. A pair of the swimming legs (?) of Beaumontella eckersleyi showing the characteristic large spines on the posterior edge of the coxa, and a smaller spine on the outer posterior angle of the coxa, both spines serving to protect the joint between the coxa and the basos. The paddle was detached from this limb. It has been tentatively joined on at the ? ? of the figure. Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont. 10. A pair of what may have been swimming feet (ectognaths), but it is not clear that they terminated in swimming plates, and they may have been endognaths. Blue Metal Limestone, Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont. 11. Portion of large and massive coxa, showing manducatory denticles. The Arachnid (?) to which this belonged was probably at least half a metre in length. Black chert replacing the Upper Torrens Limestone, Tea-Tree Gully, near Adelaide. 12. Post-oral lip-plate (metastoma) (?). From quartzite underlying Upper Torrens Limestone, Tea-Tree Gully. 13. Inner ends of ectognaths, and metastoma (?), partly hidden posteriorly by filiform appendages. CGoldsack’s quarries, Beaumont, 13A. Dto X 3, with details of Merostome (?) mouth. 13B. De. X 12, showing “rolled” margin of ectognath on left of figure, traces of mandibular denticles. These minute structures are rendered visible through weathering. Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont. 14. Portions of the abdominal segments of a Mer ostome (?) from Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont. 15. Abdominal segments of an Arachnid Fata the black chert replacing Upper Torrens Limestone, Tea-Tree Gully. This shows the shape and thickness of the abdominal portion of the Arachnid, and the epimera on each side is specially massive. 16. Thoracic plates (?) measuring 80 mm. < 20 mm. from Goldsack’s. quarries, Beaumont. 17. Telson (?), like that of a Pterygotus, from dark quartzite above Upper - ‘Torrens Limestone, Tea-Tree Gully. 18. Ventral view of cephalothorax (?), showing traces of eyes (?) as well as fragments of structures connected perhaps with the antennae. Blue Metal Limestone, Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont. 19, Portion of limb, an endognath perhaps, associated with the above carapace. 4 20. Iwo abdominal segments of a Merostome (?), separated from one another by a septum-like structure crossing the tergal half of the animal. ‘This lamina, or septum, is perforated by two openings situated in the plane of symmetry. 20A shows the proximal surface (convex side of) this septum with the central perforations and at least one epimera (?). The epimera on right of the figure is prolonged into a small limb, not visible on the surface shown. 20B is a section of A in the plane of symmetry, and shows the perforations. 21 and 21A are specially interesting as illustrating traces of small limbs attached to the epimera of abdominal segments of a Merostome (?). Fig. 21A appears to exhibit the ventral surface of probably six abdominal segments. The collar-stud-like structure, near the centre of the penultimate segment, seems to be a cast of the perforation of the septum, like that shown in Fig, 20A. This recalls the appendages figured by C. D. Walcott, in the Smith- sonian Mis. Coll., 1911-12, Vol. 57, Nos. 2 and 6, in the Eurypterid Sidneyia inexpectans Walcott, and those shown in Anthraconectes Meek and Worthen, and the spiny flanges figured by H. Woodward attached to the last three abdominal somites in Stylonurus scoticus H. Woodward. Walcott has commented on a form, like Sidneyia, linking up the Eurypterids with the Trilobites, and the same point can perhaps be suggested in the case of the form figured in 21 and 21A. 22. A carapace of Eurypterus remipes Dekay, from J. M. Clarke and i, Ruedemann, Eurypterida, of New York. PI. VL, Fig. 6, Mem, N.Y. State Mus., No. 14, 1912, This may be compared with carapace (7), fig. 1 herewith. 23. Carapace of Eurypterus pustulosus op. cit. C. and R. Pl, 23, Fig. 1, for comparison with Fig. 18 herewith, 24. Dorsal view of carapace of Stylonurus myops, Clarke, op. cit. C. and R Pl. 51, Fig. 2. Compare Fig. 3 herewith. 25. Dorsal view of carapace of Dolichopterus (?) testudineus Clarke and Ruedemann, op. cit., C. and R. Pl. 57, Fig. 2, For comparison with Fig. 3 herewith. 26, Pterygotus anglicus, Agassiz restored, H. Woodward, Monograph of British Fossil Crustacea, Order Merostomata, Palaeontogr. Soc., 1866-78, Plate 8. 27. Left swimming leg of a Eurypterid viewed ventrally with the metastoma (epistoma) plate shown on the left of figure, op. cit., C. and R., Plate 3. 28. From H. Woodward, op. cit p. 137, shows a cross section of a Eurypteroid somite illustrating the infolding of the chitinous skeleton of a tergite, along the area where two somites join one another. The tergite and sternite plates are produced to form the epimera on either side of cach segment. Compare 20. A. herewith. 29, From Woodward, op. cit., part of Pl. 23. Compare Siylonurus scoticus H. Woodward, with Figs. 21 and 21. A. herewith. SOME FOSSIL REMAINS FROM THE ADELAIDE SERIES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. . By FreprK. CHapMan, A.L.S., F.G.S., etc., Commonwealth Palaeontologist. [Read April 11, 1929.] Prate II, The following notes are based on some rather obscure remains in hand specimens which Prof, Sir T. W. Edgeworth David has given to me for description, Comprised in this series is a number of specimens of the pale blue-green, sericitic shale from Goldsack’s quarries, Beaumont, at the top of the Blue Metal Limestone in the Adelaide Series. Scattered throughout the rock, and exposed on the fractured surface [bedding plane], are numerous patches of rust-stain with more or less definite or sharp outlines. Amongst these pieces of evidence of fossil organisms there are a few that seem to definitely belong to primitive brachiopods, whilst others may represent the disconnected appendages of crustacea. There is a certain group-similarity between the latter that precludes the idea of their being merely adventitious cavities in the rock due to solution alone. The supposed crustacean remains are minute and seem to run in one direction as if drifted along strand-lines, much as flotsam is seen on the tidal shore today. Class BRACHIOPODA. Order ATREMATA, Genus LINGULELLA. LincuLetta, cf. cHarpa Walcott. Pl. ii, figs. 1, 2, 4. Observations —The_ schistose and metamorphosed grey mudstone of the Blue Metal Limestone, Stonyfell, shows numerous more or less ovate impres- sions and casts on its surface. These, I conclude, are primitive types of brachio- pods, but owing to their bad preservation and deformed outlines it was difficult at first to assign even a genus, or alliance to known genera. Some of these impressions, however, appear to show a structure on the umbonal region akin to Lingulella, with the buttressed pedicle area, whilst the anterior region of the shell shows fine concentric ornament. The outline of the valve is elongate ovate and acuminate in the pedicle region. The surface of the shell is finely concentrically laminate. The length of the shell is about 5 mm,, and the width 2-75 mm. In some points, as in the general outline, the Australian species resembles L. chapa Walcott (Walcott, 1913, p. 311, pl. 1, figs. 4-9), Locality —Stonyfell, Adelaide. Order NEOTREMATA. Genus OBoLenia. OBOLELLA, ci. CHROMATICA Billings, Pl. ii, figs. 3, 5. Observations —Another specimen here selected from the same grey sericitic mudstone of Stonyfell may, no doubt, be referred to as a form of Obolella. It is a broadly trigonal shell having a wide anterior margin. The central area of the 6 umbonal region is ridged in such a manner as to imply the presence of a pedicle tube. The surface of the impression is marked by fine concentric lines. Pro- bably the majority of the impressions, amounting to many a score on the large hand specimens may be referable to this genus. Length of selected example, 3 mm.; width, 3-25 mm. The nearest allied form seems to be Obolella chromatica of Billings. (Billings, 1861, p. 591; Walcott, 1915, p. 313, pl. lii., fig. 2.) Locality —Vopmost quarry, Beaumont, Adelaide. BIBLIOGRAPHY. BILiines, E. “Palaeozoic Fossils,” vol. i. “Containing Descriptions and Figures of New or Little Known Species of Organic Remains from the Silurian Rocks.” 1861-1865—Geological Survey of Canada, pp. 1-426. Text figures, 1-399. Watcott, C. D. 1913—“Cambrian Geology and Palaeontology.” Ser. IL, No. 11. “New Lower Cambrian Subfauna.” Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol. Ivii., No. 11, pp. 309-326, pl. L.-liv. EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. Fig. 1. Lingulella, cf. chapa Walcott. Numerous examples on shale. Stony fell, Adelaide, South Australia. X circ. 14 Fig. 2. Lingulella, cf. chapa Walcott. Same locality. X cire. 12. Fig. 3. Obolella, cf. chromatica Billings. Internal mould of dorsal valve. Beaumont, Adelaide. X circ. 14. Fig. 4. Lingulella, cf. chapa Walcott. X 4. Fig. 5. Obolella, ct. chromatica Billings. X 4. y days pecial feature of the geological, soil At the suggestion of the ecognised from the earl getation has been a s , as an index , has been r plorers. By J. A. Prescorr, M.Sc. [Read April 11, 1929.] THE VEGETATION MAP OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. and the record of the native ve z) The value of the characteristic native flora climatic features of South Australia of the work of the surveyors and official ex of settlement and RX Na ASS eh, WN \ WS, Map 1. Native vegetation of South Australia showing the limits of certain types, based on SOUTH AUSTRALIA —— Limits of Saltbush $ ceesease Limits of Bluebush B ------- Limits of Cottonbush C Yj Mallee x! the records of the Lands and Survey Department. 8 writer, the authorities of the University of Adelaide, in 1926, made arrangements for the Lands Department to investigate such official records and for a map to be prepared showing the native vegetation prior to settlement. The map was completed in October, 1928, under the authority of the Surveyor-General, and a copy was made available for use at the Waite Institute in connection with the work on soil classification. ne ne! Tt SOUTH AUSTRALIA + Hr | Temperate Savannah and Forest. ; = Mallee a Saltoush plains (Nullarbor) To Mulga Desert with Spinifex Scale 40 0 9 40 BO mites L iL ] a ome con Map 2. Native vegetation of South Australia, based on the records of the Lands and Survey Department. The surveyors have used popular names, put there is little likelihood of con- fusion as these have been found to be readily understood by systematic botanists with local experience. The types recorded are, in the main, perennial shrubs and trees, but a number of the grasses are mentioned where these are sufficiently prominent to have been noticed. For the more arid areas these include spinifex or porcupine grass (Triodia irritans and T. pungens), cane grass (Spinifex para- doxus), and Mitchell grass (Astrebla. pectinata). ‘The limits of distribution of a number of the major types are recorded on the map by colour wash and hachure; these include Saltbush (Atriplex spp.), Bluebush (Kochia sedifolia), Cottonbush (Kochia aphylla), Mallee (Eucalyptus dumosa, E. oleosa and allied species), Tea-tree (Melaleuca spp.), and Sheoak (Casuarina stricta). All other types are recorded where they occur by printing on the map. The original is too complex to be readily reproducible, but the main features have been transferred to the two maps illustrating this paper. Map 1 gives the limits of a number of the species mentioned. In map 2 an attempt has been made to revise (so far as it applies to South Australia) the map of Griffith Taylor (1), which is in itself a revision of the map of Diels (2). In 1928 a vegetation map of Western Australia was published by Gardner and Kessel! (3), and the present , map forms an easterly extension of that record. It is interesting to note that, whereas there is considerable overlap between the boundaries for Saltbush and Mallee, there is very little between Mulga (Acacia aneura and related species ) and Mallee. On the wetter limits of the Mallee there is similarly a relatively small overlap between the gums and the mallee proper. The area of higher rainfall is characterised by Eucalyptus temperate savannah or temperate forest associations typified by the stRINGYBARK FORMA~ ' TION and SAVANNAH WOODLAND FORMATION of Adamson and Osborn (4). LITERATURE CITED, (1) T. Grirritra Taytor, “The Australian Environment,” p. 27, Melbourne, 1918, (2) E. Drgts, “Die Pflanzenwelt von West Australien,” Leipzig, 1906. (3) C. A. Garpner and S. L. Kessevy, “Vegetation Map of Western Aus- tralia,” Perth, 1928, (4) R. S. Apamson and T. G. B. Oszorn, “The Ecology of the Eucalyptus Forests of the Mount Lofty Ranges (Adelaide District), South Aus- tralia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlviii., pp. 87-144, 1924. 10 GEOLOGICAL NOTES FROM THE HUNDRED OF ADAMS, FLINDERS RANGES. By Rate W. SEGNIT, M.A., B.Sc., F.G.S. [Read April 11, 1929.] This paper deals with the geology of that part of the Hundred of Adams, Section 635, Flinders Ranges, bounded by the fence of Worumba Paddock. The head station is situated due cast of Hawker, the nearest railway centre, at a distance of approximately twenty miles. The general topography of the country between the township of Hawker and Worumba Station, is that of a plain having slight undulations stretching for about twelve miles from the township to the slopes of the ranges, which rise abruptly from the plain. The head station is situated about eight miles inside the rugged ranges, at the foot of Mount Plantagenet, the highest point in the Hundred, and is estimated to rise about 2,500 feet above sca level. There are two road-tracks through the ranges by which an entrance can be made to the property, the principal one (and, incidentally, the safest) being that which enters from the west along the bed of the Willows Creek. A considerable portion of the country inside the ranges is very heavily timbered; mallee, sandalwood, and pines predominating. The timber belts have a decided tendency to follow the outcrop of the oldest rocks where the mountain slopes, as well as the valleys and plains which also have a dense covering. On the other hand, the hills and valleys formed of the newer sediments are mainly covered with grasses, and, in particular, porcupine, with isolated clumps of mallec and gums, which are usually confined to the (now) dry water courses. A very characteristic feature is the marked dissimilarity in the contours of the ranges. Those areas composed of the older series, i.¢., phyllites, schists, and quartzites, present very rugged peaks and sharp faces, with bold outlines, whilst the contour of the hills formed of the newer sediments, i.e., tillites, slates and quartzites is very smooth and rounded, only broken by the interbedded bands of quartzite in the slates, as seen in section B-B., fig. 1. The strike of the range is N.N.E. and S.S.W. The contours shown on the maps have been sketched in by the writer, as no survey maps are available. The various heights were obtained by taking prismatic compass readings and “levelling” from the three Survey Department trig stations situated on Mount Craig, Mount Plantagenet, and Warwicks Nob. The sections given are not drawn to true scale, but are only sketched. The. thicknesses of the various formations were measured on the site, where possible, and afterwards graphically determined. No detailed petrological work has been included in the paper, which deals only with the general features observed. All bearings are magnetic. With reference to the sketch maps, No. 2 map is an enlargement of that part of No. 1 bounded by the rectangle. PHYLLITES AND SCHISTS, The oldest rocks in the locality are mainly confined to the west-central fringe of the range. On tracing their outcrops north and south from Mount Craig, their width becomes less, as the newer sediments, 1.e., tillites, slates, and quartzites overlap them. 11 Tertiary sediments rest against the older series on the west. It would thus appear that the west-central area of the Hundred was a centre of disturbance, followed by considerable erosion of the overlying sediments and exposing the underlying series. Phyllites, which are much weathered and decomposed, make up the bulk of the older rocks. These have interbedded quartzites varying from two feet to GEOLOGY OF THE HUNDRED or ADAMS = FLINDERS RANGES. SCALS .Aaprox) {no equars 10 miles. SKETCH MAP_NS4, Lod RALPH W.SeowrT. ) H ee Aa fenteen enn eee een eee nce en cane ninnonecne = y REFenence. ' Pak quarzite. | , | =] Boned Shares. : mintite =x, a i + RM Srey Querrzire, = { UNconrormiry, (2) 4 (HWW pica Schist, ‘4 1 4 cy ! EE55 ~sDelamiric Limestone. t i 1 5 . 1 == i Micacecus Quartzite \ | EES Doonitic Limestone, i} iY = : Pink Quarfaite, | f= : H 4 = = == Wartwieks Nose— 1 ATM Beriites, mith bonds : = = = * rEZHE & WMica Schist, == 4 :. 08. Springs. = ' SS 1 ————— t = I = = t == 1 = i i = = i | TCR AM | | | 4 a0 & { Ls, | TE WAHICL i] Oy 4 A. ia Yu t c 1X i OLS HED. fa ae H ora i + = 1 7 ! apne | | i =u ‘1 Wit i | 4 — S v H u ' N ‘ 5 t ? j H ‘ by > t ! y 1 1 # s ' ! t * ! i J a 1 1 ! : i ————— ' H ae ' ! Whees= eu t i Sims, 1 ' | H ! D | ' = 4 + rf 1 thirty feet in thickness. The strike near the western boundary fence is mainly from 3° to 10° E. of N., and a dip which varies from the vertical to 70° E. On crossing the main strike of the range and moving eastward, the strike swings over to 15° E. of N., and dips S.S.W. at an angle of 80° as shown in a small exposure in a creek, C-C. (fig. 3), two-thirds of a mile south of the homestead, where the overlying tillite and slates have been eroded and exposed the underlying phyllites. An outcrop of mica schist occurs on the side of a hill about one-third of a mile south of Mount Craig, having a strike due north with a vertical dip. The thick- 12 ness of this bed was not determined. A considerable outcrop of the same schist occurs on Mount Craig, which is composed almost entirely of this rock, with interbedded quartzites. The dip was again found to be vertical. The interbedded quartzites, wherever they crop out of the surface, form very prominent features. —— LSHED et _ e AN ENLARGEMENT OF MaP N°l, ENCLOSED By RECTANGLE. 0 wi i} Qo "| Zz iN \e ft . 4 z' kK \ aa g iu % n * Pos, | a U at A AY | a Lae MS Zz | . I es a } ‘. Hy L PHT Ht a re | . i | 2. ! } 3 ee qi | ais u [ i i mw” ££ NII) hua os Opa g s ae = an? 223 He : 4, ioe £ ur & | == < = ! = eyo eu ub eds = es = Sea i Ne SCN Yel é : = é ea al es phe = r | via : Z — SANK ala —= —- S. “p ae we i z : ae aye re) * s = = ——— ES > : i 2 | Zee 2S = = fe z & ee : a = : g bs ¢ : FE ae rot Ze w= ¢ 8 FBS f ae o 3 8 fr B38 8 fe == fe RE. FG FRE = — Asie? ot G SERS gS Es ss a 28s She S FR Eg —— y, ee se azg § FE ES Z SEES PES Ss Eg See z 2 PERRET RE ESS 4 iS = he o a ° } \ 13 The phyllites are, again, exposed in the bed of the Willows Creek, about a quarter of a mile N.W. of the homestead. These phyllites are dipping S.S.E. at an angle of 70°. On tracing these older beds in an easterly direction along a line as shown on Section B-B (fig. 1), a distinct series of beds was met with. After crossing the broad series of phyllites, and commencing to rise up the western spur of Mount Plantagenet, the following sequence of beds crop out at the surface in ascending order from the phyllites :— Banded Slates .. fs or ja ES Tillite ~ ra a a= .. 150 feet Unconformity (?) Mica Schist 30, Dolomitic Limestone .. 14 ip he yy, Micaceous Quartzite .. a rue Bly og Dolomitic Limestone .. ae ee LEY of Pink Quartzites .. - be fs EQ) ys Phyllites .. 7 x All these beds up to, and including, the mica schist are conformable, the sediments showing a continuous sequence in their deposition with the underlying phyllites. FLINDERS RANGES - MUNDRED OF ADAMS. = S d - TAL ee SAL s iret cs ° aot, an 3 Miles. Sacrion from East to Hest, through Mount Plantagenes. (Been B-B.) Mr. Madigan (I.), in his section of the Adelaide Series, suggests a possible unconformity immediately below the Sturtian Tillite in the local series. The writer examined the junction of the tillite with the underlying beds, and found, in this region, that a distinct non-sequence occurs. Immediately south of the section line A-A., and again in the region of the section line C-C. (fig. 3), a very fine-grained bed of dark grey quartzite is found beneath the tillite, and in ‘these cases the unconformity occurs between the quartzite and the underlying phyllites. The unconformity may be due to an overthrust, the pressure being exerted from the east, and the tillites and succeeding beds were thrust forward in a westerly direction, overriding the underlying beds. It is interesting to note that a hill about one and a three-quarter miles east of the western boundary fence, along the section line A-A. (fig. 2), is composed entirely of banded slates, which are lying horizontally upon the upturned edges of the phyllites. Although a careful search was made, no trace of any tillite was observed at the base of the slates nor any indication of crush rock to suggest a thrust movement. A very rapid survey was made along the outcrop of the above-mentioned sequence of beds. Southward of the section line B-B. (fig. 1) they were lost beneath the overlapping tillites, about a quarter of a mile from the section line. 14 To the northward they are soon concealed by a dense covering of timber and scrub. In no other part of the Hundred was this succession of beds again met with, except the uppermost member—the mica schist. This schist contains abundant fine flakes of muscovite and has a well-defined greenish-grey banded structure. FLINDERS RANGES ~- HUNDRED OF ADAMS. % Weer &, Fn, FX a (earn Fe — Re Sa Fe, Gin Wilfows Creek Ong, a & On Wiffows Creek CaS 4. “es y { an - > Lae) en 3 “Se, { te, “, | * PAST} if i i | e,, i East Alena Hilt Alena Creek ‘ 7 mires. Geological Section, from Wesr ro East. Distance 7 rties. Skerch- Section. A-A, rT GREY QUARTZITE. Immediately below the tillite shown in section C-C. (fig. 3) is a thin bed of dark grey, fine-grained quartzite. Reference has previously been made to the occurrence of this bed. The average thickness is six feet. This quartzite crops out very persistently beneath the tillite in this area, the exception was found on the western spur of Mount Plantagenet. Prof. Howchin (2) refers to the per- sistency of quartzite underlying the Sturtian Tillite. A little to the north-eastward of Hill 6, this dark grey quartzite is seen lying beneath two isolated patches of the tillite, and is also exposed in the bed of the Willows Creek, five-eighths of a mile $.S.W. of Mount Plantagenet, lying beneath a band of tillite five feet thick. ‘TILLITE, Two well-defined beds of the tillite can be recognised in the district, with an additional thin band interbedded with the banded slates higher in the series. The lowest and principal bed, for convenience of description and reference, has been termed the “Lower Tillite.” This lower tillite is composed of a very fine-grained groundmass of a light ochreous colour, containing flakes and small books of mica, which ate up to 2 mm. in size. Erratics which are sub-angular, with rounded corners, are freely distributed throughout the mass. They vary in size from small pebbles to boulders measuring 18 inches by 12 inches. The ertatics are mainly derived from phyllites, a pink dolomite, a granite (containing pink felspar quartz and biotite), and a fine-grained, dark grey quartzite. A very interesting anticline occurs in the district, composed of the tillite and associated beds, which is shown in the sketch section C-C. (fig. 3). The line is 15 taken from Hill 6, near the western boundary fence, in a north-easterly direction to the Station Woolshed, a quarter of a mile to the east of the Homestead. On the western side of Hill 6, the tillite dips to the S.W. at a maximum angle of 25°, with a strike of 10° W. of N. At the summit of the hill the dip of the overlying slates is 18-20°, whilst the outcrop of the tillite in a creek, about one and a quarter miles further along, the section line has a strike of 5° E. of N., and dip to the E. of 30°. Following the same section line another half-mile, a second bed of tillite is exposed in the bed of a small creek south of the homestead. The 1M am 3. ores SECTION C€-C. sHownNe DISCONFORMITY SeTWEEN THe PHYLLITES AND TULITe SERIES Fie 3 included erratics here were mainly composed of a pink granite of a very coarse- grained texture, the biotite and felspar crystals being well developed. This bed is from 40 feet to 50 feet in thickness. The third bed of tillite referred to is indicated on the section line A-A., (fig. 2), between three and four miles from the western boundary fence. It occurs in the banded slates about a quarter of a mile north of the Woolshed, on the surface of the eastern spur of Round Hill, This bed is 6 feet in thickness. The lower tillite in this region, which has been faulted down, is about 120 feet in thickness. The second bed is 27 feet in thickness and is overlain by a bed of quartzite 8 feet thick. BANDED SLATES. The great mass of banded slates rest conformably on the lower tillite. They are characterised by bands of a pinkish quartzite, varying from a few inches to beds 20 feet thick. A feature of these quartzites is the presence of numerous veins of secondary quartz. Some of these veins are remarkably regular, and in parts form a ribbon structure. They vary from -5 mm, to 2 em. in thickness. On the western slope of Mount Plantagenet, just below the summit, a bed of light- coloured quartzite occurs, interbedded in the slates, with a very even-grained texture, the grains being cemented together with carbonate of lime which is under- going decomposition. The slates are of a very fine-grained texture, freshly cut pieces being a steel blue colour, exhibiting very fine ribbon structure. Tt was noticed that this ribbon effect was particularly marked where the slates were in close proximity to the tillites, and gradually faded on passing upwards in the series. An approximate estimate of the thickness of these slates is from 2,000 to 2,500 feet. An accurate measurement could not be obtained owing to the con- cealment of the outcrop on the eastern plains near the boundary of the Hundred, and also to the alteration of the strike to the north of Warwick’s Nob. The strike of the slates in the vicinity of Mount Plantagenet conforms with the tillite, but at the far north-west corner of Worumba Paddock the strike swings round to an east and west direction, with a dip to the south of 50° to 60°. This alteration of strike is referred to by Prof. Howchin (3) as a feature often met with in the Flinders Ranges. Near the south-eastern corner of the paddock, a little to the westward of. Mount Sims, the slates have a strike of 20° E. of N., and a dip to the S.E. of 60°, The slates forming Mount Plantagenet, and stretching eastward as far as shown on section B-B. (fig. 1), contain numerous erratics. Beneath the western 16 SEQUENCE OF LOWER ADELAIDE STRATA REPRESENTED IN THE HUNDRED OF ADAMS - FLINDERS RANGES. 300'+ Pink Quorlziles. Bonded States, conlain- ing bands of Quarizite, ond Erratics in lowesi becs TAPLEYS HILL 2000- SLATES. 250017) Sei 6’ Tillie Gre) pee og Pink Quartzite. 40-50 Tithfle @nd) Banded Slates with interbedded Quarlziles and Erractics. i STURTIAN TILLITE 150 G 150° Trittfe (Lower). a —~ 6 Grey Quortzite. 30° Mica Schish. 12’ Dofomilic Limestone ai’ miceceous Qvort zie. rt} 18’ Dofomilic Limes/one re —- 10’ Pink Quortzite. vaconformily (> Ss ana 2,800! Phyllifes, with mica Schist ond bands of Quarfzife. 2,800/+ 17 summit of the cairn on the Mount, several granite boulders, measuring 24 inches by 18 inches, are embedded in the slate outcrop. So dense are these erratics on the eastern flank, that some difficulty is experienced in defining the exact junction of the third tillite bed and the slates. To the north of the homestead, on Round Hill, the slates weather in a dis- tinctive manner by splitting into prisms, a feature noted by Prof. Howchin (4), west of Wilson, whilst at the eastern and southern margin of the Hundred, in weathering, they form small nodular fragments making a thin travertine crust. Upper PINKISH QuaRTZITES. The rocky outcrops to the north of the Hundred, in the region of the Basin Creek, are banded slates overlain by a massive pinkish quartzite, several hundred feet in thickness. This outcrop extends to the northward of the northern boundary fence of Worumba for a considerable distance. The whole of these quartzites contain veins of secondary quartz, some veins being 6 em. in thickness. An attempt was made to trace the outcrop along the western margin, but owing to a very dense covering of timber in this area it was not possible to do so. At the old mine shaft dump, near the northern boundary, are fragments of ironstone. This shaft has been sunk through the quartzites, CoNCLUSIONS. From the character, composition, and wide distribution of the Adelaide Series Tillite, in this State, it is possible for the writer to classify, on lithological evidence, the tillite in the Hundred of Adams as the “Sturtian Tillite,” and the thick series of slates above them as “Tapley’s Hill Slates.” At present some doubt exists in the mind of the writer in regard to the exact horizon in the Lower Adelaide Series, of the phyllites and associated mica schists and quartzites, together with the thin beds of sediments lying conformably on the phyllites on the western spur of Mount Plantagenet. If they represent the “Upper Phyllites” of the type district, then the unconformity below the tillite and grey quartzite is, probably, the representative of the mass of sediments which exist between the Upper Phyllites and the Sturtian Tillite. The sequence of strata shown in the column (fig. 4) will not be found in any one locality in the Hundred under review, but is a representation of the total beds occurring in the district. The thickness of the various formations, in most cases, is only approximate. A very careful search was made in all the creeks and old watercourses for any signs of higher beds, particularly near the eastern boundary, but no evidence was secn. When standing on the top of Warwick’s Nob and looking towards the east, the distant ranges in Walpalina Paddock exhibit features which point to a decided change in the nature of the rocks met with in Worumba Paddock. As there is no track or gateway through the high dog-proof fence along the eastern boundary of Worumba, the author was unable to continue the examination (across the strike) of the outcrop shown in section A-A. (fig. 2). The writer desires to express his appreciation to Mr. G. Murray Howard, the late owner of Worumba Station, for his kind hospitality and assistance by the loan of horses to enable this hurried survey to be made. REFERENCES. (1) Mapican, C. T.—Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Austr., vol, li., 1927, p. 407. (2) Howcuin, W.—tTrans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., vol. li., 1927, p. 350. . (3) Howcuin, W.—Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlix., 1925, ; (4) Howcrin, W.—Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlix., 1925, p. 14. 18 THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF CIDARIDS, PARTICULARLY OF THE GENUS PHYLLACANTHUS, AND THEIR DISTRIBUTION ALONG THE COASTS OF AUSTRALIA. By Tu. Mortensen, Copenhagen. (Communicated by Professor T. Harvey Johnston.) [Read April 11, 1929. | Priate III. During a visit to the United States in August-September, 1926, I had an oppor- tunity of seeing in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard College, Cam- bridge, Mass., the collection of Echinoids from the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, placed in the hands of my friend, Profesor H, Lyman Clark, for study. I was particularly interested in finding in this collection some specimens of a new species of Phyllacanthus, which 1 had recently discovered among the Cidarids of the Hamburg Museum and named Phyllacanthus irregularis. The discovery of this new species, the fifth of the genus Phyllacanthus known from Australia, had made me very interested in the problem of the geographical distribution of all these species along the Australian coasts. When shortly afterwards I met the late Director of the South Australian Museum, Mr. E. R. Waite, in Washington, | told him about this matter, and he promised to assist me in getting some additional material for the study of these forms, and their distribution in Australian seas. After his return to Adelaide, Mr. Waite wrote to the various Australian Museums, recommending that their material of Phyllacanthus should be sent to me, and some time afterwards I received collections from the Australian Museum, Sydney; the Western Australian Museum, Perth; and the National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne. The Director of the Brisbane Museum had no material to offer, but induced Mr. Rainford, of Bowen, North Queensland, to send me speci- mens. I beg to express my cordial thanks to the authorities of the said Museums and to Mr. Rainford for thus assisting me. The material received proved to be of very considerable interest, particularly that from the Australian Museum, Sydney, in which I found some specimens of Phyllacanthus longispinus (hitherto known in two specimens only), and that from the Western Australian Museum, in which I found several examples of Phyllacanthus irregularis, among them a fine specimen of no less than 110 mm. horizontal diameter, the largest recent Cidarid hitherto known, The results of my examination of all this material are incorporated in my Monograph of the Echinoidea, 1, The Cidaridae (1928), but as the matter has a very considerable local interest for Australia, | have thought it desirable to publish, separately, a notice of the Australian species of the genus Phyllacanthus and their geographical distribution, which may, I hope, lead to further investiga- tions. Our present knowledge of their distribution along the Australian coasts is still very fragmentary, particularly their distribution along the southern coast of the continent. Fresh material, with exact information about locality and habitat is, therefore, highly desirable. This also applies to the other species of Cidarids occurring on the Australian coasts, and I am, therefore, not confining this little note to the Phyllacanthus species alone, but shall give a list of all the Cidarids known to occur in the Australian seas, adding a key of determination, which may, I hope, be of practical value. 19 It may also be useful to add a note on the preservation of these Cidarids. The best method is to put them directly in alcohol after boring a small hole or two in the hard test of the largest specimens, so that the alcohol may penetrate more easily into the interior. For smaller specimens, particularly of the more thin-shelled Prionocidaris species, it is not necessary, or desirable, to bore a hole in the test, which may easily result in the breaking of the test. After the speci- mens have been preserved for some time (at least a few weeks) in alcohol they may be taken out and dried, and they will then usually keep very satisfactorily. If directly dried after being taken from the sea, without having first been preserved in alcohol, they will soon lose their spines, and the test will fall to pieces. If alcohol (or formalin) is not available at the collecting, it is advisable to open the Fig. 1 x 6. Part of peristome of a Phyllacanthus, showing arrangement of ambulacral pores in double series. specimens at the mouth and to remove all the interior organs. In that way they may keep fairly well. If thus treated, the dental apparatus (the “lantern”’) and the peristomial membrane in which the dental apparatus remains fixed, should be replaced in the test, after it has been emptied. The genus Phyllacanthus was, until recently, taken in a very wide sense, comprising such different forms as Prionocidaris bispinosa, with long, slender, more or less coarsely thorny primary spines; Plococidaris verticillata, with the thorns arranged in successive crown-shaped whorls on the short, coarse primary spines; besides Phyllacanthus imperialis and parvispinus with thick, cylindrical, smooth, thornless primary spines. The researches undertaken, in view of the preparation of my Monograph of the Cidaridae, have led to the result that the genus Phyllacanthus must be restricted to 20 those species which have thick, smooth, cylindrical spines. These species have also other important characters in common in contradistinction from other Cidarids, particularly the very interesting character that the ambulacral pores on the peristome are arranged, more or less regularly, in double series (fig. 1). A somewhat similar condition is found among recent Cidarids only in the genus Eucidaris. Also in the microscopical structure of the spines the said group show a marked difference from all other recent Cidarids. There can, therefore, be no doubt that these species with the smooth, cylindrical primary spines form a natural group, to which the name Phyllacanthus must be applied. None of the Cidarids with thorny spines can rightly be referred to this genus, _ We know now, in all, six species of the genus Phyllacanthus as thus restricted, viz. — Phyllacanthus impertalis (Lamk.), Ph. dubins Brandt, Ph. parvispinus ‘Ten. Woods, Ph. longispinus Mrtsn., Ph. magnificus H. L. Clark, Ph. irregularis Mrtsn. Five of these species occur in Australian waters. One, Ph. dubius, is known only from the Bonin Islands, near Japan, previous records of its occurrence in the Australian and Indo-Pacific seas being due to misidentifications. Another species, Ph. imperialis, 1s distributed all over the Indo-Pacific, irom Japan to Australia, and from Africa to the Tonga Islands ; another, Ph. parvispinus, would appear to be widely distributed over the South Sea (the “Ph. dubia” from the Kermadec Islands seems to be, in reality, Ph. parvispinus ). The three last are, so far as known, confined to the Australian coasts. It thus appears that the Australian seas are the true home of this genus, where it has undergone a con- siderable specialization, and whence it may be supposed to have spread, more or less widely, over the Indo-Pacific. We may now see how these five species are distributed along the Australian coasts, judging from the facts hitherto available. Ph. imperialis is known with certainty only from the Torres Strait region. The specimens recorded under the name Ph. imperialis, by H. L. Clark, in his Reports on the “Thetis” and the “Bndeavour” Echinoderms are Ph, parvispinus. Ph. parvispinus is known with certainty only from the cast coast of Aus tralia, from Shoalhaven Bight to Moreton Bay. The specimens recorded by Déderlein from Fremantle are Ph. irregularis, Ph. longispinus is known only from North Australia (Cape Jaubert and Port Darwin). Ph. magnificus—The only two specimens known were found between Fre- mantle and Geraldton. Ph, irregularis is known from Western Australia, from Fremantle to Bremer Bay on the south coast. Clark's suggestion (Rec. 5. Austr. Mus., iii, p. 455, 1928) that the specimens of this species found in the South Australian Museum came from the coast of the Northern Territory, there is nothing to support. On the contrary, since this species is now known with certainty to occur on the south coast, the probability is that these specimens also came from that region. From the facts hitherto available it would appear that each of the species occupies its own area, to the exclusion of the others, except on the south-western coasts, where Ph. magnificus and Ph. irregularis occur together. But it is quite possible that further investigations will show that the distribution of the various species is not thus restricted, At least, we may expect that their areas of distribu- tion will be found to transgress. a1 It is especially a remarkable fact that, apart from ‘the occurrence of Ph. wregularis as far west as Bremer Bay, at the south-western corner of Aus- tralia, we do not know anything about the occurrence of any Phyllacanthus species along the whole southern coast. That this does not mean that no Phyllacanthus species lives on the southern coast (as would seem to be the opinion of Clark) I rather take for granted, particularly since we know that a Phyllacanthus species occurs on the Tasmanian coasts. It is probable that the latter form will prove to be Ph. parvispinus; but I have had no access to specimens from Tasmania, and we can thus, for the present, only say that it is not Ph. dubius, under which name it is mentioned by Tenison Woods (Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., ii,, 1878). ; All the species are littoral ; the greatest depth from which any has been recorded is 73 metres (Ph. imperialis) ; Ph, parvispinus has been found to a depth of about 30 metres. They prefer rocky shores, where they may be found under stones and in crevices so narrow that it is very hard to understand how they could get in (and out) with their huge spines which would seem to be anything but practical for such a life. Very probably they come out at night to feed. Their food appears to consist mainly of calcareous algae (Corailina) and incrusting organisms. The other Cidarids known to occur in Australian seas are — Histocidaris elegans (A, Agaz.), H. australiae Mrtsn., H. crassispina Mrtsn. Goniocidaris tubaria (Lamk.), G.t., var. impressa Koehler,” G. australiae Mrtsn. Stylocidaris Reini (Déderlein), S. bracteata (A. Ag.), S. conferta (H. L. Clark). Eucidaris metularia (Lamk.), Plococidaris verticillata (Lamk.). Prionocidaris australis (Lamk.), Pr. bispinosa (Lamk.), Pr. baculosa, var. annulifera (Lamk.). The distribution of these species is as follows :— The three Histocidaris species have been found only off the New South Wales coast, in about 150-360 metres, while H. australiae and H. crassispina are known from nowhere else. H. elegans is widely distributed over the Indo-Pacific to Japan and the Indian Ocean. The Goniocidaris species are confined to the Australian seas, G, tubaria, apparently, occurring all round the coasts, while the var, tmpressa and G. australiae appear to be confined to the Tasmanian seas and Bass Strait. G. tubaria is, mainly, a littoral form, while G. australiae is known from depths of 70-470 meires. To this latter species belong the specimens mentioned by Clark in the “Endeavour” Echinoderms as Goniocidaris clypeata Déderl. No - doubt G. australiae is closely related to the Japanese G. clypeata, but judging from the material available they appear to form two distinct species. Stylocidaris reini (possibly a distinct variety) is known in Australian seas only from Bowen, Queensland. This species is otherwise distributed from the Malay Archipelago to Japan, in depths of about 100-500 metres. Stylocidaris bracteata has been recorded by H. L. Clark (Echinod., Western Australian Mus.) from between Fremantle and Geraldton, 100-180 metres. It is otherwise known only ‘from the Malay Archipelago. Stylocidaris conferta appears to be confined'to the eastern Australian seas ; it is known from off Port Jackson to Bass Strait, about 150-470 metres. Eucidaris metularia, Plococidaris verticillata, Prionocidaris bispinosa and Pr. baculosa, var. annulifera, are widely distributed, mainly littoral Indo-Pacific Q) Usually erroneously named Goniocidaris geranoides (Lamkk.). 22 forms. E. metularia is known only from the northern coasts of Australia; exact Australian localities are unknown for Pl. verticillata and Pr. baculosa, var. annulifera (the latter having been confused with Pr. bispinosa), whereas Pr. bispinosa is known to occur from Shark Bay and along the northern coasts to Port Denison in Queensland. Finally, Pr. australis ig known only from Bass Strait to Queensland (in 10-90 metres) and from Lord Howe Island, unless the Indo-Malayan Pr. glandulosa (de Meijere) should ultimately prove to be identical with it. For a detailed description of all these species I must refer to my Monograph ; but I shall here give a key for the determination of the various Australian Cidarids, by means of which it should be possible to identify them without much trouble. KrEy To THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF CIDARIDAE. 1. Primary spines thick, cylindrical, smooth, never thorny ; secondary spines fitting as a close mail around the base of the primaries ; pores on peristome in double series (Phyllacanthus) at 2 Primary spines slender, smooth or thorny; secondary spines usually not fitting as a close mail around the base of the primary spines; pores on the peristome in single regular series + oe = ~~ bs a le 7 6 2. Adult specimens (about 50-70 mm. horizontal diameter) with 6-7 coronal (inter-ambulacral) plates in each series -. i 3 Adult specimens with 8-10 coronal plates in each series .. as 4 3. Primary spines usually dark, with whitish bands; genital pores not on top of a conical elevation an As es Ph, imperialis Primary spines greenish-whitish, without bands; genital pores usually on top of a conical elevation .. a4 .. Ph. longispinus 4, Oral primaries conspicuously flaring at tip; secondary spines at base of primaries usually keeled Ph, magnificus 5 Oral primaries not flaring at tip; secondary spines not keeled 5. Marginal series of ambulacral tubercles more or less irregular, the tubercles and spines of varying size; spines on apical system pointed; some larger tubercles (spines) along inner edge of genital plates ox - “3 ya . Ph, irregularis Marginal series of ambulacral tubercles and spines regular ; spines on apical system broad, scale-like; no larger tubercles along inner edge of genital plates bai - a .. Ph, parvispinits 6. Only tridentate pedicellariae are found, usually very large and conspicuous, the head up to 5 mm. long; no globiferous pedicellariae ; primary tubercles distinctly crenulate (Histo- cidaris) .. OL Ae sa - Re a4 ian 7 Globiferous pedicellariae always present, tridentate pedicellariae often absent; all the pedicellariae of small size and incon- spicuous. Tubercles smooth, at most the upper ones slightly crenulate .. ad - + oi os ata ~ 9 7. Primary spines with some few, irregularly arranged, coarse thorns, mainly in the basal part .. a os 7 .. Hist. australiae Primary spines only with very fine, microscopical thorns, arranged in regular, longitudinal series .. oF * ahs 8 &. Primary spines very slender, cylindrical .. ey . Hist. elegans Primary spines distinctly fusiform .. 5 a .. Hist. crassispina 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. i6. 17. 23 Grooves at the ends of the horizontal sutures Pe ER a ae 10 No groove ws : a : ae 12 Upper primary spines ereines in a conspicuous s'flet, wound ‘disk G. australiae Upper primaries more or less trumpet- shaped, not enon in a conspicuous, flat disk .. ot ‘ f i1 Grooves connected into a conspicuous, sianleen medion Pitan both in the ambulacra and interambulacra.. .. G. tubaria Grooves isolated, in a more or less distinct, ladder-like arrangement 2 eee G. tubaria, var. tmpressa Apical system almost naked, aad w ith a sige of flattened spines along outer margin fe .. Lucid. metularia Apical system wholly covered with small spines os 4: 13 Primary spines verticillate .. - af Pe Plococid. verticilata Primary spines not verticillate - a oH - 14 Basal part (“collar”) of primary spines spotted 2 bss a 15 Basal part (‘collar’) of primary spines not spotted a iF 17 Collar with whitish spots, separated by purple lines Prionocid, australis Collar with red or purple spots £: 7 16 Primary spines with sharp longitudinal aie pores not conncelsd by a furrow ’ a Stylocid. bracteata Primary spines not with sharp, longitudinal ridges; pores con- nected by a distinct furrow (“conjugate”) Prionocid. baculosa, var. annulifera Primary spines smooth, never with coarse thorns, white, usually some of them with few narrow, sharply- -marked, red rings Stylocid. conferta Primary spines usually with some coarse thorns, greenish or violet, never with sharply-marked red rings .. ait Prionocid. bispinosa DESCRIPTION OF PLATE III. Fig 1. Phyllacanthus imperialis (Lamk.). Fig. 2. Phyllacanthus irregularis (Mrtsn.). 24 ON THE LARVAL TROMBIDIID MITE (TROMBICULA HIRSTI L. SAMBON) THAT CAUSES THE “SCRUB ITCH” OF NORTHERN QUEENSLAND AND THE COORONG, SOUTH AUSTRALIA(), By Srantey Hirst (Zoological Dept., University of Adelaide, South Australia). [Read April 11, 1929.] The larval Trombidiid mite known as the ‘Scrub Itch Mite,” in Northern Queensland, was described by Louis Sambon under the name Trombicula hirsti in July, 1927. The original specimens were found on human beings at Innisfail, and I have since re-examined them, and also examples from Tully. The same species of Trombicula attacks man in the South-Eastern districts of South Aus- tralia, from Kingston to Robe, and also in the direction of Mount Gambier, During a recent visit to Robe (December 3-6, 1928), I was able to collect a large number of specimens of this mite. It is extremely abundant during the warmer months, especially January. This larval form is chiefly found amongst the under- growth beneath the Tea-trees. It has several local names, such as “The Robe Mite,” “Tea-tree Mite,” and “Red Spider.” Persons walking in the Tea-tree scrub, or camping therein, are often badly bitten by this pest, and sometimes severe irritation, which may last for days, is caused by its bites. It is pretty certain that this mite, known variously as the “Scrub Itch Mite” of North Queensland, and also “Tea-tree Itch Mite” of South Australia, is identical with the form described by Hatori under the name Trombicula pseudo-akamushi, The latter name has, however, also been used for another species by Tanaka. Further investigation of the Japanese literature is necessary before the correct name can be definitely settled. The species has a wide distribution occurring in Japan, Sumatra, and the Malay Peninsula, besides Australia, So far this mite is not known to convey disease, but allied forms, viz., Trombicula akamushi Brumpt, and Lf. deliensis Walch, are known to transmit varicties of tropical typhus or pseudo- typhus. Another species, Trombicula (Leeuwenhoekia) australiensis Hirst, molests human beings in the Ashfield district of Sydney, New South Wales, and is also known to occur in Sumatra. The following is a description of this species of larval Trombicula, ‘TROMBICULA Hirst1, Sambon. Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (9) xx., pp. 157-161 (July, 1927). Ann. Trop. Med. Parasitology, xxii. p. 67 (June, 1928). Dorsal scutum large as in T. novaehollandiae, n. sp. (from D’Estree Bay, Kangaroo Island, South Australia), but although the posterior margin is convex as in that species, it is differently shaped, being cut off rather sharply (more angular) instead of rounded off gradually at the outer corners. Pseudostigmal hairs very fine and fairly long, only the distal end being plumose. Anterior lateral hairs rather slender and fairly long. The antcrior median very similar to the anterior laterals. Posterior lateral hairs of scutum also rather long and slender, (1) The cost of this and other papers on Australian Acari has been partly met by a govern- ment grant received through the Royal Society, Burlington House, London, W. (2) In the “Key-Catalogue of the Crustacea and Arachnoids of Importance to Public Health,” Washington, Hygienic Lab. Rep. No, 148, 1927, p. 269, T. pseudo-akamushi is con- sidered to be a “confused species.” 25 being slightly the longest. Hairs on rest of dorsum about the same length as those on the dorsal scutum and rather few, about twenty to twenty-four usually being present. They are arranged as follows: 2, 6, 6, 4, 2, or 2, 6, 6, 2, 2,2. Hairs on venter few in number. Hair on galea fine and apparently plain, being without feathering. Claw of palp, bifid. There are about six plumose hairs on the tarsus of the palp, and also two plain unfeathered rod-like setae. Tarsus of first leg with a very long and fine, plain, unfeathered, tactile seta on its dorsal surface, besides the plumose hairs. Measurements—Length of body, 187-228 yw; length of first leg (not including coxa), 238 »; length of second leg (?); length of third leg, 245-270 ». Length of dorsal scutum (in middle), 60-68 »; its greatest width, 90-97 ». Length of anterior median hair of. scutum, 45-46 »; of anterior lateral hairs, 41-46 p»; of posterior lateral hairs of scutum, 49-54 »; of sensory (pseudostigmal) hairs, 47-50 p. Length of hairs on rest of scutum, 41-48 x. Hab —lInnisfail, Queensland (type locality). Also Tully, Queensland, and the Coorong District of South Australia, from Kingston to Mount Gambier. Fig. 1. Schongastia coorongensis, nu. sp—A., Dorsal aspect of body; B., Ventral aspect of body; C., Tarsus of first leg; D., Dorsal scutum. Schongastia coorongensis, n. sp. A dead rat picked up in a lane at Robe by the author was found to have clusters of harvest bugs in both ears. Ou examination, the species proved to be 26 quite distinct from the Tea-tree Mite and, apparently, undescribed. The descrip- tion of this new form is as follows :— Dorsal scutum rather small and not very long, the width being slightly more than twice the length. Posterior margin of scutum shaped as shown in fig. 1. Anterior median unpaired hair of scutum longer than the anterior laterals. Posterior lateral hairs on scutum the longest. Sensory hairs with the distal end globular. Hairs on rest of dorsum about twenty-eight to thirty-two in number and arranged in rows as follows :—2, 6, 6, 6, 6, 4 or 2. There are about thirty- six to thirty-eight hairs on the venter, not including the two pairs between the coxae. Hair on galea very fine and plain, apparently being without any side hairs. Proximal segments of palp furnished with hairs which are fine and provided with only a few side hairs. Hairs on penultimate segment of palp very fine and, apparently, without any side hairs. Two or three stiff, plain, unfeathered setae are present on the palpal tarsus, and there are also four or five plumose hairs. Tarsus of first leg high, not tapering gradually. There are no plain hairs on the last tarsus, all being feathered. Measurements.—Length of body (distended specimens), -41 mm.; its width, ‘21 mm. Length of dorsal scutum (in middle), 40-44 y; its width, 82-90 xn. Length of sensory hairs of scutum, 29-32 ; length of distal end of sensory hairs, 23-25 ». Length of anterior median hair of scutum, 44 ». Length of anterior laterals, 41-45 ». Length of posterior lateral hairs of scutum, 58-66 ». Length of hairs on rest of dorsum, 39-52 ». Length of first leg (not including coxa), 219 p; of second leg, 173 »; of third leg, 231 p. Hab.—Robe, South Australia. Numerous specimens in the ears of rodent (Rattus lutreola). 27 ON THE PROBABLE OCCURRENCE OF THE STURTIAN TILLITE NEAR NAIRNE AND MOUNT BARKER. By Proressor WaLTER Howcuin, F.G.8. [Read May 9, 1929.] Mr. R. Lockhart Jack, Assistant Government Geologist, drew my attention to one of the field maps of the late H. Y. L. Brown, on which he had written the word “Ice” on the site of a railway cutting situated a little to the westward of Nairne. Mr. Jack kindly motored me to the spot and, on examination, a sub- angular quartzite was obtained that measures 9 inches by 44 inches with a circum- ference of 16 inches, This stone was firmly embedded in a white kaolinized slate. For the purpose of further observations, the writer paid a second visit to the spot and examined all the cuttings on the line between Nairne and Mount Barker Junction, a distance of four miles. This was done with the object of examining the associated rocks, in relation to the supposed tillite, for corroborative evidence, if possible. The geological features of these railway cuttings will be briefly described and advantage will be taken to utilize observations previously made by the writer in the district that may bear upon the same subject. REMARKS ON THE RAILWAY CUTTINGS. First Cutting, situated on the line about one-third of a mile westward of the Nairne railway station. Finely laminated kaolinized slates, very regular in bed- ding and banded in bluish and white layers, resembling a ribbon slate [ (?) Tap- ley’s Hill horizon]. Varies in dip from 65° to 90°, easterly. The rock frequently shows segregations, after the manner of spotted or knotted schist. The length of the cutting is about 10 chains. Towards the western end, three dykes of pegmatite cut obliquely across the bedding in a south-easterly strike. ‘he most easterly one is about 18 inches in thickness, on either side of which the slates are slightly hardened but have suffered no further metamorphism. At a distance of 15 feet westward of the dyke, just mentioned, is a much larger one, having a thick- ness of 33 feet with a hade of about 65° to the north-east. This has caused a higher degree of contact metamorphism on the adjoining slates; those abutting on the upper plane of the dyke are definitely indurated in a zone of several inches, and the underlay has the form of a conspicuously spotted and knotted schist. The knotted segregations attain the size of a large pea [ (7) incipient andalusite] which, in places, weather out and accumulate at the base of the cliff. This effect is produced over a zone of 15 inches bordering the granite dyke. A third peg- matite dyke, still further to the westward, about 18 inches in thickness, has features similar to those already described. Ali the dykes cut the beds without displacement. Between this cutting and the next is an embankment about 200 yards in length. Second Cutting. In this exposure, which is about 60 yards in length, the banded structure seen in the first cutting is absent, and bedding planes are either non-existent or indistinct, but the bed is strongly jointed in all directions. It is towards the western end of this cutting that the supposed tillite occurs. The evidence at present is mainly from the presence of subangular stones irregularly distributed through the mass after the manner of glacial erratics. In addition to the large quartzite (?) erratic, mentioned above, five other subangular stones were collected, consisting of quartz and quartzites, varying in size from one inch to 28 three inches in length. The matrix, when washed down, left a residue of rather fine-grained sand. At the western end of the cutting is a fine-grained quartzite, six yards in thickness, dipping easterly under the slates [or (?) tillite] exposed in the cut- ing. On the supposition that the latter represents a decomposed tillite, this quartzite would correspond to the subglacial quartzite which commonly underlies the Sturtian Tillite. The exact position of the bed can be determined by the north and south district road with “open crossing” shown on the official map (although now closed) which makes the western boundary of Section 4431, Hundred of Macclesfield. The surrounding ground is grass-covered and the rocks obscured thereby, so that the bed in question is limited in exposure to the railway cutting, and, the supposed erratics having been gathered from the face, there is a danger that the superficial evidences will be possibly absent for a time. There follows (on the western side of the last-named cutting) an embank- ment, ten chains in length, that spans a small creek that passes beneath the railway. Third Cutting. This is excavated, mostly, in rotten kaolinized slate, the line following, for a time, along the strike of the beds. At the eastern end of the cutting is a 5-feet quartzite, underlain by a rotten sandstone, 24 feet in thickness. ‘This is, again, underlain by the kaolinized slate, in which an important quartzite is included. he latter forms a low scrubby hill on the northern side of the line (in Section 3827a), is nearly perpendicular and has been quarried along the outcrop. Fourth Cutting. By a northerly bend of the railway, the quartzite mentioned in the last paragraph is, in the next cutting, intersected by the railway. At this point, as on the hill, the bed is nearly vertical, with a slight easterly dip, and has a thickness of about 30 fect. An interesting feature of this quartzite is its piebald appearance, having a close resemblance to the mottled structure of the Mitcham quartzite, and probably represents the same horizon. From this point, westward, to the Mount Barker Junction, there is little varia- tion in the character of the rocks. ‘hey consist chiefly of light-coloured kaolinized slates with an occasional thin quartzite which is also much decomposed. ‘The slates are, perhaps, less metamorphosed, on the whole, in this part of the section, but zones of slates that are spotted or knotted still occur. The beds are generally very highly pitched with acute anticlines and, probably, also, with closed anticlinal folds. In the third cutting from the Mount Barker Junction station is a pegmatite dyke, one foot wide, which is contorted with the slates but produces no appreci- able contact metamorphism. At the railway station, the beds in the cutting are kaolinized, laminated, highly variegated in colour, with contorted lines, Dip, W. 20° S. at 80°. A Beit or LIMESTONE. (Observations made during the Years 1907 and 1908.) Ii ihe No, 1 cutting, westward of Nairne railway station, represents the horizon of Tapley’s Hill slates, as suggested above, we,might expect a limestone to occur at the next bed in ascending order, in accordance with the sequence seen in the type district. A limestone does occur in this position which may be assumed (if our deductions be correct) to represent the Brighton limestone. The ground which separates No. 1 cutting from Nairne, in a length of about a third of a mile, is low ground and grassed and destitute of rocky outcrops. In a visit which the writer made to Nairne, in 1908, Mr. Clezy, a resident.of West Nairne, stated that in sinking a well on his property a bed of marble was struck at a depth of 60 feet, but I was unable to discover any surface features that might confirm this statement. 29 There is, however, a series of outcrops of marble which, in an almost direct line from Nairne, in a N.N.E. and S.S.W. direction, extends for about 12 miles and shows, at least, ten distinct outcrops. ; In a traverse along this line of strike from Nairne it was found that the peg- matite dykes seen in No. 1 cutting made prominent exposures across the adjoining paddock, as far as the main road to Littlehampton, a distance of about a quarter of amile. After crossing the main road, just referred to, the ground is cultivated with no rocks showing at the surface for rather less than a mile. At about one and a quarter miles from the railway a small quartzite quarry was met with, the stone being softish and of a-purplish colour, with a dip E. at 50°. Shortly beyond, more on the rise and about due south from Nairne, a strong outcrop of a basic intrusive rock makes a conspicuous feature, situated north-westerly from the Mount Barker, from which it is distant about a mile with a strike directed towards the Mount at S. 20° E. The exposure is about 28 yards wide and was traced for nearly a mile. On the western side of the dyke the rock is a dark, siliceous-looking stone ; on the eastern side is a wide belt of strongly-developed mica schists, knotiv, with a wavy structure, caused by the knots. The marble exposures are as follow — 1. A little to the westward of the basic dyke, just described, a marble is seen to outcrop in a low position in the paddocks of Mr. Ryder (Section 4441 and 3829, Hd. Macclesfield). In the first-named Section a small opening has been made that has exposed the rock-face which was followed along the south side of a small creek. Dip at the quarry, E, at 65°. The marble is underlain by a strong quartzite, and on the road that passes Ryder’s, going to Littlehampton, thick beds of spotted slates are seen. These were followed, going westerly, but they became obscured under a thick deposit of soil towards the bottom of the valley at the first four cross-roads. Immediately west of the cross-roads the ground rises into successive ridges of hard, felspathic, and, usually, fine-grained quartzite [ (?) Mitcham horizon]. In one or two places a small opening has been made in these quartzites, showing what appears to be a dip E, 10° S. at (?) 65°. The quartzites show outcrops for about a mile but are interrupted by stretches of deep soil that hide the underlying rocks. About one mile on the eastward side of Little- hampton, clay slatés are seen exposed, feebly spotted in places. At the back of Littlehampton there is a quarry of kaolinized rock, variegated in colour, with a dip S.W. at 70°, which is also visible in the main street of the township. This clay-slate has been extensively used for brick-making in the neighbourhood. 2. About a mile to, the southward of Ryder’s, a limestone is noted on my field map as.occurring in Section 4449, but have no particulars concerning it. 3. A marble is worked on the southern side of the Mount Barker Creek, in Section 4456. It crosses the road into Section 4455, and can be traced to the creek, just below the bridge, but is not seen on the northern side of the creek. The quarry stone is in two divisions, the upper portion being of a coarsely crystal- line nature, whilst towards the lower portions the limestone becomes streaky and crypto-crystalline... Dip E. at 33°. 4. In the neighbourhood of Wistow are several exposures of marble. In Section 2918 (Ellis’, late Mills’, property) the marble is coarsely crystalline, with some impure beds in it which have thicknesses up to 18 inches. Dip E. 20° S. at 12°, The marble is overlain, as well as underlain, by quartzite, the latter of which can be seen in an adjoining quarry. The lower quartzite has dark lines in it and has clastic felspar interstitial with the quartz grains. At Eden Park (close to the above) the overlying quartzite can again be seen; also a soft, purple-coloured, argillaceous, or argillo-arenaceous rock, with no particular grain, but strongly variegated and has concentric and tortuously concentric lines. The stone works freely, and has been much used in the neighbourhood as a building stone. The bed 30 ig massive and obscure in its direction of dip, but it probably overlies the quartzite (just mentioned), and at a low angle. 5. About half a mile to the southward of the last-named outcrop of marble is another, exposed in a small creek in Section 2895 (or thereabouts). The stone is similar to the rest in the neighbourhood but has not been worked. 6. In another half-mile, to the southward, the most important exposures of the marble in the district occur in Section 2915, where there is a quarry face of about 30 feet, having a dip S. 20° E. at 10°. It is situated a little to the eastward of Philcox Hill railway station. On a hill, between the marble quarries and the railway station, is a freestone quarry—soft and of a purplish colour—probably of the same horizon as that of Eden Park, mentioned above. Dip S. 20° W at 15°. A little further to the south-westward the marble is again seen in the bed of a small creek in Section 2828. 7. In a little more westerly trend the marble passes on the western side of Macclesfield, at a distance of about four miles from the previously noted outcrop, and has been extensively worked. 8. At a further distance of two miles, on the same line of strike, is another exposure of marble on Mr. Lemar’s property, in Section 3343, on the south- western boundary of the IIundred of Macclesfield. The limestone has thus been proved to extend for 12 miles in a direct line. GEOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS MADE TO THE NORTH-WESTWARD OF Mount Barker JUNCTION. (Dated June 5, 1908.) The railway line was followed in a north-westerly direction, Half a mile from the railway station, in Section 4216 (Hundred of Onkaparinga), cuttings exposed decomposed phyllites with a zone of spotted and knotted schist and a granular felspathoid rock. Numerous flat veins of rotten actinolite occur with selvaged crystals at right angles to the walls, which are sometimes divided by a central line, having a thickness up to two inches. This cutting continues to the “open crossing” on the north-western side of Section 4216 (Hundred of Onka- paringa). Strike of the beds in cutting, N. 10° W., dip westerly at 70°. Strong reefs of quartz penctrate these rocks. The road at the crossing was then followed, going in a north-easterly direction. The road, on the rise, shows low exposures of dark-coloured schists, some of which is a fine-grained biotite schist. Thin bands of dark-coloured, fine-grained quartzite occur, often laminated. Two loose specimens of tremolite schist were found on the road, probably brought with road metal, but were of good size. Near the summit of the rise a number of large stones of arkose grits were observed on the side of the road, which had apparently been gathered from the ploughed land on the western side of the road. At a distance of one mile from the railway the road descended nearly opposite Mr. Borcher’s house (Daisy Hill Farm) in Section 1775, Near the house is a quarry in the basal grits, carrying dark lines of clastic ilmenite, with a strike N. 20° W., dip vertical. The beds show current bedding and, on some faces, ripple marks. This quarry is at the end of a ridge which runs in a nearly north and south direction. Nearer the house, by the side of a private road, there is another outcrop of the same rocks, where the dip is reduced to 40° S.W., and the strike swings round to the eastward and the dip becomes southerly. Near the highest point of the ridge, about a quarter of a mile from the house, there is a strong outcrop of felspathic quartzite with much clastic ilmenite, having a dip N.E. at 82°. The stone has been quarried and works freely. Most of the 31 buildings on the farm have been constructed from stones won from the quarries mentioned. The whole ridge from Borcher’s consists of this rock, it has an extensive width and is to all appearance identical with the ilmenitic basal grits of the Aldgate Series. The ridge ends abruptly to the northward, overlooking the Oakbank country and the valley of the Onkaparinga. It has a height of 150 feet above the Mount Barker Junction railway station. The Pre-Cambrian schists border the ilmenitic grits, on their eastern side, and form a higher ridge in that direction. They follow the grits, on their eastern limits, down into the angle formed by the twisted ridge of the grits, near Borcher's. In the Pre-Cambrian area several shafts have been sunk in Sections 4260 and 4264, named the New Eclipse, Balhannah Surprise, ete., from which a little gold was won. A porphyritic basic dyke occurs in the neighbourhood but is not seen in out- crop. Mr. Borcher says it is situated on the low ground bordering the western side of the basal grits ridge. Its presence is indicated by loose stones on the surface of cultivated land—these are gathered and used, locally, as road metal. THE Sturtian TIttitE NEAR Mount BARKER TOWNSHIP, A few years ago Mr. R. L. Jack picked up two loose stones on the grounds of the Convent school, near Mount Barker, that show a striking resemblance to the ground-mass of the Sturtian illite. Both these specimens contain pebbles of granite that are undoubtedly erratics. Mr. Jack was not able to discover the parent rock from which the specimens had been shed. The ground has a low situation and the rock may be easily obscured by cover. Subsequently, the writer paid a visit to the spot, but could obtain no further evidence on the Convent grounds. , On the road, opposite to the entrance to the Convent grounds, is an old quarry (now used as a tip for the town), the main road of which is an unstratified, sandy mudstone, gritty in places. Imbedded in the mudstone stones were sparingly scattered that measured up to five inches in diameter, These consisted of quartz, quartzite, schist, and an aplite five inches in length. The last-named is somewhat decomposed. The ground-mass of the bed is, apparently, identical with that seen in the two specimens collected by Mr. Jack in the adjoining paddock, but is not quite so indurated, having been subjected to greater weathering. The mudstone, in the quarry mentioned above, is overlain by a rotten quartzite [dip S.W. at 55°], which is slightly fissile by the presence of mica on the planes of bedding. On the opposite side of the quarry the mudstone slopes with the ground to normal level and is hid from view by superficial deposits. The overlying quartzite continues into the grounds of the Convent school, the buildings of which have been constructed on a platform cut in this rock. Going easterly, the quartzite continues in outcrop, but at a short distance there is a con- siderable quarry in the face of the scarp, looking south. The rock consists of highly-coloured clays and sand rock, in yellows and reds, with a thin covering of quartzite [dip S. at 55°]. The general dip of the country varies from south to south-west. An important feature is that the two supposed outcrops of tillite are situated on the same line of strike, CoNncLuSION. There is strong circumstantial evidence for the occurrence of the Sturtian Tillite at the two localities mentioned in this paper. The country concerned is mostly grassland and but slightly incised, so that it offers few opportunities for determining the geological features, the railway cuttings providing most of the 32 exposures available for this purpose. These cuttings are separated by embank- ments crossing grassed valleys that show no outcrops. The evidences are cumulative and are based, partly, on the lithological characteristics of the supposed tillite, and, partly, on the associated beds which show a close accordance with the series in which the tillite is known to occur. In taking a more extended view of the geological field, it appears that the basal beds of the Adelaide Series, on the eastern side of the Mount Lofties, follow a series of rolling curves from Aldgate to near the Mount Barker Junction, with the coarse ilmenitic grits at the base, passing up into a finer light-coloured sand- stone, These continue for several miles, and, in places, pass up into higher horizons of kaolinized slates and stronger beds of quartzite, but without rising far in the series. Near the Mount Barker Junction, the tectonic curves become more acute, the bottom grits are folded down at a high angle—vertical in places—and the superior beds follow in sequence, at similar high angles, through the suecession of lower phyllites, the Mitcham quartzite, the tillite, the ribbon-slate of Tapley’s Hill, and then the Brighton limestone, which occurs at intervals, maintaining an approximately similar strike for a distance of 12 miles. In comparison with the type district, the eastern series has, in its surface exposures, become shortened from 12 miles to 5 miles. This may possibly be explained from the apparent absence of some beds in the eastern series which are present in the western, and also from the thinning of others that are present. _ In sucha comparison it must be allowed that the series on the Adelaide side is superficially lengthened by a considerable rolling of the beds, while that on the eastern, between Mount Barker Junction and Nairne, is compressed almost to the vertical. 33 CRUSTACEA FROM PRINCESS CHARLOTTE BAY, NORTH QUEENSLAND. THE ISOPODA AND STOMATOPODA. By Hersert M, Hare, Curator South Australian Museum. (Contribution from the South Australian Museum.) [Read May 9, 1929.] Early in 1927 the writer, in company with Mr. N. B. Tindale, spent some weeks in Princess Charlotte Bay; although only a small portion of this time was occupied in marine collecting, a goodly number of Crustacea was obtained. Most of the marine material was secured on or near the Flinders Islands, a small group lying at the southern end of the bay. The “Alert” visited these islands in 1881, and since then other vessels also, but apparently little collecting has been under- taken there. A passage between Flinders and Stanley Islands—Owen Channel— has a bottom of mud and sand which harbours various dingy species, and this was systematically worked with a small dredge, while collecting was also carried out on Halimeda and other reefs, and amongst coral. The present paper records the few species of Stomatopoda and Isopoda secured. STOMATOPODA. Family SQUILLIDAE. It was found that an excellent method of obtaining Squillids from pools left at low tide was to introduce a small quantity of formalin. As the latter pene- trated to the innermost crevices of the rock, or into burrows in the mud, the mantis-shrimps left their retreats and were easily captured with a small net. In some cases nearly an hour elapsed before all Squillids in a pool were ejected by the formalin. The Walmbariya natives, living on Flinders Island, are well aware that these animals are capable of inflicting wounds with the spiny telson and raptorial dactylus, and on several occasions warned me that they should be handled with care. GONODACTYLUS TRISPINOSUS Dana. Gonodactylus trispinosus Dana, U.S. Expl. Exped., Crust., 1852, p. 623; Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., iv., 1913, p. 180 (and syn.) ; Balss, K. Sv. Vet. Handl., lxi., 1920, p. 5; Hansen, Siboga Exped., Leiden, Mon. xxxv., 1926, p. 35. Protosquilla trispinosa Borrad., Proc. Zool. Soc., 1898, p. 34, pl. v., figs. 1, la. Taken from tunnels in stones dredged in Owen Channel, 3 faiths. The examples agree well with the descriptions, excepting that the lateral margins of the last thoracic segment are subacutely rounded, and not broadly rounded as figured by Borradaile and mentioned by Kemp. The species was previously recorded from Australia:—Swan River, Western Australia (Miers), and North- West Australia (Pocock and Balss). GONODACTYLUS GLARROUS Brooks. _Gonodactylus glabrous Brooks, Rep. Voy. “Challenger,” xvi. (Stomatop.), 1886, p. 62, pl, xiv., fig. 5, and pl. xv., figs. 7-9; Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., iv., 1913, p. 167, pl. ix., fig. 113 (and syn.), and p. 170, fig. 2; Odhner, Goteborgs Kung]. Vet.-Och Vitt. Samh. Handl., xxvii. 1923, p. 8; Hansen, Siboga Exped., Leiden, Mon, xxxv., 1926, p. 29. Dredged in Owen Channel, 3 faths., and in burrows in mud near shore at low tide. 34 GONODACTYLUS CHIRAGRA (Fabricius). Squilla chiragra Fabr., Species Insect., i, 1781, p. 515, and Mantiss. Insect., i., 1787, p. 334. Gonodactylus chiragra Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., iv., 1913, p. 153, pl. ix., fig. 10 (and syn.) ; Balss, K. Sv. Vet. Handl., Ixi., 1920, p. 5: Odhner, Goteborgs Kungl. Vet.-Och Vitt.-Samh, Handl., xxvii., 1923, p. 8; Hansen, Siboga Exped., Leiden, Mon. xxxv., 1926, p. 24. In holes in fragments of rock dredged in Owen Channel, 1 fath.; also both adults and young common in burrows in mud near shore. GoNODACTYLUS PULCHELLUS Miers. Gonodactylus trispinosus, var. pulchellus, Miers, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5) v., 1880, p. 122. Gonodactylus pulchellus Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., iv., 1913, p. 177, pl. x, fig. 117, 118 (and syn.) ; Hansen, Siboga Exped., Leiden, Mon. xxxv., 1926, p. 33. Dredged in Owen Channel, 3 faths. Apparently this pretty species has not been recorded previously from Australian waters. PsEUDOSQUILLA CILIATA (Fabricius). Squilla ciliata Fabr., Mantiss. Insect., 1., 1787, p. 333. Pseudosquilla ciliata Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., iv. 1913, p. 96 (and syn.) ; Hansen, Siboga Exped., Leiden, Mon. xxxv., 1926, p. 17. A male and two females from burrows in mud near shore. Two of the specimens were mottled with brown and black during life, and one, an adult female with the fifth and sixth abdominal segments and telson abnormal, was coloured as follows :—Dorsum, dark bottle green; dactyli of raptorial legs, brown ; remainder of all external appendages, pea-green with pink fringing hairs. ISOPODA. At the Flinders Islands, Isopods are poorly represented as regards number of species, although a few forms were abundant. Family EURYDICIDAE. EXCIROLANA ORIENTALIS (Dana). Cirolana orientalis Dana, U.S. Expl. Exped., Crust., xiv., 1853, p. 773, pl. li, fig. 7. i ‘uijiidaiiih orientalis Hale, Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., xlix., 1925, p. 156, fig. 14 (and rers.). Common in the mangrove swamps, where I collected specimens by standing in the shallow water and picking the little carnivores off as they attacked my bare legs. The Walmbariya natives are sometimes atinoyed by the attacks of this sca- louse, which, however, they do not distinguish from Hippa, calling both “meljeri.” E. orientalis also burrows in sand at the margin of the sea, and the aboriginal children, aware of this habit, obtain both it and Hippa by scratching rapidly in the sand at the edge of the water, thus uncovering the buried crustaceanis. Family AEGIDAE. ROCINELA ORIENTALIS Schioedte and Meinert. Rocinela orientalis Sch. and Mein., Naturh. Tidsskr. (3) xii, 1879, p. 395, pl. xiiL, figs. 1-2; Hale, Trans. Roy. Soc., 5. Austr., xlix., 1925, p. 182, fig. 27 and refs.). Dredged amongst weed in Owen Channel, 3 faths. Family SPHAEROMIDAE. Mr. Baker identifies the few species secured as follows :— ExoSPHAEROMA INTERMEDIA Baker. Exosphacroma intermedia Baker, Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., i., 1926, p. 249, pl. xxxix., figs. 1-8. Dredged amongst weed in Owen Channel, 3 faths. The type was from the Gulf of Carpentaria, 35 CYMODOCE PELSARTI Tattersall. Cymodoce pelsarti Tatt., Journ, Linn. Soc., London, xxxv., 1922, p. 15, pl. it, figs. 30-33, and pl. iii, fig. 36. This species, which is common on mud near shore at Flinders Island, is very close to C. longistylis Miers. CILICAEOPSIS WITITELEGGEI Stebbing. Cilicaea whiteleggei Stebb., Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fish.; Suppl, Rep., No. xxiii, 1905, p. 39, pl. ix. (a), (B). On sandy bottom in Owen Channel, 2 faths. Mr. Baker considers that this form is referable to Cilicaeopsis. Family IDOTEIDAE. Only a single species of the family was secured, but this proves to be a form of considerable interest, for which it is necessary to erect a new genus. Lyidotea, n. gen. Body narrow, not very depressed. First antennae with very short flagellum, and flagellum of second antennae composed of a single long joint. Maxillipeds with palp wide and composed of three joints; basipodite and epipodite large. Peraeon with first six free segments normal, but with last segment fused with pleon. Coxae of peraeopods not expanded into plates, all fused with their respec- tive thoracic segments, but on second to fourth segments marked off from pleura by a shallow furrow. First peraeopod shorter than others, subchelate and with propodus swollen. Pleon composed of a single segment and with indications of three fused segments near base. Type, L. nodata, n. sp. The generic characters are described from the female alone, The salient features are the structure of the antennae and the coalescence of the last thoracic segment with the abdomen. Lyidotea nodata, n. sp. Adult female, Integument soft. Body slender, widest at third peraeon segment, and narrowest at posterior end of sixth; seven times longer than greatest width. Cephalon wider than long, with anterior margin concave and antero-lateral angles slightly produced; dorsum elevated posteriorly to form a pair of high united tubercles; eyes dorso-lateral, of moderate size, First antennae reaching to end of second article of second antennae ; basal joint expanded, as wide as long, longer than the second and as long as the third article; flagellum less than half as long as last peduncular joint, flattened and furnished with sensory appendages. Second antennae thick, less than half as long as body; first joint very short but visible in dorsal view ; second two-thirds as long as third, which is a little shorter than fourth and equal in length to fifth; third, fourth and fifth joints dilated apically; flagellum slightly longer than fourth peduncular article, uniarticulate, and semi-cylindrical in shape, the outer face convex and the inner flattened ; apex rounded (apparently with a minute terminal style). Outer Jobe of first maxilla capped with ten spines, all but the innermost one being denticulate; slender inner lobe with two setose spines. Maxillipeds with basipodite shorter than epipodite; inner lobe reaching to middle of length of palp; first joint of palp short, the suture dividing it from second obscure; second joint a little longer than wide, and third suboval in shape. First four peracon segments each with a pair of large dorsal elevations; fifth segment with a pair of obsolete tubercles, and sixth and seventh nearly smooth; first segment as long as, and barely wider than, cephalon ; second, third and fourth segments subequal in length, each nearly twice as long as first, and wider than any of the others; sixth segment slightly shorter and narrower than fifth, which is shorter and narrower than fourth; seventh segment short, immovably fused with pleon, the suture most distinct laterally. 36 Peraeopods short and stout, the subchelate first much the shortest; the remaining six pairs are prehensile and subequal in length; coxae of second to fourth pairs barely visible in dorsal view. Lateral margins of pleon diverging posteriorly for three-fifths of length of pleon, then converging to the narrowly-rounded apex ; pleon and last thoracic segment together as long as fourth, fifth and sixth peracon Lyidotea nodata, type female; a and b, dorsal and lateral views (x 8); ¢, first antenna (x 34); d, second antenna (x 13); e, first maxilla (x 100); f, second maxilla (x 100) ; g, maxilliped (x 34) ; h, i, and j, first, second and seventh peraeopods (x 34). segments together. Uropods narrow, with posterior margin truncate, a little sinuate; endopod subtriangular, apically rounded. Colour-—White, with sparse dots of pigment, producing a dingy grey appearance. Length, 8 mm. Loc-—North Queensland: Flinders Island, Princess Charlotte Bay. Type—Female, in South Austr. Mus., Reg. No. C. 1699. ‘The adult female described above and several smaller specimens were dredged in two fathoms. In the younger examples the dorsal elevations of the cephalon and peraeon are not so well developed as in the type, the pleon is shorter, etc. ; also, the flagellum of the second antennae is slightly clavate, and not flattened on the inner face, a feature which may be due to the preservative, The middle of the dorsal portion of the articulation between the head and first peraeon segment is somewhat obscure, suggesting partial fusion here also, but laterally this segment is distinctly separated from the cephalon. 37 A NEW XANTHID CRAB FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA. By Mary J. RatHsun, Associate in Zoology, United States National Museum. (Communicated by H. M. Hale.) [Read May 9, 1929.] Puate IV, The specimens here described were submitted to me by Mr. Herbert M. Hale, Curator of the South Australian Museum. They appear to be representatives of a new species. Heteropanope vincentiana, n. sp, Type-locality —Port Willunga, Gulf St. Vincent, South Australia; Feb., 1895; W. J. Kimber, collector ; female holotype, in South Australian Museum (Reg. No., C. 1849) ; male paratype in U.S. National Museum. Measurements Female holotype, length of carapace 20, width of same 30-7, width of front 8:2, fronto-orbital width 15-7, chord of antero-lateral margin (to tip of last tooth) 10, length of major palm at its middle 15-6, greatest width of same 12°8, thickness 8, length of dactylus 13-6, approximate length of second ambulatory leg 40°5 mm. Description.—Carapace (fig. 1) 14 times as broad as long, antero-lateral margins thick, arcuate, shorter than the postero-lateral, cut into 4 blunt teeth, the first of which is distant from the orbit and is shallow and lobiform, No tooth at outer angle of orbit, Front deflexed, its margin invisible in dorsal view ; its middle third is most advanced. Three shallow sinuses (fig. 2) divide the margin, forming a slight projection either side of the middle and a low, blunt, subrectangular tooth at each outer angle. A narrow, shallow furrow runs parallel and close to the margin. A rounded sinus separates the front from the obtuse inner angle of the orbit. Outer lower sinus of orbit shallow; inner half of lower margin arcuate. Dorsal surface nearly flat in its posterior half; anterior half rounding down- ward. Regions scarcely indicated, except the narrow, anterior part of the meso- gastric, from which a shallow median furrow is continued part way to the edge of the front. Anterior and antero-lateral regions coarsely and closely granulate ; they are crossed by an irregular transverse furrow, a little behind the orbits. A transverse ridge runs inward from the last lateral tooth, extending less than half way to the median line. The granules become smaller, lower and gradually dis- appear on the postero-lateral regions. Smooth area punctate. Lower surface of carapace granulate. The broad basal article of the antenna just touches with its inner angle the tip of the turned-down edge of the front; the outer angle of the same segment stands in the orbital hiatus. Ridges of endostome strong. The exognath of the outer maxilliped reaches just to the outer distal angle of the merus of the endognath (fig. 2) ; the merus has two deep, oblique curved furrows which enclose an oblong space; the impression on the ischium of the endognath is sharp (fig. 4) and is not continued at either end to the margin, Chelipeds stout, very unequal. Merus of major cheliped nearly as broad as its greatest length; carpus heavy, its inner tuberculiform tooth a little behind the 38 middle of the margin; palm (fig. 3) high and thick, upper and lower margins convex, surface granulate-eroded in its upper half, punctate; fingers nearly hori- zontal; two large, low teeth on the basal three-fiith of the fixed finger; a large, backward-pointing, basal tooth on the dactylus; fingers brown in the preserved specimen, the colour ending in a scalloped edge at base of fixed finger. Minor cheliped similar, but fingers deflexed, deeply grooved, prehensile edges armed with alternating larger and two or three smaller teeth; fingers not gaping; colour not reaching palm. Legs long (fig. 1), the longer ones about twice as long as carapace, rather narrow, punctate and more or Jess rough; merus with a row of short, blunt spines above, lower surface rough with truncate granules; carpus, propodus and dactylus rough with sockets which are furnished with longish hairs; dactylus nearly straight, having a deep furrow on each side and terminating in a slender, bent, horny tip. The abdomen of a male paratype (fig. 4) is rather broad; the third to sixth segments inclusive taken together have concave side margins; third, fourth and fifth segments of subequal length; sixth and seventh segments progressively longer. This species may be recognised by its unusual width, coarse granulation and absence of hair from the carapace. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IV. Hetcropanope vincentiana. Fig. 1. Dorsal view of @ holotype (nat. size). Fig. 2. Front view of Q holotype (nat. size). Fig. 3. Outer view of major chela of Q holotype (nat. size). Fig. 4. Ventral view of ¢ paratype (x 1%). 39 VARIATIONS OF HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRATION IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF THE ESTUARY OF THE RIVER MURRAY. By T. Braitsrorp Roverrson (Department of Biochemistry and General Physiology, University of Adelaide, South Australia). | Read May 9, 1929. | Introduction; Statement of the Problem. It has, for a long time past, been in my mind that much information of interest might result from a detailed investigation of the changes in composition, density, hydrogen ion concentration, and so forth, which the waters of the Murray River undergo as they debouch into the remarkable system of lakes which separate the river proper from the mouth through which these lakes discharge their surplus waters into the sea. It is not merely that much information of hydrographic interest might accrue from such a study, but the information thus obtained, coupled with a survey of the biological types inhabiting the different localities of this lake system, would probably reveal many facts of importance concerning the adaptations which various forms of life display to the fluctuations of their environ- ment. Such fluctuations might be anticipated to be of three types, namely: (1) Tidal, (2) Seasonal, and (3) Geographical. ‘hose parts of the lake system which are most remote from the Murray mouth, such as the northern end of Lake Alexandrina, the eastern part of Lake Albert, and the south-eastern extremity of the Coorong, will be subject to less extensive tidal fluctuation of composition than the parts of the system which lie more adjacent to the mouth, but, on the other hand, while the waters of Lake Albert and the northern part of Lake ‘Alexandrina are generally so fresh as to be potable, those of the Coorong, twenty miles from its opening into Lake Alexan- drina, appear, to the sense of taste at all events, to be more saline than those of the sea. Between these two regions, both comparatively immune to tidal influence, lies an area subject to diurnal tidal fluctuations of very considerable magnitude. It is quite conceivable that this may interpose an effective barrier to the migration of certain forms, which are incapable of rapid short-period adaptation, from the one region of relatively constant composition to the other.“) In this way some of the inhabitants of the Coorong may be barred off from mingling with those of Lake Albert. The question then arises whether any of the same species are to be found in these two localities, and, if so, whether individuals can migrate from the one locality to the other and, if not, whether the types inhabiting two such different environments are identical or present systematic differences related to the adapta- tions they have undergone and recognisable as such by taxonomists. (1) When I say relatively constant I refer to the short-period diurnal variations due to tides, which exist, but are diminished as one recedes from the mouth. Seasonal variations, depending upon the volume of output from the river will occur, but their onset is usually less sudden than the changes duc to tides, and the internal compensations or migrations necessary to fit the changed conditions would be possible to many forms which might not be able to accommodate themselves to extensive changes of salinity or hydrogen ion concentration occurring within a few hours. i 40 For the benefit of possible readers abroad, who may not chance to be familiar with the gcography of South Australia, I may perhaps mention that the Murray River opens out, about thirty miles from the sea, into Lake Alexandrina, the area of which is, roughly, some 200 square miles (vide accompanying map). Close to the mouth a cluster of islands breaks up the lake into numerous channels. On the eastern and south-eastern sides of the lake two large inlets occur. The one, Lake aeagage Paver Jaoas. ALEX ANDAIN A (ALBERT PASSAGE SCALE SCALE: ee en Se ee Oe ast as TN re \ moume mes 5, 41 Albert, of some 60 square miles in extent, communicates with Lake Alexandrina by a narrow mouth and spreads ont into a wide, shallow expanse of water, The other, the Coorong, is a most remarkable sheet of water, not paralleled, to my knowledge, elsewhere. Varying from a mile to two miles in width, it runs in a south- easterly direction for about seventy miles, parallel to the shore, separated from the ocean by a narrow peninsula which is only from half a mile to two miles across. Only the upper third of the Coorong is shown in the accompanying map. It is, for the main part, very shallow, and boats drawing only two feet have to thread their way carefully at low tide through narrow channels which generally do not exceed four feet in depth, During the hot, dry summers which prevail in South Australia this sheet of water is subject to enormous losses, due to evaporation. From its mouth, where it joins the lake, to its lower extremity, where the effects of evaporation might be expected to attain their maximum, this long strip of shallow water should exhibit important differences of composition, density, reaction, etc., which, in turn, might be reflected in the characteristics of its plant and animal inhabitants. The results which | have to report represent merely a preliminary survey of the variations in one single characteristic of the waters contained in this lake system, namely, the hydrogen ion concentration. They are presented here in the hope that the account of the extensive variations which I have found to occur within twenty miles of the mouth of the Murray will draw attention to the important problems presented by this area of water, which lies so conveniently close at hand, and excite others to carry forward such investigations in greater scope and detail. As the most important problems are actually the ecological ones (which I have not the opportunity or the qualifications to investigate), it is clear that what is needed to carry out an adequate inquiry is a committee, composed of chemists, qualihed to investigate the properties and composition of the water samples; biologists, to determine the distribution of living types and estimate the modifica- tions of type which are attributable to adaptation; someone familiar with the technique of surveying, to determine the precise positions of the points at which samples are taken and, since many matters of geological interest arise, such as the nature of the deposits formed from waters of different compositions, a geologist should be included upon the committee. In explanation of the choice of hydrogen ion concentration as the particular physical characteristic measured in this preliminary study, | need only state that in European and American waters the distribution of fishes, and, presumably, of other marine forms, has been found to be profoundly affected by hydrogen ion concentration. To such an extent is this the case, that it appears probable that this factor is quite as important as density in affecting the lives of the organisms which inhabit the water. In regard to such questions J] have no personal observa- lions to report, but, according to the testimony of local fishermen, the Murray Cod is not found nearer the Murray mouth than Narrung, at the entrance of Lake Albert. Whether the bar to its further migration is constituted by the increasing salinity or decreasing alkalinity as the mouth is approached, cannot, of course, be stated. RESULTS. The estimations of hydrogen ion concentration are expressed in terms of Pu, following the now universal convention. The determinations were made with the aid of a Hellige Comparator, very kindly lent to me for this purpose by Mr. J. G. Wood, of the Department of Botany, The indicators employed were Cresol Red and Thymol Blue, the sensitive ranges of which cover the variation of Px values which were encountered in these determinations. The samples, wherever the depth of water permitted, were taken at a uniform depth of four 42 feet from the surface. This was accomplished by drawing out test tubes in a flame (applied to the upper extr emity) into a narrow tube, then evacuating and sealing in the flame in such a way that the drawn out end fell over in the shape of a hook. Care must be taken not to employ too hot a flame, so that this bent, narrow end of the evacuated tube will remain hollow. ‘These tubes were suspended by half- hitches in a thick linc, provided with a heavy sinker, and a float so adjusted that it was four feet above the narrow end of the tube which pointed upwards. A thin line was attached to the hook-shaped narrow extremity of the evacuated tube and paid out loosely as the tube sank, until the float touched the water. The thin line was then sharply jerked, which resulted in breaking the narrow end of the tube, the water entering through the opening into the evacuated tube which, when drawn up, was full of water. The end was then further broken to permit the water to be poured out into the graduated tube in which it was mixed with the indicator solution. The samples were always taken from a stationary boat. The results obtained under usual tidal conditions are shown in the accompany- ing map and may also be summarised as follows, the “starting point” in each case being a point just off the peninsular shore at the middle of Tauwitchere Channel, which is the narrow channel separating Tauwitchere Island from Younghusband’s Peninsula. The distances given are in nautical miles 1. Starting point, across the Murray mouth and around the Western end of Hindmarsh Island: Distance from Starting Point. Du. At starting point .. = .. 84 1-5 miles towards mouth of Murray sf yy re 3:5 miles towards mouth of Murray, fou off mouth of Boundary Creek . ‘ 8:3 4°5 miles, close to mouth, just at ‘the corner of the south-west shore 8-2 5-1 miles, directly opposite the ‘mouth off the shore of Mundoo Island .. . 8&0 6°4 miles, being 1:3 miles from mouth ‘towards Goolwa 8&4 8:O miles... an fy os 4 .. 8&4 11:1 miles... a2 y 3 .. 84 13-3 miles, off Goolwa 8-4 15-4 miles, that is, 2°1 miles cast from Goolwa, i in the channel north of Hindmarsh Island 8-4 18-0 miles, that is, 4°7 miles east from Goolwa .. 8°6 2. Starting point, round the south-eastern extremity of Tauwitchere Island to Narrung, at the mouth of Lake Albert: Distance from Starting Point. Pu. 2 miles, off Mud Island 86 4 miles in mid-channel, off the ‘end of long Island ; 8:7 6 miles, off the Point Sturt trig. ‘station 8&9 8 miles, off the headland of Point McLeay 8:9 10 miles, just off Point McLeay Mission Station, in 34 feet of water .. os .. 88 12 miles, just off the Albert Passage 8:9 43 3. Starting point, round south-eastern extremity of Tauwitchere Island to Loveday Bay: Distance from Starting Point. Pu. 1 mile, off south-eastern end of Tauwitchere Island. . 85 2 miles, now heading direct for Loveday ‘Bay . 85 3 miles ; fi $4 -. 85 4 miles, at entrance to Bay. 8'6 5 miles, in Loveday Bay, off jetty on north shore, in 34 feet of water .. 8:6 4, From the opening of the Coorong to a point ake een Millen Well and Mount Anderson, 20 miles from the opening: Distance from Opening. ‘5 miles ws ; Hy x yy” ” ar Ee te es Ge onli mani rerttendll sad TDoOcommnoooo CWOMAAAAARDAN DISCUSSION OF THE RESULTS. Analysing these results, with the aid of the accompanying map, it will be evident that, as we recede in every direction from the Murray mouth, the water becomes more alkaline. The distribution of the readings strongly suggests that the Murray River water is alkaline, having a Pu of at least 8-9, and that the reaction of the sea-water at the mouth is much more nearly neutral, having a Pu of 8:0 (neutrality = 7:2). To put it more concretely, in terms of actual hydroxyl ion concentrations, Murray River water appears to be about ten times as alkaline as the sea-water into which it is discharged. Since the alkalinity increases more rapidly when we travel’ from the mouth in an easterly than in a westerly direction, the main flow of river-water, at the season at which these observations were made (at the end of summer, March 7 to 16, 1929), was round the eastern sides of the islands which are clustered aroutid the mouth. This is also indicated by the fact that this channel is silting more rapidly than the channel around the western extremity of Hindmarsh Island, and the numerous sandbanks are changing position more frequently. Although very saline, the water in the Coorong resembles river- rather than sea-water in its reaction. This may indicate that the Coorong represents virtually river-water, entrapped and rendered saline by evaporation. This explanation is upheld by the easterly course of the main flow of river-water, to which allusion has been made, which would bring the river-water past the mouth of the Coorong. An alternative explanation is possible, however, namely, that the high alkalinity of the Coorong water is due to the abundance of algae which inhabit it. It has been pointed out by Lipman (1) that algae increase the alkalinity of sea-water. When the anchor was dropped in Lake Alexandrina it came up coated with slime, but no algae. The anchor dropped in the Coorong, at a point about 8 miles from the mouth, came up completcly coated with masses of algae. The constant tendency for sandbanks and bars to form near the mouth of the Murray, which, in the past, has evidently given rise to some, if not all of the Islands clustered near the mouth, is commonly attributed to the deposition of 44 silt brought down by the river. It is not so generally recognised that part of this deposit may be derived from the sea-water itself, through the alkaline reaction communicated to it by admixture with the waters of the river. It has been shawn by Lipman (loc. cit.) that the addition of sufficient alkali to sea-water, originally of Pir = 8-0, to communicate to it an alkalinity corresponding to Pu = 8-8 to 8:9, induces the formation of a precipitate consisting mainly of phosphates of calcium and aluminium, together with small proportions of iron and magnesium. In this way no less than sixty per cent. of the phosphoric acid in sea-water may be precipitated. It was observed, in fact, that the sea-water samples which were collected near the mouth, and originally clear, deposited a fine white precipitate on standing for about an hour in a test-tube, whereas samples collected in the body of the lake did not do so. Chemical examination of the silts near the mouth of the Murray should reveal to what extent this process is contributing to their formation. The precise results obtained at any point will, of course, vary with the state of the tide. The values given represent those usually observed (for example, at the “starting point” in Tauwitchere Channel, where many observations were taken) or obtained at medium tide, neither high nor very low. The influence of tide was very clearly illustrated, however, when, on one occasion, at very low tide, on Monday, March 11, at 4.45 p.m., the Pu exactly opposite the mouth, off the point of Mundoo Island, had risen to 8-4 (that ustially found, namely, in Tauwitchere Channel), while at 6 p.m., with the tide very low and still running out swiftly, ihe Pu found in Tauwitchere Channel was 8-8, the value, namely, which was found under medium tide conditions in the channel between Point Sturt and Point McLeay, and also 12°5 miles down the Coorong. The values obtained in this investigation correspond very well with those found by Lipman (loc. cit.), who reports 8-0 as the valtte commonly obtained for sea-water containing little or no algal growth, and states that values as high as 9-4 may be found in sea or fresh waters thickly inhabited by algae and exposed to the light to permit rapid photosynthesis. He suggests that the algal population may form a very important factor in determining the rate of deposition of phos- phates of lime and aluminium from water, owing to the changes of Pu which they induce. If we accept this view, then my observations would suggest that such precipitation must be occurring at an exceptionally high rate in the waters of the Coorong, and should have led to notable changes in the composition of the dissolved mineral salts, whether these are mainly derived from the sea or from the river. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. Jn conclusion, I desire to thank the Lands and Survey Department for their very generous gift of the plans from which the map which accompanies this paper was constructed; to Mr. G. W. Bussell, for assistance in the construction of the map; to Mr. J. G. Wood, as stated above, for the loan of the Hellige Comparator used in obtaining the estimations of Pu values; to Mr. Hedicy R. Marston, for pre- paring the apparatus employed for taking the samples of water; to Mr. J. D. O. Wilson, for the preparation of the glass tubes in which the samples were collected ; to Mr. M. L. Mitchell, for the loan of the ship’s log and angle sextant with the aid of which the positions were determined; and to my companions on the trip, Professor H. H. Woollard, Dr. P. Gorrie, and Messrs. G. Fowler and C. T. M. Roach, for valuable assistance in obtaining the samples for investigation, REFERENCE. (1) Lipman, C. P., “The Chemical Composition of Sea-water,” Carnegic Institution of Washington Publications, No. 391, 1929, pages 249 to 257. 45 A CENSUS OF THE MARINE ALGAE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. Classified after De Toni, Sylloge Algarum. By A. H. 5S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. (Communicated by Professor J. B. Cleland, M.D.) [Read June 13, 1929.] This list includes all the South Australian Marine Algae, Green, Brown and Red, of which I can find records. It is doubtless far irom giving a complete enumeration of all the Algae of these groups which occur on the coasts of South Australia, and a wide field for further discovery is open to collectors and investi- gators. The statement of what is known will be of use to succeeding workers. Very little indeed is known of the marine flora of the Bight to the west of Cape Catastrophe. In the Melbourne Herbarium there are a few plants from Fowler’s Bay, and one gathered by Tictkens at Denial Bay. The Algae of Investigator Strait were collected by Miss Nellie Davey, and were recorded by Th. Reinbold, of Itzehoe, Denmark, in Hedwigia, Band xxxviii., 1899, East of the strait more is known. Baron von Miieller (then Dr. Miieller), during his residence in Adelaide, collected on the Lefevre Peninsula, near the mouth of the River Torrens, in St. Vincent’s Gulf, and some of his plants are pteserved in the Melbourne Herbarium. I, myself, collected kelps at Brighton. Miieller’s plants were determined by Dr. Sonder, of Hamburg. Encounter Bay has been explored by: (1) Miss Jessic L. Hussey at Port Elliot, and her material made use of by J. G. Agardh, of Lund, Sweden; (2) by Professor J. B. Cleland and his family, continuously, at Victor Harbour and Middleton Bay; (3) by myself, in a brief stay at Victor Harbour. Dr. Cleland has entrusted me with his great mass of material. ‘The chief collection in the eastern bays was made by Dr. Engelhardt- Kingston. His plants were gathered with much zeal and knowledge in Lacepede and Guichen bays. They were recorded by Th. Reinbold in La Nuova Notarisia of De Toni in the years 1897, 1898. Miss Ellen Macklin, of the Adelaide University, collected considerably at Robe, and has placed her plants in my hands. Mrs. Dr. Wehl collected considerably at Macdonnell Bay; her material went to Sonder mostly, but a packet of them was sent after Sonder’s death to the Sydney Herbarium. The above, then, comprise the sources of the information on which this list has been compiled. I have tried to make a beginning of a record of the geographical distribution along the coast. The records made are positive, but there are many blanks to be filled. Probably the great majority of the species extend over the whole coast- line. The numerals indicate the regions, as follows :— 1. Investigator Strait (Miss Davey). 2. Encounter Bay (Miss Hussey, Dr. Cleland). 3. The Eastern Bays (Dr. Engelhardt, Miss Macklin, Mrs. Wehl). Fragmentary— 4, Great Australian Bight. 5. Spencer Gulf. 6. Gulf St. Vincent. oe AAAS a aangaag 7 46 CHLOROPHYCEAE (Kuetz. ex parte) Wittrock. Order CONFERVOIDEAE (Ag.) Falk. Family ULVACEALE (Lamour.) Rabenh. Uva Linnaeus. ENTEROMORPHA Link. } lactuca L. 1, 2, 3. FE. compressa (L.) Grev. 3. E. crinita (Roth.) J. Ag. 3. £. clathrata (Roth.) J. Ag. 3. Family ULOTRICHIACEAE (Kuetz.) Borzi, em. EnpoperMA Lagerheim. . viride (Reinke). 3. Family CLADOPHORACEAE (Hassall) Wittrock. CHAETOMORPHA Kuetz. DicTyOSPHAERIA Decaisne. . darwintt (H. & H.) Kuetz. 3. D. sericea Uarv. 1, 2. . coliformis Mont. 2. CLapoPiioraA Kuetz. Apyounta Harvey. . valonioides Sond. 1. A. laetevirens Harv. 1, 2, 3. . mitidula Sond. 1. . daveyana Reinb. 1. . conformis Reinb. 3. Order SIPHONEAE Grev., em. Family BRYOPSIDACEAE (Bory) Thur. Bryopsis Lamour. . plusnosa (Huds.) Ag. 1, 3. B. westita J. Ag. 3. Family CAULERPACEAE Reichenbach. CauLerPa Lamour. . scalpelliformis (R. Br.) Ag. 3. C. flewilis Lamour. 3. plumaris Forskaal. 3. C. hypnoides (R. Br.) Ag. 2, 3. . longifolia Ag. 2. C. vesiculifera Harv. 3. harvey Fiv. M. 3. C. cactoides (Turn,) Ag. 1, 2, 3. . abies-marina J. Ag. 1. (Reinbold identifies with C. cliftont Harv.) Coptum Stackhouse. . obscura Sond, 1845, C. bursa (L.) Ag. 2. = C. sonderi F. v. M. 1852. 1, 3. Cy mammillosum Harv. 2. . brownti Endl. 1, 2, 3. C. muelleri Kuctz. 1, 2, 3. PHAEOPHYCEAE (Thur.) Kjellm., 1891 (Engler and Prantl.). = Fucomear Ag., 1817 (De Toni). Order CYCLOSPORINAE Areschoug. Family SARGASSACEAE (Dene.) Kuetz. Serrococcus Grev. CYSTOPILYLLUM J. Ag. . axillaris (R. Br.) Grev. 1, 2, 3. C. muricatum (Turn.) J. Ag. 2. ScyToTHALIA Grev. CaRPOGLossUM Kuetz. . dorycarpa (Turn.) Grev. 2, 3. C. confluens (R. Br.) Kuetz. 2, 3. SARGASSUM Ag. S. sonderi J. Ag. 1, 3. S. varians Sond. 2, 3. S. decipiens (R. Br.) J. Ag. 1, 3. S. verruculosum (Mert.) Ag. 2, 3. S. ertistatum J. Ag. 1, 3. S. spimuligerum Sond. 1, 3. ScABERIA Grev. S. agardhii Grev. 2. S. rugulosa J. Ag. South Australia (Melb. Herbm.), 47 CysTopHora J. Ag. uvifera (Ag.) J. Ag. 1, 2, 3. cephalornithos (Lab.) J. Ag. 2, 5. KI aN racemosa Harv. 1, 2, 3. retorta (Mert.) J. Ag. 2. retroflexa (Lab.) J. Ag. 2. . dumosa (Grev.) J. Ag. 1. botryocystis Sond, 1, 2. . Grevillei (Ag.) J. Ag. 1. spartioides (Turn.) J. Ag. 1, 2, 3. . monilifera J. Ag. 1, 3. . polycystidea Aresch. AAAAAaAAAAg Family FUCACEAE (Lamour.) Kjellm. Hormosira Endlicher. AA, banksii (Turn.) Dene. 1, 2. HT, gracilis Kuetz. 1,2. KI. Order TETRASPORINAE De Toni. Family DICTYOTACEAE (Lamour.) Zan, GyMNosorus J. Ag. G. nigrescens (Sond.) J. Ag. 1. Zonaria (Draparn.) J. Ag. Z. diesingiana J. Ag. 3. 4. crenata J. Ag. 1, 3. Z, turneriana J. Ag. 1, 3. Homogosrricnus J. Ag. H, stuposus (R. Br.) J. Ag. 3. Hf. canaliculatus J. Ag. 3. il. spiralis J. Ag. 2. CHLANIDOTE J, Ag. Ch, microphylla (Harv.) J. Ag. 3. Haviseris larg. Tozz. HT, muelleri Sond. 1, 2, 3. Hi. acrostichoides J. Ag. 3. Dictyora Lamour. D, latifolia J. Ag. 1. YD. ocellata J. Ag. 1. D. radicans Harv. 1, 3. PacHypicryon J. Ag. P. furcellatum (Harv.) J. Ag. Ditopuus J. Ag. D, marginatus J. Ag. 2. D. fastigiatus (Sond.) J. Ag. 3. Losospira Aresch, L. bicuspidata Aresch. 2, 3. Order PHAEOZOOSPORINAE Thuret. Family LAMINARIACEAE (Bory) Rostaf. Ecxionia Hornem. £. radiata (Turn.) J. Ag. 2. Macrocystis Ag. M. pyrifera (Turn.) Ag. 3. Family SPOROCHNACEAE (Reichb.) Dene. PERITHALIA J. Ag. P.inermis (R. Br.) J. Ag. 2, 3. ENcCYOTHALIA Hary, £. chiftont Harv. 1, 2, 3. SPoROCHNUS Ag. S. comosus Ag. 3, S. gracilis J. Ag. 3. Slenderer form of S. comosus, with longer pedi- cals. Not recognised by De Toni. S. radiciformis (R. Br.) Ag. 3. S. scoparius Harv. 1, platylobium (Mert.) J. Ag. 2, 3. 1,2. KI. 3, 6. wv 48 Family CHORDARIACEAE (Ag.) Zan. CorYNOPHLOEA Kuetz. LreaTHEsia Gray. C. zostericola Harv. 2. L. difformis (L.) Aresch. 2. There must be several other representatives of the Family on the South Australian coasts, but they do not seem to have been noted. Family ENCOELIACEAE (Kuetz.) Kjellm. Puncraria Grev. SPHACELARIA Lyngb., P. latifolia Grev. 3. S. furcigera Kuetz. 3. ScytrosipHon Ag. " S. lomentarius (Lyngb.) J. Ag. 3. 5 eee ive es 2 Puente . Spongiosus (Lightf.) Ag. 2. CotpoMENta Derb. and Sol. impaction: Ku ‘ : jeiz. C. sinuosa (Roth.) Derb. and Sol. 3. S. paniculatum (Suhr.) Kuetz. 3. HyprocLtaTurus Bory. S. funiculare (Mont.) Kuetz. 3. H. cancellatus Bory. 2, 5. RHODOPHYCEAE Ruprecht, 1855 (Engler and Prantl.). FLoripEAr [Lamouroux, 1813 (De Toni). EU-FLORIDEAE De Toni. Order NEMALIONINAE Schmitz. Family GELIDIACEAE (Kuetz.) Schmitz. WRANGELIA Ag. GeELiprum Lamour. W. myriophylloides Harv. 1, 3. G. australe J. Ag. 1, 2, 3. W. velutina Harv. 2, 3. G. glandulaefolium H. and H. 3. W. verticillata Harv. 3. W. crassa H. and H. 3. Prerocitapra J. Ag. W. watisti Harv. 3. P. lucida (R. Br.) J. Ag. 1, 2, 3. W. clavigera Harv. 3. W. princeps Wary. 1, (Reinbold uncertain. ) Order GIGARTININAE Schmitz. Family GIGARTINACEAE Schmitz. GIGARTINA Stackhouse. DicraNEMA Sonder. G. flabellata J. Ag. 3. 2. grevillei Sond. 1, 2, 3. G, disticha Sond. CaLitorHyLiis Kuetz. bey 1, 3. Se Re G. pinnata J. Ag. C. harveyana J. Ag. 3. G. wehliae Sond, C. ian nee J. oe. 3. C. lambertti (Turn.) Grey. 1, 2, 3 STenoGRAMMA Larv. i éeceinda Mary. 1,2 S. interruptum (Ag.) Mont. 6. oo) ended J. Ag. “9 20 S. leptophyllum J. Ag. 2, ©. C. australis Sond. 3. Mycuopea Harv. _ _POLYCOELIA J. Ag. M. membranacea Harv. 3. P, lacimala J. Ag. 3. M. carnosa Harv. 3. P, chondroides J. Ag. 3. M. hamata Uarv. 2, 3. CALLYMENIA J. Ag. M. compressa Harv. 3. C. tasmanica Harv. 3. M. nigrescens Harv. 3. ca Merepiruia J. Ag. M. disticha Harv. 1, 3. , : ae M. foliosa (Harv.) J. Ag. 3. M. polycoelioides J. Ag. 3, 6. M. linearis }. Ag. ms. 4. Fowler’s GELINARIA Sond. Bay. G, harveyana J, Ag. 1, 3. Family RHODOPHYLLIDACEAE Schmitz. GLOIOPHYLLIS J. Ag. '. barkeriae (Harv.) J. Ag. 3. ;. engelhardti Reinb. 3. Od RHODOPHYLLIS Kuetzing. volans Harv. 3. . blepharicarpa Harv. 3. . ramentacea (Ag.) J. Ag. 3. . membranacea Harv. 3, . multipartita Harv. 3. . brookeana J. Ag. 3. R. lenutfolia (Harv.) J. Ag. 1, 3. R. goodwiniae J. Ag. 3. Po Poy es ERYTHROCLONIUM Sond. £. angustatum Sond, 3. 1, sonderi Harv. 3, E. muelleri Sond. 1, 3. Ruapponta Harv. nigrescens Harv. 3. coccinea Harv. 1, 2. dendroides Harv. 3. verticillata Harv. 1, 2, 3. clavigera J. Ag. 3. robusta (Grev.) J. Ag. 1. Pe Py BU POD ArescHoucta Harv. . congesta (Turn.) J. Ag. 3. = A. gracilarioides Harv. . laurencia (H. and H.) Harv. 1, Ry AN A. ligulata Harv, 3. TuHysanociapia Endl, T’. harveyana J. Ag. 3. L. oppositifolia (Ag.) J. Ag. 1, 3. Order RHODYMENINAE Schmitz. Family SPHAEROCOCCACEAE (Dum.) Schmitz. PHACELOcARPUS Endl. and Dies. . complanatus Wary. 3. . dlatus Harv. 3. . labillardieri (Mert.) J. Ag. 2, 3. . sessilis Harv. 3, thy fy hy STENOCLADIA J. Ag, S. ramulosa J. Ag. 3. = Areschougia dumosa Harv. NizyMEntra Sond, N. australis Sond. 3, MELANTHALIA. M. concinna (R. Br. ?) J. Ag. 3, M, obtusata (Lab.) J. Ag. 3. CurvIEA Harv. C. laciniata Harv. 2, 3. Family RHODYMEN GioroperMA J. Ag. = Horra Harv. G. australe J. Ag. 3, = Horea polycarpa Harv. G. halymenioides (Harv.) J. Ag. 1. G. tasmanicum Zan. 3. = Horea speciosa Harv. Strcrosporum Harv, S. nitophylloides (Harv.) J. Ag. 3. RuopyMEnNta Grev. R. foltifera Harv. 3. GRACILARIA Grev. G. harveyana J. Ag. 3. TyLotus J. Ag. T. obtusatus (Sond.) J. Ag. 3. Hypnea Lamour. musciformis (Wulf.) Lamour. 3. episcopalis H. and H. 1, 2, 3. seticulosa J. Ag. 1, 3. hamulosa (Turn.) Mont. 1. Determined by Reinbold. A Red Sea and Cape of Good Hope species. Not recorded for Aus- tralia by De Yoni. mot Ruopopacrytis J. Ag. R. bulbosa (Harv.) J. Ag. 3. IACEAE (Naeg.) J. Ag. SEBDENIA Berth. S. kallymenioides (Harv.) J. Ag. HyMenocrapia J. Ag. H. dactytoides (Sond.) J. Ag. 4 (Fowler’s Bay.) H. ceratoclada J. Ag. 2, FT. usnea (R. Br.) J. Ag. 1, 2, 3, 4 (Fowler’s Bay), 6 (Adelaide). H. divaricata (R. Br.) Harv. 3, 6 (Hallett’s Cove). H, polymorpha (Harv.) J. Ag. 2, 3, 4 (Fowler’s Bay). =) QaAAD SS ais DR RS _ muelleri (Sond.) De Toni. CurysyMenia J. Ag. _ brownii (Harv.) J. Ag. 2, 3. CnAMPia Desv. . parvula (Ag.) J. Ag. 3. _affnis (U1. and H.) J. Ag. 1, 3. . obsoleta Harv. 3. . tasmanica Larv. 1, 3. CHYLOCLADIA Grev. *. fruticulosa Reinb. 1. EryTiurocoLon J. Ag. (Lefebre). 3, 6 B, Shot . leptophyllum Kuetz. . flexuosum H. and H. 3. . preissianum Sond. 2, 3. _angustum (J. Ag.) H. and H. 1, 3 hytyttty fe Binpera Llarv. splanchnoides Harv. 1. PLocAMIuM Lamour. 1, 3. 2 costatum (J. Ag.) H. and H. 1, 3. _ nidificum (Harv.) J. Ag. 1, 3. . mertensiit (Grev.) Harv. . procerum (J. Ag.) Harv. 3. . dilatatum J. Ag. 3. 2, 3. Family DELESSERIACEAE (Naeg.) Schmitz. NiIroPHYLLUM Grev. . gunnianwn Harv. 3. _erosum Harv. 3. . pristoideum Harv. 2, 3. j/. minus (Sond.) Harv. 3. _ affine Harv. 2, 3. J, parvifolium J. Ag. 3. . polyanthum J. Ag. 2, 6. _validum j. Ag. 2. _ curdieanum Lary. 1, 2, 3. PacHyGLossuM J. Ag. _ husseyanum J. Ag. 3. _ engelhardtii J. Ag. 3. Hypoctossum Kucetz. denticulatum J. Ag. 3. lacepedeanum Reinb. 3 (Deles- seria, 1 Reinb.). C. P, A, Cravuvinia Harv. cortifolia Harv. 3. PuirymMopHora J. Ag. imbricata J. Ag. 3. ApocLtossum J. Ag. tasmanicum (F. v. M.) J. Ag. HeMINEURA Harv. H. frondosa Harv. 3. S. S. Si SARCOMENIA Sonder. mutabilis (Harv.) J. Ag. 1. tenera (Harv.) J. Ag. 1. SONDERELLA Schmitz. linearis (Harv.) Schmitz. 3. Family BONNEMAISONIACEAE (Trev.) Schmitz. Privomia J. Ag. _ australasica Harv. 3. DeiiseA Lamour. hypneoides Harv. 1, 3. ._ pulchra (Grev.) Mont. 3. B, A, BoNNEMAISONTA Ag. asparagoides (Wordw.) Ag., var. hypneoides Reinb. 1. Asparacopsis Mont. armata Harv. 1, 3. Family RIODOMELACEAE (Reich. ) Harv. Subfamily LAURENCIEAE (Harv.) Zan. Laurencra Lamour. . filiformis (Ag.) Mont. 3. . forsteri (Mert.) Grev. 1, 3. _ casuarina J. Ag. 3. _ obtusa (Huds.) Lamour. 1. . fasmanica H. and H. 1. _ elata (Ag.) Harv. 1. Gs, CoryNECLADIA J. Ag. umbellata J. Ag. 3. JANCZEWSKIA Solms-Laubach, J. tasmanica Falk. 1, 51 Subfamily CHONDRIEAE (Kuetz.) Schmitz. CHONDRIA. CLapurus Falk. C. teniissima. C. elatus (Sond.) Falk. 3. f. subtilis Kuetz. 1. C. succulenta (J, Ag.) Falk. 3. CoELocLonium J. Ag. C. umbellula (Harv.) Reinb. 1, 3. Masciatostroma Schmitz. C. verticillatum (Harv.) J. Ag. 1, 3. M. scoparium Schmitz. 3. C. opuntioides (Harv.) a Ag. 1,3 = M. fastigiatum Falk. C. incrassatum J. Ag. 3. Subfamily POLYSIPHONIEAE (Kuetz.) Schmitz and Falk. PoLYSIPHONIA Grev. OLIGOSIPHONTA J. Ag, (4 siphons). PotysipHonta J. Ag, = mollis H. and H. (More than 4 siphons). P. crassiuscula Harv. ey P. cancellata Harv. 2, 3. P. ferulacea Suhr. 3. " P. atricapilla J. Ag. 3. ‘ P. blandi Harv. 3. P. hookeri Uarv. 3. CHIRACANTHA Falk. P. hystrix H, and H. 2, 3. C, valida (J. Ag.) Falk. 3. P. mallardiae Harv. 3. P. Daveyae Reinb. 1. who by A, Subfamily PTEROSIPHONIEAE Falk. POLLEXFENIA Harv. DicryMENIA Grev. . pedicellata Hary. 1. D. harveyana Sond. 2, 3. . fobata (Lamour ?) Falk. 3. D. tridens (Mert.) Grev. 3. Dz angusta J. Ag. 3. Subfamily LOPHOTHALIEAE Schmitz and Falk. BRONGNIARTELLA Bory. LopHorHaLiA Kuetz. . australis (Ag.) Schmitz. 1, L. verticillata (Harv.) Kuetz. 3. . sarcocaulon (Harv.) Schmitz. 3. Doxopasya Schmitz. D. lanuginosa (J. Ag.) Falk. 2, 3. Subfamily POLYZONIEAE Schmitz. Evuzontrewtia Falk. CLIFTONAEA Harv. . Incisa (J. Ag.) Falk. 1. C. semipennata (Lamour.) J. Ag. Subfamily HERPOSIPHONIEAE Schmitz and Falk. HeERPOSsIPHONIA Naegeli. rostrata (Sond.) Falk. 1, 3. _ HH. versicolor (11. and H.) Falk. 1, 3. Subfamily RYTIPHLOEEAE (Dene) Kuetz. PROTOKUETZINGIA Falk. Osmunparia Lamour. . australasica (Mont.) Falk. 1. O. prolifera Lamour. 1, 2, 3. Amansia Lamour. - Pinnatifida Harv. 2, 3. LENORMANDIA Sond. VIDALIA Lamour. L. muellert Sond. 2, 3. . spiralis Lamour. 1, L. latifolia Harv. 2. , Deal N ny Subfamily HETEROCLADIEAE Dene. TRIGENEA Sond. umbellata J, Ag. 2, 3, 52 Subfamily DASYEAE (Kuetz.) Schmitz and Falk. Subfamily DASYPITILEAE Schmitz. DasyPHILa Sond. D. preissti Sond. 2, 3. Sublamily CROUANIEAE Schmitz. Batiia Harv. Crovanta J. Ag. B. callitricha (Ag.) Mont. 1, 2, 3. Species (Reinbold). B. robertiana Harv. 3. B. mariana Harv. 3. LASIOTHALIA Harv. B . hamulosa J. Ag. 3 L. formosa (Harv.) De Toni. 1. ANTITHAMNION Naeg, A. horizontale (Harv.) J. Ag. 3. PrivocLapia Sond. A. nodiferum J. Ag. 3. P. pulchra Sond. 3. A. mucronatum (J. Ag.) De Toni. 1. TuHuretIA Dene. HerrxosipHonta Montagne. T. quercifolia Dene. 1, 3. H. wrangelioides (Harv.) Falk. 1. Dasya Ag. - H. gunniana (Harv.) Falk. 1, 2, 3. D, hapalathrix Harv. 3. H, guichensis (Reinb.) De Toni. 3. D. frutescens Harv. (?). 1. H. curdieana (Harv.) Falk. 1, 3. D, cliftoni Harv. 1. ITI. muelleri (Sond.) De Toni. 3. D. elongata Sond. 1, 3. D. naccarioides Harv. 3. Ilatopictyon Zan. LD. capillaris H. and H. 3. H. robustum Harv. 3. D. villosa Harv. 1, 2, 3. H. velatuim Reinb. 3. Dd. welutina J. Ag. 3. Family CERAMIACEAE (Bonnem.) Naeg. Subfamily GRIFFITHSIEAE Schmitz. GRIFFITHSIA Ag. G. gunniana J. Ag. 3. G. monile Ilarv. 1, 3. G. flabelliformis Harv. 3. Subfamily MONOSPOREAE Schmitz. BorwnetiA Thuret. Monosrora Solier. B. meredithiana J. Ag. 3. M. griffithsioides (Sond.) De Toni. 3. M. elongata (Harv.) De Toni, 3. Subfamily CALLITHAMNIEATE (Kuetz.) Schmitz. CALLITHAMNION Lyngb. Co multiftidum Harv. 3. C. spinescens Kuetz. 3. C. laricinum Harv. 1, 3. C. pulchellum Marv. 1, 3. Subfamily SPONGOCLONIEAE Schmitz, SPONGOCLONIUM Sond. HaLorLecmMa Mont. S. brounianum (Harv.) J. Ag. 1. H. preissii Sond. 1, 2, 3. Subfamily WARRENIEAE Schmitz. WarrenrIA (Ilarv, ms.) Kuetz. W’. comosa Harv. 3. Subfamily PTILOTEAE Cramer. Evrtiota Kuetz. E, articulata (J. Ag.) Schmitz. 3. E. coralloidea (J. Ag.) Kuetz. 2, 3. 53 Subfamily SPYRIDEAE J. Ag, Spyripra Harv. S. biannulata J. Ag. 1, 3. S. opposita Harv. 2, 3,6. S. breviarticulata J. Ag. 1, 3. S. squalida J. Ag. 2, 3. Subfamily TIIAMNOCARPEAE (Incertae sedis), THAMNocaRPUS Harv. T. harveyanus J. Ag. 3. L. glomeruliferus J. Ag. 3. Subfamily CERAMIEAE (Dumort.) Schmitz. CERAMIUM Wiggers. C. puberulum Sond. 1, 3,6 (Lefebre). C. nobile, J. Ag. 3. C. subcartilagineum J, Ag. 2, 3. C. gracillimum Griff. and Harv. 3. Order CRYPTONEMINAE Schmitz. Family GRATELOUPIACEAE Schmitz. HatyMENIA C, Ag. CaRPOPELTIS Schniitz. Hf. harveyana J. Ag. 3. C. phyllophora (H. and Hi.) Schmitz. PacHyMENtIA J, Ag. C. elata (Harv.) Schmitz. 4 (Denial P. stipitata J. Ag. 2, 3, 6. Bay). CRYPTONEMIA J. Ag. Prionitis J. Ag, C. undulata Sond. 3, 6. P. microcarpa (Ag.) J. Ag. 2. THAMNOCLONIUM Kuetz. L. claviferum J. Ag. 3, 6. Potyorrs J. Ag. I. dichotomum J. Ag. 6 (Lefebre), P. constrictus (Turn.) J. Ag. 2. T. proliferum Sond. 6. Family RHODOPELTIDEAE, Fam. Noy. Rwoporertis Harv. R. australis Harv. 2, 3. Family CORALLINACEAE (Gray) Ilary. LiTHOTHAMNION Philippi. LitHoPpHYLLUM Philippi. L. lichenoides (Ell. and Sol.) Hey- L. amplexifrons (Warv.) Heydr. 3. drich. 3, AMPHIROA Lamour. Foslie places here Melobesia A. ephedraea (Lamck.) Dene. Kan- Patena H. and H., usually present garoo Island. on Ballia callitricha, METAGONIOLITHON Weber de Bosse. Mexopesra Lamour. M. eres (Lamour.) Weber de . osse. 2, M. farinosa Lamour. 1. M. stelligerum (Lamck.) Weber de DERMaLITHON Foslie, Bosse. 3. D. pustulatum (Lamour.) Foslie. Janta Lamour. fray J. micrarthrodia Lamour. 1. Mastornora Dene. J. rubens Lamour. 3. M. lamourousxii Dene. 1, 2, 3. Coratrina (Tournefort) Lamour. M. canaliculata Harv. 3, C. Cuvieri Lamour. Chorophyceae ot ma o .. 29 Phaeophyceae 5% oe oe .. 61 Rhodophyceae sh i .. 250 Total .. .. 340 54 NOTES ON THE FAUNA OF DIRK HARTOG ISLAND, WESTERN AUSTRALIA. No. 1.—INTRODUCTION. By Epwin ASHBY, F.L..S., M.B.O.U., ete. [Read June 13, 1929.] Dirk Hartog Island is the most westerly land in the continent of Australia, is 50 miles in length by a width of 4 to 8 miles, and forms with Dorre Island and Bernier Island to the north, the western barrier of Shark Bay, sheltering its waters {rom the heavy western swell of the Indian Ocean. On October 25, 1616, Dirk Hartog, a Dutch navigator, landed on the northern end of the island at Cape Inscription, where he nailed to a post a plate upon which was inscribed his name, the date of his landing, and the name of his vessel. In 1697 Willem de Vlaming visited the same spot, took down Hartog’s plate, replac- ‘ing it with his own, and ultimately depositing the original in the State museum at Amsterdam, where it is now preserved. On August 1, 1699, the British navigator, William Dampier, anchored in Shark Bay and spent eight days searching for water, and from there took home to Europe a few botanical specimens, one of which has been named after him, Diplolaena dampieri. But it is to the French expedition, of which the ship “Uranie,” under the Captain Mons. de Freycinet, which anchored in Shark Bay in September, 1818, that we are indebted for the first investigation of the fauna of Dirk Hartog Island. One of the surgeons of the expedition, Mons. Quoy, landed on the Island and, as a result of his collecting, the Black and White Wren that is endemic to Dirk Hartog Island and Barrow Island was described. A century passed by before that island was again visited by a competent ornithologist. In 1916 Mr. Thomas Carter spent two or three months collecting there, partly in the early winter and again in late spring; he re-discovered the Black and White Wren, whose very existence had been doubted for almost a hundred years, and he also described several very interesting subspecies that are endemic to the island. Then in 1918 and 1920, Mr. F. Lawson Whitlock paid two fairly lengthy visits to the island, adding thereby to our knowledge of its avifauna. On the conchological side, in 1905, Drs. Michaelsen and Hartmeyer, in the interests of the Hamburg South-West Australian Expedition, did a good deal of collecting in Shark Bay, and in 1911 Dr. J. ‘hiele described the chitons collected by them; of the seven then described as new, several were from Shark Bay. The types of these are in the Berlin Museum, atid hitherto only one of the seven has been represented in any Australian collection. The two main objects of the writer’s visit was to study and collect the specialized avifauna of Dirk Hartog Island and to collect examples for Aus- tralian collections of some of Thiele’s new species of chitons. In both of these directions the expedition was largely successful. My colleague, Dr. A. Chenery, and myself had planned to give a week or ten days to the island, but owing to the unfortunate stranding of the steamer that calls in at Shark Bay, my time was reduced to four clear days, September 24 to 27, 1927, Dr. Chenery was able to stay a few more days, but I had to catch the motor mail at Carnarvon to keep another appointment. During our stay we were generously entertained by Mrs. and Major Chenery who are part owners of the Dirk Hartog sheep station, and I gladly take this opportunity of expressing my thanks, and also acknowledge our mndebtedness to the Chief Inspector of Fisheries (Mr. Aldrich) of Perth, and Mr. Walter Edwards, the Fisheries Inspector stationed at Shark Bay, who both 55 showed us many kindnesses. The rocks are limestone or coral, both unsuited to Polyplacophora, and the chiton fauna was numerically very poor. Examples of some of the species collected were sent to Dr. J. Thiele, of Berlin, to compare with his types, and extracts of his replies are quoted herein. The rainfall of the island is about 12 inches. Trees are quite absent, but extensive areas are covered with low “scrub,” some of the larger bushes reach a height of 15 feet; representatives of the Leguminosae, Myrtaceae, Proteaceae, Malvaceae and other families were noticed in this scrub, and many of them were very showy when in flower, but the genus Eucalyptus was represented by only a few meagre patches of dwarf mallee-like forms. There was a large variety of herbaceous and annual plants, which together with many of the bushes are found to be excellent sheep feed. Thomas Carter’s paper, “The Birds of Dirk Hartog Island: ‘The Ibis’” (vol. v., No. 4, pp. 564-611, 1917), and F. Lawson Whitlock’s paper, “Notes on Dirk Hartog Island: ‘The Emu’ ” (vol. xx., pp. 168-189, Jan., 1921), both furnish maps and are exceedingly interesting and mformative. The notes under the heading “Aves” are the combined observations of Dr. A. Chenery and the writer. The mollusca collected, other than chitons, were handed over to the South Aus- tralian Museum, and the following coleoptera also were handed over to the same museum and identified by Arthur M. Lea. COLEOPTERA. SCARABAEIDAE. Haplonycha crassiventris Blanch. Bolboceras insigne Lea. Two examples of each of these came to light at the homestead, Dirk Hartog Island. Mr. Lea states that both these species are very desirable ones, only known by very few examples. Of the former only two examples have hitherto been known, the type being in the Paris Museum and the other in the Blackburn Collection, labelled as having come from Lake Austin, Western Australia. CHRYSOMELIDAE. Paropsis hemisphaerica Chp. Paropsis niobe Blackburn. MOLLUSCA. A number of shells were collected by the writer, and it was intended to publish the record as a separate paper, but they have unfortunately been absorbed into the Muscum Collection, with the exception of a member of the Fissurellidae belonging to the genus Eligidion, this is being described by Mr. B. C. Cotton, Assistant Conchologist of the South Australian Museum, to which Museum all the coleoptera and mollusca collected (except chitons) have been presented by the writer. Inpo-AUSTRALIAN FAUNAL REGION. AéShby, in “The Regional Distribution of Australian Chitons” (Report Aust. Assn. Adv. Sci., vol. xvii, pp 366-393, 1924), proposed a new Faunal Region, based on the influence of a warm current that is shown by Haligan to come in from the Indian Ocean and impinge on the coast of Australia at Shark Bay (of which bay Dirk Hartog Island forms part of the western rampart), this current then flows down the west coast, turning at Cape Leeuwin in an easterly direction and flowing along the southern coast of the Australian Continent over the cold and heavier western or antarctic current. Haligan supplies data to show that the 56 temperature of the surface water is raised appreciably by this current as far as Cape Northumberland on the eastern border of the State of South Australia. The limited evidence that it was possible to obtain during this expedition, certainly, from the point of view of the Polyplacophora, supports the acceptance of the pro- posed Indo-Australian Faunal Region, The two open ocean species of chiton, both common and endemic to the State of Western Australia, appear to reach their northern limit in the north of Shark Bay, and one of the commonest ischnochitons in South Australia is also the commonest ischnochiton on the rocks on the sheltered side of Dirk Hartog Island but has not been recorded from further north, and its extreme limit eastward is found on the northern coast of Tasmania. NOTES ON THE FAUNA OF DIRK HARTOG ISLAND, WESTERN AUSTRALIA. No. 2.—AVES. (Including joint observations of Dr, A. Chenery and the writer.) Prep Cormorant (Phalacrocorax varius Gmelin, 1789.) Nesting in great numbers on Quoin Bluff, on the ledges in the limestone cliffs ; D gs ~ tos young almost fully fledged. AUSTRALIAN PELICAN (Pelecanus conspicilatus Temminck, 1824). Only a few birds seen. REb-TAILED ‘Tropic Biro (Phaethon (?) rubricaudus Boddaert, 1783). I saw a Tropic Bird some miles out at sea and some distance south of the island, the light was not good enough to enable one to distinguish the colour of the long tail feathers but I concluded that it was the red-tailed species; as it was noticed sevcral times, there may have been more than one bird. The following twelve species only need be recorded :—Crested ‘1 bergit), Fairy Tern (Sterna nereis), Silver Gull (Larus Novea-Hollandiae), Pacific Gull (Gabianus pacificus), Pied Oystercatcher (Haematopus ostralegus), Banded Plover (Zonifer tricolor), Tastern Curlew (Numenius cyanopus), (?) Whimbrel (Numenius phaeopus), Red-necked Stint (Frolia ruficollis ), Sharp- tailed Stint (Erelia acuminata), Australian Bustard (Eupodotis australis), ern (Sterna Reer Heron (Demigretta sacra Vieillot, 1817). Both the dark and the white forms were noted. WEDGE-TAILED Eacre (Uroactus dudax, Latham, 1801). WHITE-BREASTED Sea-Eacte (ILaliacétus leucogaster Gmelin, 1788), NANKEEN Kesrret (Falcv cenchroides Vigors and Horsfield, 1827). OsprEY or FISH-HAWK (Pandion haliaétus, Linne, 1758), Several pairs of these birds were seen, One pair had made their nest, con- sisting of almost a cart-load of sticks, on the summit of a small conical hill, locally known as “Monkey Hill,” near Surf Point, the southern extremity of the island; in the nest were two fledglings with wing feathers well developed; the parent 57 birds continued to make loud cries as long as one was within the neighbourhood of the nest; it was a very fine sight to see these splendid birds circling round and round overhead, sometimes swooping down within fifty feet of the spectator. HorsFieLp Bronze-Cuckoo (Chalcites basalis Horsfield, 1821.) One specimen collected by Dr. Chenery. WELCOME SWALLOW (Hirundo neovéna Gray, 1842). These birds were nesting at the Homestead. WHiITE-FRONTED Cuat (Epthianura albifrens Jardine and Selby, 1828), One nest found on a samphire-flat containing three eggs. THe Dirk Hartoc ScruB-WREN (Sericornis balstoni Grant, 1909). Sericornis balstont Grant (Bull, B.O.C., 23, 72, 1909, Bernicr Is.). Sericornis maculatus hartogi Carter (Bull, B.O.C., 37, 6, 43, 1916, Dirk Hartog Is.). In September, 1928, I left my skins from Dirk Hartog Island in Melbourne for Mr. A. G. Campbell to examine, stating that at a meeting of the South Austra- lian Ornithological Association we had come to the conclusion on the skins we had before us (two collected by Dr. Chenery and two by myself), that the Dirk Hartog Sericornis was worthy of being given full specific status. Mr. Campbell wrote me under date September 15, 1928:—“Mr. Ashby’s skins of Sericornis agree with those in the H. L. White collection from Dirk Hartog Island and Bernier Island. These are distinct from Sericornis maculatus and are being kept so in the forthcoming biographies. Distinguishing marks are, pallid back; white ground to under-surface including under wing coverts; tail tips white all round.” To this I would add that in the four examples collected, the anterior portion of the superciliary white line, common to the members of the genus Sericornis, is: in these skins so broadened and the lores so pale as to make the lores white to dirty-white, a feature previously unknown in the genus Sericornis. One of the examples is a male with almost white lores. This led us to conclude that this peculiar feature was common to both sexes, but when passing through Melbourne [ had the privilege of glancing through the skins in the “White Collection” and noticed there some of adult males in which the lores were darker, although still quite distinct from S. maculatus. 1 have no skins from Bernier Island, but feel justified in accepting Mr. Campbell’s statement that they are conspecific with the bird on Dirk Ilartog Island. Grant’s name antedates that of Carter’s. I have an example of Mellor’s S. a. geraldtonensis, taken by myscli at the same time and place as the holotype; this differs widely from the Dirk Hartog bird, but seems nearer that species than is the dark form of S. maculatus from the south-western corner of the western State. This striking insular species was common in all places visited, it is quiet and mouse-like in its movements, but if one is still in any locality where are thick bushes, and make a few lip calls, these little birds will be seen creeping about in the shelter of the bush, coming out first in one place and then in another to have a look, often, as noticed by Carter, making a scolding note, evidently taking uumbrage at the intruder. Tue Dirk Hartoc Istanp Rock FieLtp WrEN (Calamanthus montanellus hartogi Carter, 1916). C. campestris hartogi Carter, Bull. B.O.C., 37, 6, 1916. This is another of Carter’s finds and is a very striking insular form nearest to C. montanellus Milligan, but the streaking is darker and narrower, both in 58 upper and lower plumage; but it differs from that species, and also from C. cam- pestris and C. isabellinus, in the absence of rufous and buff colouration in either upper or lower plumage, and in that the ground colour of the under-side is white. This bird was much more local than the Sericornis, but in the clumps of bushes where it did occur it was numerous. The male birds, in common with the allied forms on the mainland, have a very sweet song, which is produced from exposed positions on the tops of bushes, disappearing into the bush while the intruder is still a good way off; when moving in the bushes or running from one bush to another, along ihe ground, they cock their tails. The two I made skins of were both males, in one the iris is recorded as yellow, in the other “very pale straw colour.” Dirk HarroG Istanp Emu Wren (Stipiturus malachurus hartogi Carter). S. a. hartogt Carter, Bull. B.O.C., 37, 6, 1916. : As compared with the Emu Wren of the mainland this subspecies is a dwarf, in fact in respect to size it seems closcr to S. ruficeps Campbell; but in that species in the male the blue of the throat extends right round the eye and side of face, whcreas in all the forms of S. malachurus, in the male, the feathers below the eye and side of face are never blue. The female differs widely from any other form in the pale silvery-grey ground-colour of the upper plumage, this is especially marked on the head and neck; a reference to Carter’s colour plate (Ibis, 1917, pl. xi.) will show almost the correct tone of grey, but the proportion of grey to the dark streaking should be reversed, namely two of grey to one of black; the under- side of this island form is a much paler shade of buff than any mainland form. The tail of a female in my collection is even longer than that of the male, figured in Carter’s plate. The full measurements of this skin are:—Total length, includ- ing tail, 150 mm.; length from tip of beak to base of tail, 50 mm.; tail, 10 mm.: wing, 39 mm; culmen, 10 mm.; tarsus, 20 mm.; colour of iris, dark walnut; tarsus and fect, pale brown; bill, grey-black upper, horn lower. This species was first noted nearly 20 miles north of the homestead in low bushes, not far from the eastern shore of the island, but was again met with on the wind-swept downs on the western side of the island, immediately above the cliffs which there are several hundred feet in height, the great ocean rollers of the Indian Ocean breaking ceaselessly at their base. The surface of the rolling downs above is largely covered with a dwarf myrtaceous shrub which I took to be a Thryptomene, this dwarf shrub taking much the same place here that the heaths (Erica and Calluna) do on the moors of the British Isles. This Emu Wren shelters in these shrubs, is very shy and retiring and difficult to locate or flush, when flushed it flies with feeble flight in a straight line, its long tail held horizontally behind. We secured several females and one male, but as Whitlock failed to secure a male during his two collecting trips to the island, it is evident that the male is even more shy than the female. THE Brack anp WHITE WrReEN (Malurus leucopterus Dumont, 1824). M. leucopierus Dumont, Dict. Sci. Nat., 30, 118, 1824. As stated in the introduction, the type of this species was taken on Dirk Hartog Island by Mons. Quoy in 1818. While this Wren is apparently present throughout the length and breadth of the island, owing to its retiring and shy habits it requires searching for. The first example 1 personally saw was on September 24, when a company of these little birds was noticed in some bushes on the sandhills bordering the South Passage at the southern extremity of the island, less than half a mile from Surf Point; the width of the channel here separating the island from the mainland is stated by Carter to be “barely a mile.” 59 As neither Carter or Whitlock seem to have done any collecting on this southern end of the island, this observation, so near to the mainland, is of importance; there is no doubt as to the identification, for one or more of the black and white males were easily seen in this small flock. To the north and west of the homestead we saw many birds and secured a nice series of skins. At one point near the eastern shore several cock birds, with the attendant females, were noticed in low bushes growing on small hillocks of sand, separated from one another by samphire flats. Then again, I noticed several males well up on the elevated western downs bordering the Indian Ocean. The population of Black and White Wrens on this island must run into scores of thousands; the “cats gone wild” mentioned by Whitlock, I am thankful to say, do not seem in any degree to have diminished the numbers of this extremely interesting form of malurus. Habits—As betore mentioned, these birds go in companies containing a number of females and young males, in plain brown upper plumage and almost white under, with one or more adult males dressed seemingly, entirely in black and white, except the tail feathers which are deep blue. These adult males are very shy but have the habit of perching upon the topmost branches of the bush they happen to be in, and watching the intruder at a distance, or if disturbed when the intruder is nearer, they quickly disappear into the shelter of the bush, making their exit near the ground on the opposite side and thus passing through bush after bush if small, or remaining hidden if a large bush; in fact, they are adepts at doing a sort of disappearing trick; it requires the greatest vigilance of the observer if he is to keep in touch with the bird at all. It was also noted that the black plumage is inconspicuous except when the observer is quite near, and the pure white wing coverts are also invisible except when seen against a dark background. The plain plumaged birds, to a certain extent, scatter when dis- turbed, but whether this is due to any warning call of the male or not I could not ascertain. Description.—None of the cock birds collected by us show any blue except in the tail, the pure white wing patch is made up, according to Mathews, of “inner upper wing coverts, scapulars, upper-back, and innermost secondary quills”; the flight quills are brown and rest of both upper and under plumage is intense black, but the crown of the head has a distinct sheen-like satin. ‘The measurements and data of a male were made in the flesh. Total length, tip of beak to tip of tail, 120 mm.; wing, 41 mm,; tail, 57 mm.; culmen, 9°5 mm.; tarsus, 21 mm.: iris, brown; feet, dark horn; tarsus, horn colour; bill, black. In the female the bill is reddish-horn; iris, feet and tarsus, same as male. Discussion.—_Several theories have been proposed to explain the existence on both Dirk Hartog Island and Barrow Island, separated, as they are, by 400 miles of sea, of a Black and White Wren endemic to these two islands and occurring nowhere else. Are they survivals of a primitive form which has disappeared on the mainland, or are they, as I believe, representatives of a mainland species that has, owing to special ecological conditions common to these two widely-separated islands, changed in its plumage from deep blue and white to black and white. In advancing this hypothesis, I am able to advance some data from my own collection which has encouraged me to propound this theory as against that of survival. I have in my collection skins of three males from different localities on the mainland of Western Australia of the Blue and White Wren (M. cyanotus Gould, 1865), all show a much deeper blue than do examples from South Australia. One, from the coast hills 160 miles north of Perth, shows many almost black feathers intermingled with the blue, and a male I collected on Peron Peninsula on September 29, 1927, 300 miles further north than the preceding example, is 60 so dark in colour that it looks black in some lights; in fact, I have several times picked up this skin thinking it was one of the Dirk Hartog Island specimens, until I altered the angle of light. It will be noted that only 20 miles of water separate the two localities. As before stated, barcly a mile of water separates the island at its southern extremity from the mainland, it seems almost certain that gales will at times drive the Blue and White Wren from the mainland to the island or the island bird on to the mainland. In face of the evidence advanced which indicates a gradual transition from lighter blue to darker in the western examples of M. cyanotus, evidences that this tendency is emphasised as one proceeds northwards along the coastal belt, we are surely justified in assuming that this melanote tendency attains its maximum development on the two islands named owing to the presence there in excess of the inducing cause or causes. It is interesting to note that the females of the two species are practically identical. Tue Drrk Hartoc Isranp PurPLe-BAcKED WrEN (Malurius assimilis hartog: Mathews, 1918). Malurus lambertt hartogi Mathews, Bull. B.O.C., 39, 24, 1918. Several examples of both male and female were secured; their plumage is exceptionally brilliant, the blue around the eye and cheek is a little different in shade from any examples I have seen from South Australia, and in this sub- species this shade of blue extends along the margin of the crown. I notice that Carter identified his specimens from Dirk Hartog Island with the subspecies occidentalis Mathews, 1912. Not having seen examples of occidentalis, 1 cannot express an opinion as to whether Mathews was justified in separating it, neverthe- less, recognising that the insular bird warrants subspecific separation from the South Australian, | accept Mathews’ name, fartogi. We found these Wrens shy, but noted them in several localities a good many miles apart. . WESTERN SiILvernvE (Zosterops australasiae Vieillot, 1817). Sylvia australasiae Vieillot, Nouv. Dict., 11, 235, 1817, These birds were very numerous on the island and may be presumed to repre- sent Mathews’ subspecies edwini from Carnarvon, only 80 miles to the north-east. In the two examples we collected on the island, | cannot note any differences from skins taken from the mainland further south. Brown Honeyeater (Gliciphila indistincla Vig. and Hors., 1827). Only seen at 12-mile well, where Carter camped. Srncinc Honeyveater (Meliphaga virescens Vieillot, 1817). Melithreptus virescens Vieillot, Nouv. Dict. 14, 329, 1817, Shark Bay, W.A, This was much the commonest bird on the island. We did not collect any specimens on the island but did collect several on Peron Peninsula, just 20 miles across the water. It is understood that the type described by Vieillot was taken on the same peninsula. I notice that Mathews, in 1920, separated the bird on the island under the subspecific name hartogi, but such a strong flying bird is not likely to have been isolated from the mainland. Tue AUSTRALIAN Prert (Anthus australis Vieillot, 1818). ‘These birds were fairly common, but one example only was taken; this skin does not exhibit any features separating it from the mainland birds, which from 61 the same localities show a fairly wide margin of variation; I am, therefore, not adopting Mathews’ subspecific name of hartogi, ZEBRA FIncH (Taeniopygia castanotis). This species was common at the wells, but one example only was collected on the island; the same species was also numerous on Peron Peninsula, but I cannot note any characters distinguishing examples I secured there and on the Murchison from the form we have in South Australia, so am not making use of Mathews’ name hartogt. LittLte Crow (Corvus bennetti) (?). We did not collect any specimens on the island, and therefore the identifica- tion of the island bird with this crow is uncertain. As there are no trees on the island, the crows we saw were nesting on most of the windmills. NOTES ON THE FAUNA OF DIRK HARTOG ISLAND, WESTERN AUSTRALIA. No. 3.— POLY PLACOPHORA. ACANTHOCHITON BEDNALLI JOHNSTONI Ashby. Acanthochiton bednalli, var. johnstoni, Ashby (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlvii., p 231, 1923). _ This shell was described by the writer as a variety of A. bednalli, from three examples that were collected by W C. Johnston at about half way between Carnarvon and Maud Landing; [ now suggest treating this western form as a subspecies. Definition —Differs from A. bednalli s.s., in that the dorsal area in this form, from the beak forwards for about half the length, is ornamented with longitudinal rows of elongate, squamose granules, which then for a short distance in some examples shows a little longitudinal grooving which is replaced by a smooth surface, except for transverse growth ridges. The consistent deep longitudinal grooving, that is so typical of bedmalli, is in this form absent; also, the fringe spicules of the girdle are decidedly coarser than bednalli s.s. This description is made from an example collected by the writer at Woodman’s Point, near Fre- mantle, because the type from North of Carnarvon had the dorsal area eroded, this example now becomes the neotype. Two juvenile examples were obtained on rocks, at low tide, four miles south of the homestead on the island. The smaller, which measures only 3 mm. in length, possesses such a broad dorsal area that it is with hesitation that the writer assigns it to this species, but the larger, which is curled and measures about 5 mm. in length, seems quite typical of this subspecies, Noroprax suBvirivis Torr. Acanthochites subviridis Torr (Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Austr., vol. xxv., p. 104, 1911). One example in excellent preservation, measuring, dry, 12-5 mm. in length, was obtained four miles south of the homestead, it is a typical specimen. The occurrence of this rare Notoplaxy at Dirk Hartog Island extends our knowledge of its range of habitat nearly 600 miles northwards. The only previous records were the four specimens collected by Torr at Albany, 1910, and three by the writer at Yallingup in 1929, 62 IscHINOCHITON cARIOsUS Pilsbry, 1892. Iredale and Hull make Dall the author of the name cariosus, but as far as I can ascertain this name as used by Dall was a women nudum, in which case the author is Pilsbry, 1892. ‘he action of Iredale and Hull in giving generic rank to the name [eterozona has not up to the present been justified by any definitions supplying distinctions of generic status. Pilsbry (Man. Con. xiv., p. 65) treated Ifeterozona as a sub- genus of the genus /schnochilon, proposed by Dall, 1873 (Table of Regular Chitons, 1873), Pilsbry accepting the name as of subgeneric value on account of the “girdle bearing small scales with large striated scales intermingled,” but later, in vol. xv., p. 82, he treats the name Heterogona as a section of the genus Ischnochiton only. As the two other species which Iredale and Hull include in their genus Heterozona, namely I. fruticosus and I. subviridis, neither possess the character of “intermingled large girdle scales,” such treatment is without justification. The main character on which Pilsbry’s section Heterozona was founded, “the inter- mingling of large scales,” seems to be in this case only a specific character, which does not occur in J. fruticosus, its nearest ally. IscITNOCHITON CARIOSUS, vat, OCCIDENTALIS, Ashby. Ischnochiton (Heterozona) coriosus, var. occidentalis, Ashby (Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., vol. xlv., pp. 41-2, 1921). Of this variety six examples were taken at 4 miles south of the homestead and at Surf Point, the southern extremity of the island. These all show the stronger sculpture characteristic of this variety, which the writer has now collected at the following localities on the western coasts of the western State :—Ellensbrook, Yallingup, Rottnest Island, Dongarra, Geraldton, and now as far north as Shark Bay on Dirk Hartog Island. he limits of the range of I, cariosus correspond with the limits proposed by the writer for his Indo-Australian Region, interlapping with the Adelaide Region (A. Ass. Adv. Sci., vol. 17, p. 374, 1924). The largest of the Dirk Hartog Island shells measures 22 x 12 mm., this example showing none of the “large scales,” although the next smaller in size exhibits this feature. Sufficient collecting has not been done along the southern coast of Australia to determine whether occidentalis deserves subspecific rank or whether it is only the extreme of a gradual variation. IsCHNOCHITON TINDALEI Ashby. Ischnochiton tindaleti Ashby (Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Austr., vol. xlviii., p. 323-4, 1924), Two examples were obtained of this shell, that has hitherto been only known from the damaged holotype from Groote Eylandt in the Gulf of Carpentaria ; these two were obtained on rocks at low tide four miles south of the homestead. This species is near to J, Iuticolens Hull, but is separable by the character of the sculpture and the more raised lateral areas; the granules in the lateral arcas and end valves in J. lwticolens are shallow and flattened, whereas in J. tindalei they are strongly convex; this character, although in a less degree, applies to the sculpture of the other areas ; also, in I. tindalei, the grains are more crowded. The two examples from Dirk Hartog Island are hardly as strongly sculptured as is the type, this may be due to juvenility, or it may be that when a larger series is avail- able sufficient variation in I. tindalei may be found to cause one to grant this form subspecific rank only. The two examples under discussion have not been disarticulated, so I cannot say whether they show the same distinction in the slitting of the insertion plate that was noticed in the holotype. 63 CRYPTOPLAX HARTMEYERI Thiele. Thiele (Die Fauna Siidwest-Australiens, Polyplacophora, Band iii, L. ii, pp. 405-6, 1911). Dr. J. Thiele, in his description, records three examples collected by Drs. Michaelsen and Hartmeyer; one came from Surf Point, the southern extremity of Dirk Hartog Island, but the locality of the other two is unknown, probably also from Shark Bay. These three specimens have hitherto been the only examples known, and are, | understand, in the Berlin Museum. I was successful in collecting two at Surf Point (the type locality), and one between that spot and the homestead, about four miles south of the latter. Those from Surf Point measure, respectively, dry, 45 and 25 mm. in length, and were taken off limestone or coral rock at low water, on the inner side of Surf Point on the island side (north) of the South Channel, The third example was found almost completely buried in the hole of some rock borer, in a piece of hard lime- stone, at four miles south of the homestead; the animal so completely filled the hole into which it had forced its way that it was with much difficulty got out without damage, and is now preserved in spirit. This example only measures, in its curled condition, 20 mm. in length, although really the second largest of the three taken. Valves 5, 6, and 7 are in this specimen as in life and show as mere spots, nearly buried in the spiculose girdle. I cannot distinguish between this and the figure in Reeve’s Icon., 1847, Chitonellus, pl. i., fig. 3, which figure is understood to represent C. burrow: Smith. Thiele, while admitting that C. hartmeyeri is nearly allied to C. burrowi, says “the valves and also the spicules on girdle are distinctly different,” but it is unfortunate that he does not indicate the characters of these differences. Unfor- tunately, I have never seen an example of C, burrow, neither have I seen drawings or descriptions of the characters of the girdle spicules of that species and, there- fore, am not in a position to express any opinion. In 1924 (Le. vol. xlviii, pp. 239-240) the writer described and figured a minute Cryptoplax from about 30 miles north of Carnarvon, North Shark Bay, suggesting that it might be identi- fied with the still more minute form partially described by Thiele under the name C. michaelseni, in 1911. I now realize that, although the valve sculpture of this juvenile specimen from north of Carnarvon appears to differ considerably from adult C. hartmeyeri, the peculiar flattened, adpressed spicules, whose character was especially emphasised in my description in 1924 l.c., correspond exactly with those of C. hartmeyert, of which I now have specimens, The fact that in the juvenile form all the valves touch one another, did not at all suggest that species, in which the last four valves are so widely separated, but now I am satisfied that this Carnarvon example is the juvenile form of C. hartmeyert. CRYPTOPLAX MICHAELSENT Thiele, Thicle (Die Fauna Stidwest-Australiens, lc.p. 404, pl. vi, figs. 11-17). I called Dr. Thiele’s attention to the statement of fredale and Hull: “That the Thielean figures here reproduced absolutely prove that Thiele’s species is not a Cryptoplax.” To this Dr. Thiele teplics, under date June 25, 1928: “The fore- most part (anterior valve) has three incisions (slits), all the rest are without them; in my opinion the species should be placed in Cryptoplar.” With the additional light thrown upon the subject by the discovery that the juvenile shell from north of Carnarvon is the juvenile stage of C. hartmeyeri, I have re-examined Thiele’s figs. of his C. michaelseni and, if as seems probable, his specimen was one-third only the size of Ashby’s Carnarvon shell, the figures would fairly well represent a juvenile shell of C. hartmeyeri of about 2 mm. in length. Also ‘Vhiele’s figures of the spicules of the two species closely correspond with each other, if one allows for the extra magnification of the spicules 64 ot C, michaelsent, which is two to three times that of his figures of C. hartmevert. Thiele explains that he was quite unaware that the minute specimen he called C. michaelseni was a Cryptoplax until the disarticulation of the valves revealed the fact that the insertion plates were those of a Cryptoplax and not those of an Acanthochiton, this probably accounts for the omission of full measurements of the animal. In conclusion.—l have demonstrated that C. hartmeyeri possesses a specia- lized form of girdle spicule which is flat, adpressed, and grooved; that this peculiar form of spicule also clothes the girdle of Ashby’s shell which he identified with C. michaelseni Thiele, and now the additional study of Thiele’s figures supports the assumption that the minute type of C. michaelsemi also possessed similar specialized girdle spicules. In face of these facts, we have to consider that these are different stages of growth of one species, and we have reached the following conclusions :— (a) That Iredale and Hull referred C. michaelseni to the genus Acantho- chiton without the slightest supporting evidence. (b) That Ashby’s shell, which he identified with C. michaelsent, is con- specific with C. hartmeyert. (c) That C. michaelseni is the very juvenile form of C. hartmeyert, (d) Unfortunately, C. michaelseni has page precedence over C. hartmeyert, which, under International rules, necessitates our accepting C. michaelsem Thiele, as the name of the shell, C. harimeveri becoming a synonym thereof. Lopnocuiron jounstont Ashby, Lophochiton johnstoni Ashby (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. vol, xlvii., 233-6, 1923). Iredale and [ull propose to recognise in this shell, Chifon coceus Menke, a species that was never figured and the type of which was lost. Menke’s deserip- tion will equally apply to Hull’s Callistochiton granifer, to Thiele’s Callistochiton recens, ot almost any Callistochiton. C. recens Thiele was described from Shark Bay in 1911, L. johnstont Ashby from same locality in 1923, and L. granifer Hull described as a Caillistochiton from Queensland, also in 1923, but publication of his name precedes Ashby’s by a few months. I prefer to follow Pilsbry and relegate C. coccus Menke to the list of “Insufh- ciently described chitons, and species of unknown generic position.” Thiele’s C. recens was not figured but, as the type ig still in existence, T sent one valve of the holotype of L. johnstoni and the single example taken by the writer of pearl- shell, dredged in Shark Bay, during the trip, also a specimen of Hull’s qranifer for comparison with Thiele’s type. Ile writes me as follows :—“My Callistochiton recens appears to differ from the Lophochitons granifer and johnstoni in the weaker sculpture and the relatively broader and shorter middle valve, without noticcable radiable ribs.” I only secured the single example off pearl-shell that had been dredged in the bay between Dirk Hartog Island and the mainland; my opportunity of exatination was limited to about half an hour, more available time would probably have led to further discovery. The specimens obtained 11°5 x 8 mm., the radial ribbing in the anterior valve is shallower than in L. granifer, as are also the two radial ribs in the lateral areas. Tn conclusion.—A reference to the description of the type (p. 236) will show that the writer separated L. johnstoni from C. recens, not on lack of correspon- dence but on the existence in L. johnstoni of several striking characters unmen- tioned by Thiele, the most important of which was the absence of “festooning” in the insertion plate of the anterior valve, a feature that is present in the genus 65 Callistochiton ; as Hull overlooked the absence of this feature in his description of his granifer, it is not impossible that Thicle did the same. Now, in comparing the examples sent, Dr, Thiele only mentions as separating characters in his shell. “weaker sculpture and the relatively broader and shorter middle valve.” In respect to sculpture, I have already shown herein that the sculpture of johnstoni, especially in the ribbing of the lateral areas in the recent example, is much weaker than L. granifer; in fact, unless viewed with lateral lighting, the existence of radial ribbing in the lateral areas is imperceptible. With regard to the proportional longitudinal and lateral measurements, these vaty greatly in the median valves of Ashby’s type, the single valve sent to Dr. Thiele was longitudinally considerably longer than any of the others; this will account for the apparent difference noted by Thiele. If Thiele’s C. recens is without “festooning” in the insertion plate of the anterior valve it is certainly a Lophochiton, and coming, as it does, from the saine locality, namely Shark Bay, both it and Ashby’s L. johnstoni may safely be considered conspecific, As a result of this discussion we have -— (a) Solivaga recens ‘Thiele of [redale and Hull becomes Lophochiton recens Thiele; their genus Soliviga has no known Australian representative, even tf it has any justification at all. (b) Ashby’s Lophechiton johnstoni becomes a synonym of Lophochiion recens Thiele, as was rather anticipated in his type description. (¢) Callistochiton granifer Hull becomes a very good subspecies of Lopho- chiton recens Thiele, TONICA (LUCILINA) DILECTA Thiele. Lucilina dilecta Thiele (Die Fauna Studwest-Australiens, iii, p. 397, 1911). No adequate characters of generic values seem to have been advanced to justify generic separation of Lucilina from Tonicia, but with some hesitation I am retaining Lucilina as having subgeneric status, Three small specimens were taken off the rocks at low tide four miles south of the homestead, and over a dozen from the same heap of pearl-shell that had been dredged in deeper water, that has before been referred to, these all will be topotypes, as Shark Bay is the type locality. The smallest example, 5 mm. in length, is worthy of mention, it was from the rocks four miles south of the homestead, is of a beautiful pink colour mottled with lighter and darker markings, is much longer in proportion to width than usual, and the lateral areas are strongly raised, show- ing little if any of the typical sculpture. Onithochiton quercinus occidentalis, n. sub-sp. A new name for the Onithochiton from Western Australia — O. scholvieni Thiele (Die Fauna Stidwest-Australiens, iii, p. 1, 1911. Non of Thiele Rev. Chitonen, Chun’s Zool. Ileft 56, pl. ii., 1910). Dr. Thiele writes me under date June 25, 1928, in reference to well-preserved examples of this Onithochiton 1 sent him from the north of Shark Bay :—“The small Onitthochilons from Carnarvon I consider, because of their weak sculpture, not to be O. scholvieni, which species, as I have written before, comes from Vaucluse, and also from Sydney.” O. scholvieni Thiele is, therefore, a synonym of O. quercinus Gould, as there is only one species known in that locality. The known range of O. quercinus extends from south of Sydney, in New South Wales, to Mackay, in Queensland. The known tange ot the Western Aus- tralian species extends from Esperance on the South coast, up the west coast to a spot half way between Carnarvon and Maud Landing, ‘This leaves a gap 66 around the coastline (not following the indentations) of 1,200 miles in Western Australia, 1,100 miles in the Northern Territory, and 1,500 miles in Quecnsland, or approximately 3,800 miles of coastline between the habitats of the two forms, throughout which immense area of coast, up to the present, we have no knowledge of the presence of either of these species. This fact, combined with the general difference of sculpture, leads one to conclude that we are justified in recognising the western form as at least deserving subspecific separation. Differences—I concur in the main with Dr. Thiele in his statement that the western form is weaker than its congener in the east, but I admit, with Iredale and Hull, that very wide variation exists on the eastern species, but on the other hand the western species, in the adult stage, with rare exceptions, is much less sculp- tured than is the eastern form; in fact, normally the lateral areas in the western are almost, if not quite, unsculptured. Again, the western, which I propose to call occidentalis, normally attains a larger size; in fact, the large examples are much the most common. An examination of the respective girdles under 65 mag. Jeads me to conclude that while the girdles of both forms are densely clothed with shortish, stout, pointed spicules, those on the eastern shells are shorter and stouter in proportion, and also that O. quercinus s.s. normally possesses, amongst others, one particular class of spicule that does not occur in occidentalis, namcly, very short, very stout spicules, usually placed in considerable patches; these spicules either taper abruptly to a fine point or have rounded, knobby apices; these round- ended spicules suggest that the fine point has been broken off at an early stage and then mended by a redeposition of calcareous matter making a well-finished rounded apex, but I doubt whether this is a true explanation of the occurrence. This Onithochiton was very common on the exposed western side of the reef at Surf Point, Dirk Hartog Island. I have selected as the holotype of this sub- species an example collected by myself at Dongarra, Western Australia, on November 10, 1920, taken from the exposed outer reef, LrocopHuRA HIRTOsUS (Peron M. §.) Blainville. Chiton hirtosus Blainville (Dict. Sci. Nat., xxxvi., 1825). Clavarigona was proposed as a generic name for the reception of this species by Hull (Aust. Zool., iti, p. 199, 1923). Ashby in (Jour. and Proc. Roy. Soc. W. Austr., vol. viii, pp. 32-3, 1921-2) shows that L. hirtosus is typically a Liolophura, and gives a detailed description of the insertion plate of the tail valve. The characters defined by Hull as justifying his proposed erection of his gents Clavarizona are certainly beneath generic status and, therefore, the generic name of Clavarizona cannot be accepted. ‘This species was exceedingly numerous on the outer side of the bar at Surf Point, in the same rock holes as the Onithochiton. 67 NOTES ON THE FAUNA OF DIRK HARTOG ISLAND, WESTERN AUSTRALIA. No. 4.-CRUSTACEA. By Hersert M. Fate, Curator, South Australian Museum. (Contribution from the South Australian Museum.) PLATE V, [Read May 9, 1929.] A few crustaceans were collected by Mr. Edwin Ashby during his recent short visit to Dirk Hartog Island and, at his request, the species are herein dealt with. Apart from material secured on or near the shores of the island, Mr. Ashby also obtained two crabs, Halicarcinus ovatus Stimpson and Schizophrys aspera H. M. Edwards, off Woodman’s Point, near Fremantle. The following species belong to the fauna of Dirk Hartog Island :-— Family SQUILLIDAE, Only one representative of the family was found by Mr. Ashby, but it may be of interest to mention that Mr. D, L. Serventy, of Perth, recently collected a specimen of Squilla laevis Hess), at Cottesloe Beach, Western Australia. GONODACTYLUS GLABROUS Brooks, Gonodactylus glabrous Brooks, Zool. Rep. Voy. “Challenger,” xvi, 1886, p. 62, pl. xiv., fig. 5, and pl. xv., figs. 7-9; Kemp, Mem, Ind. Mus., iv., 1913, p. 167, pl. ix., fig. 113 (and syn.). A female with the colouration as follows :—Dorsum and raptorial limbs bright green, the latter with the dactylus pink at base and greenish distally ; underside and all other appendages yellow, in parts tinged with green. Family HIPPOLYTIDAE, ALOPE ausTRALIS Baker. Alope palpalis Hasw., Cat. Aust. Crust., 1882, p. 193 (nee White). Alope australis Baker, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxvili, 1904, p. 154, pl xxx, figs. 1-7; McCull., Rec. Aust. Mus., vii, 1909, p. 313, fig. 17; Kemp, Rec. Ind. Mus., x., 1914, p. 91, pl. i, figs. 3-5; Stebb., Ann. Durban Mus., ii, 1919, p. 12%, pl. xix. and iti, 1921, p. 22, fig. 5, ; Four specimens, the largest 35 mm. in length, HIPPOLYSMATA VITTATA Stimpson, Hippolysmata vittata Kemp, Rec. Ind. Mus., x, 1914, p. 113, pl. vi. figs. 6-10 (and syn.). A single specimen, about 30 mm, in length and in a soft state of preservation, represents a variety with the second legs much divided as in specimens from the Andamans described by Kemp.) In this case, however, these limbs are not asymmetrical; the ischium is indis- tinctly annulated by eight inconspicuous divisions, the merus has twenty-three to twenty-four divisions, and the carpus is twenty-nine to thirty jointed, 1) Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., iv., 1913, p. 49, pl. iii., figs. 35-37 (and syn.). (2) Hl. vittata, var, (?) Kemp, Rec. Ind. Mus., x., 1914, p. 115. 68 Family SYNALPHEIDAE. CRANGON EDWARDSI (Audouin). Alpheus edwardsi (Aud.) de Man, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xxii, 1888, p. 266 (and syn.). Family PORCELLANIDAE. Perrozisties JAPONICUS (de Ilaan). é Pa asi japonica de Haan, m Siebold’s Fauna Japon, Crust., vii, 1849, p. 199, pl. i., ig. 5. PETROLISTHES Boscrr (Audouin). canes boscii Audouin, Savigny, Descr. d. ?Egypte, Crust. 1826, p. 89, for Savigny’s pl. vii. fig. 2. Petrolisthes boscii McCull, Rec. Aust. Mus., ix., 1913, p. 353, fig. 53. Family LITHODIDAE. Lomis HirTA (Lamarck). Lomis hirta (Lamarck) Hasw., Cat. Aust. Crust., 1882, p 152 (and ref.) ; Hale, Crust. S. Aust., pt. i, 1927, p. 96, fig. 93. A single small specimen was taken under a stone between tide-marks. The species was previously known to range from Tasmania and Victoria to the shores of the Great Australian Bight, but the new locality considerably extends its known habitat. Family PAGURIDAE. CLIRANARIUS VIRESCENS (Krauss). Pagurus virescens Krauss, Siidafrik. Crust., 1843, p. 56, pl. iv., fig. 3. Clibanarius virescens McCull, Rec. Aust. Mus., ix., 1913, p. 346, pl. xi, fig 2 (and syn.). CALCINUS LATENS Randall. Calcinus latens Randall, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1839, p. 135; Alcock, Cat, Ind. Decapod Crust., ii, 1905, p. 58, pl. v., fig. 5 Calcinus terrac-reginac Hasw., Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, vi. 1882, p. 57; Alcock, loc. cit., p. 57, pl. v., fig. 7 The eye-stalks of the single small specimen secured are shorter than as shown by Alcock; no other differences are apparent, and this character is probably due to youth. Kamily MAJIDAE. MENAETHIUS MoNOCEROS (Latreille). Menaethius monoceros (Latr.) Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, Ixiv., 1895, p. 197 (and syn.). _ CYCLAX SUBORBICULARIS (Stimpson). Cyclax suborbicularis (Stimps.) Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, Ixiv., 1895, p. 245: Calman, Trans. Linn. Soc., viii, 1900, p. 39 (and syn.). Family XANTHIDAE. AcTARA MICHAELSENT Odhner. Actaca michaelseni Odhner, Géteborgs Kungl. Vet.-Och, Vitt.-Samh. Handl., xxix. No. 1, 1925, p. 43, pl. v., fig. 4. The unique female type was taken in Shark Bay, Western Australia, and Mr. Ashby now presents a second female from Dirk Hartog Island, in the vicinity of the type locality. This example has the carapace 15 mm. in length and 21 mm. in breadth, and agrees closely with Odhner’s description and illustration. In colour, it is salmon red above, with the fingers of the chelae brown, tipped with white, and the claws of the walking legs brown. 69 ACTAEA CAVIPES ( Dana). Actaeodes cavipes Dana, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1852, p. 73. Actaeodes cellusosa Dana, loc. cit, Actaea fossulata (Girard) Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, Ixvii., 1898, p. 148. Actaea schmardae Heller, Abh. Zool,-bot. Ges. Wien, 1861, p. 6. Actaea cavipes A. M. Edw., Nouv. Archiv. dy Mus. Paris, i, 1865, p. 280; Odhner, Goteborgs Kungl, Vet.-Och. Vitt.-Samh, Handl., xxix., 1925, No, 1, p. 68. Glyptoxanthus cymbifer Rath., Proc. Zool. Soc., 1914, p. 658, pl. i., fig. 6, and pl. ii, fig. 7. XANTHIAS LAMARCKII (H. M. Edwards). Xantho lamarchi H. M. Edw., Hist. Nat. Crust., i., 1837, p. 391. Xanthodes lamarckii Aleock, Journ. Asiat, Soc. Bengal, Ixvii., 1898, p. 157 (and syn.). XANTHIAS ELEGANS (Stimpson). Xanthodes elegans Stimps., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., x., 1858, p. 33; and Smithson. Misc. Coll., xlix., No. 1717, 1907, p. 47, pl. v., fig. 3. Xanthodes atromanus Hasw., Cat. Aust. Crust., 1882, p. 49, pl. i., fig. 1. Xanthias elegans Odhner, Goteborgs Kungl. Vet.-Och. Vitt.-Samh. Handl,, xxix, No 1, 1925, p. 84, Aanthias atromanus McNeill, Aust. Zool., iv., 1926, p. 313, Previously, all Australian authors have dealt with this species under Haswell’s name, X. atromanus, CARPILODES CINCTIMANUS (White), Carpilius cinctimanus White, in Jukes Voy. “Fly,” ii, 1847, p. 336, pl. i, fig. 3, Liomera cinctimana Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc, Bengal, Ixvit., 1898, p. 88 (and syn.). Carpilodes cinctimanus Odhner, Géteborgs Kungl. Vet.-Och. Vitt.Samh. Handl., xxix., No. 1, 1925, p. 14. The single male secured has a carapace 5 mm. in length and 9 mm. in breadth. When fresh, the colouration of this example was as follows >—Carapace white, with four narrow, wavy, longitudinal orange lines, not reaching to posterior margin; innermost pair extending to anterior edges of frontal lobe, and outer- most reaching to middle of hinder margin ol orbit, which is encircled by an orange line; on each side there is a short oblique orange marking from the outer margin of the orbit. Legs orange, fingers brown. The colouration is rather unusual, notwithstanding the fact that the species exhibits considerable variation in this respect. Apart from this the specimen fits well in the key furnished by Odhner (ut supra), CARPILODES RUBER A. M, Edwards. Carpilodes ruber A.M. Edw., Nouv. Archiv, du Mus. Paris, i, 1865, p. 228, pl. xi, fig. 4; Odhner, Géteborgs Kungl. Vet.-Och. Vitt.-Samh. Handl., xxix. No. 1, 1925, p. 23, pl. ii, fig. 2. Carpilodes coccineus Rath. Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1903 (1906), pt. iii, p. 843, pl. viii, fig. 4, ‘An adult male. The body is not uniformly dark red, but has a broad median band (about one-third of the total width) of white, sparsely marked and spotted with red ; this pale area extends below on to the abdomen. The rest of the carapace and the legs are red, with the exception of the fingers of the chelae which are brown, tipped with white. Mr. Ashby states that the red was deep crimson during life. CARPILONES RUGATUS (H. M., Edwards). Zosymus rugatus H. M. Edw., Hist. Nat. Crust., i, 1834, p. 385. Carpilodes rugatus A. M, Edw., Nouv. Archiv. du Mus. Paris, i., 1865, p. 230, pl. xii. fig. 3; Odhner, Goteborgs Kungl. Vet.-Och. Vitt.-Samh. Handl., xxix., No. 1, 1925, p. 20, pl. i., fig. 16 (and syn.), : Carpilodes monticulosus Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, Ixvii., 1898, p. 86 (nee, M. Edw., 1873). ; A male and a female, with the colouration as described by Alcock, were taken by Mr. Ashby at Dirk Hartog Island. 70 Odhner states that, following Alcock, there has been confusion between this species and C. monticulosus ; the mid-Pacific records of the latter by Rathbun and Edmondson particularly are referable to C. rugatus. I have examined specimens of C, rugatus in the Australian Museum, Sydney, which were received in exchange by that institution through Ch. Edmondson cf Ber. P. Bishop Mus., Honolulu, and incorrectly named by him C. monticulosus. CHILORODIELLA NIGER (Forskal). Cancer niger Forskal, Descr. Anim., 1775, p. 89. Chlorodius niger Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc, Bengal, Ixviii., 1898, p. 160 (and syn.). Chlorodiella niger Rath., Bull, U.S. Fish. Comm., xxiii, for 1903, pt. iii, 1906, p. 857. Croropopsis AREOLATA (H. M. Edwards). Chlorodius areolatus H. M. Edw., Hist. Nat. Crust., i., 1834, p. 400 (“Nouvelle-Hollande”). Etisodes caelatus Dana, U.S. Expl. Exped. Crust. i, 1852, p. 188, pl. ix. fig. 4 (‘Wakes Id., Pacific Qcean”); (?) Whitelegge, Mem, Aust. Mus., iii., 1897, p. 131. Actaeodes affinis Dana, U.S. Expl. Exped., Crust. i, 1852, p. 197, pl. xi, fig, 3 (Paumotu Group—Low Archipelago). Chlorodopsis areolatus Hess, Archiv. fur Naturg., Jahrg., xxxi., 1865, p. 135; A. M. Edw., Nouv, Archiv. du Mus. Paris, ix. 1873, p. 231, pl. vill, fg. 8; Hasw., Cat. Aust. Crust., 1882, p. 54; Miers, Zool. “Alert,” 1884, pp. 217 and 532 (and refs.) ; Whitelegge, Journ. Roy. Soc., N.S. Wales, 1889, p. 227; Ortman, Zool. Jahrh., Syst., vii., 1893, p. 470; Rath., Bull, U.S. Fish. Comm., xxiii. (3, 1903), 1906, p. 858; Bouvier, Bull. Sci. Fr. Belg., xlviii., 1915, p. 278. Chlorodopsis areolata Alcock, Journ. Asjat. Soc, Bengal, Ixvii., 1898, pp. 165-166_ (and refs.) ; Nobili, Mem. Acc. Sci. (2), lvii., 1908, p. 396, pl. ii., fig. 3; Odbner, Géteborgs Kung]. Vet.-Och. Vitt.-Samh, Tlandt., xxix., No. 1, 1925, p. 36. Actaca affinis Hasw., Cat. Aust. Crust., 1882, p. 45; Whitelegge, Journ. Roy. Soc., N.S. Wales, 1889, p. 230; Borrad., Fauna Mald. & Laccad. Arch., i, 1901, p. 254; Grant and McCull., Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, xxxi., 1906, p. 11; Rath., Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., xxiii, (3, 1903,), 1906, p. 852, and (in Stimpson) Smiths. Misc. Coll, xlix. 1907, p. 43, and Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., xxxv., No. 2, 1907, p. 42, and Proc. Zool, Soc., 1914, p. 658, and Trans. Linn. Soc., London, xiv. 2, 1911, p. 219; Balss, Archiv. fur Naturg., 88 Jahrg., 1922, Abt. A, heft xi, p. 121; Edmondson, Bull. Ber. P. Bishop Mus., v., 1923, p. 15. Odhner (ut supra) notes that there has been considerable confusion between Actaea affinis and Chlorodopsis arcolata. Miers) wrongly places Actaeodes affinis Dana and Actaea affinis A. M. Edw. as synonyms of “Actaeodes tomentosus H. M. Edw.” Probably a few references to “Actaea affinis Dana” are missed in the above synonymy, but all, if correctly identified, are referable to Chlorodopsis areolata H. M. Edw. Family GRAPSIDAE. PERCNON PLANISSIMUM (Herbst). Plate V. Cancer planissimus Herbst, Krabben 1. Krebse, iii, 1804, pl. lix., fig. 3. Liolophus planissimus Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, Ixix., 1900, p. 439 (and syn.). Percnon planissimum Grant and McCull., Proc, Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, xxxii., 1907, p. 153. ; Two males, here illustrated, were taken; these specimens are coloured as described by Alcock. The carapace of one example is 15°5 mm. in length and 13-7 mm. in breadth, that of the other is slightly smaller. (3) Miers, Rep. Voy. “Challenger,” xvii., 1886, p. 135. 71 REMARKS ON THE SYNONYMY OF CERTAIN TRISTOMATID TREMATODE GENERA. By Proressor T. Harvey Jounston, University, Adelaide. [Read June 13, 1929.] Whilst engaged in the study of some tristomatid trematodes, it became necessary to examine the validity of certain generic names which have become widely used and applied very differently by various authors. As the result seems to necessitate the sinking of some well-known names into synonymy, a sketch of the history of the genera involved appears advisable, These are Phylline, Capsala, Phyllonella, Epibdella, Tristoma, and Benedenia. The confusion in regard to some of them has been referred to briefly by MacCallum (1927). In 1815 Oken used the name Phylline to designate a new genus which included P. diodontis Oken, P. hippoglossi Muller, and Hirudo grossa Miller, his diagnoses being republished by MacCallum (1927). ‘his generic name was widely used by subsequent authors for parasites generally referred to as Epibdella spp., but it had been employed by Abildgaard in 1790 for a monozoic cestode, now known as Caryophyllaeus, and, therefore, not available for Oken’s species. The account and figures of the first-named species, P. diodontis, were based on those of La Martiniére (1787, 1798) whose material was obtained ftom Diodon on the west coast of North America by the La Perouse Expedition. The description shows it to have been a tristomatid. Bosc, however, had previously (1811) given the name Capsala martinieri to the parasite, describing the genus as new. The second, P. hippoglossi, which has commonly been regarded as the type of the genus, was based on Hirudo hippoglossi Miiller (1776).: The third, founded on 4. grossa Miiller (1788) is not a trematode, but a parasitic nemertine (Malacobdella). In 1817 Cuvier, in his “Regne Animal,” vol. 4, erected the genus Jristoma, describing and figuring one species, T. coccineum. Next year Lamarck (1818, 295) gave a summary of Phylline, mentioned the synonymy of P. hippoglossi, and stated his belief that the parasites were related to Polystoma instead of Annelids (leeches), where they had been allotted. He also referred to Blain- ville’s manuscript name, Entobdella, for the genus, but retained Oken’s Phylline. he reference was quoted erroneously by Braun (1889) as appearing in Lamarck’s vol. i., p. 444, and subsequently (1890, 518) he indicated the genus with the date 1815 (when vol. i. appeared) as a synonym of Lipibdella. Stiles and Hassall (1908, 251) credit Entobdella to Audouin 1828, whereas Agassiz (1845) and Scudder (1884), in their respective Nomenclatores Zoologici, attribute it to Blainville, but without mentioning a date. Sherborn, in his Index Animalium, gives the correct date (1818) for Entobdella (Blainville MS.) Lamarck, It was not mentioned by Rudolphi (1819), and has remained prac- tically unrecognised since. Rudolphi (1819, 427-30) mentioned the work of Oken and Cuvier, but accepted Cuvier’s genus and described a new species, T. maculatum (p, 430), quoting in the list of synonyms, La Martiniere’s account and figures, Phylline diodontis Oken, and Capsala martinieri Bosc. Since Cuvier’s and Rudolphi’s species are con-generic, Capsala Bosc obviously has priority over the better known tr 72 name Tristoma, and the family Tristomidae or Tristomatidae should be known as Capsalidae Baird, and the Tristomatoidea and Tristominae as Capsaloidea and Capsalinae, respectively. Poche’s term (1926, 108) Tristomatides, substituted for Tristomeae Tasch., becomes Capsalides or Capsaleae. In 1826 Baer subdivided Oken’s genus into two sub-genera, Tristoma and Niteschia, the latter being new, with N. elegans Baer as the only species. His three generic diagnoses were republished by Braun (1890, 527). The species was a renaming of Hirudo sturionis Abildg (1794), hence its correct name is N. sturionis (Abildg) Kroyer 1852, In the same year Nitzsch (1826) described Tristoma elongatum (= Nitgschia sturionis) and referred to Capsala martinicri. In 1827 Blainville™ erected Epibdella to receive Phylline hippoglossi (Miller). In 1840 Nordmann transferred the species of Tristoma, including T. elongatum N. to Capsala, In 1843 Rathke renamed Miuller’s species as Tristoma hamatum, including in its synonymy Hiudo hippogloss: Miller, Phylline hippoglossi Oken, and Ertobdella hippoglosst Blainville. Stiles and Hassall (1908) query the last-named generic name as having heen intended for Entobdella, In 1850 Diesing placed Epibdella as a synonym of Phylline and included under P. hippoglossi, Rathke’s species along with others above-mentioned. He also ranked Capsala Bose and Phylline Oken (in part) as synonyms of Tristoma and recognised Nitgschia as valid, The last-named three, together with certain other genera, were grouped in a family, Tricotylea. In 1853 Baird used the family name Capsalidae and restored Capsala Bose, including Phylline Oken, Tristoma Cuvier and Nitsschia Baer as synonyms. He listed two species. C. coccincum (Cuv.) and C. elongata (Nitzsch), placing Phylline hippoglossi Oken and Hirudo sturionis Abildg under the latter as synonyms. In 1856 van Beneden described and figured a new species of Epibdella, E. sciaenae, and mentioned the characters differentiating the genus from Tristoma, vig., the large ventral sucker provided with hooks, but devoid of septa; the weakly-developed anterior suckers; and the undivided testes, In 1858 Diesing founded a new genus, Benedenia, to receive Ep. sciaenae, which he renamed B. elegans Dies. In the same year van Beneden, who did not recognise the validity of the genus named in his honour, restored sciaenae to. Epibdella, gave a further account of it and of Ep. hippoglossi, and published a generic diagnosis, which was reprinted by Braun (1890, 527) and Goto (1894, 233), both of whom then amended it. He did not differentiate between the two types of anterior suckers represented by the two species, and he included the presence of regularly-arranged papillae on the posterior sucker as a generic character, He also established the family Tristomidae (Tristomides) for Epibdella, Tristoma and Udonella. In 1863 both species of Epibdella were referred to by Beneden and Hesse, and the genus, together with Nitzschia, Encotyllabe, a new genus Phyllonella (type P. soleac Ben, and Hesse) and some others, was placed in Yristomidae, while Udonella was removed from it. The diagnosis and figures of Phyllonella were republished by Braun (1890), the chief difference separating it from Epibdclla being the character of the anterior fixing organs which in the former are broad, thin, and folded, though serving as suckers. In 1865 Johnston referred to hippoglossi under Entobdella, \n 1877 Vogt gave an account of the reproductive system of Phyllonella and mentioned (Q) The date 1828 is usually uioted, but Sherborn (Index Animatium, pt. ix., 1926, p. 2169) recorded the genus as having been published by Blainville in Dict. Sci. Nat., vol, xIvii., 1827, p. 269, and in vol. Ivii., 1828, p. 567. 73 that the genus was only slightly differentiated from Lpibdella, Next year Taschenberg (1878) incorporated a large number of genera, including Epib- della, Benedena, Phyllonella, Encotyllabe, Niteschia, etc., under Tristomum. A similar attitude was expressed by him in the following year (1879) in his account of certain species of Tristoma, where he mentioned Tristomum (Epib- della) hippoglossi Oken, T, (Epibdella) sciaenae Ben., and T. (Phyllonella) solea; and quoted Nitsschia elegans Baer as Tristomum elongatum Nitzsch. In 1888 Monticelli referred to the two species of Epibdella and to Phyllonella. He termed the anterior adhesive organ of the latter a “pseudoventosa” to emphasise its difference from that of Epibdella. A summary of earlier classifica- tions of trematodes was given, and a protest made against Taschenberg’s suppres- sion of so many genera belonging to the Tristomidae. He accordingly restored Ntteschia, Epibdella, Placunella, Phyllonella and Trochopus to generic rank, He stated that Vogt’s Phyllonella solae (nec. Ben. and Hesse) was identical in struc- ture with Ep. hippoglossi as described by Beneden, and regarded Benedenia Diesing and Phylline Oken as synonyms of Epibdella (pp. 86-7 and footnote). ‘ He proposed a system of classification in which the family Tristomeae Taschenberg was subdivided into four sub-families: (1) ‘T'ristomidae Ben., containing Nitsschia, Epibdella, Phyllonella, Trochopus, Placunella, Tristomum and Acan- thocotyle; (2) Encotylabidae Montic. (with Encotyllabe); (3) Monocotylidae Tasch.; and (4) Udonellidae Ben. and Hesse. In his key to the genera (p. 97), the essential difference indicated between Epibdella and Phyllonella lay in the structure of the anterior adhesive organs. In 1889 Linstow described Phylline hendorfii. About this time Braun (1889-1890) began to publish his work on the trematodes as part of Bronn’s Tierreich. Figures of earlier authors relating to Epibdella hippoglossi, species of Tristoma, Nitsschia, Phyllonella and other genera were reproduced, and diagnoses of the sub-family Tristomidae and of its constituent genera were given (1890, 526-530). he generic characters regarded as separating Epibdella and Phyllonella were those already referred to. He rejected Capsala as being un- identifiable; regarded Phylline Oken as a synonym of Epibdella or of Tristagna; and quoted Entobdella Lamarck, 1815, as synonymous with Epibdella; while Benedenia was not recognised because erected without sufficient justification. Mention was also made that Monticelli (1890) regarded Phyllonella soleae, as described by Vogt, as a synonym of Epibdella hippoglossi, and hence Phyllonella might be identical with Epibdella. In 1891 Monticelli gave an account and published figures of the three known species of Epibdella (hippoglossi, sciaenae and hendorffi). In 1894 Goto dealt with the anatomy of many heterocotylean trematodes, including two new species of Epibdella, E. ishikawae and E. ovata, He gave a diagnosis of the genus, amending that of Beneden, and transferred Phylline hendor ffi to it, as Monticelli had done previously. He followed Braun in disregarding Benedenia as valid. In 1895 Parona and Perugia described Phylline monticellii from Mugil auratus, Perrier (1897), in his synopsis of trematode genera. placed nine of them, including Epibdella, Phyllonella, Encotyllabe, Nitzschia and Tristoma, in the sub-family Tristominae, separating the first and second according to the character of the anterior adhesive organs. In 1898 St. Remy published a synopsis of the recently described species of Epibdella and various other monogenelic trematades. In 1899 Goto re-examined E, hippoglossi and transferred it to Phyllonella, since the anterior organs were found to mark the ventrolaterally folded outlets of the ducts of a single mass of dorsally-placed gland cells. He retained Epibdella 74 for related species possessing well-developed anterior suckers, and gave a briet account of E. sciaenae, pointing out that there was a single aperture for the common genital pore and the vagina, whereas in all other species of Epibdella, Phyllonella-and Tristoma the two terminated separately. In 1900 Linton published a brief account of E. bumpusii from a stingray, and mentioned that the anterior suckers were crossed by about twenty-two ribs. His figures indicate an elongated glandular rather than a circular muscular anterior adhesive organ. The vagina and common genital pore open together in this species. In the same year Pratt included Tristoma, Nitsschia, Epibdella, Phyllonella, and three other genera in Tristominae, excluding Enctotyllabe (Encotyllabinae). He separated Phyllonella and Epibdella according to the structure of the anterior organs, Linton’s species being retained in the latter genus. In the same year Scott (1900) gave a brief account of FE. hippoglossi and Phyllonella soleae, publishing a figure of the latter and recording both as para- sites of certain flatfish in Scottish waters. In 1901 Monticelli described E. (Phyllinc) diadema from a ray and sub- divided the genus into two subgenera, Phylline Oken and Benedenia Diesing, including in the former E, hippoglossi Muller, E. soleae Ben. and Hesse, F. bumpusi Linton, and E. diadema Montic.; while E. sctaenae Ben., E. hendorffir Linstow, E. ovata Goto, E. ishikawae Goto and F. monticellii Parona were assigned to Epibdella (Benedenia). In 1902 Heath gave a detailed account of E. squamula, Next year Linstow (1903) described E. producta and followed Monticelli (1901) in retaining the same five species under Epibdclla (Benedenia). \n the same year Monticelli placed Epibdella in a new sub-family, Ancyrocotylinae, Tristomidae (fide Stiles and Hassall 1908, p. 252), and in 1904 he transferred Heath’s species to the sub- genus Phylline. Next year Odhner (1905) dealt with E. Aippogloss: and pointed out that Monticelli’s sub-genera Phylline and Benedenia were generically distinct, but that the former name, though older than Fpibdella, must be reserved flor P. diodontis Oken (= Tristoma maculatwm Rud.) and was wrongly used by Diesing and Linstow. He, therefore, restricted the namc Epibdella to the four species listed by Monticelli (1901) under Phylline (hippoglossi, soleae, bumpusit, and diadema), together with E. squamula, while the name Benedenia was utilized for the remainder. In 1906 he pointed out that E. producta Linstow was a synonym of E. soleae. In the same year Luhe described £. (Benedenia) mac- recolpa. In 1907 Monticelli discussed the relationship of Encotyllabe to the other genera of Tristomidae, including Epibdella; and in_ 1908 the relationship of Nitgschia to these same genera. In 1915 Nicoll listed £. hippoglossi and FE. soleac (Ancyrocotylinae) in his census of recorded British marine trematodes. In 1916 Cohn described Phyllonella steingroveri from an African fish, In 1927 MacCallum reviewed, to some extent, the history of Phylline, Epibdella and Phyllonella. He retained the second and third of these names in place of Phylline and Benedenia, whose use Monticelli had previously suggested. To Epibdella were assigned sciaenac, monticelli, ishtkawae, ovata, macrocolpa, hendor ffi, and a new species, E. melleni; while under Phyllonella were placed hippoglossi, soleac, diadema, bumpusii, squanuda, and steingrdvert. SUM MARY. From the foregoing it will be seen that Capsala Bose should replace Tristoma Cuvier, with consequential changes in the family, sub-family and other group names to Capsalidae, Capsalinae, etc. ; that Entobdella Blainville, with Ent. hip po- glossi Miiller as type, should be substituted for Epibdella (s. str.) Blainville; and that Benedenia Diesing, with B. sciaenae (Beneden) as type, is valid. 75 To Entobdella belong also Ent. soleae, diadema, bumpusti, squamula, and stein- grovert; to Benedenia, B. sciaenae, monticellu, ishikawae, ovata, macrocolpa, mellent and hendor ffi. Subdivision of Entobdella and Benedenia. The position of the vaginal aperture in relation to the common genital duct would permit a subdivision of each of these genera into subgenera, In Ent. bumpusii and B. sciaenae they open together. In B. macrocolpa the vagina opens beside the common genital pore, but travels posteriorly behind the testes and then for- wards to the vitelline reservoir. In the remaining species the vagina, when present, opens elsewhere on. the left side of the midline, but it is quite likely that in those cases where it has not been mentioned or has been reported as absent, that it is extremely short, opening to the exterior in the vicinity of the vitelline reservoir. We may then subdivide Entobdella into the following subgenera, Entobdella (s. str.) and Parepibdella (new. subgenus), allotting the species as follows —Ent, (Ent.) hippoglossi (type), soleae, diadema, squamula, and steingréveri; Ent. (Parepib- della) bumpusu as type of the subgenus. The species of Benedenia may be grouped into three subgenera: Benedenia (s. str.), for B. (B.) sciacnae; Benedeniella, n. subgen., for B. (Benedeniella) macrocolpa as type; and Parabenedenia, n. sub- gen., for the remaining species, B. (P.) ovata, ishikawae, monticellit, melleni, and hendorffi, with B. (P.) ovata as type. The genus MacropHyira Kent. In 1928 Miss Kent Hughes described a new genus Macrophylla, type M. antarctica Hughes, from a Victorian shark, Mustelus antarcticus. Tt was stated that its nearest ally was Tristomum, from which it was differentiated by possess- ing two compact testes; only five distinct radii in the disc; and glandular mem- branes at the anterior end, in place of suckers. The name was already pre- occupied by Macrophylla Hope, 1837. Macrophyllida is suggested as a new name for it. A detailed account of the parasite will be published later. ‘The synonymy of the genera referred to in this paper may be tabulated thus :— Eutobdella (Blainville MS. in Lamarck, 1818); type, E. hippoglossi (Miiller, 1776) Blainville, 1818, Sys. Capsala—Baird, 1853 (in part). Entobdella—Lamarck, 1818; Johnston, 1865. Epibdella—Blainville, 1827; Beneden, 1856; Braun, 1890; Heath, 1902; Linstow, 1903; Linton, 1900; Monticelli, 1890, 1901, 1902; Nicoll, 1915; Odhner, 1905; Perrier, 1897; Pratt, 1900; Scott, 1901. Epibdella (Phylline )—Monticelli, 1901. Ertopdella—Rathke, 1843. Hirudo—Miiller, 1776 (in part). Phylline—Oken, 1815 (in part), nec. Abildg, 1790; Lamarck, 1818; Diesing, 1850; Johnston, 1865; Linstow, 1889, 1903; Monticelli, 1901, 1904, 1905: Parona and Perugia, 1895; Sonsino, 1891, Phyllonella—Beneden and Hesse, 1863; Braun, 1890; Goto, 1899; Monticelli, 1888; MacCallum, 1927; Perrier, 1897 ; Scott, 1901. Tristomum—Taschenberg, 1878 (in part). Tristomum (Epibdella)—Taschenberg, 1879 (in part), Tristomum (Phyllonella)—Taschenberg, 1879. 76 Benedenia Dies., 1858; type, B. sciaenae (Ben, 1856) Linstow, 1903. Syns. Benedenia—Monticelli, 1901; Odhner, 1905. Epibdella—Beneden, 1856 (in part); Braun, 1890; Goto, 1894 (in part), 1899; MacCallum, 1927; Monticelli, 1888; Parona, 1896. Epibdella (Benedenia)—Linstow, 1903; Luhe, 1906; Monticelli, 1901. Phylline—Linstow, 1889 (in part). Tristomum—Taschenberg, 1878, 1879 (in part). Tristomum (Epibdella)—Vaschenberg, 1879 (in part). Niteschia Baer, 1826; type, N. sturionis (Abildg, 1794), Kroyer, 1852. Syns. Capsala—Baird, 1853 (in part) ; Nordmann, 1840 (in part). Hirudo—Abildg, 1794 (in part). Phylline—Oken, 1815 (in part). Tristomum—Taschenberg, 1878, 1879 (in part). Capsala Bosc, 1811; type C. martiniert Bosc, 1811. Syns. Capsala—Blainville, 1828; Johnston, 1865; Nordmann, 1840 (in part). Phylline—Oken, 1815 (in part). Tristoma (um)—Bacr, 1826; Beneden, 1858; Cuvier, 1817; Diesing. 1850; Rudolphi, 1819; Taschenberg, 1878 (in part), 1879 Gn part); and of subsequent authors. The species of Capsala at present known are:—C. martiniert Bosc; biparasitica (Goto); coccinea (Cuv.) Blainv.; cornuta (Verrill); foliacea (Goto); interrupta (Montic.) ; laevis (Verrill) ; levinsini (Montic.); megacephala (Limst.); mega- cotyle (Linst.) ; molae (BL.) apparently = C. cephala Risso, 1826; nosawae (Goto); onchidiocolyle (Setti); papillosa (Dies.) Nordm.; pelamvydis (Tasch.); perugiai (Setti) ; sinuata (Goto) ; squali (Bl.); and uncinata (Montic.). Macrophyllida . Il. Johnston, 1929; type, M. antarctica (Hughes) Johnston. Syn, Macrophylia Kent Hughes, 1928, nec. Hope, 1837, LirERATURE REFERENCES. 1853—Barrp, W.: Catalogue of the species of Entozoa, etc, Brit. Museum. 1856-—-BENEDEN, P. J. v.: Note sur une Trematode nouveaux du maigre, etc. Bull. Acad. Roy. Belg., 23, pp. 502-8. 1858—Brneven, P. J. v.: Memoire sur les vers intestinaux. Paris. 1863-5. -BENEDEN, P. J. v., and Hesse, C. E.: Recherches sur les Bdellodes, etc. Mem. Acad. Roy. Belg., 34, 1863 (1864), 142 pp. Appendix lc.. 35, 1865, pp. 147-9, 161-8. 1889-90—Braun, M.: Trematodes, in Bratun’s Klassen u. Ordnungen des Tier- reichs. Lief. 9-11, 1889; Lief. 17, 1890. 1811—Bosc, L. A., Sur deux nouveaux genres de vers. Nouv. Bull. Soc. Philom., 1811, pp. 384-5. 1916—Coun, L.: Epibdella steingréveri, n. sp. Zeit. f. wiss, Zool., 115, pp. 460-488. 1850—-Dresinc, K. M.: Systema helminthum, I. Vienna. 1858—-Diesrnc, K. M.: Revision der Myzhelminthen. Trematoden, S.B, Akad. Wien. Math.-nat. K1., 32. pp. 307-390. 77 1894——Goro, S.: Studies on the ectoparasitic trematodes of Japan. Jour. Coll. Sei. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, 8, pp. 1-273. 1899—Gorto, S.: Notes on some exotic species of ectoparasitic trematodes. le., 12, pp. 263-295. 1902—Heatu, H.: The Anatomy of Epibdella squamula, n. sp. Pr. Calif. Acad. Sci., ser. 3, Zool. 3, pp. 109-136. 1928-—-Hucues, W. K.: Some trematode parasites on the gills of Victorian fishes. P. R. S., Victoria, 41, pp. 45-54. 1818—Lamarck, J. B.: Histoire naturella des animaux sans vertebres. V., 1818. (Phylline and Entobdella, p. 295.) 1889—Linstow, O.: Beitrage zur Anatomie von Phylline hendor ffi. Arch. mikr. Anat., 33, pp. 163-180. 1903—Linstow, O-: Neue Helminthen. C. Bakt., 1, Orig., 35, pp. 352-7. -1900—Linton, E.: Fish parasites collected at Wood’s Hole in 1898. Bull. S. Fish Comm. for 1899 (1900), 19, pp. 267-304. 1906—Luue, M.: Report on the trematode parasites from the marine fishes of Ceylon. Rep. Pearl Oyster Fisheries, 5, pp. 97-108. 1927—MacCatium, G, A.: A new ectoparasitic trematode, Epibdella melleni. Zoopathologica, 1, (8), pp. 291-300. 1888—Monticetut, F, S.: Saggio di una morphologia dei trematodi. Napoli. 130 pp. 1890-—Mownrticetu, F. §.: Elenco di elminti studiati a Wimmereux, cte. Bull. Sci., France, Belg., 22, ser. 4, 1, pp. 417-444. 1891—Monricetut, F. S.: Di alcuni organi di tatto nei Tristomidi, etc. Boll. Soc. Nat. Napoli, 5, 1891 (1892), pp. 99-134. 1901—Monxticetu, F, S,; A proposito di una nuova specie del genere Epib- della, Boll. Soc. nat. Napoli, 15, pp. 137-145. 1904—-Monticetit, F. S.: Osservazioni intorno ad alcuni specie di Hctero- cotylea. Boll. Soc. Nat. Napoli, 18, pp. 65-80. 1907—Monrticetui, F. S.: IL genere Encotyllabe. Atti. R. Inst. Incoragg. Napoli, ser. 6, 4, 15 pp. 1908—Monricettt, F. S.; Il genere Nitzschia, Atti. R. Inst. Incoragg. Napoli. ser. 6, 5, 24 pp. 1915—Nrcot., W.: A list of the trematode parasites of British marine fishes. Parasitology, 7, pp. 339-378. 1840—NorpMann, A.: Helminthes, in Lamarck, Hist. nat, animaux sans verte- bres. Edit. 2. , 1905—Opuner, T.: Die trematoden des Arktischen Gebietes. Fauna Arctica 4, (2), pp. 291-372. 1906—Opiner, T.: Die wahre Bau des Synaptobothrium copulans, ete. Zool. Anz., 30, pp. 59-66. 1815—Oxen, L.: Lehrbuch der Naturgeschichte, 3, Abt. 1. (Rudolphi (1819). Diesing (1859), Baird (1853), and Braun (1889), quote the date as 1815, but Stiles and Hassall (1908) give it as 1817). 1895—Parona, C., and Peructa, A.: Sopra due nuove specoe di trematodi ectoparasiti di pesci marini. Atti. Soc. Ligust. sc. nat, Genova, 6, 84-7; and Boll. Mus. Zool. Genova, 31, 4 pp. 1897—Derrier, E.: Traite de Zoologie. Fasc. 4. 78 1900—Prartt, H. S.: Synopsis of North American Invertebrates. Trematodes. Part I. Amer. Nat., 34, pp. 645-662. 1819—Runotpmt, C. A.: Entozoorum Synopsis. Berlin. 1900—Scort, T.: Notes on some parasites of fishes. Ann. Rep. Fisheries Bd. Scotland. 19, (3), 1900 (1901), pp. 120-153. 1908—Srites, C. W., and Hassatr, A.: Index Cat. Med. Vet. Lit. Trema- toda. Bull. 37, Hyg. Lab., U.S.A. 1898—Sr, Remy, G.: Complement du Synopsis des Trematodes monogenesces. Arch. Parasitol., 1, pp. 521-571. 1878—Tascuennerc, E. O.: Helminthologisches. Z. f. ges. Naturwiss. 51, pp. 562-577. 1879—-TascHENBERG, E. O.: Beitrage zur Kenntnis ectoparasitischen mariner ‘Trematoden. Abh. Naturf. Ges, Halle, 14, (3), 51 pp. 1877—Vocr, C.: Uber die Fortpflanzungsorgane einiger ectoparasitischer mariner Trematoden. Z. f. wiss. Zool., 30, 1878, Suppl.. pp. 306-342. Abstract of this paper in Arch. Zool. Exp., 6, 1877, pp. 363-376. 79 A GEOGRAPHICAL ENQUIRY INTO THE GROWTH, DISTRIBUTION, AND MOVEMENT OF POPULATION IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA, 1836-1927. By Cyarres Fenner, D.Sc. [Read July 11, 1929.] CONTENTS, I. Inrropucrion— . Page. (a) Periods dealt with .. Se iS 65 “48 ace - 80 (b) Area dealt with ha A 6, = ms a .. 80 (c) Factors specially considered .. ee co ts _ aa8 MBL (d) Factors not specially considered ice ts a8 . 81 Il. Sourn Avusrrarta in 1835— (a) Position, Size, etc. (figs. 1 and Bye, So. aa a .. 82 (b) Relicf, Clitnate, etc. (figs. 3a and 3) ats re a .. 84 (c) Population + ft. gi . st .. = 85 (d) Native Animals and Plants bi Pe wk af ms .. 85 HII. Grocrapnrcar Contrrors— (a) Rocks, Minerals, and Soils .. is ie ny td .. 87 (b) Physiosraphic Feitures (fig. 3a)... a4 a wg .. 90 e (c) General Climatic Conditions (fig. 3b) eo “ oe nm. 92 (d) The Incidence of Drought Years .. a cae * vie O94 (c) The Cycles of Good Seasons ne Ba! oA a .. 96 IV. Human Factors Concernep— (a) The Land and the People... 5 .. OF (b) The Opening up of “The Counties: (fips: 4 and 5) ae .. 97 (c) The General Distribution of Population (figs. 6, 7a, 2 .. 101 (d) Dispersion and Centralization (fig. 8) a .. 106 (e) Production: Agricultural (figs. 9 and a, 7 oe .. 110 (f{) Production: Pastoral (fig. 11) - : a ts .. 113 (g) Production: Manufactures (fig. 12) 2s es . 114 (h) Water Conservation and Supply (figs. 13 and 14) x! g Bay + oe + Pt. Rickaby ae @ + Minlacowie Sap # adie in ve @e PtTurton lo £ Wool Baye. ag Cor} ithburgh ®~StenhouseB> § Moorowie « — : @o YW «= Marion Bay SYMBOLS. R acdonnelt ! @ outward * s000 tons or less £ iwanill YORKE PENINSULA PORTS. . © inward. = nil. Fig. 18. Map showing the positions of the harbours of South Australia, with a graphic representation of the inward and outward tonnage at each port. Note the correlation with coastline type, and with productions. Compare with seitle- ment map (fig. 7b), wheat map (fig. 10), and railways (fig. 15). exception of the Port River estuary, which has provided both inner and outer harbour for Adelaide. A long stretch of coast, running from Fleurieu Peninsula to the South-East, has no harbour that is functioning at present, as will be seen from fig. 18. Indeed, it would appear from the map that the extension of port facilities has in many 126 cases been greater than was necessary, although possibly the present position is due to the later development of the railway system. This fact seems to be borne out by the relatively high value and use, as per fig. 18, of the Yorke Peninsula ports where there are no railway facilities. Many of the ports are specialized owing to local geographical influences. Port Adelaide, with the greatest inward and outward tonnage, is the chief import- ing centre, and the chief exporting centre, of the State, hence its dominant position as shown in fig. 18. Port Pirie, second in importance, functions mainly in the export of concentrates from Broken Hill, and the import of coal and timber for that centre, but it is also an important wheat port. The exports of Wallaroo, Thevenard, and Port Lincoln are mainly wheat; that of Whyalla is iron ore; of Farquhar Jetty, limestone for cement making, etc.; and of southern Yorke Penin- sula, salt and gypsum. ‘Throughout the whole of the smaller coastal ports of the State the dominant inward traffic is in superphosphates, and the outer traffic in wheat and wool. There is a considerable coastal trade with small vessels, as may be seen by the number of ports with small import and export per annum. Although the two main gulfs break up the area of South Australia, from the point of view of rail- way development, to such an extent that the West Coast still remains unconnected by rail with Adelaide, the connecting influence of these gulfs for communication purposes needs no further description, nor any additional emphasis than is given in graphic form in fig. 18. (1) Education, Research, and Invention —Throughout the whole of the ninety years reviewed and discussed here, which have embraced the total period of the colonization and development of South Australia, the story is one of a steady, persistent, and increasing process of adaptation to environment. In the beginning, a population drawn from the advanced culture of England, from com- mercial rather than from agricultural centres, bred in an environment of abundant rains and cold winters, and used to the traditions and customs of an agricultural and pastoral practice that had grown up under those conditions, was transplanted to the antipodes, far away from any centres of population, where “commerce” was as yet unborn, where the topographic and plant conditions were totally strange and unknown, and where the climatic, soil, and market conditions demanded an agricultural and pastoral practice quite unlike anything they had previously known. To these settlers there was added later another foreign and untried element in the German religious refugees of the ‘forties; while there has been throughout the whole period, a further continuous, though fluctuating, addition from the original bome islands of Great Britain and Ireland, The remarkable success that has been achieved by these people and their native-born successors may be regarded as having been accomplished in two ways. ‘Throughout there has becn a persistent and tenacious “will to succeed,” and success has been brought about by :— (i.) The mass effort of individual farmers, pastoralists, and others—men of shrewd commonsense and open minds—ever trying new methods, adopting those that were successful, copying from, and being copied by, their neighbours. This movement is represented to-day, in a somewhat wider sense, by the agrictittural bureaus and other educational facilities that are encouraged and organised by the Department of Agriculture. (ii,) In addition, there have been wiser men, men with a broader education or a deeper insight, who have becn inspired to invent new types of implements, to adopt new methods of treating the soil, to breed more valuable and better adapted types of both animals and plants, and to make such other important adjustments of agricultural and pastoral practice as have grown into the present general and progressive methods used. 127 It is not possible to separate these two influences, but the growth of the latter type has manifested itself from time to time in the establishment of definite educa- tional and research institutes. In 1885, notwithstanding the depression that then existed, the Roseworthy Agricultural College was established, and in 1924, under conditions of high prosperity, stimulated by a belief in the value of scientific research and aided by wise bequests, the Waite Agricultural Research Institute was founded. A further fact, and one of considerable importance, is the extended use made by the State of trained and selected scientific and engineering authorities for administrative work. This we see in the departmental heads and special officers in agriculture, mines, water supply, railways, roads, harbours, forests, education, irrigation, chemistry, architecture, and so forth. Throughout the history of the State there has been a steady, wholesome, widespread demand for education generally. In 1875, when adverse conditions of low metal prices and low wheat yields had caused a period of depression from which the State was just then emerging, the first important State Education Act was passed; the total population was then about 200,000. In 1892, again a time of depression and unemployment, primary education was made free to all. In 1876, during a prosperous cycle, but with the effects of the closing of the Burra and Kapunda copper mines still in operation, the Adelaide University was founded, and it has rendered profound and incalculable service to the State. In 1915, an Education Act that provided for great extensions of {ree education was passed, and following on that Act we have seen, during the past decade, a period of exceptional prosperity, a remarkable extension of modern educational facilities closely adapted to the requirements of the people. The factor of general and special education, as outlined in this section, has played a great part in the adjustment that has taken place, enabling farmers, graziers, vignerons, fruitgrowers, dairymen, and others, under the varied condi- tions prevailing in different regions of the State (as outlined in Section IIl.a), to adjust themselves to their varied and varying environments. Of outstanding importance among the “inventions” were those that enabled man to make better and more immediate use of the light scrub-covered mallee soils, for example: “Mullenizing,” the stump-jump plough, and the stripper. There is also the outstanding fact of the adoption of the use of artificial manures, mainly superphosphates, and the development of a local technique in their appli- cation to these phosphate-hungry soils; the practice of better methods of tillage and rotation of crops or fallow; the breeding or the introduction of drought- resisting or other special varieties of wheat or other cereals; the breeding of stock more suitable to local conditions or more in demand in the markets; the struggle against plant and animal diseases and pests in farm, orchard, and vineyard; the fight against “seepage” and other difficulties in the irrigated areas; the march of mechanical invention in providing improved transport and communications, and soon. In all these matters, the assistance of specially selected men, highly trained in the knowledge and skill required by such investigations, has been required and has been available. The influence of such factors on population movements has mostly been general, but in some cases the incidence has been specially marked, as has been shown in other sections, . V.—POPULATION GROWTH AND MOVEMENT, (a) First Period: 1836-1861.—The population growth and its distribution during the first 25 years of the State’s history is indicated by the spot-map (fig. 7a), already discussed briefly in Section IV.c. In the very early years of our history wheat and wines were grown, cattle and sheep were bred, and copper and 128 silyer-lead were mined. But the preliminary adjustments were not easy, and a marked period of adversity—‘‘The Crisis of 1841”—came in a few years; this has been described by various historians, vide Grenfell Price: “Foundations and Settlement of South Australia,” Adelaide, 1924, p, 206. The opening of the first counties, and the discovery of the rich copper fields of Kapunda and Burra led the population outward; railways to the mineral fields assisted, and a prosperous period followed until the lure of the rich goldfields of Victoria (1851), coming on top of a dry period, scnt a high proportion of the vigorous manhood of the State to those goldfields. Meanwhile, however, the seasons brightened, wheat yields increased (3,500,000 bushels in 1861), wool export advanced (13,000,000 Ibs. in 1861), and mineral wealth continued (apunda, Burra, and Wallaroo copper). Over three acres per individual were under cultivation. Towards the end of this period thcre was a drought, Fig. 7a shows that, apart from the central counties, there was in 1861 but one West Coast county and two in the South-East. There was a concentration of population in Adelaide itself, and the fertile valleys of the nearer ranges also supported a large number of people. The chief country “islets” were Mount Gambier and Port Lincoln (agricultural and commercial, “capitals” of their respective regions); Kapunda, Burra, and Wallaroo (copper); Gawler (manu- facturing and distributing centre, owing to its commanding position at the entrance to the rich Angaston country and the rich arable areas of the lower ranges) ; Goolwa, Port Elliot, Robe, Port Augusta, and Port Wakefield (ports) ; Strathalbyn and Mount Barker (agricultural centres). The areas of practically no settlement are worthy of note. There were but few people along the Murray River, and these were on sheep-runs ; none were in the Murray Mallee, and few on Yorke Peninsula, the West Coast, or Kangaroo Island. The last-named area (K.I.) is still but sparsely populated, but the other three regions have since become productive provinces. Up to 1861 only one long railway had been built, that from Adelaide to Kapunda. Roads were few, and transport slow. There were no reservoirs or other organised scheme of water supply, each settler being dependent on his own efforts with tanks, dams, and wells. Apart from the strong pull of the mineral fields, the chief population movement was towards the South-East, and along the rich alluvial inter-ridge plains of the Lower North. (b) Second Period: 1862-1871.—The population movement for this decennial period is shown in fig. 19a, The population for 1861 (fig. 7a) was the total at that date. From now on the population maps deal with the moventents only, that is, with the number of people added or lost by each county during each decennial period. , As shown in fig. 19a, several new counties had by the year 1871 been added to those of 1861—to the north, east, and south-east. There was much additional concentration in County Adelaide; also towards the mineral centres of Kapunda, Wallaroo, and Moonta, the last-named having been discovered in 1861. ‘There was a drift away from the Burra copper mines, noted by the circles (cach equal to a loss of 100 persons) of County Burra. County Victoria had also lost 300 settlers; but there was a strong growth in the main central counties, and in the South-East, with a minor movement to the north as far as Hawker, to the West Coast, and also to lower Yorke Peninsula, The Murray Valley and the Murray Mallee remained practically untouched. The seasons of this decennial period were generally good, but 1866 was dry. The good rains of 1867 did not bring equivalent yields, as red rust attacked the wheat crops. The stump-jumping plough had been introduced. More country had been thrown open, but this period ended in depression, with loss of popula- 129 FIG. 19a. POPULATION MOVEMENT 1862-1871. @ = INCREASE OF 100 PERSONS © = DECREASE « - a CAE 92. 3, FIG. 19 b. POPULATION MOVEMENT 1872-1881. ‘e = INCREASE OF 100 PERSONS. © = DECREASE " " a CE 1929, Fig. 19, 130 tion, possibly due to a considerable extent to the prevailing low prices for copper and to poor wheat yields. ‘The concentration of population in the metropolitan area had led to the need for various community services. Water was laid on in 1861, and gas in 1863. The city, which in 1871 contained about 30% of the total State population, thus began to introduce factors that assisted towards an increasing concentration there, owing to the comforts and amenities available. The chief “pull” of Adelaide, has, however, been that of available employment. A railway line had been carried on to the Burra copper mines, but there was still no provision for country water supply, no organised wheat transport, few ports, no special wheats nor artificial manures in general use. (c) Third Period: 1872-1881,—This period, as shown in fig. 19b, showed the usual more intense concentration towards the metropolitan area, which, in this case, added 37,400 people to its total population, Apart from minor but very significant movements towards the South-East and the West Coast, the marked progress of this decade was towards the rich wheat areas lying east and north of Port Pirie. Even the most distant of the new countics to the north had attracted settlers, but some of these movements show evidence of an excess of zeal, The counties of Taunton, Derby, and Lytton (all proclaimed in 1877) should never have been thus set apart for closer agricultural settlement. They are almost wholly outside of the 10-inch rainfall line, and the efforts of 50 subsequent years have emphasised their unsuitability for agriculture. In some cases, as has been remarked, settlers ploughed up good sheep feed (salt bush) to plant wheat that would not grow. The second great “trek” of this period was towards southern Yorke Penin- sula, brought into prominence by the discoveries of copper in the north of this region, The chief negative movement, shown in fig. 19b, was in County Light, and was due to the closing of the copper mines there in 1878. The Burra mines, also, which had been waning for some time, finally closed down in 1877. County Sturt, to a lesser extent, and County Hindmarsh most markedly, showed drifts of population. This was doubtless due to agriculturists and pastoralists who were not doing as well as they wished moving out to the greater spaces and the wider opportunities of the northern wheat lands. In 1875 the first Forest Board was constituted. During this decade the proclamation of counties (figs. 4 and 5) was al its zenith, but the average annual rainfall over the whole area proclaimed (nearly 20,000 square miles) was little more than 10 inches per annum. In spite of some adverse seasons, the position of the State was good; the population gradient in 1881 was high; cultivation was extending very rapidly; superphosphate manures were introduced about 1880; the number of sheep, cattle, horses and pigs had almost reached the (otal at which they stand to-day ; the city had its second reservoir (Hope Valley). There was most interesting additional railway extension during this decade. Quite a number of small outer ports were favoured with lines running inland: Port Wakefield—Hoyleton, Port Pirie— Crystal Brook, Kingston—Naracoorte, Moonta Bay—Moonta, Port Wakefield— Kadina, Port Augusta—Quorn, Beachport—Mount Gambier. From the railway point of view, the period marked an effort towards decentralization. (d) Fourth Period: 1882-1891—Fig. 20a shows the changes that took place in the next decennial period. Opening under the influence of the prosperous years of the preceding decade, this cycle closed with one of the most severe periods of depression ever experienced by the Slate. New country was available, but the methods of attacking, particularly in the more outback areas, had not been per- fected sufficiently to ensure stability there. Superphosphate manures had been 131 introduced, but their adoption was slow, and only a small percentage of wheat farmers had so far utilized them; even at the end of the next following decade (1900) only about 25% of the farms used phosphatic fertilizers, During this period five new counties were opened; all were on the West Coast, distant from markets and railways, with the exception of Manchester. But the last-named county is practically wholly outside of both the 10-inch rainfall line and the 8-inch winter rainfall line. Even after 39 years, it is to be noted in the current wheat yield records that Manchester is practically a non-producer so far as agriculture is concerned. Like Taunton, Derby, and Lytton, Manchester appears to be a mistake on the side of optimism. The whole of the areas pro- claimed in this decade averaged less than a 10-inch rainfall, but four of them (Robinson, Dufferin, Way, and Kintore) are wheat producers. The opening years of the decade were dry, being classed as a “disastrous drought” in some regions, and as low rainfall in all, During this period the Adelaide rainfall was below average for six of the ten years, and this is a reflec- tion of the general position throughout the whole State, The population curve during this period showed a distinct flattening; during three years (1885-6-8) there was actual decrease. The proportion of cultivated land also fell, and in 1891 the total was less than it had been in 1882 (fig. 6), The flocks and herds decreased, though the cattle recovered earlier—about 1891, It was probably under the stimulus of these dry years that the Mount Gambier pumping station was established, the small Hawker reservoir {in the most northerly of the wheat areas), and the first big country reservoir (Beetaloo) were constructed (see figs. 13 and 14). Thus this driest of all the decades saw, and possibly brought about, the opening of the present great water reticulation scheme, The period of depression not only stimulated the water schemes, it also influenced the transport system. In spite of a falling population, these years witnessed one of the most rapid periods of railway extension—in the central and northern wheat areas, towards Oodnadatta, to Melbourne (the first link with another capital city) ; under the stimulus of the rich Broken Hill silver-lead-zinc ficld, the valuable and productive Port Pirie—Broken Hill line was built, that is, the existing Port Pirie—Jamestown line was continued to Cockburn along the Olary Spur of the Central Highlands. During this period, also, there was a marked extension of main road mileage, and important road acts were passed. Under very difficult climatic conditions, super-imposed on lack of facilities for water, transport, etc., the Broken Hill silver-lead mines were opened in 1884. Geographically these belong more to South Australia than to New South Wales, and their nearness, combined with the more powerful influence on man’s imagina- tions that is always exerted by mineral fields compared with agricultural “fields,” caused a dramatic “rush” away from South Australia. Population flowed away from the State, comparable only with the exodus to the Victorian goldfields in the *fifties Within the State itself a population movement set in towards Port Pirie and Wallaroo; Adelaide continued to grow (Broken Hill brought much trade and wealth to Adelaide, though it temporarily drained this State of people) ; people continued to move towards the northern areas and the West Coast (see fig. 20a). The first great negative population effect was felt in the Central districts ; Counties Gawler, Light, Burra, and Stanley lost population to a marked degree; farmers left the fields of Yorke Peninsula, and two of the lesser counties bordering the Murray also showed losses. Even the wetter counties between Mount Gambier and Bordertown lost population; perhaps due to a movement north towards the new Melbourne—-Adelaide railway line. 132 FIG. 20a. POPULATION MOVEMENT 1882-1891. @= INCREASE OF 100 PERSONS. O=PECREASE » ' m FIG. 20 b. POPULATION MOVEMENT 1892-1901 ®@ S INCREASE OF [O00 PERSONS © =DECREASE « " Fig. 20. 133 Altogether the decade 1882-1891 was a remarkable one. It was a period of difficulties and depression, combined with the stimulating effect of the riches of Broken Hill. But, as we have seen, these climatic and other difficulties also proved a stimulus in at least four directions, all of which combine to enable us to-day to meet drought conditions with more confidence. ‘These four directions were: (a) More fertilizers and better tillage (agricultural bureaus were established) ; (b) Transport (road and rail) ; (c) Water supply; (d) Irrigation. During this period the pioneer irrigation area of Renmark was established by private enter- prise in the Murray Valley. (e) Fifth Period: 1892-1901—The years of this decade were also difficult ones in South Australian progress. The reforms that had slowly grown up during previous years continued to extend but slowly. Difficulties of climate, topography, and distance cannot be conquered in a decade. It took men a long time to learn that they might take advantage of dry conditions, rather than deplore them, while at the same time endeavouring to overcome them. The value of the summer drought for wheat-ripening and harvesting, fruit drying, salt producing, ete., was not at once realized. Five new counties were proclaimed—two in the southern Murray Mallee, two in eastern Eyre Peninsula, and one in the distant western part of that region (sce figs. 4 and 5). The population graph took a slight rise and later flattened, but there was no year in this decade when the number of people in the State actually decreased, The area of cultivated land rose definitely in 1899-1900. The Adelaide rainfall was low throughout this period, and there was a drought about 1896. County Adelaide and the metropolitan area, with its growing industries and with the benefits of water, gas, transport, and good climatic and soil conditions, expanded faster than did the country districts, while the coming of electric light and power in 1900 gave the city an additional advantage. The success at Renmark had attracted attention, and in an effort towards a solution of the unemployment problem a series of “Village Settlements” was established in the Murray Valley. These are generally regarded as complete failures, but they were a success in directing attention to the potentialities of the Murray Valley, in pointing out the difficulties that were to be faced, and in the start thus made towards devising methods for overcoming these difficulties. Throughout the decade the sheep decreased by millions and the cattle by hundreds of thousands (see fig. 11); the losses in flocks and herds were the greatest the State has known, apart from the 1914 drought period. One large metropolitan reservoir was built during this decade, and two small country ones; the length of mains was much increased, and preparations made for new country water storage basins. The extension of railways practically ceased; it was as if the country was exhausted by the tremendous efforts in railway exten- sion of the previous decade (including the costly and unproductive Oodnadatta line), and for some years railways were left severely alone. ‘Che period was equally unprogressive so far as road building was concerned. Right in the middle of this difficult period the world was moved by the spec- tacular mineral discoveries of the Western Australian goldfields. South Australians were near the spot, they were acclimatised in part to that type of country, their State was still suffering from the depression caused by dry seasons, and they were men of adventurous stock. The third great exodus from this State set in to Western Australia in the middle ’nineties (the first was to Victoria in the ‘fifties, the second to Broken Hill in the ’eighties). Another drain on the population, and one of a kind hitherto unknown, was made by the South African War in the late “nineties. The map of internal population movement (fig. 20b) shows that there was a decrease in no less than thirteen counties. There was continued movement 134 towards the South-East, a slow but sure development along the West Coast, and a considerable influx into the counties that contained the mining and smelting towns of Port Pirie and Wallaroo-Moonta. In 1900 gold was discovered at Tarcoola, well outside of the counties, and this locality has continued to produce mineral under very difficult conditions up to the present time. Meanwhile, through- out the State, the leaven of better farming practice, of the use of superphosphates. of transport, and of water supply were being felt, and the way was being prepared, not otily for wider prosperity but for greater powers of resisting and even over- coming dry conditions within the 10-inch line. The problems outside (north of) the 10-inch line remain almost as difficult to-day as they were then. (f£) Sixth Period: 1902-1911—With the opening of the new century the Province of South Australia became merged into the greater political unit of the Commonwealth of Australia, but agriculture, transport, water supply, etc., remained as functions of the State. Whether the facts are those of cause and effect one cannot say, but apart from the Great War and the 1914 drought, the years since Federation have been the most consistently and steadily prosperous since the foundation of the State. It seems clear that the people of South Aus- tralia are enjoying the cumulative effects of the adjustments man has made with his environment during the preceding seventy years of settlement. As far as land occupation is concerned, the limit of agricultural occupation had been reached by the end of the last century. Since 1900 only two counties (Le Hunte and Bosanquet, in central Eyre Peninsula) had been added, and the whole of the over 10-inch rainfall land had been proclaimed as counties (see figs. 1 and 3b). ‘There is, indeed, a relatively small area of 10-inch jand not proclaimed, but it has disabilities ot roughness of topography and of remoteness that discount its other advantages. In the first year of this decade occurred the drought of 1902, and with it came the first actual population reduction since the ’eightics. Possibly there had been seasons before that were just as dry, but there was not then the wide area of lower rainfall land occupied. In spite of this great set-back, accompanied by considerable emigration of its young manhood (in 1902 the State decreased by 7,000 of its most vigorous inhabitants, quite apart from deaths), there was a general upward movement of the total population, and this was accompanied by an extension of the cultivated arcas. By 1910 there were 10 acres of cultivated land per individual, the highest since the foundation of the State, and approached only in 1880, thirty years previously (see fig. 6). The country population was, for this decade, increasing faster than that of the city. The use of manures and improved methods of farming were making then- selves felt (see fig. 9). Not only were the total yiclds of all crops increasing, but the average yields were also noticeably rising. Cattle, sheep, and horses increased by nearly 50%, thus: 1902. ; 1911, Sheep ve “a .. 4,880,000 6,172,000 Cattle ut be: .. 213,000 394,000 Horses ee ao .. 165,000 260,000 People ba i: .. 357,000 419,000 This wonderful power of recovery after a severe set-back is characteristic, and is revealed again and again in the records of South Australia. Some amount of industrialization had now entered into the life of the State. There had been for some time the mining centres of Moonta and Wallaroo Mines, smelting ports such as Port Pirie and Wallaroo, railway towns such as Peter- borough and Murray Bridge, and engineering towns such as Gawler, Kapunda, and other smaller places where agricultural implements were made. 135 The increase of factories in the metropolitan area now began to be notable; most of them were concerned with the provision of local requirements, but some were also producing manufactured goods for export. The production of salt had increased, and gypsum now became an important product. The line to Iron Knob was built in 1901, but this immensely rich deposit of iron ore was at first used only in connection with the smelting works at Port Pirie. There was considerable progress in the provision of country watcr supplies in this decade; Barossa and Bundaleer reservoirs came into operation following the 1902 drought, and over 1,000 miles of water mains were laid (fg. 14). The fertile flats and “swamps” of the Lower Murray Valley came further under notice, and a most important movement dates from 1904 when a scheme of State Irrigation was commenced. The Outer Harbour, built near the mouth of the Port River, where engineering skill has utilized to the full the few advantages provided by the type of coastline that borders the Adelaide region, was opened in 1904. Little railway extension took place, but the call of the light soil plains of the Murray Mallee and the West Coast began to be heard; a line from Tailem Bend to Pinnaroo was built in 1906, and from Port Lincoln to Yeelanna in 1907-9. This was the beginning of the addition to the State of two valuable but hitherto un- productive areas, though for years settlers had been tenaciously working their way along the West Coast margins. Motor cars appeared on the roads, but were not yet of great importance; the mileage of main roads was increased. The population movements of this decade, shown in the map (fig. 21a) are the most remarkable to date. They bear witness to the zenith of the rise of the wheat lands. Hundreds of people were added in each of the chief counties of the West Coast. Yorke Peninsula, whence in the ’eighties the people had been streaming away, increased notably. Even the already well-settled central regions (Counties Victoria, Stanley, Gawler, and Light) were considerably added to, while the Murray Mallee now began to be properly opened up. The usual con- centration in the metropolitan area continued, somewhat further accelerated by the influence of the electric trams, 1909, (providing work), and the increase of factories; during the decade 29,000 people were added to the County of Adelaide. There was, however, an extraordinary decline in the population of the northern and north-eastern counties, from Taunton southward to Eyre (see fig. 21a) ; this amounted almost to a wholesale flight of the population away from the conditions experienced in the 1902 drought. But it is satisfactory to reflect that the men who had learnt the hard lessons of these northern counties were largely those who went out into the new wheat lands, equipped with ability to cope with the special conditions there, and thus to achieve the marked success that has followed. (g) Seventh Period: 1912-1921—This decade, which was on the whole one of general prosperity, is the most difficult to describe of all the periods of State progress. In it occurred the record drought of 1914 and the record good season of 1916, During this period, also, the Great War blazed up in Europe, the springs of emigration to South Australia were dried, and the most vigorous portion of the manhood of the State was poured out, literally in tens of thousands, to the battle- fields of the Old World. The whole outlook of the State was temporarily changed, and the depression that was caused in some directions was offset by the extraordinary stimulus in other directions caused by war conditions. Following the declaration of Peace in 1918, came the almost equally stirring and disturbing years of Demobilization and Repatriation, so that it was many years before the people of the State got back into the even step of normal production. The effect of the war on the general increase of population is shown in figs. 6, 8, and 22. The demand for wheat greatly increased, and prices were high. In spite of the absence of so many men, and notwithstanding the effects of the 1914 drought, the amount of cultivated land reached an extent never previously G 136 FIG. 2la. POPULATION MOVEMENT 1902-1911. *® =INCREASE OF 100 PERSONS Oo = DECREASE o FIG. 21 b. POPULATION MOVEMENT I9l2-192l. @ = INCREASE OF 100 PERSONS. O = DECREASE » " C.F 1929. Fig. 21. 137 approached, though there was a rapid temporary decline in 1919 (a dry season). The total increase of population was large, and after the war the city grew much more rapidly than the country, and faster than at any previous period. At no time has there been such an extraordinary variation in wheat produc- tion within the space of three years as is shown by the Government Statist’s records in fig. 9 (1914-1917) ; other crop yields suffered similarly, and showed a somewhat similar recovery. The compulsory “bare fallow” of the drought year (1914) was one of the factors influencing the great production of 1916-17, but high prices, superphosphates, more machinery, and better farming methods also contributed. The graphs of the varying numbers of livestock for this decade are like huge V’s, dropping down towards 1914, and rapidly rising to 1922 (see fig. 11). There was a marked increase in factory production, not so much in the number of men employed, but in the materials and horse-power used (see fig. 12). Pumping schemes along the Murray were instituted; the largest of our metro- politan reservoirs (Millbrook) was built; Warren and three lesser reservoirs were added to the country system, and the water mains were extended by some 1,400 miles. The second great period of railway extension took place in this decade (fig. 16), in the construction of the Murray Mallee and West Coast lines. The use of motor power on the roads increased, and encouraged the production of more and better roads. This provides an excellent example of the way in which geographical factors re-act upon one another. More motor cars demanded better roads, and the provision of such roads encouraged the further use of motor cars. So it is with water supplies, railway facilities, etc. The map (fig. 21b) showing the internal population movement, while not so stimulating as that for the previous decade, is still full of vitality. ‘There is a population decrease in sixteen counties but, except in one case, to be discussed later, it is not disturbing. The decline of the Wallaroo-Moonta copper field necessitated a loss of population there; some settlers from Southern Eyre Peninsula had moved outwards or to the north; the lower rainfall counties of the north and north-east have further declined, and there is somewhat of a stillstand as a whole in the central portion of the South-East, between the Murray Mallee and the Mount Gambier district. County Adelaide has increased by nearly 70,000 people. The export of Iron Knob ore for steel-making (1914) resulted in the creation of two new townships (Iron Knob and Whyalla). The most promising movement shown in the 1912-21 decade is that along the Lower Murray Valley, where, partly stimulated by the repatriation movement and partly by the creation of the State Irrigation Department, several thriving fruit, vine, and dairying towns and villages came into being. The more disturbing decrease of county population above referred to is that of County Light, where, in an area of excellent soils, settled farms, good and reliable rainfall, satisfactory water supply, and a good road and railway system, there is a population decrease of 1,000 people. In so fertile and favoured an area an increase might have been anticipated. With a knowledge of this county gained in over fifty years of intimate contact with the people, Mr. H. J. Truscott, a resident of Kapunda, has kindly set down his opinions, at my request, regarding the reasons for the diminishing population of County Light. These may be taken as the average opinion of thoughtful men living in the country districts, and are as follows :— “I must endorse your remarks that the county, as a whole, is a fertile and well-watered area, and under ordinary conditions should have increased its population rather than decreased. The cause of the decrease has been mainly due to the purchase of small holdings by the bigger landowners, thus dislodging a large number of families that have gone elsewhere to earn a living. The argument is 138 that farming on a small scale does not pay. Owing to the high price of imple- ments and other appointments necessary for successful farming, the small man is outclassed and the big man with larger areas and up-to-date machinery gains control of the land, Lands offering outside of settled areas in our own State, and especially in Western Australia, have induced a large number of young people to leave their own country for other fields, establishing new homes and new families in other parts of the Commonwealth. The city, with its up-to-date facilities, attractions, and variety of occupations draws the younger generation to its centre, and a number of young people, when reaching their majority, have gone to Adelaide or other centres of greater opportunity. Apart from the working of the land, and the harvesting of the products of the soil, our resources are limited, and there is not much scope for employment, or for the maintenance of a growing population, The ordinary blacksmith’s shop is engaged in repairs, there is little new work. Grocery and other stores are just holding on, handicapped because of limited patronage. The motor car and motor traffic have taken away rather than improved local business. Agents from the city, representing firms of every description, are pressing one upon another. Private persons who own cars, especially farmers, go to the city to purchase, and in this way local business people are affected. The facts that ] have mentioned are without doubt the cause of the decrease of population in the County of Light, and there appears to me to be no hope of an improvement, so far as secondary industries are concerned. I feel, however, that there is room for improvement in matters pertaining to the land. Closer settlement is required. There is too much land locked up for sheep and cattle grazing. I think that measures should be introduced that would make it hard and expensive to hold thousands of acres of good land as mere grazing area, when such lands could be used for the maintenance of a much larger population.” Whenever one travels throughout the older settled districts of the Australian States, one may occasionally note the presence of ruined houses, old wells, neglected orchards, solitary chimneys, disused roads, and other similar evidences of human culture in localities where at the present time homes are rare. In some cases enquiry reveals this somewhat depressing feature to be a part of the ebb and flow of population that is continually taking place—often associated with the fact that families grow up, the young people move away, the old people die, the farm is bought and used for less intensive agriculture, and the home is no longer occupied. In other cases, agricultural districts have thrived because of the nearness of markets provided by mining towns, and with the closing of the mines there has been a natural falling off in the farm values of the neighbourhood, with consequent emigration. While this apparent decay of country life is notable in County Light, as shown above, and in almost all the older settled districts of the Commonwealth, it is not unknown in other parts of the world. Some excellent detailed studies have been made in the United States of America. One of these, which is of particular value and interest, was written by Professor Goldthwait, of New Hampshire, U.S.A. (wide “Geographical Review,” October, 1927, p, 527-552). In this is shown, in an almost dramatic way, the ebb and flow of population ina New Hampshire locality. The disturbing influences that are noted particularly in the study are (1) the concentration due to the rise of manufacturing centres with good work and pay; (2) the routes of new railways, changing the relative positions of markets, etc.; (3) the movement westward towards larger farms, cheaper land, and better opportunities. Although the general geographical conditions in New Ilampshire are very different from those in South Australia, the influences of these three factors may be distinctly noted in our own State. The coming to country dwellers of such 139 amenities as quick and comfortable transport, telephones, wireless, etc., does not appear to have greatly arrested the movement from country to town, which is so marked a feature of later population movements of this State. Eighth Period: 1922-1927.—This, the final period, comprises six years only, and no special map has been prepared to show the population movement during that time. Special care, however, has been taken in the preparation of fig. 7b, which shows the total population for 1927, and its distribution. Compared with the population map of 1861 (fig. 7a), the 1927 map gives us the “end product” of all the internal population movements for the intervening decades. The character of this map, and the geographical reasons for the distribution of the population of 1927, as shown, have been the guiding motif throughout this paper, and were dis- cussed in some detail (particularly so far as the “islets” of people are concerned) in Section IV.c. These six years have constituted a period of general prosperity, ending on a somewhat lower note on account of the incidence of dry conditions and un- employment. Not only have the yields of these years been high, but prices have been good. The extension of counties has ceased, and the fact is coming to be generally recognised that future progress must be made within the areas already proclaimed. The total population has increased during this period at a rate hitherto un- approached, except in the years just preceding the war. The city increase is the more accelerated, which may, in part, be correlated with the increase in city amenities and with increased public works and manufactures (fig. 12); indeed, as the writer has already shown (Proc. Roy. Soc. S.A., vol. li, 1927, p, 250) the rate of country growth is at present notably low. The total acreage of cultivated land is higher than it has ever been, and the proportion of cultivated acres per inhabitant is also at a maximum, ‘Lhe yields of all crops are higher than for any previous period (fig. 9); the present distribu- tion of the wheat areas is shown in fig. 10. So far as flocks and herds are con- cerned the position is not good, as already mentioned. In many cases these are decreasing, and altogether the total average numbers have not shown any increase for the past 40 years (fig. 11). In 1927 the forest reserves of this relatively timberless country amounted to 200,000 acres, of which some 40,000 acres were planted, half with introduced softwoods and half with planted or regenerated native hardwoods. The State has achieved some prominence in its successful growth of softwood forests. In the realm of water supply two large country reservoirs have been added, and the general increase of reticulation has been the most rapid and extensive of the whole history of the State, as is shown in the graph in fig. 14. There has been little development in railway mileage, though narrow-gauge lines (3 ft. 6 in.) have been widened (5 ft. 3 in.). Just as the stage-coaches and canals fought a battle with the railways a century ago, so are the railways at present competing with road-motor transport. This is accompanied by a slowing down of railway exten- sion and an accelerated construction of high-grade roads, with a remarkable increase in the number of motor vehicles (fig. 17). The general population movement of 1922-1927 may be gauged from a study of fig. 7b. People are moving about more, and more rapidly than they used to do; settlement tends to concentrate more into cities and larger towns; yet, on the whole, there is a thoroughly healthy dispersion steadily going on towards the further settlement of (a) the Lower Murray Valley, (b) the West Coast, (c) the South-East, and (d) the Murray Mallee. What Yorke Peninsula lost in the closing of the copper mines of the north it has gained in the barley fields and the salt and gypsum deposits of the south, but more particularly in the stable settlement of its rich wheat areas. 140 VI—FINAL CONSIDERATIONS. (a) Births and Deaths-—-Among the conclusions reached in the study of these ebbs and flows of population and industry and general progress during the period 1836-1927, it becomes increasingly certain that amid all these fluctuations, one of the most stable and important factors of all is to be found in the total annual births. The curve of these figures shows a steady growth from the beginning, reaching a peak period in 1885. In the twenty years of depression that followed, births decreased somewhat; indeed, both the birth-rate and the death-rate show a definite but minor response to the onset of hard conditions, with a more recent gradual decrease that is well known and is part of a world-wide tendency. When we come to consider what is called the natural increase of the State, i.e., the excess of births over deaths, we find a curve that is even more regular and stable. It rises gradually to 1885, remains firm and steady to 1895, decreases in 1898, and rises again to a maximum jin 1914, Thereafter it is even and regular, apart from a dip in 1919 due mainly to the unexpected excess of deaths con- sequent ‘upon the influenza epidemic of that year. This curve is not the wavy, fluctuating line that we get from almost any other set of State records. It is regular, stable, and dependable. It is significant of the best type of State growth, and is full of promise for future development. (b) Immigration and Emigration—Among the most unstable curves that we may obtain from presenting in a graphic form the figures available in statistical returns are those of the additions to, and subtractions from, the total State popula- tion by immigration and emigration, respectively. In the beginning, all population gains were by immigration. Subsequently there have been periods of almost equally rapid growth from this source. The figures of immigration and emigra- tion, however, as compiled in statistics, are of little value. From their nature they are not reliable, sometimes including all those who entered or left the State by rail or boat, at other times only those with single tickets, and so on; immigrants and emigrants are not scparable from the ordinary flow of tourist and business traffic. It was necessary, therefore, if definite figures regarding the addition to our growth from without were to be compiled, that other methods must be used to obtain such figures. (c) The “Prosperity Graph.’—It was thought that a curve roughly indicative of the varying prosperity of the State could be drawn if we knew the total number of persons each year that were added to the permanent population, having been attracted from without the State. The basis of this belicf is as follows :—lt within the State the general conditions are thriving, work abundant, the land productive, and the people prosperous, the influence of this prosperity will auto- matically and inevitably show itself in the power of the State to attract adven- turous and enterprising people from other countries. But if, on the other hand, conditions are bad, crops poor, unemployment marked, and financial conditions relatively adverse, there will not only be no increase from without, but some oi our own people will leave us (among them the strongest and most enterprising) to seek better conditions elsewhere. Under normal and average conditions, neither notably adverse nor prosperous, we should be able to hold our own, to absorb our own native-born, without either gaining more than these, nor losing. If, then, we obtain the total increase of the population of the State for each year, as compiled in our statistics, and subtract from that number the excess of births over deaths (the internal natural increase), we shall know the total numbers added to our population each year from outside sources (or, in adverse years, the total numbers lost by the State). In the prosperous years this increase by immigration would go up, but in the bad years, when the prospects elsewhere seemed to our own people (or to a sufficient proportion of them) brighter than those within the State, there would be a movement outwards—an exodus. 141 On this foundation, and with figures specially compiled from the “Statistical Summary,” the curve which is here called the “Prosperity Graph of South Aus- tralia, 1836-1927,” (figs. 22a and 22b) has been constructed. It will be seen that in prosperous cycles of varying length we have alternately received and absorbed tens of thousands of people additional to those born here, or in periods of adverse conditions we have poured out some of our best and most vigorous people (for only these more plucky and adventurous ones face the uncertainties of emigra- tion), and have thus been for a time a centre of emigration, and not of immigra- tion. On this graph the chief factors influencing the progress or retardation of the State have been indicated. It is agreed that no single factor can justly be regarded as giving a true index of prosperous and adverse conditions. As a check on the value of this so-called Prosperity Graph, a curve was con- structed, based on the Government Statist’s figures for the whole period 1836- 1927, dealing with increases or decreases of sheep, cattle, horses, wheat yields, cultivation, rainfall, and other more generally accepted indicators of prosperity. The general similarities between the trends of such a curve, and that of figs. 22a and 22b, were quite considerable, with a satisfactory degree of correlation, justifying the belief that the prosperity of the State can be generally appraised according to the population it may attract or expel. When prosperous, the State will not only absorb its own native-born population, but will attract some from other countries ; when conditions are adverse, not only will there be no external addition, but the native-born or acclimatized population will be driven to seek livelihoods in outside areas. In the “Prosperity Graph” (figs. 22a and 22b) the vertical columns for each year that are above the normal line represent in thousands the permanent popula- tion additions from without. The vertical columns below the normal represent definite losses from the State. On the whole, the years of prosperity are those where the curve is rising, or maintaining a high level. The adverse years are those with a declining curve or a sustained low level, but in all cases some allowance must be made for a “lag” between the influencing factors and the adjustments thereto. Apart from the abnormal conditions of the war and demobilization (1914- 1919), and disregarding the natural increase due to excess of births over deaths, the greatest annual increment to the population was in 1849, when there was an addition of over 12,000 people. Other high records were 1854 (11,500) and 1876 (10,000). The years of maximum population loss were 1885 (over 9,000) and 1856 (9,000). The cycles of relative prosperity and adversity are suggested in fig. 22. It is, on the whole, a record of advancing prosperity, based on agri- cultural and mineral wealth, with minor depressions, until the year 1866. There followed an 8-year period of heavy depression (low wheat yields, in part low metal prices). A prosperous cycle followed up to 1881, In 1884, as already described, a long series of less satisfactory seasons and unfavourable conditions commenced, emphasized by the permanent loss to Broken Hill and to Western Australia of tens of thousands of the best of our manhood. This long era of State depression (which may or may not have been a period of individual financial depression), with lesser breaks, reached on for more than 20 years, right up to 1905, when the tide which had been preparing to change definitely turned in the direction of State prosperity. From 1908 onward for over 20 years, despite the war of 1914-18 and the drought of 1914, and influenced by various artificial factors of legislation and finance, the cycle has been one of high prosperity, population increase and extension, and the adoption of a con- tinuously higher standard of living and of comfort in both metropolitan and country areas. 142 “SUOIJEIOUUL YYUAA “aS19A05 ay} JO ‘uOT}VIBIWIY 1040 woes JO sseoxa Ajinad Oy} SuLMmoys Iasnd & A[[Ba1—‘eryessny YyINog jo .qdery Aysodsoig,, yy, “e7e “8 Ogsl S28! OL81 = - S981 0981 9981 OSI SP8l Orel bfBl a A (aa ee a a eet tel Ne fh = poara ia 0 aul pew WI A sas payngysy) - ee the We 0000! uoiynanpa 24045 é 18 PI] 000 SI sob apinyapy “‘pasojo bang uae 7 Sling 10 r “pasos UpUNdoy paarsnorsip saddo3 paaaaorsip saddo?) are 000 02 — x 4 G a : 4 ; Shom}i04 syaod (Dyso9¥ UObsoW U0 piby Aajom apioapy Span he ery ae: jor pay jubnoig i Saunas Pauninjs01d Saijunoa Mau wa} OGI0)/OM 40 parenorsip saddo3 udipourn{sead 4514 asn jpaaudb oyu Gurwd9 “Pasnpoajul 4,A09 algisuodsay “VBL 4O Ststag ay SS | bod duanf-duangs aes: 900°000! oe se : “pPiaik JOOYM [AUSHGuoi up jsar4 payrued S420,“ papuoylano ajj409 4sal4 “palipjaoad sarjund> Mau anos ; ee : : sour ; “AaWIOaLS [OOM Aoaanyy 45414 “Pajaro puoy payajduda apiojpapy 40 BANS u 4 —= kyrskoniuin | MO] SPiatA fOay AA “Spyaiy-pyob UDO, OL SNPOXy “aUlAod 4g 0 paunjpad' ys Mol SadtAd Addo 26 OUT Gununod daddiajc ‘passod Aigo buipunds joy 143 ‘SUOIZEJOUUR HUA ‘ASJVAI I 9Y} JO ‘uONeISIWY JaA0 UONPISMUU] JO ssaoxa Aj1weA oy} SuMoys aaino e Aj[eor—‘eyeyjsny yInog jo ,ydery Aysadsoig,, ayy, “dez ‘Sy S261 0261 Giél O16I $06l 0061 S68l 0681 S881 088 =e Mh _|_[ 411 la ‘000S- . ee 1 ee “US any ‘na Ve tee “00001 MOAADSIY Synpysay BOM | pioray ibroap joars _PRUSHAPH g Twang inaiddy 4207 Anaanpy sald SUOSDIS Pood WolPnpPord sulM —¥ ‘ hingAvmyioy qouy u03] Moy]Ow UOI Ny ASaly suosuas Aig ¥ —————-— ADM UDILSY YpNOS “SpaaD juaUM Ui “apiojapy :damod A : Gr4s2 SAajjaus atatg Hog "se01d pun uarponajsuos Apmyipy, - PUO 4Yb1] 31442219 -ByoosawL plod suosbes poos UdIpNsysuo0s Aomiyoy 40 woisuaxa pidva saying OlpoOTijiqowmag eel Oe paysi[qujse Yiosmuowmuses pawuiojraad seiyunos E SS S2injsod burssaap dopy sano) SS “PIBWOD Uorjo\nayal MNOD-PADIS2 0010422 ——» paanipoajur sajoydsoudiadng 144 SP hha pugs BARRIERS TO MOVEMENTS. ssa 10 "isohyet. E-W. GULP =ngh lands N-S. ees, river. N-S. ie gulfs N-S. Fig. 23. This figure has been drawn to show the routes followed in the progressive movements of population from Adelaide outward: First into the remainder of the Adelaide-Mount Lofty region, then to the South-East, later to the North, to Yorke Peninsula, and the West Coast, to the Murray Mallee, and finally to the Murray Valley itself. The arrows are intended to show °- the general directions in which the outward (dispersive) flow of popula- tion has taken place, and the relation of such corridors of communication to the topographic features. The physiographic barriers to population movement may be summarised as follow:—(i.) a barrier to northward movement, constituted by the zone of 10-inch annual rainfall; (ii.) barriers to East-West movement: Spencer Gulf, Guli St, Vincent, the Mount Lofty Ranges, the Murray River (of these, the two gulfs and the river have been utilised as channels of communication); (iii.) Both in the West and in the East (Central Eyre Peninsula and east of the Coorong, respectively) the wide streamless malice plains have acted, to some extent, as barriers to population movement. As indicated by the sketch map, population has radiated continuously from Adelaide, with sub- ordinate centres at Tailem Bend and Port Lincoln, The only “open road” from the capital is that across the plains to the North; to the nearer West the way is by sea or air across the Gulfs; to the East the high barrier of the Mount Lofty Ranges, though surmounted, presents a never- ending hindrance to cheap transport and communication in that direction. The sketch map indicates the impressive way in which physiographic features have affected the progress of settlement of the State. The routes here defined should be studied in conjunction with the spot-maps in preceding sections that deal with the detailed movements of dispersion and concentration of population. 145 While acknowledging, as we have done, the fact that complex financial and legislative factors have played an important part in this latest cycle of prosperity, we cannot be far wrong in interpreting it mainly as the outcome, during a series of good seasons, of cumulative advances in the adjustment of agricultural practice to the natural environment provided within the borders of our State. In this adjustment we should include not only agricultural extension and practice, but also improvements in stock-raising, fruit-growing, vine-growing, forestry, mining, manufacturing, water supplies, transport, communications, and marketing. (d) Conclusion—While this paper is purely a geographical study of the growth and movement of the population of South Australia, as determined by the environmental conditions, and varied by man’s re-action to those conditions, it is inevitable that the intensive study of the various tendencies that have operated during the life of the State should suggest “direction-marks” regarding the future. Without departing from the strict line of unbiassed scientific research, it is thus permissible to set down some suggestions regarding the future, it being understood that such suggestions (which are not new) are re-stated purely from the geographical point of view, with the added emphasis provided by the evidence that has been collected and presented in this paper. ‘They are as follow :— 1. The foundation of a stable and growing population is a steady birth rate; the ebb and flow of immigration is, to a great extent, automatically governed by those environmental factors that determine general prosperous or adverse conditions. 2. Within the southern division of the State, i.¢., “The Counties,” periods of depression will recur, as dry seasons most certainly will; but the tendency is for these to press less and less heavily, in proportion to the continued adoption of the sound methods and thrifty habits that have developed under our special geographi- cal conditions. “ 3. In the endeavour to co-operate with the geographical environment of the various regions of the State, and to combat the adverse influences, there is required further concentration towards: (a) plant, animal, topographical, and soil research ; (b) the preparation of maps of all forms of State resources; and (c) the wide- spread dissemination, by education, of scientific, engineering, and agricultural knowledge and skill. 4, Beyond “The Counties,” in the purely pastoral regions north of the 10-inch line of rainfall, where droughts are more frequent, the decimating effects of dry seasons on the flocks and herds may be somewhat ameliorated by a rigid avoidance of over-stocking and over-feeding. Apart from minerals, the chief wealth of this great area is its mantle of native vegetation, the existence of which is at present in peril. 5. Agricultural settlement has reached its northern limits, and these limits are, on the whole, well within the boundaries of the counties; future efforts should be devoted to the occupation of areas yet unoccupied within the counties, and to the more intense utilization of well-watered land that js already under occupation, 146 AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA, No. 1. CENSUS OF RECORDED HOSTS AND PARASITES. By Proressor T. Harvey Jounston and Erriz W. DeLAnp, B.Sc., University of Adelaide. [Read August 8, 1929.] Australian Acanthocephala have received very little attention. Dr. Sweet (1909, 498), in her census of the entozoa recorded from Australia, included only four, together with one from the Bismarck Archipelago. Of these four, two were merely mention of Echinorhynchus sp. from a porpoise and from a whip snake, both recorded by Krefft (1871) ; one relates to the presence of the common acanthocephalan from the pig in New South Wales; and the fourth, a species described by Linstow (1898) from material collected by Semon from a bandicoot in the Burnett River district, Queensland. The senior author added other records, using the wide generic term, Echinorhynchus sp. (1910-1912), besides describing a few new forms. More recently Southwell and Macfie (1925) described several new species. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Johnston and Cleland (1911), fre- quently referred to in this census, is a widely distributed larval form occurring in many species of Australian birds. The forms mentioned as occurring in Australian birds and reptiles to date were included in Johnston’s census of recorded entozoa of those groups (1910, 1911, 1912); while those known to occur in Queensland were included in the census of endoparasites recorded from that State (Johnston 1916). Cleland (1922) listed those found in Australian birds and mentioned additional findings, and in 1916 made casual reference to Johnston’s records of Acanthocephala from Australian rats. A considerable mass of material is now on hand, representing collections made by Professor J. B. Cleland and the senior author, and it is proposed to take up the study more seriously, the present paper forming the first of a series which, it is hoped, will be continued as opportunity offers. In this census, the previous records, with few exceptions, are listed without comment, and a number of new ones are added. Synonymy of the host or parasite is introduced only where the recorder has referred to cither under such name or names. The bird hosts are named and arranged in accordance with the “Official Check-list of Birds of Aus- tralia,” Edit. 2, 1926. MAMMALIA. MARSUPIALIA. Isoopon opesuLus Shaw (syn. Perameles obesulus). Gigantorhynchus semoni Linstow 1898, 471. Burnett R., Q’land.; Porta 1908, 276: 1909, 257. Originally described under Echinorhynchus, subgenus Gigantorhynchus. Travassos (1917, 25) transferred it to Prosthenorchis (sensu lato). Johnston recorded its presence in N.S. Wales (1909 e, 521). PERAMELES NASUTA Geoffr. Gigantorhynchus semoni L.inst. Johnston 1910 c, XVII. as Giganto- rhynchus sp.; 1911 a, 50, N.S. Wales. 147 PHASCOGALE PENICILLATA Shaw. Gigantorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910 c, XVII.; 1911 a, 50. The host, “a brush-tailed rat,” may possibly be Bettongia penicillata Gray. RODENTIA. Mus muscunus L, Moniliformis moniliformis Br. The record by Johnston (1909 a, 583, Sydney) is an error (Johnston 1918 a, 69). Rattus Norvecicus Erxl. (Mus or Epimys decumanus ). Moniliformis moniliformis Br. syn. Gigantorhynchus moniliformis; Hormo- rhynchus moniliformis. Johnston 1909 a, 583 ; 1909 b, 218; 1909 d, 81, N.S.W.; 1912 b, 83, Brisbane; 1913, 93, N, Q’land; 1918 a, 69, Sydney. Southwell and Macfie 1925, 171, N. Q’land; Fielding 1927, 124, N. Q’land. This para- site occurs in the grey rat in Adelaide. Rattus rattus L, and its variety ALEXANDRINUS, (Mus or Epimys rattus and alexandrinus), Moniliformis moniliformis Br. Johnston 1909 a, 583; 1909 b, 218, 590; 1909 d, 81, N.S.W.; 1912 b, 83, Brisbane; 1918 a, 69, Sydney. Southwell and Macfie 1925, 171, N. O’land; Fielding 1927, 124, N, O'land. Occurs also in R, rattus in Adelaide. Rats (unspecified). Monihformis moniliformis Br. Nicoll 1914, N. Q’land. UNGULATA. Sus scrora L. dom. Macracanthorhynchus hirundinaceus Pall. (Gigantorhynchus hirundina- ceus; G. gigas). Perrie (Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 3, 1892, 822) N.S.W.; Johnston 1909 a, 583; 1909 d, 79, N.S.W.; 1918 b, 216 (S.E. Q’land). This parasite occurs - at times in Victorian pigs slaughtered in Adelaide, but has not yet been detected in pigs bred in South Australia. CETACEA. DELPHINUS FoRSTERT Gray. Probably a synonym of D. delphis L, Echinorhynchus sp. Krefft 1871, 212 (Australian seas). DELPHINUS DELPHIS L, Corynosoma sp., resembling C. strumosum Rud., has been collected from this porpoise in Gulf St.Vincent, S. Aust, WHaLEe—cast up on Bondi Beach, sydney, N.S.W. Bolbosoma porrigens Rud. nec Kaiser. Not previously recorded from Aus- tralian seas. The longest specimen measured 197 mm., which is much greater than the dimension usually met with. B, porrigens of Kaiser nec Rudolphi is, according to Luhe (1905), a synonym of B. turbinella Dies. which has been recorded from a whale from New Zealand. Through the courtesy of Dr. C. Anderson, Director of the Australian Museum, Sydney, and Mr. E. Troughton, the old registers of that institution were searched for a clue as to the probable identification of the whale. The only specimens likely to be concerned were those identified as Kogia breviceps (grayi) and Megaptera longimana, belonging to the Physeteridae and Balaenidae respectively, both obtained in the vicinity of Bondi, 148 N.S.W. Since the parasite seems to be especially associated with species of the latter family, the host was probably Megaptera nodosa Bonnaterre (syn. M. lengt- mana Rud.). AVES. GALLIFORMES. ALECTURA LATHAMI Gray. (Cathelurus lathami). Echinorhynchus (Gigantorhynchus) sp. Johnston 1912 a, 106; 1912 b, 72; 1916, 45 S. Q’land. Probably a species of Mediorhynchus or Empodius, if the latter be generically distinct. Van Cleave (1924) unites them but Travassos (1924, 1926), as well as Southwell and Macfie (1925), consider them distinct. TURNICIFORMES. PEDIONOMUS TORQUATUS Gould. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel.—a larval form identified from material collected at Ooldea, S.A. CHARADRIIFORMES. NuMEnNrus cyanopus Vieill. Arythmorhynchus sp. (syn. Echinorhynchus sp.) Johnston 1912 a, 107, Cen- tral Q’land; 1914 a, 110, N. Q’land. ACCIPITRIFORMES. ASTUR NOVAEHOLLANDIAE Gmelin (syns. Astur clarus Lath.; A. cinereus Vieill). Centrorhynchus asturinus Johnston, originally described as Gigantorhynchus . asturinus Johnston 1912 a, 108; 1913, 93; but later transferred to Centrorhynchus (1918 b, 215). Southwell and Macfie 1925, 164, N. Q’land. Travassos (1917, 28) included the species in Gigantorhynchus (sensu lato), and subsequently (1926, 44) under Centrorhynchus, Asrur Fasciatus Vig. and Horsf. (syn. 4. approximans). Centrorhynchus asturinus Johnston, syn. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, 100, N.S.W. Occurs in this species of hawk in Adelaide district, S. Austr. (Collected by Prof. Cleland.) ACCIPITER CIRROCEPHALUS Vieill. Centrorhynchus asturinus Johnston. Southwell and Macfie 1925, 163. Townsville. This parasite occurs in the same host species in N.S.W. Centrorhynchus buteonis Goeze. Marval 1905, 24, no locality given. Baza suBcristata Gould. Centrorhynchus asturinus Johnston 1918 b, 215. Richmond River, N.S.W. Echinorhynchus bazae Southwell and Macfie 1925, 177, N. Q’land. Tra- yassos (1926, 59) believes the species to be a Prosthorhynchus. FaLco BERIGORA Vig. and Horsf., syn. Hieracidea berigora; H, orientalis Sharpe. Centrorhynchus asturinus Johnston, Southwell and Macfie 1925, 164, N Q’land. [t is now recorded as occurring in the brown hawk in N.5.W. STRIGIFORMES. Ninox soorook Lath. Centrorhynchus sp. Johnston 1918 b, 216; syn. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1912, 109. Burnett River, Q’land. 149 CORACIIFORMES. EURYSTOMUS ORIENTALIS L. (syn, E. pacificus Lath.), Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1912 a, 109, S. Q’land. HALCYON sSANcTUs Vig. and Horsf. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, 105, N.S.W. Probably identical with E. horridus Linstow (1897) from the sacred kingfisher from New Britain. Porta (1913) recorded it from H. sanctus from New Caledonia and Loyalty Islands, transferring it to Chentrosoma. Linstow’s original material was re-described by Marval (1905, 284-6). Travassos (1926, 58) transferred the species to Prosthorhynchus. CUCULIFORMES. CENTROPUS PHASIANINUS Lath. Echinorhynchus bulbocaudatus Southwell and Macfie 1925, 178, N. Q’land. Travassos (1926, 59) believes the species to belong to Prosthorhynchus, MENURIFORMES. MENURA NOVAETIOLLANDIAE Lath. (syn. M. superba Davies). Echinorhynchus menurae Johnston 1912 b, 83, N.S.W. Travassos (1926, 58) placed the species under Prosthorhynchus. PASSERIFORMES. SEISURA INQUIETA Lath, Acanthocephala found by Cleland 1922, 108. Canowindra, N.S.W. PACHYCEPHALA INORNATA Gould (syn. P. gilberti Gould). Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel. 1911, 115, S. Austr. GRALLINA CYANOLEUCA Lath. (syn. G. picata Lath.), Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1912 a, 110; 1914, 110, N, O’land. PSOPHODES OLIvAcEUs Lath. (syn. P. crepitans Lath.). Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, 107, N.S.W. Acanthocephala found by Cleland (1922, 108), Bunya Mountains, S. Q’land. CINCLOSOMA RUFIVENTRIS Gould, Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel., Port Lincoln, S. Austr. A new record, CINCLOSOMA CASTANEUM Gould. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel., Murray Flats, S. Austr. A new record. CINCLOSOMA CINNAMONEUM Gould. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel., larvae in subcutaneous tissues. Cleland 1922, 108, S. Austr. PoMATOSTOMUS TEMPORALIS Vig. and Horsf. (syn. P. frivolus Lath.). Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel., 1911, 112, N.S.W. Cleland 1922, 108, Canowindra, N.S.W. 150 PoMATOSTOMUS RUBECULUS Gould. EKchinorhynchus pomatostomt Jnstn. and Clel., 1911, 111; syn. Echano- rhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, N.-W. Austr. PoMATOSTOMUS SUPERCILIOSUS Vig. and Horsf. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn, and Clel. 1911, 112; syn. Echino- rhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, 107, S. Austr. Cleland 1922, 108, Hallett’s Cove, S. Austr.; Baradine, N.S.W. Pomatostomus RruFiIcers Hartlaub. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel. Identified from material col- lected in the Gawler Ranges and also from the Murray River district, 5. Austr. The latter occurrence is referred to by J. Sutton, S. Austr. Ornithol., 10, 1929, 33. OrREOcICHLA LUNULATA Lath. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, 108, N.S.W. (An adult form.) Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel. (larval). Cleland 1922, 108, Kuitpo, 5. Austr. Acanthocephala were recorded by the latter author (1922) from Bunya Mountains, Q’land. APHELOCEPHALA LEUCOPSIS Gould. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel. 1911, 112 (syn. Echino- rhynchus sp. Jnstn 1910, 109), 5. Austr. Cleland 1922, 108, Hallett’s Cove, S. Austr. SERICORNIS MACULATUS Gould. Echinorhynchus sp. (subcutaneous, probably £. pomatostomi), Port Lincoln, S. Austr., collected by Professor Cleland. A new record. PyRRHOLAEMUS BRUNNEUS Gould. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi, Jnstn. and Clel. Identified from material col- lected near Farina, S. Austr. , HyLacoLA pyrruopycta Vig. and Horsf. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Jnstn. and Clel. 1911, 112, 5. Austr. MrcALurus GALAcToTEs Temm. Echinorhynchus cylindraceus Goeze. Marval 1905, 250. No locality given. The host is widely distributed in the more northerly portions of Australia. ‘The parasite has a wide distribution outside of Australia, and has also been recorded from Merulus from the Loyalty Islands by Porta in 1913. Travassos (1926, 41, 43, 58) has quoted Marval’s F. cylindraceus as includ- ing two different species of Centrorhynchus, C. cylindraceus Goeze and C. fascia- tus Westr., as well as Prosthorhynchus dimorphocephalus Westr. Marval also included P. rectus Linton, which Travassos regards as a valid species. In view of the confusion existing, a re-examination of Australasian material, attributed to Goeze’s species, is desirable. CLIMACrERIS PICUMNUS Temm, Syn. C. scandens Gould nec ‘femm. Echinorhynchus pomatostom Jnstn. and Clel. Mr. F. Parsons informs us that this larval parasite is very commonly found subcutaneously in this species of tree creeper in South Australia. Cleland 1922, 108, Morgan, S. Austr. 151 CLIMACTERIS LEUCOPHAEA Lath. Syn. C. scandens Temm. nec Gould. Echinorhynchus pomatostomt Jnstn. and Clel. occurs occasionally in this species in South Australia (F. Parsons). CLIMACTERIS WELLSI Grant. Echinorhynchus pomatostomi Junstn. and Clel, 1911, 111; syn. Echino- rhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, 109, N.-W. Austr. MELIORNIS NOVAEHOLLANDIAE Lath. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910, 111, N.S.W. CorRcoRAX MELANORHAMPHUS Vieill. Echinorhynchus reported by Cleland 1922, 108, from Gunnedah and Belarin- gar, N.S.W. REPTILIA. LACERTILIA. Lycosoma (Hrnutia) guoyr D. & B. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1909 c, XXIX., Hawkesbury R., N.S.W. Lycosoma (HINULIA) TAENIOLATUM White. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1911 b, 243, Hawkesbury R., N.S.W. DEMANSIA TEXTILIS D. & B. (syn. Diementa textilis), Echinorhynchus sp., encysted larvae below peritoneum, adults in intestine. Johnston 1910 c, XL; 1910 b, 659; 1911 b, 237, Sydney, N.S.W.; encysted larvae — Johnston 1916, 59, Brisbane. Occurs also at Mount Lofty, S. Austr. DEMANSIA PSAMMOPHIS Schl. Echinorhynchus sp. Larvae below peritoneum. Brisbane, Q’land. DEMANSIA PSAMMOPHIS, var. RETICULATA Krefft. (Syn. Diemenia reticulata.) Echinorhynchus sp. Krefft 1871, 214, N.-W. Austr. Larvae in subperitoneal tissue, Johnston 1910 b, 659; 1911 b, 237. N.-W. Austr. PSEUDECHIS PORPHYRIACUS Shaw. Echinorhynchus rotundocapitatus Johnston 1912 b, 83, N.S.W. and Victoria ; 1918 b, 216, S. Q’land; syn. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1909 b, 590; 1911 b, 238, N.S.W. Occurs also in South Australia. DrpsapomorPitus Fuscus Gray. Echinorhynchus sp., encysted larvae, Johnston 1916, 59, Brisbane. AMPHIBIA. ANURA. HyLa AUREA Lesson. Echinorhynchus hylae Johnston 1914, 83; syn. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1912, 84, Sydney. A larval form from cysts below peritoneum. HyLa coERULEA White. Echinorhynchus hylae Johnston 1914, 83, from cyst below peritoneum. Brisbane. 152 PISCES. The arrangement followed is taken from MacCulloch’s “Check list of the Fishes of N.S. Wales,” 1922. PERCOMORPHI. TRACHURUS DECLIVIS Jenyns, Echinorhynchus clavulus Duj. nec Hamann. Southwell and Macfie 1925, 179. Australia. As the specimen was collected by Dr. Maplestone on the same date as that on which he took Acanthocephala from another fish at Townsville, N. Q’land, the latter must have been the locality for the species thus identified, Pomapasys Hasta Gunther. Echinorhynchus truttae Schrank, was recorded from a “grunter” by South- well and Mache (1925, 180) from Townsville, N. Q’land. Since P. hasta, the javelin fish, is also called “grunter” locally, and was so. indicated by Nicoll who investigated its trematode fauna, it may safely be assumed that this is the species referred to. The identification of this typical parasite of trout in a quite different type of fish which is tropical and subtropical in its distribution, seems to us very doubtful. SPARUS AUSTRALIS Gunther. Echinorhynchus sp. Nicoll 1914, N. Q’land. We have collected specimens from this “black bream” in the Brisbane River, S$. O’land., SPARUS BERDA Forsk, Echinorhynchus clavula Duj. nec Hamann. Southwell and Macfie 1925, 179, ‘Townsville, N. O’land. Echinorhynchus truttae Schrank. Southwell and Macfie 1925, 180. No locality given, but apparently collected at Townsville, also. We question the correctness of both of these identifications, and suggest the possibility of the host label having become misplaced (see under Pomadasys, also). GIRELLA TRIcCUSPIDATA Q. & G. (Syn. G. simplex Richardson. ) Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1909 c, XXIX, Bondi, N.S.W. TitvRSITES ATUN Tuphr. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1909 b, 710, Clarence River, N.S.W. SCLEROPAREI. CHELIDONICHTHYs KUMU Less and Garn. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910 b, 660, Sydney, N.S.W. PLATYCEPHALUS FUSscUS Civ. and Val. Echinorhynchus sp. Johnston 1910 b, 660, Sydney, N.S.W, Serrasentis socialis Leidy. Southwell and Macfie (1925, 160) record the presence of larvae belonging to this species encysted in the body cavity of this flathead at ‘Townsville, N. Q’land. The parasite is more widely known as S. sagittifer Linton. (See Van Cleave 1924, 326-8. ) UNKNowN Fisu, but probably the Tailor, Pomatromus saLratrrx L. Serrasentis socialis Leidy, Adult specimens obtained by the senior author from a fish caught at Sydney, N.S.W, 153 “FELAppocK.” : Echinorhynchus gadi Zoega. Southwell and Macfie 1925, 179, Townsville, N. Q’land. The haddock, Gadus aeglefinus, does not occur in Australia. Neither MacCulloch nor Waite, in their catalogues of the fishes of Queensland, New South Wales and South Australia, mentions the presence of any species of Gadus in Australian waters, though the family Gadidae is represented in the more southerly portions of the coast by Lofella and Physiculus. Gunther (“Study of Fishes,” 1880) states that the genus Gadus is found in the arctic and temperate zones of the northern hemisphere. In view of these facts, it seems likely that the locality label must have become misplaced and that the record should be omitted from the Australian list. Host UNKNowN. Neoechinorhynchus magnus Southwell and Macfie 1925, 149, Townsville, N. Q’land. A short, unfigured account based on one immature female specimen. The genus occurs in fish and chelonians. A number of errors regarding localities have appeared in Travassos’ paper (1926). Those relating to Australasian records are as follows :—Centrorhynchus zosteropis (Porta) recorded as from Turkestan should be from New Caledonia and Loyalty Islands; C. asturinus Jnstn. from New Caledonia should be from Australia; C. spinosus (Kaiser) from Australia should be from Florida; C. giganteus Trav. from Australia should be from Brazil; Centrorhynchus sp. Jnstn. from Ninox boobook, mentioned as from Brazil, should be from Australia. . LITERATURE. 1922—CLELanp, J. B.: The Parasites of Australian Birds. T.R.S., S. Austr., 46, 1922, 85-118. 1927—-Fretprne, J. W.: Observations on Rodents and their Parasites, P.R.S., N.S.W., 61, 1927, 115-134. 1909s—Jonnston, T. H.: Notes on some Australian Parasites. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1909, 581-4. 1909s—Jounston, T. H.: Notes and exhibits (of Entozoa). P.L.S., N.S.W., 1909, 117-8, 217-9, 412-3, 417-8, 590-1, 710-1. 1909c—Jounsron, T. H.: Exhibits (of Entozoa). P.R.S., N.S.W., 43, 1909, XXVIIL-XXIX. 1909n—Jounsron, T. H.: List of Parasites occurring in Australia (in man and the domesticated animals). Rep. Bur. Microbiology, N.S.W., 1, 1909 (1910), 75-81. 1909z—Jounston, T. H.: The Entozoa of Monotremata and Australian Mar- supialia I. P.L.S., N.S.W., 34, 514-523. 1910a—Jounston,-T. H.: On Australian Avian Entozoa. P.R.S., N.S.W., 44, 84-122, 1910z—Jounstron, T. H.: Notes and exhibits (of Entozoa). P.L.S., N.S.W., 35, 309-10, 522-523, 659-60, 804. 1910c—Jounston, T. H.: Exhibits (of Entozoa). P.R.S., N.S.W., 44, 1910, XI-XIV., XVII. 1911a—Jounston, T. H.: The Entozoa of Monotremata and Australian Mar- supialia II, P.L.S., N.S.W., 36, 47-57. 1911s—Jounston, T. H.: A Census of Australian Reptilian Entozoa. P.R.S., QOld., 23, 1911, 233-249. 154 1912a—Jomnston, T. H.: Internal Parasites Recorded from Australian Birds. Emu, 12, 1912, 105-112. 1912n—Jounston, T. H.: Notes on some Entozoa. P.R.S., Qld., 26, 1912, 63-91, 1913—Jounsron, T. H.: Report on Cestoda and Acanthocephala. Rep. Austr. Inst. Trop. Med., 1911 (1913), 75-96. 1914a—Jounston, T. H.: Second Report on the Cestoda and Acanthocephala Collected in Queensland. Ann. Trop. Med. Parasit. 8, 1914, 105-112. 1914n—Jounston, T, H.: Some New Queensland Endoparasites. P.R.S., Qid., 26, 1914, 76-84. 1916—Jounston, T. H.: Census of the Endoparasites recorded as occurring in Queensland, etc. P.R.S., Old., 28, 1916, 31-79. 19184—Jounston, T. H.: Notes on certain Entozoa of Rats and Mice, etc. P.R.S., Qld., 30, 1918, 53-78, 1918:—Jounston, T. H.: Notes on Miscellaneous Endoparasites. P.R.S., Old., 30, 1918, 209-218. 1911—Jounston, T. H., and Crecann, J. B.: Echinorhynchus pomatostomi. A subcutaneous Parasite of Australian Birds. P.R.S., N.S.W., 45, 1911, 111-115. 1871—Krerrt, G.: On Australian Entozoa, etc. Tr. Ent. Soc., N.S.W., 2, 1871, 206-232. 1898——Linstow, O.: Nemathelminthen—in Semon’s Zool. Forschungsr. in Australien, 5, 469-472. 1905—Marvat, L.: Monographie des Acanthocephales des Oiseaux. Rey. Suisse Zool., 13, 195-387. 1914—NrcoLt, W.: Remarks on the Worm Parasites of Tropical Queensland. Med. Jour. Aust., Sept., 1914, 244-6. 1908—Porta, A.: Gli Acantocefali dei Mammiferi, Nota preventiva. Arch. Parasitol., 12, 268-282, i 1909—Porta, A.: Gli Acantocefali dei Mammiferi. Archivio Zoologico, 4 239-285. 1925—Soutuwe i, T., and Macrie, J. W.: On a Collection of Acanthocephala in the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, Ann. Trop. Med. Parasit., 19, 1925, 141-184, 1908—Sweer, G.: The Endoparasites of Australian Stock and Native Fauna, L. Census, etc. P.R.S., Viet., 21, 1908, 454-502. 1917—Travassos, L.: Contribuicoes, etc. Revisao dos acantocefalos brasilieros, I. Fam. Gigantorhynchidae. Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 9, 1917, 5-62. 1926—Travassos, L.: Contribuicoes, etc., 20, Revisao dos acantocefalos bra- silieros, II. Fam. Echinorhynchidae, ete. Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 19, 1926, 31-125, 1924—Vawn Curave, H. J.: A critical study of the Acanthocephala described and identified by Joseph Leidy. “Pr. Ac. Nat. Sei,, Philad., 76, 1924, 279-334, > 155 AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA, No, 2. By Pror. T. Harvey Jonnston and Errrz W. Devanp, B.Sc., University of Adelaide. [Read August 8, 1929.] Sphaerechinorhynchus rotundocapitatus (Jnstn.), n. gen. Fics. 1 to 34 This parasite occurs fairly commonly in the rectum and lower part of the intestine of the black snake, Pseudechis porphyriacus Shaw, in New South Wales, Victoria and Southern Queensland, and has been recorded recently from South Australia (Johnston and Deland 1929). It was originally described (Johnston 1912, 83) under Echinorhynchus, a genus which has since been considerably sub- divided. The body is firm and roughly cylindrical, white in life, but creamy, or even pinkish, in preserved material. The cuticle is smooth in extended, and trans- versely wrinkled in contracted, specimens. The females are larger and, when mature, range from 30 to 37 mm. in length. One young individual was only 18 mm. The body is wide (4 to 5 mm. in diameter) for the anterior two-thirds, and tapers to 1:5 to 2°0 mm, The posterior extremity is bifid, the genital aperture lying slightly below the apex of the cavity between the two lobes (figs. 30, 31). The males range from 18 to 23 mm. in length and are much less tapering than the females. The width anteriorly is about 3 mm., and posteriorly about 2mm. The form of the posterior end varies with the degree of extension. In one specimen the copulatory bursa was everted, appearing as a delicate, white, bell-shaped structure of the form shown in figs. 28 and 29. The above measurements were taken from material preserved in formalin and containing a large number of individuals. In specimens preserved in spirit, and obviously much contracted, the lengths were—female, 15 mm.; males, 12 and 14°5 mm. The proboscis is nearly spherical, measuring from 0*7 to 0°85 mm. across, and bears 18 longitudinal rows of hooks with alternately 6 and 7 in a row, making 117 in all (fig. 1). Each hook consists of a strong backwardly project- ing outer spine and a large basal portion embedded in the musculature of the proboscis. They are largest at the apex, becoming very much smaller at the base. Three typical hooks, the apical three of their row, are shown in fig. 3. There is a short neck-like region followed by a somewhat wider collar connecting it with the body (fig. 2). The body wall is composed, as usual, of a cuticle, a thick sub- cuticula, and two layers of muscle fibres, an external circular and an internal longitudinal (figs. 9,12). The subcuticula shows all the areas generally present. A region of radial striations lies immediately below the cuticle, which it slightly exceeds in thickness. Beneath this is a distinct layer of mingled circular, tan- gential and radial fibrils, divided into six to eight strata by the circular fibrils. This arrangement is less pronounced than that indicated by Saefftigen (1885), for Echimorhynchus proteus Westr., which is now usually known as Pompho- rhynchus laevis Muller, and recently by Harada for /ehadinorhynchus katsuwonis. Below this layer is one of radially-arranged fibrils in which travel the channels of the lacunar system. The subcuticula is bounded by a thin but definite limiting membrane.. The nuclei of the subcuticula are typical of those of the whole body (figs. 7, 10). They are not situated in the fibrous portion of the subcuticula nor in the walls of the lacunae, as figured by Hamann for Ech, echinodiscus Dies 156 (= Gigantorhynchus echinodiscus), but are suspended in the middle of the lacunae by strands of tissue. Saefftigen (pl. 3, figs. 1, 3) indicates them in this position but without any supporting fibrils. The nuclei, which measure 0-02 to 0-03 mm. in their longer axis, are irregular in outline and contain numerous very obvious nucleoli, of which there may be as many as a dozen, ranging in size from the smallest which are mere dots under oil immersion, to a maximum of 0-0075 mm. (fig. 10). The variations in size and shape of the nuclei, and in number of the nucleoli, are greater in the subcuticula than elsewhere in the body. The lacunar system consists of two definite longitudinal canals in addition to very numerous smaller channels of rather irregular outline, which form a close lig. 1.—Proboscis. Fig. 2.—Outline of anterior end indicating insertion of proboscis sheath. Fig. 3.—Three most anterior hooks of one longitudinal row. network throughout the subcuticula (fig. 8). The canals in the lemnisci are single and centrally situated (fig. 15). Beneath the subcuticula lie layers of circular and longitudinal muscle fibres. Within the spaces surrounding the bases of these a certain amount of a granular coagulum, which stained deeply with haematoxylin, was sometimes found. A similar substance occurred in spaces in the proboscis (fig. 18) and male genital organs, but such material was not seen in the lacunar system. The proboscis sheath is a double-walled muscular sac inserted at the base of the proboscis (fig. 2). Its length varies from 2°5 to 2-7 mm., and its maximum width from 1°05 to 0°75 mm. The central region is occupied by four large, branching retractor muscle cells, which are attached to the muscular wall of the Fig. 4.--Portion of posterior end of male, showing end of body deeply invaginated. Fig. 5.—Ditto, showing genital sphincter in terminal position. Drawn to same scale as fig. 4. Fig. 6.—Entire male, showing anatomy. 158 Fig. 7—lLacunar system of body wall (from tangential section). Fig. 8.—lLacunar system of part of body viewed as a transparent object. Fig. 9.—Portion of T.S. body wall. Fig. 10.—Nucleus from subcuticula. Fig. 11—T.S. of prostate glands and vas deferens. 159 Fig. 12—T.S. body at level of introverted proboscis. Fig. 13.—T.S. proboscis posterior to fig. 12. Fig. 14.—T.S. retinaculum, showing enclosed nerve fibres, Fig. 15.—T.S. lemniscus. 160 proboscis in front and the inner proboscis sheath at its base. The protoplasmic portion of these cells lies anteriorly, surrounding the retracted proboscis (fig. 12). ‘These cells are shown in transverse section in fig. 13, and two of them in longi- tudinal section in fig. 18. The proboscis ganglion is situated eccentrically in the space between the four large retractor muscle cells (fig. 18), somewhat in advance of the mid-length of the proboscis sheath. It consists of a comparatively small number of cells (fig. 16), and does not show as marked a differentiation into a peripheral layer of nerve cells and a central mass of fibres or supporting tissue, as that described Fig. 16.—L.S. ganglion. Fig. 17.—Cell (? supporting) from ganglion, Fig, 18—L.S. proboscis, showing situation of ganglion; one-tenth magnification of figs. 16, 17. by Hamann and Saefftigen. It is possible that some of the nuclei observed in the ganglion belong to a syncytial supporting tissue similar to that of the subcuticula, as in two or three cases it was not possible to observe any cell boundary between neighbouring nuclei (fig. 17). The retinacula arise from the sides of the proboscis sheath, about a milli- metre from its posterior end, and pass obliquely forwards to the body wall. In transverse section, each is seen to be composed of a muscular sheath consisting of one long muscle cell which encloses a bundle of nerve fibres (fig. 14). ‘The two lemnisci which arise at the junction of the proboscis sheath and the general body wall are exceedingly long and narrow, their lengths in a male speci- men being 17 and 18 mm,, respectively, with an average width of 0°3 mm, ‘heir ground tissue, as seen in transverse section (fig. 15), resembles that of the inner- most layer of the subcuticula. There is a distinct, relatively thick, external limiting membrane. The single central lacuna of each appears to be more definitely bounded by a delicate membrane when compared with those of the body wall. Fach lemniscus has numerous nuclei, especially towards the anterior end. In both sexes the genital ligament arises from the posterior end of the pro- boscis sheath and extends backward through the entire body length. Several 161 strands of muscle fibres pass from it to the body wall at the posterior end. The ligament itself is composed of a few muscle fibres embedded in a filmy piroto- plasmic strand. MALE SYSTEM. The two oval testes, measuring about 0°5 by 0-3 mn1., lie one behind the other in the anterior third of the body. Each is enclosed in a capsule formed by the genital ligament, and from the posterior end of each capsule there arises a single vas efferens. There are six very long, narrow prostate glands whose length in the specimen measured was 12 mm., the diameter of each being about 0-1 mm. ‘These glands commence at about the level of the posterior testis and pass back- ward, side by side, within the genital ligament. In section they are irregularly rounded, with an approximately central lumen, filled with a granular and strongly eosinophil prostate secretion. The surrounding syncytial tissue contains numerous typical nuclei in a fibrous matrix. Small granules, and groups of granules, are scattered through this matrix, but the area immediately surrounding the lumen is comparatively clear (fig. 11). The vasa efferentia travel separately within the ligament for about two-thirds the length of the prostate glands, when they unite to form a single vas deferens, The latter, which shows one or two small swellings along its course, passes back- ward to the apex of the large muscle-sac or markbeutel, where it expands to form a club-shaped vesicula seminalis. From the latter a convoluted ductus ejactula- torius passes through the tissue of the median lobe of the bursa to the male opening. At the apex of the markbeutel the prostate glands join to form a single musctlar prostate duct. In most of the preparations examined this was in a con- tracted state and contained no secretion, so that it was indistinguishable in whole mounts from the strand of muscle passing from the base of the markbeutel to the body wall and overlying it. This duct opens into a large bilobed prostate reservoir which envelopes the vesictula seminalis and extends laterally on both sides of the markbeutel. At its base the reservoir opens into the ductus ejactulatorius. These structures are shown in a reconstruction in fig, 21, and the relations of the vesicula seminalis, prostate reservoir and ejaculatory duct, in more detail, in fig, 20. No genital ganglion was observed. The copulatory bursa is a large thin-walled structure which, when withdrawn within the body, is very much folded and puckered. It is lined by a thin cuticle, but there are no lactinae in its subcuticula. At the posterior end the wall of the bursa is continuous with that of the posterior or genital sphincter. The latter is a single muscle cell with a peculiar “frothy” protoplasm surrounding a strongly cuticularised, narrow, winding tube which forms the external genital opening when the bursa is retracted; when the latter is everted it protrudes through this aperture as a bell-shaped organ with a pronounced thickening of part of the wall forming a kind of central lobe or fold projecting into its lumen, while the mark- beutel and associated structures become approximated to the inner side of the genital sphincter, and the actual aperture of the male duct becomes carried for- ward through the sphincter and lies within the everted bursa. In many specimens, not only is the bursa retracted, but as much as three or four millimetres of the body wall may be invaginated, so that the genital sphincter comes to lie at a corresponding distance from the posterior end of the specimen. As a result, there are three possible positions of the male complex, with intermediate connect- ing stages. Fig. 4 shows the arrangement in a state of extreme retraction, as does the section in fig. 19, where the pushing down of the sphincter into the apex of the invaginated region causes it to simulate a penis. Figs. 5 and 6 and the recon- struction shown in fig. 21 indicate the bursa retracted but with the sphincter terminal; while figs. 28, 29 and the section in fig. 20 show the bursa everted through the sphincter. fe | AW 7€ Hi pf NDS mm Wi Fig. 19.—L.S. posterior end of male, showing genital sphincter and invaginatcd body wall. Vig. 20.—Ditto, somewhat diagrammatic, with bursa extruded. Fig. 21.—Reproductive system of male, greatly folded walls of bursa indicated by dotted line. Fig. 22-—Reproductive system of female. 163 FemaLe System, In the gravid female the uterine bell, uterus and vagina together measure about 4mm, in length. The bell consists mainly of one large muscle cell enclosing a cavity into which the genital ligament passes to become attached at the base. There are, in addition, a few much smaller cclls forming the posterior region of the bell. Besides the wide anterior opening there are two ventro-lateral apertures leading to the body cavity, each within a lateral muscle cell (fig. 23). From the cavity of the bell two other openings, each within its own lateral muscle cell, lead into the uterus, their position being shown in figs. 24 and 25. This arrangement is essentially similar to that described by Kaiser (1893, pl. 7, figs. 11-16; pl. 8, figs. 2, 37), as occurring in five different species, which have since been allotted to Acanthocephalus, Macracanthorhynchus, Corynosoma and Bolbosoma, The uterus is a long, narrow tube with muscular walls, and is usually filled with eges. In the short, swollen vagina which succeeds it, two sphincters, an anterior and a posterior, can be recognised, Investing the lower tenth of the uterus is a pair of elongate cells, probably glandular, lying between the lumen and the muscle cell of that portion of the duct—in other words, these two cells are actually enveloped by the terminal muscle cell of the uterus. Then follows a similar, though very much smaller, cell lying between the muscle cells of the vaginal sphincter and the lumen of the vagina, and actually surrounding the latter. This is succeeded by a large cell, apparently of the same nature as the others, surrounding the female aperture. The last-mentioned cell differs from the others in form,, since it possesses a transverse diameter greater than its length and approximately the same as that of the mass of sphincter cells surrounding the preceding portion of the vagina (fig. 26). Eggs from the uterus range from 0-07 to 0-087 mm. in length, and from 0:025 to 0'027 mm. in diameter, There are three shells, of which the middle one is constricted near each end to form a polar pouch which measures about one- seventh its length. All eggs observed in the uterus were in the two-celled stage (fig. 27). In figs. 32, 33, 34, two individuals are indicated in copula, These were cleared in methyl salicylate, and some details were observed. The bursa was seen to have been protruded through the genital sphincter, carrying with it the mass of tissue which projects into the cavity of its bell and contains the ejaculatory duct (cf. fig. 20). This projection fitted into the latero-terminal depression of the female, while the end of the latter was stirrounded very closely by the bursa. SYSTEMATIC PostTIon, In 1911 Lithe restricted the old genus Echinorhynchus very considerably, after separating off from it a number of species which he allotted to new genera, Plagiorhynchus being amongst them. He mentioned that the species retained were parasitic in the intestine of fish, and Van Cleave (1923, p. 185) has apparently adopted the same view. Plagiorhynchus was erected to include related parasites of birds which differed from Echinorhynchus, sensu stricto, in possessing long finger-like lemnisci, a more or less oval body, and ‘eggs with characteristic polar swellings. This genus is regarded by Van Cleave and Travassos (1926) as valid, but Southwell and Macfie (1925, 177) quote it as a synonym of the latter, The species from the black snake possesses some well-marked characters, such as the short, spherical proboscis, the exceedingly long lemnisci, the anterior position of the testes, and the very long, narrow, tubular prostate glands, while the eggs are intermediate in form between those of Echinorhynchus and Pla- giorhynchus. These differences appear to us to be of sufficient value to justify generic separation. We therefore propose to erect a new genus, Sphaerechino- rhynchus, for which the following diagnosis may be offered :—Echinorhynchidae ; near Echinorhynchus and Plagiorhynchus (as defined by Lthe and Van Cleave); Vig. 23.—Uterine bell. Fig. 24.—Lateral view of bell in optical section, dotted lines indicate cells shown m g. 23. ; F j ; _25,--Face view of bell in optical section. Figs. 23, 24, 25 are at same magnification. Fig. 26.—Posterior end of uterus and vagina. Fig. 27 Ege. 165 Figs. 28, 2' Figs. 30, Fig. 32.—T wo individual Fig. 33.—Ditto, posterior end of each, magnified. Fig. 34.—Ditto, cleared and viewed as transparent objects, more highly 9.—Front and lateral views of everted bursa. 31.—Ditto of posterior end of female. $ in copula, about natural size. magnified. 166 small to medium size; body devoid of spines; proboscis short, more or less spherical, with numerous hooks diminishing in size posteriorly and possessing simple roots; numerous small nuclei in subcuticula; proboscis sheath double- walled and inserted at base of proboscis; ganglion near middle of proboscis sheath ; retinacula arising from side wall of sheath; lemnisci relatively very long, more than two-thirds the length of body; testes in anterior third of body; prostate lands, six, very long, narrow, tubular. Type, S. rolundocapitatus (Johnston 1912) Johnston and Deland 1929, from the black snake, Pseudechis porphyriacus. EXPLANATION OF LETTERING, aa, Anterior aperture of uterine bell; avs, anterior vaginal sphincter ; b, bursa; br, brain; bw, body wall; c, cuticle; cf, circular fibrils; cfl, coagulated fluid, cl, central lacutia ; clb, central lobe of bursa; cm, circular muscle; ct, capsule of testis; ed, ejaculatory duct; f, “frothy” protoplasm of genital sphincter; ge 1, ge 3, gc 4, gland cells of the vagina; gl, genital ligament ; gs, genital sphincter ; h, hook; ibw, invaginated body wall; ips, inner proboscis sheath; 1, lemniscus; la, lacuna ; lab, lateral aperture of uterine bell; ll, longitudinal lacuna ; Im, longitudinal muscle ; m, contractile part of muscle cell; ma, male aperture; mb, markbeutcl; med, mus- cular tissue surrounding ejaculatory duct; mil, limiting membrane; mpd, muscular wall of prostate duct; n, nucleus; nb, nucleus of large muscle cell of uterine bell; ne, nucleolus; nf, nerve fibre; ops, outer proboscis sheath; p, proboscis ; pa, pos- terior aperture of uterine bell; pd, prostate duct ; pm, protoplasmic part of muscle cell; pr, prostate reservoir; prp, protoplasmic part of retractor muscles; ps, pro- boscis sheath; pvs, posterior vaginal sphincter; rp, retractor muscle of proboscis ; s, prostate secretion; sc, stibcuticula; sl, striated layer; svd, swelling on vas deferens; t, testis; tl, terminal lobes of body wall; u, uterus; ub, uterine bell; vy, vagina; vd, vas deferens; ve, vas efferens; vs, vesicula seminalis. LITERATURE. 1895—Hamann, O.: Die Nemathelminthen, Monographie der Acanthocephalen (Echinorhynchen), 1895, 1-42. 1928—Harapa, L.: A new species of Acanthocephala from the Japanese bomito. Jap. Jour. Zool., 2, 1928, 1-4. 1911—Jounston, T. H.: Notes on some Entozoa. P.R.S.. Q’land, 23, 1911, 233-249. 1929—Jounston, T. H., and Deranp, E. W.: Australian Acanthocephala, No. 1, Census of Recorded Hosts and Parasites. P.R.S., S. Austr., 53, 1929, pp. 146-154. 1893—Kaiser, J. E.: Die Acanthocephalen und ihre Entwicklung, 1893. 1911—Luue, M.: Acanthocephalen, etc. In Brauer’s Die Siisswasserfauna Deutschlands, eft 16, 1911. 1886—SaAEFFTIGEN, A.: Zur Organisation der Echinorhynchen. Morph. Jahrb. 10, 1886, 120-171. 1925—SouTHWELL, T., and Macriz, J. W.: On a Collection ot Acantho- cephala in the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine. Ann. Trop. Med. Parasit., 19, 1925, 141-184. 1926—Travassos, 1..: Contribuicoes, etc., XX., Revisao dos Acanthocephalos brasilieros, 1I, Fam. Echinorhynchidae, etc. Mem. Instit. Osw. Cruz, 19, (1). 31-125. 1919—Van Creave, H. J.: Acanthocephala from the lois River, with descrip- , tions of species and a synopsis of the family Neoechinorhynchidae. Bull. St. Nat. Hist. Illinois, 13, 1919, 225-257. 1923—Vaw Creave, H. J.: A Key to the Genera of Acanthocephala. Tr. Amer, Micro. Soc., 1923, 185-191. 167 NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE GREAT PYAP BEND (LOXTON), RIVER MURRAY BASIN, AND REMARKS ON THE GEOLOGICAL HISTORY OF THE RIVER MURRAY. By Proressor Water Howcuy, F.G.S. [Read July 11, 1929.] Pratres VI. to VIII. CONTENTS, Page 1. Introduction bh _ sh fom: i. set e': w 167 2. Miocene Fossiliferous Beds near Loxton ....’ ay beds .. 168 3. River Alluvia.... aa! sad Sued an sit a4 w 168 4. Fresh-water Limestone a6 A _ es hes we 169 5. The Deserted River Course .... 382 sibs ibe ret . 169 6. Particulars of Bores_.... sis sist fh ts eee .. 170 7. Remarks on the Bores sien ar se a sett . 186 8. Tectonic Movements .... chi an nd fate — w =189 9. Physiographical Problems .... ne = ae m= we. 190 10. The Past History of the Lower River Murray .... A ale w =19T 11. The Present Outlet of the River Murray .... sor ets w 193 12. The Coorong _.... iy rid es “Th, Ti. ee . 194 1. INTRODUCTION. We are chiefly indebted to the late Professor Ralph Tate for a description of “The Physical and Geological Features of the Lower Murray River,” published 53 years ago. [Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. vii. (1884-5), p. 24.] Tate’s attention then, and subsequently, was principally directed to that portion of the river that extends from the North-West Bend (near Morgan), southward to the lakes, which presented a rare collecting field for Tertiary fossils. His knowledge of the river valley higher up than the North-West Bend scems to have been limited. In the paper just referred to he states: “That part of the river from the North- West Bend to the frontier was explored during a boat excursion occupying three weeks in the month of January of the present year” [1884]. I am not aware that Tate went over that ground a second time. Tate divided the South Australian portion of the Murray Basin into three distinct geological sections :— (1) A Lower Lacustrine area, taking in the lakes situated between Welling- ton and the mouth of the river. (2) The Gorge, cut in the fossiliferous Tertiary beds by a retreating water- fall, extending from Lake Alexandrina to Overland Corner. (3) An Upper Lacustrine area, consisting, chiefly, of fresh-water sands; forming a “minor plateau,” more or less subject to overflow, extending from Overland Corner to the New South Wales border. The observations recorded in the present paper were made in August, 1915, and are supplementary to those published by Tate. The river cliffs examined extend for about four miles (one and a half miles above Loxton, and two and a half miles below that township), taking in the most southerly portions of the Great Pyap Bend of the river. The geological formations, within the range stated, H 168 can be referred to two distinct ages-—-the lower beds representing the Marine Miocene System; and the upper, fluviatile or lacustrine sediments, probably of Newer Pleistocene age. 5 2. MIOCENE FOSSILIFEROUS BEDS, Tate, in describing a river “cliff at 101 miles from Blanchetown,” says: ‘This last section is instructive, as it is the only one known to me in which the actual superposition of the sharp fluviatile sands upon the marine beds is visible, though the same phenomenon may be inferred at Overland Corner. This section is distant in a straight line from Overland Corner four miles only, and yet in that short distance the whole character of the stratigraphy has changed” [loc cit. p. 42]. We have now to record the presence of the fossiliferous Miocene in outcrop as far up the river as Loxton (pl. vi., fig. 1), situated at the head of the Great Pyap Bend. The river was, unfortunately, in flood at the time of my visit, and, as the lower portions of the cliff were submerged, it made the examination of the beds near the water line rather hazardous. The following localities for the fessiliferous outcrops were noted :— (1) At Loxton these beds are exposed in a small washout in the cliff, where a rotten, argillaceous, dark-coloured bed contains shells in a bad state of preservation, mostly broken and decomposed to a chalky condition. The only recognisable forms were Ostrea, sp., and Crassatellites communis Tate. The bed is also exposed on the pathway by the side of the river, but, having been subjected to wear from traffic, most of the fossil remains had been reduced to fragments. The matrix could be correlated with exposures of a more definite character referred to below. (2) About a mile down the river from Loxton, at the most southerly bend of the river (pl. vi., fig. 2), a small exposure of the Miocene beds was observed in the bank, near the water’s edge. A local resident informed me that when the water was low the rock with shells was much better seen. (3) At the next southerly bend of the river, about one and a half miles from the last-mentioned locality, a much better outcrop appears in which about ten feet of a similar argillaceous fossiliferous bed was exposed in the face of a steep bank and passed below water level. Among the fossil forms noted were Cellepora gambierensis (very common), Retepera, sp., Flabellum, sp., Ostrea, sp., Crassatellites communis (common), Trigonia acuticostata, and Hinnites corioensis, The expostite appeared to be cou- tinuous for another mile down the river (pl. vii., fig. 1), but had not the opportunity of following it further. Information in the offices of the Engineer-in-Chief’s Department shows that, at seven miles above Loxton, a fossiliferous clay occurs from about low-water level in the banks, down to about 28 fect in the bed of the river; and at about 17 miles above Loxton there are fossiliferous beds just below river low-water level at a height of only 33 feet ahove sea level. 3. RIVER ALLUVIA, These are well developed near Loxton in cliffs that reach a height of about 80 to 100 feet. The deposits consist mainly of sands of various colours and degrees of fineness that are sometimes cross-bedded. Layers of small-sized gravel occur occasionally, the pebbles averaging in size about half an inch in the long diameter —rarely reaching a length of one inch. Coarse angular grits are common with an average size of one-eighth of an inch, rounded on their edges and angles. Coarse and fine sharp sands, passing into very fine whitish sand with fine flakes of clastic 169 mica scattered over the bedding planes, sufficient in some cases to give the rock a fissile character. The sands are, for the most part, very loosely cemented and friable. In some layers there is sufficient clay in the interstices to give an adhesive quality to the stone by which it can be easily handled, In places a strong cement of hydrous oxide of iron has consolidated the bed, giving the rock every shade of colour from a dark brownish-red to bright red or yellowish, which, in the finer sediments, becomes a freestone. About a mile above Loxton there has been an extensive infiltration of silica that has converted the grits into a very siliceous rock, slightly coloured by the presence of iron oxide. Although the stone is very hard it can be broken easily by the hammer, with a conchoidal fracture, and is quarried for use as a building stone. This silicification of the fluviatile sediments extends along the cliffs for about a third of a mile. It begins and ends rather abruptly, and has a thickness up to 20 feet. Transverse lines of erosion expose the rock in large masses (pl. vil., fig. 2), and shows that it extends back from the cliffs for, at least, several hundred yards. The cutting of a shelf in the face of the river cliff for the placing of the Loxton Pumping Works (pl. viii.) has made a clean exposure of the upper portion of the fresh-water beds. 4. FRESH-WATER LIMESTONE. The river cliffs, near Loxton, carry another feature of interest in the occur- rence of an argillaceous limestone containing fresh-water shells. The layer varies from two feet to three feet-in thickness, and is situated near the top of the cliff- face at a height of about 70 or 80 feet above the river level. It can be well seen in the cliff immediately behind the Waterworks Pumping Station (shown in the photograph, plate viii., as a white band), from which point it passes up the river for about half a mile; large blocks of the limestone that have broken away from the parent rock lie at the base of the cliff. Grains of fine sand are scattered through the limestone, and may be in sufficient numbers, in places, to give the features of an arenaceous limestone. On the application of HCl a brisk effervescence follows, leaving an insoluble residue of clay and fine sand. The shelly material has been removed by solution, leaving cavities between the internal casts and the external impressions. No remains of bivalves were seen in the bed, but from the casts of gasteropods Mr. B. C. Cotton, of the conchological department of the South Australian Museum, recognises the genera, Bulinus, Physa, and, possibly, Paludina. The limestone is underlain by coarse sands and grits, and is overlain by surface travertine and reddish soils and sands of varying thickness. 5. THE DESERTED RIVER COURSE. If Tate’s theory, that the Murray, in its later stages, cut a new channel for itself be correct, and there is good reason to think that it is, there must have been an older outlet to the sea which is now deserted. ‘This former channel is not hkely to have been on the western side of the river, as there is high land in that direction, so attention has been directed to the country lying to the eastward and southward of the present river for evidence, if any, of a former channel. The surface features of the Murray Plains are extremely monotonous and give little indication of what lies beneath the surface. Neither creek banks nor railway cuttings exist throughout the area from which information could be gathered. Ina few places Pre-Cambrian rocks come near the surface, as do also the marine Tertiary beds, but the surface is almost uninterruptedly covered with a mantle of terrestrial origin. The one redeeming feature, in a geological sense, is that the country is thickly studded with wells and bores, from which some know- ledge of the geological structure of the country can be obtained, 170 ‘Transverse sections, based chiefly on government surveys for railways, show that the Murray Plains have a gradual rise from the River Murray to a low central plateau that has an average height of about 300 feet above sea level. Thus a line of section (see fig. 2) taken from Chucka Bend, joining on to the Paringa railway line, attains its maximum height of 252 feet at Wanbi, and then falls away to 121 feet at Meribah, near the border of Victoria. Another line taken from Tatlem Bend to Pinnaroo (sec fig. 3), rises gradually over a distance of about 55 miles when it reaches, approximately, the 300-feet level at the Cotton Bore, and rises gradually to a maximum of 350 feet at Hundred of Bews, and 344 feet at Pin- naroo, on the Border. On a north and south line (see fig. 5), starting at Loxton, at a height of 126 feet, it reaches the 300-feet Icvel at the Anderson Bore, on the Peebinga railway line, about 50 miles to the southward of Loxton, passing through Cotton, at about the same elevation ; it then slopes rapidly to Tintinara, at 62 feet above sea level, and to the Alfred Flat Bore, which is only a few feet above the Coorong, In most cases throughout this area the fossiliferous Tertiary beds exist at depth. At a few places, as at the lower reaches of the Murray, at Swan Reach and Tailem Bend, the older [ (?) Pre-Cambrian] rocks are at, or near, the surface. At Moorlands, near Tailem Bend, within 100 feet of depth there are fossiliferous Tertiary beds, under which is a lignitic' fresh-water series, and this scries rests on the Pre-Cambrian bed rock. The Cooke’s Plains and Cotton bores bottomed on igneous rocks. 6. PARTICULARS OF BORES. Over 40 bores have been utilized for the present purpose (see fig. 1 in text). These have been selected following, as near as possible, the railway lines, four sets running, approximately, in an east and west direction, and one north and south. A few others have been included that are irregularly placed. As far as possible the heights of the bores above sea level have been given, based on the railway official figures, as well as the thickness of the respective geological systems that are represented, as far as could be recognised, in the logs officially published. Unless otherwise stated, the borings were carried out by the Engineer- in-Chief’s Department, the author being greatly indebted to the officers of this department for access to the official records and for copies of the published par- ticulars of the borings. In many instances a fairly detailed log had been kept of the beds passed through, but as these logs have been compiled hy workmen who had little specific knowledge of the scientific side of the question, the information is often imperfect and makes the scientific interpretation of the records somewhat difficult, For this reason the following attempts to define the respective geological horizons are open to revision. It may be stated that the following rules have been adopted in distinguishing the fluviatile portions of the borings from the Tertiary beds which commonly underlie them :— (a) Sand and superficial (travertine) limestone, variable up to 20 feet, are considered as Recent, terrestrial, and are so assigned in the bore sections. (b) The fluviatile beds are supposed to be represented by the following terms used in the logs, viz. “sand,” “coarse sand,” “grits,” “red sands,” “yellow sands,” “red-coloured clays,” “gravel,” “boulders,” “micaceous sands and sandstones.” The red-colouring matter is present mechani- cally caused by the contemporaneous infiltration of the hydrated oxide of iron, which is very characteristic of fresh-water deposits ; as is also the presence of flakes of mica, which can be carried long distances in river transportation, but, from their soft and fragile nature, are almost imme- diately ground down to invisibility on the sea shore, and are, therefore, a very definite test of river sediments. 171 North-West Bend Overland Corner Yaikerie Blanchetown Yinkanie Great Pyap Bend Agincourt Bore 8 3° Walsh pores WanbiBore Chucka Bend oSemmier Bore Weinert Bore og Gribble Bore Poyntz Bore urrays Bridge "s ° re Bore Tailem Bend Wellington Cooke's Plains Coomandosk Gosden Bore OLotnumpie Bore Kiki Well aroonda Bore QMcNamara Bore Dingo Bore Bob's Lockout Bore ° Geranium Bore Coonalpyn Tintinara Rly Bore Cobera Bore t ! ; I Paringa ' ! ’ Company Bore 1 oxton pole ° ' Angus Bore i Meribah Bore ! Loxton D Pata Bore ' Paruna Bore I Peebinga Anderson's Bore ° Cow Plains Bore Bews BoreClaypan Bore} ) Carter's Bore og FoR Pine Bore © Taemieats ore Quondong Bove Bunn Springs Bore o on™ Flat Bore pith OAlfred FlatOil Bore Fig, 1. (c) 172 Beds of Tertiary age may be represented in the bores in one or other of two forms: Either by an upper series, which is marine, and often fos- siliferous, or by an underlying series which is of fresh-water origin and generally carries some amount of lignite. The marine series is the more frequently present, as many of the bores did not penetrate so far as to reach the underlying fresh-water beds. The following terms were taken to include the marine series, wiz., all “limestones” below the surface travertine limestone, “‘calcareous sandstone,” “cliff rock,” “shell lime- stone,” “marine” beds, and “sandstones” that occur overlying “fossili- ferous” beds. In cases of doubt the associated beds have been taken into consideration. It is probable that a Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene) fos- siliferous series occurs on top of the Miocene, in some of the bores, but as this series was not distinguished in the workmen’s Jog from the older fossiliferous beds, they are included, if present, under the Miocene, as the more important of the two. For convenience, as well as for consecutive representation, the bores dealt with in the present paper have been divided into groups as follow :— [The division between the fresh-water and Tertiary beds is marked by a rule.| Group I. (Fig. 2.) The seven following records relate to a series of bores situated about 20 miles, or a little more, to the southward of Loxton, and extend, in an east and west direc- tion, from within 16 miles of the River Murray, at Chucka Bend, on the west, to the borders of Victoria, on the east :-— 1. WavsH Borg, situated a little to the eastward of the Karoonda-Waikerie railway, Hundred of Bandon. Height above sea level, approximately, 200 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand sa We Pe | Freestone .... bs . 19 Limestone aS we «oO Fossiliferous sandstone .... 3 Red sandstone _.... am, ES Fossiliferous limestone .... 99 Soft sandstone... we 52 Fossiliferous sandstone .... 20 Hard micaceous sandstone 45 ee Total .... 260 Terrestrial, 10 feet; Fresh-water, 109 feet; Marine Tertiary, 141 feet. 2. AGINCOURT Borg, situated 14 miles to the eastward of Walsh, Hundred of Chesson. Ieight above sea level, estimated, 240 feet. Thickness, | Thickness, in feet. in fcet. Limestone rubblé ‘ | Calcareous sandstone, cliff Red sandy clay... wen DO | rock Aap re a. =54 : we : Sandstone .... Art a. §8l Sandstone sled .. 56 Shell rock .... . ... 22 Total .... 223 Terrestrial, 5 feet; Fresh-water, (7) 61 feet; Marine Tertiary, (7) 157 feet. 3. Wanzt Bore, situated 12 miles to the south-eastward of Agincourt, on the Meribah-Renmark railway, Hundred of Mindarie. Height above sca level, 252 feet. Thickness, : Thickness, in fect. i in feet. Sand oat a vey ole : Hard calcareous sandstone 29 Hard limestone... a 8 ; Soft sandstone __.... an 38 Tough red clay .... a. 20 Marine clay and limestone 14 Red sandstone _.... vee White clay Li | we =—30 Yellow sandstone the ae Shell rock .... A we =66 Total .... 253 Terrestrial, 11 feet; Fresh-water, 65 feet; Marine Tertiary, 177 feet. 173 VSAST-VAS spuejoow a10g 2N0YOO] 5,q0g fest Pq 00E ‘0g ooreuulg ee sere alog smag ‘OOEVNNid GNV GN3@ WS1iVL NSSMLEE SayuOs-—E ‘DIZ Azeuay-a1g ZF (sniouayty1ss0,3) (aueyA) ayeranty (ua2ay) Le) SUSIOL YY aUsr0ISeE ; pelayseraay VAAST-VAS 2234 OOT aiog Yyequay slog eunieg a10g euOOMerY aiog e13qG09 a1og 1qUE YY Mee aiseaay, PIT OOF 7 ‘HVaEIMSaW ONV ONS3G VMONHS, NSAMLEa SAYOE—Z ‘ols Group V. (Fig. 3.) (Fig, 2.) Group I. 174 4. Copera Bort, situated six miles to the eastward of Wanbi, on the Meribah-Renmark railway, Hundred of Allen. Height above sea level, 252 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand he wie Fine micaceous sand ie eee Red sandstone - a 13 ——_ Coarse sand ms a §=54 Limestone .... beat on) “OE Shell rock .. rahe . 85 Total .... 218 Terrestrial, 3 feet; Fresh-water, 99 feet; Marine Tertiary, 116 feet. 5. ALAWoona Bork, situated six miles to the eastward of the Cobera Bore, at the junction of the railway for Loxton. Height above sea level, 231 feet. Thickness. Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand at hss | Cemented quartz gravel... 14 Sandy clay , res: H Calcareous sandstone, cliff Limestone rubble a «~«=8 rock the dees ee Red clay... ae cee TS : Marine clay r we Soft sandstonc _.... a 29 Fossiliferous sandstone ... 18 Hard red sandstone a 16 Marine clay with shells .... Tough yellow clay aig oh Sandstone .... a Tip ant Cemented quartz gravel... 4 Light blue clay... a = 18 — Shell rock .... nea a 4 Caleareous sandstone, cliff Sey rock . 20 ‘ Total .... 211 Terrestrial, 15 feet; ‘Beret water, 71 feet; Marine Tertiary, 125 feet, 6. ParuNna Bore, situated 13 miles eastward of Alawoona, on the railway. Height above sea level, 193 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand ans ae esa ee Hard sandstone .... . 8 Limestone .... ih Fale ee Marine eee and shells .... 107 Fine sand .... bi we 46 Shell rock . aw. 24 Coarse sand beh» 7% ——————. Total .... "259 Terrestrial, 4 feet; Fresh-water, 116 feet; Marine Tertiary, 159 feet. 7, MeriBAH Bork, situated on the railway to Renmark, at the angle near the Victorian border. Height above sea level, 121 feet. Thickness, : Thickness, in feet. in feet. Yellow sand a tag Ae Greyish sand Limestone .... ae 8 —_—— Yellow siliceous sand .... 27 Calcareous clay, ae 98 Brownish siliceous sand... 6 Shell bed st ti: Yellowish siliceous sand 7 Limestone .... dag a Ll Coarse sand and grits ... 5 Polyzoal limestone .. 60 Total .... 246 Terrestrial, 20 feet; fresh-water, 52 feet; Marine Tertiary, 174 feet. Group IT. This group includes four borings situated on the Karoonda to Peebinga rail- way, roughly parallel with the preceding :— 1. Karoonpa Bore, near the railway junction for Waikerie and Peebinga. Height above sea level, 223 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. * in feet. Limestone marl .... ei 3 Sandstone .... sen a Red sandstone... a 4B Clay are Micaceous quartz con- Calcareous sandstone _.... 27 glomerate aS .. 21 Shell rock . i. a 34 Sandstone .... A: — Sand and gravel . Price 2) Total .... 184 Terrestrial, 5 feet; Fresh-water, 89 feet; Marine Tertiary, 90 feet. 175 2. McNamara Bors, situated a few miles to the eastward of the preceding, near the railway. Height above sea level, approximately, 223 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Surface loam ty By pl Dark sand with mica Clay and Limestone we 4 ———. Sandy Clay wan a 39 Yellow sandstone with Coarse sand and gravel... 10 hard bands _.... Se 27 Quartz sand 0 wh 25 Clay with fossil shells .... 16 Yellow micaceous sand- Fossiliferous sandstone ...._ 10 stone... ae w Il Shell rock .... ar we. 35 Total .... 181 Terrestrial, 5 feet; Fresh-water, 88 feet; Marine Tertiary, 88 feet. 3. ANDERSON Bore, in Hundred of Bews, near Wirha, on the Peebinga rail- way, approximately 300 feet above sea level. Thickness, H Thickness, in feet. ; in feet. Sand as ~ ee Coarse quartz sand sone AZ Yellow sandstone a. 34 Fine micaceous sandstone 45 Sand ~S Biss we 15 —— Yellow sandstone a 38 Sandy clay and shells ... 17 Fossiliferous limestone .... 60 | Total .... 252 + Terrestrial, 1 foot; Fresh-water, 174 feet; Marine Tertiary, 77 feet, 4. Karte Bore, in Hundred of Kingsford, 13 miles to the eastward of the Anderson Bore. Height above sea level, 279 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Grey sand .... he a 60 Quartz gravel . ; Red sand_.... ee aw. 20 Fine grey sand _.... .. 20 Coarse sand ne wa 30 ———_~ Sandy clay 1s | . 20 Sandstone .... Bes an “15 Marine clay ae we 18 Coralline limestone we 47 Total ... 250 Fresh-water, 170 feet; Marine Tertiary, 80 feet. Group III, To the westward of Groups I. and II. are five other bores, situated nearer to the River Murray, and having a north and south direction. These are :— 1. SEMMLER Bore (within a few miles of Chucka Bend). Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand dee ae, ee 2: Clay i ee ne Marly clay ; a = 10 Hard micaceous sand- Red sand .... — a §648 stone... he, 5 Hard red sandstone ay » 2: Yellow sand dos a «8 Yellow sand hee Lenge 3, Hard wmicaceous sand- Sand and boulders .. 138 stone oe ous, Brown sand _ vig Ot. Coarse water-worn sand Sand and limestone a 18 and pebbles 4 Micaceous sand 3 Sandy clay.... ay a 8 Soft sandstone _.... a 79 Total .... 374 Terrestrial, 12 feet; Fresh-water, 221 feet (or more); Tertiary, (?). [See forward, p. 187.] 176 2. WEINERT Bore. distant from the river. A little to the westward of the Semimler Bore, but more Thickness, | Thickness, in feet. | in feet. Loam and limestonerubble 4 Sandstone .... 150 Sandy clay _ wie Ld Shell rock . a §=36 Red sandstone ... 80 Clay with fossil shells ... 74 Sandstone and boulders... 27 Grey sandy clay .... 10 Sand A 18 Fine sand .... = cow Boulders 10 oe - Total ... 421 Terrestrial, 4 feet; Fresh-water, 146 feet; Marine Tertiary, 271 feet. 3, GrrpsLe Borg, situated a little to the southward of the Semmler Bore. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Limestone 9 Sand and limestone 33 Red clay 7 Yellow sandstone 128 Red sandstone 27 Freestone a 50 Yellow sandstone 26 Fossiliferous sandstone .... 40 Total .... 320 Terrestrial, 9 feet; Fresh-water, 60 fect; Marine Tertiaries, 251 feet. 4. Poyntz Bore, situated about six miles south-westward of the preceding. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand and limestone 18 Sandy clay with shells .... 48 Sand and quartz .... 18 Sand, shells, and ironstone 5 Freestone .... me a 10 Dark sand .... S44, $.. Sand and lime __.... 8 Sai dstone .... 16 Soft sandstone with fossil Clay and lignite $2 shells... he . 105 Micaccous sandstone 23 Limestone .... fee AB Clay with pyrites ots meee) Yellow sandy clay rag — Total .... 338 Marine Tertiary, (?) 258 feet; Fresh-water Lignitic Series, (?) 80 feet. 5. CHAPMAN Bork, situated about nine miles southward of the preceding, and 15 miles due east of Murray Bridge. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. : in feet. Sand _ dee oe A Sandy clay Limestone .... sed dee Dark clay .... 23 Freestone 44 Soft sandstone aw 2l Calcareous sandstone 14 Hard sandstone .... we Ak Sandy clay 43 Clay and ironstone a. 8D Freestone 67 Light decomposed slate... 74 Total .... 346 Marine Tertiary, 272 feet; Pre-Tertiary, 74 feet. Grour IV. This group includes four bores situated about midway between the Peebinga and Pinnaroo railway lines, towards the eastern side of the map :— 1. Cow Prains Bore, situated on the boundary of the State, about seven miles to the northward of Pinnaroo. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Loam and marly clay 10 White sand Clay ents at 4 Red sand 10 Sandstone .... on a. 19 Yellow sand 8 Sandy clay is nt, A Coarse red sand 15 Dark coarse sand Fine white sand .... Fine yellow sand . Sand & ironstone boulders 5 177 Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. 20 Limestone .... ae 30 Sand, clay and shells a. 40 20 Sandstone and shells... 11 Fossiliferous limestone .... 6 Total . 217 Terrestrial, 10 feet; Fresh-water, 145 feet; Marine Tertiary, 62 feet, 2, CLay Pan Bore, Hundred of Parilla. Clay rs Sandstone ..., Sand Micaceous sand About 340 feet above sea level. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. 10 Sand 24 36 Sandy clay 16 108 _ 6 Limestone and shells ... 10 Total . 234 Apparently in Fresh-water Series, except the final 10 feet, 3. Hunprep or Bews Bore (about 350 feet above sea level; Bews railway station is 290 feet), Sand Sandy limestone | Sandstone .... Sand Clayey sandstone Terrestrial, 7 feet; Fresh-water, 211 feet; Marine Tertiary, Thickness, Thickness, in feet, | in feet. 6 | Sand we _ wee ol 1 Micaceous sandstone ... 9- 95 Micaceous clay and sand 8 60 | ——_— 8 Sandstone .... es | Fossiliferous limestone __ 123 Total .... 350 132 feet, 4. Dinco Bore (about 300 fect above sea level), situated nine miles to the westward of Bews Bore. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Light and red clay 3 Fine sand and ironstone Ironstone conglomerate... 7 conglomerate .... 16 Soft sandstone 43 Tronstone conglomerate Hard sandstone 32 and sandy clay .. 4 . Sand Me 26 Red sandy clay 9 Sandstone .... 22 — Black sand with shells ... 25 Limestone with shells .... 37 Total .... 224 I'resh-water, 162 feet; Marine Tertiary, 62 feet, Group V. (Fig. 3.) This group includes five bores, following the railway between Tailem Bend and Pinnaroo :— 1. Bos’s Loox-our Borer 20 miles to the eastward of Tailem Bend. (about 50 feet above sea level), situated about! Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Marl - Pe a Hard grey rock . Limestone .... nd wn 43 Sand and layer of hard Clay Rak -. tae al rock Bae we 23 Sand Phe Light grey clay be wu 36 Sandy clay and shells | 12 Clay and lignite .... we 93 Fine sand . wy, 3D) Hard grey rock ..., | Soft limestone _... we 32 Sand and shells .... aa 112 Total .... 283 In Marine Tertiary throughout. 178 2. Gerantum Bore, 43 miles eastward of Tailem Bend. Height above sea level, 238 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sandy clay Aas wet Hard limestone and sandy Sandy clay, sand, and clay 14 soft sandstone 33 Soft limestone and shells 22 Micaceous sand .... 7 | Hard limestone 5 Micaceous sand and fine Soft Hmestone 27 quartz gravel . wee AB Soft fossiliferous limestone 7 Micaceous sand 3 | Soft limestone and shells 3 Sand and limestone 20 Total ... 171 Fresh-water, 73 feet; Marine Tertiary, 98 feet. 3. Hunprep or Cotton Bore (about 300 feet above sca level), eight miles westward of Lameroo. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. White sand 1 Sand, clay, and pyrites .... 83 Brown clayey sand 1 Sand oe 40 Limestone rubble 1 Dark clay .... aa! (64 Ironstone 5 Grey sand and pytites ww 16 Soft sandstone a. 30 Dark clay .... vin 10 Hard, coarse sandstone .... 112 Sand and fossils .... 14 Clay with ironstone Shelly sandstone .... 8 nodules 40 Black clay and fossils 13 Sandstone and clay 9 Limestone .... 62 Black shale 60 Limestone with shells 108 Black sand 6 Calcareous sandstone 118 Brown sand 14 Hard, grey limestone 20 Gravel and lignite 6 Dark clay and limestone... 10 Micaceous sand mere 07 Sandy limestone .... 14 Rotten micaceous schist 7 Calcareous sandstone with Granitic sand 13 fossils ef, spe) LS) Granite 13 Total .... 865 Terrestrial, 8 feet; Fresh-water, 182 feet; Tertiary, 642 feet; Pre-Cambrian, 33 feet. 4. Carter’s Bore, near Parilla (340 feet above sea level). Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Marly clay .... 16 Fine white sand .... 10 Hard sandstone 36 —_— Yellow sand 78 Yellow sandstone 59 Red sand 40 Dark blue clay . dil Fossiliferous limestone .... 10 Total .... 260 Terrestrial, 16 feet; Fresh-water, 164 feet; Marine Tertiary, 80 feet. 5. Prnnaroo Bore, No. 2 (344 feet above sea level). ‘Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sandy loam . 2 Dark ditto, with mica 55 Travertine limestone 6 —_—_—— Coloured clay 42 Tertiary fossiliferous lime- Yellowish, argillaceous sand 10 stone - 5 Reddish argillaceous sand 18 | Grey soft limestone 205 Fine white quartz sand... 3 H White chalky limestone .... 60 Yellow argillaceous sand 21 Polyzoal limestone 40 Reddish argillaceous sand 10 Grey porous limestone .... 30 Coarse quartz sand 13 White polyzoal limestone 30 Fine to coarse quartz sand 20 Chalky limestone at 600 ft. 5 Medium quartz sand %) 225 pun Argillaceous sand with Total .... 605 mica 5 Terrestrial, 8 feet: Fresh-water. 222 feet; Marine Tertiaries, 375 feet. 179 Grour VI. Includes four bores situated between the Pinnaroo and Serviceton railway lines, towards the eastern side. 1, McMaunon Borg, situated on Section 10, Hundred of Pinnaroo, eight miles from the Victorian border. Thickness, Thickness, P in feet. in feet. Limestone rubble Asia Ferruginous sandstone .... 40 Clay Le 20 ——___ Fine sandstone 7 Dark blue clay a 28 Coarse sandstone 150 Fossiliferous limestone .... 56 | Total .... 304 Terrestrial, 23 feet; Fresh-water, 197 fect; Marine Tertiary, 84 feet. 2. Rosy Pine Borg, situated to the south-eastward of the preceding, about three miles from the border. Thickness, 1 Thickness, in feet. in feet. Marly limestone .... 3 | Sand and ironstone Sandy limestone .... Paes VA Sand fe 18 Red and yellow limestone 58 ———. White sand _ 12 Clay and shells . 1S Fine and coarse sand 100 | Fossiliferous limestone ... 35 i Total .... 265 Terrestrial, 20 feet; Fresh-water, 195 feet; Marine Tertiary, 50 feet. 3. QuonponG Bork, situated between Bordertown and Pinnaroo. Thickness, in feet. Sand f:, sae ne Clay Pare eels we «8 White sandstone .... wa «8 Yellow sandstone 19 Thickness, in feet. Fine sand .... mtn a 26 Coarse sand 95 Freestone 70 Limestone .... 72 Total .... 302 Terrestrial, 12 feet; Fresh-water, 148 feet; Marine Tertiary, 142 feet. 4. Bunn Sprincs Bore, situated on the Bordertown to Pinnaroo route, about 10 miles from the Victorian border. Thickness, in feet. | Sand ee oe Oen 82 Sandy clay 5 adie CEL, | Sand and gravel .... it. CO Red sandstone a Ferruginous sandstone .... 7 Thickness, in feet. Red sand _.... hw ee IS Yellow sandstone . 140 Fine yellow sandstone 52 Calcareous sandstone 20 Total .... 330 Fresh-water, 118 feet; Marine Tertiary, (?) 212 feet. Group VII. (Fig. 4.) The bores in this group follow the Tailem Bend to Bordertown railway line and district, in a south-easterly direction, parallel with the Coorong. 1. Cooxr’s PLains Borg, situated about 11 miles south-eastward of Tailem Bend. Height above sea level, 19 feet. 180 Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand Ht wt A Clay and gypsum tty 32: Soft limestone andgypsum 9 Fossiliferous limestone .... 10 Sandy limestone .... a 39 Black clay .... Oi: . 46 Gypsum... sid a OF Sand & limestone boulders = 3 Gypsum and sandy lime- Hard clay .... Sens tay oh stone... an a 16 Igneous rock aoa amy cb Gypseous rock _.... toe IEE o. = Sandstone .... mn a =3l Total .... 224 In the above bore three distinct formations are represented :—(a} An upper lacustrine, gypseous series of Recent age, having a thickness of 158 feet, under- lying which are (b) Miocene marine beds, which are here reduced to a thickness of 60 fect; and these rest on (c) bed-rock, probably of Pre-Cambrian age. As bearing on the origin of the upper, lacustrine beds, Tate describes [Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. iv., 1882, p. 144] two sections seen on the shores of Lake Alexandrina, near Wellington, in which gypseous deposits are especially prominent. It is, therefore, probable that the upper portion of the Cooke’s Plains sediments represents a former extension of Lake Alexandrina in that direction. 2. Coomanvoox Bore, situated on the line, 21 miles from Tailem Bend. Height above sea level, 40 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sand and clay __.... a. 29 Coralline limestone i Limestone and shells ... 32 Sandy clay nn ax Sandstone .... that wa 45 Ligneous clay... uae FD Marine clay nes nat, ke Sand tbh ie we Clay and sand... . 10 Dark clay .... sii in, 4 Hard blue limestone .. 60 Sand and quartz .... cyte 8 Clay and gypsum a. 10 Clay, sand and pebbles ... 48 Sandy clay ean an 23 Sandy clay 8 wa ~<17 Ligneous clay fat .. 20 panes Total .... 412 Marine Tertiary resting on Lignitic (Fresh-water) Series. 3. Kr Ki Bors, situated between Cooke’s Plains and Coonalpyn, 30 miles from Tailem Bend. Height above sea level, 92 feet. Thickness, 1 Thickness, in feet. f in feet. Limestone .... ‘.. ains | Quartzose sand... a. 30 White limestone .... woe OLS Black clay .... we Pees Hard flinty limestone ... 10 Black clay and sand a 14 Red quartzose limestone 10 Black clay .... : Sie Soft whitish-yellow lime- Dark grey clay ree: stone... hcg 108 White pine clay .... um ood Soft limestone with ma- Dark clay and sand wos, rine fossils... .. 79 White pipe clay .... a 48 Hard sandstonc .... an 2 Yellow pipe clay 31 Soft limestone with ma- Pink pipe clay . hh rine fossils... we 63 Yellow and pink pipe Caleareous rock with ma- i clay fey ne vee 43 rine fossils... ae AS Rotten reddish-brown clay Dark grey rock with ma- rock bal f.* eee rine fossils uy eel. Rotten yellowish - green Black clay .... wal .. 20 clay rock bes mae Sand sts a wool Very soft dark-green clay Black clay .... vat w. 19 rock sie le we 683 Quartzose sand with fossils 4 Hard slaty rock with Biack clay .... oe ite el quartz a a. 14 Total .... 666 Marine Tertiary resting on decomposed slate rocks, passing down to unaltered slate. 4, Lornumpig Bors, situated about four miles due north of Ki Ki. above sea level, 98 feet. Thickness, in feet. Travertine limestone 8 Yellowish sand a. 20 Argillaceous limestone ... 9 White calcareous sand- stone he a wee 45 Calcareous sand. .... we =18 Sand with shell fragments 5 Shell limestone ..., wed 2 Sand with shell fragments 21 Shell limestone _.... a. 27 Fine sand with shell frag- ments... aa we 2 181 Height Thickness, in feet. Shell limestone... we 82 Sandy clay with shells ... 44 Hard fossiliferous lime- stone... he: aie ol! Limestone with echino- derms ... Ras ol Polyzoal and echinoderm limestone f we 13 Total .... 302 Marine Tertiary, capped by Travertine. 5. GOSDEN Borg, situated about 9 miles to the north-eastward of the preceding, Thickness, in feet, Limestone .... _ aw 39 Fossiliferous limestone .... 51 Sand and pebble .... 35 Sand and shells 25 Grey sand .... si 15 Sand with rock layer 17 Grey sand .... sind 8 Thickness, in feet. Sandy clay od a. ©6380 Black clay .... 28% we 83 Coralline limestone aw 18 Clay with shells and pebbles .... - we =18 Blue clay .... =. an 2 Lignite a a we 19 Total .... 360 Marine Tertiary, resting on Lignitic (Fresh-water) Series. 6. Coonatpyn (Corp anp Wer) Borg, situated nine miles south-eastward of Ki Ki. Height above sea level, 72 feet, Thickness, in feet. Brown clay with lime- stone crust ..... 15 White limestone .... 3 Yellow sandstone 67 Sandstone with shells 20 Red clay a 80 Black clay .... a4 5 Marine shell bed .... 34 Limestone with shells 11 Light grey clay 86 Chocolate clay 13 Sand ‘ 51 Quartz gravel and. pyrites Thickness. in feet. Grey clay with lignite ... 4 Grey clay with gravel .... 11 Grey clay .... ao . 26 Chocolate clay with gravel... Ae we «6 Grey clay . Chocolate clay with gravel 40 Grey clay and slate, alter- nately .... id bia Hard blue slate... fee, OL Do., with quartz veins ... 88 Hard blue slate... Mg, 26: Do. .... pee 150 Total .... 840 The above section suggests 18 fect of Recent terrestrial deposits, 217 feet of fossiliferous Tertiary, 245 feet of fresh-water lignitic series ; and these resting on slate rock that was penetrated to 360 feet, making a total depth of 840 feet. [The Tintinara Bore, which occurs between the Coonalpyn and Emu Flat bores, will be considered with those taken in a north and south direction. ] 182 7. Emu Fiat Bors, situated about five miles to the northward of Keith rail- way station. Height above sea Icvel, 101 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Light yellow sand nt, Soft greenish limestone Light grey limestone... 12 with fossils —.... a =a Soft yellow limestone ... 26 Calcareous sand with ma- Light yellow limestone ... 12 rine fossils nes a 36 Hard limestone .... che ee? Black clay, carbonaceous 21 Light yellow calcareous Calcareous sand, marine sandstone pul we 4D fossils... a, free Be Soft grey limestone with Black clay, carbonaceous 12 marine fossils .... wt: 22 Calcareous sand, marine fossils... +9 ae «OS Total .... 269 In Marine Tertiary throughout. 8. BorDERTOWN AND NEIGHBOURHOOD. From the small number of bores sunk in the south-eastern part of South Australia, information concerning the rocks below the surface in that district is somewhat limited. Rev. Tenison Woods has published some observations on this subject which are of interest. He states: “Underneath the calcareous sandstone [indurated dune rock] we have in this district beds of coarse white, yellow, and red ferruginous sands, sometimes with layers of ironstone, and full of concretions of hydrated oxide and carbonate of iron. ‘Lhe thickness of the deposit varies in different places. At Bangham Pastoral Station, Tatiara [about 20 miles to the southward of Bordertown], 1 had an opportunity of descending a shaft sunk for water to a depth of 75 feet. The whole depth was occupied by beds of variegated sands of various thickness, the seams being somewhat lentil-shaped, as follow :— Thickness, Thickness. . in feet. | ‘ in feet. White sand a am ad Brownish red sand Ochreous red sand w 10 | Yellow sand Ave .. 10 Yellow sand ae wij “GE i White sand net ee White sand oi ab ok Yellow sand 2, 44 8 Red sand with ironstone Coarse sand and clay ... 10 concretions... ot 1 Water in clay... eee Yellow sand nie an — Total ... 75 “From a well sunk within a few miles of the above, I was able to see the junction between the coralline crags [Miocene] and the sands. The material composing the beds is a somewhat coarse siliceous sand, with much iron and some- times rounded grains of pink felspar and mica.” [Report on Geol. and Min. of the South-Eastern district of S. Austr., Govt. Printer, Ad., 1866, p. 13.] As bearing on the same subject, Tate says: “The geological structure of the country which intervenes between the river at the [State] boundary and the Tatiara is, so far as I know, quite blank; but it 1s not unreasonable to suppose that the Newer Tertiary (fresh-water series) at these places is coterminous. The Tatiara is an oasis on the edge of the mallee scrubs, in the one direction, and of the heath-lands of the South-East in the other; it owes its reputation to deep, loamy soils, the upper members of an-extensive lacustrine deposit, as is partly revealed by a well-sinking at Bordertown, of which the following is a summary of the facts:—Pipe clay, 30 feet; diatomaceous earth, 21 feet; bituminous shale and clay, 40 feet. Total, 91 feet.” [Loc. cit., p. 43.] 1Tate’s forecast, in this respect, has been amply confirmed by subsequent borings throughout this region. 183 Es p A (snorayiye804) @upey) => = 4g [FE =) auanay) ‘ aqnevanty Goes a Sy, tine sce =): weg =) penne aN3937 asog eIBUNULy 3933 0O0T a10g 03x07] alog Beg 333 007 alog woxos “LSVOD HLNOS AHL ONV aig saag *NOLXO1 NSSML3AE NOILOSYIG HLNOS GNV HLYON V_ NI SAYOa—S “Sia uosiapuy ZA Y per] OPUBULOO, D: slog uddjeuoog Sa aa aad D pusg weer, arog TH DI qSAa7-Vas aiog weunuly 9397 O01 oo teas oo mog sduudg uung ed OOT Tapy ureysueg Seed see IPA UAOL s12ps0g “LOILSIQ NMOL ¥aqdxu0E ONY GN3G WS1VL NSSMLAG SSAYOd—-F Dis (Fig. 5.) Group VIII. (Fig. 4.) Group VII. 184 Group VIII. (Fig. 5.) The following records of bores supply information of the beds penetrated in a north and south direction, from the Great Pyap Bend in the north to near the Coorong in the south, The first three bores are situated in the Hundred of Gordon :— 1. Loxton Bore (126 feet above sea level). Situated in Section 17, Hundred of Gordon. Particulars kindly supplied by Messrs. Clutterbuck Bros., who carried out the work in 1910. » Thickness, Thickness, in fect. in feet. Sand and lime rubble 1... 5 White sandy clay with Red clay 00: bene 8 boulders me a OL Sand and red ¢lay i. 10! Coral limestone with Sand—dry .... wee tae 4B boulders _ .. 166 Coarse gravel a ees A Hard blue boulders ie 1S —_—— Layers of hard rock tsi DIL Black sand iat we 68 Blue sandy clay .... we 43 Biue clay .... Fess a. 70 Blue sticky clay .... ae 67 Coral with streaks of blue Brown sticky clay at, LS clay ae A we «6 Grey sand .... ac aie 19) White clay he wa 24 Brown clay i wis pt Blue clay with hard Blue clay... bes a 16 boulders ‘4 a 66 —. Total .... 801 No fossil shells are mentioned in this log, and the presence of boulders from 248 feet to 584 féet, associated with “coral limestone,” seems inconsistent with a fossiliferous marine bed, but the first 80 feet, ending in a bed of “coarse gravel,” may be considered to be of terrestrial and fluviatile origin. 2. Ancus Bore [(?) 85 feet above sea level] Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Sandy loam and limestone 5 Argillaceous coralline lime- Red clay 8 stone... cA we 24 Sand 8 J iat . 67 Clay with layers of hard Fine micaceous sand... 120 rock sees ell a 66 —_——_ Fine calcareous clay .... 109 Sand and fossil shells 24 ae Total .... 423 Terrestrial, 13 feet; Fresh-water, 187 feet: Marine Tertiary, 223 feet. 3. CoMPANY’s Bore [(?) 79 feet above sea level]. Thickness, in feet. Sand and gravel .... 7 Red sandy clay 9 Clay, various colours 35 Indurated sand 14 Grey sand .... 9 Dark sand with boulders 23 Thickness, in feet. Coarse sand and clay ... 31 Marine Tertiary .... w 612 Lignitic Series... 958 Blue shale (?) Pre-Ter- tary... a8 86 Total .... 1,784 Fresh-water, 128 feet (may include 28 feet more); Marine Tertiary, 612 feet; Lignitic (Fresh-water) Series, 958 feet; (?) Pre-Tertiary, 86 fcet. 185, 4, Pata Bore, situated about 10 miles due south of Loxton, Height above sea level, 147 feet. Thickness, Thickness, in feet. in feet. Surface soil — ss BE Quartz es loved nad Sandy loam =o; oe? Sand Tf w 40 Red clay _.... ans iin EA Light blue clay sal we 22 Sandy clay aah wv 105 Sandy clay 2 wa. 22 Red and yellow clay ... 37 | Quartz a, ss viln wal a Light clay .... Te we 20 Calcareous clay... w. =29 Quartz a 54h we «OA Pipe clay... Nice UD Sand he sot | Sand, clay, and lignite a 49 a Sand, quartz, and pyrites 8 Total .... 374 Terrestrial, 9 feet; Fresh-water, 156 feet; Tertiary, (?) 209 feet. It is difficult to understand how layers of quartz, several feet in thickness, could be interbedded with sands and clays. What is intended by “quartz” in the log is, probably, quartz gravel. 5. ALAWOONA Bore (see p. 174). ANDERSON Bore (see p. 175). Hunoprep or Bews Bore (see p. 177). OND . Cotton Bore (see p. 178). 9, Trntrnara Bore (62 feet above sea level), situated about midway between Tailem Bend and Wolseley. Tate had an opportunity of examining the samples from this bore, and has summarised (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxii., 1898, p. 67) their respective geological horizons as follows :— Recent (Terrestrial). Thickness, in feet. Travertine, compact and rubbly .... ath sre Se, a 24 NEWER PLEISTOCENE (Marine). Sand (a few marine shells) Se tind aed: BE 7E Yellow and grey sands (shells very sbundaat)’ bated .. 128 White, friable calcareous silt (apparently comminuted poly: ‘zoal debris, shells rare) d me x: es Black clay (with scattered shells) ite wie a a 684 Eocene [Mrocene] (Marine). Blackish-brown sand (with numerous fossils) .... his a) Total depth .... .. 253 Tate adds: ‘Total thickness of the Newer Pleistocene beds is 220 feet, extending in depth from 38 feet above sea level to 182 feet below it. . . . All the determined species, as a result of comparison with authenticated specimens, are, with three exceptions, living in our seas.” Mr. E. T. Clark has published a geological section of these beds [“Notes on the Geology of the Ninety-mile Desert.” Trans. Roy. 5. Austr., vol. xx., 1896, p. 110, pl.i.]. Mr. Chapman says: “From the great thickness of the Werrikooian shown in this bore the locality seems to be situated in an arca which was sinking from at least Kalimnan times, forming a wide trough into which marine and estuarine shells were drifted.” [Loc. cit., p. 400.] 186 10. AtFreD Fiat, SALT Creek, Perroteum Company’s Bore. Situated about (?) six miles from the Coorong, near its southern end, and not much above sea level, Thickness, Thickness, in feet. | in feet. Sand and quicksand ae 39 i Grey sandy clay .... we 40 Quicksand with small : Brown shale with sand- shells... as: ee: : stone pebbles .... am ©, Gravel with green sandy : Do., with thin layers of clay tte i | quartz... 3.4 .. 33 Quicksand ede a 8 : Green sandy clay—layers Quicksand with sea shells 2 : of black shale we 43 Broken sandstone — im- j Black quicksand, oyster press of shells $23 shells _... "F we IS Tronstone pebbles and sea Light grey quicksand 5 shells... _ win 4 ———— Quicksand with flakes of | Blue shale ..., set ee OB mica... ave tee ' Light grey quicksand ... 10 Limestone with imprint of | Light blue soapy slate .... 137 shells... Re we («6 Dark blue shale .... a ~OF Grey sandy clay .... 2. 5 ; Light blue soapy slate ... 12 Sandstone pebbles with ! Grey sandy clay .... wae, Ge sea shells ae ate 3B ; Soft sandstone... tee Quicksand, mica, broken Dark blue shale, flint, etc., sea shells a, ww. 22 i pebbles £:.: a 10 Quicksand .... sed a 64 : Sandy clay with blue and Bed of variegated shells... 40 i black shale a. 24 Sea shells, darker coloured | Very fine black slate ... 5 and broken _.... ae 2 Grey sandy clay .... Je Very coarse dark quick- Pipe clay—hard and com- sand ote eat ute i pact om mr a. 20 Large sandstone and iron- i Black quicksand .... we AS stone pebbles .... wan AS Brown shale with quartz Dark sandy clay, full of ; pebbles Rs 65 flints, etc. ae a. 19 | Light grey pipe clay .... 130 Rotten sandstone with i Brown slate chee 37 flints and shells a. 30 i Red crystalline limestone 4 Total .... 922 i [See forward, p. 189.] 7. REMARKS ON THE BORES. Group I. This group of seven bores includes a series that follows in an east and west direction, about 20 miles to the southward of Loxton, situated on the northern slope of the plateau. The ground slopes to the westward and eastward as well as to the northward, the maximum heights being at Wanbi and Cobera, near the centre, reaching 252 feet above sea level. here is a general correspon- dence in the upper limits of the Marine Tertiary and the surface contours, the former rising and falling with the height of the ground above sea level. Fluviatile beds overlie the Tertiary in all the bores. Operations were discontinued, in each case, before the latter was proved to its complete depth, Grour li, The Karoonda-Peebinga railway supplies a series of bores lying between the Meribah line on the north and the Pinnaroo line on the south. Karoonda, an important junction on the line, is 223 feet above sea level, situated on the western slope of the plateau, with 89 feet of fluviatile deposits. McNamara Bore lies a few miles to the castward of the former and is of about the same elevation with 88 feet of the fresh-water beds. Anderson Bore, about 30 miles further to the castward, reaches the 300 feet level with 174 feet of the fluviatile series ; and the Kurte Bore, 13 miles to the eastward of Anderson and within about 14 miles of the Border, has a height of 279 feet and 170 feet of the fresh-water series. All the bores in this chain proved the existence of the Marine Tertiary, as underlying the fresh-water beds, but did not reach the base of the former, 187 Group III. This group of five bores differs from the rest in being parallel with the River Murray, situated lineally, to the southward of Chucka Bend. The Semmler Bore, the most northerly of the group, is remarkable in that its entire depth, of 374 feet, appears to consist of fresh-water deposits. The only doubtful horizon occurs at a depth of 238 feet, where a bed of sand and limestone, 18 feet in thickness, occurs; but below this horizon, as well as above it, micaceous sands and micaceous sandstones are recorded, which are typically fresh-water in their origin. he height of the bore in relation to the river and sea is not known. Its proximity to the river bed may have some significance. Although no lignite is mentioned as occurring, it is possible that the Pleistocene fresh-water series may rest directly on the sub-Miocene fresh-water series without reaching bedrock. The Weiner Bore, although situated to the westward of the preceding, is more distant from the river. It has an estimated thickness of 146 feet of Pleistocene alluvial, with 10 feet of boulders at the base. The Marine Tertiary, which may be absent from the Semmler Bore, is present in this bore. The Gribble Bore is a little more distant from the river than the two preceding bores, with the fluviatile portion reduced to 60 feet, resting on the Marine Tertiary. Poyntz Bore, situated about the centre of the area embraced in the Mannum curve; this, and Chapman Bore, to the eastward of Murray Bridge, have no Pleistocene deposits, the Marine Ter- tiary being at, or near, the surface. Group IV. The four bores included in this group, like those in the Peebinga chain, to the northward, and the Bordertown chain, to the southward, are situated on the higher portions of the plateau. The Cow Plains Bore, close to the Border, is supposed to show 145 feet of river deposits resting on the fossiliferous Tertiary. Inthe Clay Pan Bore, 15 miles to the westward of the last-named, the fluviatile sediments may amount to anything between 160 feet and 224 feet, rest- ing on fossiliferous limestone. The Bews Bore, 12 miles further to the west- ward, has 211 feet of the fresh-water beds, also resting on the Tertiary fossili- ferous rocks; as does the Dingo Bore, 9 miles still further to the westward, with 162 feet of fluviatile beds. Group V. Tailem Bend to Pinnaroo. This line of bores rises in the first 50 miles to the highest levels of the country, in the form of a flat ridge running east and west, rising to the 300-feet level at the Cotton Bore, and reaching a maximum height of 344 feet at Pinnaroo on the borders of Victoria. Going eastward from Tailem Bend, either Pre-Cambrian (Tailem Bend) or Marine Ter- tiary beds form the surface features. No Pleistocene fresh-water beds are met with till the Geranium Bore is reached, at a distance of 44 miles, in which they have a thickness of 73 feet. With the increasing height of the ground, going eastward, these beds thicken, till, at Pinnaroo, they are estimated to have a thick- ness of 222 feet. The deepest bore in this group is at Cotton, where terrestrial and fresh-water deposits were penetrated for the first 190 fect, Marine Tertiary showed a thickness of 642 feet, and Pre-Cambrian 33 feet. Group VI. The four bores next following are situated within a few miles of the Border, having a north and south direction between the Pinnaroo and Serviceton railway lines. Their respective heights above sea level are not known, but they are probably near the 300-feet level. The McMahon Bore is supposed to show 197 feet of fresh-water deposits, and the Rosy Pine Bore, distant about three miles from the preceding, 195 feet, but the latter is somewhat indefinite from there being 78 fect of marly, sandy, and variously-coloured limestones in the upper part of the bore. ‘This is rather thick for a surface travertine and it has been tentatively divided, the first 20 feet of marly and sandy limestone having been assigned to ihe travertine section, and the 58 feet of red and yellow limestone placed with the fluviatile beds that follow, making the estimated thickness of the 188 latter 195 feet. The fossiliferous beds follow at a depth of 215 feet. In the Ouondong Bore no fossils are reported, but the bore finished in a limestone 72 feet in thickness, which probably represents the Marine Tertiary. The thick- ness of the fresh-water beds will be either 148 feet, or 218 feet, dependent on whether the freestone on the top of the limestone be placed with the fresh-water series or the Tertiary. The Bunn Springs Bore is about 30 miles to the north- ward of Bordertown, No surface travertine is recorded. The fresh-water beds consist of the usual variegated sands and sandstones with a bed of gravel, in a thickness of 118 feet, but if the yellow sandstone, that occurs above the calcareous sandstone (classed as Tertiary), should be placed with the former it would give them a greater thickness. Group VII. Tailem Bend to Bordertown. This string of bores follow a south-easterly direction, following, in the main, the Serviceton railway line, and are situated on the southern slope of the country, towards the sea. They are all outside the range of the Pleistocene fresh-water beds. With the exception of Tailem Bend, where the Pre-Cambrian rocks reach the surface, and the Tintmara and Alfred Flat bores, which were sunk in Pleistocene sea deposits (see forward, p. 189), the rest of the bores, including the Gosden Bore (in a north-easterly direction), have the Marine Tertiary at the surface. The Bordertown and Bangham Station sections (see p. 182) are of interest as being situated nearest to the raised Pleistocene sea bed of the South-East. Group VIII. This serics of bores has been selected as following a meridional direction, from the Great Pyap Bend, on the Murray,,in the north, to the Coorong, in the south. This arrangement, by intersecting the east and west ridge, shows the tectonic uplift which it is believed diverted the River Murray from its original course. ‘Che first three bores in this group (Loxton, Angus, and Company's) are closely associated on the eastern side of the Great Pyap Bend, their height above sea level being estimated from their proximity to railway stations. They all show considerable thicknesses of the fluviatile series in their upper portions. The Company's Bore, which is supposed to carry 128 feet of the Pleistocene fresh-water series, is remarkable for the presence of no less than 1,570 feet of Tertiary beds, 612 feet of Marine Tertiary, and 958 feet of the sub- Miocene fresh-water series, which is the thickest development of these beds known in South Australia. It has already been stated that the river deposits which form the cliff at Loxton were traced, by means of a washout, for several hundred yards mland from the river. These can be linked on to the Pata Bore, near the railway station of that name, nine miles south from Loxton, The 158 feet that underlie the surface soil may, possibly, be referred to the Pleistocene fluviatile, and the remainder of the bore to the lower fresh-water lignitic series. The Pata railway station is 147 feet above sea level, or 21 feet higher than the Loxton railway station. Alawoona, on the Meribah line, has an elevation of 231 feet, with a doubtful thickness of fresh-water beds that may be either 71 feet or 131 feet. The Anderson Bore, on the Peebinga line, reaches the 300 feet altitude with a fresh-water series of 174 feet. The Hundred of Bews Bore, at a height of 350 feet, tops the ridge with 211 feet of fresh-water beds. The Hundred of Cotton, on the Pinnaroo line, falls back to 300 feet, with 182 feet of fresh-water deposits. The Tintinara Bore is of special interest as supplying a section of marine beds of Pleistocene age. It is situated 30 miles inland from the present coast, while the nearest bores are, Coonalpyn, 16 miles to the north-west, and Emu Flat (Keith), 22 miles to the south-east, in both of which the older Tertiary marine beds are at the surface. 189 Chapman suggests the possibility of a rift valley, or an earth fold, by which the sea was admitted inland. The Alfred Flat Bore, put down many years ago by an oil prospecting com- pany, is probably stratigraphically connected with the Tintinara Bore, as it lies between the latter and the coast, within a few miles of the sea. I do not know that an experienced conchologist examined the organic remains of the bore. but it was reported to be in sea sand and shells, and the log (p. 186) seems to justify that con- clusion. Whilst the Tintinara Bore records 220 feet of the Pleistocene Marine, the Alfred Flat Bore records 348 feet with an underlying older series of 574 feet of what is probably the Adelaide Series, bottoming on a “red crystalline limestone” that may represent the Brighton Limestone, or a member of the Purple Slates Series. 8. TECTONIC MOVEMENTS. During some part of the Pleistocene Age an important coastal movement of elevation took place which has become distinguished as the Kosciusko Period. During this period it is believed that the great knot of highlands on the borders of New South Wales and Victoria, of which Mount Kosciusko is the most pro- minent height, reached their greatest elevation. This movement of uplift extended, more or less, along the southern portions of the continent, and it is to this regional uplift that we owe the southern highlands of South Australia, These positive movements in the earth’s crust in the southern portions of the State were accom- panied by correlative negative movements in the downward warp of the central regions. The result was the formation of a new watershed parallel to the coast which completely upset the preceding hydrographic system of the country. [See Howchin, Pres. Add. Sec. C. Aus. Assoc. Ad. Se. vol, xiv., 1913.] A similar movement of elevation took place on the eastern side of the Mount Lofty Ranges, as. well as on the western, although of less magnitude. The section given above (fig. 5), based on borings, in a north and south direction across the Murray Plains, shows distinctly that the slopes of the plateau are not the result of erosion but of an earth-fold in which the longer axis has an east and west direction and the anticlinal slopes north and south. The following table illustrates this point :— Height of Bore |Height of Tertiary Thickness of Thickness of Name of Bore. above Sea, above Sea. Terrestrial Beds. | Fresh-water Beds, Feet. Feet. Feet, Feet. Loxton (Railway) .. 126 46 5 75 Pate ue ek 47,0 «| (2) (?) (?) Alawoona abe ay 231 145 15 71 Anderson i va 300 125 1 174 Hundred of Bews 350 | 132 7 211 Cotton .. Ay 4 300 110 8 182 Tintinara ct Ba 62 Nil Nil Nil Alfred Flat... aa (?) 20 Nil Nil Nil The above table shows, on the line of section, that the upper portions of the plateau reach a height, between Anderson and Cotton (20 miles), of 300 feet and over. What looks like a rather sudden drop between Cotton and Tintinara can be explained by the long distance (40 miles) which separates these places, and in which distance no bores are available for comparison. The fact that the upper limits of the fossiliferous Tertiary rise with the ground and that the thickest deposits of the fresh-water beds are on the crest. of the fold, in which position it is impossible for them to have been laid down, are sufficient to prove the tectonic nature of the elevation. 190 9, THE PITYSIOGRAPHICAL PROBLEMS. The physiographical problems of the Lower Murray can be stated in three questions -— 1. How can the erratic course of the River Murray be explained? 2. What has led to the striking contrasts in the valley features below and above Overland Corner? 3. How can the existence of extensive fluviatile deposits to the southward of the Great Pyap Bend be explained ? With respect to the river course—it abruptly changes its direction in several instances by sharp angularities, as seen in its turn to the south at the Great Pyap Bend, with a sudden reversal to the north; its sharp turn to the west at Overland Corner, and, again, a right-angled turn to the south at the North-West Bend, This zig-zag course suggests something different in its origin from the normal develop- ment of a river as a consequent stream. The Great Pyap Bend, with its acute reversal, must have some significance, and can be fully explained by the uplift which placed an effective barrier across its previous course and directed the river into a new channel, the angularities in its course being caused by the exigency of having to follow the lowest grades available. The tilting of the ground to the northward led to extensive flooding with back waters, until the river found its outlet at Overland Corner, from which it cut for itself a new channel in the fossiliferous Tertiary beds. Another very remarkable feature of the Murray is its lopsidedness. Its watershed lies almost entirely to the eastward, while there is a vast country to the north and north-westward from which it receives practically no affluents. Northward of the Great Pyap Bend is an extensive area of flat, sandy country which has every appearance of an ancient river flat, The evidence obtained from borings appears to confirm this view. I am indebted to Mr. R. W. Segnit for particulars of a bore recently put down on the Morgan Vale Station (owner, Mr. G. Murray Howard), situated 66 miles due north from Loxton. The upper part of the bore revealed the presence of layers of fine sharp sand of various colours and sometimes indurated, including a 10-feet layer of clay, in all respects similar to the fresh-water serics that overlies the fossiliferous Tertiary of the Murray Plains. These fluviatile beds in the Morgan Vale Bore have a thickness of 236 feet and rest on fossilifcrous Tertiary beds, as in the borings to the south- ward. The officers of the South Australian Mines Department have also prepared sections through this northern arca which shows that the bore seclion at the Morgan Vale Station is typical of the country generally. The country, at present, is entirely destilule of rivers and creeks. The absence of rivers from the north and north-west quadrant of what, under normal conditions, ought to have been within the hydrographic system of the Murray, is no doubt due to the integrating control of the great central basin. If there had been no sagging of the central portions of the continent, such rivers as the Cooper and the Strzelecki would have found their outlets at the southern coast. As it is, the Strzelecki (which probably occupies the ancient bed of the Cooper), in flood times flows into a chain of lakes—Lakes Gregory, Blanche, Callabonna, and others, and these, in heavy floods, flow over into Lake Frome. This chain of lakes is on the southern margin of the great inland basin lying at the base of the great east-west geanticlinal fold that has cut off the waters coming in from the north. The Yunta-Broken Hill ridge forms a part of this earthfold which constitutes the water-parting between the Lake Eyre Basin and the southern coast. At Cockburn this ridge is only 694 feet above sea level and, with a slight- depression, would bring the rivers of the north through to the Murray. It follows, that before the Pleistocene earth movements they made this junction. 191 In this connection, reference may be made to a series of bores put down by the Engineer-in-Chief’s Department to the north-east and east of Lake Frome, all of which showed thick deposits of alluvium consisting of variegated sands and clays, with beds of gravel and fragments of lignite, as follow, the thickness of the alluvium being given in each case, namely, Coonanna, 396 feet; Coonee Creek, 370 feet ; Curraworra, 409 feet ; Dewdney, 508 feet : and Arboola, 422 feet. These alluvial deposits rested on blue shale (Cretaceous). 10. THE PAST HISTORY OF THE LOWER RIVER MURRAY. An attempt will now be made to trace the successive stages in the develop- ment of the River Murray. The Murray, or its equivalents, is an antecedent river, predating the existing physiographical outlines of the country, and is probably the most ancient river of the Australian continent. 1. The earliest stage that can be recognised in the history of the river is at a time when a transgression of the sea had submerged the Pre-Miocene terrain, reaching as far northward as the south-western portions of New South Wales. The Murray, in an abbreviated form (if it existed at all), met the sea coast in what is now a part of New South Wales, as did also the Darling as an independent river, anid the Cooper in what is now South Australian territory. This may be designated the Mio-Pliocene age of the river development, 2. The second stage witnessed the gradual rise of the land in an epeirogenic uplift and, as the sea retreated southward, the northern rivers followed the retreating coastline over the plane of marine sediments left by the sea; the Murray, the Darling, and the Cooper, which had previously entered the sea as separate rivers, were now engrafted into one extended river system. The grade was low and widespread, which led to meandering streams and thick sedimenta- tion as seen in the dead river sections both to the northward as well as south- ward of the present river course. Toward the coast it may have taken the form of a delta. This stage may be referred to the Early-Pleistocene age of the river development. 3. The third stage in the history of the River Murray followed on the further development of the tectonic movements which, in their initiative, had raised the Miocene marine sediments into dry land. A differential movement followed, by which a ridge was formed at right angles to the river course. The effect of this block tilting (like that on the rivers on the western side of the Mount Lofty Ranges) was to dam back the drainage, first by lowering the grade and thus causing the current to drop its load, but was too weak to enable the river to keep an open course to the seaboard. The alluviation thickened up-stream, and thereby raised the water level by which it ultimately found a new outlet to the sea. The barrier (raised at the same time) on the western side of the Mount Lofty Ranges was effective in cutting off the drainage of the central regions to the sea, while, in the case of the Murray, the elevation was insignificant and failed to close the passage to the south but forced the river into a new channel. At the same time, the sagging of the centre, by the development of the Lake IXyre Basin, altered the inclination of the country and diverted the drainage by which the northern and north-western tributaries of the Murray were captured and drawn into the centre of the depression. Tate thought that the country above Overland Corner had, at one time, been a great lacustrine area, which, at the critical period when the change of the river’s direction took place, might easily have been the case. The scores of lakes that stud this country, including such large sheets of water as Lake Bonney (or L. Barmera), a little south-eastward of Overland Corner, and Lake Victoria on 192 the New South Wales side of the Border, may possibly be the residuals of such a lacustrine period. If the Murray, at an earlier stage, reached the sea by a different channel from the present, it is an interesting enquiry as to where its former mouth was situated. It seems almost certain that its outlet met the sea at a margin further inland than the present. During the Pleistocene Period the sea made encroachments on the land. Raised sea beaches occur at Victor Harbour, Hindmarsh Island, and in the banks of Salt Creek which flows into the Coorong; while the bores at Tin- tinara and Alfred Flat give vertical sections of the sea bed. The major part of the South-East of South Australia consists of a raised sea bed. A well-preserved sea beach of loose sand and shells rests on the flanks of the extinct volcano, Mount Graham, near Millicent, 40 feet above the normal level; and at Glencoe, 12 miles from Mount Gambier and 255 fect above the sea level. Recent_shells are turned up by the plough, the larger examples, such as Haliotis and Ostrea, are collected off the land and tipped by the side of the road. Shingle beaches of rolled flints are common through the district, and can be traced from the narrow- neck drain, crossed by the Mount Gambier to Beachport railway, to as far north as Struan. Parallel ridges of dune sands occur, across country, from the seaboard to Naracoorte. This raised sea bed is probably related to a similar raised marine bed that occurs in the bends and terraces of the Glenelg River across the border, in Victoria. which is classed as Werrikooian. The presence of a sea beach on the flanks of the extinct volcano, mentioned above, is proof that this latest invasion by the sea occurred subsequently to the volcanic activity. A feature to be noted is that the ancient fresh-water beds do not reach the present sea-board but take a south-easterly direction, marked off by the bores at Geranium, Bunn Springs, Bordertown, and Bangham (Tatiara), carrying the line to within about 20 miles of Naracoorte, where sand dunes of the Pleistocene sea coast occur; the fresh-water beds being to the eastward of this line, and the Marine Tertiary, or older beds, reach the surface on the western. An interesting series of bores occur opposite Pinnaroo, on the Victorian side of the Border, which have been critically examined and described by Mr. F. Chapman [Rec, Geolog. Survey of Vict., vol. iii, pt. 4, 1916], Attention was given to eleven bores situated lineally within a few miles of each other. They show a remarkable correspondence (both as to the fluviatile beds, near the surface, and the fossiliferous Tertiary Marine at depth) with those that occur on the South Aus- tralian side. The following brief references, gathered from Mr. Chapman's Report, are of interest -— No. 1 Bore. From surface to 154 feet, sub-aerial and fluviatile sediments resting on Kalimnan [J.ower Pliocene]. No. 2 Bore. From surface to 117 feet, sub-aerial and fluviatile sediments resting on Kalimnan. Nos. 3 and 4 Bores. No material of the upper portion available for examination. No. 5 Bore. “Sub-aerial and fluviatile deposits of Recent and Pleistocene age obtain from the surface down to 133 feet. From 133 to 155 feet we have marine and estuarine conditions prevailing, as shown by the foraminifera, probably of Newer Pleistocene, Then follows a Kalimnan deposit.”—F. C. No. 6 Bore. “The first 104 feet are composed of sub-aerial accumulations. At 104 to 114 feet there is an extremely interesting occurrence of consolidated dune-sand material with shallow-water foraminifera. From 114 to 154 feet the deposits represent the Kalimnan stage.”—F. C. No. 7 Bore. “Down to 142 feet 3 inches the deposits are chiefly sub-aerial accumulations, some of the upper 130 feet being derived from granitic rocks, as 193 evidenced by the quartz and mica. Below 130 feet evidence of fluviatile action is present ; whilst at 142 feet the concretionary structure in the rock would seem to indicate ancient surface conditions. From 142 feet 3 inches is clearly of Kalimnan age.”"—F, C, No. 8 Bore. “Down to 124 feet the beds may be regarded as probably Pleistocene, but at 124-160 feet the character of the beds changes ; the fine grey, micaceous sand is equivalent to that in the previous bores with vegetable remains and estuarine foraminifera, and may represent the Upper Pliocene, True Kalim- nan (Lower Pliocene) strata occur at 160-165 feet.”—F, C. No. 9 Bore. “Between this bore and the previous one some striking differ- ences are noticed in the thickness of the superficial deposits. The usual bed of grcy, micaceous, silty sand, for instance, is here represented by no less than 163 feet, as against that of 36 feet in bore No. 8. This points to a sudden deepen- ing of the estuarine area at the present spot, caused by subsidence synchronous with deposition of silt. That the whole sedimentary series is thicker in the locality of bore No. 9 is indicated by the proportionally greater depth at which the Kalimnan beds lie under their Pleistocene cover.”—F. C. No. 10 Bore. “This bore shows a reversion to corresponding depths to those at which the Kalimnan is reached in bore No. 8; whilst bore No. 9 indicates a much greater thickness of Pleistocene deposits. At 160-186 feet the pebbly and micaceous shell-sand contains a varied fauna, indicating a shallow estuarine and marine deposit in which typical Kalimnan fossils occur2"—F. C. No. 11 Bore. “From the surface down to 148 feet the deposits are sandy and pebbly. From 148-175 feet, Upper Pliocene and Pleistocene estuarine deposits are representéd by green sandy clays with brackish water and shallow marine organisms, The summit of the Kalimnan series is probably touched at 175 feet.” —F. C. In these records, carefully prepared by Mr. Chapman, there are certain marine estuarine deposits recognised that are newer than the Kalimnan, and must, therefore, be either of Newer Pliocene, or else, Pleistocene age. These shallow sea-water deposits seem to mark the inland limits of the marine transgression of the period, and were near the line of junction between the sea and the fresh-water drainage from the north. As the sea retreated, the river deposits followed in an overlap of the marine sediments, as is shown in the bores, and can be traced back to the River Murray at the Great Pyap Bend. It is probable that the lower Murray, at a former period, had a deltaic outlet and reached the sea by numerous channels spread over a wide area, reaching from the Wimmera (Vict.), in the north, to the district near Bordertown, in the south. “The sudden deepening of the estuarine area” in No. 9 Bore is strongly suggestive of a main channel in the former delta of the Murray. ll. THE PRESENT OUTLET OF THE RIVER MURRAY. 4. The fourth stage in the river’s development was one of rejuvenation. Whilst the local tilt closed the old channel of outlet the regional uplift increased the grade by which the rising water found an outlct at Overland Corner, cutting for itself an incised channel in the raised Tertiary sea bed, flowing westerly, until arrested by the eastern slopes of the Mount Lofty Ranges, it turned abruptly to the south, following the contour of the country till it reached the sea. Accord- ing to Tate: “At Overland Corner the gorge suddenly contracts to a width of about one mile; and as far as the North-west Bend the average width is one mile and a quarter, whilst south hence to below Blanchetown, it is three-quarters of a mile. Here and there it opens out to greater width as at Mannum, but is again contracted at its southern end” [loc. cit. p. 26]. Tate was probably right in stating 194 that the gorge was cut by a retreating waterfall, When the recession reached Overland Corner the water level was reduced and the river was able to incise its own sediments at the higher levels, as seen in the banks at Loxton, to a depth of 80 feet or more. The Lower Murray has been under dynamic limitations arising from the low relief of the country through which it fows. It has had little scope to develop erosion features as it quickly reached base-level, and from its weak erosive efh- ciency has accomplished only a limited lateral development. ‘he relatively dry conditions of the region have also, in their weak denuding effects, made shght impression on the banks, so that the cliffs in many cases are nearly, or quite, vertical and exhibit canyon features, exhibiting, although an old river, some resemblances to the juvenile stage. The gorge section of the Murray is ancient, but relatively modern when compared with the river system as a whole. It might, probably, be synchronized with the gorges cut on the western side of the Mount Lofty Ranges, as the Torrens and the Onkaparinga; the latter, in many of its features, is analogotts with the River Murray. 5. This latest stage in the River Murray development covers the late Pleistocene and Recent periods. The river has completed its recession by a water- fall, it has drained the upper plateau, incised its own deposits, widening its bed between retreating escarpments, and has cut its way down to base-level. From the borders of New South Wales to the sea there is a fall of only 60 feet, and from Wentworth to the mouth of the river, a distance of 617 miles, the fall is never greater than three inches in the mile. Within the periods under review several small alternations of level have occurred along the coastline, In the neighbourhood of Adelaide and elsewhere, there are remains of two incursions of the sea that are separated by fresh-water beds, as well as a land surface underlying the older of these two marine beds. The local rivers, in their erosive and alluviating processes, supply an excellent index to these earth movements. At Murray Bridge, the river at low-water level is about two feet above low-water mark at Victor Harbour. But below this level there are 55 feet of water, and below the water 27 feet of silt, resting on granite, making the true bed of the river 80 feet below base-level; but as no river can erode its bed at base-level, the river bed at Murray Bridge must at one time have been, at least, 82 feet above its present level. This implies that the sea at that time was more distant than it is at present, and the river ran on a higher grade when the deeper erosion was effected. A depression of the Jand followed, the tivers lost grade and silted, laying down at Murray Bridge 27 fect of silt below the present water channel; at Swan Reach there are 50 fect of water and 35 feet of sediment, with a like amount of sediment at Blanchetown. A slight elevation once more took place, the sea retreated, the river, where confined to a compara- tively narrow channel, made a slight erosion of its silt, and the fresh-water lakes filled the depressions vacated by the sea. The Glenelg River, on the western borders of Victoria, supplies similar evidences as the Murray with respect to changes of level. Mr. D. Mahony, M.Sc., in a personal note to the writer, states; “The Glenelg River flows through a gorge from Limestone Creek to its mouth, and for many miles the water is 30 feet deep.” 12. THE COORONG. The Coorong was formed during this period of oscillation between land and sea. When the land rose, the sea retreated, leaving, behind it, successive ranges of sand dunes, and as the elevation increased the erosive force of the Murray also increased. The latter formed sand-bars off its mouth which contributed to 195 the building of the coastal sandhills. When a movement of subsidence set in the encroaching sea swept away the sandhills, the water was shallowed, and a low foreshore of great extent followed. As always happens under such circumstances, the off-sea breezes operated on the extensive sea beaches, piling up the sand as coastal dunes. This is a coastal feature from Cape Banks, in the south, to Port Elliot, in the shelter of Encounter Bay, in the north. The prevailing winds from the south-west to south-east, as well as the set of the tides, tend to produce a sand- drift to the northward. With the elevation, the strong southerly winds swept the exposed sands into a coastal ridge, but the Murray kept an open way and checked the travel of the sand to the northward, giving an unusual height and width to the sandhills of the Coorong. The coastal sandhills act as a barrier to the drainage from the land, not only in the case of superficial drainage, but the sea water, below the surface, bears up the fresh water and prevents its escape to the sea.. It is thus that we have numerous swamps and lakes bordering the coast, in the South-East of the State, as well as the Coorong nearer the outlet of the Murray. It is not improbable that the River Murray, at one time, had its mouth situated more to the southward in the direction of the Coorong. The action of the prevailing winds and tides along the coast, referred to above, tends to divert the outlets of the rivers, in a migratory movement northwards, as scen in Pedler’s Creek and the Port Adelaide River, ihe mouth of the latter having been driven northwards by the migration of the sandhills that have formed the Lefevre’s Peninsula and Port Adelaide River. In a similar manner the Coorong may, to some extent, represent a former outlet of the Murray in a more southerly position from which it has been gradually driven northwards by the encroaching sandridge. From the same cause the existing outlet of the Murray is a precarious and shifting channel. The saltness of the Coorong is not from the influx of sea-water—it is a stagnant arm of the fresh-water lakes, and its saltness is derived from evapora- tion and the concentration of soluble salts from the river water. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES VI. TO VIIL Puate VI. Hig. 1. The River Murray at Loxton in partial flood. Fig. 2. The River Murray at the most southerly portion of the Great Pyap Bend. Piate’ VII, Fig. 1. The River Murray below Loxton, showing the fossiliferous rock on the left bank. Fig. 2. Silicified River Murray deposits one mile above Loxton. : Pirate VIII. Pumping Station, Loxton, on shelf excavated in river bank. The cutting shows section of river deposits. The light-coloured bed, near the top, is a fossiliferous fresh-water limestone. 196 THE VOLCANIC SOIL OF MOUNT GAMBIER, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. By J. A. Prescorr and C, S. PIPER, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide. [Read July 11, 1929.] PLATE IX, One of the most interesting soil formations in South Australia is that derived from the scoria of the extinct Pleistocene volcano of Mount Gambier.) = The soil is remarkable for its high fertility in terms of plant nutrients and its favour- able fine sandy, loamy texture, tending to a degree of looseness, locally expressed by the term “snuffiness.” It is further remarkable for its association with two diseases: one of plants, the grey speck manganese deficiency of oats (Samuel and Piper, 1928), and the second a disease of animals, haematuria in cattle, the cause of which is still obscure. The distribution of the soil type is limited to within a three- or four-mile radius of the town of Mount Gambier, In the north- easterly direction, where the ash beds overlie and are frequently interspersed with sand ridge country, the limits are less clearly defined than round the southern limits of the volcanic area. The precise boundaries of the type have not yet been rigidly defined, and detailed soil survey will be required before this will be possible. From the point of view of classification within the major soil groups the type is immature and endodynanomorphic, mainly owing to the high and variable calcium carbonate content of the original parent material, so that the soil is much less acid than is the case with most South Australian soils of similar texture under similar rainfall conditions. The original native vegetation is recorded to have been mainly stringybark, Eucalyptus obliqua; honeysuckle, Banksia marginata; bracken fern, Pteridium aquilinum; and blackwood, Acacia melanoxylon, The most important crops cultivated on this soil, in order of importance, are oats, potatoes, barley, wheat and forage crops. Smaller areas arc in orchard (apples principally), onions and in market garden crops. Dairy farming is of some importance.) MECHANICAL ANALYSIS. Mechanical analyses are available for forty-one soils and subsoils, and as these were originally determined by the old British standard method, the results have been interpolated to the new International units and plotted in the triangular diagram illustrated in fig. 1. The soils are seen to form a definite group closely akin to that formed by the Australian tobacco soils described by E. P. Bainbridge (1928), The tetrahedral representation of the mechanical analysis of the type (1) Complete reference to the literature of the geology and physiogtaphy of the dis- trict are to be found in the paper by C. Fenner. “The Craters and Lakes of Mount Gambier, South Australia,” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, vol. xlv., p. 169, 1921. (2) G. Samuel and C. S Piper: J. Agric. S. Aust., vol. Xxxi, pp. 696 and 789, 1928. (3) For the season 1927-28 the actual acreage in crop for the combined Hundreds of Blanche and Gambier was:—Oats, 9,919; potatoes, 1,306; barley, 1,304; wheat, 792; forage, 664; orchards, 116; onions, 48; market gardens, 4. Mr. E. S. Alcock, the district agricul- tural instructor, estimates the acreage of crops grown on the volcanic soil to have been, in 1928, approximately:—Oats, 4,000; potatoes, 3,000 (unusually high); barley, 2,000; chou moullier, 100; wheat, 100 (rather high); lucerne, onions, mangolds, rape, each 50. Outside the volcanic area, oats is the only crop of any importance. (@) E. P. Bainbridge, C.S.IR. Journ., vol. i, p. 341, 1928. 197 is illustrated in pl. ix.©), The distribution of the individual values about a plane within this tetrahedron is to be noted, and we are indebted to Mr. G. R. Piper Tig. 1. Diagrammatic represen- tation of the mechanical analyses of mineral frac- tions of Mount Gambier soil types. The coarse and fine sands are united to form one group. Salt Sand for a statistical examination of the data and for the calculation of the mean plane which is represented by the equation :-— Clay Coarse Sand Fine Sand a - = 1, with a standard deviation of 45-3 92-4 103°7 + 1°8 units. when Clay + Coarse Sand + Fine Sand ++ Silt = 100. The plane is determined by the intercepts :-—Clay, 45; Silt, 55; Coarse Sand, 92; Silt, 8; Clay, 3; Fine Sand, 97. The soil is noted for a high proportion of sand particles with approximately equal proportions of silt and clay. Mechanical analyses of some typical soils determined according to the official British method (1928) are given in Table 1. The average summation curve for the soil type, based on data obtained on the basis of both the old and new standards, is illustrated in fig. 2. The extremes are also indicated. 100 4 ISO 4.54 2.54 0.54 2-54 log seltling velocity Fig. 2, Mean summation percentage curve of mechanical analysis of Mount Gambier soils. The broken lines represent the extremes for the type. f (3) See yA. Prescott, C.S.LR. Journ,, vol. ii, p. 112, 1929, 198 “WOI}IVsS aq} O} Sta}a1 Jaquinu 943 pur ‘speansadses sarquien pue dyouerg fo spaspunpy OF Jojot “Dod ‘uoIngrYyxyy AaquaAy Joy sapdiues addy saunynouisy io Juoujysedaqd “x | | i. | zg | vs SZ Orel £9 £8 96 | T9 SF gel | BZ er | V2 for | zz | ¥e2 8 sz | Be oe ce | Zot zero. «p00 6 S| OD POD, GOD | OTD =| ATO | ezO | OOO EF ce of 9% | 62 9% Bz ee 19 | og | £2 | i i | I ro | oso [| fe | ST rl ez eg e's g'O1 r'0l 98 ro | O8 | HST | prt | eel orl | 18 ZL | 6OI ods pes | Oe | Fee ele | OOF go¢ | Zr | e0e , See vor | 2t@ | 92e 192 eze | 092 giz | 842 | OBL | FZ 90 | 6-0 yse 6-0 BT-6 60 | 81-6 . 21-9 | 90 9-0 | Fe-91 ozD «67D gS a | SHS eszt'O | eszrD | OOITaA | STD | PIN | et) v06 £8 ce | pe | ef | ee 69 | 9 09 6s | 8I J | 9T-0 x 1 £1 ‘SOs Aniguiny punopy fo Saskpoupy jooiupyr2 YW ‘TL Hav, Worrusy uo sso-y “ JUsUBITT, play Uo ssovT ose QyBOgIey WMnIOle) “= Hog AIp-any Ul IN} slOyy wee tree nee Al WS “oo pues |uTg pues assoc soysuy ut yydaq AYTEIO'T ON TOS 199 CHEMICAL CILARACTERISTICS. REACTION. As already noted, the soils of Mount Gambier form a series which is defi- nitely more alkaline than might be expected from the rainfall conditions. This factor is an important one in controlling the incidence of the manganese deficiency disease of oats, but is probably not the only factor. Generally speaking, however, the more acid soils are free from the disease. The frequency distribution of reaction for the type is given in ‘Table 2. TABLE 2. Frequency Distribution of the Reaction of Mount Gambier Soils and Subsoils. Number of Samples at given pH Values. I | 1 I I | q 4 a | pH. SS ee ola es trostt ales leale état os wn : 63 [6 fo |S) ¢ [ss Els ape NTS [Rp [eos nye | ood [06 Go 2 1 a | | It f | | aa . I if Surface Soils... bee "| 1 31 2| 2i 1 1 i | at | | I | Subsoils Rt anit | (| t | The calcium carbonate content of the soil varies within wide limits from 26°7% in the ash from just inside the rim of the Blue Lake crater and 9° 6% in an outcrop of ashes to negligible proportions in some of the surface soils. The more acid soils show definite lime requirements by the Hutchinson- Mel.ennan method, but it is obviously rarely, if ever, necessary to consider the application of lime to these soils. The fact that positive lime requirement results have been obtained in the laboratory is of interest, however, from a general point of view, and a number of determinations have been made of the buffer capacities of these soils with a view to obtaining some information regarding the possibilities of 5 6 7 6 pit Tig. 3. Buffer curve illustrating the effect of the addition or removal of lime (expressed as calcium carbonate) on the reaction of soil 42, altering the soil reaction with a view to controlling the manganese deficiency disease. It will stffice to illustrate the buffer capacity of this soil over the normal range of reaction by means of the curve shown in fig. 3. This curve represents I 200 the actual effect produced on the soil reaction by an absorption or removal of lime equivalent to the calcium carbonate indicated. NiTrRoGEN AND OrGANIC Marrer, The nitrogen content of a complete series of these soils is available, and the data are given in the form of a frequency distribution in Table 3. It was also found possible to work out the correlation between the nitrogen content and organic matter in a number of cases where the loss on ignition for individual soil fractions in the mechanical analysis was accurately known. The organic matter calculated from the loss on ignition after allowing for carbonates and the loss from the mineral fractions is approximately equal to the material capable of oxidation by hydrogen peroxide. A very close relationship between soil nitrogen and organic matter is obtained in this way, the percentage of nitrogen being 4-90 (see fig. 4). vabouiy % > 70 20 % Organ Maiter Fig. 4. Relationship between organic matter and nitrogen content of Mount Gambier soils. TABLE 3. Frequency Distribution of Nitrogen percentage in Mount Gambier Soils and Subsoils. Nitrogen % a. ou. 0 .05 10 015 120 .25 130 135 40 «45.50 SS) 60) 665) 7075 05 10 615.20 25 30) 635) 40 450 50 55 60 «65 «670 «675.80 Soils Sivhn Veet 1 1 1 3 3) 5 2 2 1 : Subsoils ...0 2. 2 3 4 2 TABLE 4. Exchangeable Bases in Mount Gambier Soils. Mg. equivalents per 100 gm. Relative percentage Soil of Sail. proportions of Bases. rou pH | __ ik. : ie -——__—_—_} Remarks. Ca Mg K Na Total | Ca Meg K Na 17 | 69 216 | 56 | 12 | 28 | 312 | 69 | 18 | 4 | 9 | Type sample 58 7.9 27.4 3.1 1.2 2.9 34.6 79 9 4 8 | Diseased oats 59 | 6.4 17.2 3.4 1.6 2.5 24.7 70 14 6 10 | Healthy oats 68 7.8 24,2 3.0 1.8 2.8 31.8 76 9 6 9 | Type sample 72 | 7.4 20.8 2.5 1.6 2.6 27.5 76 9 6 9 | Type sample 73 7.3 12.5 26 | 1.2 3.0 19.3 65 13 6 16 | Subsoil of 72 0A | 7.6 21.8 2.6 1.1 3.6 29.1 75 9 4 12 Diseased oats t t 201 ‘s1eo paseasiqT “6-0 ‘042 “US “IGUIRD “PH 06 "181-6 ‘89 FO [POsqns “69 Brg “US ‘oupuRlA “PH ‘seysy yo dosing = “¢/ "160 ‘OOTT “US “yout ‘PH "89 "6-0 ‘“ShS ‘US “SyUelE “PH “FZ "19° ‘seo AUVBaHT “ETT “US “serquits) ‘PH ‘6S gh FO TOSS Es 290i. SVE PaSBAeiT "EEL "HS “Tetqured) “PE 85 "6-0 “£871 US “seIquIeD “PH ‘ZZ “wbe-9T “ZT JO Tosqns “gT ‘aye ong jo Wii oprsur Yyse DIURIIOA "TZ “91-0 ‘uonrqryxy AajquiaA, ‘opdues adAT +f] > SMaV Wag ; | roo | 956 | £00 | 700 | 60'0 | 8992) OO | 96E | TIN OTT | Ort | 60°0 apeuoqiey wNTI[e-) wl Oz oe oZ ae 0°8 Le BL +9 6L 0°8 69/% Hd fh" " voRatay 970 | 10°0 | Szo | 600 | 920 | 920 | ZrO | Teo | rrO | IhO | TIO | PEO | % N " uasoIN sro | ozt | 120 | 980 , #20 | zeo | #80 | 290 | zzo | seo | sso | s90|% for |™ OpPIxXO WUeI TL, ozo | eo | Zzo | 910 | 6f0 | STO | ceo | zeo | ZrO | TSO | STO | 201% “°O'd Poy woydsoyd 9€0°0 | 600 | zoo | Ss0'0 | £900 | SZz0°;0 | 9500 | 890°0 | 6S0'0 | 890°0 | EP0'0 | SrO'O | % "OCU asauesueW JO ePIXO goo | £91 | zo | £70 | 670 | SeO | ogo | seo | ogo |! gzo | gzo | ceo |% OM vo yseqog 140 | 82S | 861 | ze | oft | 142 | o€@ | 60% | OST | HOZ | BES | HST |% O8W BsoUse so | $86 | EST | POT | SOT | OFST] OST | eTh | GOT | SoZ | ESR | ert )% OF) fF 7 omy] LL2 | We | 925 | 609 | P8h | EOE | 9EL | ZT9 | OMS | SBS | “eS | OFS (% FOTW eurnly gee | 928 | £75 | PBS | OFS | OBE | feo | ees | ITD | 129 | Ebr | OTS (% “OA ePIXO wos] 06 SZ rl fe i 2e ft te 69 89 6S 85 8I A “ON [10S ¢ Hav L, VIDA pip naojyyroapl py “smog aarquyy yunopg ordhy fo sastwup posuuayy 202 EXCHANGEABLE BASES, The Mount Gambier soil presents no special features in this connection except a highly satisfactory proportionate distribution of the four significant bases. Soils containing significant quantities (0°1%) of calcium carbonate have reaction values hetween pH 7°5 and 8:0, so that it is likely that these soils may be considered to be fully saturated when in equilibrium at these reaction values. So far no attempt has been made to determine the degree of saturation of the soil with replaceable bases. The values for the type sample, No. 68, are recorded diagrammatically in fig. 5. 316 Mg. eguitt fier 100 gm. fa My Ne Fig, 5. Exchangeable bases in type sample No. 68. Hyprocuioric Acip Extract, A number of typical soils, including two samples of unweathered ash, were extracted with hydrochloric acid by the conventional method for plant nutrients. Both ash samples Nos. 71 and 75 are notable for their high content in calcium carbonate. The most notable feature fromthe plant nutrition point of view is the content of phosphoric acid which is remarkably high for South Australia, the proportion being of the same order of magnitude as for the basaltic soils of Eastern Australia. The amount of potash and phosphoric acid soluble in one per cent. citric acid determined in a single typical surface soil (No. 74) indicated a high availability tor both nutrients, 0°024% K.O and 0°036% P.O;. The results of the chemical analyses are recorded in Table 5. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE [X. Tetrahedral representation of mechanical analyses of Mount Gambier soils, 203 NOTES ON SOME MISCELLANEOUS COLEOPTERA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS ON NEW SPECIES. PART VII. By ArtHur M. Lea, F.ELS. (Contribution from the South Australian Museum. ) [Read August 8, 1929.] STAPHYLINIDAE. Diochus pubiventris, n. sp. Black, prothorax, muzzle, antennae (some of the median joints infuscated), palpi, tips of elytra, and of abdominal segments, and the legs more or less reddish, or reddish-flavous. Sides with a few bristles, the abdomen with fine ashen pubescence. Head rather long, with a few distinct punctures. Antennae rather long, seventh-tenth joints transverse. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, base evenly rounded and slightly wider than apex, sides gently rounded; with a few marginal punctures, and three forming a row on each side of middle. Elytra subquadrate, a narrow impression on each side of suture; with sparse and usually indistinct punctures. Abdomen long, parallel-sided to near apex; with dense, minute punctures. Length, 3-5-4-0 mm. North Australia: Darwin (N. Davies, G. F, Hill, and British Museum) ; New South Wales: Tamworth (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 15889. The suture is usually obscurely paler than the adjacent parts, but only the extreme tips of the elytra are noticeably pale; on D, divisus fully half or more of the elytra is pale. The pronotum is usually of a dingy castaneous-red, but some- times the front parts are obscurely infuscated. From most directions the elytra appear polished and impunctate, but from others a few feeble rugose punctures may be seen. Diochus longus, n. sp. Black, shining, apical two-fifths of elytra, tips of abdominal segments, muzzle, palpi and legs more or Jess reddish-flavous. Abdomen with fine, ashen pubescence, sides with a few bristles. Head distinctly longer than wide, a few distinct punctures in middle, becom- ing rather numerous on sides. Antennae short, fourth-tenth joints transverse. Prothorax distinctly longer than wide, base and apex rounded, sides parallel; with a few distinct submarginal punctures, and three forming a row on each side of middle. Elytra slightly longer than wide, surface faintly rugose but with some small punctures towards sides; suture feebly elevated. Abdomen with dense and minute punctures. Length, 4 mm. Western Australia: Bunbury (A. M. Lea) ; unique. The antennae are decidedly shorter than on D. divisus and octavii, most of the joints being transverse; they are infuscated throughout, although the apical joint is slightly paler than the preceding ones. Neobisnius mediopolitus, n. sp. ¢@. Black, basal joints of antennae, palpi and tarsi reddish, rest of legs, tip of abdomen, and suture and tips of elytra obscurely diluted with red. Elytra and abdomen with fairly dense, ashen pubescence, prothorax and head sparsely clothed. 204 Head subquadrate between clypeus and neck; with dense and sharply defined punctures, except on a median line that is dilated in front. Antennae rather short, fourth and fifth joints slightly, the sixth-tenth strongly transverse. Prothorax longer than wide, sides feebly decreasing in width posteriorly ; punctures as on head, and also leaving a shining median line. Elytra distinctly longer than wide, sides parallel, suture finely carinated ; punctures smaller and more crowded than on prothorax. Abdomen with five basal segments almost parallel-sided, with smaller and slightly denser punctures than on elytra; anal styles long. Length, 5 mm. Victoria: Metbourne (FE. Fischer). Type, I. 15890, Near N. procerulus, but larger, elytra with smaller and denser punctures, and their tips not conspicuously pale; on procerulus, although only a small portion of the tips is pale, that portion is quite distinct; on the present species it is even smaller and needs looking for. Philonthus inconspicuus, n. sp. Piceous-brown, legs, palpi and basal joints of antennae paler. A few setae scattered about, the abdomen with short, ashen pubescence. Head quadrate between clypeus and neck; a shallow triangular impression in front; with a few punctures. Kyes rather small. Antennae rather short, fourth to tenth joints transverse. Apical joint of palpi thin and rather long. Prothorax longer than wide, with straight sides, feebly diminishing in width posteriorly ; with sparse, distinct, submarginal punctures, and four forming a series on each side of middle. Elytra slightly longer than wide, sides almost parallel, a narrowly impressed line on each side of suture, and one on each side; with fairly dense, sharply defined punctures, almost as large as those on pronotum. Abdomen parallel-sided to near apex, punctures stnaller and denser than on elytra, and smaller on back parts of segments, Length, 3-2-3-5 mm. Queensland: Coen River (W. D. Dodd), Mulgrave River (H. Hacker). Type, I. 12705. Decidedly smaller than any Philonthus previously recorded from Australia, but the species certainly appears to belong to the same genus as P. nigritulus, of which the specimens have the appearance as of pale ones on a greatly reduced scale. The apical joint of the palpi is thinner than usual, but scarcely bristle-like, as on Heterothops. The prothorax is slightly paler than the head, and the base and apex of the abdomen are paler than the middle, but the colours are dingy, although most of the upper surface is polished. Cafius gigas, n. sp. é. Black, in parts with a faint metallic gloss; antennae, palpi, legs and tips of abdominal segments, more or less reddish-brown. Elytra and abdomen with depressed, blackish pubescence or setae, the sides with a few bristles, becoming dense on tip of abdomen; some mouth parts with very dense, flavous pubescence. Head large, slightly transverse between clypeus and neck; with large and small, irregularly distributed punctures, more crowded about hind angles than elsc- where, Antennae moderately long, first joint as long as second and third com- bined, and much longer than eyes, ninth and tenth feebly transverse. Apical joint of palpi very little longer than subapical. Prothorax about as long as the apical width, sides gently decreasing in width to base, which is gently rounded; with large and small, irregularly distributed punctures, but leaving an ill-defined median line. Flytra slightly wider than prothorax, and not much longer, outer apical angles obliquely cut off; punctures crowded and rugose, but not very large. Abdomen with sides evenly decreasing in width posteriorly; punctures more elongated and less crowded than on elytra; tip of under surface deeply notched. Tibiae with numerous spines and bristles; front tarsi dilated. Length, 19-20 mm. 205 @. Differs in having the head considerably smaller, elytra narrower, abdomen not notched, and front tarsi less dilated. Lord Howe Island: Mount Ledgbird. Types, in Australian Museum. The hairy mouth parts, mandibles, palpi, sides of prothorax, legs and generic details generally are as in Cafius; but the species is considerably longer and wider than any other of that genus before me, and the types were not taken from sea- beaches, where those of the genus are usually to be found, The mandibles are stout, with a strong tooth about the middle, on the left one of the male (those of the female are concealed) there are some minute granules on the anterior edge of the tooth; the large punctures on the pronotum are fairly dense on the sides and near-the median line. The types were known to Olliff, but were passed over by him. HETEROTHOPS SEMICUPREA, Fl. Mr. Arrow kindly sent a cotype of this species for examination, In general appearance it is close to H. kentiac, but differs in being more robust, head dis- tinctly longer and more oval, elytra with larger punctures, suture scarcely elevated, and the dark blotch slightly more distant from suture. It is closer to H. bimaculata, the outlines being practically identical, but the spot on each elytron is somewhat differently placed, and more of the abdomen is pale. _ Heterothops myrmeciae, n. sp. Black, shining, elytra blackish-brown, the tips obscurely pale, apical segment of abdomen, tips of most of the others, mouth parts, palpi, four basal joints of antennae, and the legs, brownish-flavous. Elytra and abdomen with short, depressed, pale pubescence, the sides with a few setae. Head subovate, more convex than usual, with very few scattered punctures. Eyes small. Antennae rather long, first joint almost as long as second and third combined, sixth-seventh feebly, eighth-tenth moderately transverse. Apical joint of palpi setiform, almost as long as the subapical one, Prothorax transverse, base strongly rounded and much wider than apex; with a few marginal punctures, and two in middle, about one-fourth from apex. Elytra subquadrate, suture feebly elevated posteriorly; with dense and small punctures. Abdomen almost parallel- sided to near apex, punctures mostly less distinct than on elytra; anal styles long. Length, 3:5-4-0 mm. Victoria: Northern Gippsland (II. W. Davey), Fern Tree Gully, in July (C. Oke). Type, I. 15894. With the general appearance of H. luctuosa, but the eyes are much smaller, the abdomen is less iridescent, and more of it is pale; it is decidedly wider than H. picipennis, but the eyes are much the same; it is less robust than H. obscuri- pennis, and has much smaller eyes. On one specimen there is a small puncture immediately behind each of the two distinct ones on the pronotum. One of the specimens was taken by Mr. Oke from a nest of a black “jumper” ant (Myrmecia pilosula). Quedius macrops, n. sp. §. Black, shining, antennae, palpi, legs and tips of several abdominal seg- ments more or less reddish. LElytra with fairly dense, depressed, dark pubescence, somewhat longer and sparser on abdomen; sides with blackish bristles, becoming dense on abdomen. Head moderately large; with a few conspicuous punctures near cyes and neck, a shallow depression near each antenna. Eyes very large, occupying most of the sides between clypeus and neck. Antennae rather thin, eighth-tenth joints each about as long as wide. Prothorax slightly transverse, base strongly rounded and wider than apex; with a few marginal punctures, and two submedian ones. Elytra distinctly wider than long, suture moderately elevated; punctures rather 206 dense and small. Abdomen regularly diminishing in width posteriorly, punctures about bases of segments larger than on elytra, becoming smaller and sparser posteriorly; tip of under surface with a small triangular notch. Front tarsi moderately inflated, middle pair combless. Length, 5:0-5:5 mm. ?. Differs in having the head slightly smaller, antennae slightly shorter, front tarsi not inflated, and abdomen not notched at apex. Queensland: Herberton (H, J. Carter); New South Wales: Sydney (R. Ilelms). Type, I. 15891. About the size of Q. tepperi and cuprinus, but head of different shape, with much larger eyes, antennae paler, etc.; the eyes are larger than on Q. hackert, the legs are somewhat darker, and the middle tarsi are combless; Q. luridipennis has somewhat smaller eyes and combed middle tarsi in the male. Both surfaces of the abdomen are brilliantly iridescent, as are also parts of the legs. The elytra are not as black as the other parts, and their extreme tips are obscurely diluted with red on five specimens; on a sixth the elytra are obscurely reddish, in parts deeply infuscated. In some lights the head and prothorax have a silken gloss. Quedius calogaster, n. sp. é. Black, shining; antennae, palpi, most of legs, apical segment of abdomen and apex of subapical one, more or less red, elytra with a slight greenish gloss. the shoulders, sides, and tips obscurely diluted with red. Elytra with moderately dense, dark pubescence, becoming sparser and longer on abdomen; sides with sparse, long, blackish bristles, becoming rather dense on abdomen. Head rather large, with a few strong punctures near eyes and netk. Eyes large. Antennae moderately long, sixth-tenth joints feebly transverse. Prothorax moderately transverse, base strongly and evenly rounded; with a few large marginal punctures, and two close together one-third from apex. Elytra slightly transverse, each separately rounded at apex; with dense and small punctures. Abdomen regtilarly diminishing in width posteriorly ; punctures about as large as on clytra, at bases of segments, but sparser and smaller posteriorly; tip of under surface slightly notched; anal styles long. Front tarsi moderately inflated. Lepgth, 6-7 mm. @. Differs in having the head smaller, antennae somewhat shorter, elytra smaller and entirely dark, abdomen not notched, and front tarsi not dilated. Queensland: Ravenshoe and Magnetic Island (H. J. Carter). Type, L. 15892. In general appearance close to Q. iridiventris and inconspicuus, but head of different shape, with larger eyes, and paler antennae. Both surfaces of the abdomen are brilliantly iridescent, the colours varying with the light from almost entirely purplish-blue to almost entirely coppery. From some directions the elytra appear to be minutely granulate. Under the microscope I could not see a comb on the middle tarsi of the male, but a leg was not detached from the type for special examination. Quedius insignis, n. sp. é. Black, shining; clytra pale castaneous, four basal joints of antennae, parts of palpi, and the tarsi, more or less obscurely reddish, Abdomen sparscly setose and with fairly numerous bristles. Head rather small, with minute, scattered punctures. Eyes not very large, about as long as the inter-antennary space. Antennae short and stout, first joint almost as long as second and third combined, third distinctly longer than second and the length of eleventh, fourth moderately, the fifth-tenth strongly transverse. Palpi short, subapical joint obtriangular and slightly longer than apical. Mandibles short and strong. Prothorax moderately transverse, base and sides evenly rounded ; a very finely impressed line on all margins, on each side it bifurcates at about the apical third, so that a narrow triangle is enclosed at the apex; with a few distinct 207 punctures. Elytra subquadrate, sides gently rounded, apex truncated; with a narrowly impressed line on each side of suture, and one before each inflexed margin; with a few distinct punctures. Abdomen slightly inflated about middle, with distinct but irregularly distributed punctures; apex of under surface with a deep notch. Legs short, front tarsi moderately dilated. Length, 7 mm. Victoria: Beaconsfield (F, E. Wilson). Type (unique), 1, 15893, With the general appearance of the European Astrapaeus ulmi, on a greatly reduced scale, but the type is certainly a male, and its palpi have the apical joint small and wedge-shaped, instead of large and securiform. Tor the present it may be referred to Quedius, although the punctures and antennae are very unlike those of all other described Australian species. The eighth-tenth joints of antennae are fully twice as wide as long. ‘here are a few upright setae on the elytra near the suture, and a few submarginal ones, the elytra otherwise being glabrous, There is a distinct row of punctures on each side of the suture, and another about the middle of each elytron, about the tips there are a few punctures, and short impressed lines. There are a few distinct submarginal punctures on the pronotum, including two median ones almost at the apex, instead of some distance from It, as on other species of Quedius. Acylophorus tenuipes, n. sp. @. Blackish-brown, antennae (some of the median joints slightly infus- cated), palpi, tarsi, and tips of two apical segments of abdomen paler. Elytra and abdomen with dark, depressed pubescence or setae, the sides with a few bristles, Head rather convex, between clypeus and neck as long as wide, with numerous small punctures and six large ones. Mandibles thin and acute, each with a rounded projection towards base. Antennac rather long and thin, first joint curved, as long as three following combined, and about twice the length of eyes, second as long as third and fourth combined, the others gradually decreasing in length, ninth and tenth somewhat transverse. Prothorax slightly transverse, apex scarcely as wide as base, which is evenly rounded, sides finely rounded; with numerous minute punctures, and a few large ones. Elytra not much longer or wider than prothorax, with dense and somewhat rugose punctures, of moderate size or rather small. Abdomen almost parallel-sided to near apex, punctures slightly larger and more angular than on elytra. Tarsi thin. Length, 7-5-8°5 mm. Queensland: Brisbane, in July (H. Hacker). Type, in Queensland Museum; cotype, in South Australian Museum. It is with some doubts that this species is referred to Acylophorus, as the head is much larger than on the other species known to me (A. glaberrimus, ruficollis and asperatus) ; but in the allied genera Quedius (¢.g., Q. analis and fulgidus) and Heterothops (e.g., H. tibialis and laticeps) the heads differ greatly in size. I have considered the possibility of the species belonging to Quediopsis (the threc speci- metis are strikingly like many species of Quedius, to which, if shorn of their antennae, they would almost certainly be referred), but Fauvel states that the antennae of that genus are not so strongly geniculate as in Acylophorus; he also states that in the male the three basal joints of the tarsi are “maxime dilatatis, patellatis,” so that those of the female are at least likely to be of considerable width instead of thin; the maxillary palpi were described as having the three apical joints equal, in this species the subapical joint is shorter than the preceding or following ones ; the antennae were noted as having all the joints longer than wide, in this species two are certainly transverse. Only the type appears to be mature, two other specimens are pale castancous, with most of the abdomen infuscated ; all, however, have some of the median joints of the antennae infuscated ; all have the anal styles withdrawn, but their outlines are visible through the derm. Of the large punctures on the head, two are rather 208 close together between the eyes, and four are subbasal in oblique pairs, on the pronotum two are submedian as on most species of Quedius, and there are two or three near the front angles. Atanygnathus bicolor, n. sp. Black, shining, basal three-fifths of prothorax, apex of clytra, palpi, and legs flavous, or flavous-brown, antennae with basal and apical joints pale, the others more or less deeply infuscated. Elytra and abdomen with fine, depressed, pale pubescence ; the sides, especially of abdomen, with dark bristles. Tlead elongate, polished and impunctate. Antennae long and thin, no joint transverse. Prothorax transverse, sides moderately rounded, the base more strongly so, front angles rounded off, with a few small punctures scattered about, and a distinct one on each side of the middle. Elytra subquadrate, outer apical angles notched, with small, evenly crowded punctures, Abdomen evenly diminish- ing in width posteriorly, with punctures as on elytra, except that there are some larger ones at the tips of four segments ; anal styles long. Length, 3-4 mm. North Australia: Daly River (H. Wesselman), Oenpelli (National Museum from P. Cahill), Darwin (G. F. Hill), Adelaide River (British Muscum), Mel- ville Island (W. D. Dodd). Type, I. 12762. The bicoloured prothorax and elytra are at once distinctive from A. fer- minalis. Usually only one basal joint of antennae is pale, but there are four or five (sometimes almost white) at the apex, the dark part of the pronotum is usually quite black, but occasionally is dark brown; the abdomen is slightly iridescent and the tips of the segments obscurely diluted with red, CUCUJIDAE. Laemophlaeus distorticornis, n. sp. a. Dark brown and opaque, muzzle and elytra, except for markings, paler. Head somewhat flattened, with a narrow, shining, median line; very minutely punctate. Antennae very long and thin, first joint distorted, the others cylindrical, third slightly longer than second or fourth, but shorter than fifth, fifth-tenth equal, the eleventh slightly longer. Prothorax with sides gently rounded and distinctly wider at apex than at base, a narrow carina near each side, but not quite parallel Ney Fig. 1. A, B, C, Two basal joints of antennae of Laemophlacus distorticornis Lea; D, E, of L. norfoleensis Lea. A with it; punctures as on head. Elytra with a fairly well defined subsutural stria, and with three geminate pairs of striae on each elytron, the interstice between each pair feebly raised but posteriorly becoming subearinated, Length, 1°5-2-0 mm. 9. Differs in having the head smaller, antennae shorter, with the first joint not distorted, but evenly dilated to apex, and the prothorax less conspicuously dilated to apex. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, [. 7591. 209 At first glance apparently close to L. blackburni, but elytral markings different, antennae very much longer and thinner, and first joint very different. The elytra are of a dingy flavous, with a conspicuous brown fascia in the middle, extending from the suture to the first pair of discal geminate striae, along these it is directed for a short distance towards the base, and posteriorly towards the apex, but half- way to the latter it is suddenly directed outwards but not to the margins, on some specimens the markings are somewhat like an M; on some the markings consist of disconnected spots; on others there is an infuscation of the suture posteriorly in addition to the M-like markings ; each joint of the antennae is paler at the base than at the apex. ‘he antennae are unusually long and thin, being quite as long as the body on the female, and conspicuously longer on the male; the first joint of the male varies considerably ; on some specimens, including the type, it is evenly dilated from the base to the middle and is then suddenly thickened and deflected, but it varies in appearance (fig. 1, A and B) from almost every point of view; on other specimens (fig. 1, C) it is considerably smaller and curved, rather than distorted. Seventeen specimens were obtained. Laemophlaeus howensis, n. sp. 3. Pale flavo-castancous and moderately shining. Head flat between eyes but gently semi-circularly concave in front, median line slightly impressed but distinct ; punctures dense and small but rather sharply defined. Antennae extending to hind coxae, first joint long, stout, and strongly curved, second globular and slightly larger than third, fourth-tenth subequal, eleventh slightly longer. Prothorax about once and one-half as wide as long, apex scarcely wider than base, sides very feebly rounded, with a narrow carina towards each side but scarcely parallel with it; punctures as on head. Elytra with sub- sutural and geminate striae much as on preceding species. Length, 1-2-1-7 mm. ?. Differs in having the head somewhat smaller, and antennae shorter, with the first joint smaller and scarcely curved. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea), “Type, I. 7592. Allied to L. diemenensis, but smaller, less polished, basal joint of antennae of male very different and the following ones very similar to those of the femalc, the elytral striation is also much less defined; it is much the size and colours of L. testaceus but is much less polished and is otherwise very different. A specimen of each sex was taken. Var. (?). A female from the island is structurally so close to the female of this species, that it appears desirable to leave it unnamed till a male can be obtained ; it differs from the female in being smaller, and with the whole of the upper surface opaque. Laemophlaeus bimaculiflavus, n, sp. Castaneous and shining, prothorax somewhat darker, elytra still darker, almost black, but with two large, sharply defined, flavous spots. Head wide, with a feeble median line, a sharply impressed line near base and another near each eye (these large), with a shallow depression towards each side; punctures small and dense but sharply defined. Antennae not much longer than head and prothorax combined, first joint stout, not as long as second and third combined, second subglobular, third moderately long, fourth-eighth sub-_ elliptic and subequal, ninth and tenth slightly longer, increasing in width to apex, eleventh ovate. Prothorax almost twice as wide as long, sides rounded, base much narrower than apex, with the hind angles acute and slightly produced, a well impressed stria towards each side, rather suddenly deepened near base; punctures slightly sparser, but otherwise as on head. Elytra wide, sides gently rounded; subsutural stria on each distinct only posteriorly, inwards of each 210 shoulder with two conjoined striae, the inner one rather deep, oblique and terminated near apex, the other vanishing before the middle, a sharply impressed stria commencing on the margin at the base, and slightly diverging from the margin till it suddenly terminates near the apex; punctures much as on prothorax. Length, 5 mm. ; Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 7594. A well-marked species, larger than any other known from Australia. The flavous spot on each elytron is about the length of the prothorax, and half the width; it commences at about the basal fifth and is fairly close to the suture and outer margin. Laemophlaeus fuscolineatus, n. sp. Castaneous, elytra with suture and three narrow lines on each infuscated. Very finely pubescent. Head rather flat between eyes, with a feeble depression towards cach side, median line slightly impressed ; punctures small and dense. Antennae moderately long, first joint stout, second-eighth subglobular and rather small, ninth-eleventh somewhat longer and forming a loose club. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides slightly rounded and very little wider at apex than at base, with a narrow carina towards and almost parallel with cach side; a shining and almost impunctate median line, but elsewhere punctures much as on head. Elytra with a subsutural and three geminate striae on each; punctures smaller and denser than on head. Length, 2 mm. ' Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, L 7595. A very distinct species. From some directions the pronotum appears to have two vaguely infuscated vittae; the elytral markings consist of seven sharply defined, infuscated lines, extending from the base to near the apex, they are all narrow, but the sutural marking is twice the width of each of the others; the striae themselves are much as on L. distorticornis and howensis. Laemophlaeus norfolcensis, n. sp. 8. Pale castaneous and somewhat shining. Head large, somewhat concave in front, median line well defined ; with small, dense punctures, and very finely shagreened. Antennae rather long, first joint long, suddenly and strongly dilated from about the middle, second and third sub- globular and subequal, fourth-eighth subequal in length but gradually becoming thinner, ninth-eleventh longer and highly polished. Prothorax at apex almost twice the median length, sides feebly diminishing in width from apex to base, a fine carina towatds and almost parallel with each side; with a shining and impunctate median line; punctures and shagreening as on head. Elytra rather wide, striae well defined and scarcely geminatc in arrangement. Length, 2°5 mm, Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type (unique), I. 7993, Allied to L. diemenensis, but prothorax much wider and antennae very different; as the basal joint of the antennae varies considerably in appcarance with the point of view, two outlines of it (fig. 1, D and E) have been given. The head and prothorax have a somewhat silken appearance, the elytra are slightly darker and more polished, but with the middle somewhat diluted in colour. There is a fringe of very fine selae on the front margin of the prothorax. LUCANIDAE. Ceratogathus minutus, n. sp. é.. Blackish, mesosternum, metasternum and abdomen almost flavous, legs and antennae darker, basal joints of antennae paler than lamellae. Moderately clothed with short dark setae, mixed with white ones, more or less condensed to form feeble spots. 211 Head transverse ; with crowded punctures, a small process on each side partly- concealed by base of antennae. Mandibles rather short. Basal joint of antennae curved, about as long as the five following combined, of these the first is almost globular and the others are small; club composed of three elongate lamellae. Prothorax almost twice as wide as long, sides rounded and minutely serrate, apex, Fig. 2. Ceratognathus minutus Lea. shallowly emarginate, base bisinuate ; punctures much as on head. Elytra parallel-. sided to near apex ; finely striated and with crowded punctures. Legs thin, claw: joints elongate. Length, 4-5 mm. New South Wales: National Park (N. B. Tindale). Type (unique),. I. 16956, The type is the smallest stag-beetle that I have seen from any part of the world; its length is less than that of the elytra of C. niger, and its mandibles are about the length of those of the female of that species, although by its antennae the type is evidently a male. The mandibles are distinctly shorter than the head, the left one has three cusps: an obtuse outer one, an acute one curved to the right,, inwards of which is a smaller acute one; the right mandible has but two cusps, and from some directions appears as a short, broad Y. Each of the middle tibiae. has a small medio-external tooth, becoming still smaller on the hind ones; parts of both front legs are missing. LAMPRIMA ADOLPHINAE Gestro (Neolamprima). Of three males under examination one specimen measures 49 mm., with mandibles 15 mm., and is a typical Neolamprima. It is mostly of a dark greenish-- purple with the head brassy. A second specimen meastires 36 mm., with the Fig. 3. Lamprima adolphinae Gestro, natural size. 212 mandibles 11 mm.; it is also a typical Neolamprima, although the mandibles are somewhat shorter and with less numerous teeth. It is of an uniform coppery colour, except that the prothorax is subopaque, in contrast with the shining head and clytra. The third specimen measures 25 mm., with the mandibles 6 mm., and appears quite a normal Lamprima. It is of a dull bronze colour, with the head polished and partly coppery-purple. All three have the pronotum rather coarsely shagreened, and the elytra more finely so and with vermiculate scratches. The first specimen was from an unknown locality in New Guinea, the others are from Komba (at an elevation of 5,000 feet), from the Rev. L. Wagner, who also sent two females; of these one is entirely coppery-golden on the upper surface, the second has the elytra deep blue, shading off to coppery-green at the suture, its pronotum is deep purple and head coppery. Both specimens are, in fact, very similar to Queensland females of L. mandibularts. SCARABAEIDAE, DIArHONIA GULOSA Jans., var angustiflava, n. var. Two males in the Australian Museum, from Mount Warning (on the northern border of New South Wales), taken in January by Mr. A. Musgrave, evidently represent a variety of D, gulosa. In structure they agree perfectly with normal Victorian males of the species. One specimen has the dark parts almost or quite black, with flavous markings consisting of two spots on the head in front of the eyes, the pronotum with a narrow medioapical fascia, a vitta on each side from apex almost to base, but with a median dark spot; the scutellum with a short, narrow, median spot, each elytron with a narrow vitta from the middle of its base to the apical fifth, where it curves round (like a small hook) to near the suture, a thinner marginal vitta from the base to the basal third, and a narrow apical fascia; on the under parts there is a small spot on each side of the mesosternum and metasternum, the side of each hind coxa and on each side of four basal seg- ments of abdomen, four disconnected spots on the pygidium; the intercoxal process of the mesosternum; and there is also a spot on each hind femur. On the second specimen the pale spots on the head are extended and almost conjoined, the apical and lateral marks on the pronotum are joined together, and there are three small spots triangularly placed between the middle and the base, the scutellum is largely pale, the dark parts of the clytra are paler (dark purplish-brown), the long flavous vitta on each is almost the same, but the latero-basal one is wider, slightly longer, and there is an obscure spot between it and the transverse apical mark; the markings on the under surface and legs are more extended and the pale markings on the pygidium are connected together (approaching the typical form). EUCNEMIDAL. Microrhagus howensis, n. sp. Deep black; legs reddish, the femora partly infuscated, Cloihed with short black pubescence, becoming stramineous about base of prothorax and elytra. Head with crowded punctures, and with a feeble median carina. Antennae rather short, second joint short, third not quite as long as fourth and fifth com- bined, eleventh distinctly longer than tenth, Prothorax moderately transverse, parallel-sided except for the rounded front angles, hind angles very acute and acutely carinated, front margin finely carinated, the carina on each side with a short spur directed obliquely backwards, with a short but distinct mediobasal carina ; with dense and small, but sharply defined punctures. [Elytra almost parallel- sided; with dense, subasperate punctures about base and on tips, elsewhere with smaller ones; with vague remnants of striation, but becoming distinct on the tips. Prosternal sulci narrow and deep in front, becoming shallower and wider 213 posteriorly ; propleural parallelograms feebly concave posteriorly, fully thrice as long as wide. Length, 3-75 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M, Lea). Type (unique), I. 5725. A deep black species with prosternal sulci distinctly less parallel-sided than usual in the genus. The antennae, at most, could be regarded as very feebly serrated. Fornax howensis, n. sp. - Castaneous-brown, antennae (basal joint excepted) and legs paler. Densely and uniformly clothed with stramineous pubescence. Head evenly convex, with rather crowded but small punctures; antennary sockets close together and without a connecting carina. Antennae moderately long, second joint very short, third almost as long as three following combined, fourth slightly shorter than fifth, and fifth than sixth, sixth-tenth subequal, eleventh almost as long as ninth and tenth combined. Prothorax large, sides. gently rounded and widest at about basal third; with rather small punctures, becoming crowded on sides. Elytra scarcely twice as long as head and prothorax combined, with striation well defined about suture, but rather feeble elsewhere; fairly dense subasperate punctures about base, smaller and sparser elsewhere. Hind coxae terminating almost as a point on each side, greatest length equal to that of two basal segments of abdomen combined ; basal joint of hind tarsi about equal to the rest combined. Length, 4°5-6-0 mm, Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea), Type, IL. 5730. A comparatively robust species, with prothorax nowhere parallel-sided. One specimen was obtained from a tree-fern, another from a Kentia, and four from the summit of Mount Gower. Fornax norfolcensis, n. sp. Dark castaneous-brown, antennae and legs paler. Densely and uniformly clothed with short, stramineous pubescence. Head evenly convex, with small dense punctures; without a carina betwecn antennary sockets. Antennae moderately long, second joint about half the length of third, third slightly longer than fourth and fifth combined, fourth and fifth subequal and slightly shorter than the following ones, eleventh almost as long as ninth and tenth combined. Prothorax moderately robust, sides gently rounded and widest near base, with a feeble median line; punctures small but rather dense and well defined, becoming crowded on sides, Elytra with crowded punctures. about base, becoming sparser elsewhere; striation well defined about suture and at base and apex, but rather feeble elsewhere. Hind coxae strongly and evenly diminishing in width to sides, greatest length considerably more than that of second abdominal segment ; basal joint of hind tarsi as long as the rest combined. Length, 4°5-6°0 mm. Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5731. Close to the preceding species, but consistently narrower, darker, and with somewhat shorter antennae. On the smaller specimens the striation has a tendency to disappear about the middle. Seven specimens were obtained, three of which were sieved from fallen leaves. Fornax talayroides, n. sp. Bright castaneous, legs somewhat paler, Uniformly clothed with stramineous. pubescence. Head strongly convex; with somewhat crowded punctures; without a carina connecting the antennary sockets. Antennac rather long and thin, second joint very short, third almost the length of three following combined, fourth slightly 214 shorter than fifth, and fifth than sixth, sixth-tenth subequal, cleventh distinctly longer. Prothorax with sides feebly rounded in front, thence feebly oblique to base; punctures rather small and partly concealed on disc, becoming crowded on sides. Elytra feebly diminishing in width from shoulders; moderately densely eranulate-punctate about base, punctures smaller, sparser and less asperate else- where: striation distinct about suture, feeble or wanting elsewhere. Hind coxae unusually long, their greatest length fully equal to that of fifth abdominal segment, but rapidly narrowing to a point only on each side; basal joint of hind tarsi slightly longer than the rest combined, claw joint shorter than usual. Length, 4-75 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5737. An unusually narrow species, in general appearance strikingly close to Talayra elongata of the Melandryidae. Two specimens exactly alike were obtained; a larger (6 mm.) specimen appears to belong to the specics, but is darker, with more depressed clothing and somewhat coarser punctures. ELATERIDAE. Glyphochilus basicollis, n. sp. Piceous-brown and livid-flavous, appendages more or less flavous. Moderately densely clothed with stramineous pubescence, shorter on under than on upper surface. ; Head gently convex, evenly rounded in front; with dense, subreticulate punctures. Antennae thin, extending almost to abdomen, third joint about twice the length of second, and half the length of fourth, the others gradually decreas- ing in length, but eleventh slightly longer than tenth. Prothorax with sides increasing in width towards and coarctate near apex, hind angles large and unicarinate; with unevenly distributed punctures, Elytra narrow, each rather narrowly rounded at apex; with narrowly impressed striae; rather densely granulate-punctate about base, the punctures becoming sparser and less rough posteriorly. Tarsi thin, lobe of fourth joint rather thin and curved. Length, 7°5-8:°0 mm. Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5673. The prothorax is wider at the base than is usual in the genus, but the prosternal sutures opening out and deeper in front are indicative that the species should be referred to Glyphochilus, rather than to Monocrepidius, It is a curiously mottled species; the head is almost black, with the muzzle pale; the pronotum 1s mostly pale, but with two large blackish blotches, sometimes conjoined; the elytra vary from almost entirely pale to almost entirely infuscated ; the under surface is mostly dark, but with the sides of the prosternum pale, the eight apical joints of antennae have more or less of their basal portions infuscated. ‘Lhe punctures on the prothorax are fairly dense and well defined in the middle (except near base) and become denser towards the front sides, where they are much as on the head; the carina divides the hind angles into two very unequal portions, a small subrugose inner one, and a much wider and almost impunctate outer one. The hind coxae at their longest part are quile as long as the part of the metasternum immediately behind them. Ten specimens were obtained, including one from moss, Glyphochilus kentiae, n. sp. Castaneous, appendages castaneo-flavous. With rather dense, stramineous pubescence. Head with crowded punctures of moderate size, Antennac thin, extending almost to abdomen, third joint almost twice the length of second, and about half the length of fourth. Prothorax with sides obliquely increasing in width to base, moderately strongly to about basal third, less strongly to base; with punctures on front sides much as on head, somewhat smaller about middle, and still smaller and sparser about base; hind angles acute, moderately long and unicarinate. 215 Elytra gradually decreasing in width from shoulders to apex; narrowly striate; interstices conspicuously granulate-punctate about base, the punctures becoming smaller, sparser, and less asperate posteriorly. Tarsi narrow, lobe of fourth joint thin. Length, 8-9 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5672. The carina of the hind angles of the prothorax is so placed that the outer portion of the angle is considerably larger than the inner. The base of the elytra and the scutellum have a more reddish tone than elsewhere, the base of the head is usually infuscated; the mesosternum and metasternum are somewhat darker than the rest of the under surface. Six specimens were obtained from Kentia palms. Glyphochilus inconspicuus, n. sp. Piceous, some parts castaneous; appendages of a more or less dingy flavous. Rather densely clothed with stramineous pubescence. Length, 6-8 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). ‘ype, I. 5675. Structurally close to the preceding species, but considerably smaller and darker, head with more crowded punctures, antennae somewhat stouter, with third joint not twice the length of second, and less than half the length of fourth, prothorax with a vague median line, carina of hind angles dividing these into more equal parts, and punctures more crowded, elytra more conspicuously granulate and with distinct punctures in the striae towards base. The parts more conspicuously castaneous than piceous are the base and hind angles of prothorax, scutellum, apical half of suture, and sometimes the margins of elytra, and most of the under surface. Four specimens were obtained, A small (6 mm.) specimen probably belongs to this species, but is reddish-castaneous, the flavous legs and infuscate base of head excepted. Glyphochilus waterhousei, n. sp. Reddish-castaneous, legs paler, antennae (two basal joints excepted) infus- cated. Rather densely clothed with stramineous pubescence. Head with crowded, subreticulate punctures. Antennae thin, third joint about once and one half the length of second and about half the length of fourth. Prothorax with sides somewhat rounded in front, thence feebly increasing in width to base, median line vaguely defined, hind angles very acute and uni- carinate; punctures quite as crowded on the front sides as on head, but rather less crowded elsewhere. LElytra parallel-sided from shoulders to near apex; narrowly striate; with subasperate, searcely granulate, punctures about base, becoming smaller and sparser posteriorly. Tarsal lobes comparatively wide. Length, 9°5 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5674. The above description is of the smaller of two specimens ; the larger (11 mm.) one has the antennae uniformly coloured and very little darker than the legs, two vague infuscate longitudinal blotches on the pronotum, and the outer portion of the basal angles somewhat smaller than the inner (on the type they are about the same size). The elytra of both are much less conspicuously granulate-punctate than on either of the preceding species, although there are a few granules about the base. The type was from the summit of Mount Gower, the larger specimen from much lower down. The species is named in honour of the late Mr. J. B. Waterhouse of the island. Ochosternus‘!) howensis, n. sp. Black with a feeble bronzy gloss, appendages obscurely reddish. Moderately clothed all over with light-brownish pubescence. (1) Cand., Mon, Elat., iv., p. 445; Sharp, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist, May, 1877, p. 25; Broun, Man. N.Z. Col. p. 298. 216 Head evenly rounded in front, with the margin shining but not carinated : with dense and rather coarse punctures. Antennae extending almost to abdomen, second joint small, third not much longer, fourth-tenth strongly serrate internally, of almost equal lengths, but slightly diminishing in width, eleventh slightly longer than tenth. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, sides very feebly sinuous, hind angles acute and passing scutellum, acutely obliquely unicarinate; median line rather wide and distinct posteriorly, feeble elsewhere; punctures in front slightly smaller but almost as dense as on head, becoming smaller posteriorly. Elytra rather narrow, feebly and regularly decreasing in width from near base, with the apices somewhat thickened and conjointly rounded; narrowly striate, the sutural stria almost impunctate, the others with more or less distinct and behind the shoulders strong punctures; interstices about base rather densely granulate- punctate, the punctures becoming smaller, sparser and simple posteriorly. Prosternum with moderately dense, but unevenly distributed punctures, intercoxal process acute, narrow, and deflected downwards. ‘Tarsi long and thin, fourth joint simple, claws thin but subdentate near base. Length, 15-18 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, L. 5676. Differs from QO. zealandius in being smaller, with stronger punctures, inter- coxal process of prosternum more suddenly turned downwards, and with four feeble carinae between the coxac. Twelve specimens were obtained on the lower parts of the island, Ochosternus norfolcensis, n. sp. Black with a slight bronzy gloss, appendages dull red. Moderately clothed with short, brownish pubescence. Head with rather small and not very crowded punctures. Length, 13-14 mm. Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5677. Structurally and in general appearance close to the preceding species, but somewhat smaller, with sparser clothing, prothorax with median line more defined, carina on posterior angle longer, and punctures everywhere somewhat smaller, more noticeably on head than elsewhere. On that species the punctures on the head are so close together that an additional one of the same size could scarcely be placed anywhere, without overlapping several others; on the present species many such punctures could be inserted without overlapping the adjacent ones. Two specimens were obtained. TENEBRIONIDAE, Mesotretis pubipennis, n. sp. Of a dingy reddish-brown, under surface and parts of upper surface blackish. Elytra rather densely clothed with semi-erect and rather short, greyish pubescence, somewhat shorter and paler on under surface, still shorter on head and prothorax. Head wide; with dense and small but fairly sharp punctures; clypeal suture in the form of a shallow, curved impression, slightly decpened close to each antennary ridge. Antennae moderately long, third joint distinctly longer than second or fourth, three apical joints enlarged, somewhat darker than the others, and forming a conspicuous but loosely compacted club. Prothorax strongly trans- verse, sides gently rounded and widest near apex, apex very gently incurved to middle, lateral margins comparatively wide and slightly dilated to base, each hind angle with a slight outer projection, basal margins very narrow; ptincturcs small and rather dense. Elytra distinctly wider than base of prothorax, shoulders gently rounded, parallel-sided to near apex, with a shallow longitudinal depression on each side of base near the shoulder; punctures dense, sharply defined, and of 217 moderate size. Under surface with dense and sharply defined punctures, but somewhat uneven in sizes. Length, 4°2-4°5 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 6621. Considerably wider than M. ferruginea or fumata, and with the lateral margins of the prothorax decidedly wider, elytra conspicuously clothed, etc. Probably it would have been referred to a new genus, but for its alliance with fumata,; the penultimate joint of the tarsi is very slightly bilobed, but still it is bilobed, and the clothing of the under surface of the tarsi is as on that species. The head gradually changes from blackish at the base, to the general dingy brown in front; the scutellum, the prothoracic and clytral margins, and a rather wide sutural space are more or less blackish. The elytral punctures are much larger than the prothoracic ones. Six specimens were obtained on tree-ferns on Mounts Gower and Ledgbird. Mesotretis fumata, n. sp. Blackish or smoky-brown, in places more or less conspicuously testaceous, appendages testaceous or castaneous, femora sometimes infuscated. Head with dense and sharply defined but rather small punctures, with a feeble depression close to each antennary ridge. Antennae almost as long as head and prothorax combined, third joint almost as long as fourth and fifth combined, ninth and tenth transverse, their combined length slightly greater than eleventh, and, with it, forming a loosely compacted club. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides gently rounded and slightly wider at apex than at base, lateral and basal margins very narrow; punctures slightly larger and sparser than on head. Elytra distinctly wider than prothorax at basc, sides feebly dilated to beyond the middle ; punctures somewhat sparser and distinctly larger than on prothorax, Length, 3°5-4-2 mm, Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, 1. 6620. In general outlines very close to M. ferruginea, except that the prothorax is slightly longer, but very differently coloured, antennary swellings more pro- nounced, the antennae longer, with the third joint distinctly longer, and the club more loosely compacted; the elytral epipleurae are narrower and the punctures of the upper surface denser and more sharply defined; the clothing of the tarsi is much the same, but the bilobing of the penultimate joint of the four hind ones is less pronounced, although even on ferruginca those of the four hind ones are less pronounced than on the front ones, The head, except for the mouth parts, is uniformly black or blackish, the prothorax is usually blackish, but diluted with red at the apex and along a median linc; on some specimens the paler markings are very conspicuous, but on others they are scarcely traceable; the elytra are mostly of a dingy testaceous, with the suture and epipleurae narrowly black, and a large but indefinite infuscated patch on cach elytron, the patches sometimes but little darker than the ground colour; the sterna are usually blackish, and the abdomen in parts, more especially at the apex, diluted with red. One small specimen has the elytra uniformly almost flavous, except that the suture and margins are narrowly infuscated. From some directions the sides of the elytra appear to have extremely short and sparse pubescence, but it is invisible from most directions. From some directions the prothoracic margins appear to be feebly serrated, but from others they appear to be even. Seventeen specimens were obtaind. Mesotretis glabra, n. sp. Black, shining; elytra and abdomen in places obscurely diluted with red, appendages castaneous. Glabrous. Head moderately wide, evenly convex between eyes, these small; with dense and sharply defined punctures of moderate size in front, becoming very small towards base; antennary ridges rather long and slightly elevated; clypeal suture 218 feeble. Antennae rather short, second joint slightly longer than third, fourth- eighth smaller, ninth-eleventh slightiy larger than the preceding ones, and form- ing a loosely compacted club. Prothorax rather strongly transverse, base and apex equal, sides gently and evenly rounded, front angles feebly produced, lateral! and basal margins narrow; with dense and sharply defined, but not very large punctures. Elytra parallel-sided, outlines almost continuous with those of pro- thorax; punctures slightly larger than on prothorax, but rather less sharply defined. Length, 4°25 mm. Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 6623. The dense clothing of the tarsi, with the slight lobing of the penultimate joint and considerably narrower elytral epipleurae, are indicative that the species should. be referred to Mesotretis, rather than to Araucaricala, although at first glance it appears to be an unusually narrow specimen of A. ebenina, The eyes are some- what narrower than in all the other known species of Mesotretis, he elytra are very faintly shagreened. A single specimen was taken from the dead frond of a tree-fern. Araucaricola, n. gen, Head wide; clypeus narrow, at sides elevated into antennary ridges; labrum short. Eyes small, lateral, coarsely faceted. Antennae rather short, with a three-jointed, loosely compacted club. Apical joint of maxillary palpi large and securiform. Prothorax wide, with conspicuous margins. Scutellum very short and wide, Elytra parallel-sided, the width of prothorax, margins narrow and continuous to apex; cpipleurae wide at base, and gradually narrowed to apex, concave from base to end of metasternum, convex beyond same. Metasternum rather long, episterna parallel-sided and not very narrow. Abdomen with three basal segments large, the others small. Jegs rather short, front coxae slightly separated, almost basal, cavities closed, middle coxae moderately, the hind ones more widely separated; femora stout, tibiae terminated by two small spines, and sexually variable; tarsi short, claw joint about as long as the rest combined, penultimate joint small and simple. Wings ample. In many respects this genus is close to Mesotretis, near which it should be placed, but the eyes are smaller, with a greater proportion on the under surface, elytral epipleurae wider, tarsi more sparsely clothed on the under surface, with the penultimate joint slightly narrower than the preceding one, and not bilobed, and the claw joint considerably longer in proportion. At first glance the penulti- mate joint appears to be slightly produced under the base of the following one, but this appearance is really due to a few projecting hairs or setae. The sexes may be readily distinguished by the front and hind tibiae. Numerous specimens were taken tinder rotting bark of the Norfolk Island pine, Araucaria excelsa; in general appearance they are much like Asphalus ebeninus on a greatly reduced scale. Araucaricola ebenina, n. sp. é. Black, shining; palpi, legs, and parts of antennae castaricous. Head evenly convex between eyes, with dense and small but sharply defined punctures ; an oblique impression from each side of the clypeal suture to behind the eye. Antennae extending to base of prothorax, first joint moderately large, second somewhat shorter than third, and slightly longer than fourth, ninth and tenth transverse, eleventh slightly wider and longer than tenth. Prothorax about twice as wide as long, sides almost parallel but gently rounded in front, front angles slightly produced to clasp the head, margins rather narrow in front, but dilated to base; punctures much as on head. Elytra with outlines almost con- tinuous with those of prothorax; punctures dense, sharply defined, and distinctly larger than on prothorax, but becoming quite as small posteriorly. Front tibiae moderately wide and parallel-sided, but near base suddenly narrowed and curved; 219 hind tibiae longer than the others (about as long as the third abdominal segment is wide), conspicuously bisinuate and somewhat thickened at apex. Length, 4:0-4°5 mm. 9. Differs in having somewhat thinner antennae, front tibiae decidedly thinner and not suddenly narrowed near base, and the hind ones much shorter and almost straight. Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 6622. The basal joint of the antennae is black-and shining, the following joints are either entirely castaneous, or change from infuscate to castaneous, but the infusca- tion seldom extends beyond the fourth joint. There is some extremely fine pubescence on the clytra and under surface, but it is invisible from most direc- tions. Several specimens are more of a piceous-brown than black, but probably from immaturity. Trachyscelis howensis, n. sp. Colour variable. Under surface, sides and legs with straggling, yellowish or stramineous hairs. Head scarcely visibly punctate, with a rather deep groove from eye to eye. Antennae short, five apical joints forming a robust club. Prothorax polished and impunctate, sides and base very narrowly margined. Elytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle; cach with a distinct subsutural punctate stria from base to apex, a second conspicuous row of punctures, becoming striate posteriorly, then with six rows of small punctures, becoming very feeble towards the side, the side with a marginal slightly punctate stria; interstices sparsely and minutely punctate. Legs short and stout, front tibiae moderately dilated from base but suddenly inflated at apex, the others rather strongly dilated from base to near apex, and with short, dense, stout setae. Length, 3-0-3-5 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 6589. In general appearance very close to 7. ciliaris, but with the ciliation of the sides much less pronounced, and the median line of the pronotum altogether wanting; from 7. laevis it differs in being larger and more robust, and in the more conspicuous elytral punctures; T. miger is a considerably wider species, with stronger striation. Numerous specimens were obtained at roots of beach- growing plants, under seaweed, and washed up wood, etc. Two colour forms appear to be equally abundant; the first, including the type, black or blackish, with the muzzle and sides of prothorax and of elytra more or less distinctly. diluted with red, and all the appendages more or less castaneous; the second form is entirely castaneous ; but a few specimens are intermediate. ‘he straggling hairs arc fairly numerous on the under surface and legs, but rather sparse on the sides of the prothorax and elytra, scarcely one-fourth as dense as on ciliaris. Brachycilibe araucariae, n. sp. Black or blackish, antennac, palpi and tarsi castaneous, parts of under surface sometimes diluted with red. Under surface almost glabrous, the upper quite so. Ilead wide, gently convex, obliquely flattened in front, with a small impression marking each side of the clypeal suture; with moderately dense and sharply defined but rather small punctures. Antennae short, tenth and eleventh joints forming a club, tenth strongly transverse, much wider than ninth, and slightly wider than eleventh, the latier almost circular, Prothorax not twice as wide as long, evenly convex from margins, which are moderately wide throughout, sides gentty rounded and wider at base, which is truneate, than at apex, which is feebly incurved to middle; punctures slightly larger than on head. Elytra the width of prothorax, parallel-sided [rom base to the widely rounded apex; regularly punctate-striate, the striae sharp and well defined, but the punctures rather small and close together, interstices with minute punctures ; epipleurae rather wide from 220 base to near apex, where they are suddenly narrowed by the apical ventral seg- ment, wrinkled and rather finely punctate. Legs short; front tibiae slightly serrated externally and dilated to apex. Length, 3-7-4-0 mm. Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, L. 6588. Fairly numerous in and under rotting bark of the Norfolk Island pine. In general appearance fairly close to B. antennata, but slightly narrower cephalic excavation wanting, prothorax narrower at apex and without an apical depres- sion (on antennata, although not nrentioned in the original description, there is invariably such a depression), clytral striation more pronounced, and legs not quite so stout. Specimens entirely black on the upper surface usually have parts of the under surface distinctly diluted with red, more especially parts of the sterna and the elytral epipleurae; many specimens, however, have the upper surface of a livid-testaceous, with the under surface and legs paler, but variegated with dark brown. MELANDRYIDAE., Talayra brevipilis, n. sp. Black, appendages castaneous-brown. Densely clothed with short, brownish pubescence. Head with very dense, minute punctures. Eyes large, subreniform. Antennae long and thin, second joint about one-third the length of third, the latter slightly shorter than first, and slightly longer than fourth. Prothorax moderately trans- verse, sides strongly rounded, base slightly bisinuate, and considerably wider than apex, hind angles obtuse; punctures not quite as dense as on head but of similar size; marginal carina on each side acute about base, but vanishing before the middle. Elytra very feebly diminishing in width posteriorly, slightly but distinctly striated; with very dense and small punctures, somewhat transversely or obliquely arranged towards base. Tibiae transversely serrated on upper sur- face, serrations on front pair less distinct than on the others, and partly obscured by a longitudinal ridge; spurs to hind pair unequal, the shorter about half the length of the following joint. Length, 11-13 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea}. Type, I. 6098. A long thin species, longer than any other Australian member of the family, except Ctenoplectron humerale. From T. elongata it differs in its much larger size, darker colour (an occasional specimen of elongata, however, is almost as dark), finer punctures, and more conspicuous elytral striation. Although the derm is black, it is everywhere so closely covered by pubescence that to the naked eye it appears to be of a somewhat rusty-brown, but from other directions it appears to have a silken gloss; from some directions the abdominal segments appear to be tipped with golden-red. The punctures are normally somewhat obscured by the clothing. Three specimens were obtained. TALAYRA ELONGATA, Macl. Innumerable specimens of this species were seen at night running over the bark of newly-felled trees on Lord Howe Island. In the light of the lamp they had the appearance of small and extremely active ants; larvae and pupae were also seen in the bark of old banyan logs. ‘The length of the island specimens varies [rom 3 to 6 mm., the average being about 4 mm. : CANTHARIDAE. Goetymes helenae, n. sp. 8. Black, elytra, sides of prothorax, antennae (most of rami excepted), palpi, and legs of a more or less dingy light-brown, or testaceous. Densely clothed with very short, dark pubescence. 22] Head lobed at base, with a slight but distinct median line; with crowded punctures, well defined about base, but with a subgranulate appearance elsewhere. Eyes deeply semi-circularly notched, median portion very thin, inner lobe smaller than outer, the notched space gently convex and with crowded punctures. Antennae inserted slightly in front of eyes, first joint curved and moderately stout, the nine following ones very short, but the fourth to tenth each with a very long ramus, eleventh joint almost as long as the ramus of tenth. Prothorax at base wide and very slightly sinuate, sides strongly diminishing in width to apex, which is hardly more than one-third the width of base of head, with a moderately well-defined median line, a rather shallow longitudinal impression on each side; with crowded and rather small punctures. Scutellum with a median ridge, punctures as on pronotum, Elytra slightly wider than base of prothorax, sides from near base strongly narrowed to about middle, and then subparallel to near apex ; each with three feeble longitudinal elevations, of which the one nearest the suture is longer and more distinct than the others; with dense and minute punctures. Abdomen extending well beyond elytra. Legs long and thin. Length, 7-75 mm. Lord Howe Island (Mrs. A. M. Lea). Type, I. 6142. Much smaller and otherwise different from the previously described species of the genus. The clothing of the head from directly above is rather indistinct, but when viewed from the sides is seen to be dense and erect, although short. The prothorax is so narrow in front, and wide at the base, that at first glance it appears to be almost triangular. A single specimen was taken on the summit of Mount Gower by my wife, after whom 1 have named it. It is one of the most curious species occurring on the island. CURCULIONIDAE. Eutinophaea bicristata, n. sp. 8. Dark reddish-brown, legs and antennae paler. Densely clothed with fawn-coloured scales mixed with darker and paler ones, on the under surface almost white. In addition with sloping setae, mostly dark, but varying to whitish. Head with dense, concealed punctures. Eyes almost round. Rostrum with a feeble median line, muzzle glabrous; scrobes with upper portion rather short and wide, lower portion narrow and oblique. Scape somewhat curved, apex stout, two basal joints of funicle rather long, the first longer and stouter than second. Pro- thorax strongly convex, about as long as the greatest width, sides strongly and evenly rounded, punctures normally concealed. Elytra not much wider than widest part of prothorax, but considerably wider than its base, almost parallel-sided to beyond the middle ; with rows of large, partly concealed punctures, odd interstices slightly elevated above the even ones, but the third abruptly and strongly elevated into a setose crest from slightly beyond the basal third to near the summit of the apical slope, the beginning of the crest usually black. Abdomen with first segment slightly concave in middle, Front tibiae rather strongly curved. Length 2°7-3'2 mm. @. Differs in having the prothorax slightly longer, its sides less inflated, and two basal segments of abdomen rather strongly convex. Queensland: Montville, in August (W. A, T, Summerville); Mount Tam- bourine, in January (A. M. Lea). Very distinct from all other known species of the genus by the conspicuous. crests on the elytra of the male, on the female the crests are only slightly indicated. There are usually two curved dark spots at the base of the prothorax and several small ones on the elytra, the paler spots are mostly confined to the sides of the prothorax and the apical slope of the elytra, but on several specimens the clothing of the upper surface is almost uniformly brown. 222 Mr. R. Veitch, Chief Entomologist of the Queensland Department of Agri- culture, reports that this species is destructive to citrus foliage ; the “Dicky Rice” Eutinophaea spinipes Blackb. (Prosayleus phytolymus Olliff), of orchardists near Sydney is also troublesome to citrus fruits. CERAMBYCIDAE. OREREA MUNDULA Pasc. A very narrow longicorn from Cairns (Queensland) and another from the Madang district (New Guinea) appear to belong to this species, originally described from Waigiou and Salwatty. They are of a rather dingy flavous-red, with the elytra, except for the basal sixth, four apical segments of abdomen (a small part of the base of each excepted) and the antennae black or blackish. The figure ® of O. gracillima will give a good general idea of the species, except that the figure has less of the base of elytra pale, and the antennae longer. Eczemotes‘*) conrerta Pasc.©) Specimens of this specics have been taken at the Coen River (Queensland ) by Messrs. W. D. Dodd and EH. Hacker. It was originally described from Aru, and as a Penthea, but was subsequently made the type of the genus Eczemotes. Somatidia olliffi, n. sp. Pale castaneo-flavous. Head, under surface and appendages, with whitish pubescence, and some scattered hairs; prothorax sparsely pubescent and with some long hairs, of which those in front are directed backwards; elytra without pubescence, but with numerous long hairs subseriately arranged. Head with dense fine punctures, and some of larger size between eyes. Antennae distinctly passing elytra, fourth joint slightly longer than third. Pro- thorax moderately transverse, sides strongly and evenly rounded; with fairly dense and moderately large punctures, becoming smaller and sparser about base. Elytra ovate, widest at about basal third; with larger punctures than on prothorax, but becoming much sparser and smaller posteriorly. Femora stout, front tibiae short and feebly notched on lower surface, middle tibiae feebly notched on upper surface; hind tibiae slightly longer than the others, but not notched. Length, 3-4 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, 1. 5460. A small pale species, of which seven specimens were beaten from a recently felled Pandanus tree. The clothing of the prothorax is to a certain cxtent as on S. capillosa, but the elytra are entirely without pubescence, although with numerous long hairs; these appear to be in five rows on each clytron, but the sutural and lateral rows are rather feeble. The tarsi, especially the front pair, are very wide on both sexes. Somatidia tricolor, n. sp. Head, prothorax and under surface dark-reddish-castaneous, elytra bronzy, with a slight greenish gloss; appendages flavous; parts of antennae slightly infuscated. Clothed with fine, ashen pubescence, and with fairly long hairs, more noliceable on prothorax and elytra than elsewhere. Head with dense and fine punctures. Antennac distinctly passing elytra, fourth joint longer than third. Prothorax distinctly transverse; with dense but not very large punctures, becoming smaller about base. Llytra ovate, widest at (2) Pascoe, in Longicornia Malayana, in Trans, Ent. Soc. Lond., iti. (Ser. 3), 1867, p 432. (3) Lic. pl. xvi. fig. 9. () Lie. p. 79, (5) Lie, p. 80; and v. (Ser. 2), p. 40. 223 about basal third, with dense and large punctures, in places subconfluent, but becoming much smaller posteriorly. Legs much as on preceding species. Length, 3 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5461. The colours are much as on S. aranea, but the elytra are clothed both with pubescence and long hairs, the latter are more or less upright and in five or six rows on each elytron. There are fairly numerous hairs on the front of the pro- thorax, nearly all directed backwards, but the species is much smaller and other- wise very different from S. capillosa. Two specimens, apparently males, were obtained, one by sieving fallen leaves. Somatidia villosa, n. sp. Head, prothorax and under surface dark-reddish-castaneous, elytra bronzy, appendages flavous but with third to cleventh joints of antennae and middle 6f femora and of tibiae somewhat infuscated. Clothed with fine ashen pubescence, sparser on prothorax than elsewhere; with numerous very long yellowish hairs. Head with dense small punctures, interspersed with some larger ones. Antennae distinctly passing elytra, third joint scarcely longer than fifth and con- spicuously shorter than fourth. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides strongly and evenly rounded; with crowded but not very large punctures. Elytra ovate, at basal fourth almost twice the width of extreme base; with crowded punctures slightly larger than on prothorax, but almost vanishing posteriorly. MFemora very stout ; front tibiae conspicuously notched on lower surface. Length, 3-5-5:0 mm, Lord Howe Island (A, M. Lea). Type, I. 5459, Readily distinguished from the other island species by the very long hairs, many of those on the elytra are quite as long as the prothorax is wide, many also are curved forwards or sideways; on the prothorax, antennae and legs also, the hairs are of quite unusual length. On S. capillosa, a considerably larger species, the long hairs on the elytra are much shorter and more rigid; the longer hairs on its antennae are fairly numerous, but much shorter than their supporting joints, and nearly all project downwards ; on the present species the long hairs are often quite as long as their supporting joints, and on about eight of the joints are fringe-like near the tips; on the pronotum, also, the majority of the long hairs in front do not conspicuously project backwards as on most species of the genus. Five specimens were obtained, three by sieving fallen leaves, The genus Somatidia is abundantly represented in New Zealand, but as yet species are unknown from the mainland of Australia; those from Lord Howe Island may be tabulated as follows -— A. Prothorax longer than wide, size 10 mm.(6) _ S- n Se -» pulchella AA. Prothorax transverse, size much less than 10 mm. B. Elytra glabrous (7) | i, si a it, a4 he at .. aranea BB. Elytra not glabrous. C. Elytra with long hairs but without pubescence nt bn .. -. olliff CC. Elytra with long hairs and pubescence, D. Long hairs on antennac frequently as long as their supporting joints .. villosa D.D. Long hairs on antennae always much shorter, E, Legs uniformly pale ., cs 7 3.3 Be et -» drtcolor EE. Legs not uniformly pale .. 3: de ae . se -» capillosa Porithea parenthetica, n. Sp. Rusty-brown, elytra (a subtriangular basal space and an irregular post- median blotch excepted), basal half of femora, tibiae (tips excepted), parts of tarst and antennae (tips excepted) of a more or less dingy flavous. Clothed with (6) From description. (7) There are usually, but not always, from one to three hairs on the base of each elytron., 224 very short, pale pubescence, denser and more sericeous in appearance on the prothorax and under surface than elsewhere; a few long hairs scattered about, but becoming numerous on antennae. Head with small, dense, concealed punctures 5 clypeal suture subfoveate on each side, median line well-defined except posteriorly. Antennae slightly passing Fig. 4. Rosenbergia megalocephala v. d. Poll, natural size. A, from Queensland; B, from Komba. elytra in female, considerably in male, spine at tip of third joint very distinct ; on the fourth and fifth much shorter. Prothorax distinctly longer than wide, sides rounded and widest slightly in front of middle; with three discal elevations, a mediati one not continuous to base or apex, and two parentheses-like ones; 225 punctures dense but rather small. Elytra not much wider than greatest width of prothorax, parallel-sided to near apex, where each is separately rounded; about base with dense and rather coarse punctures, gradually becoming sparser and smaller, till at the apex they are very small and sparse; with two vaguely elevated lines on cach elytron. Femora clavate. Length, 12-17 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 5452. Structurally close to P. plagiata, but with very different markings. The darker parts of the elytra are somewhat variable, the subtriangular basal space is some- what dilated about the shoulders, and on five of the specimens is connected along the suture with the postmedian blotch, this is widest at the suture, and rapidly narrows to the middle of each elytron, where it sometimes terminates, but on some Specimens it is irregularly angularly connected with the sides: the sides at the base are usually infuscated. The élevations on the prothorax are roughly like (I), the outer ones, however, are somewhat swollen at their ends, so as to appear like obtuse tubercles, Owing to the clothing the prothoracic punctures are not very sharply defined; on the elytra, in addition to the ordinary ones, there are some slightly larger ones in feeble series, a row close to the suture on each side is readily seen, but not the others; the linear elytral elevations are fairly distinct on some specimens (although not sharply defined), but scarcely traceable on others. The male is smaller than the female, with the prothorax somewhat longer, antennae and legs longer, and front tibiae rather more noticeably (although not strongly) curved, and somewhat wider at the apex. Twelve specimens were taken on trunks of newly felled trees at night. ROSENBERGIA MEGALOCEPITALA y. d. Poll, var. A specimen from New Guinea (Komiba, Rev. 1. Wagner), appears to repre- sent a variety of this species. It is longer (70 mm.) than any specimen I have seen from Australia, and the shining granules on the elytra are larger, more numerous and more evenly distributed, although more numerous about the shoulders than elsewhere. Tt has some ochreous patches of pubescence on the head and prothorax, and at the base of elytra. In the accompanying photograph (by Mr. B. Cotton) it is shown beside a specimen of normal size from Queensland. CHRYSOMELIDAE, Chrysomela multimaculata, n. sp. Pale flavous, with numerous black spots, Head with crowded punctures of moderate size ; clypéal suture gently arched, Antennae long and thin. Prothorax about thrice as wide as the median length, front angles produced, hind ones obtuse; punctures about as large as on head but less crowded. Elytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle; with rows of rather large punctures, becoming smaller posteriorly, the interstices with numerous small punctures; epipleurae narrow, not at all concave. Legs moderatcly long, claws simple. Length, 7 mm, South Australia: Barton (A. M, Lea), Type, I. 17111. The intercoxal process of the prosterntim is narrow and very feebly bilobed at the base, but other characters agree with those of Chrysomela. Its markings are very different from those of any other species of the subfamily before me. The black markings on the type are:—Four transverse spots on the head (two between eyes and two at base) ; four across middle of prothorax, three series of spots and vittae on elytra, a spot on each metasternal episternum,. knees, tips of tibiae, tarsi, antennae (except parts of three hasal joints), apical joint of palpi, and the jaws. Of the series on each elytron the first consists of a spot touching the suture, and narrowly connected at the base with a humeral vitta, which diverges 226 posteriorly to form a reversed Y, a free vitta on the fourth, and a longer one on the sixth connected with the base; the second consists of a curved series of three spots at the basal third, of which the curve includes the tips of the Y; the third consists of three spots beyond the middle, and a narrow vitta extending to near the apex ; the apical third of the suture is also narrowly black. A second specimen has markings much as on the type, except that on the left elytron the inner arm of the Y is free, and that on the right one it is almost frec. Some of the elytral interstices are much wider than others, the outer one is widest of all. Calomela flavida, n. sp. Flavous, five or six apical joints of antennae more or less deeply infuscated. Head with rather numerous and small but sharply defined punctures ; clypeus with somewhat smaller punctures than on the surface behind it, its suture widely triangular. Antennae comparatively long and thin, Prothorax more than thrice as wide as long, sides gently decreasing in width to beyond the middle, and then more strongly to apex; punctures somewhat sparser and stronger than on head but becoming very small in [ront. Elytra with outlines continuous with those of prothorax; with regular rows of rather small punctures, the interstices with minute punctures, Length, 5-6 mm. Queensland ; National Park, in November (FH. Hacker). Type, in Queens- land Museum; cotype, in South Australian Museum. A small, pale species, about the size of C. vacillans, and very similarly coloured, but seriate punctures of elytra regular and much smaller (owing to “waterlogging,” however, they appear much larger than they really are), pro- thorax less transverse and with much smaller punctures. C. tarsalis has con- siderably wider antennae and dark tarsi. C. pallida, and the pale variety of C. crassicornis, have wider antennae and much coarser punctures on sides of prothorax and on head. C. monochromatea, geniculata, flavescens, and cephalotes are more elongate species. C. intemerata has entirely pale antennae, and C. bimaculiceps has bimaculate head, etc, The seriate punctures on the elytra are not one-fifth of the width of the interstices, but owing to “waterlogging” about the base from some directions they appear to be almost as wide, posteriorly, however, their apparent size becomes much smaller, The largest punctures are on the metasternum. On two of the specimens the third joint of the front tarsi is somewhat infuscated. Calomela maculiceps, n. sp. Of a dingy brownish-flavous, a large medio-basal spot on head, six apical joints of antennae, tips of palpi, scutellum, metasternum, knees, tibiae and tarsi black or blackish. Ilead with fairly large punctures mixed with minute ones, clypeal suture rather feeble and irregular, with a feeble median line. Antennae long and thin, no joint transverse. Prothorax more than thrice as wide as long, sides feebly diminishing in width to near apex, with mixed punctures as on head. Elytra very little wider than prothorax; with regular rows of moderately large punctures, becoming smaller and closer together posteriorly ; interstices with minute punc- tures, Punctures on metasternum almost confined to the margins. Legs stout. Length, 6 mm. Queensland: Rockhampton. Type, I. 17105. A rather narrow species, distinct from all the other pale species by the single spot on its head and the black scutellum. C. bimaculiceps, to which it is structurally close, has the head bimaculate and legs partly blue. The prothorax itself is actually immaculate, but, owing to its transparency, appears to have a continuation of the spot on the head. 227 Calomela picticornis, n. sp. 8. Bright metallic green, with a coppery gloss, under surface and base of femora reddish, four basal joints of antennae reddish, the four following ones black, the three apical ones white, but lip of eleventh infuscated. Head with a few distinct punctures in front, clypeal suture deep, a short median line joining its middle. Antennae short and dilated to near apex, with several joints transverse. Prothorax about thrice as wide as long; with rather than in middle, but nowhere crowded. Elytra scarcely wider than prothorax at base; with regular rows of rather small but sharp punctures, the interstices with searcely visible punctures. Apical segment of abdomen impressed in middle. Claws bifid. Length, 4-5-5-0 mm. @. Differs in having six apical joints of antennae black, apical segment of abdomen evenly convex, and basal joint of tarsi smaller. Queensland: National Park, in October and November (H. Hacker). Types, in Queensland Museum; cotypes, in South Australian Museum. A small, compact, metallic green specics with distinctive antennae in mile. The anterior end of the intercoxal process of the prosternum slopes downwards, so the species is evidently not a small Augomela, as it appears at first, but may be referred to Calomela and to the vicinity of C. ruficeps and putchella, although it is somewhat wider in proportion than those species. Of two females one agrees perfectly in colour (except for the antennae) with the type, the second has each shoulder and most of the Pronotum more coppery. A second male has the elytra greenish-purple, but is possibly immature. CALOMELA GENICULATA Baly, var. A specimen from Queensland differs from the typical form of this species in having the femora, except the base, tibiae and tarsi black. CALOMELA MACULICOLLIS Boi., var. A specimen, from the Upper Williams River, appears to connect C. gloriosa with the typical form of C. maculicollis; it has the brilliant blue elytra with black suture and sides of the former, the prothorax has a medioapical biue vitta, and a small spot on each side, and the head is entirely pale. CALOMELA APICALIs Blackb. In his description of the elytra of this species Blackburn wrote, “the punc- tures scarcely running in rows except near the apex.” This is not correct. On the type and a cotype they are in quite distinct, although irregular rows. Three Stethomela mirogastra, n. sp. 8. Deep metallic green with purple markings, under surface black, labrum antennae, palpi and legs, femora excepted, flavous. Head with sparse punctures, but becoming dense and moderately large on and about clypeus; clypeal suture deep on sides, foveate in middle. Prothorax 228 about four times as wide as the median length, front angles produced; with minute punctures and numerous fairly large scattered ones, becoming larger on sides, and crowded in a subbasal depression near each side. Elytra not much wider than prothorax, with regular rows of fairly large punctures, becoming larger in a posthumeral impression on each side, below which the side is dilated ; interstices with minute punctures. Abdomen with an equilaterally triangular hairy flap, extending from near apex of the basal segment almost to apex of the second, apical segment with a large depression, bounded posteriorly by a pubescent ridge. Legs stout, each claw with a large basal appendix. Length, 7 mm. 9. Differs in having the basal segment of abdomen simple, and the apical one with a median line not bounded by a hairy ridge. . Queensland: Nanango district in November (H. Hacker). Types, im Queensland Museum. Very distinct by the abdomen of the male. At first glance the species apparently belongs to Augomela, but the antennae are decidedly longer and thinner than in that genus. Baly considered Stcthomela and Augomela as sub- genera of Australica (= Calomela ); they are certainly closely allied, and, except for the antennae, I would certainly have referred this species to dugomela. Both antennae of the male are broken off short, but on the female they are long, thin, and somewhat dilated to apex, with no joint transverse. The purple parts of the upper surface of the male are the head, base, apex and sides of prothorax, and suture, sides and a fascia at basal third of clytra. On the female the purple parts are mostly replaced by blue or purplish-blue. Stethomela armiventris, n. sp. 4. Brilliantly metallic, most of under surface and parts of legs reddish, clypeus and antennae flavous. Head with irregular punctures on and about clypeus, sparse elsewhere, clypeal suture well defined, a narrow median line meeting its middle. Antennae rather long, no joint transverse. Prothorax almost four times as wide as long, sides evenly rounded; with dense and small but fairly sharp punctures, and with numerous rather large ones on sides. Elytra slightly wider than prothorax, sides nowhere quite parallel; with regular rows of punctures of moderate sizc, the interstices with small punctures as on pronotum. Abdomen with two triangular flaps, the first on the first segment, the other on the fifth. Legs stout. Length, 6°5-7°0 mm. 2, Differs in having the abdomen simple. South Australia (Blackburn’s collection). Type, I. 2671. With a remarkable abdomen somewhat as on the preceding species; the triangular hairy flap on the basal segment is much as on that species, but the apical segment also has a triangular flap, overhanging a semi-circular hairy excavation, which, on account of the flap, appears bilobed, The prothorax has the sides more rounded, the small ptnctures are larger and more numerous, and the large ones are smaller and sparser. The types were queried in the Blackburn collection as Augomela pretiosa Baly, but they differ considerably from the description of that species in colour, which apparently, except for a “violet-blue iridescence”’ was uniform on the upper surface, whereas on this species the prothorax and elytra have conspicuous markings ; the antennae also were “black, rather longer than the thorax, the four basal joints pale piceous” ; on this species they consider- ably pass the prothorax, and are not black. I think it possible that pretiosa was really founded upon a variety of A. hypochalcea, the male of which has a normal abdomen. The greater portion of the upper surface js metallic green or blue, with purple markings on part of the head, base apex and sides of prothorax, suture and a median vitta on each elytron extending from the middle of the base 229 almost to the apex, and traversed at the basal third by a wide fascia, which does not quite touch the suture. Although labelled as from South Australia, I think the types were really from Queensland or northern New South Wales. Stethomela ventralis, n. sp. é. Dark metallic coppery-green with purple reflections, prothorax, scutellum and under surface reddish, legs reddish and black, antennae black, some of the basal joints flavous. ° Head almost impunctate, except on and about clypeus; clypeal suture semi- circular, a narrow median line joined to its middle. Antennae long and thin. Prothorax four times as wide as long, sides straight to near apex, with small scattered punctures and a foveate impression near each side. Elytra nowhere quite parallel-sided; with regular rows of punctures of moderate size, larger on a posthumeral depression than elsewhere, interstices scarcely visibly punctate. Abdomen with a wide notched flap near apex of first segment, fifth large, with a complicated hairy flap occupying the median half, the intervening segments incurved to middle. Legs stout, basal joint of each tarsus dilated, Length, 6 mm. Queensland: National Park, in December (H. Hacker). Type, in Queens- land Museum. Differs from the males of the two preceding species in having the appendage of the basal segment of abdomen wide and notched at tip, instead of triangular, the apical segment is also more complicated. The antennae are unusually thin, and extend past the hind coxae. There are dense punctures on the pronotum, but they are almost invisible under a magnifying glass. Two males were taken, and they agree perfectly in details of sculpture, although differing in colour of pro- thorax and parts of under surface. As the specimen with reddish prothorax has perfect antennae, it has been made the type. ; Var. Pronotum coloured as head and elytra; most of abdomen and of legs, and sides of metasternum black; basal joint of antennae flavous (the rest missing). STETHOMELA DISCORUFA Lea, var. ‘\ specimen, from Queensland, is entirely pale, except for a narrow black ring on each elytron, the two touching at the suture; on other varieties the ring- like mark on each elytron is broken, and on some of them parts of the head and prothorax are blue. STETHOMELA FULVITARSIS Jac. Of this species, originally described as “dark aeneous the thorax with a greenish the elytra with a violaceous tint,” and distinct by its pale labrum, antennae, palpi and tarsi, there are threc specimens before me, from Cairns and Kuranda, all of which have the prothorax black without the least tinge of green; two of them have a violaceous tint on the elytra (very faint on one specimen), but on the third the elytra are deep metallic green, Chalcomela erythroderes, n. sp. Dark metallic coppery-green, suture narrowly purplish, head with purplish reflections, prothorax and under surface, except part of abdomen, red, clypeus, antennae, and most of legs black, rest of legs reddish, Head with small punctures, but becoming stronger and crowded on clypeus ; clypeal suture deep and well-defined, a deep median line joining its middle, Antennae moderately long, dilated to apex, but no joint transverse. Prothorax about four times as wide as long, sides straight to near apex, front angles well produced; with rather sparse and small punctures. Elytra briefly cordate, scarcely longer than wide; with regular rows of punctures of moderate size, 230 becoming smaller posteriorly, the interstices with minute punctures. Legs stout. Length, 6-7 mm. Queensland: National Park, in November and December (H. Hacker). Type, in Queensland Museum. A briefly ovate species, and the only known Australian member of the genus with the prothorax red. The claws are evenly and slightly dilated to the base, certainly not strongly dentate as on Slethomela. On S. caudata and pur- pureipennis, however, the dentition is not distinct from most directions, but those species are longer in proportion. Chalcomela aulica, n. sp. Brilliant metallic green, purple and coppery; under surface, including inner parts of elytral epipleurae, most of legs and parts of muzzle reddish; antennae black, parts of basal joints reddish. Length, 6 mm. Queensland: National Park, in November (H. Hacker). Type (unique), in Queensland Museum. Structurally as described in preceding species, but prothorax and elytra brilliantly metallic. From C. illudens, and some specimens identified with doubt as C. variegata, it differs in its red under surface, and more conspictious purplish markings of prothorax and elytra. The head is green, becoming purplish in front, and coppery at the base; the pronotum is narrowly purplish in front, widely purplish at base; and coppery-green across the middle; the clytra are mostly green, and coppery-green, with the suture purple, there is also a purple stripe from the side to the fourth interstice on cach elytron, at the basal third, with a branch extending on and about the fifth interstice almost to the apex. CHALCOMELA INSIGNIS Baly, var (?). A specimen, from Moa or Banks Island, probably represents a variety of C. insignis, it agrees perfectly in structure with typical specimens of that species, but is entirely without coppery or coppery-grcen markings on the elytra; there are, however, two shades (indistinct to the naked eye) on the elytra, deep metallic blue and purple. At first glance it looks like a large specimen of Geomela nobilis, but the intercoxal process of the prosternum is different, and the head has a conspicuous median line. Lamprolina minor, n. sp. Dark metallic coppery-green, head and sides of prothorax obscurely diluted with red, antennae black, legs black and red. Head with small scattered punctures; clypeal suture deep and curved, a deep median line joining its middle. Antennae stout, but no joint transverse, eleventh one-fourth longer than tenth. Prothorax almost four times as wide as long; with numerous minute punctures, and with a few large ones towards sides. Elytra elliptic-cordate, sides nowhere parallel; with rows of small punctures, becoming smaller posteriorly, interstices with minute punctures; with a rather large post- humeral impression, on which the punctures are somewhat larger than elsewhere. Length, 6 mm. Queensland: National Park, in December (H. Hacker). Type (unique), in Queensland Museum. Allied to L. simplicipennis and discoidalis, from the former distinguished by its smaller size, darker prothorax and more distinct series of punctures on elytra; from the latter by its smaller size, coppery gloss of elytra, with smaller punctures and darker head and prothorax. 231 PHYLLOCHARIS BICEPS Lea. The types of this species, and of its variety alternata, are in the Macleay Museum. live specimens recently taken by Mr. H. Hacker, at Nanango, and in the National Park of Queensland, appear to belong to the species, but no two have the markings exactly alike. Their prothoracic and elytral markings are as follows :— 1, Prothorax with two complete black vittae, and a large spot in each front angle. Elytra with ten spots, the two apical ones conjoined to form a fascia not quite touching the sides. Fig. 5, A. 2. Prothorax as No. 1, except that the lateral spots are absent. Elytra with eight free spots, the antemedian ones conjoined to form a very irregular fascia, apical spots narrowly separated at suture. Fig. 5, B. 3. As No. 2, except that the prothoracic vittae are very narrow in front, and the lateral spots are slightly indicated. pone A Fig. 5, A, B, C, Elytral patterns of Phylocharis biceps Lea: D, of Oomela trifasciata Lea; E, of O. hieroglyphica Lea; F, of O. picta, Lea. 4. Prothorax with two longitudinal vittac, spots in front angles slight infuscations only. Elytra with two free basal spots, three antemedian ones, three postmedian (the two median ones of other specimens con- joined) and a subapical fascia (representing the two free spots of other specimenis ). 5. Prothorax with four black vittae, the median ones about twice as wide as the others. Elytra with eight large free spots, and two large ones conjoined at the suture. Fig. 5, C. It is probable that the name is a synonym of P. leoparda Baly, but in the description of that species the prothorax is described as having “lincis duabus interruptis—nigris’ ; and “on either side the medial line is a narrow longitudinal line, interrupted in the centre, pitchy black, just within the anterior angle is also a small spot,” and the elytra as having eleven spots. EuLina, In my table of the Chrysomelides“ this genus was placed with those having “FF, Apical joint of maxillary palpi securiform.” ‘This was an error, that joint is transversely oblong, and the genus should have been placed with “F. Apical joint of maxillary palpi not securiform” and associated with Oomela, from which however, it differs in many respects. The typical species, E. curtisi, is a well- known insect, occurring on the wild clematis vine near Sydney. (8) Lea, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1916, p. 397, 232 Eulina pulchra, n. sp. Red and black, the elytra, in addition, with white fasciate markings, Head with a few large punctures; clypeal suture curved and deep, a deep median line extending backwards from it almost to the base. Antennae long. Prothorax almost twice as wide as long, sides dilated near apex, all angles rect- angular; with some coarse punctures, in places conjoined to form subfoveate impressions. Elytra elongate, about one-fourth wider than base of prothorax, shoulders rounded, sides subparallel to beyond the middle; with rows of punctures of varying sizes, mostly large between the humeral and postmedian markings and small posteriorly, the interstices almost impunctate, [ength, 8 mm. New South Wales: Barrington Tops (J. Hopson). Type, I. 17124. Differs from E. curtisi and vitiata in having sparser and coarser punctures on the prothorax, different markings on the elytra, and tibiae entirely black; the latter species has decidedly larger punctures on the elytra, with more convex interstices. The general colour is red, the prothorax has a median infuscate vitta, the antennae, tibiac, tarsi, and tips of femora are black, the elytra are black, with a slight metallic gloss, and with an irregular, white, curved mark near each shoulder, an irregular, postmedian white fascia, and a still more irregular sub- apical one, with a few disconnected whitish spots; the punctures on the white parts are usually infuscated, there are also the remnants of a reddish fascia at the basal third. A specimen from Dorrigo (W. Heron) probably belongs to the species, but differs in having the white markings on the elytra more apparently composed of short, conjoined, and slightly elevated vittae, the reddish fascia at the basal third paler and more broken up, and the femora black, except for a pale subapical ring. Eulina haematosticta, n. sp. Pale flavous, antennae (upper surface of the first joint darker), six spots on elytra, knees and tarsi red. Head almost impunctate, clypeal suture well defined, a slight curved impres- sion some distance behind it. Antennae long and thin. Prothorax about once and one-half as wide as long, sides quite straight to near apex, apex strongly incurved to middle, base bisinuate ; with rather small, scattered punctures, a curved impression directed towards each hind angle, Elytra distinctly wider than pro- thorax, sides scarcely dilated to beyond the middle; with rows of small to minute punctures, a shallow posthumeral depression on each side, Intercoxal process of prosternum with two rows of large punctures, notched posteriorly; claws with a large basal appendix. Length, 10 mm. Qucensland: National Park. Type (unique), in Queensland Museum. An elongate, pale species, with three blood-red spots on each elytron; one on the shoulder, one on the middle at the basal third, and one, directly behind it, fairly close to the apex. In its thin antennae it differs from Calomela, and by my table of the subfamily it could be referred to Fulina, to which accordingly I refer it, although its appearance is very different from that of E. curtisi, and the other species of the genus. From some directions the elytra appear to be closely covered with fairly large punctures, or watery-looking spots, but this is entirely due to “waterlogging”; from oblique directions the seriate punctures are seen to be quite small, and they almost vanish posteriorly. On the type parts of the legs are still greenish, and it is probable that in life the insect, except for the parts now reddish, is entirely green. Pseudoparopsis amplipennis, n. sp. Head reddish, the base deeply infuscated, prothorax and’ scutellum black, front margins of the former narrowly reddish, elytra deep coppery-green, their 233 epipleurae black, under surface and legs red, antennae black, the basal third reddish. Head with small scattered punctures, clypeal suture distinct, a well-defined median line joining its middle. Antennae moderately long, fifth-tenth joints transverse. Prothorax at base more than four times as wide as long, sides evenly rounded, apex strongly incurved to middle; with fairly numerous punctures, varying from small to minute. Elytra across middle much wider than prothorax, sides strongly and evenly rounded; with numerous sharply defined punctures of moderate size, shoulders subtuberculate and impunctate. Legs short and stout. Length, 6°0-6°5 mm. Queensland: Nanango district, in March (H. Hacker). Type, in Queens- land Museum; cotype, in South Australian Museum. A wide species, structurally close to P. nitidipennis, but slightly larger, and prothorax and scutellum black. The elytra are more than six times the length of the prothorax, their punctures are numerous but not crowded, from most directions they do not appear to be seriate in arrangement, but from others they do so appear; the series about twice as numerous as on species of other genera of the subfamily, Oomela nigrivitta, n. sp. é. Black and red or flavous-red. Head with distinct but not dense punctures on and about clypeus, sparse and small elsewhere ; clypeal suture curved, a feeble median line joining its middle. Antennae long and thin, no joint transverse. Prothorax at base more than thrice as wide as long; with small, scattered punctures. Elytra very little wider than prothorax at base; with regular rows of small punctures, the interstices impunc- tate; epipleurae somewhat undulated posteriorly. Apical segment of abdomen triangularly impressed. Length, 3-0-3-5 mm. @?. Differs in having apical segment of abdomen evenly convex, legs thinner ; with basal joint of tarsi smaller. Queensland: National Park, in November (H. Hacker). Types, in Queens- land Museum. On most of the twelve specimens taken, the pronotum is reddish, with a wide black median vitta (the sides of the vitta gently incurved), and the elytra are black, each with a large, round, reddish spot at the basal third, nearer the suture than side; but on two of them the pronotum appears to be entirely black, although on close examination a faint lessening of colour may be noticed on the sides. The head varies from black to partly or entirely red, the under surface varies from entirely red to part of the apical segment of abdomen and the metasternum (wholly or in part) black; the legs are deep black, with the coxae trochanters and claws reddish. Of the species with two pale spots on elytra, O. bimaculata is smaller with prothorax and legs reddish, O. coccinelloides has prothorax and legs pale, and the elytral spots transverse, and a variety of O. elliptica has reddish legs, and prothorax reddish except for a slight basal infuscation. In the 1917 table of the genus) it could be distinguished {rom O. bimaculata and the variety of O. elliptica by the median vitta of the pronotum. Oomela trifasciata, n. sp. . Fig. 5, D. Red or flavous-red, with black markings. Head with scattered punctures, and a shallow interocular depression. Antennae rather long and thin, no joint transverse. Prothorax about four times as wide as long; with minute punctures and a few of larger size, but still small, (9) Lea, Le., p. 579, 234 on sides. Elytra very little wider than prothorax at base, sides gently rounded; with regular rows of small punctures, the interstices scarcely visibly punctate. Length, 4 mm. Queensland: National Park, in November (H. Hacker). Type, in Queens- land Museum. On this and the two following species the claws, from most directions, appear to be simple, and they are drawn backwards so that it is difficult to examine them clearly, but from some directions they are seen to have a fairly large appendix, with a slight notch between the appendix and the rest of the claw; this is more clearly seen on the front tarsi than on the others. Their markings are strikingly at variance from those of all the previously named species of the genus, and it may eventually be considered desirable to propose a new genus for their reception. The elytral epipleurae are more concave than on other species of the genus. The head is black between the eyes, the pronotum is black, except for a median vitta not extending to the base, the sides are usually narrowly reddish, the elytra have three jagged fasciae: one at the basal third (touching the suture to the base), one postmedian (touching the suture from the middle to the apical third), and one subapical (touching the suture to the apex); parts of the under surface and the middle of the femora are black. The sexes differ slightly in the abdomen, the male only having a slight apical depression. Oomela hieroglyphica, n. sp. Fig. 5, E. Head and scutellum reddish, prothorax black, parts of base obscurely reddish, elytra flavous with dark metallic-blue markings, the suture reddish; under surface black, in parts reddish, legs reddish, middle of femora and upper edge of tibiae blackish. Head with minute punctures; clypeal suture rather deep, its middle dilated into a fairly large fovea. Antennae moderatcly long, somewhat dilated to apex. Prothorax almost four times as wide as long; with small but sharply defined punctures sparsely scattered about, and very minute ones, Elytra no wider than prothorax at base, but sides gently rounded, and widest at basal third; with regular rows of rather small punctures, the interstices almost impunctate, Length, 4°5 mm. Queensland: National Park, in November (H. Hacker). Types, in Queens- land Museum. Differs from the preceding species in having the pronotum without a pale median vitta; the zigzag fasciae of the clytra of different shape, the second con- nected with the first (on one specimen of that species the second is almost con- nected with the first, but in a different way). The dark markings are very irregular, at the basal third on each elytron of the male there is a mark which at first is directed outwards, and then curves round to touch the base in the middle ; just beyond the middle is a very irregular fascia, which is twice dilated and touches the side, from the first dilated part a branch extends obliquely forwards to end on the shoulder; on the inner side joined to the curved subbasal mark and outwardly joined to the margin, near the apex, there is another fascia touching both suture and side. On the female the subbasal and the front part of the post- median markings are as on the type, but the outer portion of the postmedian marking appears more as an appendage, than part of the fascia itself (with which it is narrowly connected), and the subapical marking is also narrowly connected with the postmedian one. The antennae are dilated to apex but compressed, from positions where the full width is visible it may be seen that the eighth-tenth joints are fully as wide as long, or slightly transverse. The elytral epipletrae are 235 flavous and rather wide, flattened, but narrowed and wrinkled posteriorly. The male has a smaller and less convex abdomen than the female, with its tip slightly notched. Oomela picta, n. sp. Fig. 5, F, Reddish, flavous, coppery, and dark metallic blue, or green, the elytra trifasciate. Head with minute punctures; clypeal suture deep and expanded in middle. Antennae moderately long, somewhat dilated to apex, eighth joint about as long as wide, ninth and tenth moderately transverse. Prothorax about four times as wide as long; with small, scattered punctures, and some larger ones on parts of the base. Elytra at base the width of base of prothorax, sides rounded and nowhere parallel; with regular rows of rather small punctures, the interstices impunctate ; epipleurae slightly convex, wrinkled posteriorly. Length, 5 mm. Queensland: Brookfield (H. Hacker). Type (unique), in Queensland Museum. Differs from the preceding species in the metallic head and prothorax, and large isolated basal spot on each elytron, the fiasciae are also all disconnected, except with the suture. The head and prothorax are coppery, with the muzzle red; the elytra are flavous, with a large basal spot on each side, and three wide, irregular fasciae, metallic blue, narrowly edged, in some lights, with brilliant golden-purple, the punctures also, in some lights, are brilliantly metallic; the first fascia terminates at the margin, the second is continued over it to the epipleura, and the third does not touch the margin. It is probable, however, that the mark- ings are variable. The metasternum and part of the abdomen are coppery-green, the rest of the under surface and the legs are reddish, the antennae are black, with the basal joint reddish, and the tip of the eleventh joint obscurely reddish. The sex of the type is doubtful, the abdomen is less convex than is tisual on the female, but its tip is simple. Oomela pictipennis, n. sp. Flavous with a slight metallic gloss, some parts slightly infuscated or reddish, the elytra with two irregular dark fasciae and two subapical spots; six or seven apical joints of antennae blackish, the rest pale. Head almost impunctate, clypeal suture deep and dilated in middle, a feeble median line connecting it with base. Antennae moderately long, somewhat dilated to apex, eighth-tenth joints almost as wide as long. Prothorax about four times as wide as long, with rather sparse and small, sharply defined punctures, a few larger ones at cxtreme base. Elytra with sides subparallel for a short distance, with regular rows of rather small punctures, the interstices impunctate. Length, 4°5 mm, Queensland: Kuranda, in October (F. P. Dodd). Type (unique), I. 17119. A beautiful species. The appendix to each claw is larger and more distinct than on the three preceding species, but from some directions, even on this species, the claws appear simple. The middle of the pronotum and the metasternum are darker than the adjacent parts, but they are not deeply infuscated. On the elytra the suture and a basal spot on each side are slightly reddish; there are two irregular brownish fasciae, the first at the basal third, touching the sides (along which it is continued half-way to the base) but not the suture; the second is strongly curved (with the convex side in front) and touches neither the suture nor side, but is connected on the middle of each elytron with the first fascia, and there is a round spot on each side near the apex. As on so many pale species of the subfamily the elytral punctures, from some directions, appear to be much larger than they really are, owing to “waterlogging”; from oblique directions, 236 however, their true sizes are evident. As the tip of its abdomen is slightly notched the type is evidently a male. Geomela tropica, n. sp. Black, elytra with a slight coppery gloss, under surface, legs, antennae, and palpi reddish, femora partly infuscated. Head with fairly large punctures; clypeal suture curved and dilated on cach side. Antennae long and thin, none of the joints transverse, eleventh one-half longer than tenth. Prothorax not quite four times as wide as long, sides evenly rounded; with numerous, but not crowded, punctures of moderate size, becoming somewhat larger and denser on sides, and with rather dense minute ones. Elytra elongate-cordate, base scarcely wider than base of prothorax, sides gently rounded ; with regular rows of moderately large punctures, the interstices with minute punctures as on pronotum. Legs moderately long. Length, 5 mm. North Australia: Adelaide River (H. W. Brown). Type, I. 17103. An elliptic species about the size of G. nobilis, and with similar outlines, but antennae and legs red, and upper surface not at all bluish, The punctures beyond the hind coxae are larger than elsewhere. Chaicolampra longicornis, n. sp. Black with a slight bronzy gloss, antennae (the apical half more or less deeply infuscated), palpi and legs castanco-flavous. Head with rather dense but somewhat irregular punctures of moderate size, a small fovea near each antenna. Antennae long and thin, no joint transverse. Prothorax about thrice as wide as long; with rather dense and coarse punctures on sides, and a few in middie, and with numerous minute ones. Elytra at base scarcely wider than base of prothorax, sides gently rounded; with regular rows of fairly large punctures, becoming smaller posteriorly; interstices with fairly dense and minute punctures. Claws moderately dilated and subangulate near base. Length, 5 mm. Western Australia: Perth. Type (unique), [. 4863. A briefly elliptic, submetallic species, with outlines much as on C. podagrosa (from New South Wales) but with longer and thinner antennac, larger and more numerous punctures on pronotum and more numerous and sharply defined ones, although small, on the elytral interstices. Chalcolampra cribricollis, n. sp. Dark blackish-blue and finely shagreened, under surface black, antennae and palpi obscurely reddish, legs obscurely diluted with red. Ilead with numerous sharply defined punctures of moderate size near eyes, smaller elsewhere ; clypeal suture triangular and nonfoveate. Antennae moderately long and not very thin. Prothorax about thrice as wide as long, sides evenly rounded; with crowded punctures of moderate size, not much sparser in middle than on sides, and with minute punctures scattered about. Elytra very little wider than prothorax at base; with regular rows of fairly large punctures, the interstices gently convex and with minute punctures. Apical segment of abdomen sub- triangularly depressed in middle. Length, 6 mm. Tasmania: Mount Wellington (Rev. T. Blackburn). Type (unique), I. 3372. A dull, dark blue species, with unusually numerous punctures on pronotum. From some directions the claws appear simple, but each has a fairly large basal swelling. The type, judging by the abdomen, appears to be a male. 237 CHALCOLAMPRA HuRSTI Blackb, Six specimens, from Kangaroo and Flinders Islands (South Australia), appear to belong to this species, but differ from some cotypes (from Queens- land) in being slightly more parallel-sided, and with somewhat smaller punctures. CILALCOLAMPRA GYRATA Lea. A specimen, from Kangaroo Island, differs from the type in being slightly larger, and with the larger punctures on the pronotum slightly sparser and smaller, Eugastromela, n. gen. Head small and normally vertical; clypeal suture deep. Eyes lateral, rather small, transverse, with coarse facets. Antennae long, thin, and subfiliform, first joint stout, seventh-eleventh slightly dilated but all longer than wide. Apical joint of maxillary palpi rather long, its tip oblique. Prothorax transverse, apex incurved to middle, sides finely margined. Scutellum small. Elytra not much wider -than ptothorax, with series of fecble tubercles, and irregular rows of punctures; epipleurae wide. Prosternum with a wide intercoxal process, its sides finely margined, and hind end notched or obtusely bilobed. Metasternum moderately long, middle not simple on male; episterna narrow. Abdomen with first and fifth segments large. Legs moderately long, front coxae transverse; tibiae notched at outer apex for reception of base of tarsi, basal joint of tarsi dilated in male, claws simple. Glabrous, except for antennae and tarsi. In my table of the genera of Chrysomclides“! the genus could be associated with Strumatophyma, and that is perhaps its nearest ally, but the species of that genus are considerably larger, with the derm rough, and the clypeal suture and palpi different. In the allied genus, Chalcolampra, the basal joint of the tarsi (especially the front ones) is often greatly enlarged, and the claws, although not simple, are often rather feebly dentate. I have not broken a specimen, to be sure, but believe all the species to be apterous. I was inclined to consider, from examination of the upper surface only, the six specimens under examination, as belonging to but one species, but, after floating them off, it was evident that there were considerable differences in the metasternum and abdomen, and that the males are abundantly distinct by those parts. They are all deep black, with pale antennae and tarsi, except that on E. spiniventra those parts are infuscated. Type of genus, E, metasternalis. Eugastromela metasternalis, n. sp. 6. Black and shining, antennae, palpi and tarsi flavous, but parts of antennae somewhat infuscated. Head impunctate; clypeal suture deep, its ends foveate; a narrow impression near each eye, ending in a fovea. Antennac thin, third joint longer than second, eleventh about once and one-half the length of tenth. Prothorax about once and one-half as wide as long, impunctate. Elytra about one-third longer than wide, sides nowhere parallel; with irregular rows of rather large punctures, becoming still more irregular about apex, interstices scarcely visibly punctate, the fourth and sixth with several obtuse tubercles, some of the others with very feeble inequalities. Intercoxal process of prosternum about twice as long as its greatest width (near the front), its posterior end obtusely notched. Metasternum with an obtuse ridge on each side of middle, the two almost meeting at the apex. Basal segment of abdomen about as long as the apical, and each almost as long as the three intermediate ones combined, each of the latter with a row of coarse punc- tures in middle, giving the surface a subgranulate appearance. Basal joint of front tarsi slightly wider than long. Length, 4 mm. (10) Lea, Le., p. 397. 238 @. Differs in having the metasternum flat in middle, basal and apical seg- ments of abdomen somewhat smaller (the punctures on the second to fourth arc, however, quite as on the type), the tibiae thinner, and the basal joint of tarsi smaller. Victoria: Melbourne and North Gippsland (H. W. Davey), Emerald (A. H. Elston from C, Jarvis). Type, 1. 17125. On the metasternum of the male the two ridges, as viewed from behind, look like two subapproximate granules; the tip of its abdomen is obliquely flattened, on the female it is evenly convex. The front tibiae of the male, from directly above, is seen to be dilated to apex, and notched there, from the sides its apical third appears narrowed and gently incurved. The specimen from Gippsland has slightly larger but more obtuse tubercles on the elytra than on the type, and the basal joint of each tarsus is slightly larger. On the female there are about ten tubercles on each elytron, and they are more conspicuous than on either of the males. Eugastromela spiniventra, n. sp. 6. Black, shining; antennae tarsi and palpi obscurely diluted with red. Head impunctate; clypeal suture with a small fovea on each side, behind each of which is a small impression. Antennae and prothorax as in preceding species, except that the apical joint of the antennae is somewhat smaller. Elytra suibopaque, about once and one-half as long as wide, sides nowhere parallel, with irregular rows of moderately large punctures, the interstices with numcrous obtuse tubercles (about thirty on each elytron). Intercoxal process of prosternum with narrow margins, terminated one-third from the front, posteriorly with distinct punctures. Metasternum with two small granules near apex. Basal segment of abdomen opaque, about as long as the three following ones combined, but shorter than apical one, base with a conspicuous median spine, apical segment with median space obliquely flattened, and ending in a large shallow impression. Length, 5 mm. Tasmania: Waratah (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 17126. With much more numerous tubercles on the elytra than on the preceding species, and yery distinct by the abdominal spine; the small elevations on the metasternum rise suddenly, instead of being the ends of oblique ridges. he intercoxal process of the prosternum differs considerably in its front portion from that of that species, being narrower and without lateral ridges, the tibiae are more dilated to apex and the basal joint of cach tarstis is still larger, and longer than wide. ‘The base of the under surface of the head is exposed, and is seen to be transversely strigose for a stridulating apparatus. On the preecding and follow- ing species there is no trace of this. Eugastromela flavitarsis, n. sp. 9, Black, shining, the elytra subopaque, antennae, palpi and tarsi flavous, trochanters reddish. Head impunctate; clypeal suture feeble in middle, but foveate on each side, each fovea with an oblique impression connecting it with the side of an eyc. Antennae and prothorax as on F. metasternalis, Elytra with irregular rows of fairly large punctures, each with about ten very obtuse tubercles. Intercoxal process of prosternum wide and widest at apex, with narrow margins throughout. Apical segment of abdomen slightly shorter than the three preceding combined, and slightly shorter than basal. Jength, 4 mm, Victoria: Beaconsfield, in April (TI. E., Wilson) ; Ararat (H. J. Carter from T. G. Sloane). Type, 1. 17127. Differs from the female of HF. metasternalis in the abdominal punctures being much smaller, those on the fourth segment are larger than on the other 239 segments, but they also are quite small, and do not give the surface a granulated appearance, the tibiae are thinner and the claw joint is longer; the elytra also are less shining than on that species. The specimen from Ararat has the elytral tubercles so obtuse that they might fairly be regarded as absent. PsyLLioves LuUBRICATA Blackb, This species occurs in abundance on Solanum nigruim, and occasionally on other solanaceous plants, in many parts of Eastern Australia, from Mount Tam- bourine in Queensland, to the Dividing Range, in Victoria. It was described originally from a form with brassy-green elytra and golden pronotum, and such a form is fairly common, but the commonest of all is one having the prothorax and elytra of an almost uniform shade of brassy-green. Many specimens, how- ever, are bluish-green, or blue, or purple, sometimes blue, with the elytra purple; the extent of infuscation of the legs also varies, the hind femora are seldom entirely pale, and are often almost entirely black; the three basal joints of the antennae are pale, and sometimes some of the others, and the joints near the third are never more than slightly infuscated. Var. howensis, n. var. Twenty-iwo specimens, from Lord Howe Island, have the prothoracic punctures rather denser than on mainland forms, the legs pale, except that the hind femora are black, with a brassy or brassy-green gloss, at least half of the antennae pale, and the following joints but slightly infuscated. The upper surface is usually brassy. Var. norfolcensis, n. var. Numerous specimens, from Norfolk Island, differ from the mainland forms in having the prothoracic punctures smaller and sparser, even on the sides, the three basal joints of antennae flavous, and the others black: the legs are usually castaneous, with the hind femora deeply infuscated or black, but occasionally they are entirely castaneous; the upper surface is nearly always brassy-green. This form may be at once distinguished from the others by the sharply contrasted colours of the third and fourth joints of antennae, in all the other forms the change from a pale to a dark joint being more or less gradual, Two specimens from Lord Howe Island, in the Australian Museum, have the prothoracic punctures and antennae as on the variety norfolcensis, one has the upper surface purple, the other has it black, with a slight bronzy gloss. Aproida cribrata, n. sp. Dull flavous; sides of head, of prothorax, and parts of elytra with irregular patches or spots of purplish-brown; prosternum, mesosternum, coxae, trochanters, tarsi, and parts of antennae reddish-brown; ninth and tenth joints of antennae deeply infuscated, eleventh joint flavous. Head subquadrate, with crowded punctures, Antennae slightly passing scutellum, first joint stout, second small, scarcely half the length of third, the latter about one-fourth longer than fourth, the others gradually decreasing in length, but eleventh longer than tenth. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides gently undulated, angles acute, with an obtuse ridge on each side of middle, and another on each side margin; with crowded punctures much as on head. Scutellum with rather dense punctures; elytra wider than prothorax, sides dilated to beyond middle, and then narrowed to apex, where each is produced in a stout spine; base sinuous ; each with an obtuse ridge on the outer side of the fourth row of punc- tures; with rows of very large punctures or small foveae. Under surface with crowded punctures on prosternum and on sides of head, elsewhere with small and sparse ones. Legs short, femora edentate. Length, 5-5 mm. . Queensland: National Park (H. Hacker). Type (unique), in Queensland Museum. ; 240 A much smaller and decidedly rougher species than 4. balyi, with a shorter head, paler antennae, only one terminal joint pale, femora unarmed, etc. Pro- bably in life the parts are greenish that are now flavous; on each clytron the dark parts are: a spot about scutellum, an antemedian spot nearer the side than suture, and a postmedian vitta extending to the apex of the apical spine; there are also several less defined spots. MoNOLEPTA FROGGATTI Blackb., ¢, 1891. M. pictifrons Blackb., ¢, 1896. This species was described originally as from Ballarat. A female in the South Australian Museum is marked as a cotype, and agrees with the description, except that the scutellum is black, and that the sides of the elytra are infuscated (no doubt overlooked), Mr. F. Erasmus Wilson and I recently obtained, on the Upper Williams River, in New South Wales, numcrous specimens that probably belong to the species; the females agree well with the cotype, except that the dark parts of the elytra are more intensely black, and the sutural marking less extended ; they vary, however, in the abdomen; many of them have this entirely dark (as on the cotype), and others have it entirely pale; still others have two dark spots on each of the intermediate segments. The male (Mr. Wilson obtained a pair, still fast in cop.) differs in being smaller and with the elytra entirely deep black; on some specimens, in certain lights, however, they appear to be darker about the suture than elsewhere. Similar specimens were previously commented upon as probably belonging to M. pictifrons.°) Two cotypes of pictifrons in the Museum are males, and have the elytra blackish, with the sutural region intensely black; they were from “Victoria,” and, I am now convinced, are males of M. froggatti. 1 know of no other species in the genus in which the sexes differ so much. EROTYLIDAE. Isolanguria, n. gen. Head obtusely subtriangular, a swelling behind each eye; clypcal sutures indistinct except at sides, not conspicuously distinct from labrum. Eyes small, lateral, moderately faceted. Antennae short, club three-jointed. Palpi small. Prothorax elongate, sides and base narrowly margined. Scutellum small and strongly transverse. Elytra long, thin, and almost parallel-sided. * Prosternum with intercoxal process rather narrow, its apex truncate, and a fine ridge on each side; coxal cavities open. Metasternum elongate, episterna thin, epimera minute. Abdomen with first segment about one-fourth longer than second, the others gradually decreasing in length, coxal lines not distinct. JLegs short, femora stout, tibiac with a short apical spine, tarsi with three basal joints densely clothed on lower surface, fourth joint scarcely visible, claw joint long and thin. The type of the genus is a thin, flat, brown species, which evidently belongs to the Languriides. ‘The tarsi are densely clothed, and have rather short setae at the sides, so that Fowler would probably have referred the genus to his first main division of the subfamily,@2) placed there as the coxal lines are not in evidence; and as the head is symmetrical in both sexes (the swelling behind each eye seems to be a very unusual feature in the subfamily), femora unarmed, club of antennae longer than broad, elytra rounded at apex, and eyes not coarsely faceted, it could be associated with Perilanguria (the description of this genus is very unsatis- factory, but the characters noted in the table appear to be useful, P. menticola is noted as the type of the genus, and was described as having the club four- jointed, etc.). Regarding it as belonging to his second division it cannot be traced (11) Lea, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1923, p, 525. (12) Fowler, in Wytsman’s Genera Insectorum, Fasc., 78. 241 beyond the genera 34-36, from Penolanguria it is distinguished by its elongate form, and from Ischnolanguria and Languria (in the table Languria is noted as having the club five or six jointed), by its three-jointed club, it does not appear, however, to be very close to any of the genera figured by Fowler. The front coxal cavities appear to be closed behind by a thin flap, but from some directions a fine projection from each coxa may be seen extending alongside the intercoxal process to the apex, where it slightly overlaps the flap; on dissection this is easily ruptured, when the cavity appears to be widely open. Isolanguria fusca, n. sp. Dark castaneous, elytra abdomen’ and basal joints of antennae somewhat paler, legs castaneo-flavous. Upper surface glabrous, under surface finely pubescent, a short fringe at apex of prosternum and a thin fascicle on each side of apex of abdomen. Head gently convex; with rather dense and sharply defined but not very large punctures. Antennae not extending to front coxae, first joint stout, third distinctly longer than second or fourth, fourth to eighth small and subglobular, ninth longer and about twice as wide as eighth, the size of tenth and smaller than eleventh. Prothorax longer than wide, sides dilated at apex, obliquely narrowed to near base, base somewhat sinuous, a shallow fovea on each side of it, and a smaller one on each side at basal third; punctures much as on head, but with an impunctate median line. Elytra not as wide as widest part of prothorax, with rows of fairly large punctures, becoming small posteriorly, interstices with sparse punctures. Prosternum with rather large punctures on flanks, smaller and more or less transversely confluent elsewhere. Metasternum with punctures as on head. Abdomen with somewhat smaller and denser punctures, apical segment slightly concave, its tip obtusely produced. Hind femora scarcely extending to middle of second abdominal segment. Length, 7 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 11780. Three specimens were beaten from recently felled shrubs; one (probably a male) has the prothorax more dilated in front than the others. COCCINELLIDAE, Rhizobius erythrogaster, n. sp. Black, muzzle, antennae, palpi, abdomen, and parts of legs more or less reddish. Moderately densely clothed with rather long and waved, whitish pubescence, mixed with rather long, erect, dark setae; under surface and legs more sparsely clothed, Head with fairly dense but inconspicuous punctures. Prothorax with rather dense punctures, more distinct on sides than in middle; front angles produced and rounded off. Elytra with dense and, except where obscured by pubescence, sharply defined punctures. Abdomen with fairly dense punctures, tips of lamellac almost touching apex of first segment. Prosternum with a fine carina on each side of the median process. Length, 2:2-3-0 mm, Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 11661. A rather strongly convex species, with the red abdomen of R. ventralis, and in general resembling that species, but consistently much smaller, pubescence longer and more waved, and mixed with moderately long, erect, dark setae (much more numerous and distinct than on that species). In Blackburn’s table of Rhizobius® it could be associated with that species. Some specimens have a (13) Blackb,, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 1892, pp. 257-9. 242 slight metallic gloss, but on most of them the upper surface is a deep shining black; the metasternum is usually deep black, in strong contrast with the abdomen, but is occasionally of a dingy reddish brown, the trochanters and tarsi are always pale, the tibiae are usually paler than the femora, the head is more or less obscurely diluted with red from the middle to the front, sometimes almost to the base, the {front of the prothorax is sometimes very narrowly reddish. Twenty-nine speci- mens were obtained. Rhizobius viridipennis, n. sp. Head, prothorax, antennae, palpi, legs, and part of abdomen more or less dingy red, elytra dark metallic green, mesosternum, metasternum, and basal parts of abdomen black or infuscated. Moderately densely clothed with whitish or slightly golden pubescence, interspersed with numerous suberect, but not very long, dark setae. lead with fairly dense and sharply defined punctures at base, becoming smaller in front. Prothorax more than thrice as wide as long, sides strongly rounded in front; with rather dense punctures, becoming crowded on sides. Elytra with dense, even, sharply defined punctures. Abdomen with lamellae terminated about one-fourth from apex of basal segment. Prosternum with a fine carina on each side of the median space. Length, 2°5-3-0 mm, Lord Ilowe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 11664. In general appearance close to some specimens of KR. hirtellus, but the average size smaller, sides of prothorax more rounded in front, upright setae less numerous and much shorter, and elytral punctures larger and more sharply defined. The elytra are decidedly green on most of the specimens, but on a few are more or less bronzy or obscurely purple; the red of the head and prothorax is usually uniform, although never bright, but on some specimens the disc of the latter is obscurely infuscated, and on two of them the infuscation extends almost to the sides; the extent of infuscation of the basal part of the abdomen varies; on some specimens the femora are also infuscated. Thirteen specimens were obtained, including two from tree-ferns on Mount Ledgbird. Rhizobius filicis, n. sp. Black, muzzle, antennae, palpi, tip of abdomen and parts of legs more or less reddish. Moderately densely and uniformly clothed with whitish pubescence, Head and prothorax with punctures as on preceding species; elytra with rather denser ones, becoming very small near suture. Lamellae of abdomen extending to about one-fourth from tip of basal segment. Length, 2°5-2:7 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 11665. The general outlines are much as on the preceding species, but the colours and clothing are very different, the punctures near the suture are much smaller, and the median space of the prosternum is more triangular, with less conspicuous carinac. In Blackburn’s table the species would probably be associated with R. lindi and R. dorsalis, to both of which it has a general resemblance; from the former it differs in being not at all metallic, elytra with somewhat larger punctures and without a fringe of longer hairs (on most specime..s of lidi the longer hairs or setae, of the upper surface, appear to form a quite conspicuous lateral fringe) ; from dorsalis it differs also in the elytral punctures and clothing. The tarsi and palpi are almost flavous, the tibiae and trochanters are usually paler than the femora. Most of the specimens have entirely black elytra, but on several the elytra, except for the sides and suture, are of a dingy reddish-brown; on such specimens the dull red portion of the abdomen extends along the sides almost to the base. Twenty-three specimens were beaten from ferns on the summit of Mount Gower. 243 Scymnus rostratus, n. sp. Dark castaneous-brown, prothorax, sides excepted, almost black, tarsi almost flavous. Upper surface with numerous, but not dense, suberect, reddish setae. Head subtriangular, with fairly distinct punctures. Prothorax more than thrice as wide as long, with small punctures. Elytra evenly and rather strongly convex; with dense, sharply defined punctures. Under surface with punctures as on elytra, but less dense. Length, -9-1-0 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 11662. From the sides the muzzle seems to be produced as on some species of Pythidae, and under a compound power the eyes seem rather coarsely faceted, and the suture between the two first abdominal segments to be distinct, so it is possible the species should not have been referred to Scymnus, but to a new genus. I was not able to manipulate the hind legs so as to expose the abdominal lamellae. Three specimens were obtained, and the average of these is slightly smaller than the average of S. vagans, but the two species are very different in their clothing, punctures, muzzle, etc. One of the specimens is much darker than the others. Scymnus macrops, n. sp. Castaneous-brown, some parts darker, antennae, palpi, tibiae, tarsi and elytral epipleurae more or less flavous. Clothed with short, whitish pubescence, somewhat longer and less depressed on upper surface than on under. Head smooth, with fairly dense and rather small but distinct punctures. Eyes larger than usual. Prothorax about four times as wide as long, sides rather strongly rounded, punctures slightly denser than on head, but less distinct. Elytra with punctures as on head. Abdomen with sutures obliterated in middle, lamellae touching tip of basal segment for most of their width. Length, 2°0-2°2 mm. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 11666. The size and outlines are much as those of S. aurugineus, but the elytra, except that the suture and base are very narrowly darker, are uniformly coloured throughout, and have somewhat longer pubescence; it is rather larger and more oblong than S. australis, less brightly coloured, clothing longer and eyes larger; from S. inaffectatus, to which perhaps it is closest, it differs in being slightly more oblong and the eyes somewhat larger and closer together. The under surface, except the sides of the prosternum and sometimes the tip of the abdomen, and scutellum are black or piceous-brown, and the femora are deeply infuscated. live specimens were obtained, and of these three have the head slightly paler than the prothorax, and two have it slightly darker; the difference is probably sexual. Scymnus obscuripennis, n. sp. Black or piceous-brown, elytra obscurely paler; muzzle, antennae, palpi, and legs flavous. Rather densely clothed with subdepressed, ashen or whitish pubescence. Elliptic-ovate, rather strongly convex, punctures of elytra fairly dense and distinct, elsewhere sparser and less distinct. Abdomen with suture between two basal segments fecble in middle, lamellae extending to about one-third from apex of basal segment. Length, 1:2-1-5 mm. Norfolk Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 11761. About the size of S. vagans, but with longer clothing, elytra paler, and legs entirely flavous. On specimens with the prothorax black the elytra are of a dingy reddish-brown, those with the prothorax piceous-brown have the elytra somewhat 244 paler, but they are never of a bright red, the flavous portion of the head varies in extent, probably sexually. Eleven specimens were obtained. Scymnus variiceps, n. sp. @. Black or blackish, head, front angles of prothorax, antennae, palpi, and tarsi more or less reddish. Densely clothed with short, depressed, uniform, ashen pubescence. Ilead rather wide, with small, dense punctures. Prothorax more than thrice as wide as long, punctures much as on head. Elytra with very dense punctures, slightly more distinct than on head. Abdomen with six segments, lamellae large, and touching apex of first segment for most of their width. Length, 2°5-3'5 mm, g@. Differs in having the head dark, except for the flavous muzzle, and the prothorax without a pale spot in each front angle. Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). Type, L. 11762. A depressed species, with antennae somewhat longer than the space between the eyes, and with the suture between the two basal segments of abdomen fairly distinct in the middle, characters somewhat at variance with Scymmus, but as the eyes are finely faceted, elytral epipleurae not foveate, and mesosternum not longitudinally carinate, it was considered desirable to refer the species to that genus, rather than to Bucolus, or to a new one; its outlines are much as those of Rhizobius aurantti. The tibiae and trochanters are sometimes almost as pale as the tarsi, the abdomen is usually slightly paler than the metasternum, but is not strongly contrasted with it. On several specimens of each sex the extreme front margin of the prothorax is pale. Eighteen specimens were taken, mostly on the fruit of a Pandanus, where they were eating a white scale insect, Aspidiotus, sp. ScyMNUS FLAVIFRONS Blackb., var. norfolcensis, n. var, Numerous specimens taken on Norfolk Island appear to belong to S. flaz- frons, but differ from the typical form in being slightly more oblong, and with rather more distinct punctures. The sexes differ much as do those of the typical form, except that, on the twenty-four males taken, the pale sides of the prothorax are never narrowly connected across the apex. The elytra are either entirely black, or with the tips obscurely diluted with red. 243 A UNIQUE EXAMPLE OF ABORIGINAL ROCK CARVING AT PANARAMITEE NORTH. By C. P. Mountrrorp. [Read August 8, 1929.] PLATE X, This paper records the finding of a unique example of aboriginal art situated adjacent to a group of carvings called Panaramitee North (1). Long. 139, 38’ E; Lat. 32, 34’ S. The latter were investigated by me in 1926, but this remarkable design was missed owing to the fact that it was carved on an isolated outcrop of slate which projected only a few inches above the level of the surrounding saltbush plain. This rock was about 100 yards east of the main group. Previous to my visiting this district during the Christmas vacation of 1928, Mr. N. Tindale allowed me to examine a photograph of this carving taken by Mr. Bartlett. That gentleman described the position as: “Four miles north of the Panaramitee Station and 200 yards from the creek on a saltbush plain.” At the completion of other investigations in the district, a search was made for this example. It was (as mentioned before) located close to one of my previous finds. As the time available was extremely limited on this occasion, only a rough tracing and photograph were taken. During Easter of 1929 a special trip was made to obtain a plaster of paris mould of the whole rock surface. This was subsequently presented to the South Australian Museum authorities, who have since produced a replica of the original rock surface from this mould. DESCRIPTION, The design was engraved on an outcrop of slate, approximatcly oval in form, about 5 feet 6 inches major diameter and 2 feet 9 inches minor diameter. The intaglios which are shown in fig. 1 were well cut, the black parts of the drawing indicating where the rock surface had been removed by the usual process of chipping with pointed flints (1). A portion of the reck on which the design was carved had weathered away, and an attempt has been made to reconstruct the pattern by means of the dotted lines on fig. 3. A close examination of the rock surface revealed several interesting features :-— (1) That the rock surface has been engraved in two distinctly different periods. On text fig. 1 are shown all the designs engraved on the rock surface. Fig. 3 indicates what is considered to be the original design when the more recent carvings are deleted. In text fig. 2 the later carv- ings are drawn. These are deeper, revealing little signs of erosion which were evident on the original. An examination of pl. x. will clearly indicate the more recent work. RS ANS ae Zins ES 246 (ot fan NS yaks a ANN CE _ PSHONNY x Os i> vt Suns RNS Ses we te tafe i \ ‘. é Sau i RNC 2 247 (2) That the design bears a striking resemblance to the head of Crocodilus porosus. Fig. 4 is an outline of drawing C. porosus (after Parker and Haswell), drawn to the same scale as fig. 3. ‘The sutures of the skull and the orbit and the nasal openings are shown in dotted lines. An examination of figs. 3 and 4 discloses several points of resemblance. (a) The general outline and the placing of the eyes and nostrils are similar. ; (b) The lines in the carvings at A, fig. 3 (although somewhat out of position), resemble the lines of sutures in the skull at A, fig. 4. (c) Again, at B. fig. 3, the line seems to indicate the base of the skull as indicated at B, fig. 4. Further comparison of the two drawings displays several points of similarity relating to the sutures. In fact, there is so strong a relation between the two drawings that one almost precludes the possibility of the carving representing anything else but this saurian. AGE OF THE DESIGN, The fact that fossil crocodile remains have been found in South Australia, and a number of native legends speak of mythical monsters who are associated with water and devour people, leads me to suggest that this carving was executed at a time when the crocodile was alive in this area. Professor J. W. Gregory (7) mentions that in native legends of the Lake Eyre district which relate to the Kadimakara (or mythical monsters), two distinct animals are referred to:— . One lives in pools and attacks people who go near them. Stories of this type may be based on the crocodile, for that this saurian once swarined the rivers of Lake Eyre is shown by the abundance of their fossil remains collected. The second type of Kadimakara was a heavy land animal with a single horn on its forehead. This description suggests the diprotodon, which was pro- vided with a large projection of the nasal bones. The same writer, although satisfied that the native legends refer to the croco- dile and diprotodon, does not assign any great antiquity to man in Australia. Dr. H. Basedow (2) draws attention to intaglios found at Wilkindinna and Yunta, which he suggests may have been produced by the natives to represent the footprints of the extinct diprotodon. Ilale and Tindale (10) also record a native legend with the photograph already referred to. This story was obtained by Mr. Harris (11) from the Wilpena district, and speaks of a mythical being called Kaddikra (evidently the same as Gregory’s Kadimakara) which ravaged the country and devoured every living thing that came its way. This monster was associated with water in the legend and was, in_ all probability the crocodile. Spencer and Gillen (6) record a traditional story from Central Australia in which the aborigines speak of the time when the country was covered with salt water, which was gradually withdrawn toward the north, as the people of that country wanted to get it and keep it for themsclves. Mr. H. Y. L. Brown (3) records the finding of crocodilian remains on War- burton and Diamentina Rivers in 1892, and Mr. R. Etheridge, jun. (5) describes these remains as those of crocodiles, and suggests their geological age as being 248 Tertiary or Post-Tertiary. The finds made by Mr. Brown are exhibited in the South Australian Museum. Summarising, then, we have :— (a) That the crocodile was alive in South Australia in Pleistocene times. (b) That native legends refer to a creature resembling a crocodile. (c) Man is known to have lived in other parts of the world during the Pleistocene, and there is ne evidence to show he did not exist on this continent during that time. (d) Records do not show that the natives of this area ever visited the present habitat of the crocodile; in fact, the aborigine rarely travels beyond the borders of his own tribal area, According to Etheridge (5) the Crocodilus porosus is not known to extend further south than the Boyne River, Port Curtis, Central Queensland. (e) It is hardly possible that the native would have carved a design having so many points of resemblance to this saurian if he had not have known it intimately. Therefore, the balance of evidence suggests that the aborigine was contem- porary with the crocodile in South Australia and that this carving was executed during that period, that is, Pleistocene times. If so, then we have a very definite link in the somewhat meagre chain con- cerning the antiquity of man in Australia. LITERATURE. (1) Mountrorn—Aust. Assoc. Adv. Se., 1928, pp. 337-366. (2) Basepow—Journ. Roy. Anthrop. Inst. Gt. Brit., 1914; pp. 195-211. (3) Brown—South Australia, Parliamentary Papers, No, 141, 1892. (5) ETHERIDGE, JUN.—South Australia, Parliamentary Papers, No. 25, 1894. (6) SPENCER AND GILLEN—“Native Tribes of Central Australia,” p. 388. (7) Grecory—“The Dead Heart of Australia,” p. 230. (9) Hate anp Trnpare—Records S. Aus. Museum, vol. iii., No. 1, 1925, pp. 52-57. (10) Hare anp TinpaLce—S. Aust. Naturalist, vol. x., No. 2, p. 30. (11) Harris—Public Service Review, 1903, pp. 21-22. 249 MAGMATIC DIFFERENTIATION AT MANNUM, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. By A. R. AtperMAN, M.Sc. [Read August 8, 1929.] The object of this paper is an attempt to show the relationship between what appeared to be an acidic and a basic phase of the granite which occurs at Mannum, in South Australia. The rocks, here described, occur on the eastern bank of the River Murray, at Section 156 in the Hundred of Younghusband. B. F. Goode“) has published a petrographic description of the Mannum granite, which is quarried extensively in this locality. The outcrop of granite is only a small one, and it occurs as an inlier amid the surrounding plains of fossiliferous Tertiary and Recent deposits. Goode describes it as “a narrow strip of granite, about threc-eights of a mile in length, with a maximum width of nearly a hundred yards.” The granite itself is of a pink colour, and is coarsely even-grained. ‘The pink colour is due to the preponderance of flesh-coloured orthoclase felspar, which, with smoky quartz and scattered flakes of biotite mica, constitute the essential minerals of the rock. Cutting across the main outcrop of granite in a S.E.-N.W. direction may be seen a number of dykes of a rock of aplitic facies. The width of these dykes varies from about an inch up to about three feet. These aplitic dykes occur, for the most part, at the northern end of the granite outcrop. Further south than this, and running in a direction parallel to the above- mentioned aplitic dykes, occurs a dyke of dark basic rock. This is approximately two feet wide, and crosses the granite outcrop from side to side. It is quite evident from the structure and nature of all these dykes, that they were formed subsequently to the solidification of the granite. This paper gives the results of an attempt by the writer to discover what relationship these dyke-rocks bear to the normal granite of the area. From a superficial survey of the occurrence, it would appear that the rock of aplitic facies and the basic rock were probably representative of an acidic and a basic phase respectively, which was formed by the differentiation, at great depth, of a magma, which is now represented by the normal Mannum granite. Petrographical examinations were made of both of these dyke-rocks. Prerrocrapiic DEscripriOoN OF THE APLiTIc Rock. Macroscopic Features. A fine-grained holocrystalline rock of a brownish pink colour. The grain- size is very even, except for a few scattered individuals, which are rather larger than the majority. Minerals distinguishable in the hand-specimen are felspar, quartz and biotite. The felspar is the most prominent mineral present, and being flesh-coloured, gives to the rock a pink tinge. The quartz has a vitreous lustre and the larger individuals have a dark smoky appearance. The biotite is present only in very small flakes, which are black, and are distributed throughout the rock in a very even manner. None of these minerals show idiomorphic outlines in the hand-specimen. Microscopic Features. A holocrystalline fine-grained rock. The average diameter of the grains, which is very constant in the sections examined, is about 0-3 mm. ‘The rock Q) B. F. Goode, “Ihe Mannum Granite,’ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. li, 1927, p. 126. _ 250 texture is allotriomorphic granular. No trace of fluidal arrangement of the minerals is noticeable. The minerals present are the following -— Felspar—This group is represented by three distinct forms, including both plagioclase and potash varieties. The plagioclase is in excess of the other varieties, and is very often clouded by dusty decomposition products. The maximum extinction angles observed on a plane normal to 010 give the composition as Ab,, An.,, or a normal oligoclase. The refractive index is slightly higher than that of Canada Balsam. The twinning in the sections examined is almost entirely on the Albite law, Carlsbad twins: being extremely rare. Occasional graphic intergrowths with quartz may be seen. An interesting point is the unusual alteration which some of the plagioclase seems to have undergone. In several cases may be seen a zone of clear plagioclase surrounding an aggregation of some colourless mineral of high refractive index. This mineral, which occupies the inner zone, strongly resembles calcite in its birefringence and refractive index. A resemblance to cancrinite was also shown, but this idea was discarded owing to the very low refractive index of cancrinite. Microchemical methods were applied, and the mineral in question was found to give off bubbles of gas (supposedly carbon dioxide) on being treated with hydro- chloric acid, A small amount of stain (malachite green) was also absorbed by the mineral. Taking into account its properties, both optical and chemical, and its relation to the surrounding plagioclase, the probability is that it is an aggregate of calcite and kaolinitic material formed by the alteration of an inner, more calcic, zone of basic plagioclase. As the crystallisation of the rock progressed, an outer zone of more sodic, acid plagioclase was formed, which did not suffer the same decomposition, : Microcline is, for the most part, clear and undecomposed. It shows the usual cross-hatching due to twinning on both the Albite and Pericline laws. The twin lamellae, as is usual in microcline, are irregular and spindle-shaped. Judging by the chemical composition of the rock, the writer was led to suspect that the microcline was a soda variety. Reference was made to certain standard works on mineralogy, and the writer was very surprised at the lack of information concerning methods by which the soda varieties of microcline may be distinguished from the potash varieties in a rock section. The only point which is commonly mentioned concerns the comparative thinness of the twin lamellae in the soda varieties, and this could hardly be called a satisfactory test. H. A. Alling, in his. work on “The Mincralogy of the Feldspars,”’?) comments on the paucity of information on the subject. Alling’s tests are not readily applicable to work on thin sections, and apart from the fact that the soda content of the potash felspars is mostly a good deal higher than is generally recognised, very little information could be obtained on the subject. The microcline occurring in this rock varies in the thickness of the twit lamellae from one individual crystal to another, The refractive index is slightly lower than that of Canada Balsam. Normal orthoclase is present, but to a far less extent than the felspars already mentioned. Some of the individual crystals are very much decomposed to a dusty aggregate, which renders them hard to distinguish from plagioclase. Occasional Carlsbad twins occur, and rarely a micrographic intergrowth of orthoclase and quartz may be observed. Quartz occurs in clear, colourless, anhedral grains with very few inclusions. It is present in great quantity, being second only to felspar in order of magnitude. A somewhat shadowy extinction, due to strain, may often be noticed in the quartz. (2) Journ, Geol., xxix, 1921, and xxxi, 1923. 251 Biotite is plentifully distributed throughout the rock in small flakes only. It is often associated with apatite and magnetite, which are frequently included in the biotite. The pleochroism of the biotite is from pale brown to a darker greenish brown. In some sections this mineral has undergone a slight amount of change to chlorite, which is of a pale green colour and pleochroic. Only rarely were pleochroic haloes observed in the biotite. They then occurred surrounding a minute crystal of colourless zircon. ‘he biotite was apparently ane of the first minerals to crystallise. Primary muscovite mica is not as plentiful as biotite, and in contrast to that mineral occurs only very irregularly. Secondary sericitic mica occurs as an altera- tion product of felspar. Calcite occurs both as an interstitial mineral and also in connection with the decomposition of the calcic felspars. Titaniferous iron ore, which is black and opaque, occurs irregularly through- out the section. A certain amount of white leucowvene is associated with it. Sphene is present in occasional irregular masses, and sometimes shows the wedge-shaped outlines typical ‘of the mineral. In colour it is greyish-brown, and displays a feeble pleochroism. It has undergone marked decomposition to a brownish amorphous material. Apatite is not plentiful, but very small rod-like forms occur, and occasionally larger anhedral masses, often associated with the opaque iron ore. Zircon occurs in small quantity, sometimes showing euhedral outlines. It also occurs in the biotite, surrounded by a pleochroic halo. A chemical analysis of this rock was made by the writer, the results of which are given below. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE APLIric Rocx. Per cent. Per cent. Silica (SI0,.) .. .. .. 7349 Carbon dioxide (CO.) .. Trace Alumina (AIO, ) Es 14°14 Titanium dioxide (TiO,) .. 0°25 Ferric oxide (Fe,O,) 1:26 Zirconium dioxide (ZrO,).. Trace Ferrous oxide (FeO) .. 0°69 Phosphorus pentoxide (P,O;) O-ll Magnesia (MgO) ee) O44 Sulphur (S) .. 0°05 Calcium oxide (CaO) 1:60 Chromic oxide (Cr,0, ) .. None Soda (Na,O) ~ 3°75 Manganous oxide (MnO) .. 0:02 Potash (K,O) .. 3°67 Barium oxide (BaO) .. .. None Water eee ne (H, O-+) 0:34 Water (hygroscopic) (H,O-) 0°13 Total .. .. 99°94 ‘The specific gravity is 2°70, THe Norm. Percentage. Quartz .. 1... ‘OE Q = 34:08 | Orthoclase .. .. .. .. 21°68 Albite .. 1. 6. 4. 4. 31-44 F = 60°35 | Salic Group = Anorthite .. 0... 0... 2. 7128 95°76% Corundum .. .. 1733 C = 1°33 Enstatite (hypersthene) .. 1:10 P= 1:10 Iimenite . .. 0°46 Magnetite .. .. .. .. ODL M= 1:69 Femic Group = Haematite .. .. .. .. 0°32 3°37% Pyrite se o¢ wae 4 a, O24 , Apatite te owe ee we) 6084 COA = «(058 Water... 0:47 In the CLI. P. Ww. “sassttionted the position of the rock is, therefore :— ag PA ty The magmatic name is Toscanose. 252 Discussion of the Analysis, ‘This analysis shows several points of interest when compared with Goode’s analysis of the granite. Silica and lime are distinctly higher than in the granite, and magnesia slightly so. Soda is practically the same in both analyses, iron is about one per cent. lower. However, the greatest point of difference is in the potash content, which in the aplitic rock is nearly two per cent. less than in the granite. In the following table the above analysis may be compared with that of the Mannum granite, and also with several well-known granites occurring within a comparatively short distance of Mannum. Also given is the composition of a tonalite situated half-way between Mannum and Palmer. ‘The outcrops of this tonalite occur nearer to the Mannum granite quarries than any other known igneous rock in the district. A point of interest is the similarity in composition of the aplitic rock with the granites quoted from Palmer, Swanport and Monarto :— A. B. C. D. E. KF. SiO, .. .. 73°49 70°77 = 73°96 72°42 74-20 63°88 Al,O, .. .. 14°14 13-69 13°67 15:49 14°53 16°37 Fe,O, .. .. 1:26 1:97 1-22 0-44 1-14 1:99 FeO 0-69 0-97 1-03 1-03 0-90 2°96 MgO 0-44 0-34 0:56 0-20 0-20 2°24 CaQ 1-60 0-94 1-56 1-44 1-00 5-18 Na.O 3°75 3:70 3-01 4-30 3:06 3°66 K.O 3°67 5°68 3°36 3°78 3°55 1-61 H,O+ 0°34 0-45 0-04 0-12 0-15 0°45 H,O- 0-13 0-36 0-29 0-18 0-15 0°21 Co, Trace — 0-22 0-04 0-11 None TiO, .. .. 0°25 0-72 0:37 0:22 0-29 0°86 P.O, .. .. Ol] 0-11 0-16 0-19 0-08 0-23 Other constit. .. 0°07 0°45 0:31 0°13 0-16 0-07 Total .. 99-94 100-15 99-76 99-98 99-52 99°71 A. Aplitic rock, Mannum. Anal., A. R. Alderman. B. Granite, Mannum. Anal, B. F. Goode (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. li, 1927, p. 127). C. Granite, Palmer. Anal., W. S. Chapman (Geol. Surv. S. Austr., bull. 10, 1923, 68). p. D. Granite, Monarto. Anal, W. S. Chapman (Geol. Surv. S. Austr., bull. 10, 1923, p. 68 ©, Granite, Swanport. Anal., W.S. Chapman (Geol. Surv. S. Austr., bull. 10, 1923, p. 68). I. Tonalite, near Mannum. Anal, A. R. Alderman (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. li, 1927, p. 21). Pretrocraruic DESCRIPTION OF TITE Basic Rock. Macroscopic Features. Examined in the hand-specimen, this rock is very dark in colour, heavy, and finely holocrystalline. Except for a few larger rectangular crystals of felspar of porphyritic habit, the rock is even-grained. Minerals distinguishable in the hand- specimen are:—(1) Felspar in long lath-like forms, and occasional larger crystals which show a rectangular outline. These are colourless, with a somewhat opalescent appearance. (2) A black ferromagnesian mineral, apparently horn- blende. (3) Black flakes of biotite mica; this being but rarely seen. (4) Brass- yellow specks of pyrites. 253 From the appearance, structure, and the apparent degree of basicity, as judged in the hand-specimen, the rock would probably be classed as a lamprophyre. Microscopic Features. In thin section, this rock is seen to consist essentially of plagioclase and green hornblende, with smaller amounts of biotite and iron ore. No trace of fluidal arrangement is evident, although the lath-like form of the felspar crystals would be particularly adapted to the preservation of such structure. The rock is holo- crystalline, and owing to the fact that the crystallisation of some of the felspar has preceded that of the remainder of the rock, a texture is produced in which subhedral felspars occur in an allotriomorphic granular base. The average diameter of the grains in the groundmass is about -25 mm. The large felspars ate, however, considerably larger than this; the largest one seen in the hand- specimen measured nearly a centimetre along its longest axis. The minerals present are the following :— Plagioclase, both in large subhedral crystals and in smaller lath-like anhedrouns. The composition of the plagioclase is different in these two classes. Determina- tions were made by means of the maximum extinction angles observed on a plane normal to 010. The large porphyritic crystals gave a composition of Ab,, Ang,, which is a fairly basic labradorite. The smaller felspars of the groundmass gave a composition equivalent to Ab,, An;., which is an acid labradorite. This decrease in basicity from the earlier crystallising plagioclase to that which crystallised later, is what would be expected. Carlsbad twins are quite common, in addition to the usual Albite twinning. ‘The refractive index of all the felspar is higher than that of Canada Balsam. The effects of strain are shown by the development of “secondary twinning.” After the felspar, primary hornblende is the most important mineral. When viewed in ordinary light it is pale green in colour. In polarised light it shows a strong pleochroism, the colour varying from pale brown to dark green. It con- tains numerous minute inclusions of magnetite, often arranged parallel to the cleavage traces. None of the hornblende present shows euhedral or even sub- hedral outlines. Biotite is far less plentiful than hornblende, but is regularly distributed throughout the sections in fair quantity. The pleochroism of the mineral is normal and strong. The biotite has apparently been very resistant to alteration in any form; only in very rare cases may a slight change to chlorite be observed. The opaque minerals are apparently of three different kinds. [/menite, shown by its change to leucoxene, is plentiful, and is scattered in irregular grains throughout the rock. Pyrites, generally in larger grains, is, however, not as plentiful as ilmenite. It occasionally shows its cubic form. Magnetite occurs as minute inclusions in the hornblende. Apatite, as an accessory mineral, is plentiful. It is present, sometimes: in small irregular grains, but generally in its characteristic rod-like form. The presence of a small amount of sphene is interesting in a rock of this degree of basicity, as all the other rocks described from this area contain this mineral. The sphene present in this rock is pleochroic, and is of a light-brown colour. It occurs in irregular anhedrons. The order of crystallisation seems to have been:—(1) iron ore, (2) basic labradorite, (3) acid labradorite, (4) biotite, (5) hornblende. 254 B. F. Goode has made a chemical anatysis of this rock, the resulis of which are given below :— CuEMiIcaL Composition or THE Basic Rock. Per cent. Per cent. Silica (SiO,) tee ee 46°79 Soda (Na.O) .. «ew. 388 Alumina (A1,0,) .. .. 18:09 Potash (K.O) 2. «2. (O77 Ferric oxide (Fe.O,) .. 407 Water (H.O) .. .. «. = 040 Ferrous oxide (1*cO) item FD Titanium dioxide (T:10,) .. 1°99 Magnesia (MgQ) Bo ae Sl Phosphorus pentoxide(P.O,;) 0°46 Calcium oxide (CaO) 2 O67 Emenee Total .. .. 99°98 The specific gravity is 3:03. ‘THE NORM, Percentage. Orthoclase .. 2... e445 Albite co os os au Be “@A528 F = 63:39 | Salic Group = Anorthite .. .. .. .. 3169 64°24% Nepheline 2.00.00. 2. 0°85 L= 0-85 Diopside Ws way Set gle. LUR6Y P = 10°69 ] Olivine .. 2.006. we ee) «18°92 O = 13-92 Ilmenite Me tte ee pe pO \ Femic Group = Magnetite .. .. .. .. 603 M= 9°83 35°45% Apatite... .. 2... .. 10l A = 1-01 Water .. .. .. .. «. 0°40 In the C.L.P.W. classification the position of the rock is, therefore -— It., 5, 4, 4-5. The magmatic name is Hessose. Discussion of the Analysis. No points of special interest are disclosed by these figures, the results of analysis appearing normal in every way. Perhaps the most notable point is the high percentage of titanium. The low silica percentage (46°79) places the rock in the basic class, and the absolute dominance of basic plagioclase (i.e., labradorite) makes it a member of the calc-alkali series. These facts, together with the mode of occurrence and the mineralogical character of the rock, class it as a hornblende-lamprophyre. The name hornblende-lamprophyre is preferred to that ot Spessartite, which was suggested by Rosenbusch for a lamprophyre of this description. Comparison of the Analyses of the Mannum Rocks. ‘The interpretation of the results obtained by the chemical analysis of such rocks is necessarily a difficult matter. It is obvious that some method of graphi- cally representing chemical analyses will often show points of interest whicti would not be realized directly from the analyses themselves. The method of comparison used in this paper will be that known as the “variation-diagram.” ‘The percentages of silica are taken as abscissae, and the percentages of the other main constituents are plotted as ordinates. For purposes of representation, all the iron is reckoned as ferrous. The constituents, besides silica, shown on the diagram are :—alumina, total iron, magnesia, lime, soda, and potash. It will be seen that the analysis of each rock is represented by a number of points on a vertical line. 255 VARIATION DIAGRAM FoR MAannum Rocks. Basic rock. Mannun granite. Aplitic rock, 45 50 a5 60 65 70 15 Percentage of Silica. The above variation diagram does not tend to show any simple form of relationship between the three rocks represented in it. With two exceptions, no simple gradation is shown in the proportion of the constituents from the basic end to the acidic end of the series. These two exceptions are iron and soda, the variation-curve in each case being a straight line. It will be seen from the diagram that the curves for alumina, magnesia, and lime are all concave upwards, the last- mentioned notably so. However, the point of greatest note is the behaviour of the potash line. The sharp bend downwards at the acidic end denotes an unusual variation. From these facts it would appear that if the basic rock and the acidic rock, here described, were derived by magmatic differentiation from the normal Maunum granite, then this differentiation must have been of an exceedingly complicated and abnormal kind. The point which now arises is this. Are we justified in taking the composi- tion of the Mannum granite, as is revealed to us by chemical analysis, as being representative of the original composition of the parent magma? Several points tend to show that the answer to this question should be in the negative. These points are :— (1) The general appearance of the rock. It does not possess that “plutonic facies” which is generally associated with a normal bathylithic granite. The great preponderance of felspar in the rock helps to give it the appearance which it possesses. 256 (2) The small extent of the occurrence. This fact suggests that the granite represents some small “cupola” at the roof of a huge granitic bathylith. It is reasonable to expect that the lighter, more felspathic portions of the magma would be found at the top of the intrusion, that is particularly in the cupolas. Thi point is supported by— (3) The chemical composition of the rock. As can be seen by reference to the chemical analyses quoted earlier in this paper, the Mannum granite differs from the other South Australian granites which occur within a reasonable distance of it. Particularly is it different in its potash content. As has been suggested above, this may be accounted for by the concentration of felspar at the roof of a bathylithic intrusion. These points naturally introduce another question. If, then, we do not regard the granitic rock at Mannum as being truly representative of the parent magma, what rock can we find which fulfils these requirements? In a case such as this the distance factor is an exceedingly important one. Therefore, the rock which may very well be considered first is the tonalite, which occurs roughly halfway between the townships of Mannum and Palmer and has been described by the writer.) It is very probable that this tonalite extends below the surface covering of Tertiary sediments and Recent alluvial for a con- siderable distance in the direction of the Mannum granite quarries. 2 In order to compare the chemical compositions of the Mannum dyke rocks with the tonalite, use has been made of the same type of variation diagram as was previously employed. VARIATION DraGRAM ror TONALITE AND Mannum Dyke Rocks. a L3] ° a) ° . 20 < 2 2 3 of C) co) A 2 3 18 iumina, FE & # ” > 16 i oo < 14-4 45 50 55 60 65 710 15 Percentage of Silica. (3) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. Ji, 1927, pp. 20-22, 257 A glance at the above diagram is sufficient to show the great difference between this and the previous one. The relationship of each constituent is of the simplest kind, there being definite gradation from one rock to another, as is shown by the straight lines, or almost straight lines of each variation-curve. From the linear variation of the constituents of these rocks, it would appear highly improbable that the rocks were not very closely related, and that the differentiation was not of a very simple type. Dr. A. Holmes,“ discussing linear variation-diagrams, says “the fact that even with three analyses a straight line diagram is achieved, indicates that the rocks concerned are related in an unusually simple way.” The fact that these rocks are very closely related to one another does not, however, show that the tonalite is the parent rock from which the Mannum dykes have been differentiated. Although the possibility of this must, of course, be considered, it must be admitted that the probability of it is not very great. Previously, in this paper, attention has been drawn to the fact that the aplitic rock at Mannum bears a great resemblance chemically to the granites occurring at Palmer, at Monarto, and at Swanport. In the case of all these rocks, for instance, the soda and potash in each are very nearly the same. It thus appears to the writer that the dyke rocks at Mannum and the tonalite were derived from a granitic magma, which was not very different in composition to the granites of Palmer, Monarto and Swanport. ‘The average of the compositions of these three granites for the main constituents is :— Per cent. Per cent. SiO, wa ey 48-34 as LOeS9 MgOQ-> osc 42 week oh ue 0:32 fig, 4t an ie ag a> ESD Wate onl we ae Fe@e oh a as Sac ya 10F93 Nao .. .. ww 1...) 346 FeO ces: neg wky 0:99 K,O one of, gt gt 3°56 The similarity of these averages to the composition of the acidic dyke rock from Mannum is very striking. It seems possible to the writer that the granites of Palmer, Monarto and Swanport are all derived from one parent magma, the slight lithological and chemical differences being but local variations, and that the tonalite and the dyke rocks of the Mannum district are very simply related to the same magma. The Mannum granite was very probably derived from the same source by a more complicated method of differentiation. SUMMARY, Chemical analysis of the basic and aplitic dyke rocks at Mannum, shows no simple relationship between these rocks and the granite in which they occur. These dyke rocks, however, seem to be very simply related to a tonalite which occurs in the neighbourhood. The Mannum granite was very probably derived from the same magma as the tonalite and the dyke rocks, by a more icomplex method of differentiation. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, The thanks of the writer are due to Professor Sir Douglas Mawson for his help and advice, and also for placing the facilities of the geological laboratories of the University of Adelaide at the writer’s disposal. He also wishes to thank Mr. B. F. Goode for permission to use the analysis of the Mannum lamprophyre. Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. (4) “Petrographic Methods,” 1921, p. 446. 258 THE CRYSTAL FORMS OF PYROMORPHITE AND STOLZITE. By J. O. G. Grasronsury, B.Sc., and F. J. SEMMENs, B.Sc. (Communicated by C. T. Madigan, M.A., B.Sc., F.G.S.) [Read September 12, 1929.] The purpose of this contribution is to place on record the forms assumed by certain well-crystallised minerals occurring at Broken Hill. The nomenclature of the faces is that employed by Barker in his “Graphical and Tabular Methods in Crystallography.” The angular measurements were obtained by means of Goldschmidt’s two- circle goniometer, which admits of determinations accurate to 30”. The system of recording the position of faces is that of two-circle work, not the zone method of single-circle goniometry. The ¢ readings are on the vertical circle, and the p readings on the horizontal. PYROMORPTUITE FROM Broken Hitt, N.S.W. Well-developed crystals of pyromorphite were obtained from Broken Hill, N.S.W. Their colour is yellow, with resinous lustre. The crystals are small and often bunched together, so that usually they are singly terminated. Some occur in vughs, where they attain perfect form. It was with these crystals that we worked mainly. From measurements of crystals which, owing to their contact with others, had the faces at one end suppressed, we found that the forms developed were essentially the same as those crystals which, owing to more favour- able circumstances, were fully developed. Pyromorphite is in the pyramidal hemihedral class of the hexagonal system. The c-axis, calculated from the measurement of the angle OOO1A1011 (= 40° 22’) of several crystals from Broken Hill, is 0°7362, which agrees with Haidinger’s determination as recorded in Dana (1). There are two common types of crystal. One is very simple, consisting of a hexagonal prism m, i a hexagonal bi-pyramid /, , and basal planes ¢ (see fig. 1). The other type is similar to the first, but it has a second order hexagonal prism, s developed as well (fig. 2). We observed that the dull brown variety of pyromorphite, which looks like clusters of small cauliflowers, does not exhibit this second order prism. This is true of this coloured variety found at Broken Hill, and also of similar material from Ems, Nassau. ©. Bowles (2) observed this form (1120) on wax yellow crystals from the Society Girl Mine in South-Eastern British Columbia, but he, too, did not observe it in any of the brown crystals with which he worked. It thus seems that this face is found only on the yellow variety of pyromorphite. The crystals are prismatic in habit, elongated parallel to the c-axis. The prismatic faces often do not exhibit perfect parallelism but converge towards the end of the c-axis, thus giving the crystals a barrel shape. Bowles points out that this non-parallelism is due to vicinal faces, but he does not mention the fact that curvature takes place towards both ends of the c-axis, thus producing the barrel shape of the crystals. 259 No twinned crystals were ceen, although they are recorded by Klein (3) and Bowles. The angular measurements obtained, and the forms present, are shown in the table :— Forms mt 5 c p (1010) (1120) (0001) (1011) c 90° 60° — 90° Pp 90° 90° Q° 40° 22’ STOLZITE FROM BrokeEN Hitt, N.S.W. Some small crystals of stolzite from the Proprietary Mine, Broken Hill, N.S.W., are to be seen in the ‘late Museum, University of Adelaide. These crystals are of an orange colour, and occur on the surface of black manganiferous material in the zone of solution. They are extremely well crystallised, and faces are quite often developed at both ends of the crystal. Stolzite is in the Tetragonal system, and shows pyramidal hemihedrism. The c-axis, calculated from the angle 001A101 (= 57° 27’) is 1:5667, agree- ing with Kerndt (Dana), but not with C. Hlawatsch, who is quoted as giving 1-5607 in Dana (4), Three combinations of crystal forms were noticed; two of these being very common, and the third much rarer. Of the two common types, both of which were simpler than the third, one was very simple indeed, consisting of a tetragonal by-pyramid of the first order, o, a tetragonal by-pyramid of the second order, gq, and basal planes, c (fig. 3). The other was more complex, having, in addition, two-third order by-pyramids, x, and y (fig. 4). This type showed that stolzite belongs to the Pyramidal Hemihedral class of the Tetragonal system, and not to the full symmetry class. as the first type would lead one to think. The third type was much rarer; in fact, of some twenty specimens measured, only two showed these forms. 260 This type has, in addition to the forms mentioned above, three other second order by-pyramids, d, ¢, and s; and also a first order tetragonal prism, m, and a. second order tetragonal prism, 6. The third order tetragonal by-pyramid, y (212), has not previously been recorded. The angular measurements obtained, and the forms developed, are :— Forms ¢ d e q $s x 0 m y b (aad) (013) (023) coll) (021) (133) (111) (110) (212) (010) ca) the) ge 9° ge 189 28! 45° 450 63° 26! 0° p qo 27037! 469154 57027" 720184 S9O19F 65°43! 90° 6009! 909 In several crystals the first order tetragonal bi-pyramid, 0, was striated parallel to the edge (111)—(110). In these cases the reflections obtained were not well defined. Some crystals exhibited twinning, but we were unable to determine the type. We are decply indebted to Mr. C. T. Madigan for much advice and encourage ment in this work. ; ; Geological |.ahoratory, University of Adelaide. List or REFERENCES. 1. Hawrncer—Dana, “System of Mineralogy,” p. 770. 2. O. Bowtes—Am. J. Sc., v. xxviii., p. 40, 1909; v. xxxii., p. 114, 1911. 3. Krein—Dana, “System of Mineralogy, App. 1.” 4. C. A. Hrawarscin—Dana, “System of Mineralogy, App. II.” 261 ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. No. 27. By J. M. Brack, [Read September 12, 1929.] GRAMINEAE. Danthonia geniculata, nov. sp. Culmi tenues, 10-35 cm. alti, prope basin saepe geniculati; folia filiformia pubescentia, radicalia dense caespitosa, 4-6 cm. longa, caulina brevia distantia; panicula densa 14-24 cm. longa, 1-14 cm. lata, 9-15-spiculata ; spiculae 4-5-flores, glumis exterioribus latis, 6-8 mm. longis, e viridi pallentibus; gluma florifera usque ad ortum aristae 2-2} mm. longa, ad basin et supra medium annulo pilorum cincta vel pilis superioribus subsparsis, lobis lateralibus 4-55 mm. longis lanceolatis et brevissime aristatis, arista centrali jis vix longiore; palea obovata obtusa dorso pubescens, 24mm. longa. Keith; Bordertown; Dismal Swamp (near Mount Gambier); Millicent; Kangaroo Island—Victoria (Hawkesdale), Resembles in habit D. carphoides with smaller spikelets, but the 2 lateral lobes of the flowering glume are twice as long as the basal part, lanceolate instead of ovate and taper into distinct awns; the palea is also much smaller. Danthonia auriculata, nov. sp. Culmi tenues, 20-30 cm. alti, interdum geniculati; folia pilis patentibus pubescentia, filiformia vel caulina planiuscula et circiter 2 mm. lata; panicula densa interdum ad racemum reducta, 14-3 cm. longa, 15-2 cm. lata, 4-15-spiculata; spiculae 5-8-flores, aristis glumas exteriores latas cymbiformes pallide virides 10-13 mm. longas superantibus, pedicellis 2-3 mm. longis; gluma florifera usque ad ortum aristae 3 mm. longa, ad basin et supra medium annulo conspictio pilorum cincta, lobis lateralibus 7-10 mm. longis, in aristam gracilem pro plus quam dimidio Jongitudinis eorum angustatis, utroque lobo auricula triangulari mcmbranaceA ad basin marginis exterioris instruct, arista centrali quam lobi laterales 2-3 mm, longiore; palea ovato-cuneata obtusa, 4 mm. longa, dorso pubescens. Adelaide plains and foothills; Jamestown, Bundalecr Hills. This species also resembles D. carphoides externally, but is distinguished both from that species and from D. geniculata by the longer and long-awned lateral lobes, the longer central awn, and especially by the small triangular membraneous auricle at the base of each of the 2 lateral lobes, where they are joined to the basal part of the flowering glume. CYPERACEAE. Cladium monocarpum, nov. comb. = Schoenus monocarpus, J. M. Black in Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A. 52: 225 (1928). Back Valley, near Inman River; Breakneck River, K.I., coll. J. B. Cleland. This plant appears to be better placed in Cladiwm than in Schoenus, the rhachilla of the spikelets being straight and not flexuose between the flowers. Like C. capillaceum (Benth.) C. B. Clarke it has the glumes subdistichous and close together, but the stems are not so slender, the spikelets are longer and the nut is not crowned by the thickened base of the style. Cladium gracile, nov. sp. Caules plani debiles striati, 12-20 cm. alti, minus quam 1 mm. lati; folia basalia, equitantes, saepe longiora quam caulis, plana, linearia, acuta, striata, circiter 1 mm. lata; spiculae circiter 3-6, distantes, pedi- cellatae, racemum laxum vel paniculam formantes; bracteae vaginantes, inferiores 262 planiusculae, laminis brevibus debilibus erectis, superiores glumiformes; spiculac 4-5 mm, longae, l-flores; glumae subdistichae, brunneae, acutae, una alterave vacua, proxima superior florem triandrum trigynum atque glumam vacuam parvam complicatam includens; nux obovoidea, trigona, cum apice rotundato pubescente. Breakneck River, Kangaroo Island. Differs from C. acutiam (Labill.) Poir. in the weak, not rigid leaves and much looser panicle; from the West Australian C. laxum (Nees) Benth. by the smaller stature, narrower leaves and fewer spikelets, with only 1 flower instead of 2-3. LEGUMINOSAE, Acacia microcarpa, F. v. M. nov. var. linearis. Phyllodia late linearia, 3-6 cm. longa, 24-3 mm. lata, mucronata; legumen supra semina 5 mm. latum.—Near Monarto South. Acacia peuce, F. v. M. Specimens of this rare species were collected by Dr. Ward on Andado Station, C. Aust., about 60 miles north of our border. More recently Professor Cleland and Mr. Madigan received samples of the phyllodia at Birdsville, Old., to which place they had been brought by Mr, L. Reese, owner of Minnie Downs Station, which is in South Australia, close to the Queensland border. They were collected about 15 miles north of the boundary of our State. At Andado Station this Acacia forms a small and strictly localized grove of trees up to 12 m. high and called the “Sheoaks” on account of the resemblance due to the drooping branchlets and siender phyllodes. The type came from north of Wills Creek, Old., and Mueller described the phyllodia as “2-4 inches long.” Some of them are, however, fully 25 cm. (nearly 10 inches) long, very slender, rigid but fragile, conspicuously tetragonous and pale in colour. The pod is flat, up to 15 cm. long and 4 cm. broad. The seeds are transverse, distant, compressed, ovate, about 10 mm. long. Withered flowers show that the sepals are usually 5, scarcely 1 mm. long, linear-lanceolate, ciliate, shortly united near base, the petals 24 mm. long, acuminate, glabrous, united near base. The shape and size of the flowerhead is not yet known. The type, collected during Howitt’s expedition and delivered to Baron von Mueller, had evidently only short phyllodes, but the tree is accurately described —‘‘Pini vel Casuarinae imaginem exhibens.” Specimens of the wood, turned and polished in Adelaide, display varied and beautiful colours. Near Birdsville, according to Mr. Reese, the tree is named “Waddy.” RUTACEAE, Correa calycina, nov. sp. Frutex ramulis laxe tomentosis; folia oblonga vel ovato-oblonga obtusa crassiuscula, 2-4 cm. longa, supra glabrescentia viridia, subtus pallidiora stellato-pubescentia; peduncult brevissimi; calyx subcampant- latus, circa 12 mm. longus, extus sparse stellato-pilosus, intus stellato-tomentosus, lobis latis, breviter acuminatis, tubum subacquantibus; petala cohaerentia, 20-25 mm. longa, rubescentia vel subviridia ; stamina exserta, 4 flamentis alternis valde dilatatis ; ovarium sericeum. Upper Waterlall, Hindmarsh Valley. Differs from. C. refleva in the natrower, greener leaves, larger calyx with much longer lobes; has somewhat the aspect of C. aemula, but the leaves are obtuse and mostly narrower and the calyx- lobes broader and never conspicuously longer than the tube, while the petals cohere, and the peduncles are very short and without bracts. C. calycina has, so far, been found only in the one locality ; collector, J. B. Cleland. COMPOSITAE. Helichrysum ambiguum, Turcz. nov. var. paucisetunt, Variat, ut typus, magnitudine et indumento foliorum; pappi setae 4-8 in floribus bisexualibus, 263 aliquae aut omnes basi dilatatae et denticulatae, supra basin defractae; flores feminei sine pappo in omnibus capitulis inspectis. South Australia (Cordillo Downs and Hamilton Bore, coll. J. B. Cleland; Ooldea, coll. Mrs. Daisy Bates;) Central Australia (Idracowra, coll. R. Tate: Depot Sandhills, River Finke, coll. S. A. White;) Western Australia (Barrow Range, coll. R. Helms). Helichrysum Basedowti. The collation of further specimens shows that this species, described by me in these Transactions 52: 230 (1928) cannot be separated from Leptorrhynchus tetrachaetus var. penicillatus, J. M. Black in Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A. 45:19 (1921). It appears to me to be worthy of specific rank and to be better placed in Lelichrysum. Its distribution extends from the Flinders Range to our northern boundary in the Musgrave Ranges, and it will probably be found in Central Australia. Basedowia helichrysoides, E. Pritzel in Fedde, Rep. 15: 360 (1918). An inspection of the type of Humea tenerrima, F. v. M. et Tate in Proc. Roy. Sac. S.A. 16: 368 (1896), lent by the Victorian National Herbarium, proves that these names are conspecific, and I have already altered the name in the Flora of South Australia to “Basedowia tenerrima (F. v. M.) nov. comb.” Neither specimen shows the base of this delicate little plant, which appears to be very rare. Muellet’s specimen. was collected by R. Helms near Mount Itbillec (Everard Range); Pritzel’s by Dr. Basedow “in central part of South Australia.” Athrixia tenella, Benth. nov. var. horripes. Pedunculi squaniis plumosis superne instructi, quae squamae bracteas exteriores involucri simulant—-Karoonda (Murray lands). This form approaches the West Australian 4. Croniniana. F. v. M., but the pappus-bristles are those of A. tenella. Myriocephalus rhizocephalus, (DC.) Benth. nov. var. pluriflora. Capitula partialia 4-5-flora, bracteis 5-7 lanatissimis~——Flinders Range (between Lakes Torrens and Frome). Sonchus megalocarpus (Hook. f.), nov. comb. Herba perennis robusta erecta stolonifcra, 20-60 cm. alta; folia crassa coriacea, caulina oblonga in lobos rottindatos aculeato-dentatos pinnatifida vel indivisa et sinuato-dentata, omnia auriculis latis rotundatis amplexicaulia ; capitula in corymbos inaequales disposita ; involucrum 18-20 mm. longum glabrum vel in bracteis exterioribus subsetosum ; achaenia ovato-oblonga straminea vel brunnea, 6-7 mm, longa, 2-3 mm. lata alis adnumeratis, absque 3 costis longitudinalibus laevia.—S. asper, Hill var. megalo- carpus, Hook, f. Fl. Tasm. 1:227 (1860) ; var. littoralis, J. M. Black, Nat. FI. S.A. 104 (1909), et probabiliter var. ittoralis, Kirk in Trans. N.Z. Inst. 26: 265 (1894). Chiefly sandhills along the coast from Port Adelaide to Port MacDonnell, S.-E. —Coasts of Victoria, New South Wales, Tasmania, and, probably, New Zealand. 264 AN INTERESTING NEW THRIPS FROM AUSTRALIA. By DupLtey Movu.ron, (Communicated by Arthur M. Lea, IES.) {Read September 12, 1929. ] Puatre XI. Among a large collection of Thrips sent to me from the South Australian Museum, I found one very unusual form which is unlike anything previously known. The greatly enlarged fore legs give it the general appearance of a crab, and it would seem from the form of these legs that the species must be predaceous. The genus and species are described herewith. Carcinothrips, n. gen. (Karkinos = crab.) Head approximately twice as long as wide. Eyes large and protruding, occupying two-thirds the width of the head. Cheeks straight, constricted at base, armed with cight to ten strong spines on either side, not on warts. Antennae 8-segmented. Prothorax large and excluding coxae, broadly hexagonal in shape. Fore femora greatly enlarged, about 1°75 times as long and 1-5 times as wide as head. The armature at the end on the inside of each consisting of three strong forward directed teeth. The tibiae are reduced to small horn-shaped appendages directed inward, and each ends in two horn-shaped teeth. The two outer tecth of the femora appear to fit between the two distal teeth of the tibiae. The tarsi are extremely rudimentary and appear to be useless organs in the middle on the under- side of the tibiae. Pterothorax broad in front with nearly straight sides, narrowed posteriorly. Femora of middle and hind legs greatly broadened in the centre, strongly ovate in shape, each arising from an extremely small pedicel. Middle and hind tibiae and tarsi short and stout. Wings fully developed, broad, with parallel sides. Abdomen normal, tube slightly more than half as long as head. Type of genus Carcinothrips lear, n. sp. Carcinothrips leai, n. sp. Female holotype: Colour of bead, prothorax and fore legs brownish yellow, with teeth of fore femora decidedly darker. Antennal segments one and two brown, the second being lighter toward the tip, three to seven yellow, brown at extreme tips, eight brown. Pterothorax and abdomen dark brown, middle and hind legs concolorous with abdomen except inner sides of femora, which are shaded lighter. Wings clear. Total body length 2°74 mm.; head, length -483 mm., width at eyes -26 mmm., at middle +23 mm. ; prothorax length -30 mm., width in middle not including coxae -516 mm., including coxae ‘6 mm.; pterothorax, width -6 mm., width at posterior margin ‘43 min.; width of abdomen °55 mm.; tube, length °266 mm., width at base 10mm. Length of fore femora along outer margin to base of tibia -75 mm., from base to tip of inner tooth on the inside ‘916 mm., width in middle -383 mm. Length of middle femora -433 mm.; width in middle +233 mm.; length of hind femora °50 mm.; width in middle -266 mm. Length of spines: postoculars 265 135 mic., cheek spines 90 to 100 mic., at antcrior angles of prothorax 45 mic., mid-laterals 60 mic., outer pair on posterior angles 35 mic. (inner pair broken off). Spines on ninth abdominal segment 210 mic., at tip of tube 285 mic. Segments of antennae: length (width) I., 39 (48); I., 75 (45); IIL, 126 (39); IV., 111 (42); V.. 96 (39); VI, 75 (36); VIL 60 (2); VIIL, 30 (?); total length, 585 microns. Head slightly more than twice as long as width across cheeks, not noticeably projecting in front af eyes. Cheeks almost straight and parallel to near base. where they are constricted neck-like, without conspicuous markings, with eight to ten strong, sharp spines along either side. Postocular spines long and with pointed tips. Eves large, semi-oval, clearly protruding, facets small. Ocelli fully developed, placed far forward. Mouth cone short, extending only to middle of prosternum, broadly rounded. Antennae 8-segmented, about 1-2 times longer than head, segments three to six elongate-clavate, seven to eight closely joined but distinct; sense cones short. Prothorax broadly hexagonal in shape, with a median dorsal thickening aris- ing at one-fourth its length from anterior margin, and extending to the posterior margin. Spines at anterior angles and sides moderately small, those long anterior margin vestiginal, outer spines of posterior angles long, inner spines broken off. All spines with pointed tips. Pronotum without other markings. Pterothorax 266 broadest in anterior half, conspicuously narrowed posteriorly. Fore legs greatly enlarged and strongly armed. Each fore femur about 1:75 times as long and 1°5 times as wide as head, armed on the inside with three strong, forwardly directed teeth, the innermost of which is longest. The tibiae greatly reduced, projecting inwardly in front of the armed femora, these are horn-shaped and end in a pair of teeth which appear to fit on either side of the two longer teeth of the femora. Each tibia also with two blunt knobs on the inside which fit on either side of the shorter, outer femoral tooth. Tarsi apparently useless, appearing as rudimentary appendages on the underside near the middle of the horn-shaped tibiae. Wings fully developed, short and broad, appearing to be without double fringe hairs. Abdomen normally developed with segments two to seven of almost equal width. Tube 2°5 times longer than width at base and little more than 1:5 as long as head. Type Material: Female holotype collected by Mr. A. M. Lea and named in his honour. On Acacia sp. in September. Type deposited with South Australian Museum, Adelaide. (Moulton, No. 3,116). Type locality: Barton, South Australia. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI Carcinothrips leai Moulton. Greatly magnified. 267 THE SPREADING TENDENCY OF SOLUTIONS OF VARIOUS ACIDS AND SALTS UPON A CLEAN MERCURY SURFACE. By R. G. Mirron, M.Sc. (Communicated by R. S. Burdon, B.Sc., F.Inst.P.) [Read September 12, 1929.] I. Intropuction. 1. The Spreading of Solutions on a Mercury Surface. Attention was drawn in 1925, in a paper by Burdon,“) to a number of phenomena which accompany the spreading of drops of distilled water and drops of aqueous solutions of various acids or salts upon a freshly-prepared mercury surface. It was found that if mercury, perfectly free from any traces of greasy contamination, was poured in a carefully cleaned glass dish in the presence of uir, then :-— (1) a drop of a solution of an alkali in distilled water showed no tendency to spread on the mercury surface; (2) a drop of distilled water or very pure conductivity water spread slowly and uniformly to a thin circular disc; (3) a drop of a solution of an acid or salt in distilled water spread in a flash across the mercury surface. By using increasingly dilute solutions a curious phenomenon became apparent. For a given dilution a drop of acid or salt solution flashes out over the mercury surface to a perfectly definite area maintaining a circular shape, and then continues to spread slowly and uniformly at about the same rate as distilled water. The dilution at which this effect became apparent was found to be much greater for acids than for salts. It was found further that, using acids of varying strength between ‘00008 normal and -0004 normal, the area of surface covered during the brief instant of rapid spread was directly proportional both to the size of the drop and to the concentration... Moreover, the area covered was found to be practically indepen- dent of the particular acid employed, being almost the same for a weak acid such as butyric as for hydrochloric or nitric acid. Dibasic acids, it was found, spread to twice the area per molecule covered by monobasic acids. The actual area covered was about one sq. cm. for each 10!4 molecules of the acid present. It was argued, therefore, that it was improbable that a monomolecular film was formed on the mercury surface, since even under the assumption that all the molecules of acid come.into contact with the mercury surface during the short time that rapid spread is taking place, there can still be only one molecule of acid present for every ten atoms in the mercury surface. 2. Measurements with Adsorbed Films upon a Water Surface. __ Introductory experiments of a qualitative nature by Rayleigh® and by Miss Pockels) led finally to the more accurate measurements of Langmuir,“ () Proc. Phys. Soc. Lond, 38, 2, p, 148. @) Proc. Roy. Soc., vol. xlvii., pp. 281, 364; vol, xlviii., p. 127. (3) Nature, vol. xliii., p. 437. (4) Jour. Am. Chem. Soc., xxxix., 2, 1917, p. 1,848. 268 Adam, and Adam and Jessop“ of the pressure exerted by a thin film of fatty acid molecules adsorbed upon a water surface. By consideration of the amount of fatty acid placed upon the water surface and of the “pressure” ” exerted by the film against a floating barrier, these experi- menters have been able to show that in gencral the films are only one molecule thick, and that the molecules of the adsorbed substance are all oriented with the long chains projecting vertically out of the water surface. The molecules are altached to the water by the more active portion of the molecule which is, so to speak, immersed in the water while the remainder of the molecule, having no affinity for the water, projects vertically out of it. The fact that molecules of the same serics were found to occupy the same area of the water-surface per molecule, independently of the length of the chain, led to measurements of the areas of cross section of the molecules. For most of the substances examined this area was found to be about 21 x 10716 sq. cm. Further work by Adam and Jessop (loc. cit.) led to the consideration of the films as existing in three phases corresponding to the gaseous, liquid, and solid phases in three dimensions, and a very close analogy has been drawn between the behaviour of an ordinary gas and the behaviour, at very low pressures, of the adsorbed films. Under these low pressures the films may be regarded as equivalent to gases in two dimensions, each molecule in them being able to move freely in any direction upon the water surface but being confined to this plane. In par- ticular, two laws have been adduced experimentally which are exactly analogous to Boyle’s Law and the perfect gas law for ordinary gases. Thus, if the “two dimensional pressure” (i.e. the force per unit length exerted against the barrier) is I’, the area of the water surface for each molecule of the adsorbed substance is A, k is a constant, R the constant of the gas equation pv = Ré@, and 6 is the absolute temperature, then it is found that :-— FA = k at a constant temperature, and FA = Ré when the temperature is allowed to vary. So interesting and important were the results obtained by this group of experimenters in their measurements of the pressures exerted by films on a water surface, that it secmed worth while to attempt a quantitative measurement of the pressures exerted when various acids and salts had spread on a mercury surface, and the present paper represents the outcome of these experiments. Ii, Apparatus EMPLOYED AND THE PREPARATION oF MATERIALS. About the same time as the experiments of Adam and Jessop, Marcelin had attempted the measurement of the pressure exerted by films upon a water surface by means of two different types of apparatus. The first of these was operated upon the principle of the aneroid barometer and may be understood in reference to the plan given in fig. 1. A B G (6) Nature, April, 1926, p. 484. (7) The term “pressure” will be often used in the present paper in the sense in which Adam uses it, of force per unit length of the barrier, (8) Marcelin, Ann. de Phys. 10th Ser., 4, 125, p. 459. 269 Three sides of a rectangle, open above and below, consisted of a rigid frame- work AB, BC, CD, while the fourth side was constructed of a thin flexible sheet of mica AD. The whole was allowed to float on a water surface and, a drop of fatty acid dissolved in benzine having been placed within ABCD, the movement of the central portion of the mica, magnified by a suitable lever system, served to measure the pressure of the film. This method was found to be only sufficiently sensitive to register comparatively large pressures of the surface films. The second type of apparatus depended upon the principle of the torsion balance, and was used by Marcelin and Delaplace in the measurement of low pressures as well as those of the more compact film. A shallow trough abed containing water was placed inside a glass case ABCD (fig. 2) in order to protect the surface, so far as possible, from dust contamina- D Maaaneanaunnuune tion from the air. Floating upon the water was a hollow rectangle of celluloid (shown shaded in the figure), which was held in position by four needles passing vertically through holes at the corners of the celluloid rectangle. A barricr TT’ floated upon the water and was attached to a torsion wire and a torsion head directly above T’. Thus the barrier could turn about ‘I’ in opposition to the torsion in the wire. In taking a measurement a drop of the film-forming material dissolved in benzine was placed upon the water surface S, the benzine allowed to evaporate and the pressure of the remaining film measured by turning the torsion head to exactly counterbalance the pressure of the film against the barrier. During the time benzine was still present in the water surface, the barrier had to be clamped owing to the high pressure this solvent gave until it had evaporated. 270 A further barrier and a long screw served to vary the effective surface S without the removal of the glass case ABCD. It is important to notice that on account of the low pressures for which measurements were required, the barrier J’l’ could not be allowed to make actual contact with the sides of the hollow rectangle. However, the apparatus was so constructed that the clearance at each end was only 1-5 mm. By observation of the movement of particles of lycopodium powder scattered upon the water surface, Marcclin reached the conclusion that no appreciable leak occurred, except for high pressures of the film, and accordingly he neglected any leak which might have taken place. . It seemed possible that one of these methods employed by Marcelin for his measurements of the pressures of the films upon a water surface might well be applicable to the study of the pressures of spreading films upon a mercury surfacc. In the first place, a strip of thin steel spring bent to the shape of an ellipse was used after the manner of Marcelin’s aneroid barometer type of apparatus. The ellipse was allowed to float upon the mercury surface, one side being held steady in a clamp while the other side was observed by means of a tele-microscope when a drop of solution was placed upon the mercury within the ellipse. It was hoped that a movement of this side of the elliptical enclosure would be observed and serve as a measure of the pressure exerted by the spreading drop, but the apparatus was apparently not sufficicntly sensitive and no movement whatever was detected. A second apparatus of a similar type was also tried. In this a strip of thin platinum ribbon was joined to a glass frame to make the fourth side of an apparatus similar to that used by Marcelin (fig. 1), the platinum ribbon replacing the mica strip in his experiments. However, it was found that the platinum ribbon was always pulled down flat on to the mercury surface, in which position the apparatus became insufficiently sensitive for any accurate measurement. Coating the ribbon with shellac by dipping it into a solution of this substance in alcohol did not, so far as could be observed, affect the spread of the drop of 271 solution upon the mercury, and this prevented amalgamation between the platinum and the latter. Even so, however, it did not completely do away with the tendency of the ribbon to lie flat upon the surface, while a fresh difficulty now appeared. The spreading drop of acid or salt solution spread readily beneath the platinum ribbon at various points, rendering measurement of the pressure impossible. Finally an apparatus similar to that employed by Marcelin for work at low pressures was devised, and this was used to take all the measurements recorded in this paper. A piece of thick plate glass had a hollow depression ground upon one surface of the shape of the shaded portion in fig. 3. Clean mercury could be forced upward through a tube which passed through the glass plate at Q, and would then overflow, filling the depressed portion of the plate. This depression was suffi- ciently shallow to ensure that the upper surface of the large drop of mercury so formed would always be about 2 mm. above the surface of the remainder of the glass plate. Both CC and C’C’ are arcs of circles having their centres at B. A thin glass barrier BB’ was pivoted at B and supported by a fine torsion wire of phosphor-bronze in such a manner that the end B’ could be raised or lowered vertically while movement in a horizontal plane was opposed by the elastic forces of the torsion wire. It was found that, a drop of mercury having been formed and the barrier lowered until one end floated upon its surface, the pressure exerted by a spreading drop of dilute acid could readily be demonstrated by the movement of the glass barrier. It appeared that freshly-formed drops of mercury showed little trace of a tendency to adhere to the ground glass surface of the barrier, but on the other hand, after the latter had remained some time in contact with the mercury, considerable adhesion was noticeable. The shape of the depression in which the drop was formed was, therefore, so chosen that the same portion and the same length of the barrier would rema‘n in contact with the drop of mercury for small move- ments of the glass rod from its mean position. (In view of the experience gained during the use of this torsion balance, however, this precaution does not seem to have been really necessary.) The mercury was passed from the depression after a reading had been taken by means of a second glass tube which had been ground to fit a coned hole in the 272 glass plate at the point P (fig. 3). This tube had been cut away at one side as shown in fig. 4, so that, when the lower side / was turned toward the mercury the liquid could flow freely down the tube, carrying upon its surface the acid solution, while the mercury could be retained in the dish if the side h of the tube was turned toward the depression. Thus the dish could be emptied by turning the glass tube through 180°. Fig. 5 represents the apparatus in its final form. The torsion wire, TT’ of 34 gauge phosphor-bronze wire and about 48 centi- metres in length, had a torsion head attached and a graduated scale and pointer at T. P represents the thick glass plate, BB’ the glass barrier, while the tube by which the mercury is drawn off is shown at E. Clean mercury is poured into the wide tube R, and is led along AA until a sufficient quantity has overflowed from the inlet at the centre of the glass plate to fill the depression in it. The plate P rested upon a sheet of plate glass 35 cm. in diameter, upon which fitted the cylindrical glass cover CCCC which served to encase the apparatus. Vhe sheet of plate glass and the glass cover of the apparatus were ground to fit closely, and the joint between them was smeared with rubber grease. It had been found that this substance did not give off sufficient vapour to affect the cleanliness of the mercury surface, if care were taken that no actual contact occurred between the grease and the mercury. A fine thread attached to the barrier at B’ passed out through a mercury seal at D, and served to raise or lower the barrier. A pipette G, passing through the upper side of the case, was used to place drops ot solution 273 upon the mercury surface. Two further tubes HH’ served to draw dry air through the apparatus. A tap was sealed to the outlet tube E in order to prevent air from entering the apparatus at this point. This tap had of necessity to be left ungreased in order to avoid contamination of the mercury; and the ground glass joints of the tubes where the mercury entered and left the case were like- wise necessarily left without grease, but apart from these joints each tube which entered the case was sealed to it either with hard sealing wax or by means of a ground glass joint and rubber grease. It was hoped, in this way, to obtain an atmosphere free from water vapour within the case. The whole apparatus was fitted with levelling screws. Burdon (loc. cit.) drew attention to the fact that neither the slow-spreading drop of water nor the fast-moving acid or salt-solution was able to spread over the curved surface at the edge of the mercury in the dish. In the present experi- ments, however, considerable difficulty has in certain cases been encountered, owing to the fact that acid solutions in almost every instance, and occasionally pure water also, have been found to pass the curved edge, leaving the dish wet when the mercury was poured away. However, only very slight traces of the solution usually reached the dish, the bulk of the latter liquid being carried away upon the surface of the mercury; so that it has been found sufficient in most cases to merely allow the dish to dry, when, upon washing it out once or twice with clean mercury, further readings could be taken. In a few cases, when dealing with less volatile acids such as sulphuric or even nitric, the acid molecules remain. ing on the dish were sufficient to render later readings uncertain unless a con- siderable time were allowed to elapse after the dish had become dry. On the other hand, this difficulty was not met with when using such acids as hydrochloric, nor did it occur when salt solutions were being used. In these two cases the dryness of the dish was sufficient to indicate when a further reading cotld be taken. It was hoped that the floating barrier, by sinking in the mercury and causing a depression of its surface, would act in exactly the same manner as the edge of a dish and practically prevent the spread of the acid beyond it. It was soon found, however, that this was not the case, and an acid solution or even distilled water spread readily past the barricr. In every instance this occurred merely at the ends of the barrier, and in no case has there been observed such a leak, except at these points. All attempts to prevent this leak proved futile. The barrier was ground to a V-shape in an attempt to render the curvature of the mercury surface more pronounced than was the case for the circular glass rod previously used in this connection, Weighting the barrier and depressing it more deeply in the mercury produced no effect whatsoever upon the leak, until the barrier was forced to the bottom of the dish, when the drop of mercury within it became completely divided into two. It was impossible, therefore, to use the apparently obvious procedure of placing a drop of solution upon the mercury surface and turning the torsion head until equilibrium was obtained. The following method has consequently been used for measuring the instanlancous spreading pressures, Fixed to the glass dish near the end B’ of the barrier (fig. 5) was an upright glass rod. ‘To obtain a reading, the point was found to which the torsion head had to be turned in order to allow the barrier to float upon the mercury surface, almost making contact with this fixed rod. The torsion head was now turned through perhaps 70 degrees, so that the barrier was pressing firmly against the glass upright, and a drop of the solution to be tested was placed upon the mercury surface, so that the force exerted by the spreading drop would oppose the twist of the torsion wire. The mercury was poured out and fresh mercury introduced, the torsion head turned to, say, 60 degrees, and the procedure repeated until 274 finally a torsion was found at which the spreading drop would just move the barrier very slightly. By this method of trial and error it was possible to find the force exerted by the spreading drop. The assumption is made that, on account of the rapidity with which the reading was taken, no leak had taken place before the barrier began to move. Reference will be made presently to the justification for this assumption. It should be emphasised that the method has the distinct disadvantage that it measures merely the pressure at one particular instant during the spreading of the drop upon the mercury surface, that is, at the time when this pressure has reached a maximum. Thus the method will not serve to show whether this pressure would be maintained for a period if no leak occurred, and, if so, for what duration of time. The rate at which the barrier returns to its original position after being driven off through twenty or thirty degrees by a spreading drop of solution does indeed show that some pressure is maintained for at least a few seconds after the solution has ceased to spread; but, in the absence of any method of measuring the leak past the barrier, this does not afford any quantita- tive measure of the “static” pressure of the drop. The criticism by Adam and Jessop (Joc. cit.) of the apparatus and experi- mental methods of Marcelin in measuring the pressures of the films upon a water surface, was levelled chiefly against the insufficient precautions taken to secure absolute cleanliness and the purity of materials used, and against the insufficient precautions taken to overcome leak past the barrier. In view of the apparently unreliable results obtained by Marcclin and the similarity of his apparatus to the one here employed, particular attention has been directed toward eliminating errors from the sources mentioned. Marcelin, in testing for leakage past the barrier, used lycopodium powder scattered upon the water surface, and since no motion of these particles was observable at low pressures of the film, concluded that any leak which did occur was negligible. In a similar test upon a mercury surface no trace of leak has been observed until the acid drop itself has begun to spread past the barrier, when, of course, the particles receive a slight displacement. If, however, as seems probable, a thin film of water vapour is already present upon the mercury surface before the drop of solution is placed upon it, then the move- ment of the lycopodium particles certainly represents an insufficient criterion of compressions and movements of this film, and little reliance has been placed upon this effect as proving the non-existence of a leakage past the barrier. By adopting the experimental method previously described, however, it appears that the loss of pressure owing to leakage during the taking of a reading is made sufficiently small for it to be neglected without introducing serious error. In no case when a reading has been taken has the time which elapsed between the instant at which the drop of solution reached the mercury surface, and that at which the critical movement of the barrier occurred, been of more than onc second’s duration. Now, by allowing the barrier to he pushed off through a certain distance by a spreading drop of solution and measuring the time taken for it to recover its initial position, some idea of the rate at which leak occurs may be obtained. It was found that an initial reading of pressure of about four dynes per cm. fell at the end of fifteen seconds to zero, and since the movement of the barrier back to its initial position was a steady and uniform one, the rate of the leak was probably also approximately constant. On the other hand, with an initial pressure of twenty dynes per cm., which is of the order usually recorded in these experiments, it was found that a leak occurred equivalent to about one dyne per cm. per second. No attempt has been made in the measurements recorded in this paper to make an allowance for the leak past the barrier even at higher pressures, chiefly owing to the difficulty of estimating the fraction of time during _ 275 which leak takes place before the maximum pressure is recorded. As stated above, this time is certainly not greater than one second in any case; and it may be considerably smaller since leak can only occur at the ends of the barrier, and these ends are the last portions of the rod to be reached by the spreading drop. Ii, therefore, as seems not improbable, little leak occurs until the drop of solution itself approaches the barrier, the maximum pressure against the rod may occur almost exactly at the instant when leak begins. Whether this latter is the case or not, however, there seems every reason for concluding that no serious error is introduced in neglecting any slight losses of pressure from this source. In these experiments the same precautions have been taken for cleaning the glassware and the mercury as those recorded in the paper by Burdon (Joc. cit.). The mercury was cleaned by distillation in a hard glass still under reduced pressure in a slow current of air, then shaken with strong sulphuric acid containing a few crystals of potassium bichromate, washed thoroughly in distilled water and dried. In the first instance the spread of a drop of distilled water upon the surface of the mercury was used as a test of its purity and freedom from grease contamina- tion, etc. This test, however, in spite of its extreme sensitiveness to any con- tamination upon the metal surface, was found to be insufficient, and another test was always used in actual practice before and after taking a set of the measure- ments recorded in this paper. This test consisted merely in measuring the pressure exerted by a drop of acetic acid solution, concentration one-hundredth molar. Under the very best conditions for spreading this gave, it was found a pressure of 17 dynes per cm., when the drop of solution was applied to the mercury surface 30 seconds after the latter had been poured in the dish. In practice all readings were disregarded if the two test readings with the acetic acid solution failed to comply with this standard. The reasons for adopting this particular solution and concentration as the standard one, will appear later, Only glassware was allowed to come into contact with the mercury, and all parts which did so were first carefully cleaned by first immersing in sulphuric acid containing a few crystals of potassium bichromate, then washing with distilled water, and drying. There appears to be no reason for attempting to obtain very pure substances for forming the solutions, drops of which were to be applied to the mercury surface, and ordinary chemically pure acids and salts have been used throughout. The torsion wire of the apparatus was calibrated by measuring the amount of twist of the torsion head necessary to counterbalance a known torsion. It was found that one degree of the torsion head was equivalent to a two dimensional “pressure” of +22 dynes per cm. upon the mercury surface. The drop of solution given by the pipette used was found to be -03 c.c. in volume. Various tests were made of the amount of solution in a drop from the pipette under differing condi- tions, and it was shown that the volume of the drop never varied by 3% from the mean value quoted above. III]. VARIATIONS IN CONDITIONS OF SPREADING. In observing the spread of an acid upon a clean mercury surface exposed to the air, it quickly became apparent that inconsistent results were being obtained upon different days, which could not be explained merely by assuming that the mercury had become contaminated. Thus, in an extreme case upon a cold day, it was sometimes found that fairly dilute acid would show little tendency to spread upon a freshly-poured mercury surface, while the same mercury, washed in distilled water but otherwise untreated, would often allow even distilled water to spread upon its surface when poured in the same dish a few days later. It was found that warming the dish often caused a very marked improvement in the 276. conditions of spread, and the thought immediatcly suggested itself that the varia- tion of the spreading was due to a variation of the amount of water-vapour which had condensed upon the mercury surface from the air in the form of an adsorhed layer. Accordingly the apparatus was enclosed as described in the large glass cover and dry air was drawn through the apparatus. Whether because of the fact that a minute leak of moist air could not be prevented, or whether from some other cause, very little improvement in the reliability of the readings was observed. Burdon and Oliphant,“ however, who have observed various phenomena of the spread of liquids upon a mercury surface within a perfectly air-tight case, appear to have rendered their measurements perfectly reproducible by taking care that only dry air should be admitted to the case. There appear to be then, only two possible explanations of the discrepancies found at various times. In the first place it may be that owing to the ground-glass joints at the points where the mercury enters and leaves the apparatus, sufficient air entered the glass cover at these points to give a humidity high enough to atfect the results. Without a recotistruction of the whole apparatus it would have been impossible to completely prevent leakage at this point. It would appear, however, that this cause 1s in itself insufficient to bring about the changes described, since attempts made to render the readings more consistent by forcing dry air into the apparatus and thus main- taining a pressure slightly greater than atmospheric within the case met with little success. There still remains the second possibility that a sufficient evaporation takes place from the drop of solution from the end of the dropping pipette to cause discordant results. If a monomolecular film of water vapour is all that is necessary to bring about the variations mentioned, then evaporation from the pipette may well be the cause of the whole difhculty. A possible explanation from some other cause has been sought, such as a contaminatjon of the mercury surface by the dust or carbon dioxide of the air, or by small bubbles of water carried with the mercury into the apparatus from the separating funnel in which the mercury was washed. Upon examination, however, none of these explanations have appeared tenable. Moreover, if we may accept the validity of the results of Iredale,“ in his experiments upon the adsorption of water at a mercury surface, the hypothesis that the fluctuations are due largely to a condensation of water vapour upon the mercury in the dish would appear very probable. The work of this experimenter was, of course, carried out by means of the “drop-weight” method of measuring surface tension, and the evidence adduced by Burdon and Oliphant throws some doubt upon the applicability of this method to determina- tions wilh mercury. Nevertheless, there scems little reason to question the fact that Tredale’s results are at least relatively correct, even if the absolute values obtained by that experimenter should prove unreliable. Turther evidence for the conclusion that a film of water-vapour is respon- sible for the fluctuations which have occurred from day to day will be given later, when the relation hetween the spreading pressure and the time that the mercury has been poured is discussed. Mention may be made here, however, of similar inconsistencies occasionally encountered by Gouy“! when carrying out measurements of the fall of surface- tension of a mercury surface in contact with various solutions. Gouy used the reliable “hig drop” method, and found that his measurements had to be taken fairly quickly on account of the fact that the interfacial tension fell rapidly after contact of the mercury and solution for a short time. In the case of certain solu- tions it was found impossible to take readings at all, owing to the extreme rapidity ©) Burdon and Oliphant, Far. Soc, Trans., xxiti., 3, 1927, pp. 205-213. (10) Tredale, Phil. Mag., xlv., 1923, p. 1088; xlviii, 1924, p. 177. (1) Gouy, Ann, de Phys. vi. Ser. 9, 5, 1916. 277 with which the interfacial tension fell off after the large drop was formed. In some instances, however, when dealing with solutions upon which measurement was usually possible, an occasional reading showed a large variation from the value of others of a series, and the discrepancy was far too large to be regarded as merely due to the inaccuracy of the measurement. The cause of these occasional erratic readings does not appear to have been traced, but they may possibly have been due to movements of the solution being experimented with, which have caused an irregular adsorption of the molecules of the solute, These examples of irregular behaviour would thus correspond fairly closely with those recorded in this paper. Now, while the pressures recorded for one solution have been found to vary considerably from the value found upon any given day, yet the results obtained upon one particular day have been, in almost all cases, remarkably consistent among themselves and seldom varied by more than a few per cent. from one observed value. Therefore, since the test already mentioned (Acetic Acid 1/100th molar solution to give a pressure of 17 dynes per cm.) has been applied when- ever readings have been taken, and all measurements discarded when these con- ditions of spreading were not fulfilled, it is believed that, in spite of the incon- sistencies which have occurred upon many occasions, only those readings have been accepted, during the taking of which the controlling conditions have been identical and most favourable to spreading. Probably, in these cases, the amount of water-vapour in the air was sufficiently small or the evaporation of the adsorbed film from the mercury sufficiently rapid for the remaining molecules to. be practically ineffective in preventing spreading. There seems no reason why the adsorbed water-vapour film should be the only factor which tends to prevent spreading. An adsorption of other molecules—e.g., the nitrogen and oxygen of the air—probably occurs also at the surface of the mercury, and this adsorption may also play a part in determining the tendency for spread to occur. Indeed, although the complete interpretation of the phenomena described by Popesco “2? in his paper upon the surface-tension of mercury in vacuo, and in the presence of various gases, may differ widely from that given by him, yet it seems probable that the complete explanation must take into account some adsorption of gases and vapours at the mercury surface, IV. VARIATION OF PRESSURE WiTIL THE TIME THE MERCURY HAS BEEN PouRED. ff the mercury was allowed to stand in the dish for a few minutes after being poured before the drop of solution was placed upon it, then it was found that the pressure which the spreading solution exerted was considerably smaller than the pressure given by a drop spreading upon a freshly-poured mercury surface. If the pressure exerted is plotted against the time the mercury has been allowed to stand before the drop of solution is placed upon it, then curves of the type given in fig. 6 are obtained. Tables I. and II. give the data from which these curves have been drawn. It is observed that in the case of the spreading of the sulphuric acid solution a test-reading with acetic acid was not taken, and it is believed, therefore, that the time-values are only a fraction of those which might have been obtained under other conditions, although quite consistent in them- selves. This question will be discussed later. (12) Popesco, Ann. de Phys, 10th Ser, 3, 1925, p. 402. 278 SLoM, Ss DYNE toy 1 fe) 20 40 6O Ye) 100 120 7H, 50,. 60 720 180 240 300 360 420 —? NaCl SECONDS Fig. 6. : Spreading Pressure against Time for :— I. Sulphuric Acid — 1/50 Molar, and II. Sodium Chloride — Molar. VARIATION OF SURFACE TENSION OF MERCURY wiTH Time (PopPEsco). 580 £ ae) OCa thon di omde iva) . a Oxygen . ote ° Qe 4a bo Bo 100 Ih 140 iGo to 200 ee. ha EQ Bo seo Xo Fig. 7. Time in Seconds. 279 Tasle I. (t == time in seconds which the mercury has remained in the dish before the drop of acid was applied; p = pressure exerted by spreading drop in dynes per centimetre.) Solution of concentration 1/50th molar; temperature 22°C. t P pfs on Bo BO BS BO DO DO DD & DO We RD EDSSANERRRARRRSSS BRoOARARDMUAH YEE HOOBAN 100 2:2 120 < 2-2 but slow spread still i occurs Tasie IT, Molar solution of sodium chloride, temperature 17°C. Test reading with acetic 1/100th molar gives p = 17 dynes per cm. t P 30 31-2 60 29-6 90 28-2 120 27-1 150 26-0 180 24:7 240 1 280 Exactly similar curves have been obtained with every solution tested: sul- phuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, and hydrochloric acid of concentrations vary- ing from molar te 1/1000th molar, and also with a molar solution of sodium chloride. Each curve shows the three characteristic portions, AB, BC, CD. Now, the inconsistency of the readings referred to in the previous pages is most clearly marked in the consideration of these pressure-time curves. Whereas it was com- paratively easy to reproduce on successive days the readings for the pressure of a drop placed upon the mercury shortly after it had been poured, yet considerable variation would still be observed for the pressures upon a mercury surface which had stood for some time before the drop was placed upon it. It was observed, in fact, that upon different days the curves were of exactly similar type and could be brought into complete agreement with one another if all the time ordinates upon a curve wete multiplied by a constant factor. Now, this is exactly what might be expected if the whole cause of the variation were to be sought in the condensation of a film of water-vapour upon the mercury surface. Tor, if an adsorption is the cause of the decreasing spreading pressures, then the actual decrease of the latter will be an exact measure of the resistance offered by the adsorbed film. Now, the work of the many experimenters upon the fatty-acid films upon water has given abundant evidence of the sudden increase of resistance to spreading which occurs as soon as sufhcient molecules are present to give a monomolecular adsorbed film. It appears justifiable, then, to regard the explana- tion of the upper portions of these pressure-time curves as follows. During the time represented by the portion AB a monomolecular adsorbed film is in the process of formation, and this offers a slight resistance to spreading. By the time represented by B, however, so large a fraction of the surface is covered with adsorbed molecules of water, that when the film is suddenly compressed by the spreading drop a monomolecular film is formed upon the far side of the barrier, which film can oppose quite a large resistance to any movement of the latter, Consequently the pressures recorded decrease very rapidly from this point onward. Morcover, if the falling off of the pressures along the portion AB is due to the resistance to spreading offered by a film of water-vapour, then the difference of the pressures between A and B should be the same in every case and should be equal to the maximum pressure which can be exerted by a film of water-vapour adsorbed at a mercury surface while the film is still in a state corresponding to the “expanded” films of Langmuir and Adam. This difference of pressure should then be quite independent of the acid or salt employed. Now, in every curve obtained, although the total pressures at A vary from as much as 60 dynes per cm. down to about 20, and although the time represented by B varies irom 20 seconds to as much as two minutes, yet this difference of pressure upon any one curve is constant within the Hmits of experimental error and equal to about 8 dynes per em. It seems very probable, therefore, that as a monomolecular film is formed upon the surface of the mercury, the effective spreading pressure af the solution decreases owing to its having to overcome a pressure exerted by the vapour film. It is to be expected that the resistance offered by the latter will be approximately proportional to the number of molecules present in the film, and this is shown in the linear decrease of the effective pressure which is actually observed along the curves from A to B. Finally, when the monomolecular vapour film has been com- pleted, the pressure which it can exert increases far more rapidly than before, and causes the steeper slope of the curves from B to C. These conclusions are im good accord with those expressed by Iredale (loc, cit.). Itis to be remarked, however, that there appears little justification for Iredale’s assumption that the films increase to become more than one molecule thick. The varying values obtained in his experiments for the surface-tension of 281 mercury after a certain vapour-pressure has been reached would appear to be exactly analogous to the varying pressures at which the resistance to compression of the fatty acid films breaks down. Adam has shown that the pressure required to break down a film is quite indeterminate (Proc. Roy. Soc., vol. A 99, pp. 348 and 349), and the indeterminate results obtained by Iredale would appear to be capable of an exactly similar interpretation, the adsorbed film of vapour in his experiments replacing that of the fatty acids in Adam’s work. hus, it is only necessary to stippose that the adsorbed film is capable of exerting a pressure which is not in all cases the same owing to mechanical vibrations, dust particles, etc., and a complete explanation of the whole phenomenon is to hand without having recourse to hypothetical films several molecules thick. If Iredale’s explanation were the correct one, then it would be necessary to suppose that the adsorption of the first layer of molecules caused a decrease of surface tension of the mercury of 60 dynes per cm. in the case of methyl acetate and 25 dynes per cm. for water, while the adsorption of further layers produced a further lowering of surface tension in these two cases of 42 and 79 dynes per cm. respectively. Now, all our present knowledge of surface-tension phenomena would appear to point to the conclusion that the layer of molecules immediately at a surface, or the two layers on either side of an interface, contribute by far the greater portion of the forces which manifest themselves in surfacé-tension phenomena, and it appears scarcely conceivable that the first adsorbed layer of water-molecules could lower the surface tension by only 25 dynes per cm. while further layers give a further decrease of 79 dynes per cm. Moreover, there is no other evidence from other sources to justify Iredale’s assumption. It should be observed that the portions of the curves given by Iredale relating to higher vapour pressures are purely hypothetical and not based upon actual measttrements. (Fig. 3, p. 1098, Phil. Mag., vol. xlv., etc. Vide also discussion on page 1099 of the same paper.) It is true that with the comparatively high vapour-pressures employed by Iredale in his experiments, it might be expected that a complete adsorbed film would be formed very rapidly indeed. However, as Burdon and Oliphant have pointed out, the drop-weight method used by Iredale is almost certainly not a purely static one, no matter how slowly the drops may be formed; and thus, in practice, varying amounts of adsorption may be expected to determine the surface- tension when the vapour-pressure within the apparatus is varied. The theory outlined above appears also to offer an explanation of many of the phenomena of spreading described by Burdon. Thus, if a drop of water is placed upon a mercury surface upon which a film of water-vapour is condensed, then it is to be expected that the spreading of the drop will be opposed by the pressure which the film can exert. If now the tendency of the drop to spread (in this case possibly a mere gravitational effect) is of the order of a few dynes per cm., then this pressure will be insufficient to do more than merely compress the water-vapour film very slightly upon the remainder of the mercury surface. Now, it is well known that if upon a clean water surface is placed a greater quantity of certain substances than is required to form a monomolecular layer, then the excess material is drawn up into drops upon the surface while the rema-nder forms a film one molecule thick. If a pressure is now applied at the edge of this film the area covered by it will be reduced, some of the film molecules passing into the drops upon the surface, An exactly similar phenomenon probably occurs pon a mercury surface upon which a drop of water is spreading. If it is imagined that a drop of water has the power to exert a very slight pressure against the surrounding film, then a gradual adsorption of the film molecules which are in immediate contact with the drop of water will occur. Consequently, the number of molecules in the adsorbed film being decreased, its resistance falls and a gradual spreading occurs. ‘The presence of more than one drop of water upon the same mercury surface will make practically no difference to the spread of either. 282 Moreover, Burdon and Oliphant have pointed out that the rate at which the diameter grows appears to increase with time. If the theory here given is correct, and the pressure exerted by the drop against the film may be regarded as constant over some period of time, then the incrcase in area will be proportional to the circumference of the drop at any instant, since this will determine the rate at which the adsorbed film molecules are taken up by the drop. This would, of course, agree well with experiment and observation. There are two methods by which the drop of watcr may maintain its pressure against the adsorbed film. in the first place, if the water is not absolutely pure an adsorption of dissolved substances may take place at the mercury-water interface which will lower the interfacial tension, ‘This, of course, would simply be equiva- lent to giving the drop a tendency to spread, In ihe second place, the weight of the drop will itself cause a pressure against the film molecules. If the depth of the drop of water is 1 mm., then the hydrostatic pressure will be 98 dynes per sq. cm. The force, then, which the drop can exert against a row of molecules in the adsorbed film one cm. long will, therefore, be of the order of 3 x 10° x 98 = 2:94 x 10-6 dynes (taking the diameter of the molecule as 3 x 10% cm.). ‘Thus, in accordance with this very rough calculation, the spreading pressure of the drop due to its gravitational energy alone may be taken as equivalent to a surface tension effect of the order of 10-6 dynes per cm. It seems rather doubtful whether this would be sufficient to cause even the slow spread described by Burdon for high- grade conductivity water, and even in the case of very pure water slight traces of dissolved substances adsorbed at the interface may aid the spreading. In the case of a drop of water placed upon a mercury surface in the presence of moist air, the slow rate at which the drop can take up molecules from the adsorbed film may be less than the rate of condensation of other molecules from the gas, so that in the presence of large quantities of water-vapour in the air no spreading will occur. ‘This has, in fact, been observed. A further fact noted by Burdon now becomes clear. It was observed that a grease contamination of about 1/10th that required to form a monomolecular layer, was quite sufficient to prevent drops of water from spreading over a mercury surface, Under all the ordinary views on the subject it is extremely difficult to see how this amount of grease could so markedly affect spreading, although it would be clear that the amount which gives a monomolecular layer might well do so. It is clear, however, from the excessive rapidity with which mercury can take up grease contamination, that the forces of attraction on the grease-molecules at a mercury surface ate even more powerful than at the surface of water. Con- sequently, if a drop of water is placed upon a mercury surface contaminated with even the amount af grease required to give 1/10th of a monomolecular layer, then, as the drop of water spreads ever so lightly, it will come into contact with grease molecules which, however, cannot be absorbed by it, and which soon form a pro- tective ring at the edge of the drop and prevent the absorption even of the water molecules of the adsorbed film. Thus the resistance of the surrounding film is maintained and spreading cannot occur. In the presence of dry air, however, and with a perfectly clean mercury surface, the drop may spread right up to, and over, the edge of the mercury, and this behaviour has been observed by Burdon and Oliphant. Moreover, if the gravitational energy of the drop is the chief cause of spreading, the movement will always occur from the centre outwards, as required by the same experimenters. As the spreading drop increases greatly in area, however, the forces tending to cause further spreading will diminish, and this for several reasons :— 1. The gravitational energy of the drop is decreasing. 2. Such adsorption of dissolved molecules as has occurred at the interface will be less effective owing to the increased area per adsorbed molecule. 283 3. Evaporation of water from the drop will increase the vapour-pressure and consequently increase the rate at which molecules are being adsorbed at the rest of the mercury surface. Following pon spreading, therefore, a condition may sometimes be reached in which the drop remains stationary for a time, and then even commences to contract once more, as may be shown experimentally. Moreover, if a drop of mercury is poured in fairly dry air and a drop of water placed upon the surface before a large fraction of the surface has had time to adsorb a unimolecular layer, a much more rapid and complete spreading of the water is to be expected than would take place if the mercury had stood for a short period in the dish. This effect has often been noticed, and the spread of the drop of water in this case proceeds at very many times the rate at which it spreads after the mercury has stood for even 30 seconds. Following closely upon this rapid expansion a much slower contraction almost always occurs, as the drop is compressed by the slowly- forming adsorbed film. Still further support for the theory is lent by the observation that water spreading upon mercury in the peculiarly-shaped dish used in these experiments does not spread as a circular drop, but with a tendency to conform to the shape of the dish, This is particularly the case when the spreading is more rapid, when any viscous forces in the adsorbed film are necessarily more effective. In none of the experiments of this paper has the barrier been wetted by spreading drops of solution, although pressures as high as 108 dynes per cm. have been recorded. In view of this, and the other evidence given above, it is difficult to avoid the assumption, therefore, that an adsorbed film is formed upon a mercury surface in the presence of air which is capable of sustaining, for a brief period, lateral pressures as high as 100 dynes per cm., but which, neverthe- less, gives way exceedingly slowly to such pressures as those exerted by a spread- ing drop of water where the spreading pressure is almost certainly less than 4 dynes per cm. The theory given above is capable of giving a fairly complete explanation of the facts, and it is difficult to see any other means by which the same effects could be produced. A similar explanation should be sought for the case of an acid or salt solution spreading upon the mercury surface. Here, indeed, an extremely rapid adsorption of the acid ions or molecules at the interface between the mercury and the solution takes place, On account of the much greater affinity of the mercury atoms for these molecules and the consequently greater loss of free energy at the interface, the tendency of the drop to spread will be considerably greater than in the previous case, and usually exceeds the pressures exerted by the adsorbed films. Now, in this case two separate causes may finally prevent rapid spread. If the adsorbed film has not had sufficient time to form completely, and if the acid is very dilute (of the order of 1/10,000th molar), then rapid spread will cease after the manner described by Burdon when the adsorbed acid molecules are spread over a suffi- ciently large area for their cffect upon the surface tension to be insufficient to overcome the pressure of the surrounding adsorbed film. The area covered by the rapidly-spreading acid will thus be of the same order, whatever the acid used, but will have no direct relation to the presence, or otherwise, of a monomolecular film at the interface. On the other hand, if the adsorbed film has been allowed to form sufficiently to resist the full pressure which the acid can exert, then no rapid spread will occur. In both this case, however, and in that where the drop ceases to spread rapidly owing to the complete adsorption of the acid molecules, a further slow spread will be possible owing to the taking up of the adsorbed molecules by the drop of acid. Thus, in the pressure-time curves described earlier, although no appreciable pressure could be recorded in many cases along the 284 portion CD of the curves, it was evident from the fact that slow spreading still occurred, that some pressure was being exerted by the drops of solution. A similar phenomenon is evidenced by the spread of a drop of acid upon a mercury surface upon which one drop has already spread and evaporated. In this case the second drop will remain sometimes for a period of several iminutes without showing the slightest tendency to spread, but finally expands slowly across the mercury. No doubt adsorption oceurred here when the first drop spread, but under the pressure of the second drop of solution much of the adsorbed film was taken up by it until the drop of acid was able to spread slowly. It seems possible that most of the phenomena of expansion and contraction of certain films upon a mercury stirface may be explained after a similar fashion, the very slight increase in evaporation of the film in the expanded state serving to just increase the adsorption at the remainder of the mercury surface sufficiently to cause contrac- tion, Then, the vapour-pressure falling very slightly, the adsorbed molecules will be taken up by the drop of solution more rapidly than condensation of others can occur at the mercury surface and a further expansion will occur, In this way the whole cycle may be repeated quite a number of times. Now, while it might be possible for slow contractions and expansions of this type to take place with any solutions, yet only those which can exert a pressure of several dynes per cm. will be capable of rapid alternations of expansion and contraction, For if the adsorbed film is in equilibrium with a solution which is exerting a high spreading pressure, then the adsorbed molecules must be already in the state of the “compressed films” of Adam and Langmuir. Consequently the adsorption of comparatively few more molecules will increase by a large amount the pressure that the film can resist, and the expansion and contraction of the drop will likewise occur comparatively rapidly. In actual experience, rapid alternate expansions and contractions have been observed only in the case of moderately concentrated solutions. V. JTrRe Proprem or rie SurvAcE-TENSION oF MERCURY. In considering the spreading of a liquid upon a mercury surface after various periods of exposure of the latter to a gas, Burdon and Ol.phant have pointed out ihe apparent contradiction of Antonow’s Rule in the case in which water spreads upon a mercury surface whose surface-tension is very much less than 500 dynes per centimetre, ‘Lhe cxplanation proposed by these workers is, that spreading always occurs from the centre of the drop of water where a freshly-prepared suriace is available. Whether this is so or not, however, the pressure which the spreading drop must exert in order to spread at all must—from this standpoint at least—clearly be sufficient to overcome whatever resistance is offered to spread- ing by the difference between the surface-tension of the mercury and the sum of the surface-tension of the water-drop and the interfacial tension at the mercury- water interface. Tor, if within the drop a freshly renewed surface is being ereated, then in doing so work must be done, of wlich, for unit area of such surface created, the difference of surface-tensions of the new surface and the old is a measure. The explanation offered does not, therefore, give a very clear explanation of the phenomenon. A quite complete explanation of these observed facts, however, together with some insight as to what are the factors which cause the variation of surface-tension of mercury follow readily from a simple extension of the theory already outlined. It will be necessary, first of all, to examine critically the theory proposed by Popesco to account for the phenomena described in his paper. It is certainly probable, as postulated by that experimenter, that an adsorption of gas-molecules occurs at the surface of a mercury drop formed in air. This adsorption, however, if it does occur, must almost certainly be completed within a period of time of an order not greater than a few seconds. For the vapour-pressure of mercury is, at 285 ordinary temperatures, of the order of 10° mm. Hence there must be present in the space above a mercury surface about 1 1 2:7 & 10% «% ——_ x 760 104 atoms of mercury per cubic centimetre, since there are 2-7 & 10! molecules of any gas in one cubic centimetre at atmospheric pressure. If we neglect, in a rough approximation, the Maxwell distribution of velocities and consider that one-sixth of these atoms are moving toward the mercury surface at any instant, each with a speed equal to 2/200 times that of a hydrogen molecule, then the number of atoms which strike one sq. cm. of mercury surface per second is :— 36X 108 x EK vw? & 184 & 105 = 11 *& 1016 200 Now, since the density of mercury is 13-6 gm. per cc., the number of atoms in one cc. of the liquid is given by :— 6°06 & 1073 & 13-6, = 36 K 10% 200 and taking the } power of this, the approximate number of atoms of mercury present per sq. cm. of mercury surface = 12 * 10". According to Langmuir’s theory of adsorption, every atom of mercury which strikes a mercury surface will condense there, evaporation taking place as a separate phenomenon. Consequently 11 % 1016 atoms of mercury enter each sq. cm. of surface per second, and since the liquid is in equilibrium with the vapour above, this must also be the number of atoms which evaporate. ‘Taking into account the number of atoms per sq. cm. of surface, it is clear that the average time an atom of mercury remains in the surface is only of the order of 1/100th of a second. Now, it is exceedingly improbable that an adsorbed gas-molecule can remain in the adsorbed state at a mercury surface when the mercury atom to which it is attached evaporates. The conclusion appears inevitable, therefore, that the life of an adsorbed molecule upon the mercury surface cannot be greater than 1/100th second. There is, then, no reason why adsorption should slowly attain an equilibrium-value at the end of several hours, since, obviously, an entirely new cycle must be commenced after all the mercury atoms first present in the surface have been evaporated. Such adsorption as does occur, then, must take place with extreme rapidity, and the equilibrium-value, both of the amount adsorbed and of the surface tension, must be attained at the end of one second or less. Evidence from other experiments with adsorption at liquid surfaces entirely confirms this idea. Lenard “3) has made estimates of the rate of negative adsorption of cane sugar adsorbed at the surface of a solution in water, and finds that 95% of the adsorption has taken place within 10-8 seconds. Positive adsorp- tion, while occurring considerably more slowly, takes only periods of from 1/100th second to one second. Hiss“ carried out some apparently reliable measure- ments of the transition from dynamic to static surface tension of an aqueous solution of amyl acetate. The values found at a temperature of 14°C are :— Time in seconds. 00000 =. .. .... 54-9 enue oo Gry hae eco. i o. i 2 age oog9 2.) TL) 866 oe Os) wy. =a ee (13) Lenard, Sitzungsber, d. Akad. Heidelberg, 5, A, 1914, 28 Abh.,, p. 16, et seq. A see Uber die zeitliche Anderung reiner Flussigkeitsoberflachen., Diss., Ileidel- erg, 5 286 It seems likely, then, that the time taken for adsorption of the gas-molecules at a mercury surface is of the same order as those periods found in these experi- metits, and all the evidence would appear to point to the fact that this adsorption is complete within the first second. It seems just possible that the very high value found by Meyer@5) for the surface tension of mercury in an atmosphere of hydrogen, was due to the fact that in this case very little adsorption even of gas molecules had taken place. Meyer used the vibrating jet method, and the surface of the mercury had certainly been formed for less than one second when the surface tension was recorded. Unfortunately, however, it is not known whether the same method has been employed by any other experimenter for measuring the surface tension of mercury, and the high value observed in this case (554 dynes per cm.) requires confirmation. In order to explain his observed results, Popesco made the further assump- tion that an orientation of the surface-atoms occurred, this effect becoming complete at the end of 24 hours or so at ordinary pressures ; a more rapid change being prevented by impacts of the gas molecules in their continual bombardment of the mercury surface. Once again, however, the fact that the atoms remain only 1/100th of a second in the surface renders such a theory untenable, and once again independent evidence points to its improbability, For, in order that orientation might occur at all and yet take place so slowly, there would be required an extremely delicate balance between the forces tending to orientate the atom and the impulses of the gas molecules which tend to prevent this. But if the orienting forces which act upon the atom are so delicately balanced as to allow complete orientation to occur only at the end of several hours, then it would be expected that an extremely slight variation of the periods between impacts of the gas molecules against a surface atom would bring about an altogether dispropor- tionate change in the rate at which orientation occurs, by allowing the mercury atom a slightly different period in which to orient itself. Thus it might be expected that equilibrium would be reached far more rapidly in a heavy gas such as carbon dioxide or oxygen than in the case of hydrogen, where the time between impacts is so much shorter. In practice the reverse is, of course, found to be the case, and the surface tension of mercury in an atmosphere of hydrogen approaches the equilibrium value far more rapidly than in the case of any other gas observed. That the forces which tend to orient the atom (if such is indeed the cause of the fall of surface tension) are by no means insignificant is shown by the large difference recorded between initial and final values, namely, 100 dynes per cm. All theoretical considerations from the standpoint of classical mechanical theory would appear to point to the probability of an extremely rapid orientation of a free atom, in view of its extremely small moment of inertia. The moment of inertia of molectrles—such as the molecule of nitrogen—can be shown from mea- surements of band spectra to be of the order of 10%? ym. cm.’, and the value for even the comparatively heavy mercury atom would certainly not approach this order. A simple calculation will serve to show that cach atom of the mercury surface must give up an energy of the order of 10-8 erg in order to account for the change of surface tension; which energy would thus be sufficient to cause the atom to orientate itself in a time extremely small compared even to the time which elapses between the impact of two successive gas molecules. There would thus appear to he no reason why orientation should not occur, if it is to do so at all, between the impact of two successive gas molccules. There is still the evidence of the Stern-Gerlach experiment ttpon the magnetic deflection of atoms, which puts in evidence the extreme rapidity with which orientation can occur, while in 287 any such lag in orientation as Popesco postulates, from the experiments upon fatty acid films upon a water surface, and the forces involved in this case are certainly smaller than those involved in the changes of surface-tension of mercury. it appears certain, therefore, that the entire explanation given by Popesco must be abandoned and a new theory sought to explain the phenomena he describes. Now, an examination of the experimental method employed by Popesco, and by Burdon and Oliphant, reveals the fact that these experimenters were unable to introduce gases into their apparatus without a preliminary evacuation, Nor did the construction of their apparatus allow in either case of a “baking out” jn vacuo, in order to drive off the adsorbed and absorbed gases from the walls of the apparatus. These gases, as is well known, are extremely difficult ta remove by any other method than by a preliminary heating at low pressures, and appreci- able amounts will still be present after a vacuum has been maintained for many hours at ordinary temperatures, Water-vapour certainly forms a very large percentage of the total volume of the gascs emitted.G® It would seem to follow that a certain amount of water-vapour must neces- sarily have been present in the gaseous form, even after evacuation. Consequently, no matter what precautions were taken to ensure that only perfectly dry gases were admitted to the apparatus (in neither case, unfortunately, are the precautions: for drying the gas described), the gas upon entering must necessarily take up a certain proportion of the water-vapour. Now, there can be little doubt that this water- vapour is adsorbed far more strongly than are the various gases. (The inter- facial tension between mercury and water is about 427 dynes per cm., while Popesco’s results appear to point to a surface tension against the various gases of more than 500 dynes per cm. It has already been shown that the low value finally recorded cannot be due to a mere adsorption of gas molecules, since equilibrium is reached far too slowly.) If the possibility is admitted that very slight traces of moisture are thus present in the apparatus, either because of the giving up of water-vapour from the walls of the vessel or from the fact the gases eutering the vessel are not perfectly dry, then it is possible to obtain a fairly com- plete explanation of the whole of the phenomena of surface-tension changes of mercury measured by the “big drop” method. That the surface-tension of metals may be affected by the presetice of these gases and vapours from the walls of the apparatus is clear from the experiments of Hogness,“”) who found that they caused an appreciable lowering of surface- tension, especially above 400°C. This is noteworthy, however, since the same experimenter found no appreciable change in surface-tension whether the experi- nents were performed in gas at atmospheric pressure or in vacuo, if the apparatus was baked out first at low pressures. This, of course, would appear to support the theory put forward that practically the whole variation is due to the effect of traces of water-vapour. Its importance is not emphasised, hawever, for two reasons. In the first place, the amounts of adsorbed and absorbed gases given oft in Hogness’s experiments at 400°C would be several hundred times larger than those which might be expected in the experiments of Popesco or Burdon and Oliphant. In the second place, it should be pointed out that the method of measur- ing surface-tension used by Hogness resembles very much the drop-weight method, which has failed in the hands of some observers to reveal differences of surface. (8) Harkins and Ewing, Jour, Am. Chem. Soc., xlii., 2, 1920, p. 2539. 288 Harkins and Grafton,“ Burdon and Oliphant (loc. cit.). Not much stress is, therefore, laid upon this observation. Since the adsorption of the water molecules at the mercury surface involves a larger decrease of the free energy of the system than when gas mole- cules are adsorbed there, the adsorption of water molecules must proceed pro- gressively at the expense of the adsorption of the gas molecules, so that the final values of the surface-tension measured by the big drop method will be those for a mercury surface almost completely covered with an adsorbed film of waiter molecules. Consequently, the final value of the surface-tension in all gases should approximate to the same figure independently of the gas. Moreover, all experi- mental evidence would appear to point to the fact that phenomena of surface- tension and interfacial-tension are governed almost entirely by the layer of mole- cules on either side of the boundary surface, It is to be expected, then, that the final value of the surface-tension in these various gases should also be approxi- mately the same as the value of the interfacial tension at a mercury-water inter- face. The value of the latter, found by Gouy, ts 427 dynes per cm., while Popesco gives the final values for the surface-tension at the end of 24 hours in the various gases — Air... ee “sy .. 418 dynes per cm. O, .. - ite .. 47 ,, te Ny . “: Bs . AID ,, a (> re ae “4 . 419° ,, ae CO. -. oy a .. 420 5, be A SO, .. 2 io - oF oy Jiboes 2s NH, .. Bd mA ws AOD 3 ig Disregarding the case of the last two gases, where it is extremely probable that chemical action occurs at the mercury surface, the agreement between the other gases quoted is sufficiently striking. It is difficult to see how the surface- tension could be lowered to exactly the same extent by an adsorption of such widely different gases as hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, and carbon dioxide, which vary over a wide range in both their probable affinity for a mercury surface and also in the masses of their molecules. Both of these factors should markedly affect the final value of the surface-tension if adsorption of the gas were the cause of the phenomenon. Moreover, the final value for the various gases does, as expected, approximate to that of the interface mercury-water, Now, the actual amount of water-vapour which must be present in an apparatus in order to bring about this adsorption of a monomolecular film of water on the mercury surface is very slight indeed, It has been shown that the life of a mercury atom in the surface is very short, and of the order of 1/100th of a second, Moreover, there is considerable evidence of the strong adsorption oi gases at many metal surfaces (vide, for example, Langmuir’s experiments upon the adsorption of gases at the surface of hot flametits). Consequently there seems every reason to suppose that the “time of stay” of an adsorbed water molecule at a mercury surface is at least largely governed by the time which the mercury atom to which it is attached itself remains in the liquid. In order that a large [Traction of the surface should be covered with an adsorbed film of water molecules at any instant, it would then only be necessary that a large number of impacts of water molecules should occur per sq. cm. of the surface compared with the number of mercury atoms which leave the same area. Taking into account, then, the fact that a water molecule will travel with a velocity about three times that of the mercury atom, it is only necessary that the vapour-pressure of water in_the apparatus should be about 33 times that of the mercury vapour in order that 99% (19) Tlarkins and Grafton, Jour, Am. Chem. Soc., xlii,, 2, p. 2534, 1920. 289 of the mercury surface should be covered with adsorbed molecules at any instant. Now, it is possible that the amount of water vapour present is of this order (‘03 mm.) in both the experiments of Popesco, and in those of Burdon and Oliphant, in which case the surface-tension of a drop of mercury formed in vacuo would attain, within a fraction of a second, an equilibrium value which approxi- mates to the interfacial tension of water. The behaviour of the drop in the presence of a gas will not be quite so simple. Measurements of the vapour pressure of mercury in the presence of air by Morley @® agrec fairly well with those of Hill,@1) whose measurements were performed by a vacuum method. It appears reasonable to assume that the number of atoms which leave one sq. cm. of the surface in one second is the same in the presence of a gas as in vacuo. So that, even in the presence of a gas, this number of atoms must be returned to a mercury surface in equilibrium with its vapour. The gas above the mercury surface may be regarded as composed of two portions :— (a) a surface layer of thickness a few times the mean free path of a mercury atom in the gas; and (b) the bulk of gas which lies beyond. It is clear that the rate at which the bulk of the gas can pass atoms of mercury to the surface will be comparatively small, and determined entirely by the rate at which atoms can diffuse through the surface layers of gas. On the other hand, much of the surface layer can give up atoms at the surface at a rate which depends simply upon the velocity of the individual atoms. It is clear, then, that in any given interval of time the number of atoms which reach the metreury surface, having diffused from the bulk of the gas, will be smaller than the number which come from the few surface layers in a ratio of the order of that of the time taken for an atom to diffuse through the surface layers divided by the time the atoms would take to traverse the same distance, if no impacts with gas molecules occurred. Since equilibrium is supposed to have been attained throughout, how- ever, the number of atoms which proceed from the mercury surface only as far as the edge of the surface layer will be greater than that which reaches the bulk of the gas in the same ratio. Thus, of the atoms which leave the mercury surface, by far the greater number are returned to it after comparatively few collisions with gas molecules. Therefore, although the actual time of stay of the mercury atom in the surface may be only about 1/100th of a second, yet the time which is spent at, or near, the surface before the atom finally escapes into the bulk of the gas may be quite large. In a similar manner, the time which a water molecule may be held in the neighbourhood of the surface may be correspondingly lengthened. Consequently, if a mercury surface is formed in a gas at ardinary pressures, the molecules of water vapour which are adsorbed at the surface may be expected to remain at, or near, the surface for quite appreciable periods of time. On the other hand, water molecules will only slowly diffuse down to the mercury suriace, so that the lowering of surface-tension will take place only very slowly, and the time taken to attain equilibrium of surface tension will depend largely upon the rate of diffusion of the water molecules through the gas. hus, at lower pressures, equilibrium is attaincd much more rapidly, as is actually found by Popesco, while in vacuo it is attained almost instantancously, Moreover, equilibrium appears to be more rapidly attained in hydrogen than in the case of the heavier gases. There is independent evidence of the extremely small amount of some sub- stances required in the vapour form to give a monomolecular adsorbed film. Thus (20) Morley, Phil. Mag., 6th Ser., vol. ‘iis; p. 662, 1904. (21) Hill, Phys. Rev., 2nd Ser., xx., p. 259, 1922. 250 Micheli 22) has found that a closely packed layer of octane was formed upon a mercury surface if the vapour pressure of the former substance was as small as 5 mm. This is, of course, about 100 times larger than the pressures of water vapour which can be expected in Popesco’s experiments, but on the other hand, it is the more striking as the experiments were performed at atmospheric pressure, and by the drop-weight method of meastiring surface-tension, so that the surface of the mercury was exposed to the air and vapour for only a com- paratively short time. Now, if the above explanation of the changes of surface-tension observed by the big drop method is the correct one, then the values obtained by different observers may vary owing to the different precautions taken for drying the gases admitted to the apparatus, and also to differences in construction of the apparatus siself. Thus the area of the glass surface and the type of glass exposed to the gas in the apparatus may alter the water vapour content, and hence affect the values of the surface-tension obtained. Thus Burdon and Oliphant give a value for the surface-tension against dry air of about 495 dynes per cm., while Popesco’s results appear to point to considerably higher values. Moreover, it might be expected that after many experiments with the same apparatts, a fatigue effect might be observable owing to the fact that the glassware no longer gave up adsorbed water vapour as readily as previously. Thus the observed value of the surface-tension at atry given time after the drop was formed should appear slightly higher than when experiments were first performed with the apparatus. Now, unfortunately, Popesco makes uo reference to any attempt made to repeat carlier readings after the apparatus had been much used. However, there were some measurements of the surface-iension in the various gases used which were made after the remainder of these readings had been finished. These were the measure- ments of the surface-tension five seconds after the formation of the drop. In the curves shown in Popesco’s paper the anomalous values obtained at five seconds time after formation of the drop are completely obliterated, owing to the small time scale there employed in drawing the graphs. It is clear that the curves for each of the gases except oxygen, and possibly hydrogen, are accurately repre- sented by straight lines from t = 10 secs to t = 300, while the decrease of surface- tension with time in these two gases certainly holds from t = 60 seconds onward, t being the time which elapses between the formation of the drop and the taking of the reading. It is possible, therefore, to regard the high values obtained for t — 5 sees. as in error relative to the other values, owing to the decreased water vapour content of the gases when 5 secs. values were recorded. Burdon and Oliphant’s curve appears to support this view. On the other hand, the values obtained by Popesco for the surface-tension of the drop at t — 10 secs. in the two gases oxygen and hydrogen rather point to the fact that the sudden bend in the curves about t = 10 may be a real one in all cases. If this is lhe case the big drop method appears to point toward values of the surface-tension of mercury in all gases almost as high as the value found in hydrogen by Meyer (loc. cit.), using the vibrating jet method. It is curious, however, that Meyer’s own values do not even approach this value of 554 dynes per cm. in the presence of gases other than hydrogen. If these curves really represent the actual manner of decrease with time, then the most likely explanation would appear to follow by assuming that either the mercury surface was still not quite steady at t = 5 secs., so that adsorption of gas molecules had not reached an equilibrium value, or, alternately, that quantities of gas were still in slight motion within the apparatus. A very rapid adsorption of water vapour will, no doubt, occur for a very short period of time after the formation of the merctiry drop, owing to the presence of water molecules in the (22) Micheli, Phil, Mag., 7th Ser., vol. iii, p. 895. 291 few layers close to the mercury where the actual velocities of the molecules will be effective in carrying them to the surface rather than a diffusion rate. It is, of course, unlikely that these few layers could contribute sufficient water molecules to the adsorbed film to lead to the large fall of surface-tension which apparently occurs, but if the gas is itself in motion within the apparatus quite an appreciable volume of it might then pass sufficiently close to the mercury surface to give the effect indicated. It is doubtful, however, what viewpoint should be adopted regarding these high values which Popesco records. In the case of oxygen, one of the gases in which the effect is most marked, several phenomena appear to point to something more than a mere physical adsorption (vide Burdon and Oliphant, Joc, cit., p. 211). In the experiments described in this paper upon the spreading of various liquids on a mercury surface, the pressure of water-vapour within the apparatus is possibly of the order of 1 mm., so that, whereas Popesco found that the full fall of surface-tension took 24 hours to occur in his experiments, it is usually found that, owing to the far more rapid adsorption of water molecules in the present experiments, drops of water or acid will not spread readily after periods of a few minutes. The idea that an adsorption of water-vapour at the mercury surface might prove to be the explanation of many of the observed phenomena of the surface- tension of this liquid has been advanced earlier by Iredale, who, however, found it difficult to conceive of an adsorbed layer upon a mercury surface which could be stable at such low pressures as 10-3 mm. Yet, even at glass surfaces, it appears by no means certain that all the adsorbed gases are given off merely by such an exhaustion, unless continued for extremely long periods, and there is much evidence to show that metals can adsorb gases or vapours far more strongly than can glass. Moreover, in order to obtain an appreciable adsorbed film it is merely necessary, as has been shown, to postulate that the time of stay of the adsorbed molecule should be of the order of 10? seconds, provided that pressure of water- vapour is of the order of 10-3, or even 10-+ mm. It is quite likely that the rate of evaporation of the adsorbed film from the mercury surface should be slightly greater in a vacuum. If this is the case, it might give an explanation of the fact that the vactitim value (436 dynes per cm.) is appreciably higher than the final value in the various gases (419 dynes per cm.). The different final values apparently obtained by preparing the mercury surface in vacuo and then admitting air at various pressures, may possibly have rise also in a decreased rate of evaporation as the pressure is increased. It is not proposed to examine in detail here the “drop-weight” method of measuring the surface-tension of mercury, nor to make a detailed analysis of the results obtained by that method. It may be pointed out, however, that many of the results obtained by the best experimenters appear to agree fairly well with those obtained by the “big drop” method, except that the values are in every case about 50 dynes per cm. too low, which fact would appear to point to a wrong correction factor having been applied. Thus most experimenters obtain a value by the former method which approximates more or less closely to that of Harkins and Grafton of 465 dynes per cm. in air, and the values for the interfacial tension are usually about 75 dynes lower. The measurement over which the agreement of the various workers breaks down completely is that of the value of the surface- tension in vacuo, Now, in their attempt to measure this, Harkins and Ewing used a mercury condensation pump (a high-speed type) and the vacuum was main- tained by keeping the pump running while measurements were being taken. Now, if the speed of the pump is sufficient, this fact may well have reduced any water- vapour which remained in the apparatus to a negligible quantity by pumping it off as quickly as it left the walls of the apparatus, so that only an inappreciable 292 amount of water-vapour condensed upon the drops as they formed at the tip of the dropping pipette. It seems just possible that the difference of experimental procedure in either continuing the pumping during the period of drop formation or in shutting off the pump, may lie at the root of the widely differing values obtained by different observers for the surface-tension in vacuo. Ina further paper,@*) Iredale definitely concluded that the changes of surface- tension recorded by the “big drop” method could not be explained as due to the adsorption of water-vapour. However, since it appears that his results in no way contradict the theory here put forward, an attempted explanation seems worth while, Once again Iredale has not taken the precaution of baking ont his apparatus. and consequently, although he estimates the vacuum as 10-5 mm. or lower, it is extremely unlikely that a sufficient vacuum can be maintained to prevent an adsorption of water-vapour sufficient to affect the surface-tension of the drop, except while the pump is running. Consequently, although his values for a drop formed jn vacuo are considerably higher than those given by Popesco, he yet finds that the surfacc-tension falls after 24 hours to a value which approaches that of the latter. Moreover, each successive drop of mercury, as it is condensed upon the glass plate, will serve to give the latter a partial baking out. On the other hand, with its successive heatings as each drop condenses, this plate will form the source of by far the greater portion of any water-vapour which is given off within the apparatus. Consequently, it is to be expected that successive drops will each be prepared in a vacuum which contains less and less water-vapour, and there will thus be recorded a series of drops of increasing surface-tension. This phenomenon is recorded by Iredale, who, however, believes it to be due to the gradual removal of some contamination upon the plate. If the latter were the correct explanation, however, corresponding changes should take place for drops formed in gases, and neither Popesco nor Burdon and Oliphant make any mention of such variations. On the other hand, the temperature of 200 to 250°C, or thereabouts, at which the mercury condenses, will certainly not be sufficient to give the plate an efficient bake out even after numbers of drops have been formed upon it, in view of the renewed heating it receives each time another drop is prepared for measurement. Consequently, with the vapour given off from the plate and walls, the vapour- pressure will again rise steadily within the apparatus if this is left for 24 hours, until a valuc of the surface-tension is reached for which the surface is practically covered with water molecules; i.¢., the same surface-tension will be reached as for a drop in contact with excess of water-vapour. Iredale gives only one set of figures, and they indicate that this is exactly what does occur. Drop 11 (vide loc cit., p. 609) falls after 24 hours to 446 dynes cm. Admission of water-vapour catses the surface-tension to fall in the case of another drop (p. 610) to 449 dynes cm. The difference in the two final values is thus only 3 dynes cm, and within the margin even of experimental error. There sccms no reason to conclude, therefore, from Iredale’s results, as he does, that an adsorption of water-vapour is not the catise of the changing values of surface-tension. VARIATION WITH CONCENTRATION. VARIATION OF THE SPREADING PRESSURE WITH THE CONCENTRATION OF THE Drors or Acip AND SALT SOLUTIONS APPLIED. Measurements have becn performed with a number of substances with a view to determining the manner in which the spreading pressure exerted varices with the change of concentration of the solution. From the data thus obtained the curves shown in fig. 8 have been drawn. In most cases it will be noted that the (23) Iredale, Phil. Mag., vol. xlix. p. 603, 1925. 293 pressures have been plotted against activities and not against the actual concentra- tions.?#) The spreading pressure for aqueous solutions of most of the substances examined appear to decrease linearly with the logarithm of the activity or con- centration. The notable exception to this rule would appear to be the case of acetic acid, where a totally different type of curve has been obtained. Un- fortunately, in the absence of figures for the activity of acetic acid in aqueous solution the spreading pressure was necessarily plotted against concentration, but it is doubtful whether the change of ordinate from log: concentration to log. activity would affect materially the form of the curve, although slight changes in the slope of the various portions of it would no doubt occur, The temptation would be to regard this curve for acetic acid as incorrectly determined, and its 50 = So DY NES/cm, 8 20 zl 2 3 -4 Fig. 8. Variation of Spreading Pressure with Concentration or Activity. 1, Sulphuric Acid; 2, Hydrochloric Acid; 3, Acetic Acid; 4, Sodium Bromide; 5, Potassium Bromide; 6, Sodium Chloride; 7, Potassium Chloride. Curves 1 and 3 plotted using logarithm of concentrations to base 10). Other curves . using logarithm of activities. departure from the simple linear form as being due simply to experimental error, were it not for the fact that this very curve has been several times confirmed upon a number of occasions, and that it is perhaps the best determined of any of the curves given. There is also the fact that hydrobromic acid appears to take up a somewhat similar form, and the few readings taken with nitric acid seem to (24) The data necessary to transform from concentrations to activities were obtained from the following papers:— Livingston, Jour. Am. Chem. Soc., xlviii, 1, 1926, p. 45. Scratchard, Jour. Am. Chem. Soc., xlvii., 1, 1925, p. 641. Scratchard, Jour. Am. Chem. Soc., xlvii., 1, 1925, p. 648. Harned & Douglas, Jour. Am. Chem. Soc., xlviil., 2, 1926, p. 3093. Interpolation and extrapolation were sometimes necessary to obtain the activities at the particular concentrations required. The curves for acetic acid and sulphuric acid have been plotted against concentration, as no figures were available for the corresponding activities. 294 indicate that in this case also there is a like departure from the linear law. No explanation has been found as yet for the variation in these cases. The horizontal portion of the graph for acetic acid with concentrations, ranging from 1/100th to 1/1,000th molar, has been put to practical advantage in the selection of a standard solution for taking check readings. The fact that the pressure remained constant over this wide range of concentration, meant that am accurate titration of the standard solution of acetic acid was unnecessary, and this solution, once obtained, it could be used over long periods of time without fear of error due to change of concentration. A more complete discussion of these pressure-activity curves is of interest. Let p denote the spreading pressure. «lig denote the surface-tension of mercury. « H,O denote the surface-tension of water. oS denote the surface-tension of an aqueous solution of a given acid or salt HgoH,O denote the interfacial tension mercury—water. HgoS denote the interfacial tension mercury—solution. Now, it is immediately clear that the spreading pressure of a drop of solution is a measure of the differences :— oHg— (cS + HgeS). ie, p =o Hg —o5 — HgoS. But oS is approximately equal tooH,O within the limits of one or two dynes per cm., so that :— p = oHg — oll,0 — HgeS approximately. Further, it is clear from the slow spread of a drop of distilled water upon a mercury surface that :— oHg = «H,0 + UgeH.O approximately, Consequently p = HgvH.O —- Hges. If, now, S, and S, are two concentrations of a given solution, and p, and p. the corresponding spreading pressures, then :— Pi — pp = dp = Hge S, — HgeS.. That is, the difference of spreading pressure at the two concentrations ts approxi- mately equal to the difference of the two interfacial tensions. Now Gibbs’ Adsorption Equation states that 1 doe fete eee te RT d (log.a) where I is the adsorption in gm. mols. per sq. cm. of surface. R is the constant of the perfect gas = 8°32 & 107 ergs per gm. mol. T is the absolute temperature. a is the thermodynamic activity. This equation, then, can be applied to the results and curves given above, provided —dp is written in place of do dp 1 dp RT d (log,a) 2°3RT d (logya) Hence the total number of molecules, n, adsorbed per sq. cm. of surface will be given by N dp n= 2°3RT d Clogya) 295 where N is the Avogadro number and is equal to 6°06 & 10.,. Therefore the area occupied by each of these molecules at the surface is 2°3RT d (logia) A= : N dp 2°3 & 832 x 107 *& 290 d (logi,a) 6:06 x 10% dp Now, over the upper portion of each of the pressure-activity curves, p = k log a, where k is a constant. Hence over these portions of the curves. the adsorption must likewise be constant, independently of the actual values of the concentration ; and the area occupied by an adsorbed molecule must also remain the same. These areas have been worked out for each of the substances plotted in fig. 8, and are given in column 2 of Table III. It will immediately be evident that these areas approach the well-known order of molecular size. In view of the fact, then, that the same amount of adsorption takes place for any one substance over quite a wide range of concentration, it might be inferred that this stable adsorbed layer represents some type of monomolecular film, the molecules of which are already in some kind of tightly packed state. It is difficult to explain this constant area which each molecule takes tp on the mercury surface unless some such closely packed layer is postulated, which can prevent the adsorption of further molecules as the concentration ts increased. Tasie III. ‘Area from Gibbs’ Ad-|Area of Cross SectionjSum of Areas of Cross Substance. sorption Equation. of larger Ion, Section of 2 Ions. Sq. Cm. x 10-16, Sq. Cm. x 10-16, Sq. Cm. x 10-16, 11°83 18:59 KCl 40-2 NaCl 55-5 11-83 15-87 NaBr 33°3 14-74 18-78 KBr | 26-2 14°74 21-50 HCl a 84-8 11-83 = HBr 49-2 14°74 = H,SO, 147-7 = — THC,H,O, 47-0 25:1 = In the first place, if the lowering of interfacial tension is caused by the adsorption of neutral molecules of the substance in solution, then it is possible that an orientation of these molecules occurs, so that all the positive or all the negative ions are attached to the mercury surface, while those of opposite sign are attached to this layer. The molecules would thus stand on end much after the fashion of the fatty acid molecules adsorbed at a water surface. If this is the case, however, the area occupied by an adsorbed molecule upon the mercury surface will be completely determined by the area of cross section of the larger ion or by the “head” of the molecule. Now, these latter areas are comparatively well known, either from crystal analysis by X-rays, or in the case of acetic acid from measurements of the fattv acid films upon water. Bragg ‘5 has accepted (26) Wasastjerna, Soc. Scient. Fenn. Comm. Phys. Math., xxxviii., p. 1, 1923. (27) Wasastjerna, Soc. Scient. Fenn. Comm. Phys. Math., p. 26, 1926, 296 number of ionic radii, and it is from these that the areas of cross section given in column 3 of Table TI. have been calculated. In the case of acetic acid the value given is that obtained by Adam. It is at once evident that in each case the area of cross section is considerably less than that actually occupied by the molecule upon the mercury surface. While such an orientation of neutral molecules adsorbed at the mercury surface may be regarded as possible, expcriments have been performed which render it rather improbable. For example, the work of Patrick and Bachman @°%? appears to show that there is a differential adsorption of the ions themselves. Moreover, the fact that Burdon found it possible to aid or retard spreading of solutions electrically, as well as the whole mass of experimental work upon electro-capillary phenomena, would seem to point to the fact that the ions can be separately adsorbed, Whether this hypothesis of adsorption of the individual ion is accepted, or that of neutral molecules horizontally oriented, the areca occupied per molecule upon the mercury surface will be slightly larger than before, but will still be smaller than the areas actually occupied, as calculated from Gibbs’ Equation Column 4 gives the approximate areas of the molecules oriented horizontally when calculated from Wasastjerna’s figures. These values are still far too low, and an explanation of the discrepancy must apparently be sought from some othcr source. Unfortunately, there does not seem to be any exact parallel among other phenomena to this adsorption at the mercury surface. On the one hand, the unsaturated valency forces which come into play in the adsorption of neutral molecules of fatty acids at a water surface must be so very much weaker than the electric forces between the ions adsorbed at the surface of mercury that the analogy between the two cases is probably a superficial rather than a real one. And on the other hand, the examination of crystal structures will also probably avail little, since the forces within the single adsorbed layer must be altogether different from those pertaining to the interior of a crystal where the electric forces are determined, not by one, but by a number of similar layers. It is difficult, therefore, to form an adequate picture of the order and arrangement of these molecules or ions when they are attached to the mercury surface. One fact remains clear, however. he adsorbed film is apparently not a closely packed film of the same type as might be imagined if a single layer of a crystal were sliced off and placed upon the mercury surface. The effective diameters of the atoms which form the film are considerably larger than those of the same atoms when they form part of a crystal lattice, Measurements of atomic diameters by means of collision phenomena (viscosity, etc.) likewise give values which are considerably larger than those given by the X-ray analysis of crystalline salts. It seems that the adsorbed film on the mercury surface should be regarded as a “liquid” film in which the adsorbed atoms are not packed in any definite pattern, and in which the diameters of the individual atoms or ions are to be compared with the diameters of similar atoms in the liquid or gaseous states, rather than with the diameters of the ions in a crystalline salt. In conclusion, thanks are due to Mr. R. S. Burdon and Mr. M. L. Oliphant for much advice and assistance, both with regard to the theoretical and the practical difficulties in connection with the carrying out of the work recorded in this paper. 297 NEW AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. By A. Jerrerts Turner, M.D., F.E.S. [Read September 12, 1929.] Fam, BOARMIADAE, . Niceteria, n. gen. vixnTypwos, victorious. I propose this generic name for Satraparchis? macrocosma Low, in place of Aprosita (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1917, p. 387), pre-occupied by myself in the Anthelidae (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1914, p. 456). Tam. NOCTUIDAE. Canthylidia zorophanes, n. sp. Cwpodavys, of simple appearance. é, 32mm. Head and thorax whitish-brown. Palpi brown-whitish. Antennae whitish-brown; ciliations in male very short. Abdomen and legs whitish. Fore- wings elongate-triangular, rather narrow, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen very obliquely rounded; uniform whitish-brown without markings; cilia whitish-brown. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish; cilia whitish. West Australia: Rottnest Island, in November; one specimen received from Mr. W. H. Matthews. Sideridis palleuca, n. sp. madXevxos, all white. ¢, 40 mm. Head and palpi whitish, Antennae grey, becoming whitish towards base. Thorax, abdomen, and legs whitish. Forewings elongate, costa straight, apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded; whitish; a few scattered blackish scales towards dorsum before middle; a minute blackish discal dot beyond middle; a series of blackish dots on veins forming a curved line from % costa very obliquely outwards, thence becoming transverse, and finally curved inwards to % dorsum; a slight greyish suffusion towards termen; a minute blackish dot at apex; cilia whitish with a fine interrupted median grey line. Hindwings with termen slightly sinuate; whitish; cilia white. Underside whitish. Distinct by its uniform whitish colour without any ochreous or brownish tinge. West Australia: Rottnest Island, in November; one specimen received from: Mr. W. H. Matthews. Catoblemma mesotaenia, n. sp. pecoratvtos, with median band. @, 22 mm. Head grey with some ferruginous suffusion. Palpi 24; fer- ruginous-grey. Antennae pale grey. Thorax and tegulae pale grey; patagia ferruginous. Abdomen and legs grey. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, slightly sinuate towards apex, apex pointed, termen strongly rounded,. slightly sinuate bencath apex, slightly oblique; pale grey, a broad median purplish- grey band, undefined anteriorly, posteriorly defined by a fine fuscous slightly dentate line, outwardly curved from % costa to 4 dorsum; a subterminal series of fine fuscous dots; terminal area beyond this dark grey; cilia dark grey. Hind- wings with termen rounded; pale grey; cilia grey. Queensland: Brisbane, in March; Victoria: Birchip, in November. 298 Two specimens; in that from Birchip one forewing has an areole, very small but of normal development, with 10 arising from it separately. Eublemma phaeocosma, n. sp. patoxoopos, with dark ornament, ?, 25 mm. Head grey. Palpi 24; grey. Antennae grey. ‘Phorax and tegulae pale grey; patagia grey. Abdomen and legs pale grey. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex quadrangular, termen rounded, wavy, scarcely oblique ; pale grey with slight fuscous irroration towards base; costal edge whitish- ochreous with a dark fuscous dot near base, and interrupted by short dark fuscous outwardly oblique streaks at 4 and shortly before and after middle, between the last and apex interrupted by three grey dots; from near the third costal streak proceeds a line at first transverse and slightly dentate, then curved inwards, and again outwards to dorsum before tornus, this line, a blotch of patchy irroration preceding it, and a transverse oblong median discal spot are ferruginous-fuscous ; a subterminal series of blackish dots, that beneath costa larger and sometimes connected by a fine streak with costa before apex; cilia grey with a paler basal line. Windwings with termen rounded; as forewings but without discal spot, postmedian line, and blotch; subcostal terminal dot small, subtornal dot larger. North Queensland: Dunk Island, in May; one specimen. Oruza lithochroma, n. sp. AvGaypwpos, stone-coloured. é,23mm. Lead brown. Palpi long, second joint exceeding vertex; brown- whitish irrorated with fuscous. Antennae brownish-grcy ; in male slightly dentate, shortly ciliated. Thorax and tegulae whitish-grey; patagia brown. Abdomen and legs pale grey. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex pointed, termen nearly straight, slightly sinuate, not oblique; whitish-grey with some dark fuscous irroration ; basal 3 of costal edge brownish; a small 8-shaped discal spot outlined in fuscous; a wavy transverse fuscous line from % costa to ? dorsum: three dark fuscous dots on costa beyond this; a narrow brownish-grey terminal suffusion; an interrupted fuscous terminal line; cilia brownish-grey, apices whitish. Ilind- wings with termen only slightly rounded; grey with slight fuscous irroration; paler towards base; an interrupted fuscous terminal linc; cilia grey. North Queensland: Stannary Hills, near Herberton; one specimen received from Dr. Thos. Bancroft. Nanaguna polypoecila, n. sp. mohumoiktAos, variegated. é,2Zmm, Ilead whitish irrorated with fuscous. Palpi 14; whitish irrorated with fuscous. Antennae fuscous, towards base grey. Thorax whitish irrorated with fuscous; posterior crest fuscous. Abdomen grey; basal crest fuscous. Legs whitish with some fuscous irroration. Forewings triangular, costa strongly arched, apex quadrangular, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; whitish irrorated with fuscous; a moderate basal patch, strongly indented above dorsum, and containing a blackish subcostal spot; a fuscous line from 4 costa to 2 dorsum, strongly angled outwards bencath costa, inwards in middle, and again outwards: a second fuscous line from # costa, strongly outwardly oblique, forming a rather acute curve in disc above middle, thence sinuate to 3 dorsum; the median band included between these lines is mostly fuscous, but with irregular areas of whitish suffusion along posterior edges towards costa and dorsum; terminal arca fuscous, towards tornus ferruginous-fuscous with suffused whitish patches towards costa and beneath middle; a fine interrupted dark fuscous terminal line; cilia fuscous above middle, below middle whitish, but interrupted by fuscous above tornus. 299 Iindwings with termen rounded; grey-whitish; veins and termina] area grey; cilia grey. North Queensland: Cairns, in May; one specimen, Calathusa cyrtosticha, n. sp. xuptoottyes, with curved line. 9,28 mm. Head and thorax pale grey. Palpi 2; whitish with some fuscous irroration. Antennae pale grey. Abdomen and legs grey. Forewings elongate, - costa strongly arched, apex quadrangular, termen rounded, not oblique; pale grey; a darker median band occupying middle third of wing; edged anteriorly by an outwardly curved fuscous line from } costa to 4 dorsum; posteriorly by a fuscous line from 2 costa to 3 dorsum, very strongly outwardly curved; within median band orbicular and reniform are outlined first in whitish, then in fuscous; a slender, finely dentate, whitish, subterminal line; dark fuscous submarginal and terminal lines; cilia grey, apiccs paler. Hindwings broad, termen sinuate; grey becoming paler towards base; cilia whitish. Underside of forewings pale fuscous ; of hindwings whitish with fuscous terminal band. Best distinguished by the strongly curved postmedian line. Queensland; Brisbane; one specimen. Calathusa polyplecta, n. sp. moAvrAektos, tmany-striped. ¢, 32 mm. Head brown-whitish. Palpi 24; whitish, with some fuscous irroration. Antennae fuscous. Thorax pale grey, anteriorly brownish-tinged. Abdomen brownish; terminal segments fuscous. Legs fuscous annulated with brown-whitish; posterior pair mostly brown-whitish. Torewings elongate, pos- teriorly broadly dilated, costa moderately arched, apex quadrangular, termen rounded, scarcely oblique; pale grey partly tinged with brownish; some fuscous irroration on costa near base; a fuscous line from 4 costa to 4 dorsum, wavy ; a post- median blackish line from costa just beyond middle to } dorsum, outwardly curved in upper half, straight and inwardly oblique in lower half; between these are orbicular and reniform, pale and outlined with fuscous; postmedian line followed by a brownish and this by a whitish shade; fuscous submarginal and terminal lines ; a long blackish streak on fold from 4 nearly to termen; similar streaks between veins from shortly before and cutting through postmedian line to termen; cilia grey mixed with whitish. Underside of forewings fuscous; of hindwings whitish with lunate discal mark and terminal band fuscous. Queensland: Cleveland, near Brisbane, in September; one specimen received from Mr. P. Franzen. Clytophylla, n. gen. cAuropuddos, like a glorious leaf. Tongue strongly developed. Face smooth, porrect. VPalpi in female short, slender, ascending, appressed to face; in male extremely short, not reaching face; second joint shortly rough-haired; terminal joint minute. Antennae of male simple. ‘Thorax and abdomen without crests. Posterior tibiae smooth. Fore- wings with 2 from %, 6 from below upper angle of cell, 7 and 8 stalked, 9, 10, 11 all separate and free, no areole. Hindwings with 3, 4, and 5 connate, cell open, discocellulars not being developed, 7 separating from 6 at about 4, 12 closely approximated to cell throughout, and to basal portion of 7, but not connected. Retinaculum of male broadly bar-shaped. This genus belongs to the same group as Karias Ub., ll ylophila Hb., and Halias Treit., but is peculiar in having 10 separate and free from the cell. Inci- dentally the structure of the hindwings shows that the Hylophilidae of Meyrick 300 (Revised Handbook of British Lepidoptera, p. 48) cannot be maintained as 2 separate family. Clytophylla artia, n. sp. aptios, perfect. 8,42mm.; 9,45 mm. Head greén on crown, fillet and face white. Palpi in male 3, in female 1; whitish mixed with brown. Antennae brown, towards base whitish; in male simple, minutely ciliated. Thorax bright green. Abdomen white. [Legs pale green; anterior tibiae, inner aspect of anterior femora, and of middle tibiac and femora, fuscous brown. Forewing sub-oblong, costa strongly arched, apex acute, termen sinuate, dentate, slightly oblique; bright green with long slender transverse paler strigulae in dorsal half; a blackish dot edged with orange-brown in mid-disc at 4; a median white discal dot, ringed first with fuscous- brown, then with orange-brown; costal edge white; cilia grey, bases orange-brown, with a median interrupted white line. Hindwings with termen rounded; white; cilia white, on costa pale green. This magnificent species fully deserves its name. Queensland: Bunya Mountains (3,000 feet), in January ; two freshly-emerged specimens. I have also seen an example taken by Mr. W. B. Barnard, at Toowoomba, Subfam. OPHIDERINAE [Nocruinar Himps.]. Crioa hyperdasys, n. sp. trepdacus, very hairy. 6, 52 mm.; @, 46 mm. Head fuscous mixed with whitish. Palpi 23; fuscous mixed with whitish. Antennae fuscous; in male minutely ciliated with longer (1) paired bristles on each segment. Thorax with a long expansile anterior crest; fuscous mixed with whitish. Abdomen pale ochreous-fuscous on dorsum with 2 to 5 small fuscous median crests on basal segments; in male densely hairy bencath, the hairs directed outwards from a median parting. Legs fuscous ; tibiae and tarsi annulated with whitish-brown; in male middle and posterior pairs very densely clothed with long whitish-brown hairs throughout. Forewings elongate- triangular, costa moderately and evenly arched, apex rounded; termen slightly rounded, crenulate, scarcely oblique, about # length of dorsum; underside in male, except costal and terminal margins, forming an orange-brown androconial arca, edged towards costa by three ridges of raised hairs; brownish-fuscous stiffused and irrorated with brown-whitish; lines fuscous; a short oblique streak from costa preceding antemedian line; antemedian line from 4 costa very obliquely outwards and slightly dentate to fold, there forming an acute outward tooth, a smaller out- ward tooth above dorsum, ending on 4 dorsum; an indistinct dentate line from mid- costa, sometimes connected with antemedian by a longitudinal streak above middle of disc; postmedian from about % costa, indistinct at origin, outwardly oblique to below middle, then looped inwards but only slightly upwards, {o beneath middle of disc, there forming a narrow lovp, thence outwardly oblique and sharply dentate to ¢ dorsum; reniform not defined; a pale dentate subterminal line; a terminal series of whitish-ochreous dots connected by fuscous streaks with subterminal ; cilia brownish-fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded, crenulate: brownish- fuscous; paler towards base; cilia brownish-fuscous. Very similar to C. acronyctoides, but the postmedian line is diffcrently formed, and the male may be immediately distinguished by the underside of the forewings. North Queensland: Thursday Island, two males, one female; also one example from Cairns in Coll, Lycll. 301 Crioa hypsichaetes, n. sp. tyxxacrys, with long hairs. 4,46mm. Head fuscous mixed with brownish. Palpi 2}; fuscous; anterior surface of second joint, median ring and apex of terminal joint, pale brownish. Thorax with an expansile anterior crest ; fuscous mixed with brownish. Abdomen fuscous; darker median dorsal crests on first five segments, that on fourth larger ; underside clothed with whitish-brown hairs without defined median parting. Legs fuscous; tarsi annulated with ochreous-whitish ; posterior tibiae and tarsi in male densely hairy on dorsum, and with a pencil of hairs from base longer than tibiae itself. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight to #, thence arched, apex rounded, termen slightly rounded, crenulate, oblique, nearly as long as dorsum; dark brownish-fuscous suffusedly paler towards dorsum and termen; markings very obscure; a stall circular dark-ringed median spot representing orbicular; a short dentate pale transverse line from 4 costa halfway across disc; several obscure pale costal dots; a series of short blackish interneural streaks running into pale terminal dots; cilia fuscous, bases paler. Hindwings with termen slightly roundcd, crenulate; fuscous; cilia grey-whitish. North Queensland: Dunk Island, in May; one specimen. Crioa emmelopis, n. sp. éupedtwmes, harmonious. &, 9, 34-36 mm. Head brown. Palpi 14; fuscous brown, anterior edge and apex paler. Antennae fuscous; in male very shortly ciliated (4). Thorax brown; tegulae grey-whitish. Abdomen brownish. Legs pale brown; tarsi dark fuscous annulated with brown-whitish, Forewings elongate-triangular, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique, crenulate ; basal half brown, sharply limited by an oblique wavy line from mudcosta to 3 dorsum; beyond this is a dense white irroration, except on a narrow terminal band; a fine wavy blackish oblique line, edged on both sides with whitish, not reaching fold, sometimes preceded by a darker shade; a brown costal spot just beyond middle, and three similar dots between this and apex; a fine dentate white subterminal line; a blackish spot on outer edge of this below middle; a fuscous terminal line; cilia brown, slenderly barred with white. Hindwings with termen rounded, subcrenulate; pale-brownish or fuscous; a suffused whitish postmedian shade and a similar subterminal line; cilia brown, apices white. Underside of hindwings with a discal spot and markings more distinct. North Queensland: Evelyn Scrub, near Tlerberton, in February; Queens- land: Nambour, in September. Two specimens. Crioa niphobleta, n. sp. yiboBAyras, snow-beaten. @, 28-34 mm. Head white, a small tuft of dark fuscous scales just inside base of antennae. Palpi long, second joint reaching vertex, terminal joint 4 second; white, external surface of second joint, a narrow basal and broad sub- apical ring on terminal joint, dark fuscous. Antennae grey, towards base with blackish rings. Thorax dark fuscous; tegulae, apex and posterior surface of crest white. Abdomen whitish-ochreous; crests blackish, large on first two seg- ments, minute on fourth. Legs white, irrorated and tarsi ringed, with blackish; posterior pair whitish. Forewings triangular, costa straight, slightly arched towards base and apex, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique, crenulate ; white with fuscous and blackish markings, near termen fuscous-whitish; a fuscous spot on base of costa edged by a blackish line; a fuscous sub-basa!l fascia edged externally by a blackish dentate line; a sub- 302 quadrate fuscous spot on costa at 2, connected by a line with a fuscous suffusion in disc, and this with 2 dorsum; reniform slenderly outlined, transverse, suboval, slightly constricted in middle; postmedian line dentate, blackish, from 3 costa to near dorsum, then bent upwards and inwards touching lower edge of reniform, there looped and ending on 2 dorsum, the first bend is connected with dorsum by a short line; a dark fuscous fascia with two posterior teeth succeeds this, except near costa, where there is a white interval; a blackish terminal line; cilia white with blackish bars. Hindwings with termen rounded, suberenulate; fuscous- whitish with a broad fuscous terminal band; cilia whitish. Queensland: Toowoomba, in October, December, and February ; three speci- mens received from Mr. W. B. Barnard. Alophosoma, n. gen. ddopotwpos, with uncrested abdomen. Face with strong obtusely-rounded promineuce covered by scales. Tongue strongly developed. Palpi long, ascending, exceeding vertex; second joint thickened with scales, rough anteriorly ; terminal joint long, smooth-scaled, obtuse. Antennae of male minutely ciliated, with longer (1) paired bristles on each seg- ment. ‘Thorax with a long expansile anterior crest, and two small posterior crests. Abdomen without dorsal crests; undersurface in male covered with long hairs directed outwards from a median parting. Posterior tibiae with basal median, and terminal tufts of hair on dorsum. Neuration normal. Allied closely to Crioa, but the abdomen has no dorsal crests. r Alophosoma syngenes, n. sp. wuyyerns, of common origin. 8, 40 mm. Head brown. Palpi fuscous, anterior edge pale brownish. Antennae fuscous. Thorax fuscous; patagia and anterior crest brown. Abdomen fuscous, Legs fuscous; tarsi anuulated with whitish-ochreous; posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Vorewings clongate-triangular, costa gently and evenly arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen rounded, crenulate, slightly oblique; grey with patchy brown suffusion; a fine, blackish, wavy antemedian line from 4 costa to dorsum before middle; reniform large, grey, clearly defined, succeeded by an area of grey-whitish suffusion; postimedian fine, blackish, from 3 costa, at first trans- verse and twice dentate, below middle looped strongly upwards and inwards, touching lower extremity of reniform, where it forms a bilobed loop and becomes outwardly oblique, ending on # dorsum; an indistinct pale dentate subterminal line; a dark fuscous terminal line; cilia fuscous, bases pale brownish. Hindwings with termen rounded, crenulate; fuscous becoming grey-whitish towards base: cilia whitish with some indistinct [uscous bars. North Queensland: Kuranda, near Cairns, in June; one specimen. Crypsiprora oostigma, n. sp. aoatcypos, with oval bands. @, 30 mm. Head brown-whitish with a few fuscous scales. Palpi brown- whitish irrorated with fuscous. Antennae brown-whitish slenderly ringed with fuscous brown. Thorax pale brownish mixed with dark fuscous. Abdomen whitish irrorated with fuscous; crests fuscous. legs fuscous; tarsi annulated with whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa gently and evenly arched, apex rounded, termen rounded, slightly oblique; pale brownish irrorated with fuscous; lines dark fuscous, slender; a sub-basal line curved outwards beneath costa; an antemedian line from 4 costa, dentate, strongly outwardly oblique to fold, there acutely angled inwards, ending on } dorsum; orbicular large, oval, 303 oblique, brown-whitish, slenderly outlined with dark fuscous; reniform larger, oval, transverse, brown-whitish, outlined with dark fuscous, more strongly anteriorly ; postmedian very slender, dentate from beneath 3 costa, obsolete towards dorsum; an interrupted subterminal line edged posteriorly with brown-whitish; several dark fuscous costal dots between and beyond lines; terminal area paler and crossed by short dark fuscous longitudinal streaks; a fine dark fuscous terminal line; cilia whitish barred with dark fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded ; fuscous, paler towards base; a darker discal dot and curved postmedian line; cilia as forewings but whiter. Underside of hindwings with markings more distinct. West Australia: Donnybrook ; one specimen received from Mr. L. J. Newman, Hypoprora tortuosa, n. sp. tortuosus, winding. ¢,28mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 2; grey-whitish, external sur- face except apex fuscous. Antennae grey; in male slightly dentate, shortly ciliated (3), with a pair of longer bristles (14) on each segment. Abdomen grey; crests fuscous. Legs fuscous; tarsi annulated with whitish. Forewings triangular, costa moderately and evenly arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly rounded, moderately oblique, crenulate; fuscous, markings blackish; an outwardly bent sub-basal line not reaching dorsum; antemedian strongly dentate, from ¥ costa to 4 dorsum, reniform large, medially constricted, faintly outlined; post- median from bencath # costa, bent outwards and twice obtusely dentate, thence bent inwards and upwards along lower edge of reniform, forming an approxi- mately circular loop, thence dentate to 2 dorsum; a pale, slender, dentate sub- terminal line; a blackish terminal line; cilia fuscous, Hindwings with termen gently rounded, wavy; fuscous-whitish, rather darker towards termen, a slightly darker discal mark and two curved postmedian lines; a dark fuscous terminal line; cilia grey-whitish. Underside of hindwings distinctly marked, but with only one postmedian line. Very similar to H. lophosoma Turn., but the lines are differently formed, and the male of that species has pectinate antennae. Queensland: Charleville, in September; one specimen, Prorocopis acroleuca, n. sp. ‘ axpoXeuxos, white al the apex. é, 30 mm. Head brownish; face whitish. Palpi 3, second joint reaching vertex, terminal joint nearly as long as second; whitish with some fuscous irrora- tion. Antennae grey; in male minutely ciliated with a pair of short bristles on each segment. ‘Thorax brownish-fuscous with lateral white lines. Abdomen fuscous, apices of segments brown. Legs whitish; anterior and middle tibiac and tarsi ringed with fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa slightly bisinuate, apex rectangular, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique, crenulate; white, irrorated, and terminal area wholly suffused, with grey; lines slender, blackish; a sub-basal line strongly bent outwards, forming a subrectangular projection; a line from ; costa to 3 dorsum, nearly straight but slightly angled outwards beneath costa and inwards in middle; a slender grey strongly angled line from + costa to mid-dorsum; reniform large, grey, medially constricted posteriorly ; postmedian line from midcosta, angled inwards beneath costa, thence longitudinal touching upper edge of reniform, prolonged subcostally to near 3, there bent, transverse, and slightly wavy and outwardly curved, below middle bent upwards and inwards to touch lower edge of reniform, there forming a narrow loop, and continued wavy to } dorsum; this is closely followed by two slender dark grey lines; a dentate 304 fuscous subterminal line, which bisects a white subapical costal spot; a terminal line; cilia grey, bases and apices whitish. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded, crenulate ; grey-whitish ; a broad fuscous terminal band narrowing towards tornus: cilia whitish, bases fuscous. Quecnsland: Gayndale; one specimen received from Dr. Hamilton Kenny. I have seen a second taken on the Bunya Mountains at 3,000 feet, Prorocopis latens, n. sp. latens, hidden. @, 25-30 mm. Head and thorax grey with whitish irroration. Palpi 24, terminal joint $ second; whitish-grcy. Antennae grey. Abdomen ferruginous- brown, towards apex fuscous. Legs grey; posterior pair whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, rather strongly obliquc; grey; antemedian line indicated by an obscure fuscous oblique streak from 4 dorsum to fold; second line by a short fuscous transverse streak from % dorsum edged posteriorly by whitish or brownish; a grey-whitish narrow terminal band, interrupted above middle, shortly edged with fuscous near dorsum; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen sinuate; pale fuscous; cilia pale fuscous, apices whitish. Very obscure, without the characteristic markings but with the structural characters of the genus. Queensland: Charleville, in September and December ; two specimens. Acanthoprora streblomita, n. sp. orpePAomtos, with winding thread. $, %, 26-29 mm. Head and thorax fuscous with whitish irroration. Palpi 14; fuscous wita whitish irroration.. Antennae grey, towards base fuscous; in male shortly ciliated (1). Abdomen grey-whitish, some irroration and basal crest grey. Legs fuscous irrorated with whitish; posterior pair except tarsi mostly whitish; tarsi ringed with whitish. [orewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, gently arched towards apex, apex round-pointed, termen slightly bowed, slightly oblique ; fuscous irrorated with whitish, appearing grey, main lines blackish, other lines fuscous and more or less distinct ; a transverse sub-basal line from costa not reaching dorsum; two more or less distinct [uscous transverse lines succeed this; a nearly straight line from 4 costa to 4 dorsum; a dentate transverse median fuscous line, sometimes indistinct; reniform slenderly outlined, large, transverse, indented posteriorly; postmedian line from # costa, straight and only slightly outwardly oblique to below middle, there bent inwards and upwards to lower edge of reniform, then forming an approximately circular loop, and continued wavy to # dorsum; an indistinct fuscous transverse line succeeds this; an irregularly dentate fuscous subterminal line, a fuscous terminal line; cilia [uscous, apices whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish; a moderate fuscous terminal band narrowing at tornus; cilia whitish. Queensland: Charleville in December; Cunnamulla; two specimens. Euprora tanyphylla, n. sp. rayvudvAdos, with long wings. 9, 32-42 mm. Head pale brown; face sometimes fuscous brown. Palpi 14; pale grey or pale brown. Antennae grey, towards base brown-whitish. Thorax and tegulac pale grey; patagia and an anterior spot pale brown. Abdomen pale grey. legs pale grey. Forewings elongate-oval, costa strongly arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly rounded, oblique; whitish-grey, sometimes 305 suffused with brown, sometimes with scattered blackish dots or short streaks on veins; a very obscure darker line from 4 costa to 4 dorsum, curved strongly out- wards beneath costa; a broadly suffused, outwardly curved, fuscous or brown median line, preceded closcly by a fine blackish dentate line from costa, not reach- ing beyond middle of disc; reniform obsolete, but indicated by an inwardly curved lunate blackish line above middle of disc; postmedian line very slender, fuscous, wavy, from before § costa to § dorsum, outwardly curved; beyond this a parallel series of short blackish streaks on veins; three blackish costal dots on posterior third; a whitish suffusion succeeds median line and is prolonged beneath costa to or towards termen; a slender interrupted whitish subterminal line; a blackish terminal line; cilia whitish-grey or brownish-grey. Hindwings broader, termen slightly sinuate; grey or brownish-grey, sometimes broadly whitish towards base; cilia grey, apices whitish, towards tornus wholly whitish. Evidently variable in colouration. North Queensland: Kuranda, near Cairns; Evelyn Scrub, near Herberton. Two specimens received from Mr. I. P. Dodd. Saroptila platysara, n. sp. mwhatvoapos, with broad brushes. 8, 30 mm. Head fuscous. Palpi 34; second joint exceeding vertex, terminal joint 4, with a small subapical posterior tuft; fuscous. Antennae grey; in male moderately ciliated (1), with a pair of long bristles (3) on each segment. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous; posterior pair mostly whitish- ochreous. lorewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen rather strongly rounded, scarcely oblique; a tuft of long hairs on underside from upper margin of cell near its end, directed downwards and outwards, partly cover- ing a pale androconial area; pale ochreous-iuscous ; lines slender, dentate, fuscous; first from + costa to 4 dorsum; second from $ costa to } dorsum, outwards from costa, but soon nearly straight and finely dentate to dorsum; a more obscure, only slightly dentate, subterminal line; a whitish dot in disc above middle at 4, and another in middle at 4; cilia concolorous, Hindwings broadly oval, elongate anteropostcriorly ; on underside with three oblique ridges of moderately long hairs, extending from near middle to near termen, directed inwards and backwards; pale ochreous-fuscous; a rather large subcostal area bare of scales; cilia con- colorous. Very similar to S. milichias Turn., but the brushes on underside of hindwings are an easy distinction. Queensland: Montville (1,500 feet), near Nambour, in March; two specimens. Fam. TORTRICIDAE. BRaRNARDIELLA SCIAPHILA Turn. Queensland: Nambour District; four specimens bred in November from larvae feeding on banana fruit (J. A. W.). Epichorista gonodesma, n. sp. yovoderpos, with angled band. g, 14 mm. Head and thorax reddish-brown. Palpi 3; second joint with long spreading hairs beneath; reddish-brown. Antennae grey. Abdomen fuscous; tuft ochreous-whitish, Legs brownish. Forewings suboblong, not dilated, costa gently arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen straight, scarcely oblique; brown- whitish with some grey suffusion in terminal area; markings reddish-brown; a 306 small basal patch; a rather narrow median fascia from costa before middle to mid-dorsum, angled acutely outwards in middle, on costa suffused with fuscous; preceding this are four fine outwardly-angled transverse lines; four whitish dots surrounded and bisected by reddish-brown and fuscous on terminal half of costa; a grey-centred tornal spot; an apical spot; an oblique line from beneath ? costa to termen below middle; terminal edge brown-whitish; cilia brown-whitish with fuscous dots on apex and below middle of termen, bases reddish-brown. Hind- wings with termen sinuate; dark grey; cilia pale grey with dark basal and apical lines. Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in March; one specimen. Fam. GLYPHIPTERYGIDAE. PuYcoDES. Phycodes Gn., Noct., ii., p. 389; Meyr., Gen. Insect., Glyphipt., p. 18. Head and thorax smooth. Antennae short, 4 or less, in male simple. Palpi very short, curved, ascending, laterally compressed, smooth. Middle and posterior tibiae smooth except opposite origin of spurs. Forewings with all veins present and separate, 2 from long before angle of cell (4). Hindwings with 3 and 4 connate or stalked, 5 parallel or slightly approximated at base, 6 and 7 separate, nearly parallel. Type, P. radiata Ochs., from India. A genus of about a dozen recorded species from India and Africa. It has not been previously recorded from Australia. PHYCODES ADJECTELLA. Nigilica adjectella Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxviii, p. 512, $, @, 12-16 mm. Head and thorax grey with metallic lustre; face brassy. Palpi minute; fuscous. Antennac very short, in male 4, in female $; fuscous; in male somewhat thickened, simple. Abdomen fuscous. Legs fuscous; apices of middle and posterior tibiae and tarsal annulations white. l*orewings somewhat dilated, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, termen straight, not oblique, rounded beneath; fuscous densely irrorated with brassy-whitish, scales mostly arranged in transverse rows; base lustrous-grey; a narrow black fascia broadly edged with brilliant brassy lines from 4 costa to 3 dorsum; a similar fascia from before 2 costa to # dorsum, giving off a brassy black-edged line from its centre to costa before apex; a brassy tornal dot, above which is u black spot, and above this a brassy streak, edged above with black, to midtermen; termen and cilia black with coppery lustre. Hindwings fuscous-brown towards base thinly-scaled; a small pencil of white hairs from near base of dorsum in both sexes; cilia Tuscous. North Queensland: Townsville, in October, December, and January. Received from Mr. F. H. Taylor, who found it abundant, and attached to the Indian Tamarind (famarindus indica), with which it has doubtless been imported. Also from China, Ceylon, India, and Africa. Amphimelas, n. gen. dudytedas, black all round. Head smooth. ‘Tongue present. Pulpi long, recurved, sickle-shaped ; second joint smooth, exceeding base of antennae ; terminal joint as long as second, smooth, slender, laterally compressed, acute. Antennae of female about 4, filiform; basal joint rather stout. Thorax not crested. Middle and posterior tibiae with median and terminal whorls of hairs, otherwise smooth. Forewings with 11 veins, 2 from 3, 3 and 4 connate from angle, 7 and 8 coincident, 9 approximated, 11 from middle. 307 Hindwings over 1, subquadrate, cilia ¢; 3 and 4 stalked, 5 parallel, approximated, 6 and 7 connate. Amphimelas argopasta, n. sp. apyoractos, sprinkled with white. 9, 16-17 mm. Head blackish; face white. Palpi blackish; second joint except base and apex white. Antennae blackish. Thorax blackish, some irrora- tion and a posterior dot white. Abdomen blackish, apices of segments white, more broadly so beneath. Legs blackish; tibial whorls of hairs and tarsal annulations white. Forewings suboblong, not dilated, costa gently arched, apex rounded- rectangular, termen straight, scarcely oblique; blackish with white irroration, which forms indistinct oblique bands, first from costa near base to dorsum near middle, second from costa before middle to dorsum beyond middle, third from 4 costa to tornus; a terminal series of white dots; cilia fuscous with slight purple lustre. Hindwings and cilia blackish. New South Wales: Mittagong, in November; two specimens received from Mr. G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type. Fam. HYPONOMEUTIDAE. ATTEVA NIPHOCOSMA Turn. Larvae whitish, each segment with a broad blackish ring of coalesced spots except in cephalic and caudal segments; in these the rings are replaced by two large trilobate spots touching on dorsum; head brown. Feeding gregariously in an open web on a jungle shrub on Palm Islands, North Queensland. Pupae grey mottled with blackish, fixed by tail in web, more or less erect. Pauridioneura, n. gen. I propose this name for Pauroneura Turn. (Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1926, p. 158), used previously by me in the Gelechiadae. Fam. HEPIALIDAE. Porina aedesima, n. sp. aideryos, vericrable. é,55 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax fuscous, Antennae whitish-ochreous; in male shortly bipectinate (1), pectinations densely but shortly ciliated. Abdomen pale fuscous, at base slightly rufous-tinged. Legs pale fuscous. Forewings elongate, suboval, costa sinuate, apex rounded, termen very obliquely rounded; pale fuscous densely irrorated with fine whitish-ochreous hairlike scales; a dark fuscous costal streak; an outwardly oblique, narrow, oblong, whitish, discal mark before middle slenderly outlined with fuscous; three oblique lines consisting of fuscous spots, often whitish in centre, variably developed; first from midcosta outwardly curved around discal mark, thence straight to # dorsum; second from 4 costa to 4 dorsum, nearly straight ; third from % costa to tornus, nearly straight ; sometimes an impericctly developed similar sub-basal line; cilia fuscous with a few whitish-ochreous scales. Hindwings with termen strongly rounded; pale fuscous tinged with rufous towards base, or wholly pale rufous; cilia fuscous. North Queensland: Eungella (2,500 feet), behind Mackay, in October; two specimens. Trictena argyrosticha, n. sp. épyupootiyxos, silver-striped. é, 106-120 mm. Ilead, thorax, abdomen, and legs pale brown. Palpi about 1; brown, Antennae whitish-ochreous; in male tripectinate, lateral pectinations 4, 308 median ventral pectinations rather shorter. Forewings elongate, suboval, costa straight to %, thence arched, apex tolerably pointed, termen slightly rounded, strongly oblique, longer than dorsum, with which it forms a continuous curve; brown, towards costa narrowly and suffusedly pale brown, towards dorsum very broadly and definedly pale brown; more or less marked with fine, parallel, curved, scroll-like, darker and paler lines, forming near termen concentric oval rings, which have occasionally whitish centres; an irregular-edged, rather broad, median, longitudinal, shining-white streak, from near base to beyond middle, with irregular teeth above and beneath; sometimes a few small white spots in disc beyond this; a similar but untoothed oblique streak from just beneath apex to midway between end of median streak and anal angle; cilia brown-whitish. Hindwings broadly oval, termen strongly rounded; pale brown, sometimes with pale fuscous suffusion postcriorly. Apart from the different colour the forewings are narrow, with longer termen, and more pointed apex, and the palpi rather shorter than in T. labyrinihica Don. Queensland: Montville, near Nambour, in March; Toowoomba in April; Six specimens. 309 NOTES ON, AND DESCRIPTIONS OF, CHALCID WASPS IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Concluding Paper.) By A. A. Grraurt, Assistant Government Entomologist, Queensland. (Communicated by Arthur M. Lea, F.E.S.) [Read September 12, 1929. ] The following data and descriptions comprise a final report upon a collection of the Hymenopterous family Chalcididae loaned to me by the Director, South Australian Museum. The types are in the named museum, cotypes in the Queens- land Museum at Brisbane, but a few are otherwise disposed of, as noted in the text. Subfamily KUPELMINAE. Genus Euretmus Dalman. 1, Eupr.mMus antipopsa Ashmead. A female specimen, Launceston, Tasmania (F. M. Littler), December 17, 1916. The basal 4 of ovipositor is aeneous, rest yellow. The species differs from E. splendidus in bearing a longer ovipositor (half abdomen’s length) and in the different colour of this organ. The metallic colour is deep and the tibial tips in leg 3 sharply contrast. Postmarginal somewhat exceeds the stigmal. Runs to splendidus in my revised table of the genus Ewpelmus (Australian). 2. FEUPELMUS WORCESTERI Girault. A female, Murray Island, Torres Straits (A. M. Lea). Tibia 2 has the distal two-thirds red-brown. Scutellum finely long- lineolated. 3. EupPELMUS SPLENDIDUS Girault. A female with No. 2. Differs from LE. antipoda: Frons a bit wider, more opaque, without rows of pin-puncturcs (eyes, mesopleurum bare in both), ocelli in smaller triangle, shorter ovipositor, stigmal vein more curved and equal post- marginal. 4. Eurre.mMus REDINI Girault argentilineus, n. var. As typical form but entirely purple except a linear exfoliation along the whole of tibia 2 beneath, this silvery. T.ateral ocelli nearly twice wider apart than either is distant from median. Tuarsi more or less brown beneath; middle tibial spur brown; scutum denscly pilose. A female, March 23, 1916, Launceston, ‘Tasmania. 5. EUPELMUS EXTRAORDINARIUS Girault. Fore wing with two eye-spots. Aeneous; knees, tibial tips, tarsi except 1 of 3 and most of tibia 2 except proximad, brown; ovipositor shortly extruded, white except at base narrowly; eye-spots small, elliptical, separated by more than their length, the caudal isolated from caudal margin; postmarginal over twice the stig- mal ; silvery band abdomen wide; ocelli ina flat triangle, lateral closer to eye than to CQ) The verter desires ie thank all whe gave aid, The first fand daly aie part was printed in Records S. Austr. Museum, part, iii., 1927, pp. 309-338. 310 median; funicles 2-3 over twice longer than wide, exceeding pedicel, latter brown at apex. Cephalic mesopleurum pilose, a row of elongate hairs across neck of prothorax (dorsad). Antennae somewhat above eye ends. In table follows £. giottint. A female, Cairns district (A. M. Lea). 6. EupEtmus CAESAR Girault. Runs to E. chauceri but differs from that species and FE. nelsonensis by colour of the legs; in the same way from EF. shakespearei; like E. brutus but femur 3 aencous for proximal 3; tibia 3 aeneous above for proximal 4 except just at base. The rows of thimble punctures along the eyes down the face are very distinct, in the other specics usually absent or obscurc. Mesopleurum naked in all. Ovipositor here nearly half abdomen, narrowly blue at base and apex, but at latter more widely, middle half or more white. Fore tibia aeneous above and below only. The species is also characterised by having the first four segments of the abdomen decply notched at hind margin; and the whitish hairs of the face, lobes of scutum and prepectus conspicuous. Four female type specimens reared from Eublemma species on Ceroplastes rubens, Custard apple, Redland Bay, February 23, 1926 (A. A. Girault and W. A. T. Summerville). Two cotype females reared from larva Lygropia clytusalis Walk. “Currajong Bag-shelter Moth,’ Darwin, North Australia, November 1, 1913 (G. F. Lill). 7. EuPELMUS MAWSONI Girault sotis Girault. A female, Adelaide, by sweeping; a female, Mount Lofty, South Australia (Jj. G. O. Tepper). Femora entirely yellow mesad except 3, so also the tibiae. Genus ParoopERELLaA Girault. 1. Parooderella goethei, n. sp. To follow P. semiputata. Frons the same but ocelli equidistant (lateral much closer to eye than to median). Dull reddish, the head and antennae except scape, aeneous; hind margin pronotum, cephalic mesopleurum, hind margin of segment 2 of the abdomen, purple, tegulae black; ovipositor 4 abdomen, white. lind coxa purple at base above. Fore wing nearly thrice longer than wide, truncate and widest at apex, fuscous, ciliated on about basal half, venation to costa at apex, hence marginal vein punctiform. Joint 3 of the funicle equal to the pedicel, 2 longest, nearly thrice longer than wide. Pronotum with a median sulcus. lead and eyes pilose, also dorsal abdomen which has a velvety appearance. Scutum hispid. A female, Chinchilla, Queensland, february, 1928 (A. P. Dodd). Genus METAPELMA Westwood. 1. METAPELMA GOETHEI Girault. The type is in the South Australian Museum, cotype in Queensland Museum. Genus CERAMBYCcOBIUS Ashmead. 1. CERAMBYCOBIUS PAX Girault. A female specimen from Strahan, Tasmania (H. J. Carter and A. M. Lea). Tibia except ends metallic, tarsi black except joint 1. 311 Genus NEANASTATUS Girault. 1. NEANASTATUS DESERTENSIS Girault. A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). Genus EvusanpALuM Ratzeburg. 1. Eusandalum longiannulum, n. sp. Head as long as wide, antennae at eye ends, the rather large, round, somewhat bulging eyes equal to cheeks, the scrobes forming a deep V-shaped cavity with thick-ridged sides which on vertex form two obtuse “horns.” Funicle 2 about 7 times longer than wide, rest gradually shortening, 1 quadrate, pedicel small. Abdomen elongate, last segment stylate and compressed, extending nearly to apex ovipositor and one-third rest of abdomen, latter twice length thorax plus head. Postmarginal vein elongate, equal marginal, over four times the stigmal. Vertex subquadrate, finely cross-lined, caudal margin concave, cephalic excavated and “horned,” the ocelli nearly in a straight line on cephalic margin, lateral close to eye, rather farther from median. A tubercle between antennae. Scape extend- ing tar above vertex. Eyes bare. As E. compressiscapus but fore wing with a deep wide, midlongitudinal fuscous stripe, apex to base and touching apex of the short stigmal, latter with distinct neck; funicles and postmarginal longer. A female, Georgetown, Tasmania, November 16, 1914. Subfamily SIGNIPHORINAE. Genus Matritta Mercet. 1. Matritia hebes, n. sp. As M. thusanoides but hyaline band of wing 1 a triangle whose base is distad and the length of the stigmal vein distad of the apex of that vein, and whose apex is lost in an hyaline area from the marginal vein, and which ends at about centre, but meets another clear area on caudal margin opposite most of submarginal vein; the distal margin of the farthest clear area is acutely concaved. ‘Tibia 1 entirely black. Distal fringes just exceeding stigmal vein. No accessory discal bristle on wing 2. Head and thorax smooth, a few indistinct pin-punctures. Pedicel not $ scape. Lateral ocellus close to eye, far distant from median. Three females from spider eggs in a leaf-nest, Tasmania. Subfamily ENCYRTINAE. Genus ErtcnEmLonreurus Girault. 1. Epicheiloneurus cinctiventris, n. sp. Abdomen with a silvery cinctus across apex segment 2 dorsad. Purple. Head, scape save apex, leg 1, tip tibia 3, tibia 2, neck of thorax, orange ; ‘tarsi, knee 3, tegula at base, femur 2 mostly, silvery. Fore wing with a wide, ‘deep cross-stripe from bend of submarginal vein distad to a point half way to apex from apex of stigmal. Scutellum, axillae, green, with sparse hairs, former with no apical bristles. Hairless line with about 9 lines cilia proximad of it and from which proceeds a paired curved line to base, this and first few lines near base, coloured, rest pale; hairless line closed in middle of wing and also against venation, Frons wide. Distal three funicles with several flattened bristles on apex of one side. A pair of lines of discal cilia along submarginal to base. Marginal four 312 times longer than wide, twice the stigmal, postmarginal shorter than stigmal. Scape clavate, distinctly compressed and dilated. Pedicel exceeding funicle 6. A female, Mount Lofty, South Australia, in tussocks. Genus ANAGYROPSIS Girault. 1. ANacyropsis CICADA Girault. Both sexes, Mount Pleasant, South Australia (Loveday), February 9, 1897, from galls and lerp. Also two large females, Cradle Mountain, Tasmania (H. J. Carter and A. M. Lea). ‘The male is coloured like the female but the antennae are entirely lemon and curious. There are four large, equal ring-joints and a long, cylindrical, thick 3-jointed club whose joint 2 is shortest, half longer than wide, 1 and 3 each twice longer than wide. The club is densely hispid, the hairs short. The pedical and scape are short, latter much dilated but longer than wide. In the male there is also another curious modification which I have never as yet met with in this family. The middle tarsi are black, while the spur is flattened and spindle-shaped and also black. 2. Anagyropsis longistylus, n. sp. As A. channingi but funicles 1-2 longest, nearly twice longer than wide, exceeding the short pedicel; ovipositor two-thirds the abdomen’s length, latter produced into a very narrow, clongate’ stylus, which nearly attains apex of ovipositor; postmarginal a bit shorter than stigmal; flagellum except basal part pedicel, yellowish. Tibia 3 immaculate. Scape’s dilation not great, distad, the scape clavate, dorsal margin serrate. Mesopleurum bare. Wing 2 with 28 lines of dense discal cilia. 3. ANAGYROPSIS HOWARDII Girault. A female, attracted to light, Rockhampton, Queensland (A. M. Lea). The frons is punctate, the ocelli nearly equidistant, lateral near eye. In the above specimen, the apical half of coxa 2 was yellow. Genus Coccmpoxenus Crawford. 1. Coccidoxenus aeneoculex, n. sp. As C. minutella Girault but frons moderately wide (scape a bit pale beneath at apex), leg 2 ycllow save coxa and a blotch above on tibia at basal 4 (near base) 5 scape with some distal dilation; wing ciliated to base, costal cell entirely ciliated ; apex tibia 3 rather widely pale (more so ventrad) ; discal cilia distad of venation distinctly finer, very fine and dense. Tegulae dark save across base. Moderately small species, the ovipositor a bit extruded. Funicles quadrate,, enlarging distad, half length pedicel. One female, Lucindale, South Australia (A. M. Lea). Genus Eprencyrtormes Girault. 1. EpiexcyrtTorpEs QUINQUEDENTATUS Girault As E, azillaris but cinctus of tibia 2 short yet exceeding the short white proximad of it; coxa 1, femur 2, femur 1 (except at sides), tibia 1 at base, con- colourous; jaws 4- and 5-dentate, 4 of 5-dentate minute but distinct, 5 as in the other mandible. Wings clear. Scape, club and pedicel above black. Funicles 5-6 quadrate. Postmarginal equal marginal, a bit exceeding stigmal. Vour lines cilia proximad hairless line, distad of it cilia fine and uniform. Submarginal setae long bristles. 313 Male antennae 5-jointed, 2 ring-joints, 2 half of 1 which is somewhat wider than long; a very Jong, solid, hairy club, which is yellowish. Ovipositor shortly extruded. Reared from Chionaspis ? eucalypti Froggatt, on loganberry, Melbourne, Victoria, March 2, 1927 (G. F. Hill). Paratypes in South Australian and Queensland Museums. Genus RHOPALENCYRTOIDEA Girault. 1. R#opaLENcyRTompEA puBIA Girault. A female and a dozen more in another lot, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). The funicles 1-3, 4-6 are usually in two groups, the second exceeding the first but all quadrate. Sometimes 3 is equal 4 and therefore belongs to the second group. Sometimes the postmarginal vein is a bit shorter than the stigmal. This is a variable species. I have once redescribed it from New South Wales under the name FR, cinctifemur, 2. Rhopalencyrtoidea austrina, n. sp. As R. claripennis but all funicle joints twice longer than wide, 1 shortest, 2 a bit longer, subequal to the pedicel; 2 of mandible longer than 1; fore wing lightly infuscated, more deeply so across from marginal and stigmal veins, latter sub- equal, distinctly shorter than the postmarginal vein; only 2 lines of cilia close the mouth of the hairless line at caudal margin; middle tibia purple nearly to apex; scape subrectangularly dilated. Palpi dark, 3- and 4-jointed, 4 of maxillary elongate. Second wing densely ciliate, wide, 26 lines of cilia which do not extend quite to base, A female, Strahan, Tasmania (H. J. Carter and A. M. Lea). Genus Eprevatricina Girault, 1. Epiblatticida puparia, n. sp. Jaw 3 obtuse, not widened. Frons of moderate width. As E. lambi but coxae, femora (2 only washed from base), tibia 1 at basal one-third (often), and tibia 3 more or less at basal 4 purple; scape, apex pedicel, funicles 5-6, legs (yellow), knee 1 widely, white; funicles 1-4 dusky pale. Scape more or less dusky. Venation black, postmarginal less than half the marginal, half stigmal. Three lines of loose and coarser cilia, proximad hairless line and one line along submarginal to base. Abdomen depressed, beehive-shaped, smaller than thorax, ovipositor extruded not quite for half length of abdomen, Sculpture very fine. Vertex, upper thorax with scattered short, black sctae; a few small punctures on vertex. Male similar but frons wider, antennae filiform, scape less dilated, dusky, pale at apex; club longest of flagellum, solid, hairy, funicle 1 twice longer than wide, longest, 6 a bit longer than wide, equal pedicel. Funicles with longish, irregularly placed, soft hairs. Reared from a puparium, Byfictd, Queensland (J. L. Froggatt), March 29, 1926. Cotypes in Queensland Museum. Genus APHycus Mayr. 1. Aphycus nigrivarius, n. sp. Golden. wings clear, black as follows:—-A wide stripe across upper occiput, face of prothorax, nearly cephalic half scutum, pronotum laterad, axiflac except laterad and a mark on scutum in front of them; a large, acute triangle on scutellum with its apex at base and the mark attaining nearly to apex of the region, where 314 it terminates in a cross-stripe; dorsal thorax along scutellum; propodeum except meson and lateral margins ; meson upper abdomen widely (at apex entirely across). Legs with faint traces of dusky spots. Scape moderately dilated. Jaws 2-3 shal- lowly divided, jaw teeth small. Funicles 1-3 equal, globular, rest enlarging, 6 quadrate, subequal pedicel. Postmarginal equal the punctate marginal; hairless line closed by several lines, discal cilia to base. Scutum with scattered, short setae. Type a female, Brisbane (on a gum leaf), Queensland (A. R. Brimble- combe), September 30, 1926. Cotypes, a series reared by Mr. G. F. Hill from Eriococcus coriaceus, Hawthorn, Victoria, April 1, 1927. In the cotypes the black of scutum was less and that of scutellum scarcely produced cephalad from the cross-stripe. There are two dusky blotches on tibia 3 above, base and apex. In the male, the axillae, scutellum, all of scutum except latero-caudal corner, dark green. The flagellum is lighter, with long hairs, the club solid, long, funicles much shorter, 4+ longer than wide, exceeding pedicel. Gents CRISTATITHORAX Girault. 1. Cristatithorax sublimus, n. sp. Difers from C. nozvimandibularis in having tibia 1 purple except apex, abdomen purple only widely at base above, a spot above and below middle knee purple. Cephalic ocellus twice farther from lateral than latter are from each other. Elsewise as in C. mackayensis. Reared with Coccophagus exiguiventris at Darwin, North Australia (G. F. Hill). Genus Neociapia Perkins. 1. NeociaptA Howarpi Perkins. A male, reared in association with “Phiyctaenodes pilosus Pascoe,” South Australia. The club is elongate, solid, subequal to the branches which are narrower at base and above armed with stout, long spines; joint 6 of the funicle is distinctly longest, 5 quadrate, rest wider than long; club much exceeding the scape. Labial, palpi 3-jointed, 2 small, 3 longest but not long, rather swollen. Marginal vein longer than wide, the postmarginal distinctly exceeding the stigmal. ‘ore tibia all yellow beneath. ‘The teeth of the mandibles were not seen in this specimen, but after mounting this is often impossible as the jaw itself must be dissected off and floated. ‘There is a branch from each joint of the funicle. Genus ARHOPOIDEUS Giraull. 1. ARHOPOIDEUS BREVICORNIS Girault. A female reared from wattle galls, May, 1897, South Australian Museum. There were three distinct lines of cilia proximad of the hairless line; the: posunarginal vein in this specimen was distinct, short. 2. Arhopoideus semiargenteus, n. sp. Fore wing with a wide smoky band across it from costal margin distad of venation (touching base of stigmal vein and all ol postmarginal) and thus characterised, Aeneous, head and thorax denscly, finely punctate; tarsi, fore tibia beneath, at sides and apex, tibia 2, basal third hind tibia and the linear exfoliation of the scape at apex beneath, silvery. Joints 3-5 of the funicle a little wider than long. Second wing obtuse at apex, 20-22 lines of cilia. Pedicel subequal to joint 1 of the funicle, funicle 2 quadrate. A short postmarginal vein. One female, North Pine River, Queensland, November 17, 1928 (H. Hacker). 315 The palpi in this genus are l- and 2-jointed, and the group is thus further characterised. Genus AENASIELLA Girault. 1. AENASIELLA ANALIS Girault. Several females labelled: “Parasites of Brachyscelis, Jetulpa, 2/Neita (Mrs. Tarrant), 11.3.02. Emerged June 25, 1903.” The scutum is densely pilose. Of the 8 lines of discal cilia proximad of the hairless line, the fourth is almost on over cephalic half, so that there are two groups of 3 and 4 lines. The maxillary palpi bear a conical tooth-like projection at the base of the constricted basal part, giving the appearance of a bifid or cleft apex. This character, that of the divided ciliation back of the hairless line and the shorter ovipositor and somewhat larger abdomen distinguish the species from Khopalencyrtoidea dubia which it closely resembles. In the original description the name of this species was misspelt amplis. Genus Coriposoma Ratzeburg, 1. CopiposoMA AUSTRALIA Girault. A female, Sydney, New South Wales (A. M. lea). The frons is punctate. Genus EucieILoneuropsis Girault. 1, EvcHEILONEUROPSIS ABNORMIs (Girault). A female, Sydney, New South Wales (A. M. Lea). The silvery part of the middle tibia (over basal half) was not purplish beneath. Jateral ocellus near eye, very far from the median. Genus ParaENAsoMyIA Girault. 1. Paraenasomyiia feralis, n. sp, As P. orro but ovipositor not extended, all dark purple except knees, tarsi tibial tips; wings with a slight stain against marginal and stigmal veins; funicle 6 is nearly as long as the others (joint 1 of the club longer than wide, exceeding 1 of the funicle in width and length); 6 loose lines of discal cilia proximad of the hairless line, several lines to base cephalad and caudad ; marginal vein a bit longer than wide, half the stigmal, latter somewhat shorter than the postmarginal ; costal cell entirely ciliate. Dilation of scape linear and distad. Wings clearer proximad of the hairless line. Abdomen not twice longer than wide at base. Scutum pilose. Maxillary palpus with 4 elongate, 1 long, rest short; 3 of the labial palpus shorter than 1, 2 shortest. Bulla and palpi dark. Joints of the funicle slightly shorter than pedicel, A female, Adelaide South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). Subfamily APHELININAE. Genus ABLERUS Howard. 1, ABLERUS RITEA Girault. Runs to A. pan in my revised table and is like A, hyalinus, but antennae black except apex pedicel, only the distal end of the parapside is pale, funicles shorter, 3 transverse, fringes one-third to one-half wing width; 2-3 lines coarser, dark cilia back from stigmal, discal cilia distinct, not dense, 12 lines, Caudal fringe wing 2 exceeding width. Funicle 1 equal pedicel and 2, half longer than wide. Ilead ivory, deep aeneous on face below antennae but pale at meson or immediately beneath them. 316 Type and cotype female reared from a coccid on Callitris robusta, Injune, Queensland, April, 1927 (J. H. Smith). The cotype, as usual, for the Queens- land Museum. Genus CoccopHacus Westwood. 1. CoccoPpiAGUS EXIGUIVENTRIS Girault. As description of C. pulcini but differs as follows:—Uniformly dull honey ; stripes of abdomen usually 4 (4-5), 1 and sometimes 2 widely interrupted at meson, 4 abbreviated each side; antennae of uniform colour, honey; funicle 1 excceds 2; lateral ocelli twice closer to eye than to median; setae from marginal smaller than those from submarginal; axillae as pilose as scutum and scutellum, latter with a slender seta each side at apex; pilosity white; stigmal vein oblique, globular, its neck as long as its knob; fringes at apex short. Abdomen smaller than thorax. Scutellum naked mesad apically. Pedicel of male globular, flagellum filiform, distal 4 abdomen black, rest pale with two brownish marginal dashes between base and middle. Reared from a large Lecanium (No. 316, W. W. Froggatt), Darwin, North Australia, September 6, 1916 (G. F. Hill). Ten male, female types and para- types upon one card mount. Subfamily PERILAMPINAE. Genus MEsSELATUS Girault. 1. MESELATUS FASCIATIPENNIS Girault. A female, Sydney, New South Wales (A. M. Lea). In this specimen the entire head was black. ‘The long hair of lateral scutum and so forth is from punctures. Propodeal median carina forked. Distal funicles twice wider than long. Propodeum reticulate, rough in places. 2. MESELATUS SUBATRIVENTRIS Girault. Many specimens of both sexes from Port Jackson figs (A. J. Coates), Sydney, New South Wales. Scutellum with an elongate seta at apex; cilia of fore wing rather dense, the wing lightly embrowned to apex from about distal one-third submarginal vein. Marginal and submarginal bristles gross. Elongate sctae from dorsal hind tibia and also from femur 3 beneath and above (in the male more stout and more con- spicuous, the femur much enlarged). Scattered elongate bristles on thorax. The male antenna bears one less [unicle (1 + 1 + 1+ 6 + 1), the ring- joint distinctly longer than wide, excceding funicles, the pedicel longer than in the female. Genus Systo.omMorPHA Ashmead. 1. SysTOLOMORPHA TILYRIDOPTERYGIS Ashmead. Many specimens from galls of Cylindrococcus casuarinae, November, 1907, Victor Iarbour, South Australia (D. H. Cushman). A female, Tarcoola (A. M. Lea). Genus CozLocyna Ashmead. 1. CoELocyBA PERSIMILIS (Girault). A female, Lucindale, South Australia (A. M. Lea). Vertex and frons with numerous umbilicate punctures. Lateral ocellus over twice closer to the eye than to the median. Pedicel a bit longer than wide. Hind coxa enlarged, compressed. One hind tibial spur very short. Scutum, parapside, cephalic half scutellum with many short, black setae. Band 6 of abdomen a trans- verse mark across meson widely. Proximal margin of the discal ciliation of fore wing wedge-shaped, acute. 317 Genus CoELocyBELLorpes Girault, 1. COELOCYBELLOIDES MEDIOLINEATUS Girault. Launceston, Tasmania, No. 2010, December 7, 1915. The stigmal vein is only half the length of the marginal. The wings are more or less embrowned. Head pin-punctate, the punctures bearing minute setae. Both palpi are 2-jointed. The amount of black on the parapside varies, and the centre of the mesopleurum is black as well as the base of the hind coxa, 2. COELOCYBELLOIDES PULCHRIVARIEGATUS Girault. Five males, two females, reared from galls on Eucalyptus, Tintinara, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). LEmerged March 2, 1887. : The maxillary palpi are 4-jointed in both sexes, the labial apparently 3-jointed. Hence the species is not congeneric with C. mediolineatus, The segmentation of the palpi is very little known in this group, perhaps because of the difficulty in seeing them. 3. Coelocybelloides pulchra, n. sp. As C. aureus, but base of abdomen, pleura and venter of thorax, prothorax also lemon; dorsal thoracic sutures not black, dorsal scape except at base, dorsal pedicel, green; no black on dorsal thorax except the spiracle and a spot near the base of the second wing. Apex of abdomen widely black and the curved stripe 4 is rather close to it. Venation yellow distad of the submarginal vein. Funicle 1 as wide as 2, each 4 longer than wide and nearly as long as the pedicel. A large species with black mesoventer. A female, Ooldea, South Australia. 4. Coelocybelloides nigrisetae, n. sp. From C. pulchra: Thoracic sutures black, black setae along each side of the scutellum and along the parapsidal furrows; abdomen as in C. aureus but the cross-bands cover the entire surface from basal 4 to distal 4; the pubescence is black, grey in pulchra, Venation black except basal 4 of the marginal vein. Both species differ from C. awreus in the more widely-spaced bands of the abdomen. A female, Ooldea, South Australia. Genus Perttampus Latreille. 1. PERTLAMPUS TASMANIENSIS Girault, A female, Tasmania (A. Simson, No. 2709). Genus Erecarus Girault. 1. Epenarus ruryroMoIpEA Girault. The type locality is Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). The first funicle joint is nearly twice longer than wide. Subfamily CLEONYMINAE. Genus Episystotr Girault. 1. Episystote porta Girault. One female, Murat Bay, South Australia. Genus PLatyGErraus Thomson, 1. Platygerrhus incola, n., sp. As P. dugandani but fore wing with a complete loop, narrow centrally with suffused cross-stripes from cach end; and dusky apex; segment 2 glabrous ; stig- mal vein over half the postmarginal ; legs yellow for the most part except coxae; 318 femur 1 is somewhat more swollen than 3 and deeply excised beneath at apex (1 less than 3 in other and not excised). Scape red-brown except apex , funicle 2 equal the long pedicel, femora mostly pale, all blotched with aeneous laterad (across near apex of 1, 3, along lower margin at distal 4); tibia 1 beneath except each end, tibia 2 with a narrow, 3 with a wide middle cinctus. Funicle 1 longer than wide. Tibiae flavous at base and apex. Type female, Kuranda, Queensland, November, 1919 (A. P. Dodd). Also at Gordonvale, March, December (paratypes in Queensland Museum). A male from Kuranda had the cinctus of tibia 2 as wide as that of 3, and this may be true for the female. In the collections of the South Australian Museum there is one female, Kangaroo Island (A. M. Lea). 2. Platygerrhus froudei, n. sp. As P. dugandani but tibia 2 all yellow except for a short cinctus near base, wings clear, and postmarginal distinctly shorter than marginal and a bit over twice the length of the stigmal; distal 3 of the tibiae yellow (frons moderately wide) ; funicle 2 three and a half times longer than wide, equal the elongate pedicel. Gordonvale, Queensland, October, November, 1920 (A. P. Dodd). Cotype in Queensland Museum. 3. Platygerrhus pallidicoxa, n. sp. As P. incola but smaller, funicle 2 subquadrate, distinctly shorter than pedicel, femora not much swollen, 1 not excised beneath and tending to be slender. All coxae pale. Scape rather widely acneous at apex. ‘three femaics, Kuranda, Queensland, December (A. P. Dodd). Cotype in Quecnsland Museum. Genus AmERostenus Girault. 1. Amerostenus varidentatus, n. sp. Mandibles 3- and 4-dentate, hence so characterised. Scape pale at base. Otherwise like 4. aercipes but first two pairs of tibiae aencous above only, middle femur yellow dorso-mesad, postmarginal vein as in the genotype, that is, elongate, about twice the length of the stigmal, the latter with a long, slender neck. Joints of the funicle subequal, a bit wider than long, distinctly shorter than the pedicel. Propodeum short at the meson, there carinate. ‘Thorax scaly reticulate, a few indefinite punctures, pronotum transverse, axillae advanced. Clypeus obtusely incised at each corner of apex. Tooth 3 of the 3-dentale jaw widely truncate, 4 of the other jaw obtuse and shorter. Joint 1 of the middle and hind tarsi subclongate, much longest, in middle tarstis equal to the elongate tibial spur. The male similar but the fore tibia is entirely pale. A imale and two females from galls on the leaves of Eucalyptus obliqua, Blakiston, South Australia (7. D. Smeaton). Fmerged May, 1888. With Rhicnopeltella and others. Subfamily AGAONITINAE. Genus PLeistopontes Saunders, 1, Pleistodontes semiruficeps, n. sp. Like P. froggatti in structure of the antennae and head but entirely black, the head red except proximal (or dorsal) 4 (from ventral eye ends), this part of the head, jet. Legs and first five antennals red-brown. Ovipositor not quite as long as abdomen. Many females on Banyan figs, Lord Howe Island (A. M. Lea). 319 Subfamily PTEROMALINAE. Genus SPALANGIOMORPHA Girault, 1. SPALANGIOMORPHA FASCIATIPENNIS Girault. Two females from rice grain, Murray Island, Torres Strait. Two others labelled as being parasites of small beetles, June, 1891, Dr. Sterling, Central Australia, According to Masi’s table this genus is Chactospila, the funicle being 5-jointed and the axillae separated. The species, so far, has not been referable to any older description, but I have not as yet seen all of them. Genus Spacancta Latreille, 1. Spalangia punctulaticeps, n. sp. Head densely rugulose-punctulate with many scattered umbilicate punctures. Wings dusky. A narrow median groove to the scrobes from the median occllus. Funicles 1-3 wider than long, together about as long as the pedicel. Pronotum, scutuin densely scaly with scattered pin-punctures on the former and also upon the scaly parapsides; a weak cross-row of fovea on scutum distad of the middle, from thence glabrous like the scutellum and axillae, and like these with a few punctures along lateral portions (on scutellum in two longitudinal rows, leaving a wide, smooth mesal area); a cross-row of pin-punctures on scutellum except at mesal part and toward apex; axillar sutures punctate. Propodeum with two foveate mesal grooves which join at middle and run as one to apex, narrowing much; glabrous but densely punctate laterad of the spiracle except at cephalic margin, this between the meson and spiracle foveate. Segments 2 and 3 equal, united half the surface, 4 a bit longer than either. A female, Kangaroo [sland (A. M. Lea), Genus PACHYNEURON Walker. 1, PACHYNEURON KINGSLEY Girault, A female in October, Melrose, also at Gawler, South Australia (A. M. Lea). Genus Preromatus Swederus. 1. PreRoMALUS PUPARUM (Linn.). A female, Melrose, South Australia (A. M. Lea), in October; another by sweeping, Adelaide (N. B. Tindale). Genus Parurie..a Girault. 1. PARURIELLA AUSTRALIENSIS Girault. Two males, 5 females, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). There were one or two thimble punctures on the scutum and scutellum in these specimens: the vertex bears numerous such punctures. Maxillary palpi 4-jointed. The male is like the female but joints 1-2 of the funicle are twice longer than wide, much exceeding the pedicel. Genus ‘Vomocera Howard. 1. Tomocera io, n. sp. ‘The same as T. transversifasciata but abdomen as in J’. saissetiae (t.e., above black with middle 4 yellow ), as are also joints 1-2 of the funicle, but 2 is quadrate (1 of funicle in T. saissetiae is not half the size of 2, which is longer than wide). A female, from galls on leaves of Eucalyptus obliqua, Blakiston, South 320 Australia (T. D. Smeaton). Hatched May, 1888. With Amerostenus varideniatus, Rhicnopeltella, The distal infuscation was faint, the few setae of the scutum short. Palpi 2-jointed, the joints stibequal in each palpus and quite as in T. saissetiae. Genus Rorrroceropseus Girault. 1, Roptroceropseus citripes, n. sp. As Paruriella 4-dentata in palpi, and so forth, but coxa 2 is aeneous, flagellum dark brown, propodeum four times wider than long, funicles subquadrate and equal the pedicel, tooth 2 of the jaw is largest. Differs from R. albipes only in the dark club and golden coxa 1. ‘The male has the scape foliaceously exfoliated rectangularly, funicle 1 dis- tinctly exceeds the subglobose pedicel; there are 6 funicle joints all clothed with longish, stiffish hairs, 6 quadrate, club 2-jointed, conic and acute at apex. Joint 4 of the maxillary palpus (female) is elongate, equal to the rest of the palpus. Middle tibial spur elongate, thin. This genus belongs to the Miscogasterinae. Several pairs from flower-galls of Acacia pycnantha, Norwood Gardens, South Australia, November 22, 1891. Have also seen two females reared from galls on Acacia aulacocarpa, Cooroy, Queensland, August 6, 1928 (W. A. T. Summerville). Genus Nasonia Girault and Sanders. 1. Nasonzs apNormis Boheman. A female, Mount Searle, Northern Flinders Range (H. M. Hale and N. B. Tindale). The species has been synonomized recently with one of Walker’s species. The genus Mormoniella Ashmead, or rather the name of a genus proposed by Ashmead has been substituted by some for Nasonia, but Mormoniella was never connected with a recognisable species, so that the name is but a name and nothing else. It was preferred merely because it preceded the name Nasonia by a few pages. Girault and Sanders subsequently based Nasonta upon the above species named by Ashmead brevicornis, but never described except by Girault and Sanders. Some years ago | became cognisant of the identity of brevicornis with the Euro- pean abnormis, but before I could publish on the matter my notes were lost. 2, Nasonia miltoni, n. sp. As N. abnormis but the clypens slightly incised or bilobed at meson of apex, funicles 1-3 are longer than wide and 1 is distinctly smaller than 2, which is almost as long as the pedicel and longest, club 1 is longer than wide, half the length of the club and a bit longer than the pedicel; it excceds any funicle joint. The post- marginal vein is somewhat shorter than the marginal. The scutellum bears obscure pin-punctures. The median carina is obscure and a spiracular sulcus 1S inade impossible by a carina which crosses just behind the spiracle. Also segments 2 and 3 of the abdomen are large and equal, together occupying the same space as the larger 2 does in abnormis. A femalc, Adelaide, South Australia (R. J. Burton). Genus IsorcaTomnes Girault. 1. Isoplatoides quadridentatus, n. sp. Two marks on fore wing, a wider one from the bend of the submarginal vein and basal marginal across, the other a substigmal spot from the apex of the stigmal vein to the middle of the wing and of moderate size. Parapsidal furrows complete. 321 Propodeum non-carinate, a fovea on cephalic margin about midway from meson to spiracle. As J. quadripustulatus otherwise. Jaws 4-dentate. Middle femur mesad more or less yellow. A female, Barellan, New South Wales (A. M. Lea). 2. Isoplatoides tripustulatus, n. sp. Like I. bipustulatus but furrows (apparently) complete, and there are three fuscous spots on the wing in a curved row from the bend of the submarginal vein to the apex of the stigmal vein; the third or distal of these is largest, toward centre and not touching the stigmal knob; the second is closer to the first. Wing other- wise is in the named species. (Head missing. ) A female, mounted with bipustulatus, and I, bifasciatus, South Australia (Macleay Museum). ‘Type in the Macleay Museum. Genus Psrupanocmus Girault. 1, PSEUDANOGMUS FUSCIPES Girault, A female, Parachilna, Flinders Range (Natural Tlistory Expedition). The parapsidal furrows are visible only in certain lights. Propodeal spiracle elliptical, small. Clypeus strongly bilobed. The lateral ocellus is quite close to but not at the eye, twice closer to eye than to the median ocellus. The scrobes form an obtuse, deep, long median channel. Genus OrMYROMORPHA Girault. 1, Ormyromorpua TRIFASCIATA Girault. A female on Atriplex, South Australia; another, Bribie Island, Moreton Bay, Queensland (H. Hacker and A. M. Lea). Genus Merismomorpua Girault. 1. MerIsMOMORPHA ACUTIVENTRIS Girault. A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). Segments 2 and 3 of the abdomen occupy not quite half the surface; in this specimen 5 was cross-linear, but I think the length varies according to whether or not the part is retracted. Subfamily MISCOGASTERINAE. Genus ParEroro.epsra Giraullt. 1, PAREROTOLEPSIA PUNCTATLFACTES (Girault ). A female, South Australia, Adelaide (J. G. O. Tepper), The lateral ocelli in this specimen were distinctly closer to the median than to eye. 2, Parerotolepsia unimacula, n. sp. As P, aereifemur but wing with a distinct central blotch under all of marginal vein and touching apex of stigmal. Tlead, scutum, parapside with numcrous scat- tered punctures. Clypeus produced, convex at apex. Lateral ocellus a bit closer toeye. Funicle 1 quadrate, a bit shorter than pedicel, rest wider than long. Scape metallic (so coxae and femora). Venation very dark, postmarginal equal stigmal, marginal swollen at base. Cross-suture scutellum distinct, not deep. Propodeum with median carina only, spiracle small, round; discal cilia dense, nearly to base of marginal, none elongate; jaws black, red at apex, 2-4 distinctly shorter than the acute 1, 2 longer than 3 or 4, latter equal, obtuse. Maxillary palpus with at least two elongate apical setae, A female, Adelaide, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). 322 Genus Systasis Walker. 1. Systasis cecili, n. sp. As the original description of S. doddi (Girault), but the cross-suture of the scutellum is obscure, the cephalic parapside and cephalic 3 of the scutum thimble- punctate as well as the upper head while the lateral carinae of the propodeum are distinct. The punctures of the scutellum are not along the meson widely. The space between teeth 2 and 3 of the jaw is finely serrate. A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). The cephalic tibia is green only dorso-laterad. The labial palpus is 3-jointed, joint 2 wider than long; the maxillary are at least 3-jointed. Abdomen distinctly exceeding the thorax. 2. Sysrasis varires Girault. Three females, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). The scrobes in this species are short, semi-circular. The hind tibia in these specimens are green above for basal 2 except at base. Roptrocerella, n. gen. As Roptroceropseus but the club only 2-jointed, funicle 7-jointed (antennae 12-jointed, excluding a very short, thin first ring-joint, inserted below the middle of the face but above eye-ends by a bit). Palpi 3- and 4-jointed. Jaws 3-dentate, but 3 is only a concaved truncation from the base of 2. Stigmal vein about half the length of the postmarginal, latter a bit shorter than the marginal which is distinctly shorter than the submarginal, Clypeus not produced, concave at apex. Abdomen no longer than the thorax, rather compressed and rounded. Scrobes elongate. 1. Roptrocerella latipennis, n. sp. Blue-green, wings clear, knees, tibiae, tarsi, base of scape yellow. Funicle 1 somewhat wider than long, subequal the rest, half the length of the pedicel; club divided about middle, the joints nearly as long as the pedicel. Pronotum and scutum entirely umbilicately punctate, the punctures scattered over the axillae and parapside and a single line only down each side of the scutcllum, latter without a cross-siture. Propodcum with a distinct median carina, the spiracle rounded, a bit away from cephalic margin, with a curved carina behind it and encircling it, no lateral carina. [Fore and hind femora rather stout. Fore wing very wide, hind with 16 lines of discal cilia. Discal cilia of fore wing extending loosely to base, but there is a large, rectangular, naked area against the bend of the sub- marginal vein. Scutum pilose. ’’ female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). Genus Toxrumolprs Girault. 1. Toxeumorpes arnercorrus Girault. A female attracted to light, Rockhampton, Queensland (A. M. Lea). The femora were entirely red, so they vary from red to subaeneous. Un- {ortuntely the head of this specimen was lost while mounting it, but I can scarcely doubt ils identity. 2, Toxeumoides poeta, n. sp. From the genotype: Cross-suture on scutellum before the apex; petiole very short ; form wider ; abdomen depressed and wide above, 2 a third or more of the surface, over twice the length of 3; propodeum without a median carina; the large pronotum laterad denscly punctate and hairy, parapsides glabrous with punctures far laterad. Instead of the single fovea on cephalic margin of the propodeum toward the spiracle, there is a foveate grooved line extending as far across mesal base. Scutum naked. A female, South Australia (Macleay Museum). Type in Macleay Museum. 323 3. Toxeumoides silvensis, n. sp. From the genotype: Abdomen shaped as in Perilampus, segment 3 to apex, the petiole is thrice longer than wide, distinctly exceeding the hind coxa; scutum not finely cross-lined but scaly reticulate (finely cross-lined cephalad) and more pilose; propodeum opaque and scaly and without a tuft of long, fine hairs. Jaws shorter, teeth equal. Joint 4 of maxillary palpus with a single thick and club-like cylindrical terminal seta (in genotype several unequal terminal setae, none thickened). ; a a iy A female, jungle, Montville, Queensland, June 14, 1924, lype in Queens- land Museum. Subfamily EULOPHINAE. Genus Arnatorpes Girault. 1. Arpatoiwrs 10-penrarus Girault. A female, Cairns District (A. M. Lea). Coxa 3 was submetallic, segments 3 and 4 of abdomen above also whitish except lateral margins, jaws 11-dentate. The median groove of scutellum distinct. Axillae not advanced. Wings hyaline. Vertex with stiff, scattered, not elongate hairs. Maxillary palpi 2-jointed, apex with an elongate, stiff spine plus two short, unequal, stout lateral ones towards apex, the longer from the apex of a tubercle, the shorter from the axis. There is also a minute seta on the same side just below apex. Genus SEcopriia Girault. 1. SEcopELLA aAENEA Girault. A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). Joints 1-2 of funicle a half longer than wide, distinctly exceeding the short pedicel, 2. Secodella io, n. sp. In my table of species runs to S. aenea but differs: Joint 1 of the funicle a half longer than wide, rest quadrate. All tibiae intense blue to apex; the second and third teeth of the jaw have a few faint serrations between them. The jaws are tridentate; the maxillary palpi bear a flat, ovate apical spine. Abdomen conical, distinctly exceeding the thorax. Scape metallic. One female, South Australia. Females, Owieandana, North Flinders Range (H. M. Hale and N. B. Tindale) ; Strahan, Tasmania (H. J. Carter and A. M, Lea); Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo Island (South Australian Museum Ixpedition, February, 1926). Genus DrautomorpHa Ashmead. 1. DIAULOMORPITA AUSTRALIENSIS Ashmead. A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). Legs except coxae and scape except apex, were golden. The postscutellum is not so large as I have described it. Genus ENTEDONELLA Girault, 1. ENTEDONELLA AEREISCAPUS Girault. Three females, type locality and date, Genus PELoroTELopsrtya Girault. 1. PErLOROTELOPSELLA AUSTRALIENSIS (Girault), A female, same place as recorded in Part I.; also two more females. * 324 2. Pelorotelopsella rex, n. sp. ‘he same as P. cinctipes Girault but middle tibia entirely white. A male, Mount Lofty, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). The characteristics of this species, as taken from my table of species, are as follows:—Scape blue except extreme base; of tibiae, only basal 4 metallic, all above in fore tibia except apex; first tooth of the mandible distinctly longer than the second. Bronze, joint 1 of the funicle thrice longer than wide, a stout, con- spicuous spictile. Eyes hairy. Disc of segment 2 of the abdomen is yellowish. Petiole nearly twice longer than wide, smooth. Second tooth of jaw only about half the length of the first. Scape compressed. Joint 1 of the funicle truncate at apex, joint 2 half the length of 1, its apex scooped out more or less. Hairs of joint 1 of the funicle not quite as long as the diameter of the joint. Genus Meracrias Girault. 1. Metacrias clara, n. sp. Brilliant bronze, the wings clear, legs except coxae and the scape yellow- white. Head and thorax densely, uniformly punctate, the caudal impression of scutum small, the furrows nearly complete. Joint 1 of the funicle a half longer than wide, ovate, exceeding pedicel, 2 similar but shorter, 3 globular equal pedicel and also 1 of the club. Joint 2 of the club smallest, ils spicule short and stout ; 3 of the funicle is wider than the pedicel. Second tooth of the jaw a half shorter than the first. Propodeum subglabrous, the median grooves deep, straight, moderately wide. Abdomen, from above, nearly round. Characterised by the white legs and scape and unequal mandibular teeth. Two females, Healesville, Victoria, April 12, 1929 (F. Erasmus Wilson). Type in collection of I’, Erasmus Wilson; cotype in South Australian Museum. Genus Eurtectrus Westwood. 1. EUPLecrRUS CAIRNSENSIS Girault. A female, Lucindale, South Australia (A. M. Tea). Genus RHICNOPELTELLA Girault. 1. Rhicnopeltella sarah, n. sp. Funicle 2 a bit larger than 3, latter quadrate and two-thirds the pedicel. As R. eucalypli Gahan otherwise or nearly. From leaf-galls on Lucalyptus obliqua, Blakiston, South Australia (T. D. Smeaton), April 23, 1888. Also galls on gum, Queensland (A. P. Dodd). A female, Mount Lofty, South Australia (A. M. Lea). This latter had jomts. 2 and 3 of funicle subquadrate but 2 smaller. 2. Rhicnopeltella faunus, n. sp. As ie, eucalypti Gahan but all tibiae purple, narrowly golden above or dorso- laterad; no patch discal cilia against bend of submarginal ; funicles 2-4 equal in length and much longer than 1, not + pedicel, latter and apices of funicles with some stout setae; differing markedly in the discal ciliation since its approaches marginal vein at distal 4. Dark blue, male bright green, wing infuscation smoky against distal marginal and the stigmal. A male, three females from galls on silver-leafed ironbark, Roma, Queetis- land, September 20, 1914 (H. Tryon). 2 325 3. RHICNOPELTELLA CITRITIBIAF Girault. From R. hegeli (Girault): Funicle 2 a bit longer, 3 wider than long, only half the pedicel which is elongatc; jaws bidentate. Bright green, antennae ail black, no spot on hind tibia, funicle 1 only somewhat wider than long. Some stout setae from distal part of funicles; discal ciliation approaching the whole stigmal vein. Three females in Macleay Museum from galls, Sydney, New South Wales. Types in Macleay Museum. 4. RIVICNOPELTELLA IMMACULATIPENNIs Girault, Three females, Mount Lofty, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). $5. RHICNOPELTELLA PURPUREA Girault. A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). The discal ciliation of the fore wing in this species attains base of the stigmal vein. Mandibles equally, acutely bidentate. 6. Rhicnopeltella depressa, n. sp. Abdomen depressed, ovate. Wing with a large substigmal blotch. Fore tibia golden except beneath. Knees widely, over distal 4 fore femur, intense lemon. Three ring-joints, the first shorter than the other two; three subequal, twice (or more) wider than long funicle joints (3-thrice wider than long), 3 not a fourth the length of the short, stout pedicel. Jaws bidentate. Antennae black, the club yellow beneath. Neck of stigmal vein shorter than the long-ovate knob. Middle tibial spur elongate, pale, spinose, much exceeding the first tarsal joint; hind tibial spur shorter, stout, long, a bit exceeding the metatarsus. Otherwise asin R. faunus. Setae of the vertex sparse, A female, Tarcoola, South Australia (A. M. Lea). Austrolynx, n. gen, Similar to Diaulinopsis Crawford, but robust, head thick, jaws only 3-dentate postmarginal equal stigmal: tibial spurs stout, much unequal, 1 very short. Stigmal vein not elongate. Maxillary palpus 2-, labial, 1-jointed, former with 3, latter with 2 strong terminal setae. 1. Austrolynx flavitibia, n. sp. Dark aeneous, wing clear, venation yellow, scape, legs, except basal two-thirds (sometimes less and usually only lateral aspect), femora and the coxae laterally, lemon ; also the head more or less below the eyes. Finely reticulate, Funicle 1 somewhat longer than wide, stout, equal pedicel, 2 quadrate 3 club 3 with a short, conic apical part bearing a short, stout spicule—this small part has the appearance of a fourth joint. Jaw teeth 1-2 acute, equal, strong, 3 oblique and with its apical margin fcebly serrate. Vertex with numerous, scattered stout setae. Wing 2 with 12 lines discal cilia. Propodeum at meson equal postscutellum, non-carinate. Spiracle round, rather small. Abdomen pointed, exceeding thorax. The male is similar but the legs may be almost all yellow, the yellow of the head more distinct, venter of abdomen, dorsum of same above at base and distad in two marginal spots may also be yellow. From several specimens of each scx mounted on a card with male Rhicno pel- tella and Eurytoma and bearing the following data:—Insects (10 kinds, 536 specimens) produced from one gall complexus collected by Mr. T. D. Smeaton 326 at Blakiston, South Australia, on Eucalyptus rostrata, April 23, 1888. Hymen- optera appeared till June 5 following”; and “From one small branchlet of red gum. No. 8 (small, black, ete.). From galls on leaves of Eucalyptus obliqua, Blakiston, April 23, 1888. Smeaton, latched in May.” Another card, bearing paratype males, bore the data:—9. Large and small brown. From galls on leaves Encalyptus obliqua, Smeaton. Hatched May, 1888.” A third card, bearing many females with male M@ egastignius and Eurytoma, was labelled :-—9. Galls leaves Eucalyptus oblique, 23/4/88. Blakiston. Hatched May 1888. Smeaton.” A series of paratypes bore a similar label. The species 1s associated with Rhicnopeliclla sarah described above. Co- types in Queensland Museum. Genus EUPLECTROMORPIIA Girault. 1. Euplectromorpha lucia, 11. sp. As E. dubia but scutum devoid of pristle-bearing pustules and of hair at over distal half (except one or two pustules, a pair cephalad and a pair caudad), so the axilla at over caudo-mesal third; head, thorax entirely black, antennae all yellow, joints of the funicle quadrate, 1 twice longer. Over distal third of the abdomen black. A female, Kiata, Victoria, October, 1928 (F. E. Wilson). Type in the collec- tion of F. Erasmus Wilson. Genus GYROLASELLA Girault. 1. Gyrolasella aenea, n. Sp. Green, wings lightly dusky at distal third; tarsi except last joint, knees, tibial tips, fore tibiae except below and the base of the tegula, pale; apex of the sculellum between the grooves, a dot on the prepectus, -ateral margin of the axilla, margins around the base of the tegula, margin of eyes on face and (continuously ) cephalic margin vertex, margin of the eyes (continuously) on vertex and upper occiput, golden. Densely scaly punctate including the non-carinate propodeum, the latter clevated mesad. Jaws 6-dentate. Joint 1 of the funicle twice longer than wide, 2 4 third longer than wide, much exceeding the pedicel. Spicule large, its basal half or more stout, rest tubular. Stigmal vein long, clavate, subequal to the post- marginal vein. Flagellum armed with, besides others, stout, thorn-like setae. A female, Carribie, Yorke Peninsula, South Australia (N. B. Vindule). (genus DIAULOMYITA Girault. 1. Diaulomyiia nigroaenea, n. sp. As 2. asperitergum Girault but dark aeneous, wings clear, (scape, legs except middle and hind coxae, tegula, dull red) ; spiracle with a delicate carina surround- ing it behind; grooves of scutellum joined around the apex; somewhat smaller than the named species. Mandibles @dentate, ‘Three bristles on scutum cach side of the meson in an oblique or diverging line from cephalad. A female, Adelaide, South Australia (A. M. Tea). Genus PsEeupIGLYPHus Girault. 1. PSEUDIGLYPTIUS GROTIUSI Girault, io, n. var. Differs from the typical form in having all tibiae concolorous at basal halt. A female, Mount Loity, South Australia. 327 Genus NEoMPHALOIWELLA Girault. 1. Neomphaloidella eucalypti, n. sp. Aeneous, wings clear; coxae, femora, anternae except basal half of the scape, concolorous; apices of femora 1-2 widely pale; joints of the funicle a half longer than wide and than the pedicel, Propodeum with a carina laterad of the spiracle and a median carina. Mandibles tridentate. Second wings with 13 lines of discal ciliation, obtuse at apex. Abdomen conic-ovate. Spicule distinct, small. Second two ring-joints very short, Abdomen excceding thorax, acute distad. A female from galls on the foliage of Eucalyptus obliqua, Blakiston, South Australia (T. D. Smeaton), May, 1888. Associated with Neomegastigmus ater and a male Rhicnopeltella, 2, Neomphaloidella brevistigma, n. sp. Black, the wings very lightly infuscated from base to a point somewhat distad of the venation. Scape, pedicel, knees, tips of the tibiae, tarsi, fore tibiae except basal half above, pale, the club suffused yellowish; postscutellum and basal half of the abdomen obscurely yellow. Stigmal vein short, oblique, much shorter than the knob, Ring-joints large, increasing distad, the first only half the length of the third. Joint 1 of the funicle a half longer than wide, a bit shorter than the pedicel, 2 and 3 equal, a bit longer than wide. Spicule short and stout, clypeus bilobed. Teeth 1-2 of the jaws equal, acute, 3 small and distinctly shorter. Second wing with 10 lines of discal ciliation, wide, subobtuse at apex. Propodeum with a median carina only, this moderately long. Sculpture usual, Le., very fine, A female, Ooldea, South Australia (A. M. Lea). 3. Neomphaloidella parkmani, n. sp. As N. octoguttata but postscutellum yellow, joints of the funicle much unequal, 3 a third longer than wide, equal pedicel, 1 twice longer than wide. Also differs: Less slender, scape dull red, dark above, as is also the pedicel; femora 1 and 3 dusky, 2 less so; abdomen almost as in Neotetrastichodes electra but the basal yellow (segment 2, nearly 4 surface) is absent, therefore there are but the four yellow spots on each side of the meson and commencing out from base, the first obscure and on segment 2 (therefore only three spots distinct) ; thus, also, the abdomen is as in N. octoguttata, excepting for the basal yellow. The first two ring-joints are shorter than the third (as in electra) but distinct. A distinct carina runs (like a lateral carina) from the lateral side of the cephalic spiracle. Maxillary palpus elongate. Jaw 3 obtuse and much smaller. No postmarginal vein. Clypeus strongly bilobate. Propodeum scaly, with a median carina. Punctures along the lateral margin of the scutum distinct, A female, Bribie Island, Moreton Bay, Queensland (H, Hacker and A. M. Lea), 4. Neomphaloidella bilobata, n. sp. As N. octoguttata but not slender, antennae all black, legs yellow except coxae and femur 3, the dorsal yellow of the abdomen confined to the median line, of moderate width and from basal $ to base of the distal % (apex segment 2, 3-5 or 6); joint 3 of the funicle is distinctly shorter than 1, longer than wide, subequal to the pedicel; joint 1 is twice longer than wide. Second ring-joint distinct, shortest, 3 longest. Propodeum densely, coarsely scaly, with a strong carina from the lateral side of the spinacle and a delicate x-shaped median carina; the forks of the x are not much diverged. Second wing obtuse at apex, very wide. Spicule stout. M 328 Yellow of the dorsal abdomen dull, more or less obscurely broken at the apices of the segments. Seutellum with a grooved apex. Punctures present on pronotum (except caudal meson), lateral parapside and lateral margin of the scuttum ; these are distinct. Clypeus strongly bilobed, Maxillary palpus elongate, single (as usual for the group). A female by sweeping, Mount Lofty, South Australia (A. M. Lea). The metatarsus is subquadrate, shortest of the joints of the hind tarsus. Genus NEOTETRASTICHODES Girault. 1. NEoTETRASTICHODES ELECTRA Girault. Two females, Mclrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). Joint 1 of the funicle exceeds the pedicel. The pronotum and lateral parap- side are densely punctate and setigerous. In these specimens, the five cross-stripes of the abdomen were connected by a median line of black, and this blocks out a longitudinal line of yellow spots down cach side of the meson (the margins are black to stripe 5) ; there is also a thin black stripe before (near) apex. ‘The [ace is yellow down from the antennae, Maxillary palpi very clongate, l-jointed. A short postmarginal vein. Clypeus strongly bilobed. The hind coxa was black only at basal half. Jaws tridentate. In the original description neither the postmarginal vein nor the longitudinal stripe of the abdomen are mentioned, nor the black margins of the abdomen, but otherwise these specimens agree with it in every particular, and they have since been compared with the type (while revising the group). The costal cell is naked except for a single line of cilia along close to the sub- marginal vein, the line complete and the cilia composing it slender. The discal ciliation extends to the base of the marginal vein, Ring-joints distinct, 3 largest and ag in the Pteromalidae, all large and but three in number. Genus TetrasticHus Haliday. 1. Tetrastichus perobscurus, n. Sp. Dull black; scape, knees, tibiae and tarsi pale; venation pale; lateral margin of the scutum cephalad, postscutellum, lateral margin of the scutellum, vertex nore or less against the eye, yellow; abdomen above dull golden, the apices of the segments black (making 7 black cross-stripes, including one across base, 7 well before apex). Joint 2 of the funicle longest, a bit longer than wide, shorter than the pedicel, 1 quadrate, 3 wider than long; second ring-joint thinner than J. Spicule small, flagellar setae moderate in length. Tooth 3 of the mandible distinctly smallest. Palpi single (as usual), maxillary subelongate, labial very short. Pro- podeum subtransverse af meson, with a median carina only (a carina just laterad of the spiracle). Sculpture very fine. A female, Mount Pleasant, South Australia (Loveday), Vebruary 9, 1897. From galls. Tn the specimen the median groove of the scutum was tncertain. Tt was very distiuct but seemed to have been formed by a contraction of the body at the scutum. However, the species has characteristics which allow of its being easily recognised. 2. Tetrastichus pontiac, n. sp. As T. saintpierrei but the yellow basal part of the abdomen has the base narrowly margined with black, and there is a marginal spot at middlz and one toward apex. Moreover, the joints of the funicle are equal and barely exceed the pedicel (each about a fourth longer than wide), while the club plainly exceeds 329 the united length of joints 2 and 3 of the funicle. Spicule short. Scape white, antennac brown-black. Propodeum of moderate length at meson, with a median carina, the spiracle large. Both palpi pale, single, the maxillary fully twice the length of the labial but not very clongate. Stigmal vein long-clavate. Jaws tridentate. A female, Owieandana, North Flinders Range (H. M. Hale and N. B. Tindale). 3. TETRASTICHUS MITTAGONCENSIS Girault. A female, Tasmania (A. Simson), No. 3581. Seape red-brown. Clypeus bilobate, as seems to be usual for the Tetras- tichini. One of the apical spines of the long maxillary palpus is shortened and depressed, forming a sword-shaped seta; the short, labial palpus is also thus armed. The second tooth of the jaw is rather deeply concaved, so that a third tooth is formed nearly. Lateral margin of the propodeum carinated, Lateral parapside and the pronotum finely sculptured. Second wing with fourteen lines of discal ciliation. Vertex and upper face with distinct punctures, Genus TETRAsTICHOnES Ashmead. 1. Tetrastichodes fuscitibiae, n. sp. Dark aeneous, legs and antennae concolorous except knees, tips of the tibiae, fore tibiae, tarsi and an obscure cinctus just before the middle of hind tibia. Postscutellum dull yellow except the meson widely, Propodeum with a (short) median carina. Joint 1 of the funicle twice longer than wide, somewhat exceeding the pedicel, 2 and 3 somewhat shorter; spicule distinct; second ring-joint very thin. Jaws tridentate. Palpi single, the labial much shorter than the other, both dark. Stigmal vein straight, rather long, the postmarginal a fourth or more its length. Mesal margin of the axilla narrowly lemon-yellow. With the usual sculpture. Flagellar hairs of naoderate length, in several irregular rows per unit. Club nearly as long as the funicle. Setae from the marginal vein gross. A female, Cradle Mountain, Tasmania (H. J. Carter and A. M, Lea). Genus AsyNTomospHyrem -Girault. 1. Asyntomosphyrum limbus, n. sp. Black except lighter tarsi, the fore wing lightly clouded on basal 3. especially opposite and beyond the marginal and stigmal veins, remarkable for their long fringe (which is a bit over a third their greatest width) and for their distinct, short postmarginal vein. Stigmal vein long and straight. Joints of the funicle a bit longer than wide, subequal to the pedicel but 3 shorter, globular; joints clothed with sparse, Jong hairs, a few on 3 very long. Spicule very long, the joints of the club exceeding funicle joint 3. Tooth 3 of the jaw shorter than 2. Clypeus subentire at mesal apex (unusual). Cheeks with a few longish setae. Second wings acute, 4 lines of discal cilia, its caudal marginal cilia dis- tinctly exceeding the widest part. No punctures except obscure ones along the lateral margin of the scutum. Postscutellum rather large. Propodeum with a paired median carina only. Abdomen more or less scaly. Pronotum and lateral parapside with sculpture uniform with the rest and nearly bare. A female, Cradle Mountain, Tasmania (H. J. Carter and A, M, Lea). Genus QuaprasTicHODELLA Girault. 1. Quadrastichodella nova, n. sp, Aeneus, wings clear, coxae and femora concolorous, also flagellum, scape yellow. Scape strongly clavate, at apex above beset with strong teeth (seen from 330 side, from above coarse, serrated sculpture), as is also the pedicel, latter as long as the funicle and nearly as long as the club. Joints of the funicle somewhat wider than long. Ring-joints distinct. Propodeum short at the meson, there with a flat median carina. Spicule distinct, not very large. Jaws strongly tridentate. Clypeus bilobate. Labial palpus moderately long. Postmarginal vein half the moderately short stigmal. Abdomen equal to the thorax in length, conic-ovate. Metatarstis subequal to the stout tibial spur and to each of the next two joints, 4 longer by far. A line of setac down the lateral margin of the scutum. Second wing obtuse at apex. A female, Adelaide, South Australia; 2 females (Macleay Museum) from South Australia, The types are in the Macleay Museum. Genus GoETHELLA Girault. As Tetrastichus but inner grooves of the scutellum, groove of scutum absent ; lateral groove of the scutellum outside of the bristles, at margin. Ring-joints large, equal. Male antennae: Four funicle joints, three club joints; the scape with a conspicuous, mound-like ventral expansion whose obtuse apex is near the apex, the funicle joints each with a dense ring of very elongate hairs from near base. Third tooth of the mandible wide, obliquely truncate from near the base of the acute 2. Palpi single, maxillary rather long. Propodeum very short at meson, with a median carina, no lateral. 1. (GOETHELLA ASULCATA Girault. Dark aeneous, wings clear; knees, tibiae, tarsi, scape pallid. Joints of the funicle quadrate, shorter than the pedicel, 1 a bit longer than wide. Spicule small. No punctures. Joint 1 of the male funicle quadrate, others a bit longer, subequal to the pedicel and to the joints of the club; spicule stout, distinct; the very long hairs are also on joints 1-2 of the club but further from base. Legs in the male lemon- yellow, except hind coxa, Two males, four females. Subfamily ELASMINAE. 1. Elasmus bellicorpus, n. sp. Described in my table of species as follows: Yellow, abdomen orange marked with green; setae on hind tibia in (3-5) sagittate areas; mesopleurum not with a large black spot or not mostly black; head mostly yellow, abdomen not with a large, round black spot before tip; scutellum entirely yellow, the scutum with much green and black; like E. arumburinga but jaws 5-6-dentate, more yellow on scutum, the egreen-black from the pronotum forming a wide median line on scutum to slightly beyond the middle where scutum and parapsides are entirely and everly green. Propodeum entirely green except the cephalo-lateral corner, and so the vertex except along the eye narrowly and upper # of the occiput ; joints 1-2 of the funicle a third longer than wide, 3 somewhat longer. Green of the abdomen as follows: Lateral margin and meson at base, distal third, a blur (with reciprocal marginal blurs) in three places, apices of segments 3-5 (equally before apex and after base of abdomen, 3 is close to the distal black-green which con- mences toward apex of segment 6). The yellow on scutum isa square, Pronotum green, except lateral fourth (neck nearly to lateral margins). The palpi are 1- and 2-jointed (maxillary }. A female, Grantville, Victoria (Queensland Museum). 331 2. ELasmus pusrus Girault. Two females on Atriplex, South Australia. 3. Erasmus nakomara Girault. A female, Samsonvale, Queensland. Sweeping grass in forest, September 18, 1927 (A. A. Girault). Genus Eurviscura Koebelc. 1. EuryiscHIA UNMACULATIPENNIS Girault. A male, two females, Magnetic Island, Queensland (A. M. Lea). The mele is similar to the female, but the legs, scape, pedicel and face are white. The scape bears a great convex, ventral, foliaceous expansion studded with seven stiff bristles along ventral margin; its fore wing is hyaline, the proximal edge of the discal cilia somewhat irregular. Maxillary palpi (male) apparently 4-labial, 2-jointed., I had already described the male of this species from reared material in the Queensland Museum (II. Hacker). 2. EuryIscHia COMPEREI (Ashmead). A female, Owieandana, Northern Flinders Range (H. M. Hale and N. B. Tindale). This was typical (with the middle tibia dark), but the infuscation of the fore wing was faint (often the case) and the postscutellum yellow. The species varies in wing infuscation and the colour of the antennae and middle tibia. Genus Euryiscuomyya Girault. 1. Euryischomyiia setosa, n. Sp. Hind and middle coxae black, hind femora and others above and below narrowly, black. Black, head and upper thorax, except the propodeum, spaces off the scutellum, cephalic axilla, pronotum at meson, cephalic parapside, basal and apical margins of the scutellum, orange ; sculellum with 3 setae along each lateral margin; about cephalic half of the scutum setose, this setose area bounded, caudad by a cross-row of 6 bristles, 3 on each side of which the lateral two are gross; naked thence except for a bristle on the caudo-lateral corner. ‘lwo gross setae upon the backward spur of the submarginal vein, base and apex. Discal ciliation terminating at the base of the marginal vein, its basal margin sinuate. A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). Subfamily EUCHARITINAE. Genus EucHaromorpua Girault. lL. EucHAROMORPHA VIRIDIS Girault, Two females, Launceston, Tasmania (I. M. Littler), February 6 and January 26, 1916. There was a median groove on the scutum in one specimen. The fringes of the fore wing are present. The whole abdomen is densely, minutely pilose. The mouth-plate is at least 4-digitate and the jaws 2- and 3-dentate. Genus STILBuLA Spinola. 1. Stilbula quadri-digitata, n. Sp. Aeneous, the wings clear, venation pale yellow, so the scape, pedicel, legs except coxae and femora (except apices) and the tegulae. Striate in the usual way, scutellum with a median groove, strongly bidentate at apex but not produced, 332 the teeth short. Petiole coriaceous, 24 times longer than wide, with a lateral carina. Propodeum glabrous to the spiracular sulcus, with a thin median carina. Segment 2 the whole surface, glabrous but with a few pin-punctures ventro- laterad. Club and distal joints of the funicle yellowish. Scape equal to joint 1 of the funicle, which, with the others is produced some- what on one side of apex, twice longer than wide at apex; scape thrice longer than wide, cqual club; joint 2 of the funicle a bit longer than wide at apex, 5-6 quadrate, 7 wider than long; antennae 12-jointed but the joints of the club are merely indicated by constrictions, no sutures. Dorsal thorax naked. Discal ciliation dot-like, no fringe ; stigmal vein perpendicular, not a quarter the length of the postmarginal yein, Costal cell with a more or less paired central line of cilia. Mouth-plate 4-digitate, digits short, about twice longer than wide. A female, Ardrossan, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). 2. §tilbula albipennis, n. sp. From S. quadri-digitata: The mouth-plate though longer than wide is blunt at apex and bears six elongate, pale spines (therefore, it is not branched into four short fingers each bearing a spine at apex and it does not widen distad). The scape is dark aeneous, funicles 1-3 equal, thorax densely punctate, venation and discal ciliation indistinct; and so forth. The antennae taper distad, 12 distinct joints. Aencous-black, wings transparent and nearly naked; discal ciliation very sparse, pale; pedicel more or less, flagellum after funicle 3, knees, tibiae except 3, apex of tibia 3, tarsi yellowish. Head except clypeus, circularly striate. Thorax entirely closely but not coarsely punctate, finely so in middle of mesopleurum, the metathorax foveate, the projection forming an erect, blunt, strong tooth on each side. F emoral furrow deep, so the lateral sulcus of propodeum, former glabrous. Petiole punctulate, foveate proximad, 34 times longer than wide, lateral margin narrowly carinated. Meson propodeum widcly concave, no median sulcus. Abdomen below fincly pitted. Scape twice longer than wide, subequal funicle 1, scaly. F unicles globular, smaller than the pedicel. A female, Groote Eylandt, North Australia (N. B. Tindale). 3. Stilbula albipetiole, n. sp. Purplish, fore wing lightly infuscated from about bend of the submarginal vein. Legs except coxac, petiole, tegulae, scape except beneath al base and pedicel, white, venation yellow-brown. Head circularly striate. Thorax foveatc-punctate, this sculpture coarser and more or less longitudinally striate on metapleura; — prongs of the scutellum moderately slender, exceeding the basal part. Abdomen above, from apex of 2 (about middle), and nearly all below, densely punctate (punctulate), the petiole stout, about twice longer than wide, finely, longitudinally erained, narrower at base. Propodeum with a median ruga, the lateral sulcus wide and deep, the “hump” forming a large, obtuse “tooth,” erect. Posimarginai vein elongate, the stigmal perpendicular, thick, narrowing to apex; bend of the submarginal vein abrupt. Disceal ciliation distinct, not very dense, no fringes. Fore wing widest through the stigmal vein. Mouth-plate with 8 digits, the central pair shorter, each with an elongate, pale, stout spine, the whole much as in S. octodigitata. Scape (excluding bulla) twice longer than wide, a bit shorter than funicle 1, latter dis- tinctly longest, equalling 2 plus 3, 12 hemispherical, next smallest atter pedicel ; joint 8 quadrate, rest decreasing distad. 333 From .S. octodigitata: Petiole all white and much shorter, scape pale and longer, funicle 1 shorter; prongs of scutellum are not shorter than the basal part, the median groove of the scutellum is obscure, abdomen with distinct sculpture and so forth. A female, Caramby, Victoria, on Bursaria Spinosa, January 14, 1887 (J. G. ©. Tepper). Also a male in the Macleay Museum from South Australia. In this sex the petiole is nearly as long as the rest of the abdomen (about six times longer than wide) and with lateral margins carinated. The antennae are 12-jointed, each of the 9 funicles with a long ramus from the same side, of 1 and 9 these a bit shorter, joint 1 wider than long, equal the pedicel, 9 over twice longer than wide; scape over twice the length of the pedicel, thrice longer than wide, half the length of the club, the latter is long as ramus 9 and with a distinct tooth-like projection between middle and apex on the side opposite the rami. The propodeum bears a narrow median sulcus instead of a ruga, the stigmal vein is pale and shorter, the discal ciliation fainter, The mouth-plate is 10-digitate but similar in size and shape to that of the female. Jaws 2- and 3-dentate. Otherwise the male is the same. Process of the scutellum about half the length of the scutellum. Basal part distinetly wider than long and shorter than the “teeth” in the female, the “teeth” in the male quadrate, cqual. 4. Stilbula octo-digitata, n. sp. Purple, rugoso-punctate, the wings clear, veins pale, abruptly black from near the apex of the marginal vein; legs except the coxae yellow-brown ; femora darker, scape nearly concolorous. Petiole white with an aeneous cinctus at middle, smooth, five times longer than wide, swollen at middle; scape a fourth longer than wide, not quite half the length of joint 1 of the funicle, exceeding the subglobular pedicel; funicle 1 thrice, 2 twice, 3 one and a half times longer than wide; 8-10 subglobular, 7 quadrate and larger than 8; club or 10 not well defined, rounded at apex. Scutellum with a distinct foveate median groove, the furrows joining around the apex; bifids shorter than the basal part of the projection. Scutum with a less distinct median groove, the furrows joining around the apex. Lateral sulcus of the propodeum wide, more coarsely foveate than the convex mesal part, this latter coarser than the punctuations of scutum and scutellum. Tegulae yellow. Plate of mouth 8-digitate, the digits rather long, tubular, the middle shorter, at apex each with a long, pale bristle which appears to be truncate at apex (except on middle ones) as in some Thysanoptera, They are stout. Abdomen ovate, a bit compressed, not upturned, exceeding petiole. A female, King George Sound. The type is in the Macleay Museum. Genus PsrrocAsrer Blanchard, 1. PSsiLoGasTEr PULCTTER Girault. A female, Tasmania, No. 2936 (A. Simson), Belongs to Epimetagea Girault. This sex agrees with the description of the male except that the club is somewhat longer than funicle 7, The lower face bears scattered pin-punctures. The mouth-plate is 8-digitate, digits long with elongate apical spines, the lateral longest but not projecting farther, On one side there was a short ninth digit. The glabrous area on the caudal parapside is rather large. Pubescence on the scutum very sparse. 334 Genus EvimetaGea Girault. 1. Eprmeracea MAGNirica Girault. A female, Mount Lofty, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). Funicle 1 a bit over half the length of the scape, a third longer than 2, nearly twice the length of the pedicel, a fourth shorter than the club, 7 exceeding the pedicel. Basal joint of the maxillary palpus very elongate, subequal to the 3-jointed labial palpus whose distal joint is longest. Mouth-plate 8-digitate, the digits long, exceeding the palmlike basal part. In the lateral aspect, segment 2 is a third (or more) of the surface, in the dorsal, all of the surface. Abdomen glistening. 2. Epimetagea sanguiniventris, n. sp. Ags the description of E. bicoloriventris but the entire abdomen (except the petiole) except basal t above crimson, legs except coxac and hind femora more or less laterad, venation, tegulae, scape, straw colour; rest of the antenna red-brown The glabrous area on the mesopleurum is cephalad. The scape distinctly exceeds funicle 1 (almost twice longer) ; funicle 1 is subequal to the club, nearly twice longer than 2 or 3, all thicker at apex. Petiole over twice longer than wide. punctate, lateral margin carinate. Dorsal thorax pilose. Phe propodeum not rugose but rugulose and the mesal edge of the deep spiracular sulcus is carinate, Antennae 10-jointed, club solid. Scutellum terminating in a small, subemarginate plate. Mouth-plate 13-digitate, the digits elongate and with long, stout apical spines, which are usually shorter than the part bearing them and blunt at apex. At least one palpus 3-jointed, 1 and 3 elongate, 2 short. Discal ciliation minute, not very dense, fringes absent around distal margin, minute elsewhere and inset from margin. ‘A female, Mount Lofty, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). 3. Epimetagea flavifemora, n. sp. Purple, legs except coxae, Scape, pedicel yellow-brown, wings lightly embrowned, veins dark; abdomen black, dark red in a wide crescent from near meson of near apical end of 2 to and along upper distal half of the side of 2 at distal half (leaving apical margin of 2 black) ; and the short 3 (making a concave ‘cross-stripe nearly as thick as the crescent, latter best seen from the dorso-lateral aspect). This second red is not at apex in the dorsal aspect. Ag identified specimens of E. rufiventris Ashmead otherwise, but lower half of face glabrous with scattered pin-punctures, cheeks and upper head circularly striate; funicles 2 and 3 are longer in relation to 1, thrice longer than wide; area of the propodeum between the lateral sulci more finely rugulose and there is a weak, narrow median sulcus. There is also a median groove on the scutellum (not marked in either species). Joint 1 of the funicle exceeds the scape, and 7 and 8 are neatly twice longer than wide (thus joints a bit longer than with the other species). Joints 7 and 8 are the distal two joints of the funicle. A female, Camden, New South Wales; also Monaro, ‘Types in Macleay Museum. The second specimen bore fuscous femora, 4, Epimetagea aeneobrunnea, n. Sp. Brown, the head and upper thorax (except propodeum) aeneous-brown, the flagellum except pedicel, dark; wings subhyaline. Head circularly striate, the striae not dense; scutum cross-striate at cephalic half, the striae curving con- centrically caudo-laterad to the furrows, from centre longitudinally striate. 335 Parapside glabrous, lateral half and distal margin punctate tather coarsely. Axilla, scutellum rather coarsely long-striate, scutellum with distinct median groove. Propodeum glabrous but a bit crinkled on the mesal part, with distinct median and lateral carinae, the lateral strongly curved off laterad as it goes toward cephalic margin and between its cephalic end and the margin, the spiracle is lost in a net- work of rugae, no groove. The lateral carina originates dorso-laterad, runs nearly straight caudad (and a bit mesad), then makes wide bend nearly straight mesad, thence by a long gradual bow-bend reaches apex; the first two curves are about equal, 3 longer. Segment 2 of the abdomen is about half the surface, 3 short, darker, forming a dark bow across the abdomen its ends curving up into segment 2. Petiole thrice longer than wide, glabrous but with a stout carina down each side (lateral aspect). Jaws 2- and 3-dentate. Mouth-plate 8-digitate, digits short and blunt, each bearing an elongate, stout spine; there is also a similar spine laterad of digit 2 of either side (as if from a third digit), Scape over twice longer than wide, over half jomt 1 of the funicle, latter nearly twice the length of 2, widening distad; 2-3 equal, longer than wide, rest short but the oval club nearly as long as 2. Discal ciliation dense, dot-like to about the base of the marginal vein. Scutellum obtusely pointed, sans distinct plate or tooth. A female, King George Sound. The type is in the Macleay Museum, Sydney. Genus CHALCUROIDELLA Girault, 1, Chalcuroidella bispinosa, n. sp. As the revised description of C. orientalis but scape distinctly exceeding joint 1 of the funicle, general colour aeneous, mouth-plate 11-digitate (digits long, outer pair more divergent) ; stigmal vein yellow; legs except coxae, tegulae, scape yellow brown; rest of the antenna and femur 3 dark brown or fuscous, Abdomen red except basal 4 above and a spot above just before apex. ‘here is a small glabrous area near the centre of the parapside. Petiole wider at base, where it bears a long lateral spine on each side. Abdomen stnooth but with many scattered pin-punctures. Face very pilose. A deep, wide fovea at the base of the scutellum between the axillae. Legs pilose. A male, Mount Lofty, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). The scutellum appears to be folded up at apex and the rolled-up part pressed into the other; from lateral aspect, there is a short tooth just caudad of the emarginate apical plate. Genus Meracea Kirby. 1, Metagea punctulativentris, n. Sp. Reminds of Tricoryna subsalebrosa, but hind metatarsus is not thick and the scape is over half of funicle 1, latter equal to 2 plus 3, these 4 longer than wide; the club, joint 10, constricted at middle, a bit longer than 9, 8 and 9 subquadrate. As description of M. kirbyi Ashmead but abdomen densely pin-punctulate (except the long seginent 2 above), its petiole only 24 times longer than wide and very finely long-lineolated. Legs except articulations and the tarsi dark, general colour dark blue. A median groove on the scutellum and between the large axillae. Rugosity of the thorax not coarse, only medium, the smooth part of the parapside is the mesal half of middle part. Venation beyond the submarginal vein, pale. Pedicel wider than long. Propodeum with a median carina, transverse striae from it. 336 Jaws 2- and 3-dentate. The hemispherical mouth-plate bears a middle spineless digit and 4 or 5 on each side of it, all wide and obtuse, each bearing a long, colourless spine, Lateral ocellus twice closer to the median than to the eye, latter sparsely hairy. Discal ciliation distinct, very fine and rather dense, to about the base of the marginal vein (a bit beyond). Three females, South Australia. Types in Macleay Museum. Subfamily EURYTOMINAE. Genus Eurytoma Hliger. 1. Eurytoma murrayi, n. sp. The same as E. brevipetiolata but abdomen yellow on venter and lower half of the sides, femora 1-2 above, 3 (all) black (except ends), so hind tibiae above centrally ; scape black on dorsal edge. Stigmal and postmarginal veins subequal, half the length of the marginal. Median channel unifoveate. The yellow triangles on the face of the male nearly coalesce except at meson just beneath antenna. Resembles E. tasmanica in everything except channel of propodeum, punctate parapside, its longer marginal vein and the colour of the legs. Funicles exceeding pedicel. Petiole in female a bit longer than wide. Two pairs, Tasmania. The distal part of the disc of the scutellum bears sparse punctures, the inter- spaces finely reticulated. The outer orbits in the male are yellow. 2. Eurytoma cecili, n. sp. Characterised by the pointed, conic-ovate abdomen with 2 exceeding any other segment, then 6 and 7 which are equal, finely reticulate and each with several rows of thimble-punctures; segments 4 and 8 shortest, 3 equal 5 and less than half of 2 and a fourth shorter than 6. Base of scape, knees, tibiae, tarsi, apex of the ovipositor valves, apex of the pedicel, red-brown. Funicles 1-2 some- what longer than wide, somewhat exceeding the pedicel. Venation black, the postmarginal vein somewhat exceeding the stigmal, three-quarters the marginal. Petiole quadrate, surface coriaceous, with ridged lateral margins. Segment 5 finely reticulate. Median channel very distinct, coarse, bifoveate. Femoral furrow cross-rugulose-punctate. Densely punctate, pubescent. Lower proplcurum reticu- late. Wing 2 broad, Body robust, long. Punctures on lower half of the cheek sparse, the arca reticulate. Runs with £. secunda and allies. A female, Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo Island (Museum Expedition), February, 1926. 3. EuryromaA arETHEAS Walker. A female, Tasmania. This species, in my revised table, runs in near E. spes and allies but differs in bearing no median basin on the propodeum. It also runs to &. nigroculex but aside from its normal abdomen, funicle 1 is shorter, as is also the petiole. 4, Eurytoma nigroculex, n. sp. As E. helena but abdomen with a distinct petiole which is twice longer than wide, no propleural spot, funicle 1 is somewhat over twice longer than wide, twice the length of the black pedicel, lateral ocelli equidistant, venation brown, marginal vein twice the stigmal, latter a bit shorter than the postmarginal. Punctuation dense and uniform, the median channel bifoveate at basal 4 only. Femoral furrow cross-striate and punctulate. Segment 6 of the abdomen is half the length of 5, latter a bit shorter than 2-4 united. Segment 6 is naked and subglabrous. Tegulae red, fore tibia red-yellow only at apex and along each side. 337 Somewhat as E. aretheas Walker (as identified) but segment 6 is short, very hairy and only about a fifth the length of 5. A female, Carribie, Yorke Peninsula, South Australia (N. B. Tindale). 5. Eurytoma tasmANnica Cameron. Equals Xanthosoma. wo hind tibial spurs. A pair, Launceston, Tas- mania, No. 2006. Labelled as this species in typewriting, and probably a part of the original material of Cameron’s; the type locality is the same. The female agrees with the description, but there is a propleural spot in both sexes. he umbilicate punctures on dorsal thorax are noticeably sparser only on the scutellum at distal half and on nearly entire parapside which is finely reticulated; the scutum is finely cross-lined only on cephalic margin. Femoral furrow reticulate scaly. The middle femora beneath and tibiae 2 and 3, except base and distal 4, are slightly blackish also. The abdomen is brownish along lower sides and ventum and also distad of 5, ovate, rounded above, 5 long, glabrous, over the length of 2-4 united, petiole quadrate. Propodeum with a shallow, bifoveate median channel. Marginal vein short, a bit exceeding the postmarginal, the still shorter stigmal not exceeding the length of its knob, The male has the middle face up to the antennae, outer orbits flavous; hairs of flagellum exceed the distal joints only. In the female, segment 3 is longer than the linear 4, both united less than 2. Propodeum umbilicately punctate. he species was lost. It resembles and is similar to the species of Eurysystole, 6. Eurytoma striatifemur, n. sp. As E, silvipuer but the fore coxa on cephalic aspect, base of middle coxa also black, the abdomen above entirely black, except dorso-laterad centre of 5 and 6; femora 1 and 3 above except at each end, fore tibia centrally above, hind tibiae laterad except each end, black. Prothorax entirely red-yellow except face nearly to the margins, median line widely and a round spot between it and the lateral margins; head yellow except frons, scrobes, vertex and upper half of occiput continuously except margins of the eyes. Scape black above. Postmarginal vein subequal to the stigmal, latter shorter than its rather large knob, latter dark. The fine rugulae in the median “basin” are from the lateral boundaries, while the flat meson is finely punctulate and has a median carina from middle to apex, no foveae at base but the latter is carinate, A female, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Lea). 7, Eurytoma varivena, n. sp, As E, striatifacies but somewhat larger, venation lemon-yellow with the rather short marginal vein (thrice longer than wide) equal to the stigmal and somewhat shorter than the postmarginal. Median channel of the propodeum light (shallow), bifoveate and narrowing. Segment 5 somewhat exceeds 4 but not as long as 2-4 united. Abdomen compressed, its petiole quadrate, abdomen high toward base, not much longer than high there. Characterised by the venation. The fore tibiae are yellow beneath, the funicles moniliform but exceeding the pedicel. Femoral furrow finely punctulate. A female, Mount Lofty, South Australia (J. G. O. Tepper). Compare also the species E. aroueti (Girault) which differs in having the three distal veins of the fore wing equal and no channel on the propodeum through the median basin; moreover, in this species (varivena), the basin is ovate and concave. Ovipositor valves entirely black. 338 8 EuRYTOMA CASUARINAE Girault. A female, Magnetic Island, Queensland (A. M. Lea). ‘The whole dorsum of segments 2-3 of the abdomen were black. 9, TEuRYTOMA AUSTRALIA Girault. Three males, six females, mounted together and labelled “Tasmania.” In the male the hind tibia is all black except each end, and the hairs of the flagellum were distinctly longer than the diameter of the joints, shorter in typical forms. In the female, segment 5 of the abdomen equals 2-4 united and is over twice the length of 4. I am loth to give the above male variation a name but the difference is marked enough. It may be a common variation. 10. Eurytoma minutivespa, n. sp. As E. leeuwenhoeki but flagellum black, fore femur so only at basal half above, 2 beneath only, 3 lateral aspect only ; venation yellow-brown. (See No. 11). In my revised table, follows E. maseinit, A female, Owieandana, Northern Flinders Range (H. M. Hale and N. B. Tindale). 11. Eurytoma leeuwenhoeki, n. sp. As E. semifuscicornis but a half smaller, abdomen more humped, 3 is shorter than 4, the subquadrate-ovate median basin shows no trace of a median channel except at base and is uniformly punctulate, there is no petiole, segment 5 is over twice the length of 4 and longer than 2-4 united, the antennae are entirely white (except the rounded pedicel above slightly), the funicles, though exceeding the pedicel, are subquadrate and equal. Venation very pale but of the relative lengths, the postmarginal vein nearly as long as the marginal. Femoral furrow densely punctate. A female, Roper River, North Australia (N. B. Tindale). 12. EuryroMA PYRRHOCERUS Crawford. wo females from a brown, oval cocoon of what appeared to be some Ichneumonoid Hymenopteron. The cocoon was about a quarter inch in diameter. This species differs from £. semifuscicornis mostly in bearing no basin upon the meson of the propodeum, instead a distinct median channel. This channel is cross-rugose. There are no other differences. In these specimens segment 3 of the abdomen distinctly exceeded 4 (Craw- ford says 3 and 4, meaning 4 and 5, are nearly equal). There is, of course, varia- _tion here, due to the movement of the segments one within the other. 13. TEurvyTOMA SEMIFUSCICORNIS Girault. Six females reared from the bag of an Entometa moth, Adelaide, South Aus- tralia, February 8, 1897. One of the specimens was only as long as the thorax of the others. The flagella were rather darker than usual. 14. EurvToMA FILIsILVar Girault. Several pairs, Mount Pleasant, South Australia (Loveday); from galls and lerp, February 9, 1897. The apparent male is black, antennae red distad, otherwise similar to the female; one specimen, however, had the antennae, legs and thoracic pleurum 339 except metathorax, red-yellow. There is usually considerable colour variation in the males of this genus. 15. EuryToma species. Many males entirely red-yellow except the head (except mouth), pronotum at caudal meson, abdomen (often, except petiole), scutum, axillae, scutellum and often propodeum (and usually its median channel). Reared from galls, lerp and so forth, Mount Pleasant, South Australia (Loveday), February 9, 1897, 16. Eurytoma TERRAE Girault. Two females, Adelaide, South Australia. The fore femora were blackish laterad except at apex. Subfamily CALLIMOMINAE. Genus Mecasticmus Dalman. 1. Megastigmus hilaris, n. sp. As M. brachyscelidis but hind coxa black only laterad and a middle lateral spot on the hind femur. Ovipositor a bit excecding the body. The following yellow: Head except vertex (except orbits) and upper half of the occiput ; pro- thorax except face and median line above widely (at middle of this, from cach side, a short lateral projection) ; caudal half and lateral parapsides, prepectus; apex, scutellum and the transverse postscutellum. Abdomen fulvous with five cross-bands of black from apex of basal 4. Scutellum reticulate, on scutum very fine cross-striation, setae equidistant. Pro- podeum non-carinate. Fore femur with a black streak along lateral disc. Antennac black, joint 1 of the funicle nearly twice longer than wide, 7 quadrate, equal pedicel in length. A female, Lucindale, South Australia (B. A. Feuerheerdt), 2. Megastigmus cecili, n. sp. The same as M. longicauda but seta 2 of the scutellum a bit closer to 1, abdomen flavous, orange above, with only three cross-stripes (none distad of middle), 1 really the converging lateral margins of the long segment 2 (at its distal half), 2 across base of segment 3, 3 mostly a marginal spot at base of segment 4. Head, prothorax flavous; propodeum black only widely down the meson and the sutures (in type female only cephalic margin). Stigma ovate. No black on head except upon the occiput, circularly around the neck, Segment 4 also with a longitudinal marginal spot at apex. Distal funicle joint a bit longer than wide. Two females, Murray Bridge, South Australia (A. M. Lea). 3. Megastigmus pallidiocellus, n. sp. Ovipositor subequal abdomen, latter subpetiolate. Flavous, eyes green, ocelli colourless. Face with strong cotiverging striae below; two transverse, narrow marks just cephalad of the propodeum; a mark caudo-mesad of the tegulae. black ; a transverse mark each side meson before apex segment 2 of the abdomen, 3 above except apex and a shorter stripe across base of segment 5, dusky. Funicle 1 a half longer than wide, shorter than the pedicel. Vertex with black setae. Ocelli in a triangle, lateral equidistant between eye and median. Second setae of the scutellum twice closer to 3 than to 1. Sculpture very fine. A female, Banyo, Queensland, sweeping mangrove, September 30, 1923. Type in Queensland Museum. A female, Ooldea, South Australia (A. M. Lea). In this last specimen the cyes were reddish, the second seta of the scutellum 340 was somewhat (not twice) closer to 3 than to 1. Stigma small, elliptical. Another female, Adelaide, South Australia (R. Burton) was similar but the general colouration was orange, cheeks, legs and scape lemon, the second seta of the sctitellum twice closer to 3, stigma wider. It is apparently true that the position of the setae on the scutellum varies somewhat, as also does the shape of the stigma. 4. MerGASTIGMUS SULCICOLLIS Cameron, walsinghami, n. var. A pair, Mount Lofty, South Australia (A. M. Lea). Ovipositor not quite as long as the body. The same as M. sulcicollis but no black upon the scutum or scutellum and the ovipositor is shorter. “The male stigma is large and round and its flagellum beset with long, scraggly hairs, the funicle long, narrowing distad. In the fcmale, the three setae of the scutellum are equally spaced, the abdomen more or less sordid, especially across middie. The male abdomen is black above, the propodeum black, the first funicle joint over twice longer than wide, pedicel small, The variety is similar to M. maculatipennis but the setae of the scutcllum are equidistant and the male antenna differs, The male of typical M. sulcicollis is not known. 5. MEGASTIGMUS SPENSERI Girault. Many pairs from galls on the leaves of Eucalyptus obliqua, Blakiston, South Australia, April, 1888 (T, D. Smeaton). Hatched in the following May. Also three females, same label, April 23, 1888. The yellow stripes on the abdomen in the male were usually absent. 6. MEGASTIGMUS MACULATIPENNIS (Girault). Many pairs from Port Jackson figs (A. J. Coates), Sydney, New South Wales. The females of these specimens usually had the spiracular sulcus black; the pronotum was orange except at or near the caudal margin. The male is similar but its abdomen bears six distinct black cross-bands, 5-6 close together near apex. Also in the male the propodeum is sometimes immaculate or even all black between the spiracles. Neck of the pronotum black. ‘The stigma in the female of these specimens was ovate, not globular, but I do not think this a stable character in the genus, as already stated. The peculiar colouration of the species of this genus and the lack of structural differences make them difficult to define, but the sctae on the scuteilum, colour and position of ocelli, length of the ovipositor and the colour of the setac are some characters that can be used, though all of them vary somewhat. The grooves on the scutcllum, first used by myself, unfortunately have been found to form one of those characters which is indeterminate—one can never be sure. Therefore Epimegastigmus and M egastigmus must he worked together. There is, morcover. a genus or group hidden in M egastigmus based upon male characters ; and as very few of the males are known, as yet, the fact adds to the perplexity. Genus Errmecastiemus Girault. 1. EPpIMEGASTIGMUS FULVIPES Girault. Four females, Melrose, South Australia, October (A. M. Ica); one female, Adelaide (N. B. Tindale). The stripes on the abdomen are near the apex of segment 2 (broken at meson) and most of 3 and 4 (hence well within basal half of the whole, 3 being about the middle). In one female, the setae on one side of the scutellum were equally spaced. The flavous colour varies: Sometimes the scutellum is nearly all flavous, 341 also the pronotum. The bands on the abdomen were very distinct in these speci- mens and vary from 2 to 3. On account of the flavous borders of the scutellum and parapsides, the above specimens were highly coloured and beautiful. The species £. limoni Girault was at first thought to be but a duller form of this species (sometimes I cannot see the tibial grooves on the scutellum, a shadowy character). The only real difference between the two (females) is that in E, fulvipes there are 4-6 closely-set setae in the oblique line of discal cilia from the submarginal vein, while in limoni there are only 2, these well spaced; but in the males this character does not vary. 2, EPIMEGASTIGMUS TRISULCATUS Girault. Three females, Tasmania. The ovipositor was longer than usual by one-fourth, The median carina of the propodeum absent in all of these specimens except one where it was evident at basal and apical fourths, the interval filled by a diamond-shaped ruga. In all, there was a more or less distinct cross-carina on this region, but the rugulae vary here. The abdomen was black except at each end, but this colouration appeared to be due to oil in the body. In a fourth female, from the same locality, although the abdomen was as just described, yet the two cross-stripes were faintly discernable and the blackening is not natural in life. The stigma is round-ovate, Still a fifth female, Launceston, Tasmania, October 8, 1916 (F. M. Littler), was similar to the fourth, except that the ovipositor was a fourth shorter and the lateral margin of the propodeum and the mesopleurum behind the femoral furrow were orange. There was also a black spot in front of the lateral ocellus. There is considerable minor variation in colour and the sculpture of the propodeum varies. 3. Epimegastigmus banksiae, n. sp. The same as E. bucklei but scutellum trisulcate, sculpture fine, margins of upper occiput delicate; head, prothorax, apex of the abdomen and legs also lemon; occipital black and that of upper scape narrow, no black otherwise on head; no other black except cephalic margin of the propodeum, as also the lines of its sulci, a line at the base of the tegulae and two faint cross-stripes beyond middle of the abdomen. (Flagellum missing.) No real sulci on propodeum, A female, the Grange, South Australia, from galls on Banksia (A. Zietz), 1899, Genus Neomecasticmus Girault. 1. Neomegastigmus leai, n. sp. As N. auritibiae but scape yellow narrowly ventrad only, head up to the antennae and the cheeks golden; coxae concoloréus except the apex of 1, rest of the legs golden except middle laterad of the fore femur, femora 2 and 3, apices of the femora golden. Scape obclavate. A row of thimble-punctures along the lateral margin of the scutum and on each side of the meson of the scutcllum far laterad. Scutellum cross-lined like the scutum. The same otherwise. Named for Mr. Arthur M. Lea. A female, Kangaroo Island (A. M. Lea). Genus Popacrion Spinola. 1. Podagrion metatarsum, n. sp. Scape at base, legs except lateral fore femur, most of middle femur except beneath and hind femur, venter of abdomen more or less, fulvous. Median carina of the propodeum forking beyond middle, the forks nearly at right angles. 342 Antennae black. Joint 1 of the funicle somewhat longer than wide, distal one quadrate, as long as the pedicel. Club not enlarged. Femoral teeth large, columnar, 2-3 longest, 4-6 usually coalesced, short and terminal, six teeth. Male similar with pale and simple metatarsi (metatarsus not by far half the length of the tarsus and not or but scarcely flabellate). Hind tibia not clavate. Two males, one female, Melbourne, Victoria, February 22, 1909. From the eggs of the mantid Orthodera. Also many specimens of both sexes with the same data and bearing the No. 39. 2, Podagrion fabellatum, n. sp. Aeneous; legs and antennae flavo-fulvous except middle of the lateral aspect of hind coxa, venter of abdomen brown. Hind femur slightly marked aeneous. Joint 1 of the funicle quadrate, shorter than the pedicel, distal three joints much wider than long. Carina of propodeum forking out from base. The male has joints 1-2 of hind tarsus flabellate, equal, together half the tarsus; they are also red-yellow. The male hind tibia is clavate and its body red-yellow, as follows: Antennae, legs except a long spot on hind coxa near middle base of lateral aspect, tegulae and abdomen except distal 4. Four femoral teeth (male), the distal 2 smaller and coalesced. A male, two females reared from what appeared to be galls, Launceston, Tas- mania (F. M. Littler). A gall-like vegetable object was mounted with each specimen. In this genus, the metatarsus i the male varies considerably. Genus PacuyToMobEs Girault. 1. Pachytomoides bicinctus, n. sp. As P. frater but distal half of segment 2 of the abdomen, red, a second black band at apex, joint 1 of the funicle a bit longer than wide, 2 and 3 quadrate, 8 twice wider than long; hind coxa, hind femur on lateral aspect, aeneous, pro- podeum with a median carina that forks at middle, punctate distad of the fork, rugulose proximad of it. Discal cilia of the first wing extending far toward base. Femoral teeth 10, 1, 3, 6, 8, largest, 5 minute, 10 wide. ; A female, Launceston, Tasmania, April 1, 1916 (1. M. Littler). he fore tibia is much prolonged from one angle of apex. Genus MacroponTomerus Girault. 1. MaAcRODONTOMERUS TRIANGULARIS Girault. A demale, Gawler, South Australia (A. M. Lea). 2. MacronoNTOMERUS ALIGITERINI Girault. Two females, Tasmania. Genus AMONODONTOMERUS Girault. 1. Amonodontomerus montanus, n. sp. The same as 4. arboreus but the pronotum with four rows of puncturcs, on scntum punctures sparse but over the entire surface (disc) and there are punctures on the mesal margin of the parapsides; segment 4 (abdomen) subequal to 2; legs except coxae, red; median carina of the propodeum obscure; ovipositor % the abdomen. A line of setae down the facial eye margin, curving over to the apex of the clypeus. (Both flagella missing. ) A female, Mount Lofty, South Australia (J. G. O, Tepper). 343 Genus DrrropiNoTELLa Girault. 1. DrrropiNoTELLA COMPRESSIVENTRIS Girault. Males, females, Tintinara, South Australia, from galls upon Eucalyptus (J. G. O. Tepper), January 6, 1887, and March 2, 1887. Also from galls upon Eucalyptus obliqua, foliage. Blakiston, April 23, 1888 (T. D. Smeaton). IEemerged in May, 1888. Females. Amongst the first lot were males. ‘This sex bears purple legs except tarsi, scape entirely metallic. Subfamily TRICHOGRAMMATINAE. Genus LATHROMERELLA Girault. 1. LATHROMERELLA CHINDERAENSIS Girault. A female, labelled “Cherry Gardens, South Australia (H. W. Andrew). Seeds of Calamagrostis aemula” and mounted with several male tetrastichines. Subfamily MYMARINAE. Australomymar, n. gen. The same as Polynemoidea but the club is solid. 1. Australomymar aurigerum, n. sp. Black, the three large sclerites between scutum and propodeum, proventer, ‘neck of and the space between median carinae of propodeum, petiole gold-brown ; legs suffused with same colour ; wings light smoky with a not wide band across at bend of the submarginal vein; scape long and slender, nearly as long as the fore femur, about eight times longer than wide (excluding the long bulla), twice the length of joint 1 of the funicle which is nearly twice the length of the pedicel, latter equal to joint 4; joint 2 elongate, longest, over 3 the length of the (body of the) scape and over six times longer than wide; 3 4 shorter than 2 and somewhat longer than 1, 4 and 5 each distinctly shorter than 1, 6 shortest. Fringes a fourth widest, 20-21 lines discal cilia extending to base of marginal (except a line or two). Ovipositor as long as the body. Scutum, parapsides coarsely scaly. Scutellum subquadrate, coriaceous; a rugulose, hemispherical sclerite follows it; postscutellum narrower, tricarinate, wider than long; propodeum long, with a pair of well-separated median carinae diverging to about middle, then converging. Hind tibiae densely beset with clongate hairs above. Metatarsus clongate but not half the length of the tarsus. A female, Warragul, Victoria, 30, v1., 1929. In lichens and moss (F. E. Wilson). Type in collection of F. Erasmus Wilson. Subfamily CHALCIDINAE. Genus Cuarcis Fabricius. 1. Crarcis RUBRiPES Girault VERGILII Girault. A male, two females, Launceston, ‘Tasmania, February 12, 15, and January 11, 1914, respectively (F. M. Littler, No. 2255). 2. CHALCIS RUFIFEMUR Giraull, var. A male, Mount Lofty, South Australia (R. J. Burton). ‘The disc of hind coxa above was red, while the fore tibia was dilute red with yellow ends. 344 3. CHALCIS RUFICORNIS Girault. Same record as in pt. i. The distal yellow on the hind tibia was very obscure. 4, CHALCcIs vicrorta Girault, A female, Norwood, South Australia, reared from wattle galls, April, 1892 (J. G. O. Tepper) ; a female, Pegenozena, Tasmania, December 31 1915 (F. M. Littler). The amount of black on the tegulac and legs varies somewhat. 5. Chalcis decens, n. sp. About the size of C. shakespearei and runs to that species and also (ignoring antennal insertion to C. dipterophaga). Fore wings missing. Black, the following parts dilute red: Hind legs except for two yellow ellipses above on tibia at base and apex (the basal one longer than the red proximad of it and distinctly shorter than the red central red), abdomen beneath and lower sides of 2; fore and middle tibia except cach end and on middle ones except ventro-laterad on one side (fore and middle femora diluted with red, apex rather widely in fore femur). ‘Tegulae yellow. Antennae a bit above the ends of the eyes not distinctly above as in dipterophaga, which has conspicuous yellow apex of the hind femur, while the hind tibia is black where the red is in this species. There is a golden dot on lateral hind femur at ventral apex. A female, Ardrossan, South Australia (J. G. O. ‘Tepper ). 6. CHALCIS PLUTELLOPIHAGA Girault, nortia, n. var. The same as C. australiensis but fore tibia yellow except above, except at each end. . Hind tibia with no black at base. A male, Launceston, ‘Tasmania (F. M. Littler), January 2, 1917, 7. CHALCIS RUBRIPES Girault. A male, Mount Lofty, South Australia (N. B. Tindale) ; and a female, same place (J. G. O. Tepper) ; two females, Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt and A. M. Lea, separately) ; a male, Launceston, Tasmania (No 2255 of F. M. Littler). In the Lucindale specimens nearly all of the fore femur and distal half of the middle femur were red. In the Tasmanian male, the fore femur except distal fourth and the middle femur except apex, were black. The black of the first two pairs of femora varics considerably in amount. 8. Chalcis redia, n. sp. As C. veronesini but fore tibia with no black (red, above at each end, golden), the middle tibia is black on one side (the same side with yellow on each end) ; the abdomen as in Stomatoceras (that is, less convex and shortly stylate at apex) ; basal yellow of hind tibia a mere dot and, of course, smaller than the distal yellow. Femora 1-2 widely red at apex. A female, by sweeping. Adelaide, South Australia (N. B. ‘Vindale ). The lateral ocelli are somewhat closer to the eye than to the median ocellus. There are several species of this genus that have the abdomen as in the above species (e.g., C. pomonae Camcron), but I am not sure as to the stability of this character. However, I have never seen variations of it. 345 Genus CHALCITELLOIDES Girault. 1. CILALCITELLOIWEs 10 Girault. A female, Blackall Range, Queensland (A. M. Lea). This species is the same as Chalcitella australiensis Girault described origin- ally as bearing no tooth above on the hind tibia. It seems the tooth was ignored or overlooked and later searched for and found. Hence the error. The name australiensis takes precedence. Middle coxa red. Genus XENARRETOCERA Girault. 1. XENARRETOCERA V-CARINATA Girault. A female, in flood debris, Adelaide, South Australia (A. M. Lea). In this specimen the wings were clear, apex of segment 3 of the abdomen somewhat concave. The second and third longitudinal rugae of the propodeum converged and joined at about middle, thence united; they, therefore, formed a sort of Y. Punctures of the scutum smaller and denser than those of the scutellum, latter well spaced. 2. Xenarretocera murrayi, n. sp. Exactly similar to X. v-carinata except for the nearly equal punctuation of the scutum and scutellum, there being no wide mesal spaces upon the scutellum ; moreover, the interspaces are not glabrous but finely reticulated. A female, Owieandana, Northern Flinders Range, South Australia (11. M. Hale and N. B. Tindale). Genus Stomatoceras Kirby. 1. Stomatoceras parvivespa, n. sp. Runs to S. longicornis but antennae black, joint 1 of the funicle slightly reddish and not quite as long as the pedicel, segments 2-5 red and all of venter,; thus differs primarily in having more red upon the abdomen. There is a cross- stripe from the marginal vein, the usual loop from this and an infuscation irom this loop to wing apex (except caudad). From S. salt (types compared): More of the abdomen red, the wing infuscation, funicle 1 is distinctly longer. The species salti differs from S. dipterophaga in the formation of the femoral teeth —at first a straight line (not quite a half from base), then a long, gentle convexity, the whole occupying a half or more of the ventral margin. A female, Beverley, Western Australia. 2. Stomatoceras disconiger, n. sp. Runs close to S. minor, omphale, and maeterlincki. From minor: The legs except (as usual for the genus) fore coxa and the whole of the lateral disc of the hind femur and the fore femur obscurely dorso-laterad, red; funicle 2 black at distal half; wing not lightly dusky to apex from the strong loop; postmarginal vein a pit shorter than the marginal; abdomen entirely black. [rom omphale: By the large, discal black on the hind femur, by having the second joint of the funicle red at base, abdomen all black; tecth of the hind femur on distal 3, the proximal convexity small, the other long and gradual. From maeterlincki: Hind coxa red, hind femur with the discal black; teeth of the scutellum strong. Segment 2 is practically glabrous, half the surface, a short carina on each side of meson at base (also present in S. parvivespa and, doubtless, all of the species ). A female, Dorrigo, New South Wales. 346 3. Stomatoceras vespella, n. sp. As S. melitarae but differing primarily in the femoral teeth, which are on a hit more than distal half, proximad a long, gentle convexity occupying about 4 plus, at first straight but after middle forming a slight mound; then, nearly as long, a prominent, much higher convexity whose sloping (distal) side is much longer than the mound part, which is at the basal end. Also, legs except fore coxa, red, segment 4 (of abdomen) black above ; pedicel, joints 1-3 of the funicle red (pedicel short as in S. dipterophaga). A female, Adelaide, South Australia. 4. Stomaroceras saLtr Girault. Distal half of segment 2 and all of 3 above are red. This variety is now con- sidered a species. 347 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. PART VI. By Avert H. Exsron, F.E.S. [Read October 10, 1929. ] Family ELATERIDAE. Subfamily CONODERINAE. Conoderus arbitrarius, n. sp. Elongate; moderately thick; subopaque; upper surface dark brown with the head and the anterior margin of the pronotum slightly diluted with red, the under surface mostly reddish-brown, antennae and mouth parts ferruginous, legs testaceous; rather densely clothed with short, sericeous, depressed, cineraceous pubéscence. Head flattened in forepart, with a very small carina on the vertex, anterior margin rounded, with densely arranged, small rugose punctures ; antennae just extending beyond apex of posterior angles of the pronotum, the first and second joints small, subglobular and about equal, the both combined a little more than half the length of the fourth, with a fine carina extending the whole length. Scutellum elongate and obtusely pointed behind. Pronotum longer than wide, lightly and evenly convex, the longitudinal median line almost obsolete, the lateral margins from base to near anterior margin almost imperceptibly, rectilinearly converging, and then lightly, roundly contracted, lateral margins of anterior angles curved towards underneath, the posterior angles long, acute, produced backwards but scarcely diverging, bicarinate, the inside carina equally as strong as the outer but only half its length; with densely arranged small round punctures, Elytra across shoulders slightly narrower than pronotum across posterior angles, sides almost parallel from behind shoulders to near the middle then gradually, roundly attenuated to apex which is briefly, obliquely truncated at the sutural angles; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae moderately deep, elongate and contiguous, the interstices relatively wide, flat and minutely, subrugosely punctured. The prosternum at the sides lightly furrowed through the deflexion of the lateral margins of the pronotum. Length, 12°5-13°5 mm.; width, 3-5-4 mm. North-Western Australia: Kimberley (J. S. Clark; Dr. E. Mjoberg). Type in author’s collection. Near C. brunnipes Schwarz, from which it can be distinguished by its more uniform colour and with the legs testaceous. Subfamily CORYMBITINAE. Poemnites nitidicollis, n. sp. Elongate; nitid; black, antennae reddish-brown to blackish; elytra testaceous (with exception of apical part which is black), legs fulvous; moderately densely clothed with short, depressed, cineraceous pubescence. Head flattened in forepart with closely arranged, moderately large, subrugose punctures; antennae with 3 extending beyond the base of the pronotum, that of the @ barely reaching the posterior angles of same, the.second joint very small, the third about twice as long as the preceding and about the same length as the fourth, feebly serrated from the latter joint with the apical one simple., Pronotum slightly longer than wide, rather strongly and evenly convex, with a very fcebly marked longitudinal median furrow, sides from near the base almost straight and parallel up to the anterior 348 third then gradually roundly contracted, posterior angles acute, produced back- wards and slightly divergent, carina short and not strongly marked ; moderately densely covered with sharply-defined, round punctures. Scutellum subtriangular and acutely pointed posteriorly. Elytra across shoulders barely as wide as pro- notum across posterior angles and a little more than twice the length of the latter, rounded at the humeral angles with the sides almost straight and parallel to near middle then strongly attenuated to apex, depressed in the sutural region; punctate- striate, the punctures in striae relatively large, round and contiguous, interstices narrow and subrugose. Length, 6-7°5 mm.; width, 1°5-2 mm. Queensland : ‘Cairns CF. P. Dodd) ; Herberton, Malanda (Dr. E. Mjoberg). ‘Type i in South Australian Museum. This is a very distinct and pretty species; the blackish patt of the elytra is very variable, hardly two specimens being alike, it ranges from the tip of the elytra, with the suture and the lateral margins narrowly infuscated, to the whole of the posterior half being black and in most cases this dark portion is continued upwards for a short distance along the suture and lateral margins. Its nearest ally would be P. austraficus Cand., from which it may be distinguished by having the whole of the under surface, the posterior angles of the pronotum and the apex of the elytra black. Subfamily LUDILNAE., Agonischius aulacoderus, n. sp. Elongate ; narrow; subnitid; dark castaneous with the elytra testaceous, head, antennae and scutellum blackish, parts of pronotum, suture, lateral margins and punctures in striae of elytra more or less infuscated; moderately densely clothed with a pale, sericeous pubescence. Head lightly convex with a small, shallow, interocular depression, with densely arranged, very small, round punctures; antennae reaching back to about the middle of elytra, moderately strongly ser- rated (8 ), second joint very small, joints three to eleven about equal in length, the apical one tubular and narrower at the base than at the apex. Pronotum longer than wide, evenly convex, slightly wider at the base than at the apex, lateral margins almost straight, the longitudinal median furrow distinctly visible along the whole length, posterior angles slightly divergent, produced backwards and acute, sharply carimate; denscly covered with very small, round punctures. Scutellum elongate, sides curved, posterior acute, minutely punctured. Elytra cross shoulders about the width of pronotum across posterior angles and about ihrice the length of the latter, slightly depressed near the suture, sides straicht and gradually contracted ta near the postcrior fourth then somewhat more abruptly contracted to apex which is rounded, rather finely punctate-striate, the peels in striae round and not crowded, the interstices narrow, lightly convex, finely and minutely punctured. Length, 8 mm.; width, 2 mm, ty South Wales: (12. W. Ferguson); Queensland : Glen Lamington (Dr. lt, Mjoberg). Type in author’s collection. The forepart of the head is more or less reddish, the base and region of the longitudinal furrow of the pronotum is infuscated and the base of the elytra is bright testaceous. Its nearest congener is A. mjobergi Elston, from which it may be distinguished by the black head and antennae, infuscated pronotum, the latter furrowed along the whole of its length and the clothing of same longer and of a silkv appearance. Family CLERIDAE, Subfamily CLERINAE, Cleromorpha albohirta, n. sp. Convex; subnitid; black with the two basal joints of the antennae and trochanters reddish, legs in parts more or less diluted with red. Clothed with 349 long (almost tomentose) whitish hairs. Head lightly convex on top and depressed in the forepart; with rather coarse, densely arranged, subrugose punctures; antennae moderately slender, apical joint reaching back to about the base of pronotum, first joint large, the second about half the length of the third which is not quite as long as the fourth and fifth combined, nine and ten are enlarged and obconical in shape, the eleventh elongate and attenuated at the apex. Pronotum wider than long, sides evenly curved with the widest distance apart near the middle, anterior and posterior margins straight; with closely arranged, moderately large and deep punctures. Scutellum very small and round. Elytra across shoulders wider than base of pronotum and about thrice its length, sides from behind shoulders gradually, almost imperceptibly, dilated to ncar the posterior fourth and then more or less abruptly, roundly contracted to apex; punctures closely arranged in rows, rather large, deep and subreticulate, becoming smaller and more shallow towards apex. Length, 3°5-4 mm. Victoria: Melbourne (E. Fischer) ; South Australia: Murray River (A. IT. Elston). Type in author’s collection. ‘This and the following species more or less resemble the genotype, C. novem- guttata Westw., in all the salient characteristics with the exception of the antennae, in the former these appendages are slightly longer, more slender and only the last three joints enlarged so as to form a club, whereas in the latter the club is distinctly composed of tour joints. Cleromorpha ruficollis, n. sp. Convex ; subnitid ; black, except basal joint of antennae which is more or less reddish, prothorax reddish testaceous, legs testaceous with the tarsi slightly infuscated. Moderately sparsely clothed with long, white hairs. Head almost flat and densely covered with small, rugose punctures; antennae moderately slender with the apical joint reaching back to near the base of the pronotum, the second joint a little less than half the size of the first and bead-like in shape, the third joint about twice as long as the second and slender, the fourth much smaller than the third, joints four to eight about equal in length with each other, nine and ten enlarged and subconical, the apical joint about as long as the ninth and tenth combined, wide at the base and attenuated towards the apex. Pronotum wider than long, lightly and evenly convex, the anterior and posterior margins about equal in length, the lateral margins abruptly, roundly dilated near the middle; with closely arranged, moderately large, deep, round punctures. Scutellum very minute and round, Elytra across shoulders distinctly wider than base of pro- notum, sides almost straight and parallel to beyond the middle then roundly con- tracted to apex; with large, deep, seriate punctures, becoming smaller posteriorly and almost obsolete near the apex. Length, 3:5 mm. South Australia: Quorn (A, H, Elston). Type in author’s collection. In general outline this species closely resembles C. albohirta Elston, but may be easily distinguished by its colour. Odontophlogistus similis, n. sp. Elongate; submitid; black, the clypeus, antennae, palpi, eyes, abdomen and tarsi reddish; clothed with long, griseous pubescence, more densely arranged on the head and sides of pronotum. Head with two moderately large intcrocular foveae, the antennae not quite reaching the base of pronotum, the apical joint elongate and tapering to a point; with small, sparsely arranged, indistinct punc- tures. Pronotum much wider than long, sides roundly dilated at the middle, surface uneven with shallow depressions; with shallow, sparsely arranged, indistinct punctures. Scutellum small and subcircular, Elytra across shoulders 350 much wider than base of pronotum and about three and one half times as long as the latter, shoulders rounded and protubcrant, sides slightly curved and roundly contracted on the posterior third; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae large, deep and subreticulate, the striae narrow and costate. Length, 8°5 mm.; width, 3mm, New South Wales: Culcairn. Type in author’s collection, In general appearance it closely resembles O. rubriveniris Elston, but may be easily distinguished from that species by the colour of the antennae which is ferruginous and longer, the apical joint of which is more elongate and drawn out into a point; the punctures on the head and pronotum of the present species are barely visible, whereas on the former species they are deeply pitted. ELEALE AENEA Elston. A large specimen of this species, measuring 12-5 mm. in length, was taken near Melbourne by Mr. E. Fischer. ELEALE CHLORIS Chev. This species varies in colour from bright emerald green to green with brassy reflections; the antennae, mouth parts and tibiae are testaceous, the femora are mostly of the same colour as the body or darker and the tibiae are more or less infuscated ; the apical joint of the antennae is very widely and deeply emarginated, Subfamily HYDNOCERINAF. ALLELIDEA vrripis Blackb. Mr. TF. E. Wilson has sent me two female specimens of the above species which he swept from rushes growing in a swamp at Altona, Victoria. These specimens agree very well with the author’s description except for the colour which, instead of being “viridi-aenea,” is a nitid piceous black. Subfamily ENOPLITNAE. Tenerus tumidicollis, n. sp. Elongate; subnitid, head and pronotum reddish testaceous, the latter with a large, transverse spot on the anterior margin black, elytra testaceous with four large black spots, two basal and two apical, antennae, mandibles and legs black; inoderately densely clothed with rather long, semi-erect pubescence, golden on the pale parts and black on the dark parts. Under surface testaccous with the metasternum black. Head with two small, shallow, interocular depressions, with closcly (but not densely) arranged small, shallow punctures; antennae robust, the second joint small and subglobular, the third quite three times as long as the secand, the following strongly serrated except the apical which is acuminate at its apex. Pronotum about as long as wide, the anterior margin rounded and very narrowly recurved near the middle, the lateral margins curved and from near the middle gradually, roundly contracted to the base, in the middle near the base with a rather large, shining tumidity ; somewhat more densely punctured than the head, the punctures similar to those on the latter. Scutellum small and almost circular. Elytra across shoulders barely wider than pronotum at base and about thrice the length of the latter, sides almost straight and parallel to near apex then roundly contracted, with two fine costae on each clytron, one close to the suture and extending from behind the scutellum to nearly the whole length, the other begin- ning at the base—about midway between the suture and the humeral angle—and 351 barely reaching the middle, these are joined together at the base by a short, curved third costa; densely, finely and subrugosely punctured. Length, 8:5 mm. Queensland: Brisbane (H. Pottinger). Type in author’s collection. This species should be easily recognised by its distinct colour markings ; the two black basal spots on the elytra touch the lateral margins but not the suture, the two apical ones touch both the suture and the lateral margins. Tenerus parvus, i. sp. Elongate; opaque; black, pronotum testaceous except lateral and anterior margins which are black; densely covered with very small, black pubescence except on pale part of pronotum where it is golden, Ilead with a shallow depres- sion near the base of each antenna, with densely arranged, minute punctures which are concealed by the clothing; antennae long and robust, second joint small and globular, the third only a little longer than the preceding, the following strongly serrated except the apical one which is elongate and acutely pointed. Pronotum about as long as wide, the lateral margins lightly and evenly rounded, with a small tumidity at the base in the middle and an indistinct one on each side of the middle on the posterior third and situated about half way between the middle and the lateral margin; with punctures similar to those on the head and concealed by the clothing. Scutellum very small and circular. Elytra across shoulders barely wider than pronotum at base and thrice as long as the latter, sides almost straight and parallel to near apex then roundly contracted, without distinct costae, with densely arranged, minute punctures which ate more or less concealed by the clothing. Length, 4-5 mm. Queensland: Cairns. Type in author’s collection. Distinguished from all other Australian members of the genus by its small size; the sides of the head near the eyes are lightly diluted with yellow. Subfamily CORYNETINAE. Pylus okei, n. sp. Subnitid ; dark castaneous, antennae and legs a little paler ; moderately clothed with semi-erect dark pubescence. Surface of head even, densely covered with small, deep, subrugose punctures; antennae reaching to base of pronotum, apical joint almost circular. Pronotum about as long as wide, abruptly and angularly dilated on the sides at the middle, with a moderately large, round, deep depression in the middle near the anterior margin and two much less distinct ones near the base; densely and evenly punctured with rather large, deep punctures. Scutcllum minute and rounded on the sides. Elytra across shoulders much wider than pro- notum at base and about thrice the length of the latter, humeral angles almost square, sides almost straight and parallel to near apex then somewhat abruptly roundly contracted; closely covered with large, deep seriate punctures becoming a little smaller posteriorly. Length, 4-5 mm. Victoria: Gypsum (C, Oke). Type in author’s collection. A much smaller species than P. fafuus Newm., and can be readily dis- tinguished from it by the head not having an interocular fovea, with densely arranged and asperate punctures; the pronotum densely and subrugosely punc- tured, the surface less uneven, in fatuus the pronotum (particularly the anterior portion) is densely covered with minule punctures and the middle and sides inter- spersed with large, scattered punctures forming a double punctuation, the present species is densely and uniformly covered with large punctures. This species is at once distinguished from P. pallipes Macl., inter alia, by the apical joint of the antennae being almost circular and not drawn out into a spine al the apex, also the head and pronotum are more densely and coarsely punctured. 352 Pylusopsis, n. gen. Body elongate, subdepressed. Head more or less rectangular and almost truncate in front; eyes prominent, moderately coarsely granulated, emarginate in front; mandibles moderately prominent and curved inwards; maxillary and labial palpi moderately long, the apical joint of each is similar in shape and size, elongate, narrow at the base and becoming widely dilated to apex where it is obliquely truncated; antennae robust, sometimes reaching back to base of pro- notum, the first joint large and curved, the second small and almost globalar, the third long and subcylindrical, four to eight about equal in length and subglobular, nine to eleven widely dilated and forming a loose jointed club. Prothorax about as long as wide, narrower at the base than at apex, with a moderately strong protuberance on each lateral margin near the middle. Scutellum very small. Elytra at base wider than pronotum, at base straight and subangular at the shoulders, strongly punctured only on the anterior half; apex of each elytron individually rounded and simple. Legs rather long and robust, posterior femora not reaching apex of abdomen, tarsi with only four visible joints, the first three joints with pads on the under surface, apical joint elongate and dilated towards apex; claws simple. The granulation of the eves is much finer than in Py/as and yet coarser than that of Parapylus, the sculpture of the pronotum and elytra is quite different from either; the formation of the apical joint of the maxillary palpi should at once distinguish it from either of these genera. Pylusopsis chrysocome, n. sp. Elongate; subdepressed; black with the elytra, abdomen and a narrow band at apex of pronotum ferruginous, the antennae black with the apical joint white and the tips of the apical joints of the black palpi also whitish, with a black spot on each elytron just in front of the middle, the under surface of the tarsi more or less testaceous; rather densely clothed in parts with long, shaggy pubescence, golden on the pale parts and black on the dark portion. Head with the surface even, densely and subrugosely punctured; antennae reaching to base of pronotum, second joint small and subglobular, the third almost as long as the fourth and fifth combined, joints nine to eleven dilated and forming a loose jointed club, the apical joint barely longer than wide and rounded, Pronotum about as long as avide, the basal margin somewhat narrower than the apical one, sides strongly dilated at the middle and forming a protuberance on each side, with three nitid protuberances on the disc, two behind the anterior margin—one on each side of the middle—the third is an clongate one in front of the base at the middle, the two in front joined to the posterior one by a more or less interrupted elevated, nitid line forming a Y; densely covered with small, deep punctures, Scutellum very small and more or less rounded. Elytra at base a little wider than pronotum, the base almost truncate, humeral angles slightly rounded, sides almost straight and parallel to near middle then roundly contracted to apex, with two large. slightly raised elongate protuberances at the base, one on each side of the suture, the anterior half with large, round punctures more or less arranged in rows, the posterior half densely, minutely (almost imperceptibly) punctured. Length, 5-6 mm. Victoria: Belgrave; Gembrook (C. Oke); Millgrove (F. E. Wilson). 353 POLARITY IN CASUARINA PALUDOSA. By Tuomas T. CoLguuoun, B.Sc., Department of Botany, University of Adelaide. (Communicated by J. G. Wood, M.Sc.) {Read October 10, 1929. ] INTRODUCTION. The fact that plants have polarity is generally accepted; but opinions ditfer widely as to whether this is stable or labile, and as to whether it is inherited, induced or impressed. Much work has been carried out on this subject, but owing to the contradictory nature of some of the results, there is still no definite answer to the problem. Pfeffer (1) is of the opinion that polarity is first induced in the plant, and this is later impressed on the young parts by the parts preformed. This induced polarity may be retained by the cells to a greater or less degree so as to he apparently inherited, Coulter and Chrysler (2), rather unconvincingly, conclude that polarity is non- existent. Vochting (3) holds that it is a special property of the plant body, founded in the structure of the egg and is not induced by external agents. These are the three extreme views, but many workers such as Sachs (4), Lund (5), Doposcheg-Uhlar (6), Miehe (7) and Neilson-Jones (8) have attempted to solve the problem. Most of these agree with Pfeffer’s idea. The latest work of which I am aware is that done by Neilson-Jones (8), who carried out exhaustive tests with roots of Seakale—Crambe maritima, None of the work, so far as I have gleaned, has been carried out on Casuarina paludosa. (Sieb., in Spreng. Syst., i11., 803.) Vochting (9) performed transplantation experiments with cubes of beetroot, and in this investigation methods somewhat resembling those of Vochting were used. TECHNIQUE. Portions of the bark of Casuarina paludosa were taken off the stem, reversed, regrafted and allowed to grow. After growth had taken place from the bark, experiments were carried out with the shoots and finally sections of the graft were examined. MeEtitop oF GRAFTING. This part of the work was carried out by Professor Ewart in August, 1927, The tree was a young seedling about four years old, growing in the System Garden in the Melbourne University grounds. It was in the open without any particular protection from the elements. Portions of the bark, 3 inches by 2 inches, were removed, taking, as far as practicable, the cambium, but not liting any of the wood tissues. ‘Ihe removed pieces were reversed, reapplied, the edges covered with grafting-wax and bound firmly against the trunk. The top of the tree was then removed, causing abundant formation of adventitious buds all over the main trunk, including the grafted portions, although there was only a limited formation on these. Only two of the 354 normal shoots were allowed to develop, and two or three on each graft of the bark. Of the latter, five developed fully and formed junctions with the wood of the tree. At the same time, some bark was removed but not regrafted, the wounds being smeared with grafting-wax. This was done in order to sec if any develop- ment took place from scraps of cambium which may have been left on the wood. As no development took place, it can reasonably be concluded that it was the same in the case of the buds, 1.e., that development took place from the bark, not from a fragment of cambium which may have been left on the wood of the stem at the time of removal of the bark. Fig, 1. - General view of upper portion of the tree, showing normal (top) and “inverted” shoots and parts from which the bark was removed. METHOD oF GROWING THE SHOUTS, Strong, healthy shoots were selected from norma! and inverted branches. Whilst they were still on the tree, the upper side of approximately similar-sized shoots were marked with indian ink. Shoots were cut off and passed through 355 holes in corks which were fastened into glass vials containing tap water. The vials were placed in various positions, the normal and reversed being placed in similar positions according to the marked side as follows :-— Some were placed vertical with the “root-pole” in water; others vertical with the “‘shoot-pole” in water. Some were placed horizontally, half having the marked side uppermost, the other half having it downwards, The specimens held vertically were placed under bell jars, together with an open dish of water to keep the air moist. The horizontal specimens were placed in large gas jars lying on their sides, all held in position with plasticine plugs. The ends of the jars were closed with vaselined ground-glass plates. The atmosphere in these jars was kept moist by a small amount of water being intro- duced into them. METHOD OF SECTIONING TITE GRAFT. The whole of one graft was sawn off the trunk and sawn into small portions for sectioning (see fig. 2 for pieces). Sections of pieces 1, 2, 5, and 6 were examined, thus showing longitudinal and transverse relations of the wood fibres in the graft wood and stem wood. The sections were hand cut and for clearer study were stained with safranin and light green. The graft was removed from the tree eight months after it had been set. RESULTs. APPEARANCE OF THE TREE, On wounds covered with grafting-wax, no growth took place. The shoots from the inverted grafts grew downwards, but turned up at their outer ends, in this respect varying in no way from some normal shoots (many of which developed after removal of the graft, and were then allowed to grow), which grew more or less vertically downwards for about a foot and had sub-branches which grew outwards but slightly downwards, turning up at the ends. In all cases, however, the shoots from the graft grew downwards, whilst the normal shoots growing down were in the minority. GROWTH OF SHOOTS. ‘The growth of shoots gave no results whatever. Despite care and the pro- vision of moist conditions, the shoots all died after about a month and were then attacked by various fungi. This part of the experiment was first started on April 7, 1928, but after non-success, new shoots were not set up till Spring, on September 6. Billardteri . glaucescens . crenatum . ovaliun . fruiticulosum Boronia caerulescens B, inornata Correa rubra Phebalium pungens P, glandulosum P. bullatum .. Microcybe pauciflora M. multiflora Geijera linearifoha Comesperma Scoparium Phyllanthus calycinus P. lacunarius : P. Fuernrohrit Adriana Klotsschu Euphorbia australis E. eremophila Poranthera microphryla P. triandra Beyeria opaca B. Leschenaulii Bertya Mitchellit Stackhousia mongyna Heterodendron olaeifolium Dodonaea viscosa . attenuata . cuncata . Baueri D. bursariifolia . hexandra . lobulata . stenozyga humilis Pomaderis racemosa P. obcordata Spuridium phylicoides NENNNS Soy yHooy Form. ZLZZLZAZZAZAZS! gore eo Ome ez eee ees wo mM ra mmm MoM Pm OM al tal mo MAK KM MM YM KM ” 4 HRM MM OM Rm Om Om KM KKM OM OM Peo Pe ome MMMM MM MH MMM OK OOM OM OO mM OO OM m4 aes! AM me ww MM KM nm aK ia! KM MK Km OM S. eriocephalum S. subochreatum Cryptandra leucophracia = C tomentosa C. amara C. propinqua Lavatera plebeja Plagianthus glomeratus P. Berthae beh Sida corrugata S. intricata S. virgata S. petrophila Abutilon Theophrasti Hisbiscus Krichauffianus .. A. Farrage .. A, Huegelit .. Lasiopetalum discolor L. Behrit L. Baueri L, Schulzanii Hibbertia sericea H. paeninsularis H, stricta. A. Billardieri A. virgata Frankenia fruiticulosa HAybanthus floribundus Pimelea glauca P. microcephala P. flava Pimelea trichostachya P. Williamsonit P. micrantha P. octophylla P. phylicoides P. ammocharis Baeckea crassifolia B, ericaea B. Behrit Lepiospermum coriaceum Callistemon ruqulosus C. brachyandrus Melaleuca decussata M. acuminata M. pubescens M. uncinata .. AM. pauperiflora .. Eucalyptus diversifolia . Behriana .. me odorata . leplophylla oleosa . Flocktoniae angulosa .. . dumosa . incrassala calycogona . gracilis * Micromyrtus ciliata ss Es ft Thrypiomene Miqueliana . : Calythrix tetragona Londonia Behrit L. aurea Halorrhagis teucrioides HA. hetrophylia ot me tial me MMM “ nw HK mn mM MMM KK mM OM Om OM OOM OM mM mm wo mM MHRA KS AO OO OO ” ra) MMMM MK Me OM i i i i | ae MM * amo eM A mo Mo MMM OO 4AM MM mo Eta) eral Moo MM OM a ee 376 Growth Form. A. mucronata aa Sn A, ciliata FT. acutangula Hi. odontocarpus Hydrocotyle medicaginoides H. callicarpa oF igh AL. capillaris Didiscus pusillus D, cyanopetalus D. ornatus Bupleurum semicompositum Styphelia exarrhena ee Astroloma conostephioides Lissanthe strigosa .. Leucopogon cordifolius Ly rufus 4 L. Woodsii .. . Acrotriche cordata Brachyloma ericoides Jasminum lineare Mitrasacme paradoxa Loganta recurva L. ovata Sebaca ovata x =m ba Sarcostemma australe is Ae wo N Cressa cretica Halgania cyanea Af. lavendulacea Helioptropum curassavicum Lappula concava ‘ Eritrichium australasicum Rochelia plurisepala Dicrastylis verticillata Ajuga asutralis Teucrium racemosum T. sessiliflorum Prostranthera spinosa P. aspalathoides PL. microphylla Westringia rigida .. W. angustifoha Solanum simile S. esuriale S. hystrix Lycium australe Nicotiana suaveolens Duboisia Hopwoodti Anthocercis anisantha A, myosotidea Morgania glabra Veronica distans V. plebeja Euphrasia collina Myaporum montanum M. deserts M. viscosum M. platycarpum .. are Eremophila PPOs Pit de . Shaertit a om longifolia dtvaricata crassifolia W eldii parviflora polyelada Behriana .. maculala SRPRpr mpg ‘Th oA eK MAK AM OM ot od Ait cia| mA mM ad aM MM OM mM a ee mM AM MM MM OM OM Mmm MMM MM OM mM aM AMOK mM ee ee ee ee & MM MM OO MO OM OOS we mM OM i i rm mo mM moe rie Growth t | Form. Y M E | s N E. serrulata .. M | x | | x £, scoparia .. M x x x | x. E. alternifolia M x x x E. glabra M x x x x Opercularia varia Ch x x Asperula scoparia .. H x x A. conferta .. H x x Galinm Gaudichaudii Ch x x x x G. umbrosum Ch x x x x Wahlenbergia gracilis Th x x x x Goodenia primulacea H x x x x G. geniculata H x x x x x G, affinis H x x x x G. robusta Ch x x x | G. varia ; Ch x x x | G. pinnalifida Th x x x x G. pusilliflora Th x x x x G. glauca Ch x x G. subintegra Ch x x Velleia paradoxa Th x x x x V. connata Th x Scaevola spinescens H x x x x S. aemula H x x x S. Hnearis Ch x x | Dampiera marifolia Ch x D. rosmarinifolia Ch i. D. lanceolata Ch x x Brachycome goniocarpa Th x x B. pachyptera Th | x x x B neglecta Thi] x x x x B. exilis Th x x x x B. debilis Th x x x «| B. purpusilla H x x x x Minuria leptophylla Ch x x x | x M. Cunninghami Ch x x x } x M. integerrima Ch >. s x M. suadifolia Ch x x x x Calotis auretfolia .. Ch | x x C. cymbacantha Th i a ; ox C. erinacea .. Thi x | x x x C. hispidula .. MS Th xf & x x Vittadinia triloba Ch > Ss x | x V. megacephala H Px x Olearia pannosa H x x x x O. ramulosa N x x x O subspicata N x x O. floribunda N x x x x O lepidophylla N/| x x x O. exiguifolia N x x O, pimeleoides N x x x O, magniflora N x x O, Muelleri .. Ch x x x O. calcarea .. Ch x x O. decurrens Ch x x x O. glutinosa N | x x O. teretefoha N i oe x O. Hookert .. N x O. picridifolia iS N x x Centipeda thespidioides Ch x x Elacanthus pusillus Th x x x x x Erichthites picridifolia Th x x x E, quadridentata Th x x x x | ox E, hispidula .. : H| x x x 3c 7 ile -3e Senecio brachyglossus Th x x x x | [ S. magnificus N x 1 x S. odoratus .. N x x x x x N x | x x | x Cratystylis conocephala Growth + + “yy Form, Y M E Ss t N Epaltes Tater Th | x x x E. australis .. “s Th x | x Stuartina Muelleri .. ae Th x x x | x Guaphalium luteo-album .. Th{| x x x x x G. indutum .. Th x x x x G. indicum Th x x Cassinia aculeata N x C. laevis N x x C. companata N x x | x C. arcuata ech N x x x Helipterum floribundum Th{ x x x IT, Sturtianum = Th x x x x A. polygalifolium .. Th x x x H. albicans .. Th x x x H. variablile Th x x x H. Jessenii .. Th x x x x | A, pygmacum : Th x x x | ox A, Humboldtianum Th x | H. Haigi Th x | A. tenellum Th x Hi. corymbiflorum .. Th x x x x x A. moschatum Th x x A, uniflorum Th x x HT, Tictkensti Th x x x Hf. laeve Th x x x H. australe .. A Th x x x Ixiolaena leptolepis Ch x x I, tomentosa , Ch x x x x Helichyrsum obtusifolium Ch x x x x HA. Basxteri as Ch x x x x A, leucopsidium Chi x x x x II. adenophorum Ch x x Ht. scorpiodes Ch x x x HA. apiculatum Ch{| x x x x x AA. semipapposum Ch x x x x x H. Tepper .. Th x x x x HI. retusum .. A N x x x Leptorrhynchus squamalus Ch x | x L. tetrachactus Ch x x x x | LL. medius Th x x x x L. Waitzia P Th x x x x | Waitzia acuminata Th x x x | x Humea cassiniiformis N x Fl. pholidota N | x lxodia achilleoides N x x x x Podolepis acuminata Ch x x P. canescens Th x x x P. rugata ‘ Ch x x x x P. capillaris .. Th x x x Alhrixia tenella. Th x x x x Myriocephalus rhizocephalus Th x x x i M. Stuart .. . Th x x x Angianthus fomentosus Th| x x x i ox A. brachypappus Th | x x A, aca reas Th x x A. striclus Th x x x x A. pusillus Th x x x Gnephosis skirrophora Th x x x G. cyathopappa Th x x Eriochylamys Behrit Th x x x x Calocephalus Drummondit Th x x xX x C. Sonderi Ee Th x Guaphaloides ulinigosum #s Thi x x x x Craspedia uniflora .. Ch x x x x C. pleiocephala Th x x Chthonocephalus pseudevax Th x x x Microseris scapigera G x x x x 379 ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (Incorporated) FOR THE YEAR NoveMBER 1, 1928, tro OctToBer 31, 1929. OrDINARY MEETING, NOVEMBER 8, 1928. Proressor Harvey JOHNSTON was in the chair, and 32 members were preseut. Apologies were received from the President and Dr. Fenner. The minutes of the previous meeting were read and confirmed. NoMINATIONS.—James Davidson, D.Sc., Entomologist, Waite Institute, Adelaide; Eugene McLaughlin, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Laboratory, Adelaide Hospital; Sidney Frederick Tee, Laboratory Assistant, Adelaide Hospital. Sir Josep Verco Mepat.—The following conditions were agreed to, and carried by the meeting (conditions 1, 2, 3 and 4 having been carried at the previous meeting) :-— 5. That on the other side of the medal there be a surrounding wreath of eucalypt. 6. That the words “Awarded by the Royal Society of South Australia,” the name of the recipient, and the year be engraved on each medal, within the eucalypt wreath. 7. That the Council select the person to whom it is suggested that the medal shall be awarded, and that the name shall be submitted to the Fellows at an Ordinary Meeting to confirm, or otherwise, the selection of the Council by ballot or otherwise. 8. That the medal be awarded for distinguished scientific work published by a member of the Royal Society of South Australia. DEMONSTRATION.—Professor Harotp Davies., Mus. Doc., gave a recital of records of Aboriginal songs taken during the Adelaide University Anthropological Expedition to Koonibba in August, 1928. Exuipits—Mr. Epwin Asupy, F.L.S., exhibited some chitons collected by Mr. W. J. Kimber in the Capricorn Group, Queensland, in 1927. Amongst them were two new species, one a most remarkable form with sculpture unsurpassed by any other species. Its nearest relative is known only from a single specimen from Darnley Island, Torres Strait, near Papua, and both these two unique examples are related to a species found in the Philippine Islands, Chiton pulcher- rimus. The Capricorn shell differs chiefly from the example from Torres Strait in being ornamented with a coarse net-work sculpture, which is not shown in the figure of the type from Darnley Island. The other new species, which ts being named after the finder, is a highly polished shell practically without sculpture ; its true characters were only revealed on disarticulation. Also a number of speci- mens of Tonicia shirleyi, a genus of chiton not found in South Australian waters, delicately tesselated in colour patterns of shades of pink, tinged with green. This chiton is peculiar in having developed in the shell a series of sense organs resemb- ling “eyes.” He also showed amongst other forms collected by Mr. Kimber, in the 380 Capricorn Group, another form also possessing eyes and a girdle covering consist- ing of coarse calcareous spines. Mr, Kimner gave an account of his experiences in collecting chitons on the Coral Reef of the Capricorn and Bunker Groups, and exhibited Cymbium flammeum from North West Island, Capricorn Group, with its egg nidus and fully-formed young shells. Professor HArvey Jounsron showed a tapeworm from the emperor penguin which gives rise to a large number of cysts in the intestines of the bird; in these cysts the scolices are enclosed. Miss V. ‘TayLor showed the egg nidus of a mollusc. ORDINARY MEETING, Aprit 11, 1929, Tue Presipent (Dr. L. Keith Ward) was in the chair, and 34 Fellows were present. The Minutes of the previous meeting were read and confirmed. Sir JosepH Verco MepaL.—THeE Presipenr submitted for endorsement by ‘the general meeting the name of Professor Walter Howchin, who had been chosen by the Council as the first recipient of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal. Dr. Roczrs moved that the recommendation of the Council be endorsed by the Socicty, He congratulated the Council on the association of names of Verco and Howchin, two mainstays of the Socicty for many years. Professor Howchin’s association with the Society dates back to 1883. He has been President, Editor, and Govern- ing Director, a great geologist, and an eminent author. Mr. Ham seconded the motion. Professor Sir EpGzwortH Davin said that he esteemed it a great privi- lege to add his appreciation to what had been said, He and Howchin started to collaborate in geology 35 years ago. Professor Ilowchin, in all that time, has been most generous in providing material, and even unpublished information. Dr. Gregory, of Glasgow, gives Howchin the credit for his discovery of evidence of early glaciation which has stood the test of time better than ony other. Dr. FENNER moved, and Professor Harvey JouHNsTown seconded, that the selection be decided by a show of hands. Carried unanimously. THE Presipent then put the original motion, which was carried by a show of hands. Tue Presmpent, on behalf of the Council, expressed himself as being extremely gratified at the support of the meeting. Nomination.—John Kingsley ‘Taylor, Commonwealth Soil Survey Officer, Waite Agricultural Research Institute. EvLecrions.—James Davidson, D.Sc., Entomologist, Waite Agricultural Re- search Institute; Eugene Mclaughlin, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Laboratory, Adelaide Hospital; Sidney Frederick Tee, Laboratory Assistant, Adelaide Hospital, were unanimously elected as Fellows. Tue Presipenr drew attention to the new isstte of Instructions to Authors. Professor Harvey Jonunston asked the meeting to join with him in con- eratulating Dr. Fenner in being awarded the David Syme prize and medal for research. Sir E. Davin, in supporting, said that in N.S.W., Fenner’s work on Physiography has filled them with admiration, Tir Presipent said that the Society, as a body, unanimously congratulated Dr, Fenner winning the prizes, and that this would be incorporated in the minutes. THE PRESIDENT sought for confirmation of his action in electing Mr. Glaston- bury as Auditor for the purpose of securing the Government Grant. Carried unanimously. ParEers— 1. “Further Notes on the Fossils of the Adelaide Series (Lipalian),” by Professor Sir EnceworrH Davin, F.R.S, Illustrated by lantern slides. 2. “The Vegetation Map of South Australia,” by Professor J. A. Prescott, M.Sc. 381 3. “Geological Notes, Hundred of Adams, Flinders Ranges,” by Ratpx W. Seenit, M.A., B.Sc. 4, “The Australian Species of Cidarids, particularly of the Genus Phylla- canthus and their Distribution along the Coast of Australia,” by TH. Mortensen, Copenhagen. Communicated by Prof. T. Harvey Johnston. 5. “Notes on the Larval Trombidiid Mite (Trombicula hirsti L. Sambon) causing the ‘Scrub Itch’ of North Queensland and the Coorong,” by STANLEY Hirst. 6. “Some Fossil Remains from the Adelaide Series of South Australia,” by F. Crrapman, A.LS, Exutsits.—Professor Harvey Jounston exhibited specimens of Limulus. Mr. Mountrorp, “Casts of Petroglyphs,” including one very large one of a supposed crocodile’s head from Bimbowie Creek. OrpINARY MEETING, May 9, 1929, Tue Present (Dr. L. Keith Ward) was in the chair, and 41 Fellows were present. Lady Verco was present as a visitor. Nominations.—As Fellows: Bernard Charles Cotton, South Australian Museum; Frank Mitton Angel, Accountant, 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside; John Whinham Hosking, Dentist, 77 Sydenham Road, Norwood; and as Associate: William Paton Cleland, Science Student, University, Adclaide. Erection.—John Kingsley Taylor, Commonwealth Soil Survey Officer, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. Unanimously elected a Fellow. Professor Prescort asked the Society to join him in congratulating the Presi- dent (Dr. L., Keith Ward) on his appointment to the Coal Commission, THE Presiwent thanked the Fellows for their congratulations. PRESENTATION OF THE “Sir JosePpH Verco Mepat.”-——THeE PRESIDENT re- marked that he was very glad that Sir Joseph was able to come in person to make the presentation to Professor Walter Howchin. A short address was given by THE PRESIDENT on the foundation and objects of the medal. THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL. The Council, on August 23, 1928, having resolved to recommend to the Fellows of the Society that a medal should be founded to give honorary distinction for scientific research, and that it should be designated the Sir Joseph Verco Medal, was submitted to the Society at the evening meeting of October 11, 1928, and at a later meeting, held on November 8, 1928, when the recommendation of the Council was confirmed on the following terms :— REGULATIONS, XI.—“The medal shall be of bronze, and shall be known as the Sir Joseph Verco Medal, in recognition of the important service that gentleman has rendered to the Royal Society of South Australia. On the obverse side of the medal shall be these words: ‘The Sir Joseph Verco Medal of the Royal Society of South Australia,’ surrounding the modelled portrait of Sir Joseph Verco, while on the reverse side of the medal there shall be a surrounding wreath of eucalypt, with the words: ‘Awarded LOS FT pire Ne vgp cesanizet sath aiewieth Lesianies th basse taeodAhs ts for Research in Science,’ the name of the recipient, and the year of the award. The Council shall select the person to whom it is suggested that the medal shall be awarded, and that name shall be submitted to the Fellows at an Ordinary Meeting to confirm, or otherwise, the selection of the Council, by ballot or show of hands. The medal shall be awarded for distinguished scientific work published by a Member of the Royal Society of South Australia.” 382 Tur First AWARD. The Council having nominated Professor Walter Howchin, F.G.S., as the first recipient of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal, his name was submitted to an Ordinary Meeting of the Fellows of the Society on April 11, 1929, and the nomination was heartily confirmed. Tur Preswent, Dr. L. Kerrir Warp, HAVING MADE THE ABOVE ANNOUNCEMENT, ApprEssep Proressor HowciIn IN THE FOLLOWING TERMS :?— “Professor Walter Howchin. “The Council of the Royal Society of South Australia, in nominating you as the first recipient of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal for scientific research, has found a unanimous acceptance of the nomination by the Fellows. “In making this award, the Society is recognising only the value of your scientific researches. Your long connection with the Society, and the services that you have rendered to it in different capacities, cannot be forgotten, though they have not been the cause of your selection for this honour. “During the 48 years of your residence in South Australia, you have been con- tinuously active in the work of unravelling the geological history of the State. Many of your most important contributions have been published in our own Transactions; and the Society has been proud to print these records of your work in stratigraphy; physiography; structural geology; palacontology; and, above all, in palaeoglaciology. “This work, on which you are still engaged, has been of major importance in tracing the geological history of a large portion of South Australia; and much of it has been carried out under conditions that give proof of your unquenchable enthusiasm and determination. “The Society, in according to you the greatest honour that lies in its power to bestow, trusts that you will long find health and strength to carry on the investi- gations with which your name is associated throughout the geological world.” NT PRESENTATION MADE BY SIR JOSEPH VERCO, “Mr. President and Fellows of the Royal Society. “Let me apologise for my long absence from the meetings of the Society and its Council. This is my first evening function for nine months. “May I first thank the Society for associating me with the medal it has struck. My ‘image and superscription’ will be an honour in perpetuity. > “I have also to thank our President (one of whose perquisites this should be) for calling upon me to make this first presentation. 383 “Let me inform you that this is not Professor Howchin’s first experience of the kind, for he has already received the Clarke Memorial Medal, presented by the Royal Society of New South Wales. “Dr. Ward has just given us, in bare outline, the scientific work for which Professor Howchin is deemed worthy of the present honour. And our own publi- cations contain evidence of the large amount of scientific work he has done. “We have no doubt, therefore, about the propriety of the first presentation of our medal to Professor Howchin for his research in Science. “But other considerations make this presentation a pleasure as well as a propriety. “For 46 years his name has been on our roll, Only two Fellows precede him, namely, Mr, George Goyder, 49 years; and myself, 51. And during all that period he has been a great asset to the Society in various ways. It is questionable whether any Fellow has been more regular, more punctual or more helpful than he. “For several years he was our representative on the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum and Art Gallery, and for a very long period has acted as Editor of our Transactions, Proceedings and Reports, occupying this very difficult, onerous and delicate position with an enviable capacity, care and assiduity. “And ail this makes the presentation as pleasant as it is appropriate. “Professor Howchin, on behalf of the Royal Society of South Australia, | present to you this medal for your research in Science, and heartily congratulate you as its first recipient.” In REpty, Professor Howchin, after thanking the President and Sir Joseph Verco for their kindly references to his scientific accomplishments and association with the Royal Society of South Australia, said that the work in which he had been engaged had been a great pleasure to him. It was gratifying to know that it had received the Society’s recognition, and he felt it a great honour to he chosen as the first recipient of the Society’s medal. The pleasure he felt was greatly enhanced in that he had the privilege to receive the medal at the hands of Sir Joseph himself. The name with which the medal was associated was very dear to him. Sir Joseph Verco was not only the oldest member of the Society but is the only living repre- sentative of those who constituted the membership of the Society, in its earliest stage, when it was known as The Philosophical Society of Adelaide. Sir Joseph had enriched the Society by his wise counsels, administrative ability and valuable scientific communications, as well as by his financial support and influence. — It was through Sir Joseph’s generous example and personal influence that the endowment fund had been established which would be a guarantee towards mecting the costs, to a certain extent, of the Society’s publications in perpetuity. The medal would stand for all time as a memorial of the great services he had rendered the Society. The Professor stated that this was the fourth medal he had been awarded for scientific research or service. Of all these he placed the highest value upon the one he had just received. It was an expression of con- fidence from his more immediate scientific associates and that kindly relation- ship that had existed for more than 40 years, When he joined the Society in 1883, it had had an existence for only six years, the meetings were held in an upper room of the old Institute Building; the attendances were small, and the library of the Society was contained in a cupboard with closed doors. The income of the Society was little over £200, including £90 as the Government Grant, and the cost of printing and publishing the Transactions of the Society was only £67. In contrast with this, last year’s published balance-sheet showed printing and publishing costs amounting to £537, with a balance in hand. The Professor stated 384 that in 1884 he was elected a member of the Council, an office that he had filled ever since. In 1885 he was elected Vice-President and Editor. Professor Tate in that year, for personal reasons, resigned the editorship, which extended over a period of four years. During this interval, and two subsequent years, and on Professor Tate’s death, in 1901, the editorship passed again into his (Professor Howchin’s) hands, and has continued so to the present day, making a total of 34 years. The Royal Society (the Professor stated) had generously published 55 of his papers in the ‘lransactions, and he still had a few more on hand which require some finishing touches before publication. He was very grateful for the uniform kindness he had received from the officers and members of the Society, and expressed the hope that his happy connection with the Society would be con- tinued for many years yet. PAPERS-— 1. “Variations of the Hydrogen Ion Concentration in the Neighbourhood - of the Estuary of the River Murray,” by T. Brattsrorp RoBERTSON. Tue Present said that Fellows should be thankful to Professor Robertson for introducing an important and interesting subject. Pro- fessor Prescott said that the paper opened up a new field of work, and hoped that Zoologists and Botanists will follow the lead. Lakes at the mouth of the Murray are promising localities for ccological studies. Professor Harvey JoHNston remarked on the Algae in the Coorong and their products of decomposition; also, that while mullet were abundant far up the Coorong, the mulloway was restricted to its open- ing near the Murray mouth. Mr. Hare remarked that estuarine forms in South Australia overlap a good deal on both sides, and that creatures like Pseudaphritis and fresh water crayfish are very adaptable. 2. “On the Probable Occurrence of Sturtian Tillite at Nairne and Mount Barker,” by Professor Water Howcuin, F.G.S. Mr. R. Lockuart Jack said the clue which led to the recognition of these deposits was a note “ice” on a manuscript map made by the late H. Y. L. Brown. 3. “Crustacea from Princess Charlotte Bay, North Queensland,” by Hereert M. HAte. 4, “Crustacea from Dirk Hartog Island, Western Australia,” by Hrrnert M. HALE. 5. “A New Xanthid Crab from South Australia,” by Dr, Mary J. RatuBun. (Communicated by IL. M. ITale.) Exurpits.—Professor Prescort exhibited a Soil Survey Map of Block L at Renmark, with an Aerial Map of the same area. Mr, Artur M. Lea exhibited larvae, eggs, and mature insects of the cactus moth, Cactoblastic cactorurri, which has been introduced into Queensland and New South Wales irom South America, and doing an immense amount of good in destroying the prickly pear in the Eastern States. So far it does not seem to have been seriously attacked by any parasite in Australia, and if this state continues there is every prospect of its reducing the prickly pear to harmless proportions. Also specimens of the dried fruit moth, Plodia interprunctella, for many years one of the most scrious pests attacking dried fruits and meals. Recently Mr. H. Showell (one of our Fellows) devised a treatment of dried fruits with a petrol extract that effectively protects them against attacks of the insects, without in any way rendering the fruit dis- tasteful or unsightly, as evidenced by an exhibit of four samples of sultanas from the 1927 crop, that showed no signs whatever of the work of the dried fruit moth or other insects. 385 j Orpinary MEETING, JUNE 13, 1929. Dr. CHARLES FENNER, Vice-President, was in the chair, and 29 members were present. Dr. FENNeER tendered an apology for the absence of the President, Dr. L. Keith Ward, who was out of the State in connection with the Coal Commission. Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held on May 9, 1929, were read and confirmed. ELECTIONS.— . 1. Of an Acting Honorary Secretary. Professor J. B. Cleland nominated Mr. Ralph Walter Segnit., seconded by Mr. J. F. Bailey. There being no other nomination, Mr. Segnit was declared elected. It was agreed, on the proposition of Professor Harvey Johnston, that the thanks of the Society be recorded for the valuable services rendered by Dr. Robert Pulleine as the Honorary Secretary, and that good wishes be extended to Dr. Puilleine on his journey abroad. It was proposed by Mr. B. S. Roacu, seconded by Professor Harvey JOHNSTON, that all cheques on the funds of the Society be signed by the Acting Honorary Secretary, Mr, Ralph W. Segnit. Carried. 2. Of Fellows. Frank Mitton Angel, Accountant, 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside; Bernard Charles Cotton, Assistant Conchologist, S.A. Museum; John Whinham Hosking, Dentist, 77 Sydenham Road, Nor- wood, and 3. Of Associate. William Paton Cleland, Science Student, University, Adelaide. After a ballot had been taken, the above-mentioned gentlemen were declared elected. VisiTor.—The Chairman extended a welcome to Mrs. GRACE, of Wentworth, N.S.W., who is interested in aboriginal matters and stone culture. SuGGESTIONS For AuTHOoRs.—Professor W. Howcutn drew the attention of the Fellows to the “Suggestions for the Guidance of Authors,” as published in the Proceedings of the Society, vol. lii., 1928, p. 265. Professor J. B. CLeLanp moved that the congratulations of the Society be tendered to Mr. J. M. Black on his completion and publication of the “Flora of South Australia.” The motion was seconded by Mr. J. F. Baitey, who referred to the great value of this work to the Botanist. Carried. Mr. J. M. Brack thanked the members for the expressions tendered, Papers— 1. “A Census of the Marine Algae of South Australia,” by A. 1. S. Lueas, M.A., B.Sc., of Sydney, communicated by Professor Cleland. He said the paper included about 300 species of marine algae from the coast of South Australia, with an indication of the districts where they are to be found. New species are described. Specimens from the coast of the Great Australian Bight and Kangaroo Island would be very welcome to Mr. Lucas for further investigation. 2. “The Fauna of Dirk Hartog Island—Aves and Polyplacophora,” by Epwin Asupy, F.L.S. Exwinirs.—Dr. FENNeER exhibited a map of the River Murray on which is detailed the essential happenings of the Discovery and Exploration of Captain Charles Sturt, 1829-30, which has been prepared by the Historical Memorial Com- mittee in connection with the Sturt Centenary Celebrations. Mr, Asipy showed 386 two samples of a very rare chiton named Ornithochiton ashbyi, from Port Wil lunga, collected there by Mr. W. C. Johnston last Easter. Only five examples of this shell have previously been found. It is the only species of chiton found in our State that possesses the organs known as “eyes.” He also showed a series of the rare Ischnochiton ptychius. These show beautiful patterns of varied colours, of which pink is the most striking. They were collected at the same place and time by Mr. Johnston, and are the most beautiful series of this species yet obtained. Mr. A. M. Lea exhibited a series of interesting insects and beetles from New Guinea. Orpinary MEETING, JuLy 11, 1929. Dr. Cuartes Fenner, V.P., was in the chair, and 47 Fellows were present. Tur CILAIRMAN welcomed the Patron of the Society, His Excellency Brig.- Gen. Sir A. G. A. Hore-Ruthven, V.C., K.C.M.G,, C.B., D.S.O., who was attended by the Hon. Hugh Grosvenor, A.D.C,, to the meeting. His ExceLrency, in reply, said that he was looking forward with interest to the proceedings of the evening. Owing to the special nature of the business on the agenda, Mr, B. 5. Roach moved, and Professor Ricuarpson seconded: “That the Minutes of the previous Ordinary Meeting, held June 13, 1929, be taken as read.” ‘Tye CHAIRMAN intimated that he had previously read the Minutes, and gave an assurance that they were a faithful record of that meeting. Carried. THE CHAIRMAN extended a welcome to Professor Sir Edgeworth David Honorary Fellow, to the meeting. Congratulations were then extended by Tre Cuarrman to Professor T. Harvey Johnston, on behalf of the Society, on his election to the staff of Sir Douglas Mawson in connection with the British Antarctic Expedition, Nominations.—Lance Strother Walters, Technologist, 157 Buxton Street, North Adelaide; Alec. Gordon Paull, B.A., B.Sc., Head Master, 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate; Harold G. Pank, Optician, 75 Rundle Street, Adelaide; Martin Richard Freney, Geologist, 14 Holden Street, Kensington Park; Martin Raphael Freney, University Student, 14 Holden Street, Kensington Park. PAPERS— 1. “Notes on the Geology of the Great Pyap Bend (Loxton), River Murray Basin, and Remarks on the Geological History of the River Murray,” by Professor WALTER Flowcnin, 2. “The Volcanic Soil of Mount Gambier,” by Professor ], A. PRescort and C. 5. Piper. 3. “A Geographical Enquiry into the Growth, Distribution and Movement of Population in South Australia, 1836-1927,” by CrarLes FENNER, D.Sc. Exutprr—Tne CHAIRMAN exhibited a book from the library of the Royal Geographical Society of S.A, which had been the personal property of King Charles II,, the founder of the Royal Society in England. Professor Sir Epcrwortit Davin referred to the value of the three papers presented, and then moved a vote of thanks to the authors. In supporting the remarks of Sir Edgeworth, His ExcreLrtency THE GovERNoR congratulated the lecturers on the clear manner in which the papers had been presented. He deemed it a privilege to have been present, and con- gratulated the Society on the splendid work it was doing. He expressed the hope that he would have an opportunity to be present at a future date to take part in their discussions. The vote of thanks was carried with acclamation. 387 OrDINARY MEETING, Aucust 8, 1929, Owing to the absence of the President and both Vice-Presidents, Mr. A. M. Lea was elected as Chairman. Twenty-three members were present. The Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held July 11, 1929, were read and confirmed. Nominations.—The following nominations were read:—William Christie, M.B., B.S., Medical Inspector of Schools, Education Department; Everard F. S. Fricke, B.Ag.Sc., Agronomist, Waite Agricultural Research Institute; Frederick Clarence Martin, B.A., Teacher, Technical High School, Thebarton. Erections,—The ballot having been taken, the following were unanimously elected :—Lance Strother Walters, Technologist, 157 Buxton Street, North Ade- laide; Alec. Gordon Paull, B.A., B.Sc., Head Master, 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate; Harold G, Pank, Optician, 75 Rundle Street, Adelaide; Martin Richard Freney, Geologist, 14 Holden Street, Kensington Park; Martin Raphael Freney, University Student, 14 Holden Street, Kensington Park; Charles William Laub- man, Optician, 75 Rundle Street, Adelaide. PaPERS— 1. “Australian Acanthocephala, No. 1. Census of Recorded Hosts and Parasites,” by Professor Harvey Jonnsron and Errre W. DeLanp, B.Sc, and 2. “Australian Acanthocephala, No. 2,” by Professor Harvey JouNSTON and Errize W, Devanp, B.Sc. 3. “Magmatic Differentiation at Mannum, South Australia,” by A. R. ALDERMAN, M.Sc. “Notes on Some Miscellaneous Coleoptera, VII.,” by A. M. Lea. “Unique Example of Aboriginal Rock Carving,” by C. P. Mountrorp. The Rev. J. C. Jennison said that this design may have been brought down from Central Queensland (the nearest place where crocodiles are now found, to the locality mentioned by Mr. Mountford), in the form of a “legend and memory” by natives. He agreed that 1,000 miles was a long way to carry actual remains. Many examples of a similarity in speech are recorded between different tribes of the Musgrave Ranges and the Far North. Exuinit.—Mr. Lea exhibited a collection of Orthoptera from New Guinea, including a Green Katydid larger than any other insect in the Museum from that country. Also a collection of insects from the Anglo-Egyptian Soudan presented by Sir Joseph Verco. Sars Orptnary MEETING, SEPTEMBER 12, 1929, Dr. CHARLES FENNER, Vice-President, occupied the chair, and 33 members were present. The Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held August 8, 1929, were read and confirmed. CORRESPONDENCE,—T11E CHAIRMAN read a letter from the Secretary of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, drawing attention to the appoint- ment of a Draughtsman and Artist. Professor CLELAND then moved that God speed and best wishes be extended to Sir Douglas Mawson and Professor IT’. Harvey Johnston on their journey, and wishing them success in connection with the Expedition in the “Discovery” to the Antarctic. Professor Cleland referred to the thoroughness with which Sir Douglas had fitted out the ship, and to the qualities of Professor Harvey Johnston as a Scientist. 388 The motion was seconded by Mr. Mapican, who briefly outlined the route to be followed round the Antarctic coast. The motion was supported by THE CHairman, and was carried unanimously. Professor Harvey Jounston thanked the Fellows for kind references to Sir Douglas Mawson and himself, and said that he appreciated the honour and confidence reposed in him by Sir Douglas and his committee in asking him to take charge of the Biological Section. Tue CHAIRMAN welcomed Mr. Madigan on his return from his Aerial Survey Expedition across part of Central Australia. The members passed a resolution that a letter of congratulation be sent to Mr. W. J. Adey on his appointment to the position of Director of Education to this State. Tue CHatrRMAN extended a welcome to two new Fellows, Mr. Richard Martin Freney and his son. The Rev. J. C. Jennison moved the following :—“That in view of the urgent need of anti-scorbutic foods for the aborigines of Ilermansburg District, requests be made to the Commonwealth Government to continue the free transport of fruit and vegetables (generously and gratuitously contributed by the growers), for the relief of the sufferers, over the Commonwealth Railway to Stuart, until further supplies be found unnecessary.” ; The motion was seconded by Mr Krmper, and supported by Professor CLELAND, Unanimously carried. Tur CHAIRMAN stated that Professor Cleland would like it announced that Mr. A. H. S. Lucas, who is engaged in the study of the Australian Marine Algae and who has undertaken to contribute a handbook on the South Australian species, has forwarded to him a number of identified species from this State, which may be consulted by anyone desirous of identifying a specimen. Exections.—A ballot having been taken, the following were unanimously elected as Fellows -—William Christie, M.B., B.S.; Everard F. S. Fricke, B.Ag.Se. ; Frederick Clarence Martin, B.A. PAPERS— 1. “On Crystal Forms of Pyromorphite and Stolzite,” by J. O. G. Giastongury, B.Sc, and I. J. Semmens, B.Sc. Communicated by C. T. Madigan, M.A., B.Sc. “Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 27,” by J. M. Biacx, “New Australian Lepidoptera,” by A. Jurrerts Turner, M.D., FES, Read by Arthur M. Lea, F.E.S. “An Interesting New ‘Thrips from Australia,” by Duprey MouLton. Communicated by Arthur M. Lea, F.E.S. “Notes on and Descriptions of Chalcid Wasps in the South Australian Museum,” by A. A. Grrautt, Communicated by Arthur M, Lea, F.E.S, “The Spreading Tendencies of Solutions of Various Acids and Salts upon a Clean Mercury Surface,” by R, G. Mitton, B.Sc, Commumi- cated by Roy S. Burdon, B.Sc. Exutsits.—Sir Doucias Mawson exhibited Fossil Algac from the Flinders Ranges, and said that the Algac Limestones cover a very wide area. ‘They are found in association above and below the Archaeocyathinae. Also below the Ordo- vician formation of the McDonnell Ranges. Predominant amongst the Algae is a Cryptozdon-like form, At Wooltana thick limestone beds above tillite, which have been regarded as equivalents of the Brighton limestones of the Adelaide Series are found to be of Algae origin. Owing to Sir Douglas Mawson being absent during the earlier part of the meeting, THE CHARMAN then addressed him A om = oP 389 and expressed the sentiments contained in the resolution passed during his absence that evening. Sir Douctas thanked the Fellows for the kind thought which prompted the motion. Ile referred to the coming journey, and detailed the probable route round the Antarctic coast from south of Africa to south of Aus- tralia which it was proposed to explore. There were to be no “land parties,” the expedition being a “Life on Ship.” He expected the “Discovery” to return to Australia early in April, 1930, calling at Albany, Adelaide and Melbourne. ANNUAL MEETING, Ocroser 10, 1929, The chair was occupied by the Vice-President, Dr. CHARLES FENNER, who apologised for the absence of the President, who was out of the State in connec- tion with the Coal Commission. Twenty-two members were present. Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held September, 12, 1929, were read and confirmed, ‘THE CHAIRMAN welcomed two new Fellows, Dr. William Christie and Mr. F.C. Martin. ANNUAL Revort.—TuHe Actinc Hon. Secrerary presented the Annual Report for the year ended September 30, 1929. It was moved by Mr. Bailey, seconded by Dr. Campbell, that the report be adopted. Carried. BALANCE SHEET—The Financial Statement and Balance Sheet were pre- sented by THE Hon. Treasurer. It was moved by Mr. Black, seconded by Dr. Christie, that the same be adopted. Carried. ELECTION OF OFFICERS FOR THE YEAR 1929-1930.— 1. President—Professor Howchin moved that Dr. L. Keith Ward be re-elected President for the coming year, pointing out that the Society had not had the full benefit of Dr. Ward’s valuable services owing to his absence from the State on other important business in connection with the Coal Commission. The nomination was seconded by Dr. Chas. Fenner, and carried unanimously. 2. Vice-Presidents—Professor T. Harvey Johnston and Dr. Chas. Fenner were re-elected Vice-Presidents. 3. Treasurer—Mr. B. S. Roach was unanimously re-elected Treasurer. 4. Members of Council—The two senior members, namely, Mr. Black and Professor J, A, Prescott, retired, but offered themselves for re-election. It was moved by Dr. Davidson, seconded by Mr. Elston, that Mr. Black and Professor Prescott be re-elected Members of the Council. Carried unanimously. 5. Auditors—Mr. W. Champion Hackett and Mr. O. Glastonbury were re- elected Auditors. It was agreed that a letter expressing the thanks of the Society be sent to Mr. Whitbread in recognition of his valuable services for the past 21 years as Hon. Auditor, Qn behalf of the President, Dr. L. Keith Ward, Mr. B. S. Roacw read an Obituary Notice of Professor Sir W. Baldwin Spencer, F.R.S. (see p. 391). It was meved and seconded that the same be printed in the Annual Proceed- ings. Carried. PapERS— , 1, “Australian Coleoptera, Part VI,” by ALBert H. Exsron, F.E.S. 2. “Floristics and Ecology of the Mallee,” by J. G. Woop, M.Sc. 3. “Polarity in Casuarina paludosa,” by T. T, Cotgunoun, B.Sc. Com- municated by J. G. Wood, M.Sc. 390 ANNUAL REPORT. FOR TUE YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1929. The interest shown by the Fellows in the proceedings during the year has been maintained. The average attendance at the meetings has been 35, a number which compares favourably with that of previous years. The Patron of the Society, His Excellency Brig.-Gen. Sir A. G. A. Hore- Ruthven, attended the Monthly Ordinary Meeting held on July 11, 1929. The President, Dr. L. Keith Ward, was appointed a member of the Coal Commission by the Commonwealth and New South Wales Governments. This necessitated his absence from the State from June to the end of the year. In his absence the chair was occupied by Dr. Charles Fenner, Vice-President, and at one meeting, in the absence of both Vice-Presidents, by Mr. Arthur M. Lea. An Expedition of great interest and which is now en route to the Antarctic, is led by Sir Douglas Mawson, F.R.S., who is a past President of the Society, The Council appointed Professor T. Harvey Johnston as the representative of the Society on the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum and Art Gallery. He resigned, however, before the completion of his term, owing to his departure for the Antarctic. Dr. Charles Fenner was appointed to fill the vacancy. . The Honorary Secretary, Dr, Robert Pulleine, was granted extended leave of absence, to enable him to undertake a journey. abroad, and Mr. Ralph W. Segnit was elected as the Acting Honorary Secretary. Mr. M. S. Hawker was appointed to represent the Society on the Fauna and Flora Board in place of Dr. Robert Pulleine, resigned. Congratulations were extended to Professor T, Harvey Johnston on his selection to the scientific staff of the British, Australian, and New Zealand Antarctic Expedition, which is led by Sir Douglas Mawson. Dr. Charles Fenner received the congratulations of the Society on having been awarded the David Syme Prize and Medal for Research, Early in the year the Fellows of the Society unanimously endorsed the pro- posal to found a Medal, to be awarded for Research by this Socicty. It is to be known as the Sir Joseph Verco Medal, in recognition of the eminent services rendered by Sir Joseph to this Society. Professor Walter Howchin, F.G.S., received the congratulations of the Society on being the first recipient of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal. (The addresses in connection with the presentation are printed in the Proceedings, p. 382.) Professor Sir T, W. Edgeworth David, F.R.S., an Honorary Fellow of the Socicty, attended two meetings during the year, On April 11 Sir Edgeworth presented a paper on “Further Notes on the Fossils of the Adelaide Series (Lipalian),” which he illustrated with lantern slides. Mr, C. T. Madigan, a Fellow of this Society, undertook an Aerial Survey Expedition over Lake Eyre and unknown parts of the Interior, under the auspices of the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia, S.A. Branch. The Board for Anthropological Research, Adclaide University, sent another Expedition to the Interior, in which the following Fellows took part :— Professor T. Harvey Johnston, Professor J. B. Cleland, Dr. T. 1D. Campbell, Professor E. Harold Davies, Dr. H. K. Fry, Mr. Herbert M. Hale, Mr. N. B. Tindale, and Mr. B. J. Maegraith. During the year, Professor E. Harold Davies, Mus.Doc., gave a recital of Records of Aboriginal Songs, taken during the Adelaide University Anthropologi- cal Expedition to Koonibba in August of 1928. 391 Papers.—A paper of great interest to this State was read by Dr. Charles Fenner on the Growth, Distribution and Movement of Population in South Aus- tralia, 1836-1927, Zoological papers bulk large in the Annual Proceedings. These include con- tributions by Th. Mortensen (Copenhagen), Communicated by Professor T, Iarvey Johnston; also by Stanley Hirst; Ilerbert M. Hale; Dr. Mary Rathbun, Communicated by Herbert M. Hale; Professor T. Brailsford Robertson; A. H. S. Lucas, Communicated by Professor Cleland; Edwin Ashby: Professor T. Harvey Johnston and Effie W. Deland; Arthur M. Lea; A. Jefferis Turner; Dudiey Moulton, Communicated by Arthur M. Lea; A. A, Girault, Communicated by Arthur M. Lea; and A. H. Elston. Geological papers were contributed by Sir T. Edgeworth David; Professor W. Howchin, J. O. G. Glastonbury and F. J. Semmens, Communicated by C. T. Madigan; A. R. Alderman; and Ralph W. Segnit. Botanical papers include contributions by J. M. Black; Professor Prescott and C. S. Piper; J. G. Wood; and T. T. Colquhoun, Communicated by J. G. Wood. A physics paper was presented by R. G. Mitton, Communicated by R. 5S. Burden. A paper on Anthropology was presented by C. P. Mountford. The membership of the Society shows a steady increase, the number of Fellows elected during the year being 22. The membership roll at the close of the year is as follows :—Honorary Fellows, 5; Fellows, 159; Associate, 1. Total. 165. During the year the Society has suffered loss by death of two Fellows :— Professor Sir W. Baldwin Spencer, F.R.S. (who was elected an Honorary Fellow in 1926), and Mr. Leslie Napier Birks. Obituary Notices of Professor Sir W. Baldwin Spencer, Sir George Knibbs, and Mr. R. H. Cambage were read by the President. The Council has met on 12 occasions, i.¢., 9 Ordinary: and 3 Special Meet- ings, the attendances being as follows:—Dr. L. Keith Ward, 9; Professor T. Harvey Johnston, 7; Dr. Charles Fenner, 9; Mr. B. S. Roach, 12; Professor Walter Howchin, 12; Professor J. H. Prescott, 5: Mr. J. F. Bailey, 11; Mr. Arthur Lea, 10; Sir Joseph Verco, 0; Mr. J. M. Black, 11; Dr. T. D. Campbell, 9; Dr. Robert Pulleine, 7; Mr. Ralph W. Segnit, 5. The absence of the President from three meetings was due to his election as a member of the Coal Commission, which necessitated his absence trom the State; Dr. Campbell was in the Interior of Australia during the August meeting, and Professor T, Harvey Johnston from two mectings, due to his absence from the State in connection with the Antarctic Expedition. Sir Joseph Verco was prevented from attendance for health reasons. Mr. Ralph W. Segnit was elected Acting Honorary Secretary in June, 1929, L. KerrH Warn, President. Raten W. Seanrr, Acting Hon. Sec. OBITUARY NOTICE. SIR WALTER BALDWIN SPENCER. Sir Walter Baldwin Spencer, an Honorary Fellow of this Society, died suddenly in July, 1929, while engaged in anthropological researches in South America. leaving the biological school of Oxford in 1887, he occupied the Chair of Biology in the University of Melbourne until his retirement in 1920, Sir 0 392 Baldwin made many contributions to our knowledge of the fauna of the Austra- lasian region, the most notable being his study of the pineal eye in Lacertilia. He held the post of Zoologist in the Horn Expedition to Central Australia in 1894, and wrote the reports on the Mammalia, Amphibia, and Crustacea, as well as the Narrative of the Expedition. In the course of this journey of scientific exploration Sir Baldwin met F. J. Gillen, with whom he collaborated in a great series of studies dealing with the culture of the Australian aborigines. The basal value of this work to the science of anthropology has been recognised throughout the world. Sir Baldwin Spencer acted also, during the early stages of the administration of the Northern Territory by the Commonwealth Government, as Special Com- missioner and Chief Protector of the aborigines. Many honours were conferred upon him in recognition of his distinguished services to science. He was a Fellow of the Royal Society; an Honorary Fellow of Exeter and Lincoln Colleges in Oxford; a Corresponding Member of the 7.00~ logical Society of London; and an Honorary Fellow of the Anthropological Insti- tutes of Great Britain, Italy, and Washington. Sir Baldwin took a leading part in the scientific life of his adopted country and held, imler alia, the offices of President of the Royal Society of Victoria and President of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science. This Society was honoured by the enrolment of his name among its Honorary Fellows, and will not cease to mourn the death of so distinguished an investigator. who made many original contributions to science and who left a record of his observations that is notable for its literary and artistic grace. L. K. W. 393 ‘oinseory, WOH ‘HOVOY 'S “gq ‘6261 ‘£ J9qG01I9O ‘aprejapy ‘dVaadLIHM GUVMOH UVIW'V “STV'V ‘AMNANOLSV1D ‘O *y21109 punoy pue poypny ‘siojipny f{ ‘uO II ZI OseT# £ OL SZ vy £1 99 EN DTOTND Ww Cl oO 8 81 86 Bisepeljsny jo yueg BYyesjsny YINOS jo yueg sBuraeg — 6261 ‘OE Iequiaidag ‘aourjeg ey JUNOIDY Yueg II ZI ose'IF “ Tepayl 999A ydasof ag 6 8 60 ‘sireday W4t9.Ue'T & £ SST puny JusWMOpUA Wosy patoismes TL i doueInsuy So tT po ” qunessy yueg ssuraes ALUONEIS pue osejsog ‘suru —satazuyT Suyysry pue Burueayy 0 OZ suonenasnyy] PIX JOf jusuAeg “ —saupung “ 0 ¢ Z£ aa ks suoHnesyqng jo afeg “ 9 6 Ff _ “" Sat}eIN0G Jsyqjo Aq woOoY joasn * PlBOd 300. WSL 9 OT £0¢ SUIpUIgyoog 0 0 OST SUONVSIISIAUT UCLIBIqIy PY NUIIOS Poe syioday sunulig 104 —, — A DF isis U _ Trans. and Proc. Roy Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Vol. LIIL, Plate II. a ACNE = | ee a | 1 — | | | . | | | : | A ie 4 . . Z Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers. , Plate Lik. Vol. LUL 1929. ” Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr ‘azIs [Binjeu Wey “CUSLIPL) StUDpMHada snyyuDIDNY J 2 3Iy ‘azis Jeanjeu Jey “Cywmey) sypisaduts snygunaDy cy ‘o. Limited, Printers. Gillingkam & C Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Fig. 1 — Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Vol. LIIL., Plate V. Percnon planissimum, males (x 13). Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Vol. LIII., Plate VI. Photo., W. Howchin. Fig. 1. The River Murray at Loxton in partial flood. Photo., W. Howchin. Fig. a. The River Murray at the most southerly portion of the Great Pyap Bend. Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Vol. LIL, Plate VII | Photo., W. Howchin. Fig. 1. The River Murray below Loxton, showing the fossiliferous rock on the left bank. Photo., W. Howchin. Fig. Ze Silicified River Murray deposits, one mile above Loxton. Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers. Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Vol. LUI, Plate VIII. Photo., W. Howchin. Pumping Station, Loxton, on shelf excavated in river bank. The light-coloured bed near the top is a fossiliferous fresh-water limestone. Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Fig. 1. ee Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers. > 4 Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Vol. LIIL, Plate X. A unique example of Aboriginal Rock Carving at Panaramitee North. Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers. » Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1929. Vol. LIIL., Plate oe Carcinothrips leat. Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers. Exel &: Le CONTENTS. Davin, Pror. Sir T. W. E.: Further Notes on the Newly-Discovered Fossils in the Adelaide Series (Lipalian or Proterozoic), South Australia. Plate i. .. Ms ee 1 Carman, F.: Some Fossil Remains from the Adelaide Series of ‘South Australia. ; Plate. ii. af a on ay, ze ce af 35 Se = = ee Prescott, Pror. J. A.: The Vegetation Map of South Australia ¥ se ei 7: Sreenit, R. W.: Geological Notes from the Hundred of Adams, Flinders Ranges .. Peas) MortENsEN, T.; The Australian Species of Cidarids, particularly of the Genus .Phylla- canthus, and their Distribution along the Coasts of Australia. (Communicated by Prof. T. Harvey Johnston). Plate ii. .. es a3 at SS Se ve ye ko Hixst, $.: On the Larval Trombidiid Mite (Trombicula hirsti L. Sambon) that causes the “Serub Itch” of Northern Queensland and the Coorong, South Australia ia ea seh Howcatn, Pror. W.: On the Probable Occurrence of the Sturtian Tillite near Nairne and Mount Barker Bs me ae ne i Zz So we a me! ada 2 Hate, H. M.: Crustacea from Princess Charlotte Bay, North Queensland. The Isopoda and Stomatopoda .. oe Se < i ae s ae te = mA Rarnpun, M. J.: A New Xanthid Crab from South Australia. (Communicated by H, M. Hale.) Plate iv... -. = a ss a =a cP es sey | Ropertson, Pror, T. Brarsrorp: Variations of Hydrogen Ion Concentration in the Neighbourhood of the Estuary of sthe River Murray ae fc ha ei er: POD Lucas. A. H. S.: A Census of the Marine Algae of South Australia. (Communicated by Prof. J. B. Cleland) es a cee a e nes ng Beaceene. ) Notes on THE Fauna or Dirk Hartoe Istanp, WESTERN AUSTRALIA :— No. 1. Introduction, by E. Ashby eseasae 54 No. 2, Aves, by E. Ashby mee 56 No. 3. Polyplacophora, by E. Ashby .. Se a 61 No. 4. Crustacea, by H. M. Hale. Plate v. .. es so ee = Or Jounston, Pror. T. Harvey: Remarks on the Synonymy of certain T ristomatid Trema- tode Genera .. ae =e 2 a. = ae = es a = Sees Fenner, Dr. C.: A Geographical Enquiry into the Growth, Distribution, and Movement of Population in South Australia, 1836-1927 Se a ne s oy ah cee Tounston, Pror. T. Harvey, and E. W. Deranp: Australian Acanthocephala, No. 1 146 Jounston, Prov. T. Harvey, and E. W. Devann: Australian Acanthocephala, No. eo ec AB: Howcutn, Pror. W.: Notes on the Geology of the Great Pyap Bend (Loxton), River Murray Basin and Remarks on the Geological History of the River Murray. Plates vi. to vill... a eo - J = ee ee 4 sa neha cy Prescort, Pror. J. A., and C. S. Pirer: The Volcanic Soil of Mount Gambier, South : Australia, Plate ix. Pr ec = 4 Be: Ks us a bes Baa |e: Lea, A. M.: Notes on some Miscellaneous Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Species. Parte os 5 “ee a oe Be nA us ec Era Mountrorp, C. P.; A Unique Example of Aboriginal Rock Carving at Panaramitee Worth. Plate x2. c-. a 5 Ss = = a es es he .. 245 ArperMAN, A. R.: Magmatic Differentiation at Mannum, South Australia .. a .. 249 Grastonspury, J. O., and F. J. Semmens: The Crystal Forms of Pyromorphite and Stolzite. (Communicated by C. T. Madigan) ee Pu uy i a Ree: ‘Brack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia. No. 27 .. Bar cee va ek Mouton, D.: An Interesting New Thrips from Australia. (Communicated by A. M. Tea.)-> Plate sd. 3 ne ae aS ea 3 oe ra eh sics O va 204 Mirron, R. G.: The Spreading Tendency of Solutions of Various Acids and Salts upon a Clean Mercury Surface. (Communicated by R. S. Burdon) .. zs sey a aGr- Turner, Dr. A. J.: New Australian Lepidoptera .. oe = = ao ros ee DOF Grrautt, A. A.: Notes on, and Descriptions of, Chalcid Wasps in the South Australian Museum. (Communicated by A. M. Lea) im ae ob A a 309 Exston, A H,: Australian Coleoptera. art We oy oa es ge ae we 347 CotguHoun, T. T.: Polarity in Casuarina paludosa. (Communicated by J. G. Wood) .. 353 Woop, J. G.: Floristics and Ecology of the Mallee ie ah a Aa <» 359 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ae Ps < 379 Sime JosepH Verco MEDAL 381 ANNUAL REPORT . es AF a 390 Onrruary NOTICE .. as Ee ES ASE et NERS 391 BALANCE SHEETS Se so as a 393 ENDOWMENT AND SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH FUND 395 DonaTIONS TO LIBRARY a 396 List oF FELLOWS 3 mn a = As Re me ee Fe .. 402 SUGGESTIONS FOR THE GUIDANCE oF AUTHORS - Be a a eZ es 405, 406 ApPENDIX— Field Naturalists’ Section: Annual Report, etc. 407 Shell Collectors’ Committee ie) zy Bs 409 Microscope Committee Ae 409 INDEX ar As 411